IFU R11-All

All
English
Release 11.0
Ingenia Ambition
Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 15
Publication Details.......................................................................................................................................... 15
About these Instructions for Use.................................................................................................................... 15
Other Instructions........................................................................................................................................... 19
About the system............................................................................................................................................ 21
Indications for Use.......................................................................................................................................... 25
Compatibility................................................................................................................................................... 28
Compliance..................................................................................................................................................... 30
Training........................................................................................................................................................... 31
........................................................................................................................................................... 32
Installation, Maintenance and Repair............................................................................................................. 32
Equipment classification................................................................................................................................. 33
Security and Privacy features implemented................................................................................................... 35
Other Security and Privacy features addressed................................................................................. 37
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Network firewall configuration......................................................................................................... 38
2 Safety..................................................................................................................................................... 39
Safety before scanning................................................................................................................................... 39
Prescreening...................................................................................................................................... 40
Contraindications.............................................................................................................................. 41
MR implant labeling........................................................................................................................... 42
MR Conditional implants................................................................................................................... 45
Risk factors for MRI-related adverse events...................................................................................... 48
Clothing and other removable risk factors........................................................................................ 52
Controlled Access Area...................................................................................................................... 53
Operating modes............................................................................................................................... 63
Patient observation and medical supervision................................................................................... 64
Emergency procedures...................................................................................................................... 65
Safety during scanning.................................................................................................................................... 76
Exposure to EMF................................................................................................................................ 76
Coil and cable positioning................................................................................................................ 102
Tabletop movement........................................................................................................................ 108
Laser radiation safety (Light visor)................................................................................................... 118
High Bore Temperature................................................................................................................... 121
Other MRI safety........................................................................................................................................... 123
Patient support and tabletop.......................................................................................................... 123
Communication: nurse call & intercom........................................................................................... 128
Image quality................................................................................................................................... 129
Imaging Techniques......................................................................................................................... 130
Auxiliary Medical equipment........................................................................................................... 132
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 3
Table of contents
Mobile telephones & similar products............................................................................................ 138

Safety with Helium.......................................................................................................................... 139
Safety............................................................................................................................................... 144
Electrical safety................................................................................................................................ 145
Liquids in phantoms......................................................................................................................... 147
Liquid in Gradient System................................................................................................................ 154
Network safety, security and privacy.............................................................................................. 155
Q-Flow............................................................................................................................................. 157
Alarms Overview........................................................................................................................................... 157
Important Messages and Indications............................................................................................................ 158
Symbols on System, Coils and Accessories................................................................................................... 192
Accessories list.............................................................................................................................................. 201
3 Your MRI System.................................................................................................................................. 203

System Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 203
MR Scanner...................................................................................................................................... 204
Panels.............................................................................................................................................. 210
Sockets on the Tabletop.................................................................................................................. 253
Patient Observation System............................................................................................................ 256
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Devices and controls essential for system safety............................................................................ 256
Coils and Coil Solutions................................................................................................................................. 257
General coil safety........................................................................................................................... 258
About Coils....................................................................................................................................... 261
About Coil Solutions........................................................................................................................ 263
Available Coils and Coil Solutions.................................................................................................... 266
SmartExam and Coils....................................................................................................................... 332
Coils and Coil Combinations......................................................................................................................... 334
General coil safety........................................................................................................................... 335
About Coils....................................................................................................................................... 337
Available coils per anatomic region................................................................................................. 338
Coil Choice....................................................................................................................................... 340
SmartExam and Coils....................................................................................................................... 347
Coil combinations............................................................................................................................ 348
Positioning Aids............................................................................................................................................. 359
Basic Set........................................................................................................................................... 359
Arm Board........................................................................................................................................ 362
Pediatric Positioning Aids................................................................................................................ 363
MobiFlex Feet Immobilizer.............................................................................................................. 366
Positioning Aids............................................................................................................................................. 366
Basic Set........................................................................................................................................... 367
Pediatric Package............................................................................................................................. 378
Infusion supports............................................................................................................................. 380
Angiography Package...................................................................................................................... 381
FlexTrak........................................................................................................................................... 382
Philips
4 Ingenia Ambition
Table of contents
FlexTilt............................................................................................................................................. 383
Breast Pads...................................................................................................................................... 385
Coil Caddy........................................................................................................................................ 388
Acoustic Hood.................................................................................................................................. 389
Head-and-Arm Support................................................................................................................... 394
Trolleys.......................................................................................................................................................... 396
FlexTrak patient transportation system and trolleys....................................................................... 396
Trolley........................................................................................................................................................... 406
Physiology Equipment .................................................................................................................................. 406
Functional Description..................................................................................................................... 407
Safety............................................................................................................................................... 408
Components Overview.................................................................................................................... 408
Respiratory Belt............................................................................................................................... 411
VitalEye............................................................................................................................................ 412
Peripheral Pulse Sensor................................................................................................................... 413
VCG (VectorCardioGraphy).............................................................................................................. 415
Operator's console........................................................................................................................................ 421
Introduction to the User Interface.................................................................................................. 421
Navigation Bar................................................................................................................................. 424
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Patient Directory............................................................................................................................. 431

Patient Dashboard........................................................................................................................... 437
Patient Tasks Bar............................................................................................................................. 442
Exam Overview................................................................................................................................ 442
Exam Dashboard.............................................................................................................................. 454
ExamCards....................................................................................................................................... 467
SmartExam....................................................................................................................................... 472
Settings and Tools ........................................................................................................................... 477
Operator-Patient Intercom.............................................................................................................. 505
Monitor and Keyboard.................................................................................................................... 507
4 Preparing the Examination.................................................................................................................... 509

Preparing the Tabletop................................................................................................................................. 509
Preparation of the tabletop............................................................................................................. 509
Using the trolley.............................................................................................................................. 510
Preparing the Tabletop................................................................................................................................. 515
Preparation of the tabletop............................................................................................................. 516
Patient Positioning and Setup of Coils.......................................................................................................... 517
About Positioning in general........................................................................................................... 517
Q-Head coil...................................................................................................................................... 522
SENSE Head coil 6 and 8.................................................................................................................. 524
SENSE Head coil 32.......................................................................................................................... 526
SENSE Head/Neck coil..................................................................................................................... 529
T/R Head coil................................................................................................................................... 532
H Head coil....................................................................................................................................... 535
TMJ coil / Coil Holder....................................................................................................................... 537
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 5
Table of contents
SENSE NeuroVascular coil 8 and 16................................................................................................. 540

SENSE Head/Spine coil combination............................................................................................... 545
SENSE Pediatric Head Spine coil...................................................................................................... 546
SENSE Spine coil 15.......................................................................................................................... 547
SENSE Spine coil 1.5T....................................................................................................................... 549
SENSE Spine coil 3.0T....................................................................................................................... 553
Synergy Pediatric coil....................................................................................................................... 557
Q-Body coil...................................................................................................................................... 560
SENSE Cardiac coil 1.5T.................................................................................................................... 567
SENSE Cardiac coil 3.0T.................................................................................................................... 569
SENSE Torso/Cardiac coil................................................................................................................. 571
SENSE Breast coil 4.......................................................................................................................... 574
SENSE Breast coil 7 (incl. biopsy)..................................................................................................... 576
MammoTrak.................................................................................................................................... 581
SENSE Breast 3.0T X/TX 7................................................................................................................ 603
SENSE Body coil .............................................................................................................................. 604
SENSE XL Torso coil 16 .................................................................................................................... 610
SENSE XL Torso 2.0 1.5T/3.0T.......................................................................................................... 614
SENSE Torso coil 3.0T ...................................................................................................................... 617
Endo coil with disposable probe...................................................................................................... 619
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac coil .................................................................................................. 627
SENSE Shoulder coil 8 ..................................................................................................................... 628
SENSE Shoulder coil 4 ..................................................................................................................... 631
SENSE Wrist coil 4 ........................................................................................................................... 632
SENSE Wrist coil 8 ........................................................................................................................... 635
Hand/Wrist coil 4 ............................................................................................................................ 638
SENSE Small Extremity coil 8 .......................................................................................................... 642
Knee/Foot coil ................................................................................................................................. 644
Knee/Foot coil 4 (FootAnkleKnee) .................................................................................................. 646
SENSE Knee coil 16 1.5T .................................................................................................................. 651
SENSE T/R Knee coil 16 3.0T ........................................................................................................... 654
SENSE Knee coil 8 ............................................................................................................................ 658
SENSE Foot-Ankle coil ..................................................................................................................... 660
SENSE PeriphVascular coil .............................................................................................................. 663
SENSE GP Flex L 8 coil ..................................................................................................................... 666
Microscopy coils ............................................................................................................................. 668
SENSE Flex coils ............................................................................................................................... 670
Circular coils C1, C3, C4................................................................................................................... 678
Phosphorous coil (P-140/P-140-Flex).............................................................................................. 681
Patient Positioning and Setup of Coils.......................................................................................................... 683
About Positioning in general........................................................................................................... 683
Positioning for Head, Head/Neck and Spine Examinations............................................................. 699
Positioning for Head Examinations with the dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil.............................................. 705
Positioning for Head Examinations with the T/R Head coil............................................................. 709
Positioning for Body Examinations.................................................................................................. 710
Positioning for Whole Body and MobiFlex Examinations................................................................ 713
Philips
6 Ingenia Ambition
Table of contents
Positioning with the dS Endo coil solution...................................................................................... 715

Positioning for Breast Examinations................................................................................................ 723
Positioning for Shoulder Examinations............................................................................................ 746
Positioning for Hand and Wrist Examinations................................................................................. 755
Positioning for Knee Examinations.................................................................................................. 771
Positioning for Foot and Ankle Examinations.................................................................................. 774
Positioning with the dS SmallExtremity 8ch coil.............................................................................. 782
Positioning with the dS SmallExtremity 16ch coil ........................................................................... 789
Positioning with the dS Flex coil solutions....................................................................................... 800
Positioning for examinations with the TMJ coil holder................................................................... 801
Positioning for Pediatric Examinations............................................................................................ 803
Positioning with the dS Microscopy coils........................................................................................ 807
Positioning with the Phosphorous P-140 Coil.................................................................................. 809
Applying Physiology Sensors......................................................................................................................... 812
Positioning of the Respiratory Belt.................................................................................................. 812
Detecting respiratory motion with the VitalEye.............................................................................. 813
Positioning of the Peripheral Pulse sensor...................................................................................... 815
Connecting VCG to the patient........................................................................................................ 819
Placing the VCG battery module...................................................................................................... 824
Adjusting the Display of the Physiology Signals............................................................................... 825
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Checking Connectivity and Battery Level........................................................................................ 827

Calibrating the VCG signal manually................................................................................................ 828
Travelling to scan-plane................................................................................................................................ 830
Moving patient to isocenter............................................................................................................ 831
Travelling to scan-plane ............................................................................................................................... 833
Moving patient to isocenter............................................................................................................ 833
Patient Registration...................................................................................................................................... 836
Entering New Patient Data Manually.............................................................................................. 837
Using Patient Data from RIS............................................................................................................ 839
Entering Asian Patient Names......................................................................................................... 839
Adapting patient comfort settings................................................................................................................ 842
Adjusting Ventilation in Bore........................................................................................................... 842
Setting AutoVoice on Examination Level......................................................................................... 844
ExamCard Selection...................................................................................................................................... 847
Selecting an ExamCard.................................................................................................................... 847
Selecting Multiple Scan Protocols................................................................................................... 849
Adapting the Exam Setup.............................................................................................................................. 849
Functional Description of the Exam Setup...................................................................................... 849
Listed ExamCard Properties............................................................................................................. 850
Graphical ExamCard Properties....................................................................................................... 854
Adjusting the ExamCard Properties................................................................................................. 856
5 Performing the Examination................................................................................................................. 859

Starting, Running and Stopping.................................................................................................................... 859
Philips
Starting and Running the Examination............................................................................................ 859
Ingenia Ambition 7
Table of contents
Discontinuing an Examination......................................................................................................... 860

Stopping reconstruction.................................................................................................................. 860
Repeating Prescans of the Current ExamCard................................................................................. 861
Preparation Phases....................................................................................................................................... 862
B0 Shimming.................................................................................................................................... 862
Raw Data Acquisition and Delayed Reconstruction...................................................................................... 866
Delayed Reconstruction................................................................................................................... 866
Performing Delayed Reconstruction of Raw Data........................................................................... 866
Display of Physiology Signals and Scan Preview........................................................................................... 867
Changing the Display of Scan Preview............................................................................................. 867
Adjusting the Display of the Physiology Signals............................................................................... 868
Showing Information and Postprocessing Steps........................................................................................... 870
Showing the Postprocessing Steps of the Current ExamCard......................................................... 870
Displaying the Information for a Scan Item or ExamCard............................................................... 870
Customizing the Examination....................................................................................................................... 870
Changing Scan Items during Scanning............................................................................................. 870
Managing Geometry of Scan Items................................................................................................. 872
Scan Pause and Contrast Agent....................................................................................................... 876
Grouping and Splitting..................................................................................................................... 882
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Saving the Current ExamCard.......................................................................................................... 883
Working with SmartExam ............................................................................................................... 883
Quick Surveys.................................................................................................................................. 892
6 Planning the Examination..................................................................................................................... 897

Plan Tab........................................................................................................................................................ 897
Plan Toolbar.................................................................................................................................................. 897
Geometry......................................................................................................................................... 898
Display of the Imaging Volume........................................................................................................ 899
Advanced Planning.......................................................................................................................... 899
Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan, Window, ......................................................................... 900
Measurements and Annotations..................................................................................................... 901
Image Information........................................................................................................................... 904
Image View Settings........................................................................................................................ 905
Viewports in Plan tab.................................................................................................................................... 905
Viewports in Planning...................................................................................................................... 906
Context Menu in Planning............................................................................................................... 906
Stacks and Other Graphical Objects in PlanScan............................................................................. 907
Scan Dashboard............................................................................................................................................ 909
Routine Procedures...................................................................................................................................... 911
Managing Geometries..................................................................................................................... 911
Graphical Planning........................................................................................................................... 912
Changing the Display of the Stack................................................................................................... 914
Philips
8 Ingenia Ambition
Table of contents
Copying Geometry Parameters from an Image to the Stack........................................................... 915

Planning Orthogonal to the Selected Slice...................................................................................... 916
Planning a Stack or Volume with Current Offcenter Values............................................................ 916
Defining an Irregular Plane with 3-Point Planning........................................................................... 916
Aligning Scans with ScanAlign.......................................................................................................... 917
Planning on Movies......................................................................................................................... 917
Advanced Parameters................................................................................................................................... 918
Parameter Groups........................................................................................................................... 919
Scan Information Page..................................................................................................................... 919
Editing Advanced Parameters......................................................................................................... 921
Parameter benefits and trade-offs.................................................................................................. 923
7 Reviewing Images................................................................................................................................. 925

Review Tab.................................................................................................................................................... 925
Opening an Imaging Series in the Review Tab.............................................................................................. 925
Review Toolbar............................................................................................................................................. 926
Layout.............................................................................................................................................. 928
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan, Window, ......................................................................... 928

Measurements and Annotations..................................................................................................... 929
Connecting Viewports and Comparing Imaging Series.................................................................... 933
Image Information........................................................................................................................... 934
Other Ways of Reviewing Imaging Series........................................................................................ 935
Refresh Display................................................................................................................................ 935
Print and Capture Images................................................................................................................ 936
Orientation...................................................................................................................................... 936
Hide Planes...................................................................................................................................... 937
Viewports in Review Tab............................................................................................................................... 937
Viewports in Reviewing................................................................................................................... 937
Render Modes Overview................................................................................................................. 939
Context Menu in Reviewing............................................................................................................. 940
Routine Procedures...................................................................................................................................... 941
Setting up the Review Screen.......................................................................................................... 941
Navigating through Images.............................................................................................................. 944
Changing the Display of Images....................................................................................................... 946
Measuring with Lines....................................................................................................................... 953
Measuring with ROIs....................................................................................................................... 959
Annotating Images........................................................................................................................... 966
Extracting Values from Images........................................................................................................ 968
Editing Graphical Objects................................................................................................................ 970
Relations between Imaging Series................................................................................................... 973
Print and Secondary Capture........................................................................................................... 974
Movies............................................................................................................................................. 976
Image View Settings...................................................................................................................................... 977
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 9
Table of contents
Image Sorting in the Tile Layout...................................................................................................... 978

Specifying scrolling direction........................................................................................................... 978
Time Intensity Diagram (TID)........................................................................................................................ 979
Calculating a Time Intensity Diagram (TID)..................................................................................... 979
MPR and MIP Render Modes........................................................................................................................ 980
User Interface.................................................................................................................................. 982
Routine Procedures......................................................................................................................... 987
OrthoView..................................................................................................................................................... 993
Routine Procedures......................................................................................................................... 994
MobiView...................................................................................................................................................... 996
Safety............................................................................................................................................... 997
User Interface.................................................................................................................................. 998
Routine Procedures....................................................................................................................... 1000
PicturePlus.................................................................................................................................................. 1002
Functional Description................................................................................................................... 1002
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

QFlow Analysis............................................................................................................................................ 1003
User Interface................................................................................................................................ 1004
Results........................................................................................................................................... 1009
8 Finalizing the Examination.................................................................................................................. 1013

Analyzing Images........................................................................................................................................ 1013
Analysis Tab................................................................................................................................... 1013
Opening an Imaging Series in the Analysis Tab............................................................................. 1013
General information...................................................................................................................... 1014
MR T1 Perfusion............................................................................................................................ 1021
MR T2* Neuro Perfusion............................................................................................................... 1035
MR Permeability............................................................................................................................ 1060
MR Diffusion.................................................................................................................................. 1079
MR FiberTrak................................................................................................................................. 1089
MR IViewBOLD............................................................................................................................... 1105
MR SpectroView............................................................................................................................ 1117
MR Cartilage Assessment.............................................................................................................. 1128
MR Subtraction.............................................................................................................................. 1142
MR Echo Accumulation.................................................................................................................. 1147
Advanced Diffusion Analysis (ADA)............................................................................................... 1150
Printing........................................................................................................................................................ 1162
Print Tab........................................................................................................................................ 1162
Philips
Opening an Imaging Series in the Print Tab................................................................................... 1163
10 Ingenia Ambition
Table of contents
Print Preview................................................................................................................................. 1163

Print Toolbar.................................................................................................................................. 1164
Protocol Panel............................................................................................................................... 1171
Administration............................................................................................................................................ 1195
Ways of Exporting and Archiving................................................................................................... 1196
DICOM Export: Series Split Functionality....................................................................................... 1197
More about Storage Destinations................................................................................................. 1198
DICOM Configuration.................................................................................................................... 1205
9 Advanced Operation........................................................................................................................... 1211

MR Angiography......................................................................................................................................... 1211
Functional Description MRA.......................................................................................................... 1211
MRA Techniques............................................................................................................................ 1211
Diffusion Imaging........................................................................................................................................ 1232
Scanning DWI and DTI sequences.................................................................................................. 1235
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Perfusion Imaging....................................................................................................................................... 1236

Basic T1 Perfusion.......................................................................................................................... 1236
Neuro T2* Perfusion...................................................................................................................... 1237
Arterial Spin Labeling (ASL)............................................................................................................ 1239
Planning and running Single-Phase ASL using pCASL..................................................................... 1242
Planning and running Multi-Phase ASL using STAR....................................................................... 1244
Cardiac Imaging.......................................................................................................................................... 1245
Planning the Cardiac Views........................................................................................................... 1246
Cardiac Function ........................................................................................................................... 1252
Myocardial Perfusion (Temporal Enhancement)........................................................................... 1255
Late Enhancement (Spatial Enhancement).................................................................................... 1258
T1 Mapping.................................................................................................................................... 1261
Coronary Angiography................................................................................................................... 1265
SENC (Strain Encoding).................................................................................................................. 1271
Functional Description................................................................................................................................ 1279
MR Spectroscopy........................................................................................................................................ 1281
Proton MR Spectroscopy: Clinical Applications............................................................................. 1281
MEGA............................................................................................................................................. 1313
MR Elastography (MRE).............................................................................................................................. 1315
Imaging Techniques.................................................................................................................................... 1316
SyntAc or Multi-Dynamic Multi-Echo (MDME).............................................................................. 1316
3D APT........................................................................................................................................... 1319
Compressed SENSE........................................................................................................................ 1325
Zoom Imaging................................................................................................................................ 1336
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 11
Table of contents
Black Blood Imaging....................................................................................................................... 1338

3D NerveVIEW............................................................................................................................... 1339
MultiBand SENSE........................................................................................................................... 1340
4D-TRAK XD................................................................................................................................... 1343
3D VANE XD................................................................................................................................... 1346
4D FreeBreathing........................................................................................................................... 1348
MultiTransmit................................................................................................................................ 1352
O-MAR (Orthopedic Metal Artifact Reduction)............................................................................. 1357
Spiral Brain..................................................................................................................................... 1363
bFFE XD.......................................................................................................................................... 1364
3D non-selective FFE and TFE........................................................................................................ 1364
10 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................. 1367
Artifacts....................................................................................................................................................... 1367
Artifacts on High Field Strengths................................................................................................... 1367
Motion Artifacts............................................................................................................................ 1368
Chemical Shift Artifacts................................................................................................................. 1372
Aliasing Artifacts............................................................................................................................ 1374
SENSE Artifacts.............................................................................................................................. 1378
Compressed SENSE Artifacts......................................................................................................... 1380
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

MRA Inflow artifacts...................................................................................................................... 1386
MR Spectroscopy Artifacts............................................................................................................ 1387
Metal Artifacts............................................................................................................................... 1393
Signal Cancellation (Suboptimal Planning).................................................................................... 1394
Fat-related artifacts....................................................................................................................... 1395
Ringing (Gibbs) artifacts................................................................................................................ 1399
VCG Calibration........................................................................................................................................... 1400
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................ 1400
Philips Communication Toolbox................................................................................................................. 1406
Starting PCT and signing in to Skype.............................................................................................. 1407
Share your desktop and give remote control................................................................................ 1408
Remote Desktop......................................................................................................................................... 1409
Workflow....................................................................................................................................... 1411
Error procedures......................................................................................................................................... 1413
Scan not possible........................................................................................................................... 1414
Computer malfunction.................................................................................................................. 1414
Defective hardware....................................................................................................................... 1421
Malware detection........................................................................................................................ 1422
Start up and switch off................................................................................................................................ 1423
System start up.............................................................................................................................. 1423
Computer start up and shut down................................................................................................ 1424
Exit application software............................................................................................................... 1432
Setting system power on and off................................................................................................... 1433
Setting system power on and off................................................................................................... 1436
Philips
12 Ingenia Ambition
Table of contents
EasySwitch..................................................................................................................................... 1439
Philips Software Update installation........................................................................................................... 1459
Notification and Installation.......................................................................................................... 1460
Notification without permission to install..................................................................................... 1464
11 Maintenance and Quality assurance................................................................................................... 1467

Planned maintenance................................................................................................................................. 1467
Routine user checks program..................................................................................................................... 1467
Weekly magnet check.................................................................................................................... 1468
Topping up liquid helium............................................................................................................... 1470
Anti-virus updates......................................................................................................................... 1470
Periodic Image Quality Test (PIQT)................................................................................................ 1471
Quality Assurance (QA) Tool for (BOLD) Stability.......................................................................... 1473
ACR Accreditation.......................................................................................................................... 1478
Cleaning and Disinfection........................................................................................................................... 1492
Cleaning agents and disinfectants................................................................................................. 1493
General cleaning instructions........................................................................................................ 1496
Components, procedures and frequency...................................................................................... 1497
Cleaning and disinfecting: regular procedure................................................................................ 1501
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Cleaning and disinfecting: other procedures................................................................................. 1503

Cleaning: fabric and foam procedure............................................................................................ 1506
12 Product Disposal................................................................................................................................. 1507

Final disposal............................................................................................................................................... 1507
Passing the product on to another user..................................................................................................... 1508
China RoHS declaration table..................................................................................................................... 1509
Toxic or hazardous substances and elements............................................................................................ 1509
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 13
Table of contents
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips
14 Ingenia Ambition
Publication Details Introduction
1 Introduction
Affix: IFU only! Added now: Security and Privacy Features ID: 9007314552494987
Last Content Modificator: Status: NotReleased
1.1 Publication Details

Last Content Modificator: Drunen, Jenneke van ID: 27021648073418507
Status: Released
Node title (original): 66484 SYS.Label.IFU.Publication ID: 18014461089838091

Status: Released
Published by Philips Medical Systems Nederland B.V.

Philips Medical Systems Nederland B.V. reserves the right to make changes to both these
Instructions for Use and to the product they describe. Product specifications are subject to
change without notice. Nothing contained within these Instructions for Use is intended as any
offer, warranty, promise or contractual condition, and must not be taken as such.
Unauthorized copying of this publication may infringe copyright and reduced the ability of
Philips to provide accurate and up-to-date information to users.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 66484 SYS.Label.IFU.Publication
1.2 About these Instructions for Use

Last Content Modificator: Geenen, Hubert ID: 90072038393949451
Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 81738 SYS.Label.IFU.Tradenames ID: 27021714763751563

Status: NotReleased
This document is applicable to the following systems:

Node title (original): _Ambition - non china ID: 9007323671035403
Status: NotReleased
• Ingenia Ambition S
• Ingenia Ambition X
End fragment title: _Ambition - non china
Node title (original): _Elition - non china ID: 130464537483

Status: NotReleased
• Ingenia Elition S
• Ingenia Elition X
End fragment title: _Elition - non china
Node title (original): MR5300 ID: 9007323671032331

Status: NotReleased
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 15
Introduction About these Instructions for Use
• MR 5300
End fragment title: MR5300

Status: NotReleased
• MR 7700
• Ingenia 3.0T with upgrade package SmartPath to MR 7700
• Ingenia Elition with upgrade package SmartPath to MR 7700
Node title (original): Ambition Elition - non china ID: 130464539019

Status: NotReleased
• Ingenia Ambition S / Ingenia Ambition X

• Ingenia Elition S / Ingenia Elition X
• Ingenia 3.0T with upgrade package SmartPath to Ingenia Elition X
End fragment title: Ambition Elition - non china
Node title (original): Ambition - china ID: 9007323671036939

Status: NotReleased
• Ingenia Ambition X
End fragment title: Ambition - china
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): Elition - china ID: 9007323671038475
Status: NotReleased
• Ingenia Elition S and X

End fragment title: Elition - china
Node title (original): Ingenia/s/evolution ID: 9007323671040011

Status: NotReleased
• Ingenia 1.5T
• Ingenia 1.5T S
• Ingenia 3.0T
• Ingenia 1.5T with upgrade package Evolution Upgrade 1.5T
• Ingenia 3.0T with upgrade package Evolution Upgrade 3.0T
Ingenia 1.5T is available in two configurations:
• With yellow magnet covers ('classic design')
• With white magnet covers and blue mattresses ('white-blue design'), including VitalScreen
and VitalEye options.
End fragment title: Ingenia/s/evolution
Node title (original): Ingenia CX ID: 9007323671041547

Status: NotReleased
• Ingenia 1.5T CX
• Ingenia 3.0T CX
• Achieva 1.5T with upgrade package SmartPath to Achieva dStream
Philips
16 Ingenia Ambition
About these Instructions for Use Introduction
• Achieva 3.0T with upgrade package SmartPath to Achieva dStream

End fragment title: Ingenia CX
Node title (original): Achieva ID: 9007323671055883

Status: NotReleased
• Achieva 1.5T
• Achieva 3.0T
• Intera 1.5T upgrade
• Intera 3.0T upgrade
End fragment title: Achieva
All information in this document applies to the above-mentioned systems, unless explicitly
stated otherwise.
End fragment title: 81738 SYS.Label.IFU.Tradenames
Node title (original): Ing, LE, EVO, CX,Ambit/Elit ID: 18014512002201867

Status: Released
Operation
End fragment title: Ing, LE, EVO, CX,Ambit/Elit
Node title (original): 24627 ID: 36028803858990347

SYS.Label.IFU.AcceptableRiskStatement Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
{ Geenen, Hubert, 9/19/2021 6:28:34 PM: replaced broken x-reff with"...described in the safety
chapter")}
These Instructions for Use assist Users and operators in the safe and effective operation of their
Philips MRI system.
The ‘User’ is considered to be the body with authority over the system; ‘operators’ are those
persons who actually handle the system.
Before you operate the system:
• Read, note and strictly observe all danger notices and safety markings on and around the
MRI system.
• Read these Instructions for Use thoroughly. Pay particular attention to all warnings,
cautions and notes. Pay special attention to all the information and procedures described in
the safety chapter.
Safe operation of the MR equipment, as installed and maintained according to Philips’
instructions, requires adherence to all warnings in this IFU. When adhered to, the residual
safety risk of the use of Philips MR equipment is evaluated by the manufacturer to be
acceptable.
End fragment title: 24627 SYS.Label.IFU.AcceptableRiskStatement
Node title (original): 73750 ID: 36028868855785611-1

SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDeviceInstructions Status: Released
Affix: Obsolete
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 17
Introduction About these Instructions for Use
The Instructions for Use of any applied equipment, other than the MR scanner, shall be
considered as integral part of the safety and operational requirements, beyond those described
in the Instruction for Use of the Philips MR system.
End fragment title: 73750 SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDeviceInstructions

SYS.Label.IFU.WarningCautionNotice Status: Released
WARNING
Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a hazard with a low level or risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Used to highlight information that is considered important but that is not hazard related, such
as unusual points or hints for efficiency.
End fragment title: 66487 SYS.Label.IFU.WarningCautionNotice
Node title (original): Intera added for Achieva IFU only v2 ID: 36028887010562571
Status: Released
These Instructions for Use are valid for the Achieva MRI systems and the Intera 1.5T MRI
system.
Throughout the Instructions for Use, all instances of Achieva 1.5T also refer to the Intera 1.5T.
NOTICE
If your system has been upgraded to the current release, your hardware may differ from the
systems described in this manual.
If this is the case, refer to the Instructions for Use originally delivered with your MRI system.
End fragment title: Intera added for Achieva IFU only v2

SYS.Label.IFU.ExtensiveSystemDescription Status: Released
Philips
18 Ingenia Ambition
Other Instructions Introduction
These Instructions for Use, describe the most extensive configuration of the system, including
all options and accessories. Not every function described in the Instructions for Use may be
available on your system.
Contact your Philips representative to discuss available options.
End fragment title: 66488 SYS.Label.IFU.ExtensiveSystemDescription

SYS.Label.IFU.ExtensiveSystemDescription_Japan Status: Released
Affix: Japan Regulatory text
This manual may contain descriptions regarding the features and functionalities that are not
implemented on the current equipment shipped for Japan and/or the product(s) that is/are not
currently sold in Japan due to limitations and restrictions under the applicable local laws and
regulations in Japan. Please contact your local sales representatives and/or Customer Support
for details.
End fragment title: 66628 SYS.Label.IFU.ExtensiveSystemDescription_Japan

SYS.Label.IFU.Accessories.AvailabilityMatrix Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24638
Contact your local Philips representative for an overview of available options, accessories and
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
other supporting materials.

End fragment title: 24638 SYS.Label.IFU.Accessories.AvailabilityMatrix
1.3 Other Instructions

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 24672 SYS.Label.IFU.ReferenceTD ID: 45036003116892427

Status: Released
Technical Description
The Technical Description provides additional data essential for safe operation, and measures
or conditions necessary for installing the MR system. A PDF of the Technical Description is
located in the User Documentation folder on the console. The Technical Description is also
included in the online Help menu.
End fragment title: 24672 SYS.Label.IFU.ReferenceTD
Node title (original): Help system ID: 116034099979

Status: Released
Help system
The Help system contains the Instructions for Use, the Technical Description, and gives basic
and advanced scanning information. The Help system is embedded in the software and can be
accessed on the operator's console or when you press the F1 key.
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 19
Introduction Other Instructions
In some parts of the user interface, e.g. imaging parameters, the Help system is context-
sensitive. This means that the Help shows directly information which is relevant to what you are
currently doing in the application. If context-sensitivity is not available, the home page of the
Help system will open.
End fragment title: Help system

SYS.Label.IFU.AboutFunction.UILocation_v1 Status: Released
About function
A summary of relevant hardware and software information is available in the About function.
To access the About function:
► Click Help icon, then About.
End fragment title: 82800 SYS.Label.IFU.AboutFunction.UILocation_v1
Node title (original): Addendum ID: 116033825675

Status: Released
Addendum
With these Instructions for Use a separate addendum may be available. This addendum
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

contains latest information about your system, which is not included in these Instructions for
Use. It is important to read and familiarize yourself with the content of the addendum, when
available. To access the addendum:
► On the menu bar, click Help, then User Documentation.
► Select Addendum.
⇨ A PDF of the addendum opens.
End fragment title: Addendum
Node title (original): PDF documents ID: 9007249202888715

Status: Released
PDF documents
To access PDF documents of the Instructions for Use, Addendum, Technical Description, DICOM
Conformance statement, and IHE Integration statement, on the menu bar, click Help, then User
Documentation. Links will be provided to the PDF documents in the user interface language.
If you require PDF documents of any of these documents in another language than the user
interface language:
► Press the Windows key.
► Select All programs, then MR Applications, then User Documentation.
► Select the required language.
► Select the required document.
End fragment title: PDF documents
Node title (original): Info text ID: 9007249202890251

Status: Released
Philips
20 Ingenia Ambition
About the system Introduction
Info text for ExamCards and protocols

An editable info text window is available for each scan protocol and ExamCard. See
End fragment title: Info text
Node title (original): MR-RT and MR-OR ID: 36028842864401163

Affix: Ingenia Status: Released
MR-RT and MR-OR systems

When your Philips MRI system is used in combination with the Philips MR-RT oncology
configuration, refer to the MR-RT Instructions for Use for additional information.
When your Philips MRI system is used in combination with the Philips MR-OR solution, refer to
the MR-OR Instructions for Use for additional information.
End fragment title: MR-RT and MR-OR
Node title (original): 24665_IEC Ed3A1 ID: 45036003116776587

OtherAccompanyingDocuments Status: Released
Affix: Obsolete
ISO/IEC: 24665
Additional equipment
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Additional equipment that is used with the MRI system may have their own Instructions for
Use. Always consult the Instructions for Use of the manufacturer of the additional equipment.
Only use MR Safe or MR Conditional equipment near your MRI system (also see chapter
“Auxiliary Medical equipment” on page 132)
End fragment title: 24665_IEC Ed3A1 OtherAccompanyingDocuments
1.4 About the system

Status: Released
General and Principle of operation

Node title (original): Ingenia, Ingenia S, Elition, Ambition ID: 63050440631201291
Status: Released
Your Philips MR system is a digital broadband Magnetic Resonance Imaging system.

End fragment title: Ingenia, Ingenia S, Elition, Ambition
Node title (original): Ingenia CX / Achieva dStream ID: 27021648653973259

Status: Released
Philips Ingenia CX / Achieva dStream systems are digital broadband Magnetic Resonance
Imaging systems.
End fragment title: Ingenia CX / Achieva dStream
Node title (original): Achieva ID: 27021643612380939

Status: Released
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 21
Introduction About the system
Philips Achieva systems are Magnetic Resonance Imaging systems.

Node title (original): Multiva ID: 27021647712641803

Status: Released
Philips Multiva systems are 1.5T Magnetic Resonance Imaging systems.

End fragment title: Multiva
Node title (original): Jaguar Atlantis CFDA ID: 27021658646019083

Affix: obsolete Status: Released
This Instruction for Use is common for Prodiva 1.5T CS and CX products.
Prodiva 1.5T CS has a fixed height table as standard with 145 cm imaging coverage, single dS
Interface to allow up to 24 Ch RF receive and a single configurable (left or right) UIM (User
Interface Module).
Prodiva 1.5T CX has a motorized vertical travel table as standard with 190 cm imaging coverage
(Elite Patient Table), dual dS Interface to allow up to 32 Ch RF receive and a dual sided UIM
(User Interface Module).
Not all listed options and features listed in this Instructions For Use document are available on
Prodiva CS or CX in all markets. Contact your local Philips representative for an overview of
available options, accessories and other supporting materials.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Jaguar Atlantis CFDA
Node title (original): Jaguar Eagle ID: 36028864752655243

Status: Released
This Instruction for Use is common for Prodiva 1.5T CS and CX products.
Prodiva 1.5T CS has a Classic Patient Table with 150 cm imaging coverage and a fixed height.
Motorized vertical travel is optional.
It comes with a single dS Interface to allow up to 24 Ch RF receive and with a dual sided UIM
(User Interface Module).
Prodiva 1.5T CX has an Elite Patient Table with 190 cm imaging coverage and with motorized
vertical travel table.
It comes with dual dS Interface to allow up to 32 Ch RF receive and with a dual sided UIM (User
Interface Module).
Not all listed options and features listed in this Instructions For Use document are available on
Prodiva CS or CX in all markets. Contact your local Philips representative for an overview of
available options, accessories and other supporting materials.
End fragment title: Jaguar Eagle
Node title (original): 66485 SYS.Label.IFU.System ID: 9007261865473931

Status: Released
Philips
22 Ingenia Ambition
About the system Introduction
The operation of Magnetic Resonance Imaging systems is based on the principle that certain
atomic nuclei present in the human body will emit a weak relaxation signal when placed in a
strong magnetic field and excited by a radio signal at the precession frequency.
The emitted relaxation signals are analyzed by the system and a computed image
reconstruction is displayed on a video screen.
End fragment title: 66485 SYS.Label.IFU.System
Node title (original): 75663 SYS.Label.IFU.PatientTargetGroup ID: 9007293621360395

Affix: All syst. Status: Released
{ Geenen, Hubert, 1/21/2020 12:12:05 PM: replaces 77092 (prodiva) as well}

Philips MR systems are designed to create images of the head, body or extremities of any
patient (prenatal to geriatric) referred to an MR study by a trained physician.
Exceptions to admissible patients relate to their physical characteristics (circumference, mass)
in relation to system capabilities (magnet bore size: 60 cm or 70 cm; mechanical strength of the
patient support, allowing 150 kg or 250 kg) and taking into account pre-screening results and
contraindications.
End fragment title: 75663 SYS.Label.IFU.PatientTargetGroup
Node title (original): 77092 SYS.Label.IFU.PatientTargetGroup ID: 9007294039145995

Prodiva Status: Released
Affix: Prodiva (Jaguar) Obsolete
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Philips MR systems are designed to create images of the head, body or extremities of any
patient (prenatal to geriatric) referred to an MR study by a trained physician.
Exceptions to admissible patients relate to their physical characteristics (circumference, mass)
in relation to system capabilities (magnet bore size: 60 cm; mechanical strength of the patient
support, allowing 200 kg) and taking into account pre-screening results and contraindications.
End fragment title: 77092 SYS.Label.IFU.PatientTargetGroup Prodiva
Clinical benefits and undesirable side effects

Node title (original): 75662 SYS.Label.IFU.ClinicalBenefit ID: 94366617867
Status: Released
The following clinical benefit descriptions are representative for all Philips MRI systems and are
included in the associated Risk-Benefit Analysis documents as part of the Risk Management file.
The clinical benefits are:
• Images, spectra, and measurements of physical parameters obtained by an MR scan may,
when interpreted by a trained physician, provide information that may assist patient
diagnosis and therapy planning.
• Image contrasts can be tailored to specific clinical applications required for a specific
patient, to emphasize dedicated types of pathology.
• Images can be obtained in numerous planes without repositioning the patient.
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 23
Introduction About the system
• Patients do not need to be subjected to ionizing radiation in order to obtain an MR scan and
there is no need to administer contrast agent to patients in order to generate tissue-specific
contrasts.
End fragment title: 75662 SYS.Label.IFU.ClinicalBenefit

SYS.Label.IFU.UndesiredSideEffects_v1 Status: Released
The following undesirable side effects are identified:

Undesirable Side Effect Patient MR Operator or other personnel
inside the MR examination room
Peripheral Nerve Stimulation (PNS) X X
Heating X X
Anxiety (due to e.g. claustrophobia) X -
Tinnitus (due to acoustic noise) X X

End fragment title: 77554 SYS.Label.IFU.UndesiredSideEffects_v1
Node title (original): 24651 SYS.Label.IFU.Frequently Used ID: 9007292860645643
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Functions Status: Released
{ Geenen, Hubert, 2/14/2020 6:06:04 PM: Text was never used I suppose, Hubert Geenen}
Frequently used functions

The following functions are frequently used.
• Patient preparation.
• Patient positioning.
• System preparation.
• Selecting ExamCard.
• Performing First Scan.
• Scan preparation.
• Perform Scan.
• Review Result.
• Post Processing.
• Archiving and Networking.
Node title (original): 24651 SYS.Label.IFU.Frequently Used ID: 109093227531
Functions Status: Released
Affix: TEST. do not use
{ Geenen, Hubert, 2/14/2020 6:06:04 PM: Text was never used I suppose, Hubert Geenen}
Philips
24 Ingenia Ambition
Indications for Use Introduction
Frequently used functions

The following functions are frequently used.
• Patient preparation.
• Patient positioning. This is described in .
• System preparation. This is described in .
• Selecting ExamCard. This is described in .
• Performing First Scan. This is described in .
• Scan preparation. This is described in .
• Perform Scan. This is described in .
• Review Result. This is described in .
• Post Processing. This is described in .
• Archiving and Networking. This is described in .
End fragment title: 24651 SYS.Label.IFU.Frequently Used Functions
End fragment title: 24651 SYS.Label.IFU.Frequently Used Functions
1.5 Indications for Use

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Affix: new Indications for Use, currently only for RestofWorld ID: 99079237650439691
09/2018 Status: NotReleased
Last Content Modificator: Geenen, Hubert

SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedDeviceUse_v2 Status: NotReleased
Affix: with SCREENING
{ Geenen, Hubert, 9/20/2021 1:43:22 PM: version with screening in: "...assist diagnosis,
SCREENING and therapy planning", in R11 this is NOT the version in the PRQ labeling}
Philips Magnetic Resonance (MR) systems are Medical Electrical Systems indicated for use as a
diagnostic device.
This MR system enables trained physicians to obtain cross-sectional images, spectroscopic
images and/or spectra of the internal structure of the head, body or extremities, in any
orientation, representing the spatial distribution of protons or other nuclei with spin.
Image appearance is determined by many different physical properties of the tissue and the
anatomy, the MR scan technique applied, and presence of contrast agents.
The use of contrast agents for diagnostic imaging applications should be performed consistent
with the approved labeling for the contrast agent.
The trained clinical user can adjust the MR scan parameters to customize image appearance,
accelerate image acquisition, and synchronize with the patient’s breathing or cardiac cycle.
The systems can use combinations of images to produce physical parameters, and related
derived images. Images, spectra, and measurements of physical parameters, when interpreted
by a trained physician, provide information that may assist diagnosis, screening and therapy
planning. The accuracy of determined physical parameters depends on system and scan
Philips
parameters, and must be controlled and validated by the clinical user.
Ingenia Ambition 25
Introduction Indications for Use
In addition the Philips MR systems provide imaging capabilities, such as MR fluoroscopy, to

guide and evaluate interventional and minimally invasive procedures in the head, body and
extremities.
MR Interventional procedures, performed inside or adjacent to the Philips MR system, must be
performed with MR Conditional or MR Safe instrumentation as selected and evaluated by the
clinical user for use with the specific MR system configuration in the hospital. The
appropriateness and use of information from a Philips MR system for a specific interventional
procedure and specific MR system configuration must be validated by the clinical user.
End fragment title: 71421 SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedDeviceUse_v2

SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedDeviceUse_v2 Status: NotReleased
Philips Magnetic Resonance (MR) systems are Medical Electrical Systems indicated for use as a
diagnostic device.
This MR system enables trained physicians to obtain cross-sectional images, spectroscopic
images and/or spectra of the internal structure of the head, body or extremities, in any
orientation, representing the spatial distribution of protons or other nuclei with spin.
Image appearance is determined by many different physical properties of the tissue and the
anatomy, the MR scan technique applied, and presence of contrast agents. The use of contrast
agents for diagnostic imaging applications should be performed consistent with the approved
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

labeling for the contrast agent.
The trained clinical user can adjust the MR scan parameters to customize image appearance,
accelerate image acquisition, and synchronize with the patient’s breathing or cardiac cycle.
The systems can use combinations of images to produce physical parameters, and related
derived images. Images, spectra, and measurements of physical parameters, when interpreted
by a trained physician, provide information that may assist diagnosis and therapy planning. The
accuracy of determined physical parameters depends on system and scan parameters, and
must be controlled and validated by the clinical user.
extremities.
MR Interventional procedures, performed inside or adjacent to the Philips MR system, must be
performed with MR Conditional or MR Safe instrumentation as selected and evaluated by the
clinical user for use with the specific MR system configuration in the hospital. The
appropriateness and use of information from a Philips MR system for a specific interventional
procedure and specific MR system configuration must be validated by the clinical user.

SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedDeviceUse_NotFor3DPrinting Status: NotReleased
Affix: Used
Philips
26 Ingenia Ambition
Indications for Use Introduction
NOTICE
MR image data may be distorted and can lead to improper representations when used to
generate 3D printed volumes.
End fragment title: 82293 SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedDeviceUse_NotFor3DPrinting
Node title (original): Indication for use - pre July 2018 ID: 54043283743512203
Affix: obsolete since new Indications for use Status: NotReleased

SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedDeviceUse_v1 Status: Released
This system is a Magnetic Resonance Medical Electrical System indicated for use as a diagnostic
device.
The system can produce cross-sectional images, spectroscopic images and/or spectra in any
orientation of the internal structure of the head, body or extremities.
Magnetic Resonance images represent the spatial distribution of protons or other nuclei with
spin. Image appearance is determined by many different physical properties of the tissue and
the anatomy, and the MR scan technique applied. The image acquisition process can be
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
synchronized with the patient’s breathing or cardiac cycle. The systems can use combinations of
images to produce physical parameters, and related derived images.
Images, spectra, and measurements of physical parameters, when interpreted by a trained
physician, provide information that may assist the diagnosis and therapy planning. The accuracy
of determined physical parameters depends on system and scan parameters, and must be
controlled and validated by the clinical user.
SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedDeviceUse_Limitations_RoW Status: Released
Affix: non-US
For some studies the use of contrast agents can be essential. Their application is subject to local
medico-legal regulations and to their appropriateness to assist the diagnosis and therapy
planning as judged by a trained physician.
End fragment title: 64892 SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedDeviceUse_Limitations_RoW

SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedDeviceUse_LimitationsUSA Status: Released
Affix: USA
The use of contrast agents for diagnostic imaging applications should be performed consistent
with the approved labeling for the contrast agent.
End fragment title: 64891 SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedDeviceUse_LimitationsUSA

SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedDeviceUse_InterventionalApplications Status: Released
Affix: all systems
{ Geenen, Hubert, 2/12/2016 10:44:03 AM: Inserted extra white space after paragraph.
JvdB, LM}
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 27
Introduction Compatibility

extremities. MR Interventional procedures, performed inside or adjacent to the Philips MR
system, must be performed with MR Conditional or MR Safe instrumentation as selected and
evaluated by the clinical user for use with the specific MR system configuration in the hospital.
The appropriateness and use of information from a Philips MR system for a specific
interventional procedure and specific MR system configuration must be validated by the clinical
user.
End fragment title: 64893 SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedDeviceUse_InterventionalApplications

SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDeviceInstructions Status: Released
Affix: Obsolete
The Instructions for Use of any applied equipment, other than the MR scanner, shall be
considered as integral part of the safety and operational requirements, beyond those described
in the Instruction for Use of the Philips MR system.
End fragment title: 73750 SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDeviceInstructions
Do not use the MRI system for anything other than the intended use.
Before the system is used to examine a patient, make sure that:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• The Planned Maintenance Program is fully up-to-date.
• All routine user checks have been satisfactorily completed.
Do not use the system if any part is known (or suspected) to be defective. A defective system
can expose the operator or the patient to safety hazards. Contact your Philips service engineer
for repair.

SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedFieldExposures Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24502
During an MR examination energy is transferred to the patient in the form of Radio Frequency
waves, switching magnetic fields and acoustic noise. The energy levels as well as the level of the
static magnetic field are controlled following international safety standards. For a static
magnetic field at values over 2T, patients and operators may experience effects such as
dizziness, vertigo and a metallic taste in the mouth.
End fragment title: 24502 SYS.Label.IFU.IntendedFieldExposures
End fragment title: Indication for use - pre July 2018
1.6 Compatibility
Status: Released
Node title (original): 66489 SYS.Label.IFU.OtherEquipment ID: 18014461120421131

Status: Released
Philips
28 Ingenia Ambition
Compatibility Introduction
Do not use your Philips MRI system in combination with other equipment or components,
unless the equipment or components are expressly labelled as MR Safe or MR Conditional (see
chapter “Auxiliary Medical equipment” on page 132).
Changes and/or additions to the system should only be carried out by a Philips service engineer,
or by third parties expressly authorized by Philips. Such changes and/or additions must comply
with all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction(s)
concerned, and with best engineering practice.
Changes and/or additions to the system that are carried out by persons without the
appropriate training and/or using unapproved spare parts may lead to the Philips warranty
being voided. As with all complex technical systems, maintenance by persons not appropriately
qualified and/or using spare parts that do not meet Philips’ specifications carries serious risks of
damage to the system and of personal injury. Please be aware that Philips does not validate the
use of non-Philips provided parts with this system. Validation is done to ensure product
performance will meet its specification and Instructions for Use. System performance issues
arising from parts not meeting the above requirements will be the responsibility of the User as
its use is not validated by Philips.
Technical information to facilitate testing of compatibility of auxiliary equipment, is provided in
the Technical Description.
End fragment title: 66489 SYS.Label.IFU.OtherEquipment
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SYS.Label.IFU.ThirdPartyDeviceInstructions_v1 Status: Released
Philips is performing dedicated compatibility testing for selected combinations of MRI systems
and other equipment. The results of these tests are captured in compatibility statements. Ask
your Philips Representative or go to www.philips.com/IFU for the available compatibility
statements.
End fragment title: 77551 SYS.Label.IFU.ThirdPartyDeviceInstructions_v1
Node title (original): EMC4-Compatibility-Additional ID: 85331718027

Affix: EMC4 Status: Released
{ Marshall, Tom, 4/13/2018 9:20:51 AM: EMC4}

The MRI is intended for use in a professional healthcare facility environment.
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 29
Introduction Compliance
NOTICE
The EMISSIONS characteristics of this equipment make it suitable for use in industrial areas
and hospitals (CISPR 11 class A). If it is used in a residential environment (for which CISPR 11
class B is normally required) this equipment might not offer adequate protection to radio-
frequency communication services. The user might need to take mitigation measures, such as
relocating or re-orienting the equipment.
End fragment title: EMC4-Compatibility-Additional
1.7 Compliance
Status: Released
Node title (original): 66486 SYS.Label.IFU.StandardsCompliance ID: 54043241375721099

Status: Released
Philips MRI systems comply with relevant international and national standards and laws.
Information on compliance will be supplied on request by your local Philips Healthcare
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

representative.
Node title (original): 24663 SYS.Label.IFU.NormCompliance ID: 54043203328470923
Affix: non-China Status: Released
In particular, the MR system is designed in compliance with IEC60601-2-33 (Basic Safety and
Essential Performance of MR Systems), which includes IEC60601-1 (Basic Safety and Essential
Performance of Medical Electrical Equipment and Systems) and its collaterals.
IEC-60601-2-33 is the MR Safety standard published by the International Electrotechnical
Commission.
End fragment title: 24663 SYS.Label.IFU.NormCompliance
Node title (original): 24675 SYS.Label.IFU.StandardsReference ID: 36028830792612491

Affix: China Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24675
In particular, the MR system is designed in compliance with YY 0319 (Basic Safety and Essential
Performance of MR Systems), which includes GB 9706.1 (Basic Safety and Essential
Performance of Medical Electrical Equipment and Systems) and its collaterals.
End fragment title: 24675 SYS.Label.IFU.StandardsReference
Philips MRI systems comply with relevant international and national law and standards on EMC
(electromagnetic compatibility) for this type of equipment when used as intended. Such laws
and standards define both the permissible electromagnetic emission levels from equipment,
and its required immunity to electromagnetic interference from external sources.
End fragment title: 66486 SYS.Label.IFU.StandardsCompliance
Node title (original): 54053 SYS.Label.IFU.UseAndOperation ID: 18014448457843339

Status: Released
Implemented Measure: Legal / regulatory requirement (QMS)
Philips
30 Ingenia Ambition
Training Introduction
Use and operation of this system is subject to the law in the jurisdiction(s) in which the system
is being used. Both users and operators must only use and operate the system in such ways as
do not conflict with applicable laws or regulations which have the force of law. Both users and
operators must be trained appropriately and have taken notice especially of the safety
paragraphs in these Instructions for Use.
End fragment title: 54053 SYS.Label.IFU.UseAndOperation
Node title (original): 54054 SYS.Label.IFU.21CFR_Part801 ID: 27021604827622283

Status: Released
CAUTION
In the United States, Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a
physician.
End fragment title: 54054 SYS.Label.IFU.21CFR_Part801
1.8 Training
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.TrainingRequirements_v1 Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101p; IEC 62366 Chapter 7;

IEC82079-1, clause 4.7.7
Before you attempt to operate the Philips MRI system described in these Instructions for Use,
you must have received adequate training on its safe and effective use. Training requirements
for this type of device will vary from country to country. Training must be adequate and in
accordance with local laws or regulations which have the force of law.
Training for the following emergency procedures must be included:
Node title (original): Non-Ambition ID: 108235877771
Status: Released
• Medical emergency
• Fire
• Using the Emergency Magnet Off button
• (Unauthorized) access to the Controlled Access Area
• Actions in case of a quench.
End fragment title: Non-Ambition
Node title (original): Ambition ID: 18014506745361291

Status: Released
• Medical emergency
Philips
• Fire
Ingenia Ambition 31
Introduction Installation, Maintenance and Repair
• Using the Emergency Magnet Off button

• (Unauthorized) access to the Controlled Access Area
Node title (original): Elition ID: 118923228299
Status: Released
• Actions in case of a quench (does not apply to Ingenia Ambition systems)

End fragment title: Elition
Node title (original): Non MR7700 ID: 118923234059

Status: Released
• Actions in case of a quench

End fragment title: Non MR7700
End fragment title: Ambition
Philips provides application training for safe and effective use of general system functions and
for dedicated application packages. If you require further information about training, contact
your Philips application specialist.
End fragment title: 75625 SYS.Label.IFU.TrainingRequirements_v1
Affix: China only ID: 27021643612033163

Last Content Modificator: Geenen, Hubert Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

1.9 Installation, Maintenance and Repair
Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.InstallationInstructions Status: Released
{ Marshall, Tom, 11/30/2018 9:13:46 AM: This node is very similar to node
9007206096265995. That node does not mention maintenance and includes a title.}
Installation, maintenance and repair instructions for the system described are supplied by
Philips Healthcare in separate documentation.
Installation, maintenance and repair must be performed by appropriately trained personnel.
End fragment title: 24655 SYS.Label.IFU.InstallationInstructions
Node title (original): 69523 SYS.Label.IFU.PreventiveActions_v1 ID: 18014405352626443

Status: Released
The user is responsible to (at least weekly) check the integrity of system and coil covers, coil
cables, and accessories. Contact Philips Healthcare for information on the system maintenance
program.
Philips Healthcare can only accept responsibility for basic safety, reliability and (essential)
performance, if:
• qualified personnel carry out assembly operations, extensions, readjustments or repairs,
• the electrical installation of the technical room complies with the appropriate
requirements, and
Philips
32 Ingenia Ambition
Equipment classification Introduction
• the system is used in accordance with the Instructions for Use.

End fragment title: 69523 SYS.Label.IFU.PreventiveActions_v1
Node title (original): 24650 SYS.Label.IFU.EMInterference ID: 9007206096107275

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24650
WARNING
The MR equipment/system must emit electromagnetic energy in order to perform its
intended function. When installed according to Philips guidelines, electromagnetic emission
will be compliant to IEC60601-1-2. The Responsible Organization is advised to evaluate any
nearby electronic equipment for the need of additional shielding or repositioning to ensure
proper operation. Guidance for such evaluations may be found in e.g. AAMI TIR18:2010.
End fragment title: 24650 SYS.Label.IFU.EMInterference
1.10 Equipment classification

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Node title (original): 25470 SYS.Label.IFU.SystemClassification ID: 36028890625726475

Status: Released
Node title (original): Used for IFU and Td requirement - non- ID: 18014507517927179
China Status: Released
EQUIPMENT CLASSIFICATION
Classification according to IEC-60601-1
According to the type of protection against electrical Class I equipment.

shock:
According to the degree of protection against electric Type B and type BF applied parts.
shock:
According to the degree of protection against harmful Ordinary equipment (enclosed equipment without
ingress of water: protection against ingress of water, IPX0).
According to the methods of sterilization or disinfection: Non sterilizable. Use of Liquid surface disinfectants only.
According to the mode of operation: Continuous operation.

End fragment title: Used for IFU and Td requirement - non-China
Node title (original): Used for IFU and Td requirement - China ID: 9007315463214859
Status: Released
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 33
Introduction Equipment classification

shock:
According to the degree of protection against electric Type B and type BF/CF applied parts.
shock:
According to the degree of protection against harmful The MR system is ordinary equipment (enclosed
ingress of water: equipment without protection against ingress of water,
IPX0) with the exception of RF Coils which are IPX1 and
the eCOIL which is IPX4.

End fragment title: Used for IFU and Td requirement - China
End fragment title: 25470 SYS.Label.IFU.SystemClassification
Node title (original): 24711 SYS.Label.TD.SystemClassifications - ID: 45036004463973771

Multiva Status: Released
Affix: Multiva Jaguar
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

ISO/IEC: 25470 Multiva

shock:
According to the degree of protection against electric Type BF applied parts.

shock:

End fragment title: 24711 SYS.Label.TD.SystemClassifications - Multiva
Node title (original): 24711 SYS.Label.TD.SystemClassifications - ID: 36028830817502603

GB 9706 CHINA.1SystemClassification Multi/ *CN Status: Released
Classification according to GB 9706.1

shock:
Philips
34 Ingenia Ambition
Security and Privacy features implemented Introduction
According to the degree of protection against electric Type BF applied parts.

shock:
AP/APG 安全分类：非 AP/APG 型设备

End fragment title: 24711 SYS.Label.TD.SystemClassifications - GB 9706 CHINA.1SystemClassification Multi/ *CN
Node title (original): 24640 SYS.Label.IFU.AppliedParts ID: 9007206095963659

Affix: Achieva, Ingenia, Optimus Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24640
The following (electrical component containing or weight bearing) parts of the system are
considered suitable for direct contact with the patient in normal use conditions, i.e. are
considered Applied Parts per IEC60601-1:
• Tabletops.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• VCG sensors and module.

• PPU sensors and module.
• All cord-connected RF coils.
End fragment title: 24640 SYS.Label.IFU.AppliedParts
1.11 Security and Privacy features implemented

Status: Released
It is the policy of Philips Healthcare to adhere to all required standards and regulations. To
assist the hospital, the following functionality has been added to the system:
Access control
Intended to restrict access to the system to authorized users only:
• Customizable on/off, a user log-on/log-off procedure is required to gain access to the
system.
• Access to the system is granted according to a customizable list of authorized users.
• Username/Password authentication is supported for Active Directory and Local users.
2-Factor authentication is supported for Philips Engineers only.
• The system provides functionality to synchronize with customer central user account
administration, LDAP only.
• The system supports only single user sessions. It does not provide functionality to register
multiple simultaneous users or to switch between users other than via log-off / log-on.
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 35
Introduction Security and Privacy features implemented
• The system does not support single sign-on for situations where the system works together
with other (optional) systems or is part of another system, e.g. extra workstations. Single
sign-on is also not for some optional software components that require additional login.
Audit trail
Required to log user activities which are information-security critical:
• Applies to logging-on, reading and/or modifying clinical information.
• Requires that means be provided for auto-backup on a hospital server, e.g. the use of an
external standard 'Syslog' server.
• The creation of an audit trail on the local system is not supported.
Network time synchronization

Intended to synchronize system time to an external time-standard:
• "uses a standard Network Time Protocol (NTP)
• "the coupling is configured by Field Service during system installation.
Security and node authentication

Intended to secure the exchange of clinical data and restrict this exchange to pre-determined
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

nodes:
• Applies to RIS/CIS and PACS nodes, e.g. archives and viewers
• Does not apply to Field Service access
• Uses standard Transport Layer Security Protocol
• The user can decide at installation to use encryption on a per node basis (this may result in
reduced performance).
Computer systems cannot be guaranteed to be safe in an insecure network. The user should
provide some level of network protection e.g. installing firewalls.
Implementation
In order to meet the requirements described above, the system implements the solution
defined by the Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise (IHE) year 4 Basic Security profile.
• The Basic Security Integration Profile establishes security measures which, together with
the Security Policy and Procedures of the Enterprise, provide patient information
confidentiality, data integrity and user accountability. For more information see the DICOM
Conformance Statement.
Field Service
Field Service is used to enable the following configuration items based on information supplied
by the hospital:
• Authentication and encryption
• Time synchronization
Philips
• Configuration of the 'Syslog' server
36 Ingenia Ambition
Security and Privacy features implemented Introduction
• Configuration of any other programs, e.g. tools used to install certificates.
Certificates
Certificate requests should be handled by the hospital. The hospital should decide on a
procedure to create the Certificate request and import the certificates.
The hospital should also define the types of certificates required, for example:
• The certificate of the machine itself
• The certificates of the machines it chooses to trust
• The certificate of the Certificate Authority (CA).
Certificates should always be signed by someone else, i.e. no self-signed are allowed. However,
the signer of the certificate need not be present on the system. Self-signed certificates are the
certificates required by the Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise (IHE).
The following should also be specified:
• The location of the certificates (local machine)
• The location of the tools for certificate installation.
Certificates should be used between nodes to enable them to validate the identity of each
other.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
It is the responsibility of the Healthcare Enterprise (HE) to define the maximum validity period
of certificates in its security policy.
1.11.1 Other Security and Privacy features addressed

Status: Released
HIPAA defines a number of physical and technical safeguards which are either required or
addressable. Some features that could implement these functions are differently or not
implemented for reasons mentioned below.
This section also lists other information related to security features that are not implemented
and that the owner of the systems should be aware of.
Backup procedure
It is not the intended use of the system to permanently store (sensitive) personal information.
Information should be exported to a storage device as soon as possible.
Emergency Access Procedure

The system allows the creation of multiple users. A user account that serves as a generic
emergency account can be created. However the user should be aware that the knowledge of
this generic account and access to the system should be restricted to avoid unwanted access to
(sensitive) personal information. Note that there is no built in function that will allow or enforce
the user of such an account to enter their real name. Also it is not possible to clearly mark data
output (e.g. screen, print-out, exported data to DVD) as being created during emergency access
operation.
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 37
Introduction Security and Privacy features implemented
Automatic logoff
An auto-logoff feature is not implemented since it contradicts the intended use of the system.
Manual logoff using a ‘short-cut’ key combination is not implemented for the same reason. A
configurable screen save function with password protection is available.
Encryption
The system supports encryption of personal data on hard-drive and removable media (USB
devices). Hard drive encryption can be activated by Philips Service Engineers.
Physical access to system

Some parts of the systems are located in the technical area of a system. Access to these
locations is assumed to be restricted. Usually, the components in the operator or examination
room are more readily accessible and therefore the following characteristics shall be taken into
account for system operation and access control:
• The computer case is 'service friendly'; opening and removal of e.g. hard disk without use of
tools may be possible; computer case can be locked (e.g. by cable lock etc.); there are no
front side accessible drives etc.
• The boot order for the system is DVD - Hard Disk. By inserting a bootable CD/DVD the
system may start up from those and thus access may be gained to the system including
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

information stored in it.
• There is no detection of unauthorized physical access into the system e.g. via tamper proof
seals.
• The integrity of most of the Philips application software is checked when the systems starts,
for data this is not done.
• By default the system BIOS is not password protected and can be accessed during startup of
the system if unauthorized access to the system is possible.
On request Philips Service Engineers are instructed by guidelines how to password protect
the BIOS
1.11.2 Network firewall configuration

Status: Released
If the system is placed behind a network firewall (this is preferred), then the following ports
should be allowed to pass through for the system to operate correctly in a network under
normal operating conditions:
• Clinical use: ICMP:Echo, ICMP:Echo-Reply, TCP:1041)
• emote service: TCP:222), TCP:59002), TCP:9903, TCP:9044 or outbound: TCP:4432)
1)
default port might be reconfigured. It is assumed that outbound traffic is unrestricted.
2)
depending on configuration of the system (ISSLLink or VPN) .
Philips
38 Ingenia Ambition
Safety before scanning Safety
2 Safety
Affix: edited Artes ID: 9007315288999051
Last Content Modificator: Heuvel, Martina van den Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): Safety intro general ID: 18014444342391179

Status: Released
This Safety chapter covers general MRI Safety. Make sure you read, understand and know all
safety information in this chapter before you use the MRI system.
Safety instructions for specific workflows or MRI components are presented in the relevant
chapters of these Instructions for Use.
End fragment title: Safety intro general
Node title (original): 57978 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Safety officer ID: 18014444224353547

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33??
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 3/22/2016 3:54:02 PM: Replaces 24543}

The User is responsible to ensure adequate training and oversight over all safety matters
related to the MRI system. Local regulations may apply.
End fragment title: 57978 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Safety officer
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): 76974 SYS.Label.IFU.IncidentReporting_v1 ID: 9007293643694475

Status: Released
NOTICE
Any serious incident that has occurred in relation to the device should be reported to the
manufacturer.
In the European Economic Area (EEA), the incident should also be reported to the Competent
Authority that the Member State, in which the user and/or patient is established, has
designated responsible for the implementation of Regulation (EU) 2017/745 of the European
Parliament and of the Council of 5 April 2017 on medical devices.
In the United States of America, the Medical Device Reporting regulation contains mandatory
requirements for manufacturers, importers, and device user facilities to report certain device-
related adverse events and product problems to the FDA.
Follow the applicable laws or regulations on reporting device-related incidents or adverse
events in the jurisdiction(s) in which the system is being used.
End fragment title: 76974 SYS.Label.IFU.IncidentReporting_v1
2.1 Safety before scanning

Last Content Modificator: ID: 128947682699
Status: NotReleased
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 39
Safety Safety before scanning
2.1.1 Prescreening
Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Prescreening.Importance of prescreen Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause (Concerning) 201.7.9.2.101a
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 11/2/2015 9:47:09 AM: Replaces 24558}

The User must ensure that all patients and MRI personnel are adequately screened before they
are allowed near MRI equipment. Prescreening is essential to prevent injury which may result
from exposure to the MRI equipment or an MRI examination.
This specifically applies to patients and MRI personnel who could be at risk of injury due to:
• Their present medical condition.
• Their past medical history.
• Their past or current occupation.
See .
End fragment title: 57900 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Prescreening.Importance of prescreen
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Prescreening.Extra patient caution Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause 201.7.8.2.101-a 2nd paragraph, bullets

1-3

When prescreening patients, exercise particular caution for those patients with:
• A contraindication for MRI examination (see chapter “Contraindications” on page 41).
• An MR Conditional implant (see chapter “MR Conditional implants” on page 45).
• A higher than normal likelihood of requiring emergency medical treatment due to their
present medical condition (see ).
• A higher than normal likelihood of requiring emergency medical treatment as a result of
strong electromagnetic fields when the system operates in first level controlled operating
mode, such as anesthetized patients or patients with restricted thermoregulatory capacity
(see chapter “Operating modes” on page 63).
End fragment title: 57899 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Prescreening.Extra patient caution

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Prescreening.Consult physician Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 201.7.9.2.101-a
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 4/12/2016 8:59:18 AM: Replaces 24507}If patient eligibility for an MRI
scan is unclear, do not scan the patient. Consult the responsible physicians. A qualified
physician must evaluate the risk:benefit ratio of the MRI examination for every patient before
scanning.
End fragment title: 59945 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Prescreening.Consult physician
Philips
40 Ingenia Ambition
2.1.2 Contraindications
Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Contraindications.Contraindications Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause (Concerning) 201.7.9.2.101a &

201.7.9.2.101v

In general, an MRI examination is contraindicated for patients with one or more of the
following:
• An active implant (for example a cardiac pacemaker) unless the implant is explicitly marked
as MR Safe.
• A metallic or ferromagnetic implant (for example an intracranial aneurysm clip) unless the
implant is explicitly marked as MR Safe.
• A body core temperature greater than 39.5 °C.
Local regulations may specify additional contraindications. See chapter “MR implant
labeling” on page 42 for more information about implant labels.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
For implants that are labeled MR Safe or MR Conditional, make sure that both these conditions
are met before scanning:
• The responsible physician approved the patient for MR scanning.
• The conditions specified by the implant manufacturer are strictly adhered to.
See chapter “MR implant labeling” on page 42 and chapter “MR Conditional implants” on
page 45 for more information.
End fragment title: 57901 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Contraindications.Contraindications

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Contraindications.No implant in CAA Status: Released
warning
Implemented Measure: HAZ-RF.27

Philips
Ingenia Ambition 41
WARNING
The MRI system may cause implant malfunction or displacement.
Risk of serious patient injury or death.
• Do not allow persons with implants to enter the Controlled Access Area unless they have
specific approval to do so.
End fragment title: 57902 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Contraindications.No implant in CAA warning

SYS.Label.IFU.ContraIndication.ArtifactsHeatingDisplacementM Status: Released
alfunction
Implemented Measure: HAZ.RF.28

ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause 201.7.9.2.101t * clause Concerning
201.7.9.2.101a
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 11/2/2015 9:33:50 AM: Replaces 24348 and 24457}
MR scanning or the MRI system itself can:
• Cause the dislodgement of metallic implants through strong attraction or torque.
• Interfere with the operation of electronically, magnetically or mechanically activated
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

implants.
• Cause excessive (local) heating of implants.
These effects can cause tissue damage, loss of physiologic function, serious injury, or death.
Presence of implants may also cause significant MR image artifacts due to magnetic field
distortion. All these effects may also apply to patients and personnel who rely on electrically,
magnetically or mechanically activated external life support systems.
Also see chapter “Auxiliary Medical equipment” on page 132 for more information.
Node title (original): 58118 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.MR Cond ID: 45036016551716491-1
Impl.dB/dt on info page Status: Released
Affix: Jaguar and US 3.0T
WARNING
The maximum dB/dt on the info page does not display the maximum dB/dt for
automatically inserted prescans to calibrate the system. Please refer to the Gradients
paragraph of the Technical description.
End fragment title: 58118 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.MR Cond Impl.dB/dt on info page

End fragment title: 69441 SYS.Label.IFU.ContraIndication.ArtifactsHeatingDisplacementMalfunction
2.1.3 MR implant labeling

Philips
Status: Released
42 Ingenia Ambition
Node title (original): Implant definition ID: 9007233859416971

Status: Released
According to current FDA definitions (21CFR812.3 revised April 1, 2014), an implant is defined
as “a device that is placed into a surgically or naturally formed cavity of the human body if it is
intended to remain there for a period of 30 days or more. FDA may, in order to protect public
health, determine that devices placed in subjects for shorter periods are also ‘implants’ for
purposes of this part.”
End fragment title: Implant definition
Node title (original): 57985 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Implant ID: 18014435402304267

Labeling Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause 2021.7.9.2.101t
It is the responsibility of the implant manufacturer to declare an implant MR Safe, MR

Conditional, or MR Unsafe. Refer to the table for definitions of the MR implant labels. Implants
without adequate labeling are considered MR Unsafe. For MR Conditional implants, the general
contraindications regarding implants as listed in chapter “Contraindications” on page 41, may
not be applicable in their entirety.
End fragment title: 57985 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Implant Labeling
Node title (original): 65490 SYS.Label.IFU. ID: 9007254715443339

21CFR_Parts660,801,809_SymbolsGlossary_IEC62570 Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ISO/IEC: IEC62570
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 43
Warning label Source Definition*
IEC 62570 1st edition MR Safe

2014 An item that poses no known hazards resulting from
exposure to any MRI environment. MR Safe items are
composed of materials that are electrically
nonconductive, nonmetallic, and nonmagnetic.
IEC 62570 1st edition MR Conditional

2014 An item with demonstrated safety in the MRI
environment within defined conditions. At a minimum,
address the conditions of the static magnetic field, the
switched gradient magnetic field and the radiofrequency
fields. Additional conditions, including specific
configurations of the item, may be required.
Also see chapter “MR Conditional implants” on page
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

45.
IEC 62570 1st edition MR Unsafe

2014 An item which poses unacceptable risks to the patient,
medical staff, or other persons within the MRI
environment.
Tab. 1: Icons used to label medical devices and other items, to ensure safe use in the MRI environment. * As defined
by: ASTM F2503-13. Standard Practice for Marking Medical Devices and Other Items for Safety in the Magnetic
Resonance Environment. ASTM International (2013) and by IEC62570 1st edition 2014.
End fragment title: 65490 SYS.Label.IFU.21CFR_Parts660,801,809_SymbolsGlossary_IEC62570
Node title (original): SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.MR Conditional ID: 68059457419

Status: Released
More about MR Safe and MR Conditional Implants

Implantable medical devices labeled MR Safe or MR Conditional have been cleared, approved
and/or licensed by the Competent Governmental Authorities and/or labeled by the
manufacturer. For such devices, the general contraindications may not be applicable in its
entirety.
It is the responsibility of the implant manufacturer to declare an implant MR Safe or MR
Conditional and to define the conditions (restrictions) that allow for safe MR scanning. It is the
obligation of the MR operator to be aware of these conditions and to assure that they are
strictly adhered to.
Refer to the user documentation of the implant or contact the implant manufacturer to obtain
these specific conditions. The system provides options to restrict whole body and head SAR and
Philips
44 Ingenia Ambition
dB/dt, and to review other system characteristics, as specified in the Technical Description.
Philips does not assume responsibility or liability for the operation of their MRI system with any
implantable medical device.
End fragment title: SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.MR Conditional
2.1.4 MR Conditional implants

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 57870 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.MR Cond impl. ID: 18014433726832395

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33_201.7.9.2.101t 2nd paragraph
It is the responsibility of the implant manufacturer to define the conditions that allow for safe
MR scanning of an MR Conditional implant. It is the obligation of the MRI operator to be aware
of these conditions and to ensure that these conditions are strictly adhered to.
Refer to the user documentation of the implant or contact the implant manufacturer to obtain
the implant specific conditions.
Your Philips MRI system provides options through ScanWise Implant, to restrict whole body or
head SAR or B1+rms, in addition to options to restrict dB/dt, and gradient slew rate, and to
review other system characteristics, as specified in the Technical Description. See . Philips does
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
not assume responsibility or liability for the operation of their MRI system with any implant
other than restricting the system to such implant-specific values entered.
End fragment title: 57870 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.MR Cond impl.
Node title (original): Disclaimer for US 3.0T systems only ID: 27021649474683787
Status: Released
ScanWise implant may not be available on your system. Contact your Philips Healthcare
representative for more information.
End fragment title: Disclaimer for US 3.0T systems only
Node title (original): 58117 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.MR Cond ID: 18014433726835851

Impl.Implants tested for 1.5T only Status: Released
Implemented Measure: HAZ.MA.07
WARNING
Most implants have only been tested for field strengths up to 1.5T
Risk of patient injury
• Make sure that implant documentation states that scanning is allowed at the field
strength of your system.
End fragment title: 58117 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.MR Cond Impl.Implants tested for 1.5T only
Node title (original): Typical MR Conditional parameters for ID: 27021632981580939

implants Status: Released
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 45
Refer to the table for parameters typically specified for MR Conditional implants and their
possible risks.
Conditional parameter (unit) What is it? Possible implant-related risk
Main field strength (T) Strength of the magnetic field at Dislodgement of the implant due to
isocenter. torque.
Spatial field gradient Measure of how quickly the fringe Dislodgement of the implant due to
Also called static field gradient, MSG, field of the magnet changes over a attraction.
SFG, SGF (G/cm or T/m) given distance. The fringe field of the
magnet varies with spatial location
inside and around the magnet.
1 T/m = 100 G/cm
Note: The spatial field gradient is
always present, even when not
scanning, because it is related to the
magnet, not the gradient coils.
SAR value (W/kg) The RF power absorbed by the Excessive (local) heating.
Whole body SAR or head SAR (W/kg, patient per unit mass.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

for 15 min) Note: This value is only valid at the
main field strength specified on the
implant label.
B1+rms (µT) Average RF deposition in the patient Excessive (local) heating.
dB/dt (T/s) The rate of change of the magnetic Malfunction of active implants.
field generated by the switching
gradients used for imaging. The value
is specified at a radial distance of 20
cm about the central axis of the
magnet bore.
Note: this value varies spatially, but
the 20-cm nominal value is used for
implant labeling.
Gradient slew rate (T/m/s) Measure of the rate of ascent or Malfunction of active implants.
descent of a gradient from zero to
the maximum amplitude.
Tab. 2: Typical MR Conditional parameters for implants
The implant manufacturer may specify other conditions, including, but not limited to:
• Use of a specific coil.
• Configuration of the implant itself.
Philips
46 Ingenia Ambition
• Special patient preparation (such as no sedation, good communication, etc.).

End fragment title: Typical MR Conditional parameters for implants

Affix: Achieva Ingenia Optimus Multiva (US 1.5T only) Jaguar-
Eagle
NOTICE
The maximum dB/dt on the info page does not take the maximum dB/dt for automatically
inserted prescans into account. However, if a maximum dB/dt has been specified in ScanWise
Implant, all scans, including prescans, will be restricted to the dB/dt value specified. For more
information, refer to the paragraph ‘Gradients’ in the Technical Description.
Node title (original): 58118 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.MR Cond ID: 45036016551716491-2

Affix: Jaguar and US 3.0T
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
WARNING
The maximum dB/dt on the info page does not display the maximum dB/dt for
automatically inserted prescans to calibrate the system. Please refer to the Gradients
paragraph of the Technical description.

Impl.Multiple implants Status: Released

Philips
Ingenia Ambition 47
WARNING
Patient has bilateral MR Conditional orthopedic implants.
Risk of skin or internal burns
• If scanning of bilateral orthopedic implants is approved by the implant manufacturer, use
positioning aids to ensure adequate distance between body parts.
End fragment title: 58119 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.MR Cond Impl.Multiple implants

Impl.Cond impl 3.0T, no RF shimming Status: NotReleased
Affix: 3T only - not for Multiva
WARNING
MR conditions for 3.0T systems are only valid for quadrature excitation.
Risk of skin or internal burns
• When scanning an MR Conditional implant at 3.0T, never apply patient adaptive RF
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

shimming.
End fragment title: 58120 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.MR Cond Impl.Cond impl 3.0T, no RF shimming
2.1.5 Risk factors for MRI-related adverse events

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 58122 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Risk ID: 9007235811270155

factors.Patients at increased risk Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause Concerning 201.7.9.2.101a 5th

paragraph

Certain patient conditions are not a contraindication, but could increase the risk of an adverse
event during an MRI examination.
Therefore, exercise particular caution for patients:
• With MR Conditional implants.
• With microscopic pieces of metallic materials in the body (such as shrapnel or metallic
splinters) (see below).
• With cardiovascular impairment of any sort.
• Who are or may be pregnant (see below).
• With extensive dark tattoos, including permanent make-up tattoos (see below).
Philips
48 Ingenia Ambition
• Susceptible to seizures or claustrophobic reactions.

• Unable to sense or communicate adverse events (such as unconscious, sedated,
anesthetized, paralyzed, pediatric, or confused patients) (see below).
• With fever.
• Who are thermally insulated (for example due to a plaster or fiberglass cast).
• With impaired thermoregulation (see below), which can occur in:
– Neonates or low birth-weight infants
– Elderly patients
– Sedated or anesthetized patients
– Obese patients
– Hypertensive patients
– Patients with diabetes
– Patients with impaired ability to perspire
– Patients with a type of cancer that impairs thermoregulation
– Patients on certain drug regimes, such as diuretics, tranquillizers, vasodilators
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 58122 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Risk factors.Patients at increased risk
2.1.5.1 Microscopic pieces of metal

Status: Released

factors.Microscopic pieces of metal Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause (Concerning) 201.7.9.2.101a

Patients engaged in certain occupations or activities, such as metal welding or military
activities, may have embedded metal fragments. These fragments may move and cause
damage or patient discomfort (for example in the eye). In addition, these fragments may cause
image artifacts.
If there is a suspicion of accidentally embedded metallic fragments, always check with an X-ray
before the MRI examination.
If metal fragments are present, a qualified physician must evaluate whether the benefit of the
MRI scan outweighs the potential risk.
End fragment title: 58121 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Risk factors.Microscopic pieces of metal
2.1.5.2 Pregnancy
Last Content Modificator: Heuvel, Martina van den ID: 128947914635
Status: NotReleased
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 49

factors.Pregnancy Status: NotReleased
Affix: from Artes/Voyager onwards
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause 201.7.9.2.101u
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 12/22/2015 11:47:55 AM: Replaces 24466, 24478, 24534, 24535,
24536}
{ Geenen, Hubert, 9/19/2021 5:57:45 PM: changed "see chapter" to "refer to" accroding to
requirement}
No documented adverse fetal effects of MRI examination have been reported. However,
• The fetus is especially thermally vulnerable during the first trimester.
• Scanning is not recommended in the first trimester or if pregnancy status is unknown.
• When scanning a pregnant patient, it is recommended to limit Whole Body SAR level to
2W/kg (normal operating mode). Refer to chapter “Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)” on page
78.
• Local regulations may consider the fetus as a member of the general public and strict
exposure limits may apply.
End fragment title: 58125 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Risk factors.Pregnancy
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

2.1.5.3 Tattoos & permanent make-up
Implemented Measure: HAZ-RF.26 Status: Released

factors.Tattoos & permanent make-up Status: Released
Philips
50 Ingenia Ambition
WARNING
Tattoos, permanent eye-liner, and facial make-up may contain metallic particles.
Risk of burns
• Warn patients that scanning may cause heating of the tattooed tissue, resulting in a
burning sensation or skin irritation.
• Place a cold compress or ice pack on the tattoo to decrease the potential for RF heating,
as recommended by the ACR (Kanal E, Barkovich AJ, Bell C, et al. ACR guidance document
on MR safe practices: 2013. J Magn Reson Imaging. 2013; 37(3): 501–530).
End fragment title: 58130 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Risk factors.Tattoos & permanent make-up
2.1.5.4 Inability to sense or communicate adverse events

Implemented Measure: HAZ-RF.91.1 and HAZ-RF.91.2 Status: Released

factors.Patient cannot sense/communicate AE Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause 201.7.9.2.101j 9th bullet
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 12/22/2015 11:49:18 AM: Replaces 24357, 24358}
WARNING
Patient is unable to sense adverse events or is unable to notify the operator of an adverse
event during scanning.
Risk of patient burns, severe PNS or hearing damage
• Make sure optimal hearing protection is in place.
• Examine patient between individual scans to detect potential burns before they progress.
End fragment title: 58132 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Risk factors.Patient cannot sense/communicate AE
2.1.5.5 Impaired thermoregulation

Status: Released
Node title (original): Impaired thermoregulation ID: 36521505675

Status: Released
The risk of RF energy-related injuries is higher in patients with impaired thermoregulation. To

prevent injuries, do the following in addition to medical supervision:
• Make sure that airflow in the bore is not obstructed.
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 51
• Remove any added insulation such as blankets or warm clothing. Insulation interferes with
the ability to dissipate heat.
• Monitor physiological signs.
• Avoid scanning in first level controlled mode.
• Limit the whole body SAR to maximum 1 W/kg whenever possible.
• Avoid SED >3.0 kJ/kg, preferably keep SED <2.0 kJ/kg.
• Examine the patient between individual scans to detect potential burns before they
progress.
End fragment title: Impaired thermoregulation
2.1.6 Clothing and other removable risk factors

Implemented Measure: HAZ-RF.25 Status: NotReleased
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause 201.7.9.2.101j
Node title (original): 83059 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Clothing and ID: 128815798795

other removable risk factors_v1 Status: NotReleased
Implemented Measure: HAZ-RF.24, HAZ-RF.25

ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101j 1st, 2nd and 4th bullet
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 12/22/2015 11:53:45 AM: Replaces 24345, 24520, 24521, 24522}
{ Geenen, Hubert, 9/19/2021 4:01:49 PM: R11, added Face masks in list}
WARNING
Clothing or other objects on the patient can lead to local excessive heating.
Risk of burns
• Remove all metallic and other risk-enhancing items from the patient.
Objects on the patient:

• Can increase the risk of local excessive heating due to RF energy.
• Influence the homogeneity of the magnetic field.
• Lead to artifacts.
Remove metallic and other risk enhancing items from the patient. These items include:
• All clothing containing metallic thread or components such as zips, metal buttons, hooks,
underwire (bras).
• Clothing made of microfibers that may contain undetectable conductive fibers.
• All other metallic objects, such as:
– Spectacles, dentures, prostheses, hearing aids, insoles
– Watches, jewelry, medallions, piercings
Philips
52 Ingenia Ambition
– Hairpins, safety pins

– Face masks
– Buckles, belts
– Wigs, hairpieces.
• Transdermal patches for medicine delivery
Transdermal patches for medicine delivery (for example, nitroglycerin transdermal delivery
patch) may contain metallic foil and cause burns to the underlying skin during scanning.
Consult the prescribing physician whether the patch can be removed during the
examination.
• Damp clothing
Damp clothing (for example due to perspiration) may facilitate formation of current loops
and consequent excessive local heating. Make sure patient clothing is dry before scanning is
started.
• Clothing made of synthetic fibers which trap heat. Examples are polyester, polyamide or
polypropylene.
Advise patients to wear light, 100% cotton, or linen clothing during the MRI examination or
provide MRI compatible garments.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 83059 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Clothing and other removable risk factors_v1
2.1.7 Controlled Access Area

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 58143 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA General ID: 18014435031019147

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 (Concerning) 201.7.9.2.101e
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 4/12/2016 7:14:21 AM: Replaces 24461 and 24501}
The Controlled Access Area is the area around the magnet wherein the magnetic fringe field
exceeds 0.5 mT (5 gauss).
The magnetic fringe field can:
• Cause injury to certain people (see chapter “Contraindications” on page 41).
• Attract objects made of iron or other magnetic material (see chapter “Static magnetic field”
on page 77).
The Controlled Access Area must therefore be protected by both administrative and physical
barriers.
End fragment title: 58143 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA General

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA.ElectromagneticInterference Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101e
The perimeters of the Controlled Access Area usually coincide with the walls of the RF room
shield. Inside this shield:
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 53
• Elevated RF levels or the magnetic fringe field may disturb electronic equipment other than
equipment tested by Philips.
• The presence of such equipment may interfere with the operation of the MR system.
End fragment title: 60349 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA.ElectromagneticInterference
Node title (original): 58457 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA Magnetic ID: 18014437054293003

objects warning Status: Released
Implemented Measure: HAZ-MA.02.2
WARNING
The magnet attracts objects made of iron or other magnetic materials.
Risk of injury or death.
• Do not bring objects made of iron or other magnetic materials into the Controlled Access
Area.
Examples of iron or other magnetic materials include, but are not limited to:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Scissors, pocket knives, lighters, keys, coins, hair pins
• Vacuum cleaners, floor polishers
• Mobile phones, pagers, tablets
• Magnetic wheel chairs, patient trolleys, iron stretchers
• MR Unsafe fire extinguishers
• Life supporting devices, vital sign monitoring, or emergency equipment
End fragment title: 58457 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA Magnetic objects warning
Node title (original): 58428 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA ID: 18014437054291467

Accessibility warning Status: Released
Implemented Measure: HAZ-MA.02.1

ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101e 1st and 3rd bullet
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 12/22/2015 11:55:11 AM: Replaces 24274, 24462}

Philips
54 Ingenia Ambition
WARNING
Unauthorized or unintentional access to the Controlled Access Area.
Risk of injury or death, in particular for patients with a pacemaker.
• The User must ensure that:
• All points of entry into the Controlled Access Area are marked with a Safety Marking
Plate or appropriate safety symbols.
• Adequate rules for controlling access to the Controlled Access Area are established.
• Local statutory requirements concerning access to the Controlled Access Area are
followed.
End fragment title: 58428 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA Accessibility warning
It is advised to ensure that the operator always has visual oversight of the entrance (Kanal E,
Barkovich AJ, Bell C, et al. ACR guidance document on MR safe practices: 2013. J Magn Reson
Imaging. 2013; 37(3): 501–530).
Node title (original): 58448 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA 5 gauss ID: 18014517334138891
line - Elition MR7700 Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
The distances from the magnet in which 0.5 mT is exceeded, are shown in the table and
diagram.
Field Strength X direction Y direction Z direction
3.0T 3.1 m 3.1 m 4.9 m

Philips
Ingenia Ambition 55
Fig. 1: Top view with 0.5 mT (5 gauss) line.

End fragment title: 58448 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA 5 gauss line - Elition MR7700

line - Ingenia Status: NotReleased
Affix: Ingenia
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101e 2nd bullet.

diagram.
1.5T 2.4 m 2.4 m 3.8 m
3.0T 3.1 m 3.1 m 4.9 m
Philips
56 Ingenia Ambition
Fig. 2: Top view with 0.5 mT (5 gauss) lines for 1.5T (left) and 3.0T (right).
End fragment title: 58448 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA 5 gauss line - Ingenia

line - Ambition & Elition Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
{ Geenen, Hubert, 9/19/2021 6:22:27 PM: obsolete because elition and ambition are in
different IFUs now}
diagram.
1.5T 2.4 m 2.4 m 4.0 m
3.0T 3.1 m 3.1 m 4.9 m

Philips
Ingenia Ambition 57
Fig. 3: Top view with 0.5 mT (5 gauss) lines.

End fragment title: 58448 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA 5 gauss line - Ambition & Elition

line - Ambition MR5300 Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

diagram.
1.5T 2.4 m 2.4 m 4.0m
Philips
58 Ingenia Ambition
Fig. 4: Top view with 0.5 mT (5 gauss) lines.

End fragment title: 58448 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA 5 gauss line - Ambition MR5300

line - Achieva Status: Released
Affix: Achieva
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

diagram.
1.5T 2.4 m 2.4 m 3.8 m
3.0T 3.1 m 3.1 m 5.0 m

Philips
Ingenia Ambition 59
Fig. 5: Top view with 0.5 mT (5 gauss) lines for 1.5T (left) and 3.0T (right).
End fragment title: 58451 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA 5 gauss line - Achieva
Node title (original): 58453 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA 5 Gauss ID: 18014437128575371

line - Multiva Status: Released
Affix: Multiva
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12


diagram.
1.5T 2.4 m 2.4 m 3.8 m
Philips
60 Ingenia Ambition
Fig. 6: Top view with 0.5 mT (5 gauss) line.

End fragment title: 58453 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA 5 Gauss line - Multiva
Node title (original): CAA 5 gauss line - Jaguar ID: 27021636389690763

Affix: Jaguar Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
diagram.
1.5T 2.2 m 2.2 m 3.4 m

Philips
Ingenia Ambition 61
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 7: Side view with 0.5mT (5 gauss) line.
End fragment title: CAA 5 gauss line - Jaguar
Node title (original): 58458 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA EMC ID: 18014437128534539-1

standards Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 1-2 clause 5.2.1.1.b (???)
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 12/22/2015 12:17:03 PM: Replaces 24542, 24556, 24508}
Philips MRI systems comply with the requirements of applicable electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) standards. Other electronic equipment exceeding the limits defined in these EMC
standards could, under unusual circumstance, affect the operation of the system.
End fragment title: 58458 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA EMC standards
Node title (original): 58459 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA Auxiliary ID: 18014437128536075

equipment Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101e - 5th bullet

The operation of electronic equipment (such as mobile phones) or auxiliary devices (such as
vital sign monitoring, life supporting devices, and emergency care equipment) which are not
labeled MR Safe or MR Conditional can be affected by MR scanning or the MRI system itself.
These devices can also affect the proper functioning of the MRI equipment and cause
Philips
62 Ingenia Ambition
hazardous situations and artifacts. Only use and permit devices labeled as MR Safe or MR
Conditional within the Controlled Access Area. See chapter “Auxiliary Medical equipment” on
page 132 for more information.
End fragment title: 58459 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA Auxiliary equipment
2.1.8 Operating modes

Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.OperatingModes Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101g 1st paragraph
Node title (original): 58509 Non-China - operating modes ID: 18014444342449803
according to IEC Status: Released
All Philips MRI systems comply with the IEC 60601-2-33 standard, which defines separate
operating modes.
End fragment title: 58509 Non-China - operating modes according to IEC
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): 58509 China - operating modes according ID: 18014444342451339
to Chinese regulations Status: Released
All Philips MRI systems comply with the YY 0319 standard, which defines separate operating
modes.
End fragment title: 58509 China - operating modes according to Chinese regulations
Operating mode Explanation
Normal No physiological stress factors are expected.

Routine patient observation is required during scanning.
First level controlled MRI scanning may cause physiological stress.

Medical supervision during scanning is required.
Second level controlled This operating mode is not accessible.
Node title (original): 58509 Non-china - levels of exposure ID: 18014444345624843

normal/1st level based on IEC Status: Released
The type of scanner (static magnetic field) and the scan protocol (gradient output and SAR
levels) determine the operating mode. The levels of exposure for the normal operating mode
and the first level controlled operating mode are specified in IEC 60601-2-33 and are based on
current scientific literature related to safety.
End fragment title: 58509 Non-china - levels of exposure normal/1st level based on IEC
Node title (original): 58509 China - levels of exposure ID: 18014444345626379

normal/1st level based on Chinese standard Status: Released
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 63
The type of scanner (static magnetic field) and the scan protocol (gradient output and SAR
levels) determine the operating mode. The levels of exposure for the normal operating mode
and the first level controlled operating mode are specified in YY 0319 and are based on current
scientific literature related to safety.
End fragment title: 58509 China - levels of exposure normal/1st level based on Chinese standard
End fragment title: 58509 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.OperatingModes
Alerts before entering first level controlled mode

Node title (original): Alerts before entering first level controlled ID: 109042276107
mode Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101g 2nd bullet

Before an examination enters first level controlled mode for the first time, the operator:
1. Is alerted by the system.
2. Is instructed to ensure medical supervision is in place.
3. Must actively accept this mode of system operation.
For more information, see chapter “Guidance for Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)” on page 82.
End fragment title: Alerts before entering first level controlled mode
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

2.1.9 Patient observation and medical supervision
Status: Released
Node title (original): 58536 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Medical ID: 18014435048310539

supervision.User responsibility Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101b
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 4/12/2016 1:27:34 PM: Replaces - none, not previously in SRAS
Labeling or IFU.}
It is the responsibility of the User to establish a program to ensure that appropriate patient
observation and medical supervision of patients is available when required.
End fragment title: 58536 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Medical supervision.User responsibility
Node title (original): Definitions of observation/medical ID: 55004314379

supervision Status: Released Philips
64 Ingenia Ambition
Routine patient observation Verbal contact with or visual observation of the patient in the MRI examination
room. Includes the ability of the patient to attract the attention of the operator
using the nurse call.
Medical supervision Adequate medical management under responsibility of a qualified physician, to

ensure safety of patients who can be at risk from exposure to the MRI system
either because of their medical condition, the levels of exposure, or a
combination of both. MR Safe or MR Conditional auxiliary devices* may be used
to monitor various physiological states (such as heart rate, ECG trace, pulse
oximetry), in addition to routine patient observation.
End fragment title: Definitions of observation/medical supervision
*See chapter “Auxiliary Medical equipment” on page 132 for more information about the use
of auxiliary devices.
Node title (original): 58512 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Medical ID: 18014435048313611
supervision.Indication Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101b 2nd bullet / IEC 2-33

201.7.9.2.101g End of 1st paragraph

Medical supervision is always indicated when a patient:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Is exposed to a first level controlled scan. See chapter “Operating modes” on page 63.
• Is at an increased risk of MRI-related adverse events. See .
A qualified physician must evaluate the risk:benefit ratio of the MRI examination for every
patient before scanning. The physician must include the need for medical supervision in this
evaluation.
End fragment title: 58512 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Medical supervision.Indication
2.1.10 Emergency procedures

Comment: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101c / n / m / s Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): Ambition systems ID: 36028889506372875

Status: NotReleased
Ingenia Ambition systems

End fragment title: Ambition systems

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.User responsibility_Sealed Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101c 1st paragraph, IEC 2-33

201.7.9.2.101n, IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101m, IEC 2-33
201.7.9.2.101s
{ Geenen, Hubert, 7/4/2018 11:31:42 AM: Hubert Geenen for Tiger5/R5.6 Ambition }
The User is required to establish emergency procedures for the following situations:
• A medical emergency
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 65
• A fire
• An emergency that requires immediate removal of the magnetic field
Philips MRI systems have an Emergency Table Stop button in case there is an emergency during
tabletop movement.
End fragment title: 66500 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.User responsibility_Sealed

Status: NotReleased
Ingenia Elition systems


SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.User responsibility Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101c 1st paragraph, IEC 2-33

201.7.9.2.101n, IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101m, IEC 2-33
201.7.9.2.101s
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 4/12/2016 1:30:32 PM: Replaces - none, not previously listed as such in
the SRAS Labeling/IFU}
The User is required to establish emergency procedures for the following situations:
• A medical emergency
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• A fire
• An emergency that requires immediate removal of the magnetic field
• The release of helium gas into the examination room
Philips MRI systems have an Emergency Table Stop button in case there is an emergency during
tabletop movement.
End fragment title: 58531 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.User responsibility
2.1.10.1 Medical emergency

Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Med Emerg Procedure Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 (Concerning) 201.7.9.2.101c
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 12/22/2015 1:12:40 PM: Replaces 24469, 24470}

It is the responsibility of the User to make sure that precautions and appropriate procedures
are established for medical emergencies during scanning. Especially for patients:
• At risk of cardiac arrest.
• Predisposed to seizures or claustrophobic reactions.
• Who are very sick, sedated, confused, or unconscious.
• Incapable of reliable communication.
Philips
66 Ingenia Ambition
A procedure must be in place to remove a patient rapidly from the MRI examination room. Safe
and effective use of electronic or other metallic emergency equipment may be impossible near
the magnet. Only bring emergency equipment that is MR Safe or MR Conditional into an MRI
examination room. If necessary, use the Emergency Magnet Off button (see chapter
“Emergency Magnet Off button” on page 70).
End fragment title: 57871 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Med Emerg Procedure

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Unexpected implant Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 Concerning 201.7.9.2.101c 3rd bullet.
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 4/12/2016 1:33:17 PM: Replaces - none, not previously in SRAS
Labeling/IFU}
A procedure must be in place in case an unexpected implant is found during scanning. In
principle, all patients must be adequately screened for implants before they are allowed near
MRI equipment (see chapter “Prescreening” on page 40 and chapter “Contraindications” on
page 41).
End fragment title: 57872 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Unexpected implant
Node title (original): 58534 SYS.Label.IFU.InterventionalBackup ID: 18014448985999883

Status: Released
ECO: Essential Performance - SRAS MR
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
WARNING
When the MR system is used for interventional procedures, the hospital must establish
procedures to complete the intervention or adequately stabilize the patient in case of MR
system failures.
End fragment title: 58534 SYS.Label.IFU.InterventionalBackup

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Cardiac defibrillation Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC6060101-1 Ed3.1 clause 7.2.10

Philips
Ingenia Ambition 67
NOTICE
The system is not designed to withstand cardiac defibrillation procedures. If cardiac
defibrillation is required, remove the patient from the table and outside the 5 gauss line. If an
MRI system part or coil has been exposed to a defibrillation pulse, do not use the system. A
Philips service engineer must replace the affected part.
End fragment title: 57873 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Cardiac defibrillation
2.1.10.2 Fire
Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Fire Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101n

It is the responsibility of the User to:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Establish fire precautions and fire emergency procedures.
• Discuss all fire precautions with the local fire department.
• Comply with all applicable fire regulations.
End fragment title: 57874 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Fire

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Fire training operators Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101p

All operators must be fully aware of and trained in:
• The use of fire extinguishers and other fire-fighting equipment.
• All fire precautions and fire emergency procedures.
End fragment title: 57875 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Fire training operators
Node title (original): How to select fire extinguishers for MRI ID: 18014437196589579
Status: Released
Policy for fire extinguishers

When selecting fire extinguishers, make sure you:
• Provide extinguishers for both electrical and chemical fires.
• Choose extinguishers that suit your site.
• Use MR Safe extinguishers.
• Cannot mix-up the MR Safe extinguishers with MR Unsafe extinguishers.
End fragment title: How to select fire extinguishers for MRI
Philips
68 Ingenia Ambition

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Explosive gases & fire Status: Released
Implemented Measure: HAZ-PH.38
WARNING
Flammable gases or vapors (such as certain anesthetics) near the MRI system can lead to fire
or explosion.
Risk of burns or serious injury
• It is not allowed to use flammable anesthetic mixtures with air, oxygen or nitrous oxide
near the MRI system.
• Philips MRI systems are not AP (Anesthetic-Proof) or APG (Anesthetic-Proof-Category G)
tested.
• Consult an anesthetist if you are not sure whether a certain anesthetic is allowed near
the MRI system.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 57876 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Explosive gases & fire

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Oxygen rich environment Status: Released
WARNING
Oxygen rich environment can lead to fire or explosion
Risk of burns or serious injury
• If ventilation or anesthesia equipment detects an error condition, immediately stop the
scan and remove the patient from the MRI system.
End fragment title: 59625 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Oxygen rich environment
2.1.10.3 Immediate removal of the magnetic field

Status: NotReleased
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 69
2.1.10.3.1 Emergency Magnet Off button

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): Location of Emergency Magnet Off ID: 45036034964371467

buttons Status: Released
Your MRI system has two Emergency Magnet Off buttons:

• Inside the examination room.
• Outside the examination room.
End fragment title: Location of Emergency Magnet Off buttons
Node title (original): 78951 SYS.Label.IFU.(HAZ-MA.60,5, ID: 116999417611

Safety.Emergency.Magnet Off button) Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101m
{ Geenen, Hubert, 12/29/2020 10:13:27 PM: replaces 58525}

Use the Emergency Magnet Off button to immediately remove the static magnetic field within
20 seconds.
Only use the Emergency Magnet Off button when:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• A person is trapped by an object that is attracted by the magnet.
• Fire or another event occurs, that demands immediate entry of emergency personnel or
equipment into the examination room.
• Any other emergency occurs that requires immediate removal of the magnetic field.
For normal and controlled ramp-down, call the number in the Otherwise box on the label or
contact your Philips service engineer. This is applicable when:
• Material is attracted and stuck to the magnet and needs to be removed.
• Other situations occur where non-urgent removal of the static magnetic field is required.
To immediately remove the static magnetic field:
1. Lift the front cover of the protective cap.
2. Press the red Emergency Magnet Off button fully.
Philips
70 Ingenia Ambition
Fig. 8: Emergency Magnet Off button and label.

End fragment title: 78951 SYS.Label.IFU.(HAZ-MA.60,5, Safety.Emergency.Magnet Off button)
Node title (original): Non-Ambition ID: 27021705247627403

Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Using the Emergency Magnet Off button causes a quench. See chapter “Quench” on page 72.
NOTICE
After a quench, a Philips service engineer must perform a system restart. This restart is
expensive and takes two to three days.
End fragment title: Non-Ambition

Status: NotReleased
NOTICE
After an emergency magnetic field removal, the magnet needs time to recover (cool-down).
Typical duration is approx. 48 hours. Contact Philips Service or Philips-certified in-house
engineer to restore the magnetic field.
2.1.10.3.2 Magnet field removal or loss

ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause 201.7.9.2.101s Status: Released
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 71
In an emergency event, you can remove the static field immediately by pressing the Emergency
Magnet Off button.
Please note that in rare occasions also a spontaneous magnet field loss can occur.
When this occurs, the following notification appears at the bottom of the user interface: "The
MR resonance frequency cannot be found". To confirm that the magnet is off-field and that no
attractive force is present, carefully bring a securely held ferromagnetic coin or key close to the
magnet.
Contact call Philip service to restore the magnet field.
2.1.10.3.3 Quench
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause 201.7.9.2.101s Status: Released

Status: Released
NOTICE
Does not apply to BlueSeal systems.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): What is a quench? ID: 27021643478458891

Status: Released
During a quench, a large amount of helium evaporates and is vented outside the building
through a venting system. This causes immediate removal of the static magnetic field. A quench
can occur spontaneously or can be induced if there is an emergency.
To induce a quench, press the Emergency Magnet Off button (see chapter “Emergency Magnet
Off button” on page 70)
End fragment title: What is a quench?

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Quench identification and Status: Released
handling
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101s

During a quench, the system makes a loud noise. This noise is caused by the rapid relief of cold
helium gas through the helium vent pipe. When the magnet quenches, the static magnet field
falls below 10 mT within 20 seconds.
If there is a quench:
• Stay calm.
• Evacuate the patient.
• Call your Philips service engineer to recover system operation.
Philips
72 Ingenia Ambition
After a quench, all MRI scans fail. The following notification appears at the bottom of the user
interface: "The MR resonance frequency cannot be found".
To confirm that the magnet is off-field and that no attractive force is present, carefully bring a
securely held ferromagnetic coin or key close to the magnet.
End fragment title: 57877 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Quench identification and handling
2.1.10.4 Release of helium gas in the examination room

Status: Released

Status: Released
NOTICE
Not applicable to BlueSeal systems

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Helium gas in examination Status: Released
room
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101s
{ Geenen, Hubert, 7/2/2021 1:53:34 PM: Requirement number changed to 82418}

If helium gas is not vented properly after the Magnet Emergency Off button is used or during a
quench (for example if the helium vent pipe is blocked) a high concentration of helium gas may
build up in the examination room. This gas forms clouds of cold mist.
Helium gas dilutes the oxygen in the air. High concentrations of helium gas can lead to
suffocation.
If helium enters the examination room:
• Immediately remove all persons from the examination room.
• Do not switch off air circulation and ventilation in the examination room.
• Do not reenter the examination room until it is confirmed that the air oxygen content is at a
safe level.
For more information about helium gas, see chapter “Helium gas” on page 141.
End fragment title: 82418 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.Emergency.Helium gas in examination room
2.1.10.5 Emergency Table Stop

Status: Released
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 73
Node title (original): Emergency Table Stop ID: 54043235741763851

Status: Released
Your MRI system has an Emergency Table Stop button on each side of the magnet bore:
Node title (original): Emergency button Ingenia Achieva ID: 105396469771
Status: Released
On the UIM
Fig. 9: Emergency Table stop button (1) and the Resume button (2).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 10: Emergency Table stop button (1) and the Manual Mode button (2).
On the VitalScreen
Fig. 11: Emergency Table stop button (1) and the Resume button (2) (Tumble
switch serves to resume tabletop movement).
End fragment title: Emergency button Ingenia Achieva
Depending on the configuration of your system, the patient-operator intercom in the control
room may also have an Emergency Table Stop button.
Node title (original): Emergency Table Stop button function - ID: 45036052007661195-1
Ingenia, Optimus Status: Released
Philips
74 Ingenia Ambition
To stop tabletop movement and the current scan immediately:

► Press the Emergency Stop button.
⇨ The tabletop is released.
⇨ Manual tabletop movement in and out of the bore is possible.
⇨ The red light on the Emergency Stop button switches on.
► To reset the tabletop and re-enable normal operation, press the Resume button.
End fragment title: Emergency Table Stop button function - Ingenia, Optimus
Node title (original): Emergency Table Stop button function - ID: 27021653498180747
Achieva, Multiva Status: Released
To stop tabletop movement immediately:

► Press the Emergency Table Stop button.
⇨ A red LED light next to the Emergency Table stop button switches on.
► To reset the tabletop and re-enable automated operation, press the Manual Mode button.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
The red LED light switches off.
TTR button
Another way to stop automated tabletop movement in and out of the bore, is to press the
Tabletop Release button (TTR).
Automated tabletop movement is stopped and the tabletop can be moved in and out of the
bore manually. The green light next to the Manual Mode button flashes to indicate that the TTR
button is activated. To re-enable automated tabletop movement, press the TTR button again.
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 75
Safety Safety during scanning
Fig. 12: Location of the TTR button

End fragment title: Emergency Table Stop button function - Achieva, Multiva
NOTICE
To stop tabletop movement controlled by software during scanning, press the F12 key or
press the Emergency Table Stop button on the patient-operator intercom.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Emergency Table Stop
Node title (original): Finger Switch Plate - Achieva/Multiva only ID: 18014453953726475
Status: Released
The Finger Switch Plate is located between the bore and the patient support. When the plate is
pushed against the gantry, the Emergency Table Stop button is activated immediately. This
prevents finger pinching and items getting caught during tabletop movement. The red LED light
next to the Emergency Table Stop button switches on.
To reset the tabletop and re-enable normal operation:
► Press the Manual Mode button.
End fragment title: Finger Switch Plate - Achieva/Multiva only
2.2 Safety during scanning

Status: NotReleased
2.2.1 Exposure to EMF

Status: NotReleased
Philips
76 Ingenia Ambition
Safety during scanning Safety
2.2.1.1 Static magnetic field

Status: Released
Node title (original): 24455 SYS.Label.IFU.B0value ID: 18014405311244427

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101h 3rd bullet
The magnetic field strength of the system and the applicable IEC standard are stated in the
About function. To access the About function, on the menu bar, click Help, then About.
Information about the spatial field gradient can be found in the Technical Description.
End fragment title: 24455 SYS.Label.IFU.B0value

SYS.Label.IFU.StaticFieldFirstLevelMode Status: Released
Affix: only 3.0T systems
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101h
Philips 3.0T systems that comply with IEC60601-2-33 second edition are considered to always
operate in first level controlled mode for static magnetic field. Medical supervision is therefore
recommended when scanning with these systems.
End fragment title: 24560 SYS.Label.IFU.StaticFieldFirstLevelMode
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SYS.Label.IFU.StaticFieldPhysiologicalEffects Status: Released
Affix: 3T only - not Multiva/Jaguar
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101h 1st &2nd bullet; IEC 2-33

201.7.9.2.101k 7th bullet
When inside or close to a 3.0T magnet, patients and operators can experience transient effects
of:
• Dizziness
• Nausea
• Vertigo
• Metallic taste in the mouth
These effects can occur particularly during rapid head movement. Effects can vary between
individuals. To avoid these effects, move slowly within the magnetic fringe field and remain
motionless where possible.
In addition, patients should be instructed to avoid moving their heads during the examination.
End fragment title: 24561 SYS.Label.IFU.StaticFieldPhysiologicalEffects

SYS.Label.IFU.Interventional.TaskPerformanceRisk Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24503
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 77
WARNING
Working near or inside the magnet bore (e.g. interventional procedures) may affect task
performance of medical staff.
Reduced attention can be the effect of movement in the magnetic field or peripheral nerve
stimulation. It is recommended that medical staff will evaluate their sensitivity to such
effects, prior to performing the medical procedure.
End fragment title: 24503 SYS.Label.IFU.Interventional.TaskPerformanceRisk
2.2.1.2 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)

Status: NotReleased
The scan procedures always involve the emission of radio frequency (RF) energy. This RF energy
can heat the patient, and hence, is of concern. The Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is the RF
power absorbed by the patient per unit mass expressed in Watts per kg (W/kg).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): 24517 SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.SARRisk ID: 9007206066112395
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24517
NOTICE
Personnel working inside or very close to the magnet during scanning may experience heating
due to RF exposure. Relative SAR levels for occupational exposure can be derived from the
spatial distribution provided in the Technical Description. Exposure can be reduced by keeping
distance from the magnet or by selecting Normal Operating Mode.
End fragment title: 24517 SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.SARRisk
There are different SAR types each with its own limit:
Whole body SAR the SAR averaged over the total mass of the patient.
Head SAR the SAR averaged over the mass of the patient's head.
Local torso SAR the SAR averaged over any 10g of tissue of the patient.
Local extremities SAR the SAR averaged over any 10g of extremity tissue of the patient.
Node title (original): 24546 SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.Effects ID: 18014405348134795

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24546
Philips
78 Ingenia Ambition
The system determines the limiting SAR type of a scan (whole body, head, local torso, or local
extremity) based on the applied coil, table position, and patient orientation. This SAR type is
the first to reach its maximum allowed value and thus poses the strongest restriction on the
scan.
All limiting SAR types can produce:
• Local warming sensations.
• Core temperature increases.
The severity of these effects depends on the SAR value, patient positioning, and the
condition of the patient. To ensure proper patient care, consider both effects.
End fragment title: 24546 SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.Effects
The predicted SAR is calculated for each scan and is a conservative estimate. Information on the
limiting SAR type and expected SAR values for the scan is displayed on the Scan Dashboard and
on the info page:
• SAR / limiting SAR type: x%
• Whole body / level: y W/kg / n
Limiting SAR type = whole body, head, local torso or local extremities.
x % = The predicted SAR expressed as a percentage of the maximum for the limiting SAR type.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
y W/kg = The predicted whole body SAR.

n = Operating mode (normal or first level)
Node title (original): 24456 SYS.Label.IFU.B1+RMS ID: 27021604565989259
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24456
SAR correlates with the average RF deposition in the patient, also denoted as B1+rms. SAR and
B1+rms can be found on the scan information page. Labeling of MR Conditional implants may
specify an upper limit for SAR or B1+rms to control the MR exposure conditions. B1+rms is a
more direct measure of RF-related heating induced in implants than SAR. See chapter ScanWise
Implant for more information about scanning patients with MR Conditional implants and the
ScanWise implant wizard.
Node title (original): ScanWise implant reference ID: 9007249591636875
Status: Released
The maximum value for B1+rms can be limited through ScanWise Implant, see ScanWise
Implant.
End fragment title: ScanWise implant reference
End fragment title: 24456 SYS.Label.IFU.B1+RMS
2.2.1.2.1 Operating modes for SAR

Status: NotReleased
The system recognizes three operating modes, see chapter “Operating modes” on page 63
SYS.Label.IFU.ExplanationUI4SARLevels Status: Released
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 79
IEC Operating mode SAR limits for Volume SAR limits for Transmit Safety measures
Transmit Coils Surface Coils
Level 0 (Normal) • Whole body SAR < 2 • Local torso SAR < 10 • Patient observation.
W/kg W/kg*
• Head SAR < 3.2 W/kg • Local extremities SAR
< 20 W/kg*
Level I (First level • Whole body SAR ≥ 2 • Local torso SAR < 20 • Patient monitoring
controlled) W/kg and < 4 W/kg W/kg* with medical
• Head SAR < 3.2 W/kg • Local extremities SAR expertise.
< 40 W/kg* • Particular caution for
patients at risk.
Level II (Second level • Whole body SAR ≥ 4 • Local torso SAR ≥ 20 The system is limited. Level
controlled) W/kg W/kg* II cannot be reached.
• Head SAR ≥ 3.2 W/kg • Local extremities SAR
≥ 40 W/kg*
* Note: These are the limits for IEC-60601-2-33 3rd edition. Local regulations may require compliance with
IEC-60601-2-33 2nd edition.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Systems operating under 2nd edition always apply Level 0 limits for Transmit Surface Coils.
End fragment title: 56301 SYS.Label.IFU.ExplanationUI4SARLevels

SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.CoreTemperatureAssumedLimits_HAZ-RF. Status: Released
92.3
ISO/IEC: 24544
More information about level 1

The SAR limitations for Level 0 and Level 1 are based on current scientific knowledge that relate
RF power deposition (SAR) to increase of core temperature and local temperature. The system
is designed to limit SAR values such that core temperature increase does not exceed 0.50C in
Level 0, and 1.00C in Level 1.
Core temperature limit values are 390C for Level 0 and 400C for Level 1.
When SAR levels corresponding to Level 1 will be used, a warning message is given and medical
supervision of the patient is required.
If the patient's condition cannot be monitored, or the risk is too high (for example due to
elevated baseline core temperature or reduced thermoregulatory capabilities of the patient,
anesthesia, or unconsciousness), the scan parameters must be changed to give a SAR in Level 0
range (e.g. use SAR mode "low").
When SAR Level 1 is reached, a warning message is given and medical supervision of the patient
is required.
• If the patient's condition cannot be monitored, or the risk is too high (for example due to
elevated baseline core temperature or reduced thermo-regulatory capabilities of the
patient, anesthesia, or unconsciousness), the scan parameters must be changed to lower
the SAR to normal operating mode.
Philips
80 Ingenia Ambition
• If the risk is acceptable, start the scan.
NOTICE
The patient's temperature rise depends on the total RF energy delivered during the
examination (SED). Information on the total (delivered + scheduled) SED is available at the
user interface to support evaluation of the patient's warming.
End fragment title: 68831 SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.CoreTemperatureAssumedLimits_HAZ-RF.92.3
Node title (original): 67343 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-RF. ID: 27021604562000907

30.5, SAR.RoomTemperature.SiteSpecification)_v2 Status: Released
Implemented Measure: HAZ-RF.30.5

ISO/IEC: IEC2-33 201.7.9.2.101j
WARNING
Room temperature too high
Risk of excessive patient heating
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Scan in normal mode if the examination room temperature exceeds 22 °C (72 °F).
• Monitor room temperature using MR Safe or MR Conditional equipment.
• Reassess medical benefit of the scan versus potential risk to the patient.
The system is specified for use with examination room temperatures 18–22 °C (64–72 °F).
Exceeding the upper limit must be a medical judgment as to the patient’s benefit versus
potential risk. High examination room temperature may lead to excessive patient heating,
especially in combination with high RF exposure.
Check the examination room temperature twice a day. If it exceeds 22 °C (72 °F):
• Take action to reduce the examination room temperature.
• Reevaluate the medical judgement of the benefit of scanning versus the potential risk to
the patient.
• Restrict scan SAR values to normal operating mode (whole body SAR < 2W/kg).
• Apply patient ventilation.
End fragment title: 67343 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-RF.30.5, SAR.RoomTemperature.SiteSpecification)_v2

SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.CoreTemperatureConsequences Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24545
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 81
NOTICE
The consequence of SAR-induced increase of the patient's core temperature is that scanning a
patient with an initial core temperature >39.5 °C is contra-indicated, while a patient with an
initial core temperature >39 °C can only be scanned in Normal Mode. Scan duration shall be
limited, and monitoring of the core temperature is recommended.
End fragment title: 24545 SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.CoreTemperatureConsequences
2.2.1.2.1.1 Guidance for Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 01 - restricting all scan protocols to normal ID: 18014468472364299
operating mode Status: Released
Restricting all scan protocols of an examination to normal operating mode for SAR
► To restrict all scan protocols of an examination to Normal Operating Mode for SAR,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

set Allowed SAR Mode to Normal in the New Examination window.
End fragment title: 01 - restricting all scan protocols to normal operating mode
Node title (original): 02 - Alerts before entering first level ID: 27021667727817099
controlled mode Status: Released
Alerts before entering first level controlled mode

SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.OperatingModes.Alerting Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33 201.7.9.2.101g 2nd bullet

When the Allowed SAR mode or PNS mode is not restricted to the normal operating mode and
when the examination enters the first level operating mode, the operator:
1. Is alerted by the system prior to the start of the first scan that exceeds the SAR limit or the
gradient output limit for Normal Operating Mode.
2. Is instructed to ensure medical supervision is in place.
Philips
82 Ingenia Ambition
3. Must actively accept First Level Operating Mode for the rest of the examination, separately
for SAR and for gradient output.
These alerts are given once per examination.
End fragment title: 68830 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.OperatingModes.Alerting
End fragment title: 02 - Alerts before entering first level controlled mode
Node title (original): 03 - Pop ups requesting operator to ID: 45036066236533259

actively accept 1st level controlled mode Status: NotReleased
Pop-ups requesting the operator to actively accept first level controlled mode
SYS.Label.IFU.ExplanationUI4SARFirstLevel Status: Released
Node title (original): 24371 SYS.Label.IFU.Message.HAZ-RF.92.1 ID: 128781174795

Status: Released
Allow First Level Medical supervision of the patient is required. Whole Body
Controlled Operating SAR of scan is between 2 and 4 W/kg.
Mode for SAR? This message is displayed when the scan exceeds SAR limits
Medical supervision of of the Normal Operating Mode. The system enters the First
the patient is required. Level Controlled Operating Mode and the following safety
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Whole Body SAR of scan measures apply:

is between 2 and 4 W/kg. • Patients need to be monitored with medical expertise.
See Instructions for Use. • Particular caution for patients at risk. Press 'cancel' to
Allow all scans which lower SAR by modifying the scan(s) and operate within
require Whole Body SAR Normal Operating Mode. Press 'Confirm & Start' to
> 2 W/kg? continue the examination in First Level Controlled
• Confirm and Start Operating Mode. For more information about SAR please
refer to section “Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)”.
• Cancel
End fragment title: 24371 SYS.Label.IFU.Message.HAZ-RF.92.1
End fragment title: 24476 SYS.Label.IFU.ExplanationUI4SARFirstLevel
Node title (original): 73254 HAZ-RF.92.1 1st level SAR pop-up ID: 18014466985796107
Status: Released
In Italy, the following message is shown on the UI:

Philips
Ingenia Ambition 83
Allow First Level Controlled Medical supervision of the patient is

Operating Mode for SAR? required. Whole Body SAR of scan is
Whole Body SAR of scan is between between 2 and 4 W/kg.
2 and 4 W/kg. This message is displayed when the
SAR level exceeds the limits set by scan exceeds SAR limits of the
Italian regulation (D.M 3-8-93) Normal Operating Mode. The system
Medical supervision of the patient is enters the First Level Controlled
required for this and following high Operating Mode and the following
SAR scans. SAR can be reduced by safety measures apply:
lowering the SAR mode. • Patients need to be monitored
See Instructions for Use. with medical expertise.
Allow all scans which require Whole • Particular caution for patients at
Body SAR > 2 W/kg? risk. Press 'cancel' to lower SAR
by modifying the scan(s) and
• Confirm and Start
operate within Normal
• Cancel Operating Mode. Press 'Confirm
& Start' to continue the
examination in First Level
Controlled Operating Mode. For
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

more information about SAR
please refer to section “Specific
Absorption Rate (SAR)”.
End fragment title: 73254 HAZ-RF.92.1 1st level SAR pop-up
If you decide to cancel, scanning is interrupted to allow you to restrict operation to Normal
Operating Mode. This can be done for each scan:
• Set the imaging parameter SAR allow first level on the Contrast tab to No.
• Set the imaging parameter PNS mode on the Contrast tab to Moderate or Low.
If you intend to restrict all scans to Normal Operating Mode for SAR, re-registration of the
patient allows to select the checkbox for Normal Operating Mode in the New Examination
window.
End fragment title: 03 - Pop ups requesting operator to actively accept 1st level controlled mode
Node title (original): 04 - Warning icon during planning ID: 18014468472418315

Status: Released
Warning icon during planning

When a planned scan protocol requires operation in First Level Controlled Operating Mode, the
warning icon is shown on the user interface, so that you can prepare medical supervision.
Hovering over the warning icon shows the SAR, SED and PNS values for the planned scan.
Philips
84 Ingenia Ambition
Yellow warning sign to indicate that the system will be A tooltip is available to review the planned SED, SAR and
operating in First Level Controlled Operating Mode. PNS levels.
End fragment title: 04 - Warning icon during planning
Node title (original): 05 - Alerts during scanning ID: 18014468472256267

Status: Released
Alerts during scanning

When the scan is active, the numerical values for SAR and gradient output are displayed
together with the warning sign if the output is in First Level Controlled Operating Mode,
independently for SAR or gradient output.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Patient Status Area with SAR and PNS values for the running scan.
The alarm icon is displayed if the value corresponds to First Level Controlled Mode, to remind of the need of
medical supervision.
End fragment title: 05 - Alerts during scanning
2.2.1.2.2 Interventional procedures

Last Content Modificator: Cleven, Harrie ID: 45036044245983115
Status: Released
Node title (original): 24344 SYS.Label.IFU.Notice.HAZ-RF.20.2 ID: 27021604225288459

Affix: Achieva Status: Released
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 85
NOTICE
It is advised to scan in normal mode when scanning without patient ventilation during an
interventional procedure.
End fragment title: 24344 SYS.Label.IFU.Notice.HAZ-RF.20.2
Node title (original): 24343 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.20 ID: 36028803480033547

WARNING
Patient temperature must constantly be monitored during interventional procedures using
MR Conditional equipment.
End fragment title: 24343 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.20
2.2.1.2.3 Clothing and environmental conditions
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.EnvironmentalConditions_v1 Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24471
Increased examination room temperature and humidity hinder the body’s ability to dissipate
excess heat. Likewise, thick clothing and clothing made of synthetic fibers hinders heat
dissipation.
Examination room:
• Room temperature must be kept to 18 - 22°C (64 - 72°F).
Recommended room temperature is 21°C (70°F) .
• Relative humidity must be kept to 40 - 70%.
End fragment title: 69270 SYS.Label.IFU.EnvironmentalConditions_v1
Node title (original): 24537 SYS.Label.IFU.PreventPerspiration ID: 9007206092918027

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24537
Philips
86 Ingenia Ambition
WARNING
Take appropriate action to prevent severe perspiration of the patient.
Severe perspiration of the patient may result in the formation of unintended RF circuits
between body parts and ultimately in burn injuries.
End fragment title: 24537 SYS.Label.IFU.PreventPerspiration

SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.NoPatientCovering Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24547
WARNING
Remove any added insulation (such as blankets).
Added insulation prevents satisfactory dissipation of body heat.
End fragment title: 24547 SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.NoPatientCovering

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SYS.Label.IFU.PatientVentilation.CoreTemp Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24528
WARNING
Verify that the patient ventilation system is working. Pads and accessories must never
obstruct patient airflow in the bore.
Patient core temperature rise can be minimized by adequate ventilation of the patient
space.
End fragment title: 24528 SYS.Label.IFU.PatientVentilation.CoreTemp

SYS.Label.IFU.AvoidSkinToRFCoilContact Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24454
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 87
NOTICE
Avoid direct contact of the patient with the magnet bore covers or Transmit-Receive Coils.
This may cause local heating of the patient.
End fragment title: 24454 SYS.Label.IFU.AvoidSkinToRFCoilContact
2.2.1.2.4 High SAR scanning

Last Content Modificator: Cleven, Harrie ID: 27021645736645259
Status: Released
Node title (original): 24500 SYS.Label.IFU.HighSAREffects ID: 9007206064657803

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24500
It is advised to use high whole-body SAR levels only if absolutely necessary. For patient comfort
lower SAR levels are preferred. Scanning in high SAR mode may result in perspiration and
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

discomfort of the patient.
End fragment title: 24500 SYS.Label.IFU.HighSAREffects
Node title (original): 24339 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.12.2 ID: 18014404970107019

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24339
WARNING
For High SAR scanning it is required to use the patient ventilation system.
End fragment title: 24339 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.12.2
Node title (original): 24551 SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.PatientDress ID: 9007206093520907

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24551
Philips
88 Ingenia Ambition
WARNING
Patients who are exposed to high SAR values must be dressed in light clothing (e.g. light
pajamas, nightshirt or T-shirt).
End fragment title: 24551 SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.PatientDress

SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.NormalModeLimit.Incubator Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24548
WARNING
For scanning a baby in an incubator it is advised to only scan in normal operating mode.
This will avoid a too high SAR value for the baby in the warm and humid incubator
environment.
End fragment title: 24548 SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.NormalModeLimit.Incubator

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): 24555 SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.ScanBreaks ID: 9007206093652363

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24555
NOTICE
For high SAR scanning it is advised to plan breaks between the scans for the patient to cool
down.
Breaks can be created by planning low SAR scans between the high SAR scans.
End fragment title: 24555 SYS.Label.IFU.SAR.ScanBreaks
Node title (original): 24505 SYS.Label.IFU.LowSARAdvice ID: 9007206064782731

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24505
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 89
WARNING
Medical supervision is required for all scans in first level controlled mode.
Special attention is required for young, pregnant and elderly patients to prevent increase of
body core temperature. Select low SAR sequences whenever possible.
End fragment title: 24505 SYS.Label.IFU.LowSARAdvice
2.2.1.2.5 Specific Energy Dose (SED)

Status: NotReleased
During an MRI examination, RF energy is transferred to the body, potentially resulting in

warming sensations. The patient temperature rise is proportional to the total energy delivered
to the patient (SED, expressed as kJ/kg). It is determined by the SAR and scan duration. SAR is
the rate of delivered energy expressed in Watts/kg, represented as W/kg. Limiting the amount
of RF energy (SED) delivered to the patient, limits the temperature rise in the patient.
Specific Energy Dose is a comfort measure and provides feedback on the RF energy delivered to
the patient. In general, a delivered SED value > 3.5 kJ/kg may be uncomfortable for some
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

patients. The Philips recommended maximum for SED is 7.0 kJ/kg. Patient comfort during
scanning is affected by the condition of the patient and must be taken into account. A rise in
body temperature can be a hazard to a patient with impaired thermoregulation. Recommended
maximum SED for this group is 3 kJ/kg although preferably SED is kept below 2 kJ/kg. Serious
discomfort is reported by healthy volunteers at values greater than 7.0 - 8.5 kJ/kg.
Node title (original): 24527 SYS.Label.IFU.PatientVentilation ID: 18014405321008139
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24527
NOTICE
Adequate patient cooling (for example by using in-bore patient ventilation and making sure
examination room temperature is within the specified range) is necessary in order to keep
patient comfort within desired limits. Also see chapter “Clothing and environmental
conditions” on page 86.
End fragment title: 24527 SYS.Label.IFU.PatientVentilation
Display of SED on the console

The SED is visible in the Exam Dashboard. The SED bar has a scale of 0.0 to 7.0 kJ/kg. The bar
shows the scheduled SED in light grey and the delivered SED in dark grey. Once the delivered
SED exceeds 3.5 kJ/kg the color changes to yellow.
Information about SED is also available during planning. The SED of each scan is available on the
info page.
Philips
90 Ingenia Ambition
Delivered SED The SED of the completed scans including the SED of the currently running scan.
Scheduled SED The SED of the scans that are scheduled for the examination.
Total SED The total amount of the delivered and scheduled SED.
Node title (original): SAR SED PNS screengrabs and explanation ID: 116847401227-1
Status: Released
• SED, SAR and • Regular SED • Regular SED • SED exceeded • SED, SAR and
PNS with no (medium), SAR PNS exceeded
data and PNS
End fragment title: SAR SED PNS screengrabs and explanation
Node title (original): Alarm High total SED - needs to be added ID: 9007247586172171
to SRAS Labeling Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Once the total SED exceeds 7.0 kJ/kg, a pop-up appears:

High total SED (High total SED)
Total (delivered + scheduled) SED exceeds the
recommended maximum of 7.0 kJ/kg.
See Instructions for Use
Lower the scan time or the SAR of the remaining scans
to reduce the SED.
Continue without modification (Continue without
modification)
Modify examination (Modify examination)
► Click Continue without modification (Continue without modification) to start the

examination as scheduled.
► Click Modify examination (Modify examination) to lower the scan time or the SAR of the
scheduled scans before continuing the examination so that total SED is lower for the
patient.
End fragment title: Alarm High total SED - needs to be added to SRAS Labeling
Node title (original): Alarm Recommended SED exceeded - ID: 9007247586173195

needs to be added to SRAS Labeling Status: Released
Once delivered SED exceeds 7.0 kJ/kg:

Philips
Ingenia Ambition 91
• A pop-up informs you that recommended SED maximum value will be exceeded with the
next scan.
• An arrow appears at the end of the SED bar.
• An alarm symbol appears in front of the SED value in the Patient Status Area.
Recommended SED exceeded (Recommended SED
exceeded)
Total (delivered + scheduled) SED exceeds the
recommended maximum of 7.0 kJ/kg in the next scan.
See Instruction for Use.
If clinical benefit exceeds the risk of high SED:
• Make sure medical supervision is in place.
Accept high SED, continue scanning (Accept high SED,
continue scanning)
Stop scanning (Stop scanning)
► Click Accept high SED, continue scanning (Accept high SED, continue scanning)to continue
with the scheduled scans and a SED above the recommended level.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Click Stop scanning (Stop scanning)to stop.
End fragment title: Alarm Recommended SED exceeded - needs to be added to SRAS Labeling
2.2.1.3 Gradient system

Status: Released
2.2.1.3.1 Gradient field strength (gradient output)

Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.GradientOutputPhysiologicalEffects Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24481
The use of fast switching and high gradients may lead to peripheral nerve stimulation (PNS)
during the scan. The location and nature of the PNS differs for each individual. PNS can cause a
tingling sensation or superficial twitching. Some patients may report such sensations as pain,
when scanning in first level controlled operating mode.
Philips
92 Ingenia Ambition
NOTICE
Very high gradient output could even cause cardiac nerve stimulation.
Literature indicates that threshold levels for cardiac stimulation are much higher than for
peripheral nerve stimulation. Peripheral nerve stimulation is possible. Cardiac stimulation is
never induced by the exposures from the gradient switching.
End fragment title: 24481 SYS.Label.IFU.GradientOutputPhysiologicalEffects
2.2.1.3.1.1 Gradient output

Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.GradientOutputSpecification Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24482
During the scan definition, the gradient output is calculated for this scan (PNS) and compared
with mean threshold level. This mean threshold PNS is defined as the onset of sensation, and
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
refers to the level at which 50% of the people start to experience PNS.
End fragment title: 24482 SYS.Label.IFU.GradientOutputSpecification
During the scan definition, the gradient output is calculated for this scan (PNS) and compared
with mean threshold level. This mean threshold PNS is defined as the onset of sensation, and
refers to the level at which 50% of the people start to experience PNS.
The expected PNS level is displayed on the info page and expressed as a percentage of the
mean threshold level for PNS as calculated by the system for the sequence prepared for the
patient.
PNS/level x%/n
x % = The predicted PNS value is expressed as a percentage of the mean threshold level for PNS.
n = Operating mode (‘Normal’ or ‘Level I’)
2.2.1.3.1.2 PNS levels

Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.GradientSystemComplianceSpecification_v1 Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24483
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 93
This MR system employs a Whole Body Gradient System, and the Gradient Output related to
potential peripheral nerve stimulation is defined in a cylinder of 20 cm radius around the
magnet bore's center line.
End fragment title: 68889 SYS.Label.IFU.GradientSystemComplianceSpecification_v1
Node title (original): 24271 SYS.Label.IFU.PNS levels.HAZ-GR.36 ID: 18014405140092427

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24271
The system recognizes three PNS levels, corresponding to chapter “Operating modes” on page
63:
IEC Operating mode Gradient output Safety measures
Level 0 Gradient output ≤ 80% of the mean • Routine patient observation

(Normal) threshold level
Level I 80% of the mean threshold level < • Patient monitoring with medical
(First level controlled) Gradient output ≤ 100% of the mean expertise
threshold level • Particular caution for patients at risk
Level II Gradient > 100% of the mean threshold The system is limited to a maximum
(Second level controlled) level gradient output of 100% of the mean
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

threshold level.
Level II cannot be reached
End fragment title: 24271 SYS.Label.IFU.PNS levels.HAZ-GR.36
More information about Level 0

In Level 0 the probability of PNS is very low.
More information about Level I

SYS.Label.IFU.ExplanationUI4PNSFirstLevel Status: Released
When Level I is reached (predicted gradient output exceeds 80% of the mean threshold level) a
warning message is displayed:
Philips
94 Ingenia Ambition
Allow First Level Controlled Operating Medical supervision of the patient is

Mode for PNS? required. Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
Medical supervision of the patient is of scan is between 80 and 100 %.
required. Peripheral Nerve Stimulation This message is displayed when the
of scan is between 80 and 100 %. scan exceeds PNS limits of the Normal
See Instructions for Use. Operating Mode. The system enters
the First level controlled operating
Allow all scans which require PNS >
mode and the following safety
80%?
measures apply:
• Confirm and Start
• Patients need to be monitored
• Cancel with medical expertise.
• Particular caution for patients at
risk. Press 'cancel' to lower PNS by
modifying the scan(s) and operate
within Normal Operating Mode.
Press 'Confirm & Start' to continue
the examination in First Level
Controlled Operating Mode. For
more information about PNS
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
please refer to section “PNS

levels”.
The operator has to decide whether to accept the parameter settings for execution of the scan
or to cancel. If cancelled the parameter settings can be modified to decrease the gradient
output below the PNS limit.
Safety Measures
For scans which may produce peripheral nerve stimulation attention must be paid to the
following:
• Inform the patient that peripheral nerve stimulation may occur and describe the nature of
the sensation.
• Maintain permanent contact with the patient during the scan either directly or via an
observation monitor and intercom.
• Terminate the scan when the patient calls for attention via the nurse call.
• Patients should be positioned with the arms alongside the body to reduce the likelihood of
Peripheral Nerve Stimulation.
End fragment title: 69440 SYS.Label.IFU.ExplanationUI4PNSFirstLevel
Node title (original): 24514 SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.PNSRisk ID: 9007206066022283

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24514
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 95
NOTICE
Personnel working inside or very close to the magnet during scanning may experience
Peripheral Nerve Stimulation. Occupational exposure can be derived from the spatial
distribution of the Gradient Output (dB/dt) provided in the Technical Description.
Exposure can be reduced by keeping distance from the magnet or by scanning in Normal
Operating Mode.
End fragment title: 24514 SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.PNSRisk
2.2.1.3.1.3 Defining a scan

Status: Released
The potential for peripheral nerve stimulation depends on the maximum gradient strength,
slew rate and timing of the scan. When defining a scan, the parameter ‘PNS mode’ is used to
control the maximum allowed gradient output. The actual gradient output is displayed on the
Scan Dashboard and on the Info page and is dependent on other parameters.
Three levels are available:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• "low": the maximum allowed gradient output will be limited to 60% of the mean threshold
level, i.e. the system will always operate in normal operating mode and the probability of
PNS is very low.
• "moderate": the maximum allowed gradient output will be limited to 80% of the mean
threshold level, i.e. the system will always operate in normal operating mode. The
probability of PNS is low and if experienced it is mostly not painful.
• "high": the maximum allowed gradient output will be limited to 100% of the mean
threshold level, i.e. the system may operate in the first level controlled operating mode.
The probability of PNS is about 50% and may be experienced as painful. However, the
patient may have more tolerance for PNS when properly informed and motivated.
2.2.1.3.2 Acoustic noise protection

Status: Released
Node title (original): 75276 SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection_v1 ID: 18014406710949387

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24484
Basic hearing protection must be worn by the patient during scanning. Such hearing protection
is provided by appropriately fitted earplugs with sufficient damping (>30 dB). Additional use of
the Philips headset at all times is recommended.
NOTICE
Philips
Typical damping characteristic of the Philips' headset is 20 dB in the 1 kHz range.
96 Ingenia Ambition
WARNING
Always apply hearing protection to the patient and anyone else present in the examination
room before start scanning.
Without hearing protection, noise levels may be high enough to cause discomfort or result
in temporary or even permanent loss of hearing.
End fragment title: 75276 SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection_v1

SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.Instructions Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24488
WARNING
Hearing protection shall be used for the safety of the Patient. This hearing protection shall
be sufficient to reduce the A-weighted r.m.s. sound pressure level below 99 dB(A); Pay
special attention to the correct placement of the earplugs. Positioning of the headset is also
critical for additional acoustic damping.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
For scanning of patients to whom the earplugs or headset cannot be applied adequately
(e.g. neonates and babies), special attention is required to use other means to obtain
maximum hearing protection for these patients.
WARNING
Special training for the operator is required for fitting earplugs for optimal hearing
protection.
Follow the fitting instructions of the earplug manufacturer to assure maximum noise
protection.
End fragment title: 24488 SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.Instructions
Node title (original): 24485 SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection. ID: 116998180235

30dB Status: Released
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 97
WARNING
It is MANDATORY to use earplugs that are specified by the manufacturer to provide acoustic
damping of 30 dB, or better.
End fragment title: 24485 SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.30dB
Node title (original): 24268 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-GR.16 ID: 45036002996400395

Status: Released
Implemented Measure: 24268
ISO/IEC: 24268
WARNING
End fragment title: 24268 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-GR.16
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.Anesthesia Status: Released
WARNING
Always apply hearing protection to anesthetized patients.
Anesthetized patients are more sensitive to high sound pressure, so that hearing protection
for these patients must not be omitted.
End fragment title: 24486 SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.Anesthesia

SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.Double Status: Released
WARNING
It is MANDATORY to use earplugs when scanning with the gradient mode set to maximum.
For maximum patient comfort it is recommended to use both earplugs and headset.
End fragment title: 24487 SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.Double

SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.LocalRegulations Status: Released
Philips
98 Ingenia Ambition
WARNING
The sound level in the control area must comply with local regulations concerning exposure
to noise at work.
End fragment title: 24489 SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.LocalRegulations

SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.PersonnelInRoom Status: Released
WARNING
Personnel must wear hearing protection when present in the MR examination room during
scanning.
End fragment title: 24490 SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.PersonnelInRoom

SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.SpecialGroups Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
WARNING
Due to increased anxiety, accepted sound level may still be of concern to pregnant women,
to neonates, infants and young children and to elderly patients.
NOTICE
Enable SofTone to reduce acoustic noise.
Always use hearing protection, even when SofTone is enabled.
End fragment title: 24491 SYS.Label.IFU.HearingProtection.SpecialGroups
Message on the screen

Node title (original): 24376 SYS.Label.IFU.Message.HAZ-GR.57.4 ID: 18014406311784715
Status: Obsolete
The following message is displayed when the predicted sound level exceeds the maximum level
for pediatric patients (age < 3 years).
Verify that appropriate hearing protection is applied to the patient.
The predicted sound pressure level of this scan is xx dB higher than recommended for pediatric patients (99 dB).
xx = the calculated sound pressure level for current scan - 99dB

Click:
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 99
• Cancel to modify the scan.

• Confirm & start to accept the higher sound level and to start the scan.
End fragment title: 24376 SYS.Label.IFU.Message.HAZ-GR.57.4

SYS.Label.IFU.AcousticNoise.MeasurementMethod Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24436
Node title (original): with IEC standards ID: 18014442508266635

Status: Released
Acoustic noise burden is characterized by the measurement method from NEMA MS 4:2010, to
establish A-weighted RMS sound pressure levels, LAeq. Representative measurements for
maximum acoustic noise are performed on an MR system installed according to specifications.
Resulting acoustic noise levels comply with regulations from IEC 60601-2-33.
End fragment title: with IEC standards
Node title (original): with Chinese standards ID: 9007243253527179

Status: Released
Acoustic noise burden is characterized by the measurement method from NEMA MS 4:2010, to
establish A-weighted RMS sound pressure levels, LAeq. Representative measurements for
maximum acoustic noise are performed on an MR system installed according to specifications.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Resulting acoustic noise levels comply with regulations from YY 0319.
End fragment title: with Chinese standards
End fragment title: 24436 SYS.Label.IFU.AcousticNoise.MeasurementMethod
Sound level meter settings:

• Detector: r.m.s.
• Time weighting: fast or slow.
• Frequency weighting: A-weighting.
• Measurement duration: >20s.
2.2.1.4 Occupational exposure to EMF

Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.ScreeningAndInstructions Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24518
Philips
100 Ingenia Ambition

NOTICE
All personnel that need to enter the MR examination room must be screened and instructed
concerning the risk factors associated with working in the MR environment. Specific risk
factors include magnetic materials, pacemakers, pregnancy and sensitivity to movement in
high magnetic fields.
End fragment title: 24518 SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.ScreeningAndInstructions

SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.B0EffectTraining Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24510
Similarly, keeping distance when possible will limit exposure to the main magnetic field.
End fragment title: 24510 SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.B0EffectTraining

SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.EMFInstructions Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24511
Workers shall be informed that occupational exposure to RF and gradient fields is limited to
those present in the examination room when the system is scanning.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 24511 SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.EMFInstructions
Node title (original): 24513 SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.EMFRisk ID: 9007206065905803

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24513
Current scientific evidence does not indicate harm related to occupational exposure, but
exposure can be limited by keeping distance from the MR system.
End fragment title: 24513 SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.EMFRisk

SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.EMFLocalRegulations Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24512
NOTICE
In some countries legislation may exist covering occupational limits for exposure to EMF
(Electro Magnetic Fields).
These regulations may be stricter than those adopted by the IEC (International Electrical
Committee) and used to design the MR systems.
Refer to the Technical Description for applicable EMF exposure values in and around the MR
system.
End fragment title: 24512 SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.EMFLocalRegulations
Node title (original): Directive 2013/35/EU ID: 9007251415582475

Status: Released
Philips
Ingenia Ambition 101

Further information related to exposure and Directive 2013/35/EU can be found in the
Technical Description.
End fragment title: Directive 2013/35/EU
2.2.1.4.1 Pregnant MRI workers

Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.Pregnancy Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24515
Whereas no epidemiological evidence exists to date concerning adverse health effects on the
fetus, it is prudent for pregnant workers to minimize exposure to the magnetic fields.
End fragment title: 24515 SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.Pregnancy

SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.Pregnancy.LocalRegulations Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24516
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Local regulations may consider the fetus as member of the general public, and strict exposure
limits may prohibit pregnant workers to approach the MR System.
End fragment title: 24516 SYS.Label.IFU.MRWorkers.Pregnancy.LocalRegulations
2.2.2 Coil and cable positioning

Status: Released
Risk factors
The MR system dissipates energy from various sources. This can lead to a temperature rise of
components surrounding the patient such as cables and RF coils. Usually the end temperature
of these components do not exceed body temperature. In these situations there is no concern
regarding patient safety.
The most important source of energy is the RF energy emitted by the transmit coil. Safety
issues on the direct deposition of RF energy into the patient are described in .
When electrical cables are close to the patient (e.g. RF coil cables) or connected to the patient
by electrodes (e.g. ECG cables), care must be taken to avoid situations of components heating
up to high end temperatures.
Node title (original): 81688 SYS.Label.IFU.ACR2020.Pads ID: 9007316255412875
Status: Released
Philips

WARNING
To help safeguard against thermal injuries or burns, pads meeting the MR system
manufacturer’s specifications should be placed between the patient’s skin and any transmit
RF coil. These pads protect the patient from proximity to the transmit RF coil, to ensure
spacing between the transmit coil and the patient’s tissues.
End fragment title: 81688 SYS.Label.IFU.ACR2020.Pads
Node title (original): 24363 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF- ID: 36028803479628171

MIRA.17 Status: Released
Affix: Ingenia Optimus
ISO/IEC: 24363
WARNING
Never position heavy objects or let patients sit on the posterior coil cover of the patient
support.
Heavy weight load can damage the coil, which may result in excessive heating and patient
burns when scanning. The posterior coil cover is visible when the tabletop is removed or
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
moved into the magnet bore.
End fragment title: 24363 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF-MIRA.17

04b, HAZ-RF.87) Status: Released
WARNING
Avoid placing cable loops and twisted cables (RF coil cables and ECG leads) inside the body
coil (RF area).
Loops can cause excessive heating of the cables which may result in burns upon contact to
patient’s skin. The cables must be routed parallel to the axis of the bore.
WARNING
Avoid routing of the RF coil cable assembly in proximity to the RF transmit coil. Avoid direct
contact of the patient’s skin with the RF coil cable assembly.
Failing to do so may result in excessive local heating and ultimately in skin burns.
Positioning of the RF coil cable assembly must be done with care. Keep a distance to the
patient’s skin of at least 2 cm. Use the special spacer or pads of the standard accessory set
where the cable assembly may touch the skin.
Philips

WARNING
The combined use of RF coils, high SAR levels and direct skin contact of the coils cables may
cause local cable heating and can lead to skin burns.
End fragment title: 24337 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-RF.04b, HAZ-RF.87)

SYS.Label.IFU.AvoidSkinToRFCableContact_2 Status: Released
WARNING
Leave a 2 cm distance between the patient’s skin and the RF cables and interface boxes. Use
pads from the accessory set.
End fragment title: 24453 SYS.Label.IFU.AvoidSkinToRFCableContact_2
Node title (original): HG - Keep > 2 cm distance between coil ID: 9007206294815243
cables Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

WARNING
Ensure sufficient distance (> 2 cm at all positions) between coil cables when routed in
parallel at the same side of the patient.
End fragment title: HG - Keep > 2 cm distance between coil cables
Node title (original): HG - Do not bend the coil ID: 9007206294816779

Status: Released
WARNING
Never attempt to bend or force the coil into an abnormal shape.
End fragment title: HG - Do not bend the coil
Node title (original): HG - Do not place coil perpendicular to ID: 9007206294818315

main magnetic field Status: Released
Philips

WARNING
Do not place the coil perpendicular to the main magnetic field.
End fragment title: HG - Do not place coil perpendicular to main magnetic field
Node title (original): 24450 SYS.Label.IFU.AvoidCableNearCoil ID: 9007206054695051

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24450
WARNING
Always run the cable directly away from the region of interest.
End fragment title: 24450 SYS.Label.IFU.AvoidCableNearCoil
Node title (original): 24480 SYS.Label.IFU.FixateRFCable ID: 45036003078263563

Affix: Optimus Achieva Ingenia Multiva Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ISO/IEC: 24480
WARNING
Position and secure the cable in the grooves of the tabletop.
End fragment title: 24480 SYS.Label.IFU.FixateRFCable
Node title (original): 24351 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.34.1, ID: 54043201989106059

24362 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF-MIRA.03a.2 Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24351

MIRA.03a.2 Status: Released
{ Geenen, Hubert, 11/29/2018 1:10:46 PM: 24351 and 24362 are identical}
Node title (original): 24525 SYS.Label.IFU.NoUnconnectedCoils ID: 36028815973277963
Status: Released
Node title (original): Reused in multiple requirements ID: 109009118859

Status: Released
Philips

WARNING
Unconnected coils on the tabletop while scanning.
Risk of patient injury and damage to unconnected coils.
• Connect all coils on the tabletop to the system before scanning, even if the coils are not
used for scanning.
End fragment title: Reused in multiple requirements

End fragment title: 24525 SYS.Label.IFU.NoUnconnectedCoils
End fragment title: 24362 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF-MIRA.03a.2
End fragment title: 24351 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.34.1, 24362 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF-MIRA.03a.2
Node title (original): HG - Combination of receive coils is ID: 9007206294819851

restricted by the software Status: Released
NOTICE
Combination of receive coils is restricted by the software.
In case of combination of RF receive coils, cable handling is even more critical to avoid
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

excessive local heating.
End fragment title: HG - Combination of receive coils is restricted by the software

SYS.Label.IFU.AvoidRFCoilToRFCableContact Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24451
WARNING
Always position the cables of the coils parallel to the direction in which the table moves. A
minimum of 2 centimeters clearance must be secured between the cable and the bore
covers (as well as between the cable and the patient).
End fragment title: 24451 SYS.Label.IFU.AvoidRFCoilToRFCableContact
Node title (original): HG - Use the dedicated pads and ID: 9007206294821387
mattresses Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
Always use dedicated pads and mattresses provided with the coils.
End fragment title: HG - Use the dedicated pads and mattresses
2.2.2.1 Avoiding Loops

Status: Released
Ensure clearance between body parts and the bore wall, primarily for air flow. Avoid large area
contact between body parts and the bore wall.
A dry, small rolled towel (made from non-conductive material, for example linen or cotton) can
be used to create a clearance of more than 5 mm between body parts and bore. This ensures
only a minimum disruption of airflow through the bore.
Wrapping in sheets is inadequate, because it does not ensure air flow over the body part and
traps in heat.
SYS.Label.IFU.PreventRFCurrentLoops Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ISO/IEC: IEC 2-33, clause 201.07.9.2.101.j
WARNING
If patient body parts touch, high-frequency current loops may form within the body.
Risk of patient burns
• Secure a minimum of 2 cm clearance between body parts.
• When necessary, use the positioning aids to obtain sufficient clearance.
End fragment title: 24538 SYS.Label.IFU.PreventRFCurrentLoops
Current loops are formed when two parts of the human body come into contact (skin to skin) or
almost come into contact, e.g.:
• Both thighs are in contact.
• Both knees are in contact.
• Both ankles are in contact.
• Arms and hands touching other body parts.
• Both hands are in contact. This especially is possible for scanning with breast coils when
patients are imaged lying prone with both arms extended above the head.
Philips

Fig. 13: Current loops (curved arrows) and locations where heating can occur (black arrows).
Contact between body parts must be prevented as shown in the picture below:
• Example 1: positioning the patient appropriately. No skin to skin contact.
• Example 2: padding between arms and body.
• Example 3: padding between thighs and ankle.
A minimum of 2 cm clearance must be secured. When necessary, use the positioning aids to
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

obtain sufficient clearance .
Fig. 14: Avoiding current loops.
2.2.3 Tabletop movement

Status: NotReleased
2.2.3.1 Mechanical safety

Status: Released
Philips

Node title (original): 67546 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS. ID: 9007205886749835

08_v1 Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24300
WARNING
Special care must be taken that no objects or body parts (e.g. patient in a wheelchair) are
present near the patient support while lowering the patient support.
Objects can get trapped between patient support and floor which may lead to damage or
personal injury.
End fragment title: 67546 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS.08_v1
Node title (original): HG - Do not remove covers from the ID: 9007206293581707
patient support Status: Released
WARNING
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Do not remove the covers from the patient support as it contains moving parts.
Removing the covers could lead to serious or fatal injury.
End fragment title: HG - Do not remove covers from the patient support
2.2.3.1.1 Emergency Stop button

Affix: All ID: 9007247229957387
Last Content Modificator: Drunen, Jenneke van Status: Released
Your MRI system has Emergency Table Stop buttons. See chapter “Emergency Table Stop” on
page 73.
2.2.3.1.2 Tabletop movement in the event of an electrical power failure

Status: Released
In the event of an electrical power failure, the tabletop is automatically released. The tabletop
can be moved manually out of the magnet.
When electric power is re-established the tabletop is engaged again.
Please note that there might be events where table movement is not possible even in manual
mode, refer to chapter “Moving the patient into the magnet bore” on page 113.
Philips

2.2.3.1.3 Horizontal tabletop movement

Status: Released
If horizontal tabletop movement is not functioning properly the patient support switches
automatically into 'manual mode': The Manual mode button on the UIM flashes.
Move the tabletop manually out of the system into its end position. The patient support is reset
and the button stops flashing.
Press the ‘Manual mode’ to switch to motorized movement again: horizontal movement of the
tabletop is re-enabled.
Fig. 15: Manual mode
2.2.3.1.4 Tabletop movement in the event of failure, TTR button
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Affix: Achieva/Multiva ID: 36028844993486475
Fig. 16: TableTop Release Button (TTR).
Philips

Fig. 17: TableTop Release Button (TTR).
Node title (original): 24330 SYS.Label.IFU.Instruction.HAZ-PS. ID: 18014405302035211

80.2 Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24330
In the event of failure, tabletop movement can be blocked.

When this occurs do the following:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Press the red TTR button to free the tabletop. All motorized tabletop movement is
interrupted and the tabletop can then be moved manually in and out of the bore.
• Press the TTR button again to re-enable motorized movement.
Node title (original): Excluded for Prodiva ID: 68112676747
Status: Released
The motor driven vertical and horizontal movements are interrupted when the finger switch
plate is pressed.
End fragment title: Excluded for Prodiva
End fragment title: 24330 SYS.Label.IFU.Instruction.HAZ-PS.80.2
2.2.3.1.5 Manual override switch

Affix: All ID: 36028844993796619
Last Content Modificator: Heuvel, Martina van den Status: Released
If the control electronics break down, it will still be possible to move the patient support to the
highest position and continue scanning. The ‘Manual override’ switch is located at the magnet
end under the patient support.
If the switch is activated the patient support will move up and stop at its highest position.
Node title (original): all systems except Jaguar ID: 27021645739174283
Status: Released
Philips

Fig. 18: Manual override switch.

End fragment title: all systems except Jaguar
Node title (original): Jaguar image ID: 18014446484481931

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 19: Manual override switch.
End fragment title: Jaguar image
2.2.3.1.6 Retractable hooks for infusion bags or bottles

Affix: Multiva Jaguar ID: 18014446484530571
Node title (original): Multiva image ID: 9007247229908491

Affix: Multiva Status: Released
Philips

Fig. 20: Retractable hooks for infusion bags or bottles are located at the top of the magnet front cover.
End fragment title: Multiva image
Node title (original): 24336 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ- ID: 18014405302220683

PS.Multiva/Omniva.1 Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24336
WARNING
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
The maximum weight load for the retractable hooks is 5 kg.
End fragment title: 24336 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS.Multiva/Omniva.1
2.2.3.2 Moving the patient into the magnet bore

Status: NotReleased
NOTICE
The operator must be aware that the patient may have claustrophobic reactions when moved
into the magnet.
A panicking patient may hurt itself or damage equipment.
Node title (original): HG - Move patient table slowly in manual ID: 9007206295399691
Philips

WARNING
In manual mode move the table slowly into the magnet bore.
Fast movement can cause mispositioning and may result in misdiagnoses.
End fragment title: HG - Move patient table slowly in manual mode
Node title (original): 24319 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS.55.2 ID: 18014405301502987-1

Affix: Achieva / Multiva Jaguar (equivalent to PH.04) Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24319
WARNING
Before starting a scan which initiates tabletop movement, always check that nothing can get
caught or hit during tabletop movement.
Check patient, patient extremities, clothing, equipment and accessories. Guide cables and
intravenous lines.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 24319 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS.55.2
Node title (original): 24291 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PH.04, ID: 45036002697964939-1

HAZ-PS.133.mira.4) Status: Released
Affix: Ingenia Optimus (equivalent to PS.55.2)
WARNING
Check patient, patient extremities, clothing, equipment and positioning aids. Guide cables
and intravenous lines.
End fragment title: 24291 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PH.04, HAZ-PS.133.mira.4)

ISO/IEC: 24306
Philips

WARNING
Verify if an urine bag is present at the patient. Empty the urine bag before starting an
examination.
Spilled urine can form a conductive path possibly resulting in an electric shock.

186.mira Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24303
WARNING
Verify that no blankets, sheets, pillows or clothing hang over the front and end side of the
tabletop or are wrapped around it.
These objects may get caught between tabletop and patient support during table
movement. This can block tabletop movement even when in manual mode.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 24303 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS.186.mira
Node title (original): HG - Avoid contact between patient and ID: 9007206295401227
RF transmit coil Status: Released
WARNING
Avoid contact of the patient’s body or extremities with the RF transmit coil or system body
coil surface.
This may result in excessive local heating.
End fragment title: HG - Avoid contact between patient and RF transmit coil
Node title (original): 24331 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ- ID: 9007206047330443-1

PS.MAM.18, HAZ-PS.58, HAZ-PS.200.1) Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24331
Philips

WARNING
Due care must be taken to verify that no part of the patient's body, hair, clothing, cables or
infusion lines can get trapped or injured by any part of the equipment.
End fragment title: 24331 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PS.MAM.18, HAZ-PS.58, HAZ-PS.200.1)
Messages on the screen

Node title (original): 82604 SYS.Label.IFU.HAZ-VP.33a ID: 18014406311791371
Status: NotReleased
ISO/IEC: 82604
The following message is displayed before table movement is initiated.

Verify that the tabletop can move without harm to the patient. This scan can only start if the table is moved.
Verify that nothing can get trapped or caught when starting table movement: Infusion lines, leads, extremities, hair,
blankets etc.
Click:
• Cancel to modify the patient preparation.
• Select one of the two options:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

– Allow the tabletop to move for this scan only.
– Allow the tabletop to move with normal speed for all scans.
• Followed by clicking Confirm & Start to initiate table movement and to start the
examination. Depending the previous selection the:
– Examination is paused after the first scan, the message is displayed again for the next
scan.
– Examination is started with automatic table movement for all scans.
End fragment title: 82604 SYS.Label.IFU.HAZ-VP.33a
Node title (original): Note automatic tabletop movement all ID: 45036044252971915
scans Status: Released
Affix: All systems
Philips

NOTICE
If you allow automatic tabletop movement for all scans, you still have to confirm tabletop
movement in some special cases.
The permission for automatic tabletop movement is withdrawn:
• when a local movement (manual table movement or toggle-switch controlled, or finger
pinching) is performed or occurs at the magnet, or
• when a scan or movement is stopped from the operator console.
The next automatic movement must be confirmed again.
End fragment title: Note automatic tabletop movement all scans
Node title (original): 24415 SYS.Label.IFU.Message.HAZ-PS. ID: 9007207057117707

200.2b Status: Obsolete
ISO/IEC: 24415

Careful positioning of the patient is required.
This scan can also start without table movement. However, for optimal image quality table movement is advised.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
blankets etc.

• Select one of the three options:
– Allow the tabletop to move for this scan only.
– Allow the tabletop to move with normal speed for all scans.
– Do not allow tabletop movement.
• Followed by clicking Confirm & Start to initiate table movement and to start the
examination. Depending the previous selection the:
– Examination is paused after the first scan, the message is displayed again for the next
scan.
– Examination is started with automatic table movement for all scans.
End fragment title: 24415 SYS.Label.IFU.Message.HAZ-PS.200.2b

SYS.Label.IFU.Message.Tabletop.FastMovement Status: Obsolete
ISO/IEC: 24378

Verify that the tabletop can move fast without harm to the patient. Be aware that the tabletop can make long
strokes.
blankets etc.
Philips

Click:
• Confirm & Start to initiate table movement and to start the current scan.
End fragment title: 24378 SYS.Label.IFU.Message.Tabletop.FastMovement
Node title (original): 24379 SYS.Label.IFU.Alarms.HAZ-PS.200.3 ID: 9007207057142795

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24379
The following message is displayed while the tabletop is moving.

The tabletop is moving automatically.
Click: Stop movement to immediately stop tabletop movement in case something unexpected
occurs.
End fragment title: 24379 SYS.Label.IFU.Alarms.HAZ-PS.200.3
2.2.4 Laser radiation safety (Light visor)

Status: Released
Node title (original): Light Visor IEC ID: 9007247261857675
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Philips MR systems have a laser type Light visor system.

The laser light visors is in compliance with laser standards IEC60825-1: 2007 and 21 CFR
1040:10 .
End fragment title: Light Visor IEC
Node title (original): Light Visor GB 7247.1 CHINA ID: 9007247261870091

Status: Released
Philips MR systems have a laser type Light visor system.

The laser light visors is in compliance with laser standards GB 7247.1
End fragment title: Light Visor GB 7247.1 CHINA
The Light visor should only be used under supervision of medical trained personnel, who are
acquainted with hazards implied by the use of laser light.
It is the user’s responsibility to meet local safety regulations.
Node title (original): 24320 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS.56 ID: 9007205885899403
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24320
Philips

WARNING
Avoid laser light shining in the patient's eyes. The laser is a Class II (FDA) / Class 2 (IEC) laser.
Instruct the patient not to look into the laser beam. Direct laser light may cause irreversible
damage to the eyes.
End fragment title: 24320 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS.56
Node title (original): HG - Use laser light visor for intended use ID: 9007206293650187
only Status: Released
WARNING
Use the Light visor for its intended use only, avoid unnecessary exposure to laser radiation.
End fragment title: HG - Use laser light visor for intended use only
Node title (original): HG - Be careful when using laser light for ID: 9007206293651723
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
non-responsive patients Status: Released
WARNING
For non-responsive patients (babies, anesthetized patients) provide adequate protection to
avoid direct laser light in the eyes.
End fragment title: HG - Be careful when using laser light for non-responsive patients
Node title (original): HG - Laser light - Observe instructions in ID: 9007206293653259

this document Status: Released
WARNING
Use of controls, adjustments or procedures other than those specified in this manual may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
End fragment title: HG - Laser light - Observe instructions in this document
Labeling
The following warning labels are put on the system:
Philips

Node title (original): Laser Symbols US ID: 18014446516636683

Affix: US version Status: Released
Outside front cover
Caution label
CAUTION
Laser radiation
Do not stare into beam
Max output < 0.35 mW
Emitted wavelength 635nm
Class II Laser product
Caution label
Laser radiation
Class 2 Laser product
Max output< 0.35 mW
Emitted wavelength 635 nm
IEC 60825-1: 2007
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Laser warning symbol
At the laser aperture (outside front cover)
Label
Laser Aperture
Outside front cover
Caution label
Laser radiation
Max output< 0.35 mW
IEC 60825-1: 2007

Philips

Outside front cover
Caution label
Laser radiation
Max output< 0.35 mW
GB 7247.1
End fragment title: Laser Symbols US
2.2.5 High Bore Temperature

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
The system calculates the possible bore surface temperature for each scan.
The following messages appear when the calculated temperature of the bore surface may
exceed the maximum allowed level.
High Bore Temperature (High Bore Temperature)
Bore temperature may reach a value above the allowed
level.
The system needs to wait <x> seconds before
automatically proceeding.
Refer to the Instructions for Use for information about
bore temperature.
Press <Modify> (Modify) to modify the patient
ventilation level.
Press <Cancel> (Cancel) to cancel the Scan.
Modify (Modify), Cancel (Cancel)
When this message is displayed, the scan is delayed and started automatically after the
indicated time.
Options
• Modify patient ventilation level
– Click <Modify> (Modify), the patient ventilation control window is displayed.
– Modify the patient ventilation level and click Proceed (Proceed).
– Restart the scan.
Philips

• Cancel scan
level.
The system needs to wait <x> seconds before
automatically proceeding.
Cancel (Cancel)
When this message is displayed, the scan is delayed and started automatically after the
indicated time.
Option
• Cancel scan
level.
Setting patient ventilation level to maximum will result
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

in a waiting time of <x> seconds.
bore temperature.
Press <Modify> (Modify) to modify the patient
ventilation level.
Modify (Modify), Cancel (Cancel)
This message is displayed when the operator is required to set the patient ventilation to
maximum before the scan can be started. After restarting the scan, the scan is executed after
the indicated delay time.
Action
• Modify patient ventilation level
– Click <Modify> (Modify), the patient ventilation control window is displayed.
– Set the patient ventilation to maximum and click Proceed (Proceed).
– Restart the scan.
Option
• Cancel scan
Philips

Other MRI safety Safety

level.
Scan can't be executed. Change scan parameters.
OK (OK)
This message is displayed when the scan cannot be executed:

• Click OK (OK) to modify the scan parameters and restart the scan.
2.3 Other MRI safety

Status: NotReleased
2.3.1 Patient support and tabletop

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): 68894 SYS.Label.IFU.(MaxPatientWeight, ID: 36028803860494091

WorkingLoad)_Trolley Status: Released
Affix: Achieva Multiva
ISO/IEC: 24659 Achieva
The safe working load is 150 kg for the trolley and 250 kg for the patient support.
NOTICE
The safe working load as labeled on patient support and trolley is based on the sum of the
maximum allowable patient weight and the mass of accessories and coils. The weights
mentioned above are equal to the safe working load.
End fragment title: 68894 SYS.Label.IFU.(MaxPatientWeight, WorkingLoad)_Trolley
Node title (original): 68896 SYS.Label.IFU.(MaxPatientWeight, ID: 54043202369974539

WorkingLoad)_FlexTrak Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24659 Ingenia
The safe working load for FlexTrak and Patient support is 250 kg.
Philips

Safety Other MRI safety
NOTICE
The safe working load as labelled on patient support and trolley is based on the sum of the
maximum allowable patient weight and the mass of accessories and coils. The weights
mentioned above are equal to the safe working load.
End fragment title: 68896 SYS.Label.IFU.(MaxPatientWeight, WorkingLoad)_FlexTrak
Node title (original): Weight Load tabletop Ingenia, Achieva ID: 18014446517749259
dStream Status: Released
Affix: Ingenia, Optimus
• The maximum weight load allowed for horizontal and vertical movement of the tabletop on
the patient support is 250 kg.
• The maximum allowed weight load of the tabletop on the FlexTrak is 250 kg.
End fragment title: Weight Load tabletop Ingenia, Achieva dStream
Node title (original): Weight Load tabetop Achieva, Multiva ID: 48008345867
Status: Released
• The maximum weight load allowed for the tabletop on the patient support is 250 kg for
horizontal movement and 150 kg for vertical movement.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• The maximum allowed weight load for the tabletop on the trolley is 150 kg.
End fragment title: Weight Load tabetop Achieva, Multiva
Node title (original): Weight Load tabletop Jaguar ID: 48008424203

The maximum weight load allowed for the tabletop on the patient support is 200 kg for
horizontal movement and 200 kg for vertical movement.
End fragment title: Weight Load tabletop Jaguar
Node title (original): 24317 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS.52 ID: 27021604556161291-1

Status: Released
WARNING
Verify that no object can fall into the cable slab. Objects in the cable slabs may obstruct
table movement.
The tabletop can not be moved out of the magnet. Emergency removal of the tabletop is not
possible.
Node title (original): 24660 SYS.Label.IFU.MovementRisk ID: 54043201953896715

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24660
Philips


ISO/IEC: 24301 24305
WARNING
Verify that the hand of the patient are on the tabletop before moving the tabletop into the
magnet, to avoid finger pinching.
Fingers can get pinched between the tabletop and the system covers.
• The special arm supports (see Positioning Aids) can be used to avoid finger pinching. The
arm supports prevent the patient from grabbing around the table sides, avoiding finger
pinching during tabletop movement.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 21: Left: Arm support. Middle: Incorrect patient positioning. Right: Advised patient positioning with arm support (1) and padding (2).
End fragment title: 24660 SYS.Label.IFU.MovementRisk
Node title (original): 24661 SYS.Label.IFU.MovementRiskProne ID: 9007206096343307

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24661
Philips

WARNING
In prone position support the lower legs in such a way that the patient’s toes are positioned
higher than the tabletop surface.
If the patient’s feet are positioned over the end of the tabletop, verify that the feet cannot
be caught between tabletop and system parts when moving into the magnet.
End fragment title: 24661 SYS.Label.IFU.MovementRiskProne

ISO/IEC: 24321
WARNING
Take special precautions for anxious patients and patients in panic.
Use the accessories to immobilize a patient.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

2.3.1.1 Total Body scanning

Affix: Multiva ID: 9007247318468875
Fig. 22: Total Body tabletop
For total body scanning the special Total Body tabletop must be installed onto the (regular)
tabletop.
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24309
Philips

WARNING
Verify that the Total body tabletop is locked securely on the tabletop before the patient is
positioned.
An unlocked Total body tabletop could suddenly move causing the patient to fall off and
lead to personal injury.

Status: Released
WARNING
It is not allowed to use the Total body tabletop with a trolley.
The Total body tabletop could suddenly move causing the trolley with tabletop to tip over.
This may lead to personal injury.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
WARNING
The Total body Tabletop is designed for scanning with the patient in "feet first" and
"supine" position only.

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24329
Philips

WARNING
Always retract the Total body tabletop completely out of the magnet before lowering the
patient support.
If not fully retracted the Total body tabletop will be damaged and patient injury may occur.
2.3.2 Communication: nurse call & intercom

Status: Released
Node title (original): 24298 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PH.37.2 ID: 27021604399892107

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24290
WARNING
The ‘Nurse call pinch ball’ must be given and demonstrated to every patient.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

This allows for communication between the patient and the operator at all times.
Check correct functioning of the ‘Nurse call system’ before each examination.
Pressing the ‘Nurse call pinch ball’ activates a buzzer that can be heard as long as the ball is
squeezed. When the pinch ball is pressed more than once within 4 seconds or for more than 1.5
seconds, a flashing yellow light will also be activated in the control room to draw the
personnel’s attention.
End fragment title: 24298 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PH.37.2

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24272
It is advised to communicate when the system gradients are off.
Philips

WARNING
Instruct the patient on using non-verbal communication signs.
Because of acoustic noise levels in the examination room verbal communication with the
patient may be impaired.
2.3.3 Image quality

Last Content Modificator: Harish, Darshan ID: 18014446484936459
Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 24437 SYS.Label.IFU.Artifacts.Appearance ID: 9007206053477387

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24437
The resulting appearance of anatomical structures on images may be dislocated or distorted.

Also non-uniform intensities or contrasts can occur. These image deviations may lead to
misinterpretation. More information on typical MR artifacts, including examples, is provided in
the MR Help system.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 24437 SYS.Label.IFU.Artifacts.Appearance

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24341
WARNING
MR images may demonstrate structures that are not present in the patient (artifacts), which
may lead to misinterpretation.
These structures may occur as a result of technological and physiological factors or can be
introduced by metallic or magnetic objects in the patient.
Technological factors can be spurious signal generated by system components or other
source in the immediate area of the system.
Node title (original): 24438 SYS.Label.IFU.Artifacts.Categories ID: 9007206053480587

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24438
Intrinsic artifacts
MR technical capabilities and patient physiology may result in artifacts which appear in the
image.
These artifacts may be caused by e.g.:
• Magnet homogeneity.
Philips

• Gradient non-linearity.
• RF inhomogeneity.
• Truncation.
• Aliasing.
• Motion.
• Flow.
• Chemical shift.
• Susceptibilities.
End fragment title: 24438 SYS.Label.IFU.Artifacts.Categories
Extrinsic artifacts
Magnetic objects or non-magnetic metallic objects such as jewelry, hairpins, buttons,
prosthetics will disturb the RF signal or will influence the homogeneity of the magnet field and
will interfere with the imaging capabilities of the system. This may lead to clinical misdiagnoses.
Node title (original): HG - No magnetic or non-magnetic ID: 9007206293684619
metallic objects near magnet Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

WARNING
Do not allow magnetic objects or non-magnetic metallic objects to be brought into the
magnet, unless this is needed for the specific study and properly controlled (e.g. biopsy
needles).
End fragment title: HG - No magnetic or non-magnetic metallic objects near magnet

Affix: Used
NOTICE
2.3.4 Imaging Techniques

Status: Released
Philips

General
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24342
WARNING
Applying imaging techniques must always be done with great care to avoid any unwanted
effects like artifacts.
Correct parameter optimization is essential for optimal image quality.
SENSE
The SENSE/CLEAR parallel imaging technique must be applied carefully to avoid unexpected and
possibly unidentified image artifacts. The technique can be used successfully to speed up the
scan technique, get a ideal homogeneity correction or optimize the protocol in a number of
other ways (SAR reduction, acoustic noise reduction, resolution improvement, etc.).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
A number of specific warnings and notes are given in the following.

Node title (original): 24264 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-AC.12 ID: 9007205893081355
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24264
WARNING
With CLEAR and SENSE significant artifacts may occur in case of gross patient motion
between the reference scan and the CLEAR or SENSE scans.
The patient must to be instructed not to move head or limbs between scans.
End fragment title: 24264 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-AC.12

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24263
Philips

WARNING
Artifacts may occur if the SENSE or CLEAR scan is performed with inspiration breath hold.
Geometry compensation
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24269
WARNING
For comparing images the same type of geometry compensation must be used.
Erroneous distance, area and volume measurements may lead to misinterpretations.
Stereotaxy guidance can be distorted which may lead to personal injury.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

k-t BLAST and k-t SENSE
2.3.5 Auxiliary Medical equipment

Last Content Modificator: Marshall, Tom ID: 36028844996558603
Status: Released
Node title (original): 24662 SYS.Label.IFU.MSO ID: 9007206096347403

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24662
Only use Philips-approved Multiple Socket Outlet (MSO) to power auxiliary equipment, as
approved for connection through MSO by Philips.
End fragment title: 24662 SYS.Label.IFU.MSO

SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDevices.Responsibility Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24446
Philips

WARNING
Assessment of compatibility and use of auxiliary devices for physiological monitoring or
sensing inside the MR Examination room is the responsibility of the User. Always follow the
guidance of the manufacturer of the auxiliary equipment.
End fragment title: 24446 SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDevices.Responsibility
Node title (original): 24280 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PANRF. ID: 27021604225206283

01 Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24441
WARNING
All accessories used with the MR system must be labeled MR Safe or MR Conditional Safe,
see table below for labeling.
Third parties claims about MR compatibility of accessories must be interpreted with care:
Philips does not verify these claims.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 24280 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PANRF.01
WARNING
After an upgrade of the system, e.g. to higher gradients, do not use auxiliary medical
equipment approved for use with the system configuration before the upgrade, unless
recognized as tested for use with this configuration after the upgrade.
WARNING
Changes and/or additions to the MR system that are carried out using untested auxiliary
medical equipment may lead to the Philips Healthcare warranty being voided. Do not use
unapproved auxiliary medical equipment.
This equipment carries serious risks to cause damage to the system or personal injury.
WARNING
Third party RF coils cannot be used in combination with Philips RF coils nor with SENSE and
CLEAR.
Philips

WARNING
The physiology sensing devices of the MR scanner are only intended for sequence triggering
purposes.
Patient monitoring of physiological signals and application of sensing devices is subject to
requirements and specifications of the monitoring equipment manufacturer.
It is the responsibility of the hospital and the operator to implement necessary safety
provisions and to understand potential interferences with monitoring reliability introduced
by the MR scanner.

SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDevices.ErrorHandling Status: Released
WARNING
Patient ventilator error.
Risk of serious injury or death.
• When a patient is supported by a ventilator or under anesthesia , any error condition
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

detected by the auxiliary device shall immediately be followed by stopping the MR scan,
and moving the patient outside the MR system until the error condition is removed.
End fragment title: 24442 SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDevices.ErrorHandling

SYS.Label.IFU.ReciprocalInterference Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24447 < = SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDevices.Risks
WARNING
The use of auxiliary equipment, such as physiological monitoring and gating equipment and
radio frequency coils, which have not been specifically tested and approved for use with
Philips MR systems may result in burns or other injuries to the patient.
End fragment title: 24671 SYS.Label.IFU.ReciprocalInterference

SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDevices.LeadPositioning Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24443
Philips

WARNING
Auxiliary devices labeled as MR Conditional may cause injury if the manufacturer's
instructions, especially with respect to electrically conducting lead positioning, are not
followed.
End fragment title: 24443 SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDevices.LeadPositioning

SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDevices.ManufacturerIFU Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24444
WARNING
Auxiliary devices labeled as MR Conditional may only be used in combination with Philips
MR systems when the conditions specified in the manufacturer’s instructions for use are
fulfilled.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 24444 SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDevices.ManufacturerIFU
WARNING
Auxiliary devices not labeled as compatible with MR equipment may be affected by
electromagnetic interference (EMI).
This may influence the proper functioning of the Auxiliary device.
Node title (original): EMC4-Safety-PortableRF-Caution ID: 85331721483

Affix: EMC4 Status: Released

Philips

CAUTION
Portable RF communications equipment (including peripherals such as antenna cables and
external antennas) should be used no closer than 30 cm to any part of the MRI system,
including cables specified by the manufacturer. Otherwise, degradation of the performance
of this equipment could result in decreased electromagnetic immunity of this equipment
and result in improper operation.
End fragment title: EMC4-Safety-PortableRF-Caution
NOTICE
For description and further Instructions for Use on compatibility test protocols, see the
Technical Description of the system.

SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDevices.MRLabeling Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24445
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

MR compatibility labels on third party equipment
The compatibility of third party equipment in combination with the MRI systems is regulated
via special warning labels (see below). These warning signs indicate whether the third party
equipment is MR Safe, MR Unsafe or MR Conditional.
When the equipment is marked as MR Conditional these conditions must be described in the
instructions for use of this equipment.
Philips

Warning label Category
MR Safe
MR Conditional
MR Unsafe
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 24445 SYS.Label.IFU.AuxiliaryDevices.MRLabeling

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24340
WARNING
Do not start an examination with the system when the examination-room door is open.
Operation of the system with the examination-room door open can cause malfunction of
other (medical) devices outside the examination room and consequently may lead to
personal injury.
Other (medical) devices could also interfere with the MR system, possibly resulting in image
artifacts.
Node title (original): 24562 SYS.Label.IFU.ToolCompatibility ID: 9007206093718539

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24562
Philips

NOTICE
Compatibility of tools and devices will depend on the magnetic field strength of the MR
system.
Contact the supplier when using tools or devices at different systems than specified.
End fragment title: 24562 SYS.Label.IFU.ToolCompatibility
Node title (original): 24465 SYS.Label.IFU.DeviceFixation ID: 18014405311655307

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24465
NOTICE
It is advised to carefully secure monitoring equipment to the wall of the examination room,
using a chain and/or other anchorage device of sufficient strength.
This will prevent the equipment to be pulled into the system.
End fragment title: 24465 SYS.Label.IFU.DeviceFixation
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

2.3.6 Mobile telephones & similar products
Status: Released
Node title (original): 58458 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA EMC ID: 18014437128534539-2

standards Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 1-2 clause 5.2.1.1.b (???)
Philips MRI systems comply with the requirements of applicable electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) standards. Other electronic equipment exceeding the limits defined in these EMC
standards could, under unusual circumstance, affect the operation of the system.
End fragment title: 58458 SYS.Label.IFU.Safety.CAA EMC standards
Node title (original): HG - Do not allow any RF transmitters in ID: 18014405548162315

the examination room Status: Released
Philips

WARNING
Do not allow radio frequency transmitting devices (such as mobile telephones) into the
examination room. Even when switched off.
These devices could exceed EMC radiation standards and, under unusual conditions,
interfere with the proper functioning of the system. This could, in extreme cases, lead to
fatal or other serious personal injury or to clinical misdiagnoses.
End fragment title: HG - Do not allow any RF transmitters in the examination room
Node title (original): HG - Do not allow any RF transmitters in ID: 9007284586465931

the examination room Status: Released
Affix: EMC4
CAUTION
Do not allow radio frequency transmitting devices (such as mobile telephones) into the
examination room. Even when switched off.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
These devices could exceed EMC radiation standards and, under unusual conditions,
interfere with the proper functioning of the system. This could lead to clinical misdiagnoses.
End fragment title: HG - Do not allow any RF transmitters in the examination room
2.3.7 Safety with Helium

Status: NotReleased

Status: NotReleased
NOTICE
Not applicable to Ingenia Ambition systems
2.3.7.1 Liquid helium

Status: Released
Philips


SYS.Label.IFU.CryogenSupplyNonmagnetic Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24464
WARNING
Under no circumstances should a liquid helium container be brought into the magnet area
unless it is known to be made of non-magnetic material or the magnet is not energized.
It is extremely dangerous for patients, personnel and equipment to bring any magnetic or
ferrous metal objects into the examination room. Special non-magnetic containers are
available from liquid helium suppliers and must always be specified and appropriately
labeled.
End fragment title: 24464 SYS.Label.IFU.CryogenSupplyNonmagnetic
Node title (original): 24499 SYS.Label.IFU.HeliumVentPipe ID: 9007206064470155

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24499
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

WARNING
Under no circumstances should liquid helium be transferred into the magnet prior to
installation of the helium venting system.
End fragment title: 24499 SYS.Label.IFU.HeliumVentPipe
Filling with liquid helium

SYS.Label.IFU.CryogenFillingPrecautions Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24463
WARNING
Filling with liquid helium should be carried out by trained and authorized persons. See
chapter “Topping up liquid helium” on page 1470.
End fragment title: 24463 SYS.Label.IFU.CryogenFillingPrecautions

SYS.Label.IFU.HeliumFrostbiteHazard Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24492
Philips

WARNING
Always use protective gloves, skin covering clothing, and preferably goggles.
Liquid helium is extremely cold and can freeze human tissue.
Injuries caused by freezing must be washed with water and treated as burns.
End fragment title: 24492 SYS.Label.IFU.HeliumFrostbiteHazard

SYS.Label.IFU.HeliumSuffocationHazard Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24496
WARNING
Always verify that the examination room and the storage room for liquid gases are well
ventilated.
There is danger of suffocation as the evaporating helium will dilute or displace the oxygen in
the air.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 24496 SYS.Label.IFU.HeliumSuffocationHazard
Node title (original): HG - Fire hazard caused by escaping liquid ID: 9007206293625867
helium Status: Released
WARNING
If liquid helium is accidentally released in the examination room, accumulation of liquid
oxygen may occur, resulting in a potential fire hazard.
End fragment title: HG - Fire hazard caused by escaping liquid helium
2.3.7.2 Helium gas

Status: Released
Properties of helium gas:

• Odorless
• Non-flammable
• Non-poisonous
• On evaporation of liquid helium a cold mist is formed. Helium gas rises in air.
Philips

Normal operating conditions

MR systems that are equipped with a zero helium boil-off cooling system have no helium boil-
off under normal operating conditions.
For the event that helium is boiling off, Philips MR systems are equipped with a helium venting
system, which vents the helium gas from the magnet to the outside of the building. Helium boil-
off occurs during a quench and after the Emergency Magnet Off button is pressed.
See chapter “Release of helium gas in the examination room” on page 73 when helium gas is
not vented properly and clouds of cold mist form in the examination room.
A large amount of helium gas is evaporated when the Emergency Magnet Off button is used for
immediate removal of the magnetic field, or during a spontaneous quench of the magnet.
An oxygen detector with audible alarm may be used as a warning device.
2.3.7.3 Magnet monitoring messages

Status: NotReleased
Magnet helium level
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Helium is used to keep the magnet in a pre-defined temperature range. When magnet helium
levels are too low, the magnet cannot be kept in optimal conditions and the MR system may be
disabled for scanning.
Helium refill message

The helium refill level is defined in Field Service Framework (and may vary per geographic
region). The following UI message is displayed at the start of a new examination, once the
actual helium level is below the helium refill level. You are asked to confirm that your helium
supply organization is notified.
Fig. 23: Magnet helium refill required. Confirm you contacted your helium supply organization.
You can do the following:

• Keep the message on screen until the helium supply organization has been contacted.
• Select no to confirm that the helium supply organization has not been contacted yet. The
pop-up is closed and will be displayed again at the start of a new examination.
• Select yes to confirm that the helium supply organization has been contacted. The pop-up is
closed and will not be displayed again. An alert message is displayed on the info status line
at the start of each new examination until the helium level is above the refill level again
"Magnet helium refill required. PHILIPS Service is already notified.
The user selection (no or yes) is logged in the system’s log file.
Philips

Helium low level message

In case the helium level drops below the critical level, warning messages will be shown at the
start of each examination for 3 consecutive days. To prevent magnet damage, scanning will be
blocked on the fourth day. A helium refill is then required.
See applicable warning messages in chapter “Important Messages and Indications” on page
158
Node title (original): Obsolete Cryo compressor pop-ups ID: 130469644555
Status: NotReleased
Cryo compressor messages

Cryo compressor malfunctions may be solved by the user or local hospital engineer. In all other
situations please contact your Philips service representative.
The following warning messages, depending on the system type, may be displayed at the start
of a new examination. An action from the user is required.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 24: Cryo compressor is off. Check power supply. Contact local engineer.
Cryo compressor power-off is detected for more than 30 minutes.

Check the power supply. If required, contact your local service representative.
Fig. 25: Cryo compressor temperature alarm. Check water cooling. Contact local engineer.
Cryo compressor temperature alarm is detected for more than 1.5 hours.
Check the water cooling. If required, contact your local service representative.
Fig. 26: Cry compressor pressure alarm. Please contact PHILIPS Service.
Cryo compressor pressure alarm is detected for more than 3 hours.

Contact your local service representative.
Philips

Fig. 27: Cryo compressor malfunction. Contact local engineer or contact PHILIPS Service.
Cryo compressor malfunction is detected for more than 30 minutes.

Check the power supply and water cooling circuit. If required, contact your local service
representative.
Fig. 28: Cryo compressor malfunction detected for over 3 hours. Contact PHILIPS Service.
Cryo compressor malfunction is detected for over 3 hours.

Contact your local service representative.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Magnet helium pressure alarm
Fig. 29: Magnet helium high pressure alarm.
This message is displayed when the average magnet pressure exceeds the defined level during
the last three hours.
End fragment title: Obsolete Cryo compressor pop-ups
2.3.8 Safety
Affix: not for Ingenia in China: comp MRS ID: 54043243504974731
NOTICE
The system supports export to a proprietary file format. However, since this is not a published
standard, Philips makes no claims about the correctness of this file.
Philips

CAUTION
Do not use the coils in an unloaded situation.
When the load (normally the patient) is removed from the coil, or vice versa, the voltages
may damage the capacitors of the spectroscopy coils.

Affix: Achieva Ingenia Optimus Status: Released
WARNING
In 3.0T applications, distortions in spatial shift of the CSI PRESS box may lead to
misdiagnoses.
Analogous to the fat-water slice shift in imaging, the voxel volume localized using STEAM or
PRESS for one metabolite is displaced relative to that for a different metabolite with a
different chemical shift. The relative size of this spatial displacement is greater at higher
field strengths, because chemical shift differences in Hz scale with the main magnetic field.
In chemical shift imaging (CSI), the displacement of localization volumes will give rise to
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
distorted relative intensities and incorrect peak area ratios in spectra from voxels at the
edges of the region of interest, where the volumes do not overlap.
NOTICE
SpectroView does not apply any correction factors for chemical shift displacement.
2.3.9 Electrical safety

Status: Released
Philips MR systems may be operated on a permanent 24-hour basis without adversely affecting
its safety or performance.
Node title (original): 24669 SYS.Label.IFU.ProtectiveEarth ID: 9007206097888651
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24669
Philips

WARNING
To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a supply mains
with protective earth.
End fragment title: 24669 SYS.Label.IFU.ProtectiveEarth

SYS.Label.IFU.SystemAlwaysPowered Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24677
WARNING
Do NOT open cabinets. Do NOT remove system covers.
The system and all subsystems remain powered. Danger of an electric shock.
End fragment title: 24677 SYS.Label.IFU.SystemAlwaysPowered
Node title (original): 67550 SYS.Label.IFU.CoverRemoval ID: 18014405548213899
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
WARNING
Covers or cables should only be removed by a qualified and authorized service engineer.
End fragment title: 67550 SYS.Label.IFU.CoverRemoval
Node title (original): HG - Do not allow water in the system ID: 9007206293474443
Status: Released
WARNING
Do not allow water or other liquids to enter the equipment as they may cause short-circuits
or corrosion.
Only use the MR system in rooms or areas that comply with all applicable law (or regulations
having the force of law) concerning electrical safety for this type of equipment.
End fragment title: HG - Do not allow water in the system
Applied Parts
The following electrical or weight bearing parts of the MR system are designed for patient
contact during normal use (known as Applied Parts):
Philips

• Tabletop.
• VCG.
• PPU.
• All RF coils and their coil parts, see their respective instructions for further details.
2.3.10 Liquids in phantoms

Status: Released
Node title (original): 24530 SYS.Label.IFU.PhantomsInformation ID: 9007289080141067

Status: Released
Description of used phantoms.

End fragment title: 24530 SYS.Label.IFU.PhantomsInformation
Node title (original): HG - Phantoms with liquids - handle with ID: 9007206293727627
care Status: Released
WARNING
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Handle all phantoms with care to prevent damage, and spilling of the liquid contents.
If the phantoms are not used, the phantoms must be placed in the phantom box and closed
appropriately.
Note that the contents of the phantoms may irritate the skin. Washing with water after
contact with the human skin is sufficient.
End fragment title: HG - Phantoms with liquids - handle with care
2.3.10.1 Phantoms for 1.5T systems

Status: Released
Node title (original): Liquid in body 530, 400 mm and Head 200 ID: 27021654939754507
mm phantoms for 1.5T systems Status: Released
{ Geenen, Hubert, 5/21/2019 1:20:06 PM: Added item number "1.5T"

Hubert G. 21-may-2019 Added 530 mm phantom}
Liquid in Body 530 mm, Body 400 mm and Head 200 mm phantoms
Personal protection • Eyes: safety goggles
Constituents in weight percent • 99.6 - 99.96% water

• 0.02 - 0.37% sulfuric acid
• 0.03 - 0.08% copper(II)sulphate
Philips

{ Geenen, Hubert, 5/21/2019 1:20:06 PM: Added item number "1.5T"

Hubert G. 21-may-2019 Added 530 mm phantom}
Liquid in Body 530 mm, Body 400 mm and Head 200 mm phantoms
Toxicity • LD-50: 300 mg/kg (ORL-RAT, copper (II) sulfate)

• LD-50: 2.14 mg/kg (ORL-RAT, sulfuric acid)
Emergency actions • Spillage: Absorb the liquid in dry sand, diatomite, vermiculite etc.
Shovel the mixture into plastic bags and remove to a chemical waste
depot.
First aid • Skin contact: Rinse for a long time with plenty of water, then wash
with soap and water.
• Eyes: Rinse for a long time with plenty of water.
End fragment title: Liquid in body 530, 400 mm and Head 200 mm phantoms for 1.5T systems
Node title (original): Liquid in bottle phantoms for 1.5T systems ID: 18014455685015051
Status: Released
Liquid in Bottle phantoms
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Constituents in weight percent • 99.717% water
• 0.005% sulfuric acid
• 0.077% copper(II)sulphate
• 0.2% sodium chloride
• 0.001% dialkyl-1-dimethyl ammonium chloride
Toxicity • LD-50: 300 mg/kg (ORL-RAT, copper (II) sulfate).

• LD-50: 2.14 mg/kg (ORL-RAT, sulfuric acid).
• LD-50: 3 g/kg (ORL-RAT, sodium chloride).
depot.
End fragment title: Liquid in bottle phantoms for 1.5T systems
Node title (original): Liquid in AC-PC bottle phantoms for 1.5T ID: 18014455685016587
systems Status: Released
Philips

Liquid in AC-PC Bottle phantoms
Constituents in weight percent • >99.0% water

• >0.25<1.0% Nickel Chloride-6-Water
Toxicity • LD-50: 175 mg/kg (ORL-RAT, Nickel Chloride-6-Water).
depot.
First aid • Skin contact: immediately remove contaminated clothes.

Immediately remove residue substance (e.g. rinse with plenty of
water). In case of serious exposure call a doctor.
• Ingestion: Let victim drink 1 or 2 glasses of water. In case of general
disorder call a doctor.
• Inhalation: Bring victim immediately into fresh air, let rest and if
necessary call a doctor.
• Eyes: Rinse for a long time with plenty of water. In case of eye-sight
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
disturbance consult a doctor.

End fragment title: Liquid in AC-PC bottle phantoms for 1.5T systems
2.3.10.2 Phantoms for 3.0T systems

Affix: Ingenia Achieva Optimus ID: 63050442759200907
Node title (original): All 3.0T: Liquid in Head 200 mm phantom ID: 27021654939806731
Status: Released
{ Geenen, Hubert, 2/12/2016 10:46:49 AM: Added item number "3.0T"}

Liquid in Head 200 mm phantom


Philips

{ Geenen, Hubert, 2/12/2016 10:46:49 AM: Added item number "3.0T"}

Liquid in Head 200 mm phantom
depot.
End fragment title: All 3.0T: Liquid in Head 200 mm phantom
Node title (original): Ingenia 3.0T: phantoms ID: 54043243504566155

Status: Released
Node title (original): Liquid in 400 mm Body and bottle ID: 36028854194549259
phantoms for Ingenia 3.0T systems Status: Released
Liquid in Body 400 mm phantom and Bottle phantoms
Constituents in weight percent • 100% Spectrasyn 4
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

(ExxonMobil Chemical: http://www.exxonmobilchemical.com)
Toxicity • Oral: LD50: > 15 g/kg Practically non-toxic.

• Dermal: LD50: > 5 g/kg Practically non-toxic.
• Inhalation: LD50: > 5 mg/l Practically non-toxic.
• Eye irritation: Practically non-irritating.
• Skin irritation: Practically non-irritating.
depot.
• Clothing: Remove contaminated clothing. Launder contaminated
clothing before re-use.
First aid • Skin contact: Wash with soap and water.

• Inhalation: Not expected to be a problem.
• Ingestion: Not expected to be a problem.
End fragment title: Liquid in 400 mm Body and bottle phantoms for Ingenia 3.0T systems
Node title (original): Liquid in 530 mm Body Ingenia series 3.0T ID: 9007292075751179
systems Status: Released
Philips

{ Geenen, Hubert, 5/21/2019 1:29:03 PM: Added 530 mm phantom}

Liquid in Body 530 mm phantoms


depot.
End fragment title: Liquid in 530 mm Body Ingenia series 3.0T systems
Node title (original): Liquid in AC-PAC bottle phantoms for ID: 36028854194550795
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Ingenia 3.0T systems Status: Released
Constituents in weight percent • >99.0% water

• >0.25<1.0% Nickel Chloride-6-Water
Toxicity • LD-50: 175 mg/kg (ORL-RAT, Nickel Chloride-6-Water).

Philips

depot.
First aid • Skin contact: immediately remove contaminated clothes.

Immediately remove residue substance (e.g. rinse with plenty of
water). In case of serious exposure call a doctor.
• Ingestion: Let victim drink 1 or 2 glasses of water. In case of general
disorder call a doctor.
• Inhalation: Bring victim immediately into fresh air, let rest and if
necessary call a doctor.
• Eyes: Rinse for a long time with plenty of water. In case of eye-sight
disturbance consult a doctor.
End fragment title: Liquid in AC-PAC bottle phantoms for Ingenia 3.0T systems
End fragment title: Ingenia 3.0T: phantoms
Node title (original): Achieva 3.0T: Liquid in 400 mm Body ID: 36028844995184395
phantom and Bottle phantoms Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fluid in 400 Body mm phantom and Bottle phantoms
Constituents in weight percent • 100% mineral oil
Toxicity • LD50: 2000 mg/kg
depot.
First aid • Skin contact: Wash with soap and water.

End fragment title: Achieva 3.0T: Liquid in 400 mm Body phantom and Bottle phantoms
2.3.10.3 Spectroscopy phantoms

Affix: Non-China for Ingenia: comp MRS ID: 36028844994810251
Proton Phantoms
Node title (original): Liquid in proton sphere phantoms A ID: 18014455685119243
Status: Released
Philips

Liquid in proton sphere phantoms A
Constituents • 5 ml/l 98% acetate (CH3COOH)

• 10 ml/l 80% ethanol (CH3CH2OH)
• 8 ml/l 98% Phosphorus acid (H3PO4)
• 1 ml/l 1% arquad solution + 120 mg/l CuSO4 in demi water.
Total contents • 524 ml
depot.
End fragment title: Liquid in proton sphere phantoms A
Node title (original): Phosphorous Phantoms ID: 36028844994929291

Affix: only for 3T (Ingenia Achieva Optimus) Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Phosphorus phantoms
Node title (original): Liquid in phosphorus sphere phantoms B ID: 18014455685120779
Status: Released
Liquid in phosphorus sphere phantoms B
Constituents • 30 g/l Methyl phosphoric acid P(OH)2O(CH3) in demi water
Total contents • 524 ml
depot.
End fragment title: Liquid in phosphorus sphere phantoms B
Node title (original): Liquid in phosphorus disk phantoms A ID: 18014455685122315

Status: Released
Liquid in phosphorus disk phantoms A
Constituents • 300 mM H3PO4(phosphor acid) solution

Philips

Liquid in phosphorus disk phantoms A
depot.
End fragment title: Liquid in phosphorus disk phantoms A
Node title (original): Liquid in phosphorus disk phantoms B ID: 18014455685123851

Status: Released
Liquid in phosphorus disk phantoms B
Constituents • 300 mM H3PO2(phosphoric acid) solution
depot.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Liquid in phosphorus disk phantoms B
End fragment title: Phosphorous Phantoms
2.3.11 Liquid in Gradient System

Status: Released
Gradient amplifier
Constituents • Distilled water 50%

• Dowtherm SR1 9 (dyed pink) 50%, consisting of:
– Ethylene glycol CAS#000107-21-1 (>95%)
– Dipothassium Phosphate CAS#007758-11-4 (<3%)
– Water CAS#007732-18-5 (<3%)
Toxicity The coolant may irritate the skin by contact.

Philips

Gradient amplifier
Emergency actions in case of a leakage • Absorb the liquid with an appropriate absorbent (e.g. powersorb, dry
sand, diatomite etc.).
• Dispose the used absorbent of (in plastic bags) according local
legislation for chemical waste.
• After a leakage, the gradient amplifier cooling system needs topping
up. Contact Philips Customer Support.
First aid • Skin contact: Immediately remove contaminated clothing and rinse
the skin with plenty of water.
Gradient coil coolant
Constituents • Distilled water (approximately 30 l)

• Inhibitor, AZ8104 from Betz Dearborn (6ml)
• Biocide, Spectrus NX 1164* or Spectrus 1106* from Betz Dearborn
(2.7 ml)
Toxicity The coolant may irritate the skin by contact.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Emergency actions in case of a leakage • Absorb the liquid with an appropriate absorbent (e.g. powersorb, dry
sand, diatomite etc.).
• Dispose the used absorbent of (in plastic bags) according local
legislation for chemical waste.
• After a leakage, the gradient coil cooling system needs topping up.
Contact Philips Customer Support.
First aid • Skin contact: Immediately remove contaminated clothing and rinse
the skin with plenty of water.
* Biocide, Spectrus NX 1164 or Spectrus 1106 is depending on your region.
2.3.12 Network safety, security and privacy

Status: Released
Customer Role in the Product Security Partnership

We recognize that the security of Philips Healthcare products is an important part of your
facility's security-in depth strategy. However, these benefits can only be realized if you
implement a comprehensive, multilayered strategy (including policies, processes, and
technologies) to protect information and systems from external and internal threats.
Philips

Following industry-standard practice, your strategy should address physical security,

operational security, procedural security, risk management, security policies, and contingency
planning. The actual implementation of technical security elements varies by site and may
employ a number of technologies, including firewalls, virus-scanning software, authentication
technologies, etc.
As with any computer-based system, protection must be provided such that firewalls and/or
other security devices are in place between the medical system and any externally accessible
systems.
Although the system incorporates state-of-the-art protection mechanisms to protect it against
the intrusion of malware (viruses etc.) a remote probability remains that a system can become
infected. In all circumstances system safety remains secure, but the user might notice
unfamiliar system behavior and/or performance. If this happens repeatedly, e.g. also after the
system has been switched off and on again, the user is advised to call Philips Customer Service
to have the system checked and if needed cleaned from malware.
The USA Veterans Administration has developed a widely used Medical Device Isolation
Architecture for this purpose. Such perimeter and network defenses are essential elements in a
comprehensive medical device security strategy.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
The internal electronic log files generated by this product as a part of its normal operations,
will contain the names of storage folders created by the user, and therefore will include any
patient, clinician or other personal identifying information used in such folder names.
In the course of maintenance, monitoring or repair of this product or of related development
and other product-related activities, Philips may access, store or otherwise use those log files.
Any connection of a device to a hospital network should be done with appropriate risk
management for safety, effectiveness, and data and systems security. For guidance on risk
management, see the IEC-80001-1 standard.
Additional security and privacy information can be found on the Philips product security
website at http://www.philips.com/productsecurity. Please review Philips product security
policies regarding remote service, patch management, anti-virus software and more in the
“Product Security Policy Statement” and additional information sources available through this
website.
CAUTION
The internal electronic log files generated by this product as a part of its normal operations,
will contain the names of storage folders created by the user, and therefore will include any
patient, clinician or other personal identifying information used in such folder names. In the
course of maintenance, monitoring or repair of this product or of related development and
other product-related activities, Philips may access, store or otherwise use those log files.
Philips

Alarms Overview Safety
2.3.13 Q-Flow
Status: Released
Q-Flow measurements.
Node title (original): 67856 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-GR. ID: 18014405153220747-1
35_part2 Status: Released
WARNING
For Q-Flow measurements the field-of-view (FOV) must be positioned in the isocenter of the
magnet to avoid misinterpretations due to incorrect Q-Flow calculations.
End fragment title: 67856 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-GR.35_part2
2.4 Alarms Overview

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Auditory alarms at the operator's console

Node title (original): 27467 SYS.Label.IFU.Alarms.Overview ID: 45036004447315723
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: IEC 60601-1-8 Ed 2.1 (2012-11) sections 5.2.1 and 6.1.2
(priotiy dislosure)
Auditory alarms that can occur at the operator's console are:

1. Nurse call (medium priority)
This alarm is triggered when the patient presses the nurse call twice or longer than 1.5 sec.
A buzzer alarm alerts the operator.
Node title (original): 36052 SYS.Label.IFU.Nursecall ID: 9007209613525003
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 36052
The sound pressure of the Nurse call is designed to be at least 80 dB(A).

End fragment title: 36052 SYS.Label.IFU.Nursecall
During patient preparation, explain the function of the nurse call to the patient. Test that the
nurse call functions properly for each new patient. The operator must be in the examination
room or the control room to be notified by this alarm.
Visual alarms that can occur at the operator's console are:

1. Nurse call (medium priority)
When the patient presses the nurse call twice or longer than 1.5 sec, a light on the
Philips
operator-patient intercom switches on.

Safety Important Messages and Indications
2. Tabletop moves (medium priority)

When the system automatically moves the tabletop, a pop-up indicates that the tabletop is
moving.
3. High SAR (low priority)
When a scan is performed in first level controlled operating mode based on SAR, an alarm
symbol is shown on the user interface in front of the scan SAR value.
4. High risk of PNS (low priority)
When a scan is performed in first level controlled operating mode based on PNS, an alarm
symbol is shown on the user interface in front of the scan PNS value.
5. High SED (medium priority)
When delivered SED exceeds 7.0 kJ/kg, an alarm symbol appears in front of the SED value
in the Patient Status Area.
The operator must be at the console to be notified by these alarms. There is no need to verify
these visual alarms.
End fragment title: 27467 SYS.Label.IFU.Alarms.Overview
Node title (original): UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) ID: 106613803275

Status: Released
Auditory alarm in the technical room
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Power outage
In case of a power outage the internal batteries of the UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
takes over the power supply for critical magnet functions only. A buzzer alarm in the technical
room alerts the operator.
End fragment title: UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
2.5 Important Messages and Indications

Affix: new with Artes/Voyager ID: 130435361291
Node title (original): 82604 SYS.Label.IFU.HAZ-VP.33a ID: 130447992587

Status: NotReleased
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 9/22/2021 8:28:35 AM: Title "Important Messages and Indications"
is also part of this PRQ entry. So always take care that the title is used correctly as requested in
PRQ. }
Important messages and indications are displayed in the language of the user interface. The
table displays the English messages and their translation.
Node title (original): 83132 SYS.Label.Alarms.Pop-up.HAZ-PS. ID: 130427803403
200.3_v1 Status: NotReleased
Affix: no system model missing -> all
Philips

Important Messages and Indications Safety
Tabletop is Moving Automatically
English Your language
Tabletop is Moving Automatically Tabletop is Moving Automatically

Check patient, patient extremities, clothing, equipment, Check patient, patient extremities, clothing, equipment,
cables and Intravenous lines cannot get trapped. cables and Intravenous lines cannot get trapped.
The message pops up when tabletop movement is requested.

• Stop movement immediately stops the tabletop movement.
Stop movement is the default value.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 83132 SYS.Label.Alarms.Pop-up.HAZ-PS.200.3_v1
Node title (original): 25485 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-UP1.4.4 ID: 130429099531

Affix: All system models Status: NotReleased
Philips

Enable Remote Desktop Session
A Remote Desktop session has been requested. A Remote Desktop session has been requested.
If you accept this Remote Desktop request, you confirm If you accept this Remote Desktop request, you confirm
that you know that this is an authorized Remote Desktop that you know that this is an authorized Remote Desktop
session. session.
You further confirm that you are the responsible You further confirm that you are the responsible
local operator for the system during this Remote local operator for the system during this Remote
Desktop session and have been fully informed about the Desktop session and have been fully informed about the
possible consequences regarding Safety, Security and possible consequences regarding Safety, Security and
Privacy arising from permitting remote operation of the Privacy arising from permitting remote operation of the
system, including those discussed in the system's system, including those discussed in the system's
Instructions for use. Instructions for use.
During a single windows Take Over session, you must During a single windows Take Over session, you must
stay at the system console and monitor the activities stay at the system console and monitor the activities
performed by the remote user. You can end the Remote performed by the remote user. You can end the Remote
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Desktop session any time by pressing the STOP button Desktop session any time by pressing the STOP button
on your screen. As the operator of the system, you are on your screen. As the operator of the system, you are
responsible for the safe and secure use of the system. responsible for the safe and secure use of the system.
Note that certain private information, including Note that certain private information, including
electronic Protected Health Information (ePHI) about electronic Protected Health Information (ePHI) about
patients, will become accessible to the remote operator. patients, will become accessible to the remote operator.
Be sure to stay within your institution's policy regarding Be sure to stay within your institution's policy regarding
disclosure of confidential information to third parties. disclosure of confidential information to third parties.
This message pops up when a Remote Desktop session is requested.

• To enable the Remote Desktop session, click I Agree.
• To not allow the Remote Desktop session, click Exit Session.
Exit Session is the default value.
End fragment title: 25485 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-UP1.4.4
Node title (original): 25486 SYS.Label.Pop- ID: 130429143435

up.RemoteDesktopSession Status: NotReleased
Affix: All system models
Philips

Remote Desktop session enabled
This button pops up when a Remote Desktop session is enabled.

• To terminate the Remote Desktop session, click the red button.
End fragment title: 25486 SYS.Label.Pop-up.RemoteDesktopSession
Node title (original): 25487 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-MA.49.1-a ID: 130428854411

Affix: All system models except for Ambition (and most likely Status: NotReleased
also not for MR5300)
Helium overpressure too low
Scanner Scanner
Helium overpressure too low. Please contact Philips Helium overpressure too low. Please contact Philips
service immediately! service immediately!
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
If this condition is not solved within x days from now If this condition is not solved within x days from now
scanning will be disabled. Press Proceed anyway to scanning will be disabled. Press Proceed anyway to
continue the examination. continue the examination.
This message pops up when an an insufficient helium overpressure is detected. This error must be resolved within
two days. From the third day onwards, the scanner is disabled.
• To continue the examination, click Proceed anyway.
Proceed anyway is the default value.
End fragment title: 25487 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-MA.49.1-a
Node title (original): 25493 SYS.Label.Pop-up.InvalidSurvey ID: 130429120267

Affix: All system models listed Status: NotReleased
Philips

Planscan: Position of the tabletop changed
Planscan Planscan
Position of the tabletop changed since acquisition of Position of the tabletop changed since acquisition of
survey. Please select recent survey. survey. Please select recent survey.
This message pops up when the movement of the tabletop invalidates the current survey.
• To set the scan back to Ready to run, click Close. This action allows you to adjust parameters.
Close is the default value.
End fragment title: 25493 SYS.Label.Pop-up.InvalidSurvey

up.UnsupportedSoftware Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Unsupported configuration
Configuration Check Failed Configuration Check Failed

This computer may be running an unsupported This computer may be running an unsupported
configuration! Either there is PMS approved patch configuration! Either there is PMS approved patch
software installed, or there is non PMS approved software installed, or there is non PMS approved
software installed. software installed.
If there is PMS approved patch software installed press If there is PMS approved patch software installed press
CANCEL to dismiss this popup. CANCEL to dismiss this popup.
Else press OK to display the version discrepancy report Else press OK to display the version discrepancy report
and contact your local Philips Medical Systems service and contact your local Philips Medical Systems service
center. center.{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 9/21/2021 8:41:08
AM: Philips Medical Systems service center?????}
This message pops up when unsupported software is detected.

• To display the version discrepancy report, click OK.
• To dismiss the pop-up, click Cancel.
Cancel is the default value.
Philips

End fragment title: 25496 SYS.Label.Pop-up.UnsupportedSoftware
Node title (original): 27801 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-RF-MIRA.27a ID: 130428925195

Affix: according to PRQ: only Ingeina! Status: NotReleased
dS HeadNeck coil
Warning Warning
dS HeadNeck coil is connected. Scanning with a tilted dS HeadNeck coil is connected. Scanning with a tilted
HeadNeck coil is not allowed. HeadNeck coil is not allowed.
Refer to the Instructions for Use for information Refer to the Instructions for Use for information
about the dS HeadNeck coil. about the dS HeadNeck coil.
Press Cancel to stop scanning. Press Cancel to stop scanning.
Press Proceed to start scanning, only if the ds HeadNeck Press Proceed to start scanning, only if the ds HeadNeck
coil is not tilted. coil is not tilted.
This message pops up before the first scan when the dS HeadNeck coil is connected.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• To start the scan and close the pop-up, click Proceed.

• To abort the scan and close the pop-up, click Cancel.
End fragment title: 27801 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-RF-MIRA.27a
Node title (original): 46224 SYS.Label.Pop-up.UC.Screen sharing ID: 130429150347

\ Status: NotReleased
Affix: All system models listed
Philips

Remote Desktop Sharing Remote Desktop Sharing

Sharing control allows the user to initiate a scan and Sharing control allows the user to initiate a scan and
table movement. table movement.
Risk of injury Risk of injury
I confirm that: I confirm that:
• I will stay at the MRI console to monitor the patient. • I will stay at the MRI console to monitor the patient.
• I am aware that remote users have access to private • I am aware that remote users have access to private
patient data. patient data.
This message pops up when you activate Unified Communications and then initiate Remote Desktop Sharing.
• To share the desktop, click Continue.
• To exit without sharing the desktop, click Exit.
Exit is the default value.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 46224 SYS.Label.Pop-up.UC.Screen sharing\
Node title (original): 46387 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.Scan ID: 130429160715

Risks Status: NotReleased
Philips

Implants
Magnetic and electromagnetic fields exert strong forces Magnetic and electromagnetic fields exert strong forces
on implants. on implants.
Risk of serious patient injury or death Risk of serious patient injury or death
Do not allow persons fitted with implants to enter the Do not allow persons fitted with implants to enter the
Controlled Access Area unless they have specific Controlled Access Area unless they have specific
approval to do so. approval to do so.
MR scanning or the MRI system itself can: MR scanning or the MRI system itself can:
• Cause the dislodgement of metallic implants • Cause the dislodgement of metallic implants
through strong attraction or torque. through strong attraction or torque.
• Interfere with the operation of electronically, • Interfere with the operation of electronically,
magnetically or mechanically activated implants. magnetically or mechanically activated implants.
• Cause excessive (local) heating of implants. • Cause excessive (local) heating of implants.
These effects can cause tissue damage, loss of These effects can cause tissue damage, loss of
physiologic function, serious injury or death. Presence of physiologic function, serious injury or death. Presence of
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
implants may also cause significant MR image artifacts implants may also cause significant MR image artifacts
due to magnetic field distortion. All these effects may due to magnetic field distortion. All these effects may
also apply to patients and personnel who rely on also apply to patients and personnel who rely on
electrically, magnetically or mechanically activated electrically, magnetically or mechanically activated
external life support systems. external life support systems.
It is the responsibility of the implant manufacturer to It is the responsibility of the implant manufacturer to
declare an implant MR Safe, MR Conditional or MR declare an implant MR Safe, MR Conditional or MR
Unsafe. For MR Conditional devices, the general Unsafe. For MR Conditional devices, the general
contraindications regarding implants, may not be contraindications regarding implants, may not be
applicable in their entirety. applicable in their entirety.
More about MR Safe and MR Conditional Implants. More about MR Safe and MR Conditional Implants.
This message pops up when you select What are the risks of scanning patients with implants? in the MR Label
screen of the implant guidance.
• To display more information about implants, click More about MR Safe and MR Conditional Implants.
Philips

End fragment title: 46387 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.Scan Risks
Node title (original): 46388 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.MR ID: 130429176971

Conditional Status: NotReleased
More about MR Safe and MR Conditional Implants
More about MR Safe and MR Conditional Implants More about MR Safe and MR Conditional Implants
Implantable medical devices labeled MR Safe or MR Implantable medical devices labeled MR Safe or MR
Conditional have been cleared, approved and/or Conditional have been cleared, approved and/or
licensed by the Competent Governmental Authorities licensed by the Competent Governmental Authorities
and/or labeled by the manufacturer. For such devices, and/or labeled by the manufacturer. For such devices,
the general contraindications may not be applicable in the general contraindications may not be applicable in
its entirety. its entirety.
It is the responsibility of the implant manufacturer to It is the responsibility of the implant manufacturer to
declare an implant MR Safe or MR Conditional and to declare an implant MR Safe or MR Conditional and to
define the conditions (restrictions) that allow for safe define the conditions (restrictions) that allow for safe
MR scanning. MR scanning.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

It is the obligation of the MR operator to be aware of It is the obligation of the MR operator to be aware of
these conditions and to assure that they are strictly these conditions and to assure that they are strictly
adhered to. adhered to.
Refer to the user documentation of the implant or Refer to the user documentation of the implant or
contact the implant manufacturer to obtain these contact the implant manufacturer to obtain these
specific conditions. The system provides options to specific conditions. The system provides options to
restrict whole body and head SAR and dB/dt, and to restrict whole body and head SAR and dB/dt, and to
review other system characteristics, as specified in the review other system characteristics, as specified in the
Technical Description. Technical Description.
Philips does not assume responsibility or liability for the Philips does not assume responsibility or liability for the
operation of their MRI system with any implantable operation of their MRI system with any implantable
medical device. medical device.
This message pops up when you select What are the risks of scanning patients with implants? in the MR Label
screen of the implant guidance, and then More about MR Safe and MR Conditional Implants. Philips

End fragment title: 46388 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.MR Conditional
Node title (original): 46389 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.Max ID: 130429190795

dBdt Status: NotReleased
Maximum dB/dt
The maximum dB/dt on the info page does not take the The maximum dB/dt on the info page does not take the
maximum dB/dt for automatically inserted prescans into maximum dB/dt for automatically inserted prescans into
account. However, if a maximum dB/dt has been account. However, if a maximum dB/dt has been
specified in the Implant Conditions menu, all scans, specified in the Implant Conditions menu, all scans,
including prescans, will be restricted to the dB/dt value including prescans, will be restricted to the dB/dt value
specified. specified.
For more information, refer to the paragraph Gradients For more information, refer to the paragraph Gradients
in the Technical Description. in the Technical Description.
This message pops up when you click Which conditions are typically provided by the manufacturer of the
implant? link Which MR label does the implant have? screen in the Implant Conditions menu.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 46389 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.Max dBdt
Node title (original): 46390 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.Spatial ID: 130429180427

field gradient Status: NotReleased
Implant and spatial field gradient
The implant must NOT touch the red areas These The implant must NOT touch the red areas These
areas exceed the specified maximum spatial field areas exceed the specified maximum spatial field
gradient value for this implant. gradient value for this implant.
This message pops up in the Spatial Field Gradient screen of the implant guidance when you enter a maximum
spatial field gradient value. It also pops up when you click the Details... button.
Philips

End fragment title: 46390 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.Spatial field gradient
Node title (original): 67323 SYS.Label.Pop-up.New ID: 130429153803

Exam.Pregnancy_v2 Status: NotReleased
Maximum SAR for scanning Pregnant Patients
Maximum SAR for scanning Pregnant Patients Maximum SAR for scanning Pregnant Patients
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

It is advised to scan in normal operating mode It is advised to scan in normal operating mode
(maximum SAR < 2W/kg). (maximum SAR < 2W/kg).
In first level controlled operating mode, high SAR may In first level controlled operating mode, high SAR may
cause heating of the fetus. Only enter first level cause heating of the fetus. Only enter first level
controlled operating mode if the clinical benefit exceeds controlled operating mode if the clinical benefit exceeds
the potential risks. the potential risks.
Limit to normal operating mode. Maximum SAR Limit to normal operating mode. Maximum SAR
2W/kg (advised). 2W/kg (advised).
Allow first level controlled operating mode. Allow first level controlled operating mode.
Maximum SAR 4 W/kg. Maximum SAR 4 W/kg.
Medical supervision must be provided while scanning. Medical supervision must be provided while scanning.
This message pops up in the New Exam window when you set Patient gender to female, Pregnancy to Yes, SAR
mode to 1st level.
• To select normal operating mode or first level controlled operating mode, click the corresponding button.
Philips

End fragment title: 67323 SYS.Label.Pop-up.New Exam.Pregnancy_v2
Node title (original): 68924 SYS.Label.Pop-up.(HAZ-MA.73, HAZ- ID: 130428899723

MA.75) Status: NotReleased
Affix: Ambition MR5300
Energizing the magnet
MAGNET WARNING MAGNET WARNING

Before energizing the magnet: Before energizing the magnet:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Make sure that all electronic equipment is put in • Make sure that all electronic equipment is put in
areas where the magnetic field is less than 10 mT. areas where the magnetic field is less than 10 mT.
• Make sure that all loose magnetic objects are • Make sure that all loose magnetic objects are
removed from the imaging room. These objects may removed from the imaging room. These objects may
become projectiles when the magnet is energized. become projectiles when the magnet is energized.
If you do not obey these instructions, there is a risk of If you do not obey these instructions, there is a risk of
death or serious injury. death or serious injury.
This message pops up when the magnet is about to be energized by the trained operator or your service provider.
• To start the process of energizing the magnet and to remove the precondition text, click Next .
Also inform other relevant persons that the magnet goes on field again.
• To remove the precondition text without starting the process of energizing the magnet, click Cancel.
End fragment title: 68924 SYS.Label.Pop-up.(HAZ-MA.73, HAZ-MA.75)
Node title (original): 68925 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-MA.74 ID: 130428903179

Philips

Inconsistent magnet sensors
Unclear if the magnet is on or off field, because the Unclear if the magnet is on or off field, because the
magnetic field sensor and the magnet discharge status magnetic field sensor and the magnet discharge status
are inconsistent. The system should be considered on are inconsistent. The system should be considered on
field, until proven that it is off field. field, until proven that it is off field.
This message pops up at the end of the procedure Corrective Maintenance-Magnet-Magnet Discharge if the
magnetic field sensor and the magnet discharge status are inconsistent.
• To remove the message, close the pop-up window.
End fragment title: 68925 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-MA.74

up.Exam.PatientPositionUnknown_v1 Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Patient Position Undefined
Patient Position Undefined Patient Position Undefined

Patient position needs to be defined. Reuse the current Patient position needs to be defined. Reuse the current
position, or use the light visor. position, or use the light visor.
This message pops up when the patient position is unknown to the system.
• To continue the examination, select Reuse Current Position.
Reuse Current Position is the default value.
End fragment title: 82464 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Exam.PatientPositionUnknown_v1
Node title (original): 82601 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-MA.49.1- ID: 130428896267

b_v1 Status: NotReleased
Affix: All system models except for Ambition (and most likely
also not for MR5300)
Philips

Helium overpressure is too low for 3 days or more
Scanner Scanner
Scanner not operational. The system is in hazardous Scanner not operational. The system is in hazardous
state due to insufficient overpressure. Contact Philips state due to insufficient overpressure. Contact Philips
service. service.
This message pops up when the Helium overpressure is too low for 3 days or more.
• To close the pop-up, click Close .

End fragment title: 82601 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-MA.49.1-b_v1

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
up.Exam.SamePatient_v1 Status: NotReleased

Scanner Scanner
Same patient selected. Has the patient been Same patient selected. Has the patient been
repositioned? repositioned?
This message pops up when you create a new examination selecting the same patient.
• To reset the patient reference point, click Yes. To reposition and plan the patient, use the light visor
Yes is the default value.
• To continue the examination, click No.
End fragment title: 83037 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Exam.SamePatient_v1

up.Implants.Conditional.Responsibility_v1 Status: NotReleased
Philips

Implant responsibility

• All values for the implant are entered correctly. • All values for the implant are entered correctly.
• The responsible physician approves this patient for • The responsible physician approves this patient for
This message pops up in the Confirm screen of the implant guidance.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 83053 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.Conditional.Responsibility_v1

up.Implants.Predicted SAR_v2 Status: NotReleased
Direct link to the Help page for SAR
Help menu page for Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). Help menu page for Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).
This message pops up in the SAR screen of the implant guidance when you select the link What should I know
about SAR, B1rms and patient heating?
Philips

End fragment title: 83054 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.Predicted SAR_v2
Node title (original): 83072 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.Field ID: 130429187339

strength_v1 Status: NotReleased
Scanning of implants depending on the field strength
Scanning not allowed at XX Tesla. Scanning not allowed at XX Tesla.

It is not safe to continue scanning this patient. The field It is not safe to continue scanning this patient. The field
strength of this system is too high for the implant. strength of this system is too high for the implant.
This message pops up in the Field Strength screen of the implant guidance. XX indicates the magnetic field strenght
of the system.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 83072 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.Field strength_v1
Node title (original): 83073 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.MR ID: 130429194251

Safe.Responsibility_v1 Status: NotReleased
MR Safe implant
MR Safe implant. MR Safe implant.

No examination conditions will be set. No examination conditions will be set.
• The implant is MR Safe. • The implant is MR Safe.
• The responsible physician approves this patient for • The responsible physician approves this patient for
This message pops up in the screen of the implant guidance when you selected MR Safe.
Philips

End fragment title: 83073 SYS.Label.Pop-up.Implants.MR Safe.Responsibility_v1
Node title (original): 83074 SYS.Label.Pop-up.MutipleVCG_v1 ID: 130429139979

Multiple VCG modules
Wireless Physiology Wireless Physiology
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Multiple VCG modules detected. Only one must be Multiple VCG modules detected. Only one must be
powered on. powered on.
This message pops up when multiple VCG modules are detected.

• To close the pop-up window, click Close.
End fragment title: 83074 SYS.Label.Pop-up.MutipleVCG_v1
Node title (original): 83120 SYS.Label.Pop-up.MutiplePPU_v1 ID: 130429123723

Philips

Multiple VCG modules
Wireless Physiology Wireless Physiology

Multiple PPU modules detected. Only one must be Multiple PPU modules detected. Only one must be
powered on. powered on.
This message pops up when multiple PPU modules are detected.

• To close the pop-up window, click Close.
End fragment title: 83120 SYS.Label.Pop-up.MutiplePPU_v1
Node title (original): 83124 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-RF.92.1_v2 ID: 130428932107

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
High Whole Body SAR
High Whole Body SAR High Whole Body SAR

The next scan requires 1st level controlled operating The next scan requires 1st level controlled operating
mode for whole body SAR. In this mode, the SAR value is mode for whole body SAR. In this mode, the SAR value is
between 2 and 4 W/kg. Medical supervision is required between 2 and 4 W/kg. Medical supervision is required
to monitor body temperature rise. to monitor body temperature rise.
If you observe that the patient is feeling warm, lower the If you observe that the patient is feeling warm, lower the
SAR mode to Normal. Do you allow high whole body SAR SAR mode to Normal. Do you allow high whole body SAR
for the current patient? for the current patient?
Read about 1st level controlled operating mode Read about 1st level controlled operating mode
for SAR. for SAR.
This message pops up upon Start Scan when 1st level controlled operating mode for SAR and high SAR are not
confirmed for the current examination.
• Confirm and Start immediately starts the scan.
All scans for the current patient which require medical supervision due to high SAR are allowed.
• Cancel sets the scan back to ready to run and allows you to adjust parameters.
Philips

End fragment title: 83124 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-RF.92.1_v2
Node title (original): 83125 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-RF. ID: 130429076363

92.1_Italy_v2 Status: NotReleased
High Whole Body SAR (applies for Italy)
High Whole Body SAR High Whole Body SAR
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

mode for whole body SAR. In this mode, the SAR value is mode for whole body SAR. In this mode, the SAR value is
between 2 and 4 W/kg. The SAR level exceeds the limits between 2 and 4 W/kg. The SAR level exceeds the limits
set by Italian regulation (D.M 3-8-93). set by Italian regulation (D.M 3-8-93).
Medical supervision is required to monitor body Medical supervision is required to monitor body
temperature rise. temperature rise.
If you observe that the patient is feeling warm, lower the If you observe that the patient is feeling warm, lower the
SAR mode to Normal. Do you allow high whole body SAR SAR mode to Normal. Do you allow high whole body SAR
for the current patient? for the current patient?
for SAR. for SAR.
This message pops up upon Start Scan when 1st level controlled operating mode for SAR and high SAR are not
Philips

End fragment title: 83125 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-RF.92.1_Italy_v2
Node title (original): 83126 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-RF.92.1.a_v2 ID: 130429079819

High Local SAR
High Local SAR High Local SAR

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
mode for local SAR. In this mode, the SAR value is mode for local SAR. In this mode, the SAR value is
between 10 and 20 W/kg. Medical supervision is between 10 and 20 W/kg. Medical supervision is
required to monitor local body temperature rise. required to monitor local body temperature rise.
If you observe that the patient experiences local If you observe that the patient experiences local
warming, lower the SAR mode to Normal. Do you allow warming, lower the SAR mode to Normal. Do you allow
high local SAR for the current patient? high local SAR for the current patient?
for SAR. for SAR.
This message pops up upon Start Scan when 1st level controlled operating mode for SAR and local high SAR are not
Philips

End fragment title: 83126 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-RF.92.1.a_v2
Node title (original): 83127 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-RF. ID: 130429083275

92.1.a_Italy_v2 Status: NotReleased
High Local SAR (applies for Italy)
High Local SAR High Local SAR
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

mode for local SAR. In this mode, the SAR value is mode for local SAR. In this mode, the SAR value is
between 10 and 20 W/kg. The SAR level exceeds the between 10 and 20 W/kg. The SAR level exceeds the
limits set by Italian regulation (D.M 3-8-93). limits set by Italian regulation (D.M 3-8-93).
Medical supervision is required to monitor local body Medical supervision is required to monitor local body
temperature rise. temperature rise.
If you observe that the patient experiences local If you observe that the patient experiences local
warming, lower the SAR mode to Normal. Do you allow warming, lower the SAR mode to Normal. Do you allow
high local SAR for the current patient? high local SAR for the current patient?
for SAR. for SAR.
This message pops up upon Start Scan when 1st level controlled operating mode for SAR and local high SAR are not
Philips

End fragment title: 83127 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-RF.92.1.a_Italy_v2
Node title (original): 83129 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-PS.200.2a_v1 ID: 130428906635

Automatic Tabletop Movement
Automatic Tabletop Movement Automatic Tabletop Movement

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
The tabletop will move. Check that the patient, patient The tabletop will move. Check that the patient, patient
extremities, clothing, equipment, cables and intravenous extremities, clothing, equipment, cables and intravenous
lines cannot get trapped. lines cannot get trapped.
Verify that nothing can get trapped during the tabletop Verify that nothing can get trapped during the tabletop
movement. movement.
Allow the tabletop to move automatically for Allow the tabletop to move automatically for
• this scan? • this scan?
• all scans? • all scans?
Read about tabletop movement. Read about tabletop movement.
This message pops up when the scan requires tabletop movement after Start scan.
• To not initiate tabletop movement, click Cancel.
The scan will be aborted if it the scan status is dispatched. The scan will be cancelled if the scan status is ready
to run.
• To start tabletop movement and then start the scan, click Confirm and Start.
– If you select for this scan, tabletop movement takes place only for the current scan.
The message pops up again for the next scan that requires tabletop movement.
– If you select for all scans, tabletop movement takes place for all scans where it is required or
recommended.
Allow for all scans is the default value.
Philips

End fragment title: 83129 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-PS.200.2a_v1
Node title (original): 83130 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-RF.12.3_v2 ID: 130428928651

Affix: All system models except for Achieva Status: NotReleased
Low Bore Ventilation
Low Bore Ventilation Low Bore Ventilation

The bore ventilation is below the recommended level The bore ventilation is below the recommended level
and may cause patient discomfort. Increase the bore and may cause patient discomfort. Increase the bore
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

ventilation level. ventilation level.
Level 3 or higher is recommended. Level 3 or higher is recommended.
Read about bore ventilation Read about bore ventilation
This message pops up when the bore ventilation is below the recommended level after Start scan.
End fragment title: 83130 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-RF.12.3_v2

up.UI.Popup.Tabletop.FastMovement_v1 Status: NotReleased
Philips

Fast Tabletop Movement
Fast Tabletop Movement Fast Tabletop Movement

The tabletop will move fast. Check that the patient, The tabletop will move fast. Check that the patient,
patient extremities, clothing, equipment, cables and patient extremities, clothing, equipment, cables and
intravenous lines cannot get trapped. intravenous lines cannot get trapped.
Verify that nothing can get trapped during the table Verify that nothing can get trapped during the table
movement. movement.
Do you allow the tabletop to move fast for this scan? Do you allow the tabletop to move fast for this scan?
Read about tabletop movement. Read about tabletop movement.
This message pops up when the scan requires fast tabletop movement.
• To not initiate tabletop movement, click Cancel.
The scan will be aborted if it the scan status is dispatched. The scan will be cancelled if the scan status is ready
to run.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• To start tabletop movement and then start the scan, click Confirm and Start.
End fragment title: 83131 SYS.Label.Pop-up.UI.Popup.Tabletop.FastMovement_v1
Node title (original): 83133 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-GR.57.4_v2 ID: 130428826507

Philips

High Sound Level For Pediatric Patients
High Sound Level For Pediatric Patients High Sound Level For Pediatric Patients
The predicted sound pressure level exceeds the The predicted sound pressure level exceeds the
recommended maximum level of 99 dB for pediatric recommended maximum level of 99 dB for pediatric
patients.This may result in temporary or permanent loss patients.This may result in temporary or permanent loss
of hearing. of hearing.
Verify that the patient or others in the examination Verify that the patient or others in the examination
room wear appropriate hearing protection. room wear appropriate hearing protection.
Do you allow a high sound level for the current patient? Do you allow a high sound level for the current patient?
Read about high sound levels. Read about high sound levels.
The message pops up

when the predicted sound pressure level of the scan to be started is above the allowed level for pediatric patients
(age < 3 years).
• The sound pressure level starts for each patient at 99 dB. It can be increased to higher value via this pop-up.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Cancel sets the scan back to ready to run and allows you to adjust the parameters.
The allowed limit is set to the new, higher, value.
• Cancel is the default value.
End fragment title: 83133 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-GR.57.4_v2
Node title (original): 83134 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-GR.68_v2 ID: 130428844171

Philips

High Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
High Peripheral Nerve Stimulation High Peripheral Nerve Stimulation

mode for Peripheral Nerve Stimulation (PNS). In this mode for Peripheral Nerve Stimulation (PNS). In this
mode the PNS value is above 80%. Medical supervision is mode the PNS value is above 80%. Medical supervision is
required to monitor patient comfort. required to monitor patient comfort.
If you observe that the patient feels a tingling sensation If you observe that the patient feels a tingling sensation
or superficial twitch, lower the PNS mode to Normal. or superficial twitch, lower the PNS mode to Normal.
Do you allow a high PNS level for the current patient? Do you allow a high PNS level for the current patient?
for PNS. for PNS.
The message pops up when the PNS exceeds 80%, and high PNS was not confirmed for the current examination.
• Cancel{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 9/20/2021 1:45:57 PM: UI control} sets the scan back to ready to
run{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 9/20/2021 1:45:57 PM: UI control?} and allows you to adjust the parameters.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

All scans for the current patient which require medical supervision due to high PNS are allowed.
End fragment title: 83134 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-GR.68_v2

up.UI.Popup.HighSED_v2 Status: NotReleased
Philips

High Total SED
High Total SED High Total SED

The performed scans and the remaining scans together The performed scans and the remaining scans together
exceed the recommended Specific Energy Dose (SED) exceed the recommended Specific Energy Dose (SED)
levels with xx kJ/kg. Patient discomfort due to body levels with xx kJ/kg. Patient discomfort due to body
temperature rise can be observed at values greater than temperature rise can be observed at values greater than
the recommended SED of 7.0 kJ/kg. the recommended SED of 7.0 kJ/kg.
If you observe that the patient is feeling warm, reduce If you observe that the patient is feeling warm, reduce
the scan time or the SAR of the remaining scans. Do you the scan time or the SAR of the remaining scans. Do you
allow to exceed the recommended SED for the current allow to exceed the recommended SED for the current
patient? patient?
Read about SED. Read about SED.
This message pops up when the total SED for the current patient exceeds 7.0 kJ/kg when the scan is started.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 83135 SYS.Label.Pop-up.UI.Popup.HighSED_v2

up.UI.Popup.RecommendedSEDExceeded_v2 Status: NotReleased
Philips

Recommended Maximum SED Will Be Exceeded
Recommended Maximum SED Will Be Exceeded Recommended Maximum SED Will Be Exceeded
In the next scan and the remainder of the examination In the next scan and the remainder of the examination
the SED exceeds 7.0 kJ/kg, which leads to patient the SED exceeds 7.0 kJ/kg, which leads to patient
discomfort. Medical supervision is required to monitor discomfort. Medical supervision is required to monitor
the patient temperature rise. Specific Energy Dose (SED) the patient temperature rise. Specific Energy Dose (SED)
is a comfort measure about the RF energy delivered to is a comfort measure about the RF energy delivered to
the patient. Serious discomfort is reported at values the patient. Serious discomfort is reported at values
greater than 7.0 kJ/kg. greater than 7.0 kJ/kg.
If you observe that the patient is feeling warm, stop If you observe that the patient is feeling warm, stop
scanning to avoid serious discomfort. Confirm that the scanning to avoid serious discomfort. Confirm that the
clinical benefit exceeds the risk of high SED. Do you clinical benefit exceeds the risk of high SED. Do you
allow to exceed the recommended SED for the current allow to exceed the recommended SED for the current
patient? patient?
Read about SED. Read about SED.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
This message pops up when the Delivered SED for the current patient exceeds 7.0 kJ/kg when the scan is started.
• To continue scanning, click Confirm and Continue Scanning.
• To stop scanning, click Stop Scanning.
Stop Scanning is the default value.
End fragment title: 83136 SYS.Label.Pop-up.UI.Popup.RecommendedSEDExceeded_v2
Node title (original): 83137 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-GR.47.3_v2 ID: 130428811531

Philips

Phantom Scanning Only
Phantom Scanning Only Phantom Scanning Only

The PNS of this scan exceeds the allowed limits on The PNS of this scan exceeds the allowed limits on
patients. The system enters second level controlled patients. The system enters second level controlled
operating mode. operating mode.
Patient scanning is not allowed with these settings. Patient scanning is not allowed with these settings.
I understand the implication of scanning in the second I understand the implication of scanning in the second
level controlled operating mode. level controlled operating mode.
Read about 2nd level controlled operating mode Read about 2nd level controlled operating mode
for PNS. for PNS.
The message pops up

when the scan exceeds the PNS limits of 1st level controlled mode.
• Cancel{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 9/20/2021 1:45:57 PM: UI control} sets the scan back to ready to
run{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 9/20/2021 1:45:57 PM: UI control?} and allows you to adjust parameters.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 83137 SYS.Label.Pop-up.HAZ-GR.47.3_v2
Node title (original): 75572 SYS.Label.Warning.HAZ-MA.81.1 ID: 130458260747

Status: NotReleased Philips

EasySwitch: Before Discharging
The complete discharge and magnet stabilize time takes The complete discharge and magnet stabilize time takes
about 2 hours. about 2 hours.
WARNING WARNING
Attracted objects may suddenly fall down or move due Attracted objects may suddenly fall down or move due
to magnetic field discharge. to magnetic field discharge.
Attraction of magnetic objects and malfunction of active Attraction of magnetic objects and malfunction of active
implants. implants.
Risk of death or serious injury. Risk of death or serious injury.
Do not allow anyone in the examination room. Do not allow anyone in the examination room.
Click Start to initiate discharging the magnet. Click Start to initiate discharging the magnet.
This message pops up before discharging the magnet with EasySwitch.

• To start the discharge procedure, click Start.
• To close the window without starting the discharge procedure, click Cancel.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 75572 SYS.Label.Warning.HAZ-MA.81.1

Status: NotReleased
Philips

EasySwitch: Before Discharging
about 2 hours. about 2 hours.
WARNING WARNING
implants. implants.
This message pops up before discharging the magnet with EasySwitch.

• To start the discharge procedure, click Start.
• To close the window without starting the discharge procedure, click Cancel.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): 75575 SYS.Label.Warning.HAZ-MA.84 ID: 130458268299

Status: NotReleased
Philips

The complete energize procedure time takes about 2 The complete energize procedure time takes about 2
hours. hours.
WARNING WARNING
implants due to energization of magnetic field. implants due to energization of magnetic field.
Remove all loose magnetic objects from the examination Remove all loose magnetic objects from the examination
room. room.
Take general MR safety precautions until the Magnet Take general MR safety precautions until the Magnet
Status is OFF. Status is OFF.
NOTICE NOTICE
The energize procedure can not be stopped. The magnet The energize procedure can not be stopped. The magnet
energization process runs independently on the system. energization process runs independently on the system.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
It will continue even if the host is down. It will continue even if the host is down.
For more information, refer to the Instructions for For more information, refer to the Instructions for
Use. Use.
Click Start to initiate energizing the magnet. Click Start to initiate energizing the magnet.
This message pops up before energizing the magnet with EasySwitch.

• To start the energize procedure, click Start.
• To close the window without starting the energize procedure, click Cancel.
End fragment title: 75575 SYS.Label.Warning.HAZ-MA.84

Status: NotReleased
Philips

EasySwitch: Discharge unsuccessful
Magnet Discharge was unsuccessful. Magnet Discharge was unsuccessful.
WARNING WARNING
implants. implants.
Take general MR safety precautions unless the Magnet Take general MR safety precautions unless the Magnet
Status is Off. Status is OFF.
Please wait until the system is ready. Please wait until the system is ready.
Estimated time remaining: x minutes. Estimated time remaining: x minutes.
This message pops up when the discharge procedure with EasySwitch was unsuccessful.
• To close the window, click Close.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12


Status: NotReleased
WARNING WARNING
Risks of discharging and energizing the magnet using Risks of discharging and energizing the magnet using
EasySwitch. EasySwitch.
Read the section on EasySwitch in the instructions Read the section on EasySwitch in the instructions
for use to understand related risks. for use to understand related risks.
This message pops up before discharging or energizing with EasySwitch.

Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: NotReleased
Magnet energize successfully completed. Magnet energize successfully completed.
WARNING WARNING
Magnet homogeneity may be out of specificaton, and Magnet homogeneity may be out of specificaton, and
Image Quality may be degraded. Image Quality may be degraded.
Risk of serious injury due to misdiagnosis. Risk of serious injury due to misdiagnosis.
Contact your Authorized Service Provider to have Contact your Authorized Service Provider to have
magnet homogeneity checked. magnet homogeneity checked.
This message pops up after energizing the magnet with EasySwitch.

Philips

Safety Symbols on System, Coils and Accessories

Status: NotReleased
WARNING: Contact an Authorized Service Provider to WARNING: Contact an Authorized Service Provider to
have the magnet homogeneity checked! have the magnet homogeneity checked!
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

This message pops up in the status line after energizing the magnet with EasySwitch. It remains in the status line
until the homogeneity is checked.
End fragment title: 82604 SYS.Label.IFU.HAZ-VP.33a
2.6 Symbols on System, Coils and Accessories

Affix: Artes NEW ID: 9007316253489035
Last Content Modificator: Geenen, Hubert Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 78953 SYS.Label.IFU. ID: 9007316253644555

21CFR_Parts660,801,809_SymbolsGlossary_v4 Status: NotReleased
The following symbols may be used on your Philips system, on accessories and packaging, as
well as at the examination room.
Node title (original): Symbols ID: 63050442761260171
Status: Released
Philips

Symbols on System, Coils and Accessories Safety
General symbols Source Meaning
IEC 60417-5840 Type B applied part.

To identify a type B applied part complying with IEC
60601-1.
IEC 60417-5333 Type BF applied part.

To identify a type BF applied part complying with IEC
60601-1.
IEC 60417-5336 Defibrillation-proof type CF applied part.

To identify a defibrillation-proof type CF applied part
complying with IEC 60601-1 .
End fragment title: Symbols
Node title (original): Mandatory symbols with - ONLY screened ID: 54043263669512843
Status: Released
Mandatory Action symbols Source Meaning

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ISO 7010-M002 Refer to instruction manual/booklet.
ISO 7010-M003 Wear ear protection.
ONLY screened and approved devices allowed in

scanning room.
End fragment title: Mandatory symbols with - ONLY screened
Node title (original): Prohibition Symbols ID: 36028886789876235

Status: NotReleased
Philips

Prohibition symbols Source Meaning
ISO 7010-P007 No access for people with active implanted cardiac

devices.
Metallic implants prohibited.
ISO 7010-P014 No access for people with metallic implants.
ISO7010-P008 No metallic articles or watches.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Loose ferromagnetic objects and mechanical watches
prohibited.
Loose ferromagnetic tools prohibited.
Wheel chairs and equivalent metal objects prohibited.
Magnetic media prohibited (credit cards, diskettes,

magnetic tapes).
Philips

Prohibition symbols Source Meaning
ISO 7010-P012 No heavy load.
Scanning pediatric patients is not allowed with this coil.
End fragment title: Prohibition Symbols
Node title (original): Hazard Identification symbols ID: 36028886790146059

Status: Released
Hazard Identification Source Meaning

symbols
ISO 7010-W001 General warning sign.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ISO 7010-W006 Warning: Magnetic field.
ISO 7010-W005 Warning; Non-ionizing radiation.
ISO 7010-W024 Warning: Crushing of hand.
Danger of clamping.
Philips

Hazard Identification Source Meaning

symbols
ISO 7010-W004 Warning: Laser beam.
IEC 60825-1 Laser radiation: Do not stare into beam.

Class 2 Laser Product .
End fragment title: Hazard Identification symbols
Node title (original): Alarm symbols ID: 27021687535406091

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Alarm symbols Source Meaning
IEC 60417-5307 Low priority alarm.
IEC 60417-5307 Medium priority alarm.
End fragment title: Alarm symbols
Node title (original): Emergency Magnet Off label ID: 27021687535407115

Status: Released
Philips

Marking on Emergency Source Meaning

Magnet Off label
Person trapped by an object that is attracted by the

magnet.
End fragment title: Emergency Magnet Off label
Marking on FlexTrak Meaning
Total Mass and safe working load
FlexTrak Marking
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): Environmental symbol ID: 36028886790149131

Status: NotReleased
Environmental symbol Source Meaning
SJ/T 11364-2014 Figure 2, China RoHS environment-friendly use period of the

Mark II electrical and electronic product.
End fragment title: Environmental symbol
Node title (original): Disposal symbol ID: 27021687535410187

Status: Released
Disposal symbol Source Meaning
Directive 2012/19/EU Waste electrical and electronic equipment.

WEEE Symbol
End fragment title: Disposal symbol
Node title (original): Other symbols ID: 9007316253975051

Status: NotReleased
Philips

Other symbols Source Meaning
ISO7000-2498 Serial number
ISO7000-2493 Catalogue number
ISO7000-3082 Manufacturer
ETL listed Intertek ETL recognized component
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

ISO7000 3500 To indicate on product or product packaging that
relevant information for use of the product is available in
electronic form rather than, or in addition to, printed
paper form.
2017/745/EU Medical Device
European Commission CE Marked Device
ISO7000-0434B Caution
2017/745/EU UDI
2017/745/EU Importer
Philips

Other symbols Source Meaning
IEC60417 - 6049 Country of Manufacture
IEC60417 - 6050 Model Number
End fragment title: Other symbols
Node title (original): IEC Ed3A1 Clause 24630 ID: 18014507604772875

SRS.Labeling.ExtMarking.Examroomdoor Status: Released
Safety marking plate Explanation
Examination room door safety marking plate.

The individual symbols are explained in other parts of
this section.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Text on the safety marking plate:

1. This 1.5T (3.0T) magnet is ALWAYS ON
2. System use and scanning room access for MR
Authorized personnel ONLY
3. ONLY screened and approved devices allowed in
scanning room
4. While scanning: RF fields and acoustic noise
End fragment title: IEC Ed3A1 Clause 24630 SRS.Labeling.ExtMarking.Examroomdoor

End fragment title: 78953 SYS.Label.IFU.21CFR_Parts660,801,809_SymbolsGlossary_v4

SYS.Label.IFU.PrescriptionDeviceSymbol_US_PuertoRico Status: Released
Philips

Rx only FDAMA 105-115 nov 1997 / Prescription device

21CFR parts 660, 801 and
809
End fragment title: 69442 SYS.Label.IFU.PrescriptionDeviceSymbol_US_PuertoRico
Node title (original): Markings on Trolley ID: 63050442761072267

Status: Released
Marking on Trolley and MammoTrak Meaning
End fragment title: Markings on Trolley
Node title (original): Markings on FlexTrak ID: 72057642015906827

Affix: Obsolete Status: NotReleased
Marking on FlexTrak Meaning
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

FlexTrak Marking
End fragment title: Markings on FlexTrak
Medical symbols Meaning
ECG
Peripheral pulse/blood pressure
Referenced standards for symbols on the system

• IEC 60417:2002 DB, Graphical symbols for use on equipment.
• ISO 7010:2011, Graphical symbols – Safety colours and safety signs – Registered safety
signs.
Philips
• ISO 7000:2014 (ed. 5.0), Graphical symbols for use on equipment - Registered symbols.

Accessories list Safety
• EN 50419:2006, Marking of electrical and electronic equipment in accordance with Article

11(2) of Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE).
• IEC TR 60878:2015 (ed. 3.0), Graphical symbols for electrical equipment in medical practice.
You can find definitions of used symbols in the symbol glossary on the following website:
http://www.symbols.philips.com
2.7 Accessories list

Status: Released
Node title (original): 76971 SYS.Label.IFU.Accessories ID: 72057600879146379

Affix: Ing/Elit/Amb Status: Released
The following Accessories are provided with the system to enable specific procedures or to
ensure safety:
• All RF coils.
• PPU Sensor for wireless physiology.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Pediatric PPU Sensor.

• FlexTrak.
• Acoustic Hood.
Node title (original): only for 3.0T (Ingenia and Elition) ID: 18014513224719371
Status: Released
• MR Elastography.
End fragment title: only for 3.0T (Ingenia and Elition)
End fragment title: 76971 SYS.Label.IFU.Accessories

ISO/IEC: 24637 Achieva
ensure safety:
• All RF coils.
• Trolley.
• MammoTrak trolley.
• Tabletop extender.
Philips

Safety Accessories list
• Acoustic Hood.

Affix: Optimus Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24637 Achieva dStream
ensure safety:
• All RF coils.
• FlexTrak.
• Acoustic Hood.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

ensure safety:
• VCG module.
• Respiratory module
• Trolley.
• Tabletop.
• Arm support.
• All RF coils.
• Flexible coil cable hose (spacer).

Accessories supplied by Philips

ensure safety:
• RF coils.
Philips

System Overview Your MRI System
3 Your MRI System

Affix: currently also REUSE R5 text nodes (compilation of maps ID: 9007315289323403
underneath) Status: NotReleased
Last Content Modificator:
3.1 System Overview

Affix: for Ing. CX. Ach. Amb. Elit. 7700 5300 ID: 153122394810932875
Major components of your system:
MR Scanner
For more information, refer to chapter “MR Scanner” on page 204.
Node title (original): RF system Ingenia & Optimus ID: 90072000028669067
Affix: Ingenia Optimus Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Radio Frequency System

Node title (original): Ingenia, CX, Elition, Achieva ID: 45036066722949515
Status: NotReleased
• RF coils.
A transmit coil transmits the RF pulses into the patient. A receive coil receives the MR
relaxation signals subsequently emitted by the patient. Available coil types on your MR
systems are transmit-/receive-coils and receive-only coils.
• RF transmitter.
The RF transmitter generates the RF pulses.
On 3.0T systems the RF transmitter has MultiTransmit capability (with MultiTransmit
capable coils).
• RF receiver and spectrometer.
These analyze the MR signals emitted by the patient.
End fragment title: Ingenia, CX, Elition, Achieva

Affix: MR5300 Status: NotReleased
• RF coils.
• RF transmitter.
Philips

Your MRI System System Overview

For more information, refer to .

End fragment title: RF system Ingenia & Optimus
Node title (original): RF system Achieva ID: 54043203009700875

Radio Frequency (RF) System

• RF coils.
• RF transmitter.
On 3.0T Achieva TX systems the RF transmitter has MultiTransmit capability (with
MultiTransmit capable coils).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: RF system Achieva
Wireless Physiology
Wireless Physiology provides synchronization of the MRI sequences with physiology signals. The
systems detects respiration, VectorCardioGraphy (VCG) and peripheral pulse (PPU)signals.
Node title (original): Operator's Console ID: 27021665700061707
Status: Released
Operator's Console
• Computer system (Windows operating system and MR system software) and an external
DVD recorder.
• A wide-screen display unit with USB connectors.
The operator's console monitor is not a Primary Diagnostic Monitor. Image appearance
does conform the DICOM GSDF standard.
• Keyboard and a mouse.
• Patient-operator intercom with nurse call reset.
End fragment title: Operator's Console
3.1.1 MR Scanner
Status: NotReleased
Philips

Node title (original): System Components Ingenia ID: 81064800773205771

Node title (original): Ingenia LE ID: 9007308329308427

Status: Released
Systems with User Interface Module (UIM)

End fragment title: Ingenia LE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Number Description
1 Examination Room Display (ERD)
2 Magnet bore with gradient coils and System Body coil
3 User Interface Module (UIM)
4 Patient support
5 Tabletop
6 Magnet with Ambient ring

End fragment title: System Components Ingenia
Node title (original): System Components VitalScreen ID: 54043264788213387

Status: Released
Node title (original): VitaScreen Ingenia ID: 9007305830881803

Status: Released
Philips

Systems with VitalScreen

End fragment title: VitaScreen Ingenia
Number Description
2 User Interface Module (UIM) or
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

VitalScreen.
4 Patient support
5 Tabletop
6 Retractable hooks for infusion bags or bottles

End fragment title: System Components VitalScreen
Node title (original): System Components Vidar ID: 54043264478735371

Affix: Obsolete Status: Released
Philips

Number Description
4 Patient support
5 Tabletop
6 Retractable hooks for IV bags or bottles

End fragment title: System Components Vidar
Node title (original): System components Optimus ID: 90072000027965835

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 30: MR system.
Number Description
1 Ambient ring
2 Magnet
5 Tabletop
6 Patient support
End fragment title: System components Optimus
Node title (original): System components Achieva ID: 63050402264479499

Philips

Fig. 31: Achieva MR system.
Number Description
1 Examination Room Display (ERD)
2 Available only on 3.0T TX: User Interface Module (UIM)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4 Patient support
5 Tabletop
7 Magnet, only on 3.0T TX with Ambient ring

End fragment title: System components Achieva
Magnet and magnet bore

Node title (original): 1.5T/3.0T systems ID: 36028881971223691
Status: Released
Philips’ MR imaging systems are available with different magnet field strengths.
End fragment title: 1.5T/3.0T systems
During an examination the patient is positioned in the magnet bore of the system.
Gradient coils, the System Body coil and a patient ventilation system are integrated in the
magnet bore.
Status: NotReleased
Philips

Your MRI system has a sealed Magnet with only a small amount of helium gas closed (sealed)
into the magnet during manufacturing, for the lifetime of the device. In the event of a
spontaneous magnet field loss or with a controlled magnet field removal, the helium remains in
the magnet vessel, helium cannot escape into the examination room.
Gradient system
The gradient coils, which are integrated in the system, provide the relative small magnetic field
variations needed for the localization of the weak magnetic resonance relaxation signal emitted
by the human body.
Philips’ MR imaging systems are available with different gradient field strengths.
Node title (original): Tabletop and patient support intro ID: 113758521995
Status: Released
Tabletop and patient support

During a MR examination, the patient is positioned on a tabletop which is carried by the patient
support.
End fragment title: Tabletop and patient support intro
The tabletop can be moved longitudinally to transport the patient into the magnet. It can also
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
be moved vertically for convenient patient transfer.

The tabletop movement can be controlled by means of the UIM (see section below).
Node title (original): Tabletop Ingenia & Optimus ID: 72057601519282571
Affix: Ingenia Optimus Status: Released
The patient support has an integrated Posterior coil.

On the tabletop sockets are available for connecting coils, headset and nurse call.
End fragment title: Tabletop Ingenia & Optimus
Node title (original): VitalScreen in SystemOverview ID: 54043264788603659

Affix: Ingenia Atlas Status: Released
VitalScreen
The VitalScreen is a touch-screen device which comprises buttons and switches for patient
support control, acquisition control and patient comfort.
For more information, see chapter “Panels” on page 210.
End fragment title: VitalScreen in SystemOverview
User Interface Module (UIM)

This panel comprises buttons and switches for patient support control, acquisition control and
patient comfort.
For more information, see chapter “Panels” on page 210.
Node title (original): Ambient ring Ingenia & Optimus ID: 72057601519238155
Philips

Ambient ring (and bore illumination)

The Ambient ring and the bore illumination can be switched on and off by means of the UIM,
see chapter “Panels” on page 210.
End fragment title: Ambient ring Ingenia & Optimus
Node title (original): ERD Achieva & Ingenia ID: 63050402263780491

Affix: Ingenia Achieva Status: Released
Examination Room Display (ERD)

This optional display is suspended from the ceiling of the examination room. It shows the same
view as on the display of the operator’s console. It is meant for interventional examinations.
End fragment title: ERD Achieva & Ingenia
Node title (original): Retractable hooks ID: 18014498387582731

Status: Released
Retractable hooks for infusion bags or bottles

There is an retractable hook on the left and right side of the magnet front.
You can fold out the hook by pushing the protruding end at the bottom. The hook flips out from
the top and you can pull it out completely.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Retractable hooks
3.1.2 Panels
Status: NotReleased
3.1.2.1 User Interface Module (UIM)

Affix: Ingenia Optimus ID: 126100797047090187
There is a UIM located on both sides of the magnet bore. Both panels have the same
functionality, but the layout is mirrored.
Node title (original): HG - Only the left UIM is displayed ID: 9007206334506891
Status: Released
NOTICE
In this section only the UIM at the left side of the magnet bore is displayed.
End fragment title: HG - Only the left UIM is displayed
Node title (original): UIM overview ID: 113758319883

Philips

Fig. 32: UIM (left side)
Number Buttons and switches
1 Emergency Table Stop
2 Resume
3 Manual mode
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
4 Bore illumination / Ambient ring
5 Ventilation
6 Music volume
7 Talk
8 Stop scan
9 Start scan/Pause scan
10 Tumble switch
11 Light visor
12 Travel to scanplane (TTS)

End fragment title: UIM overview
Emergency Table Stop

Pressing the Emergency Table Stop button will stop the tabletop movement. This can be reset
using the Resume button.
Resume
Pressing this button will reset the tabletop after an emergency stop of tabletop movement.
Operation is re-enabled.
Philips

Manual mode
Manual mode can be used to toggle between motorized and manual mode. The LED next to the
button illuminates when the tabletop is in manual mode. Tabletop position information is
available in manual mode.
Bore illumination and Ambient Ring

The Bore illumination can be adjusted using the button on the UIM.
The Ambient Ring is switched on by pressing the plus side (+) of the button for 2 seconds. The
Ambient ring is switched off by pressing the minus side (-) for 2 seconds. There is only one level
for the Ambient Ring.
The Ambient ring is also switched on when the operator logs in to the system and switched off
at logout.
Node title (original): HG - During acquisition no operation of ID: 9007206334508427
Bore illumination Status: Released
NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

During acquisition the operation of the Bore illumination and Ambient Ring button is ignored.
End fragment title: HG - During acquisition no operation of Bore illumination
Ventilation
The amount of ventilation through the magnet bore can be controlled with the Ventilation
button. There are 5 levels available, including off.
Also see .
Node title (original): HG - Ventilation air is not sterile ID: 9007206334509963
Status: Released
NOTICE
Ventilation air is not sterile.
End fragment title: HG - Ventilation air is not sterile
Music volume
This button can be used to adjust the volume of music for the patient. There are 5 levels
available.
Philips

Talk
The Talk button enables communication between the operator in the examination room and
the patient wearing a headset.
Press the Talk button when the headset is plugged in.
This connects the magnet microphone to the patient headset (the button lights green), and
switches off the music speakers in the examination room. This allows easy communication with
the patient. Once pressed, it will remain active until pressed again (the button light goes off).
The Talk button on the intercom at the console can temporarily overrule the magnet
microphone, but cannot switch it off.
Node title (original): HG - Turn music on after talking to patient ID: 9007206334511499
Status: Released
NOTICE
Remember to turn on the music after talking to the patient.
End fragment title: HG - Turn music on after talking to patient

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): HG - Unplug an unused head set ID: 9007206334705035

Status: Released
NOTICE
Unplug the head set when not used.
End fragment title: HG - Unplug an unused head set
Stop scan
Pressing the Stop scan button will stop the currently running scan.
Pressing this button will also abort tabletop movement during a MobiTrak scan.
Node title (original): HG - Stop scan button, pressing the button ID: 9007206334706571
twice Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
Pressing the Stop scan button twice will also stop image reconstruction.
End fragment title: HG - Stop scan button, pressing the button twice
Start scan / Pause scan

This button can be used to start a scan in the examination room.
When this button is pressed during a scan the scan is paused. Pressing the button again will
resume the scan.
Node title (original): HG - Start scan / Pause scan button, ID: 9007206334708107
pressing the button in a MobiTrak scan Status: Released
NOTICE
In a MobiTrak scan this button will also initiate tabletop movement and start the scan
automatically.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: HG - Start scan / Pause scan button, pressing the button in a MobiTrak scan
Tumble switch
The Tumble switch initiates all motorized movements of patient support and tabletop.
Horizontal and vertical movement
With the Tumble switch the patient support is moved:
• up or down when the tabletop is totally moved out of the magnet bore. The vertical speed
is fixed.
• in or out the magnet bore when the patient support is at its highest position. Two speeds
are available.
Operating the Tumble switch
Push the Tumble switch up for the up or in movement of the tabletop and push the switch
down for the out or down movement.
The up/in and out/down symbols above and below the Tumble switch are only visible when this
function is available.
Light visor
Node title (original): HG - Light visor button, before operating ID: 18014405589450635
consult Safety chapter Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
Before operation, read and familiarize yourself with the warnings in the safety chapter how to
use the light visor.
End fragment title: HG - Light visor button, before operating consult Safety chapter
By pressing this button a laser light beam is projected onto the patient.
This selects the patient reference point, i.e. the plane which will be positioned in the isocenter
of the magnet.
• The laser light will automatically switch off after 60 seconds.
• Typical use of the light visor is only once for every patient.
• Use of the light visor during the execution of scan or ExamCard will be ignored: a new
patient reference point cannot be defined.
Travel to scanplane (TTS)

After selecting the patient’s reference point with the light visor, the travel to scanplane
function can be used.
Press the TTS button once to select the travel-to-scanplane mode. Raise the tumble switch to
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
the ’up/In’ position and hold it until the tabletop automatically stops and the patient reference
point has reached the isocenter.
Pressing the TTS button for 2 seconds will initiate automatic tabletop movement without using
the tumble switch. The tabletop will stop when the patient reference point has reached the
isocenter.
Patient reference point
After the patient reference point is positioned in the isocenter of the magnet, a survey is
performed and all subsequent scans are planned with the information of this patient reference
point. All tabletop movements which are required for optimal image quality are deduced from
this point.
NOTICE
Do not leave the patient unattended until the tabletop has reached the isocenter.
3.1.2.1.1 Starting scan automatically (AutoStart)

Last Content Modificator: Geenen, Hubert ID: 54043273836464395-1
Status: NotReleased
{ Geenen, Hubert, 7/25/2018 1:49:43 PM: Autostart not on Prodiva. according Raja Munusamy
July 2018}
The AutoStart functionality automatically starts the next item of the ExamCard, mostly the
Survey scan, when you close the door to the examination room. AutoStart also works for
paused dynamic scans.
Philips

⊳ Prerequisite: Centering with the light visor is completed and the travelling to scanplane
procedure is initiated. Consequently the Start scan/Pause scan button is active.
Coils that have a fixed position (see table below) do not require using the light visor.
► To enable AutoStart, press the Start scan/Pause scan button.
⇨ To indicate that AutoStart is enabled, the Start scan/Pause scan button starts blinking.
Note: press the Stop scan button to stop AutoStart. The scan will not abort but return to
active.
► Close the door to the examination room.
⇨ The next item of the ExamCard automatically starts.
AutoStart while in the examination room

You can also enable AutoStart when staying in the examination room during scanning.
► Close the examination room door.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

active.
► Press the Start scan/Pause scan button again.
Node title (original): Coils with fixed position ID: 54043274823285899-1

Status: NotReleased
Coils with fixed position and Auto-iso

Coils that have a fixed position do not require the use of the light visor. Instead traveling to
scanplane can be initiated immediately: the isocenter is travelled to automatically based on coil
characteristics.
Philips

Coils with fixed position: Light visor is not needed for isocenter positioning
• dS HeadSpine Only when the coil top is used

• dS HeadNeckSpine
• dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil Only when the coil top is used
• dS Shoulder 8ch and dS Shoulder 16ch Under all circumstances

• dS Knee 8ch, dS Knee 16ch and dS T/R Knee 16ch Only on systems with VitalScreen
• dS FootAnkle 8ch and dS FootAnkle 16ch
• dS Breast 16ch and dS Breast 7ch
End fragment title: Coils with fixed position
3.1.2.2 VitalScreen
Affix: Ingenia-Atlas ID: 90072061004495371
VitalScreen is a display and operating unit that is fastened to the MR gantry. It consists of two
touch screen devices (on each side of the bore) with physical buttons and a tumble switch. The
two devices are mirrored horizontally.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
What are the main features of VitalScreen?

• In the examination room, VitalScreen provides you with essential information about the
current MR examination. As such it guides you in setting up the patient for an examination:
– It provides you with patient and examination information.
– It provides you with visuals about how to position the patient for the various
examinations (all clinical areas) and for different patient positions (supine or prone,
head first or feet first),
– It displays information about the connected coils including cable routing advice.
– It provides you with visuals about how to place physiological sensors.
– It displays physiological signals in the examination room.
• VitalScreen allows you
– to adjust music volume, bore ventilation and the bore illumination for patient comfort.
Philips

– to select and adjust the display of the physiology signals.

– to enable AutoStart, so that the scan starts automatically when you close the door of
the examination room.
– to move the tabletop, and if needed to switch to manual table control.
– to stop tabletop movement in case of an emergency (with the physical Emergency
Table Stop button).
• You can operate the touch screen with bare hands and with plastic gloves.
Touch screen device of the
VitalScreen
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

VitalScreen physical buttons and
tumble switch
1. Emergency Table Stop
button
2. Travel to isocenter button
(also available in touch
screen device)
3. Tumble switch
4. Light visor button
(also available in touch
screen device)
3.1.2.2.1 Positioning guidance at the VitalScreen

Status: Released
At the VitalScreen, an image is displayed that shows if the patient is to be positioned head- or
feet-first, supine, prone or decubitus. This positioning example depends on the anatomy of
interest and the ExamCard properties (patient orientation and patient position) of the
examination.
Philips

• Position the patient in orientation and patient position as shown in the positioning
example.
• Only if patient conditions do not allow the proposed patient position and patient
orientation, adjust ExamCard properties (patient position and orientation) at the
VitalScreen to get another proposal suiting your patient best.
For more information, see chapter “Adusting ExamCard properties at the VitalScreen” on
page 226.
Schematic images: patient orientation and patient position

These schematic images show how to position the patient with respect to patient orientation
and patient position.
Head-first patient orientation Patient position

1. supine
2. right decubitus
3. prone
4. left decubitus
5. superman supine for right
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
hand/wrist
Feet-first patient orientation 6. superman supine for left
hand/wrist
7. superman prone for right
hand/wrist
8. superman prone for left
hand/wrist
9. endo-rotation of the hand/
wrist
10. neutral position of the
hand/wrist
11. exo-rotation of the hand/
wrist
Schematic images: coils and positioning aids

The schematic images also show how to position the patient with coils and positioning aids for
a specific type of examination.
Node title (original): currently obsolete text marked as obsolete ID: 100424620427
in item number Status: Released
These positioning examples provide information about the status of the connected coils:
• The green checkmark indicates that the coil is properly connected.
Philips

• The orange alert indicates that the coil is not properly connected.
End fragment title: currently obsolete text marked as obsolete in item number
Brain examination
Whole Body
examination
showing the different
stages of positioning
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Thorax examination
with different patient
orientations
Orbit examination
Philips

Knee examination
with different coils
Shoulder
examination
with different coils
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
For more information about correct patient positioning, see Instructions for Use, Positioning
and Safety chapter. chapter “Coil and cable positioning” on page 102.
Physiology signals
When an ExamCard requires the use of physiology devices, the following icons and pictograms
indicate which device is needed.
VitalEye icon:
• indicating that VitalEye is in use
VCG pictogram:
• indicating that VCG is required for this ExamCard
• indicating how to place the electrodes on the patient's chest
Philips

Respiratory belt pictogram:

• indicating that the respiratory belt is required for this ExamCard
Only visible on MRI systems without VitalEye, because it is recommended to
always use VitalEye if available.
PPU pictogram:
• indicating that PPU is required for this ExamCard
3.1.2.2.2 VitalScreen buttons

Status: Released
Menu button allowing to:

• Update patient weight...,
• Enable Manual table mode,
• Clean screen mode,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Adjust the Signal settings... of the physiology signals.
Talk
Light visor
Travel to scanplane
AutoStart
Adjust Bore ventilation
Adjust Music volume
Adjust light of light ring and/or bore light
Adjust patient orientation (HeadFirst, FeetFirst) according to current patient

positioning and save setting as ExamCard property in the examination
Philips

Adjust patient position (Supine, Prone, DecubRight and DecubLeft (decubitus

right and left) according to current patient positioning and save setting as
ExamCard property in the examination
Only for hand and wrist examinations:

Adjust hand position in examination according to current patient positioning
and save setting as ExamCard property in the examination:
1. Superman (overhead)
2. Neutral
3. EndoRotation
4. ExoRotation
3.1.2.2.3 Operating the VitalScreen

Status: Released
Since the VitalScreen is a touch-screen device, you operate it with your fingers.
Preferably you work with bare hands. Alternatively you wear plastic gloves.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Touchscreen gestures needed to operate the VitalScreen

Node title (original): all gestures ID: 36028866365711883
Status: Released
• Tapping:
You tap to
– select an option,
– toggle on/off a feature.
• Tapping and holding (long tapping):

You tap and hold to
– move the patient to isocenter with Travel-to-scanplane button.
Philips

End fragment title: all gestures
Node title (original): dragging - not applicable yet ID: 36028866365712907

Affix: not applicable yet Status: Released
• Dragging (tapping, holding and moving)

You drag to
– move a slider.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: dragging - not applicable yet
3.1.2.2.4 Patient and examination information at the VitalScreen

Status: Released
The VitalScreen shows patient data and information of the examination currently selected for
scanning.
This information is automatically transferred from the operator's console to the VitalScreen,
when an examination is entered or selected for scanning.
Node title (original): securing of patient privacy ID: 45036065614771467
Status: Released
How is patient privacy secured when changing over patients in the examination room?
• You have to activate the display of patient and examination information at the VitalScreen
before every new patient.
Philips

• When the first scan of an ExamCard is finished, the patient data of this examination is
automatically hidden at the VitalScreen to protect patient's privacy.
The information stays hidden till another examination is selected for scanning.
End fragment title: securing of patient privacy
Node title (original): type of displayed information ID: 45036065614773003

Status: Released
Which information is displayed on the VitalScreen?

Patient data with:
• patient name
• patient ID
• birth date (age)
• gender
• patient weight
To edit or enter the patient weight at the
VitalScreen, tap the patient weight and enter the
correct value with the numeric pad.
Alternatively enter the patient weight in the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ExamCard Properties at the operator's console.
Examination data with:

• remaining examination duration
• remaining number of scans
• remaining number of scans with high SAR
• current and expected SED
• coil information (connected, not connected)
• breathhold required: yes/no
• injection of contrast agent required: yes/no
ECG signal
In the Signal Settings menu, you can select the signal
trace for display.
Philips

Respiratory signal
In the Signal Settings menu, you can select the signal
trace for display.
Positioning examples for the selected examination.

• Left: Example of any examination except hand or
wrist.
• Right: Example of hand or wrist examination.
For more information, see VitalScreen buttons and
Adapting display and examination to current positioning
at the VitalScreen.
End fragment title: type of displayed information
3.1.2.2.4.1 Displaying information of an examination at the VitalScreen

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
⊳ Prerequisite: an examination is selected for scanning.
▻
► Tap the VitalScreen patient field to activate the display of examination and patient
information.
⇨ Patient data and information of current examination are displayed.
3.1.2.2.5 Adusting ExamCard properties at the VitalScreen

Status: Released
Only if patient conditions do not allow to position the patient as proposed in the positioning
example, adjust ExamCard properties (patient position and orientation) at the VitalScreen to
get another position proposal suiting your patient best.
When you change ExamCard properties at the VitalScreen, you also change ExamCard
properties of the current examination at the operator's console. In such a way the correct
display of the imaging series in all reviewing and analysis packages is ensured.
► To change the patient position to supine, left or right decubitus or prone, tap one of the
patient position buttons as often as needed (depending on the initial setting).
Philips

► To change the patient orientation to head-first or feet-first, tap the patient orientation
button.
► To change the hand position in a hand/wrist examination, tap any of the hand buttons
(where 1 - Superman/overhead, 2 - Neutral, 3 - EndoRotation, 4 - ExoRotation).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.1.2.2.6 Executing an emergency stop (stopping tabletop movement in case of an

emergency)
Status: Released
Node title (original): Emergency Table Stop button function - ID: 45036052007661195-2
Ingenia, Optimus Status: Released
To stop tabletop movement and the current scan immediately:

► Press the Emergency Stop button.
⇨ The red light on the Emergency Stop button switches on.
► To reset the tabletop and re-enable normal operation, press the Resume button.
End fragment title: Emergency Table Stop button function - Ingenia, Optimus
Node title (original): Emergency button on VitalScreen ID: 36028866364484875-2

Affix: Ing/Amb/Elit Status: Released
Philips

On the VitalScreen
Fig. 33: Emergency Table stop button (1) and the Resume button (2) (Tumble
switch serves to resume tabletop movement).
End fragment title: Emergency button on VitalScreen
NOTICE
Alternatively press the Emergency Stop button on the Audio module at the operator's console.
To stop remote software controlled moves, press the F12 key on the keyboard at the
operator's console.
For more information, see Instructions for Use, Safety chapter. chapter “Emergency Table Stop”
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

on page 73
3.1.2.2.7 Moving the tabletop into and out of the magnet bore
Status: Released
You move the tabletop into and out of the magnet bore to position the patient for or to release
the patient after the examination.
You move the tabletop to its end stop to lower the patient support for easy patient access.
• You can only move the tabletop horizontally when it is at its highest position.
• You have to wait 2 seconds between two tabletop move actions (for example: raising the
talbetop, interval of 2 s, then moving into magnet bore).
Node title (original): VitalScreen with tumble switch ID: 36028866269699979-1
Status: Released
Philips

VitalScreen with Tumble switch

to move the tabletop up/down and into/out of magnet
bore
Three speeds are available, depending on the position of
the Tumble switch.
End fragment title: VitalScreen with tumble switch
⊳ Prerequisite: The tabletop is at its highest position.

⊳ At the VitalScreen:
► To move the tabletop into the magnet bore, push and hold the Tumble switch up.
⇨ Only when the tabletop is at its highest position, it moves into the magnet bore.
► To move the tabletop out of the magnet bore, push and hold the Tumble switch down.
⇨ When tabletop initially is at a position other than the end stop, it moves out of the magnet
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
bore.
► To move the tabletop to its end stop, push and hold the Tumble switch down until the
tabletop automatically stops at the end stop.
3.1.2.2.8 Lowering and raising the tabletop

Status: Released
You lower the tabletop for easy patient access.

You raise the tabletop to bring the tabletop to working level and to position the patient in the
isocenter.
• You can only move the tabletop vertically when it is at its end stop.
The end stop is the position where the tabletop is moved totally out of the bore.
• You have to wait 2 seconds between two tabletop move actions (for example: moving table
up, interval of 2 s, then moving into magnet bore).
• To ensure optimum vertical and horizontal table movement, don't exceed the maximum
allowed patient weight.
Refer to and to the Technical Description for the maximum allowed patient weight for the
tabletop.
Node title (original): VitalScreen with tumble switch ID: 36028866269699979-2
Status: Released
Philips

VitalScreen with Tumble switch

to move the tabletop up/down and into/out of magnet
bore
Three speeds are available, depending on the position of
the Tumble switch.
End fragment title: VitalScreen with tumble switch
⊳ Prerequisite: The tabletop is at its end stop.

► To lower the tabletop, push and hold the Tumble switch down until the appropriate height
is reached.
► To raise the tabletop, push and hold the Tumble switch up.
► To raise the tabletop to working level, push and hold the tumble switch up until the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

tabletop stops moving.
Then the tabletop is at working level.
3.1.2.2.9 Moving the patient to the isocenter

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): intro moving patient to isocenter (identical ID: 45036065544831115
to intro of Jaguar-Eagle UIM text) Status: Released
You move the patient to the isocenter when positioning is complete: the patient is positioned
with coils, positioning aids, headset and nurse call.
This workflow consists of:
• Centering by means of the light visor
• Travelling to scanplane
End fragment title: intro moving patient to isocenter (identical to intro of Jaguar-Eagle UIM text)
1. Travel-to-scanplane button
2. Tumble switch
3. Light visor button
4. AutoStart button
Philips

Node title (original): centering with light visor ID: 45036065571101067

Status: Released
Centering with the Light Visor

Before operation, read and familiarize yourself with the warnings in the Safety chapter
(Instructions for Use) how to use the light visor. chapter “Laser radiation safety (Light visor)” on
page 118
The light visor is used to define the patient reference point.
The plane of the patient reference point is positioned in the isocenter of the magnet when the
function Travel-to-scanplane (3) is used. During an examination, all subsequent scans are
planned related to the patient reference point. All tabletop movements which are required for
optimal image quality are deduced from this point.
⊳ With the tabletop on working level:
► Push and hold the Tumble switch (2) up to horizontally move the tabletop until the area of
interest is near the magnet bore or at the magnet bore.
► Press the Light visor (1) button to switch on the light visor beams.
• The light visor beams indicate the mid-sagittal and a transverse plane.
• The laser light automatically switches off after 60 seconds.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Typically you use the light visor only once for every patient.
• During the execution of a scan or an ExamCard, the use of the light visor is ignored.
NOTICE
Once the light visor is pressed, an icon is displayed reminding you to use arm supports to
avoid finger pinching.
Click the "i" to display more information about how to use the arm supports.
► Push and hold the Tumble switch (2) up until the area of interest lies within the light visor
beams.
The closer the area to be imaged is to the middle of the beams, the better the image
quality.
End fragment title: centering with light visor

Status: NotReleased

characteristics.
Philips



Travelling to Scanplane
Before operation, read and familiarize yourself with the warnings in the Safety chapter
(Instructions for Use). chapter “Tabletop movement” on page 108
When light visor positioning is completed, travel the patient to scanplane.
Node title (original): travelling to scan plane normal procedure ID: 45036065571102091
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⊳ The patient is positioned and ready to scan (patient data entered at console, ExamCard
selected and ready):
⊳ The light visor has been used to define the patient reference point.
► Briefly press the Travel-to-scanplane (3) button. Then push and hold the Tumble switch (2)
up until the tabletop automatically stops and the isocenter is reached.
► Alternatively, press and hold the Travel-to-scanplane (3) button for about 2 seconds.
This action initiates automatic tabletop movement without the use of the tumble switch.
The tabletop stops when the isocenter is reached.
• Care should be taken that cables (coils, VCG) or tubes (IV drip, catheter) do not get
caught.
• Verbal or physical contact is reassuring to a patient.
• If the Tumble switch (2) is touched before table motion has ceased, the table will stop
before reaching the isocenter.
The indicator for isocenter positioning flashes green to indicate that the isocenter has
not been reached yet. In this case, push and hold the Tumble switch (2) again and the
tabletop will resume its predefined travel.
Philips

NOTICE
Do not leave the patient unattended until the tabletop has reached the isocenter.
End fragment title: travelling to scan plane normal procedure
NOTICE
To stop automatic tabletop movement, touch the tumble switch or press the 'Travel-to-scan
plane' button.
To stop tabletop movement in case of an emergency, press the 'Emergency Table Stop'
button.
3.1.2.2.10 Starting scan automatically (AutoStart)

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): states of AutoStart button ID: 45036065629932171
Status: Released
The AutoStart button has different states:

Disabled:
AutoStart button cannot be pressed. This is the default
situation.
Active:
AutoStart button can be pressed when travelling to
scanplane is initiated.
Armed:
AutoStart button has been pressed. Next item of the
ExamCard starts on door close.
Next to the AutoStart button a (smaller)Stop AutoStart
button is displayed to stop AutoStart.
End fragment title: states of AutoStart button
procedure is initiated. See chapter “Moving the patient to the isocenter” on page 230.
Consequently the AutoStart button is active.
► To enable AutoStart, tap the AutoStart button.
Philips

⇨ To indicate that AutoStart is enabled now, the AutoStart button starts blinking:
Note: tap the (smaller) Stop AutoStart button to stop AutoStart. The scan will not abort but
return to active.

Prerequisite: Centering with the light visor is completed and the travelling to scanplane
procedure is initiated. See chapter “Moving the patient to the isocenter” on page 230.
Consequently the AutoStart button is active.
► To enable AutoStart, tap the AutoStart button.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨ To indicate that AutoStart is enabled now, the AutoStart button starts blinking:
Note: tap the (smaller) Stop AutoStart button to stop AutoStart. The scan will not abort but
return to active.
► Tap the AutoStart button.

Status: NotReleased

characteristics.
Philips



3.1.2.2.11 Switching to manual table control (Moving tabletop manually)

Status: Released
You can only manually move the tabletop when it is in manual mode.
Tabletop position is available in manual and motorized mode.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Tap the menu button.
► Tap Manual table mode.

⇨ You can now move the tabletop manually (for example in interventional MRI): hold on to
the tabletop handle and pull or push the tabletop.
► To disable manual mode, tap Manual table mode again.
3.1.2.2.12 Selecting physiology signals for display at the VitalScreen

Status: Released
You can select the physiology signals for display and adjust the time range for display in the
Signal settings window.
Philips

► To access the Signal settings window, do any of the following:

• Tap the display area of the physiology signals.
• Tap the menu button, then tap Signal settings...
⇨ The Signal settings window opens.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨
► Tap to select or deselect a signal type for display:
• first Cardiac signal, then VCG, PPU, or VCG+PPU
• first Respiratory signal, then Respiratory belt or VitalEye
► Tap on the arrows to select a time range for display.
► Click Apply to leave with changes.
Or click Cancel to leave without changes.
3.1.2.2.13 Adjusting the bore illumination

Status: Released
Bore illumination consists of bore lights and if available the light ring.
► Tap the bore illumination button.
Philips

► To switch the light ring on, tap the right side of the slider.
To switch the light ring off, tap the left side of the slider.
► To switch the bore light off, tap 0.
To set the bore light to dimmed, tap 1.
To switch the bore light on, tap 2.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.1.2.2.14 Adjusting the bore ventilation

Status: Released
Node title (original): intro bore ventilation ID: 18014467785051019

Status: Released
The MR system has a recommended ventilation level. This is a static level based on average
scans and system specific conditions.
The system does not change the recommended ventilation level for e.g. high SAR scans,
examination room temperature and patient weights, clothing and conditions. It is solely the
responsibility of the operator to determine the level of ventilation for different scans and
conditions together with the patient.
End fragment title: intro bore ventilation
► Tap the bore ventilation button.
Philips

► To adjust the bore ventilation, tap a value on the scale of 0 to 5 with an additional setting of
Fan.
When you set the ventilation to a value marked with a caution sign, you are warned that
the patient might get too warm and that you need to pay attention.
You can also adjust the bore ventilation at the operator's console. See section .
3.1.2.2.15 Adjusting the music volume
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
During the examination the patient can listen to music in the magnet bore.
► Tap the music button.
► To adjust the music volume, tap a value on the scale of 0 to 10.
3.1.2.2.16 Enabling communication in the examination room

Status: Released
This action enables communication between the operator in the examination room and the
patient who is wearing a headset. It connects the magnet microphone to the patient headset,
and switches off the music speakers in the examination room.
⊳ Prerequisite: Patient is wearing the headset. Headset is plugged in.
► Tap the Talk button.
Philips

Once pressed, the Talk option remains active until pressed again.
• When Talk is active, the Talk button lights green.
• When Talk is inactive, the Talk button light goes off.
The Talk button on the operator-patient intercom at the console can temporarily overrule the
magnet microphone, but cannot switch it off.
3.1.2.2.17 Cleaning the screen

Status: Released
You execute this workflow when you want to clean the screen.
► Tap the menu button.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Tap Clean screen mode.

⇨ The screen enters Clean Screen Mode: it turns dark and stays inactive for 30 seconds. It is
ready for cleaning.
⇨
► Clean the screen as described in the Cleaning Chapter, see chapter “Cleaning and
disinfecting: other procedures” on page 1503.
Philips

After 30 seconds the screen goes on again.

► To exit Clean Screen Mode before the expiration of 30 seconds, press and hold within the
orange rectangle.
3.1.2.3 Panels Achieva 3.0T TX systems

Affix: Achieva ID: 63050402264775435
3.1.2.3.1 User Interface Module (UIM)

Status: NotReleased
There is a UIM located on both sides of the magnet bore. Both panels have the same
functionality, but the layout is mirrored.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 34: UIM on Achieva systems at the left side of the magnet bore.
NOTICE
The location of the buttons on the right side UIM are mirrored with respect to the left side
UIM.
Tumble switch

With the Tumble switch the patient support is moved:
• up or down when the tabletop is totally moved out of the magnet bore, the vertical speed is
fixed.
• in or out the magnet bore when the patient support is at its highest position, two different
speeds are available.
Philips


Push the Tumble switch up for the up or in movement of the tabletop and push the switch
down for the out or down movement.
As long as the Tumble switch is returned gently to the middle position, the horizontal
movement will be smooth and comfortable for the patient.
NOTICE
If the Tumble switch is released suddenly it will result in an emergency stop of the tabletop
movement: it will stop within a distance 15 mm.
Light visor
By pressing this button a laser light beam is projected onto the patient. This selects the patient
reference point, i.e. the plane which will be positioned in the isocenter of the magnet.
• The laser light will automatically switch off after 15 seconds.
• Typical use of the Light visor is only once for every patient.
• Use of the Light visor during the performance of an exam will be ignored: a new patient
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
reference point cannot be defined.
WARNING
Prevent a patient from looking into the laser beam.
Direct laser light damages the eyes.

With this button the TTS mode can be toggled on and off.
TTS Mode
In TTS mode the tabletop movement will follow the operation of the Tumble switch. When
moving the tabletop into the magnet bore it will stop when the patient reference point is in the
isocenter.
The direction of movement to the isocenter is indicated: when tabletop movement is away
from the isocenter, the button will flash slowly.

this point.
Philips

Stop scan
Pressing the ‘Stop scan’ button will stop the currently running scan.
Pressing this button will also abort travel to scanplane tabletop movement. It will also stop
tabletop movement during a MobiTrak scan.
The button has a ridge around it to prevent it from being pressed by accident.
NOTICE
Pressing the ‘Stop scan’ button twice will also stop image reconstruction.
If pressed only once, reconstruction will continue if enough data is available.
Start scan / Pause scan

This button can be used to start a scan in the examination room.
When this button is pressed during a scan the scan is stopped immediately. Pressing the button
again will resume the scan.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
automatically.
Bore illumination and Ambient Ring

You can adjust te bore illumination with the button on the UIM. The Ambient Ring is switched
on and off simultaneously with the bore lights.
Ventilation
The amount of ventilation through the magnet bore can be controlled with the ‘Ventilation’
button.
NOTICE
Music volume
This button can be used to adjust the volume of music for the patient.
Philips

Talk
The ‘Talk’ button enables communication between the operator in the examination room and
• Press the ‘Talk’ button when the headset is plugged in.
This connects the magnet microphone to the patient headset (the button illuminates), and
switches off the music speakers in the examination room. This allows easy communication
with the patient. Once pressed, it will remain active until pressed again (the LED goes off ).
NOTICE
NOTICE
If the headset is not in use, it should be unplugged.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Emergency stop
Pressing the ‘Emergency stop’ button will stop the tabletop movement. This can be reset using
the ‘Resume’ button. The ‘Stop’ button has a ridge around it to prevent it from being pressed
by accident.
Resume
Pressing this button will reset the tabletop after an emergency stop. Operation is re-enabled.
Manual mode
‘Manual mode’ can be used to toggle between motorized and manual mode. The LED next to
the button illuminates when the tabletop is in manual mode. Tabletop position information is
available in manual mode.
NOTICE
When one of the ‘Tabletop release’ buttons on the patient support is pressed, the manual
mode LED will flash.
NOTICE
Pressing the same ‘Tabletop release’ button will re-engage the tabletop.
Philips

3.1.2.3.1.1 Starting scan automatically (AutoStart)

Status: NotReleased
July 2018}
active.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

active.

Status: NotReleased

characteristics.
Philips



3.1.2.3.2 Coil and Sensor Sockets

Status: Released
The coil connector sockets are located on the left side of the magnet, see figure below.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 35: Coil sockets.
Number Description
1 Spectroscopy and Transmit-/Receive coils
2 Receive coils
Coil connector adapter

For connecting SENSE and surface coils with a previous type connector a special connector
adapter is provided.
3.1.2.3.3 Connection Panel

Status: Released
Philips

On the left side of the patient support there is a connection panel. Here are the sockets for the
patient headset and the nurse call located.
Fig. 36: Connection panel on Patient support.
Number Description
1 Headset
2 Nurse call
3.1.2.4 Panels Achieva 1.5T and 3.0T systems
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Affix: Achieva ID: 72057601519545355
3.1.2.4.1 User Interface Module (UIM)

Status: NotReleased
The UIM on the front of the magnet can be located either on the left or right side of the magnet
bore.
Fig. 37: UIM on ACHIEVA systems at the left side of the magnet bore.
Philips

NOTICE
The location of the buttons on the right side UIM are mirrored with respect to the left side
UIM.
Icons shown on stop, start scan and stop scan buttons may differ on upgraded systems.
Tumble switch

The Tumble switch moves the patient support up or down when the tabletop is totally moved
out of the magnet bore (end stop). In this case, the speed is fixed.
The Tumble switch moves the tabletop in or out the magnet bore, when the patient support is
at its highest position. Three different speeds are available.

As long as the Tumble switch is returned gently to the middle position, the horizontal
movement will be smooth and comfortable for the patient.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
If the Tumble switch is released suddenly it will result in an emergency stop of the movement
of the tabletop: it will stop within 15 mm.
Stop
Pressing the ‘Stop button’ will stop the tabletop movement. This can be reset using the
‘Manual’ button. The Stop button has a ridge around it to prevent it from being pressed by
accident.
Manual mode
‘Manual mode’ can be used to toggle between motorized and manual mode. The LED next to
the button illuminates when the tabletop is in manual mode. Tabletop position information is
available in manual mode. Pressing the ‘Manual mode’ button will reset the ‘Stop table’ button.
NOTICE
When one of the ‘Tabletop release’ buttons on the patient support is pressed, the manual
mode LED will flash.
Philips

NOTICE
Pressing the same ‘Tabletop release’ button will re-engage the tabletop.
Light visor
A laser cross projected onto the patient selects the patient reference point i.e. the plane which
will be positioned in the isocenter of the magnet.
• The laser cross will automatically switch off after 15 seconds.
• Typical use of the Light visor is only once for every patient.
• Use of the Light visor during the performance of an execution list will be ignored: a new
patient reference point cannot be defined.

With the TTS button, TTS mode can be toggled on and off.
TTS Mode
In TTS mode the patient reference point is moved to the isocenter.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The tabletop movement will follow the movement of the Tumble switch, giving the operator
the freedom to move the patient reference point to the isocenter and away from the isocenter.
TTS Mode - LED

In TTS mode the direction of movement to the isocenter is indicated by the LED next to the
‘TTS’ button which illuminates. When tabletop movement is away from the isocenter in TTS
mode, the LED will flash slowly.

this point.
Bore illumination
You can adjust te bore illumination with the button on the UIM.
15 minutes after the tabletop is fully out of the magnet, the lights will automatically switch off.
Ventilation
The amount of ventilation through the magnet bore can be controlled with the ‘Ventilation’
knob.
Philips

NOTICE
Talk
The ‘Talk’ button enables communication between the operator in the examination room and
• Press the ‘Talk’ button when the headset is plugged in.
This connects the magnet microphone to the patient headset (the LED illuminates), and
switches off the music speakers in the examination room. This allows easy communication
with the patient. Once pressed, it will remain active until pressed again (the LED goes off ).
NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
If the headset is not in use, it should be unplugged from the control panel.
Music volume
This knob can be used to adjust the volume of music for the patient.
Start scan
This green button can be used to start a scan in the examination room.
NOTICE
automatically.
Stop scan
Pressing the ‘Stop scan’ button will stop the currently running scan.
Pressing this button will also abort tabletop movement when initiated by ‘TTS’ and also during a
MobiTrak scan when initiated by pressing the ‘Start scan’ button or clicking the |Proceed|
button.
The button has a ridge around it to prevent it from being pressed by accident.
Philips

NOTICE
Pressing the ‘Stop scan’ button twice will also stop reconstruction.
If pressed only once, reconstruction will continue if enough data is available.
3.1.2.4.1.1 Starting scan automatically (AutoStart)

Status: NotReleased
July 2018}
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

active.

active.

Status: NotReleased
Philips


characteristics.


3.1.2.4.2 Control Panel at the Rear of the Magnet

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
At the back of the magnet another small control panel is located with a limited number of
functions.
Fig. 38: Control panel at the back of the magnet
Number Description
1 Manual mode
2 Talk
3 Start scan
4 Stop scan
The buttons on this panel have the same function as their equivalent on the Patient Support
Control Panel.
Philips

3.1.2.4.3 Coil and Sensor Sockets

Status: Released
The coil connection sockets are located on the UIM.
Fig. 39: Sockets on the UIM of Achieva systems
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Number Description
1 Peripheral pulse sensor
2 VCG
3 Respiratory sensor
4 Receive coils
5 Spectroscopy and Transmit/receive coils
6 Receive coils
Coil connector adapter

For connecting coils with a previous type connector a special connector adapter is provided.
3.1.2.4.4 Connection Panel

Status: Released
Philips

Fig. 40: Connection panel on Patient support
Number Description
1 Nurse call
2 Headset
On the patient support at the same side of the magnet bore as the UIM a connection panel is
located.
On this connection panel sockets are provided for nurse call and headset.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.1.2.5 Magnet Display

Affix: Achieva ID: 36028804085912587
An (optional) LCD display meant for display of physiology signals can be provided on the MR
scanner.
3.1.3 Sockets on the Tabletop

Affix: Ingenia family ID: 63050402264025227
Coil, headset and nurse call connection sockets are located at the corners of the tabletop.
Node title (original): Sockets tabletop Ingenia family except ID: 54043203009404299-1
Optimus (CX) and MR5300 Status: Released
Philips

1. FlexConnect socket
2. Not used
4. Not used.
5. Headset and Nurse call
socket
6. Not used
socket
1. FlexConnect socket.
2. Not used.
4. Not used.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

socket.
6. Not used.
socket.
1. dS socket
(to connect the dS
Interface)
(to connect the dS Base
coil)
socket
4. dS socket
(to connect the dS
Interface)
socket
6. Not used
End fragment title: Sockets tabletop Ingenia family except Optimus (CX) and MR5300
Node title (original): dStream Interface ID: 118340893707

Affix: Ingenia family except MR5300 Status: Released
Philips

dStream Interface
You use the dStream interface to connect some dedicated coils. The interface must be
positioned at the magnet end of the tabletop.
1. ME coil connector release
knob.
2. Connection lead and
connector.
3. SE (Single Element) socket
4. ME (Multi Element) socket
An ME coil connector is easily released by turning the release knob (1). LED’s next to the knob
indicate that coils are connected.
End fragment title: dStream Interface
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): Socket for TR coils ID: 118340894731

Affix: Ingenia family 3T (no MR5300, no Ambition - is this Status: Released
correct?)
Coil socket for Transmit-/Receive coils (optional)

An optional coil socket to connect Transmit-/Receive coils is located below the UIM on the left
side of the magnet.
End fragment title: Socket for TR coils
For more information on how to connect a coil to which socket, refer to chapter “Connectors
and Plugs” on page 694.
Philips

3.1.4 Patient Observation System

Status: Released
The Patient Observation System (POS) is an option that is available for all Philips MRI systems. It
allows you to observe the patient using a camera and a monitor. This can be useful when direct
visual contact is not possible. The POS has no interaction with the MRI system.
The camera is positioned in the examination room in such a way that the image provides full
view of the patient in the magnet bore. The monitor, together with the camera interface box, is
positioned near the operator's console.
The camera is always on. To switch the monitor off:
► Press the on/off button at the bottom of the monitor.
► Press the on/off button at the bottom of the monitor again to switch the monitor back on
again.
If the image from the camera is not clear, contact your Philips service engineer.
3.1.5 Devices and controls essential for system safety
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.EssentialDevices_Digital Status: Released
Affix: INg. CX. Elit

Status: Released
Ingenia Elition
The following devices on the system and in the examination room are considered to be
essential for system safety and should therefore never be removed, modified, over-ridden or
disabled:
• Emergency Magnet Off buttons.
Buttons are located inside and outside the examination room.
• Nurse call button.
• Emergency Table Stop buttons on the UIM and the keyboard.
• RF door switch.
• Quench pipe inside and outside the examination room.
• RF examination room configuration.
Philips

Coils and Coil Solutions Your MRI System
• Patient ventilation.
End fragment title: 66490 SYS.Label.IFU.EssentialDevices_Digital

SYS.Label.IFU.EssentialDevices_Digital_RilliasT15 Status: Released
Affix: Ambition

Status: Released
Ingenia Ambition
disabled:
• Emergency Magnet Off buttons.
Buttons are located inside and outside the examination room.
• Nurse call button.
• Emergency Table Stop buttons on the UIM and the keyboard.
• RF door switch.
• RF examination room configuration.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Patient ventilation.
End fragment title: 69014 SYS.Label.IFU.EssentialDevices_Digital_RilliasT15

SYS.Label.IFU.EssentialDevices_Analog Status: Released
Affix: Ach.Mult.
disabled:
• Emergency Magnet Off button. Buttons are located inside and outside the examination
room.
• Tabletop release button (TTR)
• Fingerswitch plate
• Nurse call
• Emergency Table Stop buttons on the UIM and the keyboard
• RF door switch
• Quench pipe inside and outside the examination room
• RF examination room configuration
• Patient ventilation
End fragment title: 66492 SYS.Label.IFU.EssentialDevices_Analog
3.2 Coils and Coil Solutions

Philips

Your MRI System Coils and Coil Solutions

This chapter describes the coils and the coil solutions available for your system and how to
apply them.
Node title (original): Clothes MRexam in photos ID: 2285214859-1
Status: Released
NOTICE
As most of the photographs in this chapter have been taken in a non-clinical environment, it is
possible that in some of the photographs the patient’s clothing is not suited for a real MR
examination.
Patients may also be shown without headset and nurse call.
End fragment title: Clothes MRexam in photos
Node title (original): Referral to Maintenance chapter about ID: 116965827979-1

Cleaning Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Refer to the Maintenance chapter for full information on how to clean the coils.
End fragment title: Referral to Maintenance chapter about Cleaning
3.2.1 General coil safety

Last Content Modificator: Heuvel, Martina van den ID: 63050402185092235-1
Status: Released
Only coils that have been proven safe and compatible on the Philips MR system shall be used.
Coded connectors and software keying are provided to control the use of coils. Refer to the
Instructions for Use of the coil for further safety instructions.
Safety and performance considerations

Receive coils have safely been used to investigate any anatomy. The coil insulation prevents
accidental contact with the conductive metal parts. Each coil has been specially designed for
prolonged safe and reliable operation.
Safety measures
Node title (original): 24353 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.38 ID: 18014404969489675-1
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24353
Philips

WARNING
Never use surface coils, cable traps and cables which are damaged.
A damaged cable or connector is hazardous because of high voltage across the cable during
the transmit phase of the system. Sharp edges may cause injury to patient’s skin.
Coils must be returned to the manufacturer's Customer Support for replacement if there is any
suspected damage to either the external covering or the coil's internal components. The patient
must never be allowed to come into contact with the internal coil connections.

SYS.Label.IFU.AvoidConnectorAndPatientContact Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24641
WARNING
Do not simultaneously touch the coil connector contacts and the patient to prevent
potential harm for the patient.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 24641 SYS.Label.IFU.AvoidConnectorAndPatientContact
Node title (original): 24364 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF- ID: 27021604224841995-1

MIRA.25b Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24364
WARNING
Do not scan with an incomplete base coil. The protective lids on the contacts of base coil
must be present at all times.
These lids can be removed for cleaning purposes.
End fragment title: 24364 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF-MIRA.25b
Node title (original): 24289 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ- ID: 18014405144313227-1

PegRF7.2 Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24289
Philips

WARNING
Prevent patients from touching the contacts of separable coils.
When connected to the system a voltage of 12 volt DC is present at the contacts of the coil
base. Under normal conditions this voltage is not hazardous to patients. However for
critically ill cardiac patients this low DC voltage may have serious consequences.
• Always close the coil before connecting it to the system.
• Always disconnect the coil from the system before opening the coil.
• Do not leave unused coils or coil parts on the tabletop.
End fragment title: 24289 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PegRF7.2

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24352 Achieva Multiva
WARNING
Never scan with the SENSE Head Coil and neurovascular coil positioned more than 5
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

centimeters offcenter.
This may cause local heating of the patient. Always position the SENSE Head coil and
neurovascular coil in the isocenter by using the light visor.
Node title (original): Anterior coil, dStream Interface ID: 45036003675778443-1

HGwarnings Status: Released
Affix: Ingenia family except MR5300
dS Anterior coil
Node title (original): HG - Do not use Anterior coil upside down ID: 36028804058543627-1
Philips

WARNING
Do not use the dS Anterior coil upside down.
This may cause excessive local heating.
End fragment title: HG - Do not use Anterior coil upside down
dStream Interface
Node title (original): HG - Do not sterilize dStream Interface ID: 27021604804118795-1
CAUTION
Do not sterilize the dStream Interface.
Sterilizing the dStream Interface will damage it.
End fragment title: HG - Do not sterilize dStream Interface

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: Anterior coil, dStream Interface HGwarnings
3.2.2 About Coils

Status: Released
The most important aspects of coils are described in the following paragraphs.
Built-in Body Coil

The built-in Body coil acts as the RF transmitter for receive-only coils: it transmits the RF signal
to the patient. It works in conjunction with the dStream Coils.
Node title (original): dStream coil solution Overview ID: 118353224715
Affix: Ingenia family also MR5300 Status: Released
dStream Coils
dStream coils are:
• The term for all available coils on your system.
• Phased-array coils and as a consequence compatible with CLEAR and dS-SENSE.
• Receive-only coils if not otherwise labeled.
A 'T/R' in the coil name identifies a coil as Transmit/Receive coil.
• Available as integrated or dedicated coil solution.
– Integrated Coil Solution
Philips

Combination of coils with the dS Posterior coil for multiple applications.

– Dedicated Coil Solution
Single coil designed for a single application, for example a dedicated breast coil.
Dedicated coils require the dStream interface.
End fragment title: dStream coil solution Overview
Node title (original): Overview Integr coils Ingenia ID: 36028804470231307

Integrated coils
1. dS Head top coil
2. dS Posterior coil (built-in
coil in patient support)
3. 2 x dS Anterior coil
4. dS Base coil
5. dS HeadNeck top coil
6. dS Flex coil in 3 sizes
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Integrated coils
1. Posterior coil (built-in coil in
patient support)
2. Base coil
3. Head top coil
4. HeadNeck top coil
5. Anterior coil
6. Flex coil in 3 sizes
End fragment title: Overview Integr coils Ingenia
More information
• about the available dStream coils can be found in the section 'Available Coils' of this
chapter.
Philips

• about the available dStream Coil Solutions can be found in the chapter 'Coil Solutions and
Patient Positioning'.
• about patient and coil positioning can be found in the chapter 'Coil Solutions and Patient
Positioning'.
3.2.2.1 Integrated Posterior coil

Status: Released
The patient support of your system has an integrated dS Posterior coil. The dS Posterior coil
automatically repositions in the patient support according to the desired isocenter and Field-of-
View.
There are three markers on each side of the tabletop representing the range of the dS Posterior
coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 41: dS Posterior coil range markers
Range a.
The markers represent the maximum available range of the tabletop in which the dS Posterior
coil can be used for scanning.
Range b.
This is the range between the middle marker and the marker at the magnet end side of the
tabletop. It represents the maximum available range with which scanning is possible without
using the dS Posterior coil.
Any point within this range can be positioned in the isocenter.
Disengage coil
The dS Posterior coil can be disengaged by means of the eponymous parameter in the
ExamCard Properties window.
3.2.3 About Coil Solutions

Philips
Status: Released

Coil choice is crucial in obtaining optimum image quality in all MR examinations.

SmartSelect and the coil solutions facilitate this important choice.
SmartSelect
SmartSelect is a method that selects the best suited coils and coil elements for each
examination:
• The MR system automatically detects the connected coils.
• By default it selects the best-suited coil and coil elements for optimal signal-to-noise ratio
for the current stack and/or scan.
For information about SmartSelect, see
Node title (original): dStream Coil Solutions - short description ID: 118356502283
dStream Coil Solutions

A dStream coil solution is a recommended coil combination for a specific MRI application.
End fragment title: dStream Coil Solutions - short description
Node title (original): dS Coil Solutions - short description ID: 118356503819
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Affix: MR5300 Status: Released
dS Coil Solutions
A dS coil solution is a recommended coil combination for a specific MRI application.
End fragment title: dS Coil Solutions - short description
You can connect multiple coils to the system which then work
• in conjunction with the integrated dS Posterior coil, or
• in conjunction with each other, or
• as dedicated (stand-alone) coils.
Node title (original): dStream coil solution table ID: 118356509579
The table lists the available dStream Coil Solutions with their applications and which coil parts
contribute to a specific dStream Coil Solution. A detailed description of all dStream Coil
Solutions can be found in chapter “Available Coils and Coil Solutions”.
Philips

dStream Coil Solution Applications Connected Coils (integrated or dedicated)
dS HeadSpine • Neuro imaging: Brain, Spine (cervical, thoracic, dS Base, dS Posterior, dS Head
lumbar), Total Spine and Total Neuro
examinations
• Head examinations
dS HeadNeckSpine • Neuro imaging: Brain, Spine (cervical, thoracic, dS Base, dS Posterior, dS HeadNeck
lumbar), Total Spine and Total Neuro
examinations
• Head and neck examinations
• Neurovascular examinations
• Pediatric examinations
dS TotalSpine • Total Spine dS Base, dS Posterior

• Spine (cervical, thoracic, lumbar)
dS Torso • Body applications: Torso, Chest, Pelvis dS Posterior, dS Anterior

• Cardiac Imaging
• Peripheral Vascular examinations
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
dS WholeBody • Whole Body dS Base, dS HeadNeck, dS Posterior, 2 x dS

• DWIBS (Diffusion Weighted Whole Body Imaging Anterior
with Background Body Signal Suppression)
dS Flex Breast Breast Imaging Flex L, dS Posterior, Breast mattress
dS Breast 7/16ch Breast Imaging dS Breast 7/16ch
dS Flex S Multi Purpose, e.g.: Flex S, dS Posterior

• Small joints, e.g. ankle
• Carotid arteries
dS Flex M Multi Purpose, e.g.: Flex M, dS Posterior

• Joints, e.g. shoulder, hand/wrist, knee
dS Flex L Multi Purpose, e.g.: Flex L, dS Posterior

• Head
• Brachial plexus
• Cardiac imaging
dS Shoulder 8ch Shoulder dS Shoulder 8ch

dS Shoulder 16ch dS Shoulder 16ch
dS Wrist 8ch Wrist dS Wrist 8ch
dS HandWrist 16ch Hand and wrist dS HandWrist 16ch

Philips

dStream Coil Solution Applications Connected Coils (integrated or dedicated)
dS Knee 8/16ch Knee dS Knee 8/16ch
dS FootAnkle 8ch Foot, Ankle dS FootAnkle 8ch

dS FootAnkle 16ch dS FootAnkle 16ch
dS SmallExtremity 8ch • Hand, wrist, elbow dS SmallExtremity 8ch

dS SmallExtremity 16ch • pediatrics dS SmallExtremity 16ch
Tab. 3: Overview of dStream Coil Solutions

End fragment title: dStream coil solution table
3.2.4 Available Coils and Coil Solutions

Status: Released
3.2.4.1 Coil compatibility

Affix: Ingenia and CX/dS ID: 90072001106852747
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

{ Geenen, Hubert, 5/2/2019 4:01:59 PM: small update for Tiger 6 -R570 as 1.5 and 3.0T
systems Elition and Ambition are combined in one IFU}
The below list provides an overview of coil/system compatibility. Some legacy coils can only be
used on Ingenia systems.
Philips

Ingenia only All Systems
dS Anterior coil • Large baluns and cable exit to the side. • Small baluns and cable exit in head direction.
• No grip. • Has a grip.

• 1.5T 12nc numbers:
4510-010-0723x
4510-010-1290x
4510-010-7120x

4598-001-1839x
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4598-001-1840x
dS Base and dS Head or • dS Base and dS Head or dS HeadNeck tops both • dS Base and dS Head or dS HeadNeck tops have
dS HeadNeck tops have 12 paired contacts. 4 paired contacts.
• 1.5T 12nc numbers: • 1.5T 12nc numbers:

dS Base; 4510-010-0047x or 4598-001-7121x dS Base; 4598-000-9794x
dS Head; 4510-010-0831x or 4598-001-7122x dS Head; 4598-000-9795x
dS HeadNeck; 4510-010-0048x or dS HeadNeck; 4598-000-9796x
4598-001-7123x • 3.0T 12nc numbers:
• 3.0T 12nc numbers: dS Base; 4598-000-9797x
dS Base; 4510-010-1292x or 4598-001-7117x dS Head; 4598-000-9798x
dS Head; 4510-010-1293x or 4598-001-7118x dS HeadNeck; 4598-000-9799x
dS HeadNeck; 4510-010-1294x or
4598-001-7119x
Philips

Ingenia only All Systems
dS Wrist dS Wrist 8ch coil according as shown the picture dS Wrist 8ch coil with redesigned base plate as
below: shown in the picture below:
• NO superman position support. • Superman position support.
• Base plate without cable holders. • Additional redesigned base plate with pre-
amplifier holders for correct cable routing.
dS Breast 7ch & 16ch • Multiple accessory parts. • Redesigned accessories (two parts) and thinner
diagnostic mattress to accommodate for more patient sizes
(dS Breast 16ch not in the 60 cm/23.6 in. bore.
available for Ingenia S)
Tilting device for the Base • Allowed. • NOT allowed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• NOT supported.

Affix: Vidar ID: 36028865970039435
{ Geenen, Hubert, 5/2/2019 4:00:04 PM: Obsolete since Tiger 6 -R570 as 1.5 and 3.0T systems
Elition and Ambition are combined in one IFU}
List of compatible coils for dStream systems. Coils mentioned in the first column are only
compatible with Ingenia Systems.
Philips

Ingenia only All dStream Systems

4510-010-1290x
4510-010-7120x

4598-001-1840x
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• 3.0T 12nc numbers: • 3.0T 12nc numbers:

4598-001-7119x
Philips

Ingenia only All dStream Systems

• NOT supported.

Affix: Ambition - only applicable for Ambition or MR5300 ID: 27021681252729995
standalone IFUs Status: Released
Last Content Modificator: Heuvel, Martina van den
{ Geenen, Hubert, 5/2/2019 4:00:10 PM: Obsolete since Tiger 6 -R570 as 1.5 and 3.0T systems
Elition and Ambition are combined in one IFU}
The below list provides an overview of coil/system compatibility. Some legacy coils can only be
used on Ingenia systems.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): MR5300 Compatiblity ID: 118356695563
Status: Released
Ingenia only All dStream systems
• 1.5T 12NC numbers: • 1.5T 12NC numbers:

4598-001-7123x

• NOT supported.
End fragment title: MR5300 Compatiblity
Node title (original): Ambition compatibility ID: 118356696587

Status: Released
Philips


• 1.5T 12NC numbers:
4510-010-0723x
• 1.5T 12NC numbers:

4598-001-1839x
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• 1.5T 12NC numbers: • 1.5T 12NC numbers:

4598-001-7123x
Philips


• NOT supported.
End fragment title: Ambition compatibility
3.2.4.4 dS System Body coil

Status: Released
Node title (original): SystemBodyCoil-image Ingenia ID: 36028804470369803

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 42: Built-in dS System Body coil in the bore.
End fragment title: SystemBodyCoil-image Ingenia
Node title (original): SystemBodyCoil-image Optimus ID: 18014405960892043

Philips

Fig. 43: Built-in dS System Body coil in the bore.

End fragment title: SystemBodyCoil-image Optimus
Type of coil Transmit/Receive coil
Design Built-in cylindrical volume coil
dS-SENSE-compatible No
CLEAR-compatible No
MultiTransmit-compatible Yes (only applicable for 3.0T systems)

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Applications Imaging large parts of the body
General remarks All receive-only coils use the dS System Body coil for transmission.
User Interface Name Q-Body
Connector not applicable
3.2.4.5 dS HeadSpine
Status: Released
Node title (original): Ingenia image ID: 63050402234602507

Philips

Fig. 44: Components of the dS HeadSpine coil solution. 1: dS Base coil and dS Head top coil attached to the dS Base
coil. 2: Patient support with the built-in dS Posterior coil.
End fragment title: Ingenia image
Node title (original): Optimus image ID: 36028804470380555

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 45: Components of the dS HeadSpine coil solution. 1: dS Base coil and dS Head top coil attached to the dS Base
coil. 2: Patient support with the built-in dS Posterior coil.
End fragment title: Optimus image
Node title (original): MR5300 image of coil ID: 118356865547

Status: Released
Philips

1. dS Base
2. dS Head top coil (top view)
3. Patient positioned on dS
Base coil with dS Head top
coil and mirror attached
4. Tabletop with built-in dS
Posterior coil
Type of coil • Phased-array detection

• Receive coil solution
Design • Volume coil

• Integrated coil solution
including the dS Posterior
coil, the dS Base coil and the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
dS Head top coil.
Coverage • 30 cm (head examinations)

• 90 cm (total neuro
examinations)
Available for On the sticker on the coil, you

see the MRI system type and
field strength your coil is suited
for.
dS-SENSE-compatible Yes
CLEAR-compatible Yes
MultiTransmit-compatible Yes (only applicable for 3.0T

systems)
Applications • Head and brain

examinations
• Spine examinations: cervical,
thoracic, lumbar and total
spine
• Total neuro
User Interface Name Posterior, Base, Head
dStream Interface not required
Connector FlexConnect socket/connector

Philips



• Integrated coil solution
including the dS Posterior
coil, the dS Base coil and the
dS Head top coil.
Coverage • 30 cm (head examinations)

• 90 cm (total neuro
examinations)
Available for On the sticker on the coil, you

see the MRI system type and
field strength your coil is suited
for.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Applications • Head and brain
examinations
• Spine examinations: cervical,
thoracic, lumbar and total
spine
• Total neuro
User Interface Name Posterior, Base, Head
dS Interface not required

End fragment title: MR5300 image of coil
3.2.4.6 dS HeadNeckSpine
Affix: for Ingenia family except for MR5300 ID: 54043201994164235
Node title (original): image Ingenia ID: 54043202979871243

Philips

Fig. 46: Components of the dS HeadNeckSpine coil solution. 1: dS HeadNeck top coil attached to the dS Base coil. 2:
Patient support with the built-in dS Posterior coil.
End fragment title: image Ingenia
Node title (original): Image Optimus ID: 27021605215674891

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 47: Components of the dS HeadNeckSpine coil solution. 1: dS HeadNeck top coil attached to the dS Base coil. 2:
Patient support with the built-in dS Posterior coil.
End fragment title: Image Optimus

Design • Volume coil.

• Integrated coil solution including the dS Posterior coil, the dS Base coil and
the dS HeadNeck top coil.
Coverage • 45 cm (head/neck examinations)

• 90 cm (total neuro examinations)
Available for On the sticker on the coil, you see the MRI system type and field strength your
coil is suited for.

Philips

Applications • Neuro imaging: Brain, Spine (cervical, thoracic, lumbar), Total Spine and
Total Neuro examinations
• Head and neck examinations
• Neurovascular examinations
• Pediatric examinations
User Interface Name Posterior, Base, HeadNeck
Tab. 4: Overview
3.2.4.7 dS TotalSpine
Affix: for complete Ingenia family, images different per system ID: 54043201993010443
type Status: Released
Node title (original): Image MR5300 ID: 118357885963

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Image MR5300

Affix: Ingenia family except MR5300 and except Optimus Status: Released Philips

Fig. 48: Components of the dS Total Spine coil solution. 1: dS Base coil. 2: Patient support with the built-in dS
Posterior coil.
Node title (original): image Optimus ID: 36028804470425611

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 49: Components of the dS Total Spine coil solution. 1: dS Base coil. 2: Patient support with the built-in dS
Posterior coil.
End fragment title: image Optimus
Node title (original): Table Overview for Ingenia except ID: 118357543179
MR5300 Status: Released

Design • Surface coil.

• Integrated coil solution including the dS Base coil and the dS Posterior coil.
Coverage 90 cm
coil is suited for.
Philips

Applications • Spine examinations: cervical, thoracic, lumbar and total spine
User Interface Name Base, Posterior

Design • Surface coil.

• Integrated coil solution including the dS Base coil and the dS Posterior coil.
Coverage 90 cm
coil is suited for.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Applications • Spine examinations: cervical, thoracic, lumbar and total spine
User Interface Name Base, Posterior
dS Interface not required

End fragment title: Table Overview for Ingenia except MR5300
3.2.4.8 dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil

Affix: Ingenia Optimus Elition (no Ambition, no MR5300) ID: 63050401248395915
Fig. 50: dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil. 1: Front view of complete coil. 2: Front view of posterior coil section. 3: Rear view of
complete coil.
Philips


• Receive coil
Design Volume coil consisting of posterior and anterior coil section. Two coil connectors.
Dimensions Height (AP): 38 cm, width (RL) : 46 cm, length (FH): 59 cm
coil is suited for.
MultiTransmit-compatible Yes
Applications • High-resolution head examinations

• High-resolution pediatric examinations
Markers on the coil In the middle of the coil (FH direction) for light visor positioning
User Interface Name dS Head1-32ch and dS Head2-32ch (for the two coil sections)

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.2.4.9 T/R Head coil

Affix: Available on MR5300 for safety compliance ID: 45036002739851659
Node title (original): table Ingenia family except MR5300 ID: 118440560011
Status: Released
Type of coil • Quadrature detection

• Transmit/Receive coil solution
Design Volume coil
Coverage Head down to C3

Philips

coil is suited for.
CLEAR-compatible No
MultiTransmit-compatible No
Applications Head and brain examinations
User Interface Name T/R Head

connects to T/R interface on the gantry

• Transmit/Receive coil solution
Design Volume coil
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

coil is suited for.
CLEAR-compatible No
Applications Head and brain examinations
User Interface Name T/R Head
dS Interface Not required.

Connects to FlexConnect socket/connector.
End fragment title: table Ingenia family except MR5300
3.2.4.10 dS Torso

Philips

Fig. 51: Components of the dS Torso coil solution. 1: dS Anterior coil. 2: Patient support with the built-in dS Posterior
coil.
Node title (original): image Optimus ID: 27021605215694347

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 52: Components of the dS Torso coil solution. 1: dS Anterior coil. 2: Patient support with the built-in dS Posterior
coil.
End fragment title: image Optimus


• Integrated coil solution including the dS Posterior coil and the dS Anterior
coil.
Coverage 60 cm
coil is suited for.

Philips

Applications • Body applications: Torso, Chest, Pelvis

• Cardiac Imaging
User Interface Name Posterior, Anterior
Tab. 5: Overview
3.2.4.11 dS WholeBody
Affix: for complete Ingenia family, images different per system ID: 54043201993728395
type Status: Released

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 53: Components of the dS Whole Body coil solution. 1: two dS Anterior coils. 2: Patient support with the built-in
dS Posterior coil. 3: dS HeadNeck top coil attached to the dS Base coil.

Philips

Fig. 54: Components of the dS Whole Body coil solution. 1: two dS Anterior coils. 2: Patient support with the built-in
dS Posterior coil. 3: dS HeadNeck top coil attached to the dS Base coil.
Node title (original): MR5300 image ID: 118357401611

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: MR5300 image
Node title (original): Table for Ingenia family except MR5300 ID: 118357406091
Status: Released


• Integrated coil solution including the dS Posterior coil, the dS Base coil, the
dS HeadNeck top coil and two dS Anterior coils.
Coverage 200 cm
coil is suited for.

Philips

Applications • Whole Body

• DWIBS (Diffusion Weighted Whole Body Imaging with Background Body
Signal Suppression)
User Interface Name Posterior, Base, HeadNeck, Anterior


• Integrated coil solution including the dS Posterior coil, the dS Base coil, the
dS Head top coil and two dS TorsoCardiac coils.
Coverage 200 cm
coil is suited for.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Applications • Whole Body

• DWIBS (Diffusion Weighted Whole Body Imaging with Background Body
Signal Suppression)
User Interface Name Posterior, Base, HeadNeck, TorsoCardiac

End fragment title: Table for Ingenia family except MR5300
3.2.4.12 dS Endo 1.5T and dS Endo 3.0T

Status: Released
Philips

Fig. 55: dS Endo coil with its components: 1 - luer lock syringe used for inflation, 2 - probe cable, 3 - valve for luer lock
syringe, 4 - grip, 5 - migration stop, 6 - plastic rod, 7 - non-permeable balloon.
The label on the coil says: eCoil 1.5T and eCoil 3.0T.
Type of coil • Linear detection
• Receive-only
Design • RF coil which can be positioned inside the rectum. The RF coil is fixed inside
a non-permeable balloon; both are mounted on a plastic rod which extends
to a grip. The coil amplifier and decoupling electronics are placed in a small
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
box.
• The dS Endo 3.0T coil can be filled with air or fluids whereas the dS Endo 1.5
T coil can be filled with air only.
Dimensions Cross-section 48 mm fully inflated
coil is suited for.
dS-SENSE-compatible Only in combination with the Posterior coil and/or Anterior coil.
CLEAR-compatible
Applications • Rectum
• Prostate
• Cervix
Contraindications The dS Endo coils have several contraindications, e.g. inflammatory bowel
disease. Please refer to chapter “Positioning with the dS Endo coil solution” on
page 715 for the complete list.
General remarks Before starting an examination, make sure that the coil is connected to the
amplifier box.
User Interface Name Endo
dStream Interface required
Connector dStream socket/connector on the dStream Interface

Philips

3.2.4.13 dS Endo 3.0T

Status: Released
Name on Coil label: eCoil 3.0T.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Receive-only
box.
• The dS Endo 3.0T coil can be filled with air or fluids.
coil is suited for.
CLEAR-compatible
• Prostate
• Cervix
amplifier box.

Philips

3.2.4.14 dS Endo 1.5T

Affix: Ambition ID: 18014468968827659
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
The label on the coil says: eCoil 1.5T.

• Receive-only
box.
• The dS Endo 1.5 T coil can be filled with air only.
coil is suited for.
CLEAR-compatible
MultiTransmit-compatible No.
• Prostate
• Cervix
Philips

amplifier box.
3.2.4.15 dS Breast 16ch

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 58: dS Breast 16ch coil solution: coil and head support.
Type of coil • 16 channel phased-array coil

• Receive-only
Design Volume coil with an aperture in which the breasts can be positioned.
coil is suited for.
Applications Breast Imaging (both breasts simultaneously)
General remarks Do not combine this coil with other coils.
Limitations This coil cannot be used for biopsy.
User Interface Name Breast-16
Tab. 6: Overview
Philips

3.2.4.16 dS Breast 7ch

Fig. 59: dS Breast 7ch coil solution: coil with head support.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Receive-only
Design Volume coil with an aperture in which the breasts can be positioned. A separate
head support is provided.
coil is suited for.
MultiTransmit-compatible Yes (only applicable for 3.0T)
Applications • Breast Imaging (both breasts simultaneously)

– also with unilateral and/or bilateral immobilization
• Biopsy with the biopsy kit
User Interface Name Breast-7
Tab. 7: Overview
Delivery Contents
In the delivery of the dS Breast 7ch coil solution, the following kits are included:
Philips

Figure of the kit Kit Purpose of the kit
Bilateral CC immobilization kit Diagnostic imaging only
Bilateral M-L immobilization kit Diagnostic and interventional

imaging
Unilateral CC immobilization kit Interventional imaging
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Interventional biopsy kit Breast biopsy
For more information refer to chapter “Breast Biopsy with dS Breast 7ch” on page 728 and
chapter “Breast Immobilization with dS Breast 7ch” on page 726.
3.2.4.17 dS Breast Adaptive 16ch

Affix: CHECK needed: indeed not available on CX? ID: 45036004529569547
Last Content Modificator: Heuvel, Martina van den Status: Released Philips

Fig. 60: dS Breast Adaptive 16ch coil solution: coil and head support.
Type of coil • 16 channel phased-array coil.

• Receive-only.
• Adaptive coil elements adjusting to patient's breast size.
Design • Volume coil with an aperture in which the breasts can be positioned.
• Open access design.
• With comprehensive set of dedicated positioning aids and auxiliaries.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
coil is suited for.
Applications • Breast Imaging (both breasts simultaneously).

• Biopsy.
User Interface Name dS Breast 16ch Adaptive
Tab. 8: Overview
Delivery Contents: Coil

Philips

Fig. 61: Coil components.
Number Description
1 Coil base
2 Handrail
3 Phantom holder
4 Lateral left plate
5 Lateral right plate
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

6 Medial Diagnostic Plate
7 Medial Biopsy Plate
8 Head Support
Delivery Contents: Breast Coil Pads
Fig. 62: Breast Coil Pads.
Number Description
1 Ramp pad
2 Arm support pad
3 Ankle bolster
Philips
4 Patient pad

Number Description
5 Head support pad
6 Head support 2nd spacer
7 Patient top sling pad
8 System cable cover (not shown)
Delivery Contents: Breast Coil Auxiliaries

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 63: Breast Coil Auxiliaries.
Number Description
1 Medial Grid Plate
2 Medial Saddle Spacer Insert
3 Medial Saddle Spacer Attachment
4 Lateral Grid Plate
5 Lateral Solid Axilla Support
6 Lateral Solid Immobilization Plate
7 Sealed Fiducial Assembly
8 Breast Blocker Plate (Left)
9 Breast Blocker Plate (Right) - not shown
10 Lateral Solid Spacer Insert
3.2.4.18 dS Flex S, M, L
Node title (original): Image Ingenia ID: 45036003725208331

Philips

Fig. 64: Components of the dS Flex coil solutions. 1: dS Flex coil in three sizes. 2: Patient support with the built-in dS
Posterior coil.
End fragment title: Image Ingenia

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 65: Components of the dS Flex coil solutions. 1: dS Flex coil in three sizes. 2: Patient support with the built-in dS
Posterior coil.

• Receive coil

• Integrated coil solution including the dS Posterior coil and either the dS Flex
S or the dS Flex M or the dS Flex L coils
coil is suited for.
Applications Imaging of small Fields of View from 5 cm to 20 cm in multiple applications

Philips

User Interface Name • when used in combination with the dS Posterior coil: Posterior, Flex (S, M or
L)
• when not used in combination with the dS Posterior coil: Flex (S, M or L)
Tab. 9: Overview
dS Flex S, M and L coils

The dS Flex coil is available in three sizes: S, M and L.
Coil Coverage Applications
dS Flex S • 10 cm Multi Purpose, e.g.:

• Small joints, e.g. ankle
• in combination with dS Posterior • Carotid arteries
coil up to 4 channels
dS Flex M • 15 cm Multi Purpose, e.g.:

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• in combination with dS Posterior • Joints, e.g. shoulder, hand/wrist, knee

coil up to 6 channels
dS Flex L • 20 cm Multi Purpose, e.g.:

• in combination with dS Posterior • Head
coil up to 8 channels • Brachial plexus
• Cardiac imaging
Node title (original): Combination Flex coils different sizes ID: 27021604230235915-1
Status: Released
NOTICE
Single dS Flex coils of different sizes can be combined with each other and with the dS
Posterior coil.
Using dS Flex coils with or without the dS Posterior coil

By default, the dS Flex coils are used in combination with the dS Posterior coil to achieve
optimum image quality.
► To use the dS Flex coils without the dS Posterior coil, enable Disengage Posterior coil in the
Philips

⇨ The dS Posterior coil is disengaged for the current ExamCard as long as Disengage Posterior
coil remains enabled.
End fragment title: Combination Flex coils different sizes
3.2.4.19 dS Flex Breast

Node title (original): Image Ingenia ID: 54043202979960715

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 66: Components of the dS Flex Breast coil solution. 1: dS Flex L coil. 2: Patient support with the built-in dS
Posterior coil, 3: Breast mattress.
End fragment title: Image Ingenia

Philips

Fig. 67: Components of the dS Flex Breast coil solution. 1: dS Flex L coil. 2: Patient support with the built-in dS
Posterior coil, 3: Breast mattress.

• Receive coil

• Integrated coil solution including the dS Posterior coil and the dS Flex L coils
and the breast mattress.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Coverage 45 cm in left-right direction
coil is suited for.
Applications Breast Imaging (both breasts simultaneously)
User Interface Name Posterior, Flex L
Tab. 10: Overview
3.2.4.20 dS Shoulder 8ch

Philips

Fig. 68: dS Shoulder 8ch coil solution.

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil consisting of base plate and anterior coil part plus inferior,
anterior and posterior pad. The posterior coil elements are integrated in the base
plate. The anterior coil part is adjustable in height.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

coil is suited for.
Applications Shoulder imaging.
User Interface Name Shoulder-8
Tab. 11: Overview
3.2.4.21 dS Shoulder 16ch

Philips

dS Shoulder 16ch coil solution.

1. Coil itself with anterior and
posterior pad
2. Small mattress
3. Large mattress

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil with dedicated mattresses and pads. The anterior coil part is
adjustable in height.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
coil is suited for.
Applications Shoulder imaging.
Tab. 12: Overview

Philips

Coil components
1. Anterior coil with anterior
pad
2. Posterior coil with posterior
pad
3. Anterior Tilt Lock
To tilt the anterior coil
against or away from the
patient's chest, release the
Anterior Tilt Lock. When
done lock again.
4. Anterior Height Lock
To adjust the height and
the rotation of the anterior
coil, release the Anterior
Height Lock. When done
lock again.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Delivery contents
Item/Purpose Quantity Photo
Coil itself 1
Posterior coil pad 1

To cover the posterior surface of the coil
Philips

Anterior coil pad 1

To cover the anterior surface of the coil
Small table mattress 1

To maintain an even tabletop surface beside
the coil
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Large table mattress 1

To cover the tabletop below the coil
Phantom holder 1
For service use only.
SPT positioner 1
For service use only.
Philips

3.2.4.22 dS Wrist 8ch

Fig. 69: dS Wrist 8ch coil solution.

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coils of 8 elements that closely encircle the wrist for high SNR. One-
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

piece, hinged design for easy patient set-up. To reduce patient motion artifacts,
the dS Wrist coil includes two rigid base plates to fixate the coil; one for
overhead and one for at the side examinations.
Dimensions 210 mm x 570 mm x 500 mm (outside dimensions)
coil is suited for.
Applications Wrist imaging.
General remarks • Do not combine this coil with other coils.

• The coil can be used at the patient’s side, with the joint vertically, and
overhead with the joint horizontally.
• Applying CLEAR gives excellent homogeneity throughout the images.
User Interface Name Wrist-8
Tab. 13: Overview
Node title (original): positioning aids dS Wrist 8ch ID: 9007260184356875

Status: Released
Philips

Positioning aids for the dS Wrist 8ch coil

The following positioning aids are available for the coil and should be used for all examinations
for optimum patient comfort and image quality.
Fig. 70: Base plates to fixate the coil on the tabletop. 1 - Base plate for examinations at the patient's side, 2 - Base
plate for examinations overhead, 3 - Groove to slide in the coil for examinations at the side, 4 - Transverse slots to
slide in the coil for overhead examinations, 5 - Cable holders.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 71: Pads for the dS Wrist 8coil.
Number Quantity Purpose
1 2
2 1 To be inserted into coil
3 1 To be inserted at the lateral side of the coil. The little

slot is for the window on the coil.
4 2 To be put under the fingers to keep the digits straight.

Philips

Fig. 72: The mount adaptor has to be attached to the coil for overhead positioning and removed for positioning at
the patient's side.
End fragment title: positioning aids dS Wrist 8ch
3.2.4.23 dS HandWrist 16ch

dS Wrist 16ch coil solution
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coils that closely encircle the wrist for high SNR. One-piece, hinged
design for easy patient set-up. To reduce patient motion artifacts, the dS Wrist
coil includes two rigid base plates to fixate the coil; one for overhead and one for
at the side examinations.
coil is suited for.
Applications High resolution wrist and hand imaging.

Philips


• The coil can be used at the patient’s side, with the joint vertically, and
overhead with the joint horizontally.
Tab. 14: Overview
Delivery contents
Coil itself 1
with 2 markers (for hand and wrist) on top of
it for isocenter positioning
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Base plate 1
To immobilize the coil in a fixed left or right
position
Mount adaptor 1
To fix the coil to the base plate for superman
position
Philips

Wedge pad 1
To immobilize the fingers and to give good
flat surface for the palm of hand to rest.
Elbow/arm pad 1
To support the arm parallel to the coil
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Palm pads 1
1. Long anterior palm pad
To place between the patient's palm
and the coil
2. Posterior palm pad
To place between the posterior surface
of the patient's hand and the coil
3. Short anterior palm pad
To add extra padding if needed, for
example for smaller patients
Philips

Base plate mattress 1

To cover the base plate when scanning with
the patient's hand by their side
Phantom 1
For service use only
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.2.4.24 dS Knee 16ch and dS T/R Knee 16ch

Affix: 1.5T&3.0T ID: 81064799758460939
Fig. 73: dS Knee 16ch coil solution.

Philips

Type of coil 16 channel phased-array coil

• on 1.5T: Receive-only,
• on 3.0T: Transmit/Receive
Design Rigid volume coil consisting of a coil base (base plate with the posterior coil part
attached to it) and an anterior coil part plus positioning aids.
The dS T/R Knee 16ch coil has one cable coming out of the top of the coil that
splits into 2 connectors to connect into the T/R socket and the dStream socket on
the dStream interface.
coil is suited for.
Applications Knee imaging, feet-first examinations
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

User Interface Name Knee-16
Connector • dStream socket/connector on the dStream Interface for dS Knee 16ch coil
• T/R socket and dStream socket/connector on the dStream Interface for dS
T/R Knee 16ch coil
Tab. 15: Overview
Safety
RF.Jewel2.1.2_v1 Status: Released
Affix: Ingenia
WARNING
Do not scan body parts other than the lower limbs with the dS T/R Knee 16 coil.
Do not scan pediatric patients under 15 kg (33 lbs) with the dS T/R Knee 16 coil.
Philips

Label on the coil: Do not scan pediatric patients under 15 kg (33 lbs) with this coil..
End fragment title: 71426 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.Jewel2.1.2_v1
3.2.4.25 dS Knee 16ch and dS T/R Knee 16ch

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Type of coil 16 channel phased-array coil

Transmit/Receive
attached to it) and an anterior coil part plus positioning aids.
The dS T/R Knee 16ch coil has one cable coming out of the top of the coil that
splits into 2 connectors to connect into the T/R socket and the dStream socket on
coil is suited for.
Applications Knee imaging, feet-first examinations

Philips

Connector • dStream socket/connector on the dStream Interface for dS Knee 16ch coil
• T/R socket and dStream socket/connector on the dStream Interface for dS
T/R Knee 16ch coil
Tab. 16: Overview
Safety
RF.Jewel2.1.2_v1 Status: Released
Affix: Ingenia
WARNING
Do not scan body parts other than the lower limbs with the dS T/R Knee 16 coil.
Do not scan pediatric patients under 15 kg (33 lbs) with the dS T/R Knee 16 coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Label on the coil: Do not scan pediatric patients under 15 kg (33 lbs) with this coil..
End fragment title: 71426 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.Jewel2.1.2_v1
3.2.4.26 dS Knee 8ch


Philips


• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil
Dimensions FH: 37 cm, AP: 28 cm, LR (coil): 32 cm, LR (base): 45 cm
coil is suited for.
Applications Knee
Limitations • This coil should only be used for ‘Feet first’ studies.
General remarks • Applying CLEAR gives excellent homogeneity throughout the images.
• Do not combine this coil with other coils.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Tab. 17: Overview
3.2.4.27 dS FootAnkle 8ch

Fig. 76: dS FootAnkle 8ch coil solution.

Philips


• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil consisting of base plate with foot support and the coil plus
positioning aids.
Dimensions • Inner dimensions: FH: 200 mm, LR: 105 mm, AP: 270 mm.
• FOV: FH: 220 mm, LR: 120 mm, AP: 280 mm.
coil is suited for.
Applications Foot, Ankle.
General remarks • Applying CLEAR gives excellent homogeneity throughout the images.
Markers Landmark on top of the handle for isocenter positioning.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

User Interface Name Foot/Ankle
Tab. 18: Overview
3.2.4.28 dS FootAnkle 16ch

dS FootAnkle 16ch coil solution
Philips


• Receive-only
positioning aids.
coil is suited for.
Applications Foot, Ankle.

• With the tilt device, the coil allows to image the ankle in tilting position.
Markers Landmark on top of the handle for isocenter positioning.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Tab. 19: Overview
Delivery contents
Coil itself 1
For imaging
Base plate and foot support 1

To hold coil in place and stabilize foot
Philips

Coil mattress 1
To support the unaffected leg, for comfort
Foot support pad 1

To aid in immobilizing foot, for comfort
Wedge pad 1
To flex ankle if needed and immobilize foot
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Small pad 1
To immobilize toes
Philips

Tilt device 1
To raise the head end of the base plate for
patient comfort
Phantom holder 1
3.2.4.29 dS SmallExtremity 8ch

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 77: dS Small Extremity8ch coil solution. 1: Closed coil. 2: Open coil. 3: Dedicated mattresses.

• Receive-only
Design Wrap-around coil on coil base with dedicated mattress.

Philips

coil is suited for.
Applications Small extremities, e.g.

• Elbow, Wrist, Hand
• Pediatrics
User Interface Name SmallExt8
Tab. 20: Overview
3.2.4.30 dS SmallExtremity 16ch
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

dS Small Extremity 16ch coil solution on the coil mattress

• open
• closed

• Receive-only
Design Wrap-around coil on coil base with dedicated mattress.
coil is suited for.
Philips

Applications Small extremities, e.g. elbow, wrist, hand
Tab. 21: Overview
Delivery contents
Coil itself 1
For imaging
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Hand/small part pad 1

To help immobilize the hand or smaller
extremities
Finger wedge pad 1

To keep the hand straight for hand/finger
imaging when placed under the fingers.
Philips

Elbow pad 1
To increase patient comfort for elbow
imaging by providing a slight bend in the
elbow
Coil mattress 1
To support the coil and maintain optimal
left/right offset (by cut-out)
Cable mattress 1
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

To route the cable for safety and patient
comfort
Phantom holder 1
3.2.4.31 dS Pediatric Head-Spine 8ch coil

Philips

Fig. 78: 1 - dS Pediatric Head-Spine 8ch coil, 2 - table pad, 3 - patient pad.
Type of coil • 8 element phased-array coil

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil with table pad and patient pad
Dimensions Height 26 cm, width 30 cm, length 65 cm
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
coil is suited for.
Applications Pediatric head and spine
Multi coil imaging No
Dual coil imaging No
User Interface name dS Ped. HeadSpine 8ch
3.2.4.32 dS Pediatric Body-Cardiac 8ch coil

Philips

Fig. 79: 1 - dS Pediatric Body-Cardiac 8 ch coil, 2 - table pad, 3 - patient pad, 4 - torso inserts.

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil consisting of posterior and anterior coil part plus table pad,
patient pad and torso inserts.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Available for On the sticker on the posterior coil part, you see the MRI system type and field
strength your coil is suited for.
Applications • Pediatric torso imaging: designed for examinations of neonates and babies
below 8 kg.
User Interface Name dS Ped. Body-Cardiac 8ch
dStream interface required
3.2.4.33 dS Microscopy coils

Philips

Fig. 80: dS Microscopy coils.

• Receive-only
Design • Surface coil,

• Rigid housing,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Single loop.
Dimensions Large coil: 47 mm; Small coil: 23 mm (coil’s inner diameter)
Available for On the connector, you see the size of your coil, the MRI system type and field
strength your coil is suited for.
MultiTransmit compatible No
Applications Applications requiring small FOV with high SNR, e.g. skin, eyes, small joints,
superficial vessels, pediatric and nipple imaging. Placed
around a finger, against the skin or close to the body surface.
General remarks To ensure a flat surface, the coils can be ‘closed’ with special coil inserts.
Limitations • Make sure, that the coil is not positioned in the transverse plane. Coils work
best when positioned in coronal or sagittal plane.
• The coil may not be used in the mouth.
Multi coil imaging Yes
Dual coil imaging Yes

You can combine two Microscopy coils of the same size or of different size.
User Interface Name Micro-23, Micro-47

Philips

Connector Litton socket on the dStream Interface
Specification area • Microscopy 47 mm coil: cylindrical; D (diameter) = 80 mm, H (height)

=20 mm
• Microscopy 23 mm coil: cylindrical; D (diameter) = 40 mm, H (height)
=20 mm
Recommended value according to Philips self-test: H = 20 mm
3.2.4.34 Phosphorous P-140-Flex Coil

Affix: all 3T systems ID: 9007318179720715
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• All-purpose Transmit/Receive coil.
– Operates at the 31P-frequency of 3.0T.
– Fixed tuning and matching
– Compatible with the 3.0T System Body coil: the P-140-Flex coil is
detuned while scanning ¹H with the System Body coil.
– Supports 1H Decoupling and Nuclear Overhauser Enhancement (NOE)
with the 3.0T System Body Coil during 31P-spectroscopy.
Design • Single element surface coil with a loop diameter of 14 cm.

• Flexible coil: can be bend with a radius of 10 cm.
• Provision to attach standard Philips straps of 70 mm wide.
Available for • On the sticker on the coil, you see the MRI system type and field strength
your coil is suited for.
CLEAR-compatible No
Philips

Applications • MR Phosphorous Spectroscopy and Imaging.

For example: leg, muscle, liver, brain, heart.
Markers on the coil • Laser marker on the housing to indicate the middle of the coil loop.
• Small proton marker in the center of the coil loop (on the distal side) for
coil localization in survey images.
General remarks • Keep the plane of the coil parallel to the magnetic field.
• The dS Posterior coil must be disengaged (“in holdback”) while scanning.
• The penetration depth of the coil is +/- half the diameter of the coil.
Multi-coil imaging No
Dual-coil imaging No
User interface name P-140-Flex
Connector T/R socket
3.2.4.35 Phosphorous P-140 Coil

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Affix: coil for Ingenia/CX/Achieva, this description Ingenia/CX ID: 45036031711034891


• All purpose 31P Transmit/Receive
– Manual Tuning: Two long attached rods allow for manual tuning and
matching to optimize performance.
Design Surface loop coil with a diameter of 14 cm

Slots around the edge of the coil can be used to attach straps to keep the coil
positioned properly.
coil is suited for.
Philips

SENSE-compatible No
CLEAR-compatible No
MultiTransmit- compatible No
Applications MR Phosphorous Spectroscopy, for example leg, muscle, brain, liver, heart.
Markers on the coil Small proton marker in the center of the coil loop (on the distal side) for coil
localization in survey images.
General remarks • Keep the plane of the coil parallel to the main magnetic field.
• Proton decoupling and Nuclear Overhauser Enhancement (NOE) irradiation
are provided by the Body coil. SAR is calculated on a scan-by-scan basis and
takes into account both, the proton and phosphorous pulses.
User Interface Name P-140
3.2.4.36 dS TorsoCardiac Coil 1.5T
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Affix: Breeze coil ID: 115179398923
In the following referred to as: dS TorsoCardiac coil
Type of coil • 8 channel phased-array detection

Design • Volume coil (dS Base and dS Head Top) and surface coils (dS Posterior coil,
TorsoCardiac)
• Integrated coil solution including the dS Posterior coil and the TorsoCardiac
coil, with or without dS Base coil.
coil is suited for.
Philips

Applications • Body applications: Thorax, Abdomen, Pelvis

• Cardiac Imaging
• Long Bones
General remarks The coil can be used with the longest expansion in FH or in RL direction,
depending on its orientation.
Marker In the middle of the coil (FH direction) for light visor positioning.
User Interface Name
dS Interface Required
Connector dS Interface
More information
• About positioning:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.2.4.37 dS MSK M and dS MSK S Coil 1.5T

In the following referred to as: dS MSK S coil and dS MSK M coil
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 4/1/2021 9:55:38 { Heuvel, Martina van den, 4/1/2021 9:55:38
AM: dS MSK M } AM: dS MSK S}
Type of coil • Multi-element phased-array coils { Heuvel, Martina van den, 2/21/2021
10:16:54 PM: Raja wants 8ch phased-array coil. REJECTED! }
• Receive-only
Design Flexible surface coils designed to wrap around the anatomy of interest
Philips
The dS MSK coils are available in two different sizes: M (medium) and S (small).

coil is suited for.
Coverage • dS MSK M coil: 23 cm

• dS MSK S coil: 19 cm
MultiTransmit compatible No { Heuvel, Martina van den, 3/2/2021 12:58:50 PM: NOT for Ambition, NOT
for MR5300}
Applications MSK applications depending on the different sizes of the MSK coils, for example:
• Small joints (for example, elbow, wrist, ankle)
• Hand and foot
• Large joints (for example, shoulder, hip, knee)
• Pediatric imaging
• Posterior triangle (combined with dS Base, dS Head Top and dS Posterior)
• Neck (combined with dS Base, dS Head Top and dS Posterior)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

General remarks • Wrap the coil as tightly as possible around the anatomy of interest.
• Use the coil with the dedicated positioner which helps immobilize the
patient (or body part).
Marker No
User Interface Name
NOTICE
Always store the coil flat.
3.2.4.38 dS Breast 7ch Coil 1.5T

In the following referred to as: dS Breast 7ch coil

Philips


• Receive-only
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Applications • Breast Imaging (both breasts simultaneously)

– Also with bilateral immobilization
– Including biopsy with the biopsy kit
User Interface Name
Philips

Node title (original): Breast pads and connectors X ID: 117993914763-1

Status: Released
Breast Pads and Connectors

Item Photo Use
Cover pad for the Breast 7ch coil Designed for patient comfort.
• There is no padding between the two
breasts in order to reduce the pressure
on the sternum.
Head support Height adjustable for patient comfort.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Ramp pad with velcro on the bottom Designed for patient comfort.
Lower leg pad with velcro on the bottom Designed for patient comfort.
Philips

Item Photo Use
Head support pad Designed for patient comfort.

• To be placed around the head support.
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 3/9/2021 Designed for patient comfort.

8:24:01 AM: part of the product?}Chest • To be placed underneath the patient's
support pad chest.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: Breast pads and connectors X
Delivery Contents
In the delivery of the dS Breast 7ch coil solution, the following kits are included:
Bilateral CC immobilization kit Diagnostic imaging only
Bilateral M-L immobilization kit Diagnostic and interventional

imaging
Philips

Unilateral CC immobilization kit Interventional imaging
Interventional biopsy kit Breast biopsy
3.2.5 SmartExam and Coils

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
SmartExam is a tool that automates planning, scanning and processing in brain, knee, shoulder,
breast, cervical and lumbar spine examinations.
Supported coils for SmartExam

For optimum quality of SmartExam, use the supported coils:
Node title (original): 1.5T and 3.0T ID: 18014467461685259
Status: Released
Anatomic area Supported coils
Brain • dS Base and dS Head top

• dS Base and dS HeadNeck top,
• dS Head 32ch 3.0T
Cervical spine • dS Base and dS Posterior
Lumbar spine • dS Posterior
Breast • dS Breast 7ch

• dS Breast 16ch (Ingenia only)
Philips

Shoulder • dS Shoulder 8ch
Knee • dS Knee 8ch

• dS Knee 16ch 1.5T
End fragment title: 1.5T and 3.0T

Status: Released
Ingenia Elition

• dS Head 32ch 3.0T

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12



Status: Released
Ingenia Ambition


Philips

Your MRI System Coils and Coil Combinations

Node title (original): MR5300 Falcon1 ID: 118357893515

Status: Released
MR5300


End fragment title: MR5300 Falcon1
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

3.3 Coils and Coil Combinations
Affix: Achieva ID: 9007316219128971
This chapter describes the coils and the coil combinations available for your system and how to
apply them.
Status: Released
NOTICE
examination.
Node title (original): Referral to Maintenance chapter about ID: 116965827979-2

Cleaning Status: Released
Philips

Coils and Coil Combinations Your MRI System
NOTICE
Refer to the Maintenance chapter for full information on how to clean the coils.
End fragment title: Referral to Maintenance chapter about Cleaning
3.3.1 General coil safety

Status: Released
Only coils that have been proven safe and compatible on the Philips MR system shall be used.
Coded connectors and software keying are provided to control the use of coils. Refer to the
Instructions for Use of the coil for further safety instructions.
Safety and performance considerations

Receive coils have safely been used to investigate any anatomy. The coil insulation prevents
accidental contact with the conductive metal parts. Each coil has been specially designed for
prolonged safe and reliable operation.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Safety measures
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24353
WARNING
Never use surface coils, cable traps and cables which are damaged.
Coils must be returned to the manufacturer's Customer Support for replacement if there is any
suspected damage to either the external covering or the coil's internal components. The patient
must never be allowed to come into contact with the internal coil connections.

SYS.Label.IFU.AvoidConnectorAndPatientContact Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24641
Philips

WARNING
Do not simultaneously touch the coil connector contacts and the patient to prevent
potential harm for the patient.
End fragment title: 24641 SYS.Label.IFU.AvoidConnectorAndPatientContact
Node title (original): 24364 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF- ID: 27021604224841995-2

MIRA.25b Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24364
WARNING
Do not scan with an incomplete base coil. The protective lids on the contacts of base coil
must be present at all times.
These lids can be removed for cleaning purposes.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 24364 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF-MIRA.25b

PegRF7.2 Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24289
WARNING
Prevent patients from touching the contacts of separable coils.
When connected to the system a voltage of 12 volt DC is present at the contacts of the coil
base. Under normal conditions this voltage is not hazardous to patients. However for
critically ill cardiac patients this low DC voltage may have serious consequences.
• Always close the coil before connecting it to the system.
• Always disconnect the coil from the system before opening the coil.
• Do not leave unused coils or coil parts on the tabletop.
End fragment title: 24289 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PegRF7.2

Status: Released
Philips

WARNING
Never scan with the SENSE Head Coil and neurovascular coil positioned more than 5
centimeters offcenter.
This may cause local heating of the patient. Always position the SENSE Head coil and
neurovascular coil in the isocenter by using the light visor.
Node title (original): Anterior coil, dStream Interface ID: 45036003675778443-2

HGwarnings Status: Released
Affix: Ingenia family except MR5300
dS Anterior coil
Node title (original): HG - Do not use Anterior coil upside down ID: 36028804058543627-2
WARNING
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Do not use the dS Anterior coil upside down.

This may cause excessive local heating.
End fragment title: HG - Do not use Anterior coil upside down
dStream Interface
Node title (original): HG - Do not sterilize dStream Interface ID: 27021604804118795-2
CAUTION
Do not sterilize the dStream Interface.
Sterilizing the dStream Interface will damage it.
End fragment title: HG - Do not sterilize dStream Interface

End fragment title: Anterior coil, dStream Interface HGwarnings
3.3.2 About Coils

Status: Released
Philips

Transmit- and Receive-coils

The coils work in conjunction with the Quadrature Body coil. The Q-Body coil acts as the RF
transmitter and the surface/volume/phased-array coil as the receiver.
Type of detection
Linear coil Quadrature coil Phased-array coil
Receiving elements 1 1 More than 1
Connector Surface coil connector Surface coil connector Phased-array coil

connector (thick cable)
SNR Average Higher Highest
SENSE compatible No No Yes (if name: SENSE)
The term ’SENSE’ in the coil name indicates that a coil is SENSE compatible.
Use different element combinations for SENSE coils

In order to use different channel combinations, perform the SENSE scan and save raw data.
Then perform a delayed reconstruction with any other channel combination.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Regular inspection
• The quality of the cable and coil insulation must be inspected regularly. Damaged coils must
be replaced.
• Inspect the connector pins if they are still straight.
3.3.3 Available coils per anatomic region

Status: Released
Head/CNS and Head/Neck coils

• Q-Head coil 1.5T
• SENSE Head coil 6 and 8 1.5T and 3.0T
• SENSE Head coil 32
• SENSE Head/Neck coil 1.5T
• T/R Head coil 3.0T
• TMJ coil / Coil Holder 1.5T
• SENSE NeuroVascular coil 8 and 16 1.5T and 3.0T
Total Neuro, Total Spine coils

• SENSE Head/Spine coil combination 1.5T and 3.0T
• SENSE Pediatric Head Spine coil 8 1.5T and 3.0T
Philips

Spine coils
• SENSE Spine coil 15 1.5T and 3.0T
• SENSE Spine coil 1.5T
• SENSE Spine coil 3.0T
• Synergy Pediatric coil 1.5T
Body coils
• Q-Body coil 1.5T and 3.0T
• SENSE Cardiac coil 1.5T
• SENSE Cardiac coil 3.0T
• SENSE Torso/Cardiac coil 1.5T and 3.0T
• SENSE Breast coil 4 1.5T and 3.0T
• SENSE Breast coil 7 (incl. biopsy) 1.5T and 3.0T
• MammoTrak
• MammoTrak Breast coil 16
• MammoTrak Breast coil 7
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Breast: Stereotactic Localization Device

• SENSE Body coil 1.5T
• SENSE XL Torso coil 16 1.5T and 3.0T
• SENSE Torso coil 3.0T
• Endo-Cavitary coil 1.5T
• Endo coil with disposable probe 1.5T and 3.0T
• SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac coil 8 1.5T and 3.0T
Orthopedics coils
• SENSE Shoulder coil 8 1.5T and 3.0T
• SENSE Shoulder coil 4 1.5T and 3.0T
• SENSE Wrist coil 4 1.5T and 3.0T
• SENSE Wrist coil 8 1.5T and 3.0T
• Hand/Wrist coil 4 1.5T
• SENSE Small Extremity coil 8
• Knee/Foot coil 1.5T
• Knee/Foot coil 4 (FootAnkleKnee) 1.5T
• SENSE Knee coil 8 1.5T and 3.0T
• SENSE Knee coil 16 1.5T
• SENSE T/R Knee coil 16 3.0T
Philips
• SENSE Foot-Ankle coil 1.5T and 3.0T

• SENSE PeriphVascular coil 1.5T
Miscellaneous coils
• Microscopy coils 1.5T
• SENSE Flex coils 1.5T and 3.0T
• Circular coils C1, C3, C4 1.5T
3.3.4 Coil Choice

Status: Released
This paragraph describes per anatomic region which coil(s) can be used best. Click on a link to
go to the corresponding description:
• Head / CNS
• Head / Neck
• Spine
• Thorax
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Abdomen
• Pelvis
• Upper Extremities
• Lower Extremities
For information on coil combinations, refer to chaptere 6 ’Coil combinations’. However, in each
coil section information is provided if a coil can be used in a Multi coil or Dual coil combination.
3.3.4.1 Head / CNS

Status: Released
In the table below, the text ’Any Head coil’ refers to the following coils:
• on 1.5T: SENSE Head 6 or 8 coil, SENSE Head/Neck coil, SENSE NeuroVascular 8 or 16 coil, or
Q-Head coil
• on 3.0T: SENSE Head 8 coil, SENSE NeuroVascular 8 or 16 coil or T/R Head coil
REGION COIL 1.5T COIL 3.0T
Brain / Fast Brain • Any Head coil • Any Head coil
Pituitary • Any Head coil • Any Head coil
Brain stem • Any Head coil • Any Head coil
Hippocampus • Any Head coil • Any Head coil

Philips

I.A.C. • Any Head coil • Any Head coil

• SENSE Flex-S, -M • SENSE Flex-S, -M
Orbit(s) • Any Head coil • Any Head coil

• SENSE Flex-S • SENSE Flex-S
• C3 or C4
• Microscopy coils
Pediatric • Any Head coil • Any Head coil

• SENSE Pediatric Head Spine • SENSE Pediatric Head Spine
• SENSE Knee • SENSE Flex-S, -M
• Knee/Foot • Combination SENSE Flex coils
• SENSE Flex-S, -M
• Combination SENSE Flex coils
Brain and C-Spine • SENSE NV SENSE NV

• SENSE Head/Neck
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.3.4.2 Head / Neck

Status: Released
Anterior neck (Thyroid, • SENSE NV • SENSE NV

Larynx) • SENSE Head/Neck • SENSE Flex-S
• SENSE Flex-S • Combination SENSE Flex coils
Angio (Carotid arteries) • SENSE NV • SENSE NV

• SENSE Head/Neck • SENSE Flex-S, -M
• SENSE Flex-S, -M • Combination SENSE Flex coils
Both TMJ • SENSE Flex-S • SENSE Flex-S

• TMJ • Combination SENSE Flex coils
• Combination C3, C4
Single TMJ • C3 or C4 • SENSE Flex-S

Philips

3.3.4.3 Spine
Status: Released
Cervical spine • SENSE Spine • SENSE Spine

• SENSE Head/Neck • SENSE NV
• SENSE NV
Thoracic spine • SENSE Spine • SENSE Spine

• SENSE Spine 15 • SENSE Spine 15
Lumbar spine • SENSE Spine • SENSE Spine

• SENSE Spine 15 • SENSE Spine 15
Total spine • SENSE Head Spine • SENSE Head Spine

• SENSE Spine • SENSE Spine
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Total neuro • SENSE Head Spine • SENSE Head Spine
• Combination SENSE Spine with SENSE • Combination SENSE Spine with SENSE
Flex-L Flex-L
• Combination SENSE Spine 15 with • Combination SENSE Spine 15 with
SENSE Flex-L SENSE Flex-L
Pediatric spine • SENSE Pediatric Head Spine • SENSE Pediatric Head Spine
• SENSE Spine • SENSE Spine
• SENSE Flex • SENSE Flex
• Combination SENSE Flex coils • Combination SENSE Flex coils
NOTICE
The SENSE Head/Spine coil is a combination of the SENSE NeuroVascular 16 coil and the SENSE
Spine 15 coil.
3.3.4.4 Thorax
Status: Released
Philips

Heart, Coronary Artery, • SENSE Torso/Cardiac • SENSE Torso/Cardiac

Mediastinum • SENSE Cardiac • SENSE Cardiac
Aorta • SENSE Torso/Cardiac • SENSE Torso/Cardiac

• SENSE Cardiac • SENSE Cardiac
Lungs • SENSE Body • SENSE Cardiac

• SENSE XL Torso • SENSE Torso
• Q-Body • SENSE XL Torso
Breasts • SENSE Breast • SENSE Breast

• SENSE Body • SENSE Torso
• Breast • SENSE Flex-L or -M with SENSE breast
• SENSE Flex-L or -M with SENSE breast mattress
mattress
Pediatric • SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac • SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac

• Q-Head for small infants • SENSE Cardiac
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• C3 for 1 to 6 months • SENSE Flex

• SENSE Flex • Combination SENSE Flex coils
NOTICE
For examinations of the mediastinum, prone positioning is recommended.
Node title (original): Screening ID: 101524321163

Status: Released
Breast Examinations
Node title (original): Breast screening ID: 98936341387-1
Status: Released
Philips

Breast examinations can be used to visualize lesions using high-resolution and/or time-resolved
imaging, which may assist diagnosis in women with pre-identified cancer, and provide adjunct
screening information in women with high risk to develop cancer. Identical coil solutions and
sequences are used to support diagnosis or screening. Additional coil solutions are available to
enable breast biopsies.
End fragment title: Breast screening
End fragment title: Screening
3.3.4.5 Abdomen
Status: Released
Liver/spleen, Angio • SENSE Body • SENSE Torso

• SENSE XL Torso • SENSE XL Torso
• Q-Body • Q-Body
Kidney/adrenals • SENSE Body • SENSE Torso

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Pancreas • SENSE Body • SENSE Torso
Pediatric body • SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac • SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac

• SENSE Flex-S, -M, -L depending on • SENSE Flex-S, -M, -L depending on
patient’s size patient’s size
3.3.4.6 Pelvis
Status: Released
Bladder • SENSE Body • SENSE XL Torso

Angio • SENSE Body • SENSE XL Torso

• Q-Body
Prostate • Endo-cavitary 1.5T • Endo 3.0T

• SENSE Body • SENSE Torso (3.0T)
• SENSE Flex (-L)
Philips

Testes • SENSE Flex-S, -M • SENSE Flex-S, -M
Pediatric body • SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac • SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac

• SENSE Flex -S, -M, -L depending on • SENSE Flex -S, -M, -L depending on
3.3.4.7 Upper Extremities

Status: Released
Shoulder • SENSE Shoulder • SENSE Shoulder

• SENSE Flex-M, -L • SENSE Flex-M, -L
• C3, C1 (larger patients)
Elbow • SENSE Small Extremity coil 8 • SENSE Small Extremity coil 8

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Long bones: Upper arm, • SENSE Flex-M, -L • SENSE Flex-M, -L

forearm • Combination SENSE Flex coils • Combination SENSE Flex coils
Wrist • SENSE Wrist • SENSE Wrist

• SENSE Small Extremity coil 8 • SENSE Small Extremity coil 8
• Hand/Wrist 4
Hand • SENSE Flex-S • SENSE Flex-S

• Hand/Wrist 4 • SENSE Small Extremity coil 8
Microscopy • Microscopy
Pediatric applications • SENSE Flex-S, -M, -L depending on • SENSE Flex-S, -M, -L depending on
3.3.4.8 Lower Extremities

Status: Released
Philips

Hips (both) • SENSE Body • SENSE Torso

Single hip • SENSE Flex-L • SENSE Flex-L
Upper legs • SENSE Body • SENSE Body

• Q-Body • Q-Body
• SENSE Flex-L • SENSE Flex-L
Lower legs • SENSE XL Torso • SENSE Torso

• SENSE Body • SENSE XL Torso
Knees (both) • SENSE Body • SENSE Torso

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Single knee • SENSE Knee coil 16 1.5T • SENSE T/R Knee coil 16 3.0T
• SENSE Knee coil 8 • SENSE Knee coil 8
• Knee/Foot • SENSE Flex-M, -S
• Knee/Foot 4
• SENSE Flex-M, -S
Patella • SENSE Flex-S • SENSE Flex-S

• C3, C4
Ankles (both) • Q-Head • T/R Head

Single ankle • SENSE Foot/Ankle • SENSE Foot/Ankle

• SENSE Flex-S, -M • SENSE Flex-S, -M
• Knee/Foot 4
Foot • SENSE Foot/Ankle • SENSE Foot/Ankle

• Knee/Foot 4 • SENSE Flex-S, -M
• SENSE Flex-S, -M • SENSE Small Extremity coil 8
• Q-Head
Philips

Angio • SENSE Body • SENSE Torso

• SENSE PV
Pediatric applications • SENSE Flex-S, -M, -L depending on • SENSE Flex -S, -M, -L depending on
3.3.5 SmartExam and Coils

Status: Released
breast, cervical and lumbar spine examinations.
Supported coils for SmartExam

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
For optimum quality of SmartExam, use the supported coils:

Brain • SENSE Head 8

• SENSE NeuroVascular 8
• SENSE Head 32 3.0T
Cervical spine • SENSE Spine

Lumbar spine • SENSE Spine 1.5T and 3.0T

• SENSE Spine15
Breast • SENSE Breast 4

• SENSE Breast 7
• MammoTrak Breast 7
• MammoTrak Breast 16
Philips

Shoulder • SENSE Shoulder 4

• SENSE Shoulder 8
• SENSE Flex M
Knee • SENSE Knee 8

• SENSE Knee 16 1.5T
• SENSE T/R Knee 16 3.0T
3.3.6 Coil combinations

This chapter describes the available coil combinations.

For information on the coils, refer to chapter 5 ‘Coils’.
Node title (original): General coil use->IfU ID: 9007200308950411
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Before you start using any of the coils, refer to the ’Instructions for Use’ for full information on
safety aspects.
End fragment title: General coil use->IfU

Status: Released
NOTICE
examination.
NOTICE
Dual coil imaging can be performed on both Achieva and Intera systems with a FreeWave
upgrade.
Philips

3.3.6.1 Different ways of combining coils

Status: Released
It is possible to connect multiple coils simultaneously to the system. Coils can be combined in
two different ways:
• in Multi coil imaging
• in Dual coil imaging
These imaging types can be enabled or disabled by means of the imaging parameters ’Multi
coil’ or ’Dual coil’.
Multi Coil Imaging

In Multi coil imaging, multiple coils are used for multistack imaging. The coils are used
separately, one coil per stack or scan. Each image contains the information from one coil only.
Example A typical application is the examinations of both TMJs simultaneously with two
different coils connected. A scan is performed with multiple stacks, one with the TMJ-right coil
for the right TMJ and the other stack with the TMJ-left coil for the left TMJ.
Related imaging parameter
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Multi coil (if set to ’Yes’, different coils can be selected per stack)
Dual Coil Imaging
NOTICE
Dual coil imaging can be performed on Achieva and Intera systems with a FreeWave upgrade.
In Dual coil imaging, multiple phased-array coils are combined in such a way that they function
as one coil: the signal is added up into one image. This new multi-element coil is CLEAR- and
SENSE-compatible. Dual coil imaging opens a wide range of applications.
ExampleThe SENSE Head/Spine coil is an example of such a coil combination: the SENSE
NeuroVascular 16 coil and the SENSE Spine 15 coil are combined to a 31 channel phased-array
coil. This coil combination allows total neuro and total spine imaging.
Related imaging parameter
• Dual coil (if set to ’Yes’, two phased-array coils can be used as one coil)
3.3.6.2 Possible Coil Combinations 1.5T

Status: Released
In this section the possible coil combinations on 1.5T systems are listed.
Philips

NOTICE
This section replaces section "Possible Coil Combinations 1.5T" of chapter 5 in IFU volume 2.
Recommended coil combinations

Recommended coil combinations are the clinically useful combinations. These coil
combinations can be used in Dual coil and in Multi coil imaging:
Total Neuro / Total Spine
• SENSE Head/Spine coil combination :
SENSE NV 16 with SENSE Spine 15
• SENSE Spine coil with SENSE Flex-L coil

Miscellaneous applications, e.g. joints and pediatrics
• SENSE Flex coil combinations
– SENSE Flex-S with SENSE Flex (-S, -M, -L)
– SENSE Flex-M with SENSE Flex (-S, -M, -L)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

– SENSE Flex-L with SENSE Flex (-S, -M, -L)
Allowed combinations
More coil combinations are allowed. These can be used in Multi coil imaging only. The table
below gives an overview.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 81: The R indicates recommended coil combinations (Dual or multi coil imaging can be performed); the checkmark indicates allowed
coil combinations (Multi coil imaging can be performed).
3.3.6.3 Possible Coil Combinations 3.0T

Status: Released
In this section the possible coil combinations on 3.0T systems are listed.
Philips

Recommended coil combinations

Recommended coil combinations are the clinically useful combinations. These coil
combinations can be used in Dual coil and in Multi coil imaging:
Total Neuro / Total Spine
• SENSE Head/Spine coil combination:
SENSE NV 16 with SENSE Spine 15
• SENSE Spine coil with SENSE Flex-L coil
Body applications
• Endo coil 3.0T with SENSE Torso coil
• Endo coil 3.0T with SENSE Cardiac coil
• Endo coil 3.0T with SENSE XL Torso coil
• Endo coil 3.0T with SENSE XL Torso TX coil
Miscellaneous applications, e.g. joints and pediatrics
• SENSE Flex coils with each other
– SENSE Flex-S with SENSE Flex (-S, -M, -L)
– SENSE Flex-M with SENSE Flex (-S, -M, -L)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

– SENSE Flex-L with SENSE Flex (-S, -M, -L)
• SENSE Spine 15 coil with SENSE Flex-L coil
Multi coil combinations

The following combinations can only be used in Multi coil imaging.
• SENSE Flex-S coil with SENSE Head 6 coil
• SENSE Flex-S coil with SENSE Head 8 coil
• SENSE Flex-S coil with SENSE NV 8 coil
• SENSE Flex-S coil with SENSE NV 16 coil
3.3.6.4 SENSE Head/Spine coil combination

Status: Released
Type of coil • 31 elements phased-array coil

• Receive-only
Design Coil combination of the SENSE NeuroVascular 16 coil and a rigid 15 element spine
surface coil. In this case, the SENSE NV 16 coil offers different anterior parts: a
cage (as usual) and a rigid surface coil (referred to as ’top-off’).
Dimensions Imaging length (coil combination): 72 cm
Available for 1.5T, 3.0T

Philips

SENSE-compatible Yes
Applications • Cervical, Thoracic and Lumbar spine

• Screening Total Spine with MobiFlex option
• Screening Total Neuro with MobiFlex option
General remarks The SENSE Spine 15 and the SENSE NV 16 coils can both be used as stand-alone
coils. For more information:
• See section ‘SENSE NeuroVascular coil 8 and 16’.
• See section ‘SENSE Spine coil 15’
3.3.6.4.1 Positioning SENSE Head/Spine coil combination

Status: Released
► Place the NV posterior part and the spine coil on the tabletop.
► Slide the spine coil over posterior part. Move it up maximally.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Route the cable of the NV through the groove on the side of the spine coil.
► Place the mattress on the coil. The mattress helps keeping the cable in place.
► Position the patient on the coil combination.
► Let the patient move upwards so that the patient's shoulders touch the NV posterior part.
► Use the knee cushion to increase patient comfort.
► Make sure that the patient's hands are on the tabletop and not at the side of the table so
that finger pinching cannot occur during table movement. Make use of the arm supports to
avoid such a situation.
► Attach the anterior coil part (either cage or top-off) to the NV posterior part.
In case of the cage, move the mirror on the coil to the optimum position.
Node title (original): SENSE Head/Spine combination & ID: 6463431819-1
positioning Status: Released
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 82: SENSE Head/Spine coil combination. 1-3: Set-up for total neuro examination. 4-5: Set-up for total spine examination.
End fragment title: SENSE Head/Spine combination & positioning
3.3.6.4.2 Total Neuro Examination

Status: Released
Total Neuro examinations can be done by means of the MobiTrak option and the SENSE Spine
15 coil with the SENSE NV 16 coil.
Total Neuro ExamCards acquire three stacks (head/cervical, thoracic, lumbar) at different table
positions. Table movement is required between acquisition of these stacks.
• Stack A (lumbar) is acquired with the SENSE Spine 15 coil.
• Stack B (thoracic) is acquired in Dual coil mode with both coils (elements ABC and NPC ).
• Stack C (head/cervical) is acquired with the SENSE NV 16 coil.
NOTICE
Total Neuro can also be acquired in 4 stacks.
Adapt the ExamCard if necessary.
Philips

Workflow
► Position the patient on the coil combination.
► Center on the middle marker (chin) of the NV 16 coil.
► Start the Total Neuro ExamCard.
Automatically the sagittal survey will start, followed by the coronal survey.
► Load both surveys into the MobiView package.
► Click |Smooth fuse|.
► Save the images to the data base.
► Load the fused surveys into the planning environment.
► Plan a sagittal Total Neuro sequence on the sagittal survey (FH and AP offcenters) and on
the coronal survey (RL angulations).
► Press |Proceed| to complete planning.
All scans and stations are now planned since GeoLinks and ScanAlign are applied within the
Total Neuro ExamCard.
► Start the ExamCard.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Images can be viewed, fused and saved in MobiView.
3.3.6.4.3 Allowed Coil Combinations

Status: Released
On 16 channel systems
SENSE NV selection AND SENSE Spine 15 selection
HNPC A
TO-HNPC A
PC AB
NPC AB
TO-NPC AB
PC ABC
NPC ABC
TO-NPC ABC
On 32 channel systems, the same coil combinations are allowed as on the 16 channel systems
plus those listed in the table below.
Philips

SENSE NV selection AND SENSE Spine 15 selection
HNACPC A
NACPC A
HNACPC AB
HNPC AB
NACPC AB
TO-HNPC AB
NACPC ABC
NPC ABCD
NACPC ABCD
TO-NPC ABCD
PC ABCDE
3.3.6.5 SENSE Spine coil with SENSE Flex-L coil
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released

• Screening Total Spine with MobiFlex option
• Screening Total Neuro with MobiFlex option
General remarks For more information:

• See section ‘SENSE Spine coil 1.5T’
• See section ‘SENSE Spine coil 3.0T’
• See section 'SENSE Flex coils'.
3.3.6.5.1 Positioning SENSE Spine coil with SENSE Flex-L coil

Status: Released
► Place the spine coil on the tabletop.

► Position the patient on the coil.
Philips

► Use the knee cushion to increase patient comfort.

► Make sure that the patient's hands are on the tabletop and not at the side of the table so
that finger pinching cannot occur during table movement.
Make use of the arm supports to avoid such a situation.
► Place the elements of the SENSE Flex-L coil at both sides of the patient’s head, and fix them
with straps.
Fig. 83: Positioning with the SENSE Spine and the SENSE Flex-L coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.3.6.5.2 Total Neuro Examination

Status: Released
Total Neuro examinations can be done by means of the MobiTrak option using the SENSE Spine
coil with the SENSE Flex-L coil.
Change the Total Spine ExamCard in the following way:
► Add another stack so that you end up with four stacks (head, cervical, thoracic, lumbar) at
different table positions.
► Table movement is required between acquisition of these stacks.
► Ensure that the stacks A, B, C (lumbar, thoracic, cervical) are acquired with the SENSE Spine
coil.
► Ensure that the stack D (head) is acquired with the SENSE Flex-L coil.
► Use CLEAR in the head and enable Dual coil imaging.
3.3.6.5.3 Allowed Coil Combinations

Status: Released
Philips

SENSE Flex selection AND SENSE Spine selection
12 or 1 or 2 A
12 or 1 or 2 AB
12 or 1 or 2 M-ABCDE
3.3.6.6 SENSE Flex Coils Combinations

Status: Released
Applications Miscellaneous, e.g. joints (ankle and knee), pediatrics
General remarks For more information:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• See section 'SENSE Flex coils'.
NOTICE
It is highly recommended to use the dedicated coils, e.g. knee coils for knee examinations or a
foot/ankle coil for ankle examinations.
If these dedicated coils are not available or can’t be used, SENSE Flex combinations can be
used instead.
3.3.6.6.1 Positioning of SENSE Flex-S and -M coil for knee examination

Status: Released
► Put one Flex-S element underneath the knee.

► Place the Flex-M elements at both sides of the knee. Fix them with straps.
► Place the other Flex-S element on top of the knee. Fix with straps.
► Put any kind of padding between coil cables and patient.
► Route the cables so that they are straight and neither touch each other nor the patient.
Philips

Positioning Aids Your MRI System
Fig. 84: SENSE Flex-S and -M coil for a knee examination.
3.4 Positioning Aids

This chapter shows the positioning aids that are delivered with your system: the basic set and
the optional positioning aids. For most of them, application examples are given and their
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
purpose is explained.
Node title (original): Positioning aids NOT made with natural ID: 87955069963-1
Rubber Status: Released
NOTICE
Philips' positioning aids are not made with natural rubber.
End fragment title: Positioning aids NOT made with natural Rubber
3.4.1 Basic Set

Affix: reused also for Achieva ID: 36028803494787339
The following figures show the basic set of positioning aids:

Philips

Your MRI System Positioning Aids
Fig. 85: Mattress yellow long, dimensions: 1800 mm x 560 mm. Mattress yellow short, dimensions: 600 mm x 560
mm. Knee support, dimensions.
Fig. 86: Wedge 30o. Wedge 15o. Extremity straps: large, medium, small.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 87: Head/orbit strap and immobilization strap (2x velcro strip). Shoulder/hip strap. Elbow support strap (4x
velcro strip).
Fig. 88: Sandbags (2.8 kg and 3.6 kg). Set of foam wedges. 6 x cable clips.
Fig. 89: Body straps: 2xlarge, 2xmedium, 4xsmall. Spacer Flex coils. (4x) wrist strap.
Philips

Fig. 90: (2x) arm support. Arm support in use.
More positioning aids are delivered with the specific coils. Refer to the ’Coils’ chapter for more
information.
Node title (original): NVC stability pad ID: 9007292923122187
Affix: Achieva udoc (Ingenia is fine already!) Status: Released
Item/Purpose Quantity Photo Application Example
NVC Stability pad 1 each

Pad to aid in positioning for all types of
examination with the TMJ holder.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: NVC stability pad
Node title (original): Comfort Plus pack (slightly different ID: 93933487371
description in Ingenia IFU, so no reuse here) Status: Released
Affix: add to all Best systems (okay already - but differently -
with Ingenia)
Comfort Plus pack 1

Set of memory foam mattresses for full
table coverage.
End fragment title: Comfort Plus pack (slightly different description in Ingenia IFU, so no reuse here)
Node title (original): TMJ holder ID: 27021691697644171-1

Affix: add to (all Best systems, especiall all Ingenia variants, Status: Released
except MR5300
Philips

TMJ holder 1
Coil holder to be used for TMJ, orbit or
carotid examinations with the dS Flex
and the dS Microscopy coils.
End fragment title: TMJ holder
3.4.2 Arm Board

Status: Released
The use of contrast agent is normally based on first non-contrast images. When applying
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

contrast agent, the arm board can be used as an aid for convenient injection needle insertion.
The arm boad can be used:
• with almost every coil.
• on every system.
• in combination with the trolley.
Workflow
► Move the patient partially out of the magnet. Keep the tabletop partly within the bore to
maintain the same off-center positioning.
► Place the arm board with its top corner under the shoulder of the patient.
► Push the arm board further under the body of the patient. The patient’s body weight will fix
the arm board and provide stability for insertion of the infusion needle.
► Insert the infusion needle and connect the infusion lines.
► Remove the arm board and return the patient to the scan plane.
NOTICE
Ensure that no part of the patient's body, hair, clothing, cables or infusion lines can get caught
by any part of the equipment while returning the patient into the magnet bore.
► Continue the examination with administration of contrast agent.

Philips

Fig. 91: Arm board and arm board n use.
3.4.3 Pediatric Positioning Aids

Status: Released
3.4.3.1 Pediatric Package

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
The Pediatric package facilitates pediatric examinations. It consists of

Node title (original): ped pack components - for all countries ID: 9007256032051083
except China Status: Released
Affix: non China
• a cradle, with separate supports;

The cradle allows preparation of the child away from the magnet. It is compatible with the
SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac coil.
• a soft, thick mattress (elevation mattress);
The mattress can be used for easier, more comfortable positioning of the child in the
magnet as well as better movement into the isocenter (in AP direction).
• a PPU with different sensors for premature babies, new borns and pediatric patients (and
for adults).
• a pediatric knee support.
End fragment title: ped pack components - for all countries except China
Node title (original): ped pack components - for China ID: 9007256032052619
• a cradle, with separate supports;

The cradle allows preparation of the child away from the magnet.
• a soft, thick mattress (elevation mattress);
The mattress can be used for easier, more comfortable positioning of the child in the
magnet as well as better movement into the isocenter (in AP direction).
• a PPU with different sensors for premature babies, new borns and pediatric patients (and
for adults).
Philips

• a pediatric knee support.

End fragment title: ped pack components - for China
Fig. 92: Pediatric Package. From left to right: Baby on the cradle. Pediatric knee support. PPU with different sensors
on the cradle.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 93: Left: Elevation mattress. Right: Pediatric patient on elevation mattress for better isocenter-positioning in AP-
direction.
3.4.3.2 Acoustic Hood

Status: Released
Fig. 94: Left: Acoustic hood Right: Acoustic hood with coil in isocenter
Node title (original): acoustic hood purpose - for all countries ID: 9007256032085899
except China Status: Released
Affix: non China
Philips

The acoustic hood is designed to be used with the SENSE Pediatric Head Spine coil and the
SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac coil and their mattresses. It will provide good acoustic noise
damping for vulnerable neonatal patients requiring MR examinations.
End fragment title: acoustic hood purpose - for all countries except China
Node title (original): acoustic hood purpose - for China ID: 9007256032087435
The acoustic hood will provide good acoustic noise damping for vulnerable neonatal patients
requiring MR examinations.
End fragment title: acoustic hood purpose - for China
Many premature patients are scanned while their acoustic sensory systems are still in
development and should be protected. Very small children will not always tolerate a headset.
Other positioning aids or auxiliaries, such as Mini-Muffs provide some noise damping (~7dB).
The Acoustic Hood will provide noise damping of 12 - 14dB.
NOTICE
The acoustic hood is not designed for use with the SENSE Head Coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
Do not block the flow of air through the bore, around the coil and the patient when the
acoustic hood is used. Free convection is necessary in order for the coil to work at the
specified ambient temperature.
NOTICE
Patient monitoring is advised.
NOTICE
Use Earplugs - the acoustic hood provides additional protection.
NOTICE
Place the hood over the patient and coil before moving the patient into the bore.
In this way one will have control over peripheral equipment, cables, tubes and lines.
NOTICE
If an adjustment is made to the position of the acoustic hood, always pull it straight watching
carefully that cables, tubes and lines are not affected by the movement.
Philips

NOTICE
Do not sterilize or disinfect the hood.
The hood is water resistant but cannot be sterilized or disinfected. If it becomes very dirty we
advise that a new one be purchased.
3.4.4 MobiFlex Feet Immobilizer

Status: Released
A special feet immobilizer is delivered. It has two functions:

• to ensure patient immobilization (to obtain good subtraction images)
• to reduce venous enhancement by positioning the lower legs higher than the upper legs
and increasing flow to the capillary bed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 95: MobiFlex feet immobilizer.
3.5 Positioning Aids

This chapter shows the positioning aids that are delivered with your system: the basic set and
the optional positioning aids. For most of them, application examples are given and their
purpose is explained.
Node title (original): Positioning aids NOT made with natural ID: 87955069963-2
Rubber Status: Released Philips

NOTICE
Philips' positioning aids are not made with natural rubber.
End fragment title: Positioning aids NOT made with natural Rubber
3.5.1 Basic Set

Affix: for all Ingenia systems, with slight differences though -> ID: 54043201992043915
see fragments Status: Released
Node title (original): 01-Mattresses ID: 27021670068469003

Status: Released
Mattresses
Node title (original): 3 different types of mattresses are ID: 9007317845446283-1
available Status: Released
Three different types of mattresses are available:

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Item Quantity
Long Mattress 2
Short Mattress 2
T-Shape Mattress 1
• Long
mattress
(LM)
• Short
mattress
(SM)
• T-shape
mattress
(TM)
End fragment title: 3 different types of mattresses are available
Node title (original): Examples of how to place mattresses ID: 9007317845442955-1

Affix: only for Ingenia family with dStream Interface (as such Status: Released
not for MR5300)
They can be positioned in different ways depending on the type of examination.

Philips

Examples with the Base (B) and

the d-Stream interface (d) of how
to place the long mattress (LM),
the short mattress (SM) and the
T-shape mattress (TM) on the
tabletop.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Examples of how to place mattresses
End fragment title: 01-Mattresses
Node title (original): 02-Comfort Plus pack (comfort ID: 36028869323211019

Mattresses) Status: Released
Comfort Plus pack

The Comfort Plus pack is a set of memory foam mattresses for full table coverage.
Node title (original): 3 different types of mattresses are ID: 9007317845446283-2
available Status: Released
Three different types of mattresses are available:

Item Quantity
Long Mattress 2
Short Mattress 2
T-Shape Mattress 1
End fragment title: 3 different types of mattresses are available
Philips

Node title (original): Examples of how to place mattresses ID: 9007317845442955-2

Affix: only for Ingenia family with dStream Interface (as such Status: Released
not for MR5300)
They can be positioned in different ways depending on the type of examination.

Examples with the Base (B) and
the d-Stream interface (d) of how
to place the long mattress (LM),
the short mattress (SM) and the
T-shape mattress (TM) on the
tabletop.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: Examples of how to place mattresses

End fragment title: 02-Comfort Plus pack (comfort Mattresses)
Node title (original): Comfort mattress partner - for MR5300 ID: 9007317703737227
Comfort mattress partner

Comfort mattress partner 2

Sleeve around comfort mattress
• To be used for all examinations.
• Allows to safely route cables of
coils, nurse call and headset.
End fragment title: Comfort mattress partner - for MR5300 only
Node title (original): 03-dS Base coil mattress (NVC stability ID: 36028869444838027
pad) Status: Released
Philips

NVC stability pad

NVC Stability pad and NVC stability 1

pad - thin
Pad to aid in positioning
• for all types of head and spine
examinations with the dS Base
coil.
• for all types of examination with
the TMJ holder.
End fragment title: 03-dS Base coil mattress (NVC stability pad)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): TMJ holder ID: 27021691697644171-2
Affix: add to (all Best systems, especiall all Ingenia variants, Status: Released
except MR5300
Philips

TMJ holder 1
Coil holder to be used for TMJ, orbit or
carotid examinations with the dS Flex
and the dS Microscopy coils.
End fragment title: TMJ holder
Sandbags and wedges

Sandbag 3.6 kg 2
MR Safe non-magnetic artifact-free
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
sandbags of different weights to aid in

patient positioning. Strong, durable and
sealed to prevent leakage. Stain-
resistant coating.
Wedges 30° 2
Wedge 15° 2
Wedges of different shapes to aid in
patient positioning. Stain-resistant
coating.
Foam Wedges 6
Foam wedges in different sizes to aid in
patient positioning.
Straps
Node title (original): Straps for Ingenia family except MR5300 ID: 9007317701549707
Status: Released
Philips

Extremity Strap, medium 2

Extremity Strap, large 3
To strap around an extremity in order
to fix e.g. a coil.
Head/Orbit Strap 2
To strap around the head in order to fix
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

e.g. a coil.
Shoulder/Hip Strap 3
To strap around the shoulder or hips in
order to fix e.g. a coil.
Soft Body Strap 1

To slide into the grooves of the
tabletop on both sides and strap above
the body in order to fix e.g. a coil.
End fragment title: Straps for Ingenia family except MR5300
Node title (original): Straps for MR5300 (different images, and ID: 9007317702198667
one more strap: immobilization strap) Status: Released
Philips

Extremity Strap, medium 2

Extremity Strap, large 3
To strap around an extremity in order
to fix e.g. a coil.
Head/Orbit Strap 2
To strap around the head in order to fix
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
e.g. a coil.
Shoulder/Hip Strap 3
To strap around the shoulder or hips in
order to fix e.g. a coil.
Philips

Soft Body Strap 1

To slide into the grooves of the
tabletop on both sides and strap above
the body in order to fix e.g. a coil.
Immobilization Strap 1
To immobilize the patient and reduce
breathing artifacts, and to fix the
respiratory belt.
End fragment title: Straps for MR5300 (different images, and one more strap: immobilization strap)
Passive Headset and Nurse Call
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Refer to the 'Instructions for Use' chapter 'Safety' and 'System Overview' for full information on
headset and nurse call.
Node title (original): Headset and Nurse call for Ingenia family ID: 9007317702348427
except MR5300 Status: Released
Passive Headset 1
To provide hearing protection for the
patient.
Nurse Call 1
To allow for communication between
the patient and the operator at all
times.
Extended Nurse Call 1

To allow for feet-first prone imaging
with breast solutions.
End fragment title: Headset and Nurse call for Ingenia family except MR5300
Node title (original): Headset and Nurse call for MR5300 ID: 9007317702349451
Philips
Status: Released

Passive Headset 1
To provide hearing protection for the
patient.
Nurse Call 1
To allow for communication between
the patient and the operator at all
times.
Extended Nurse Call 1

To allow for feet-first prone imaging
with breast solutions.
End fragment title: Headset and Nurse call for MR5300

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): nurse call clip usage - Ingenia family ID: 9007271021969163-1
Philips

Correct usage with cable clips

(indicated by arrows)

Wrong cable placement:

1. Cable is not fixed with cable
clips and hangs alongside
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

the patient support.
2. The nurse call is plugged in
at the wrong side. It should
always be plugged in at the
feet side.
End fragment title: nurse call clip usage - Ingenia family except MR5300
Supports
Node title (original): Supports - for Ingenia family except ID: 9007317702587787
Philips

Knee Support 1
To support the lower extremities while
maintaining hip flexion, and to help
relieve lower back stress and pain.
Stain-resistant coating.
Head- / Leg Support 1

To extend the tabletop as head or leg
support for very tall patients. Stain-
resistant coating.
Arm Support 2
To ensure secure hand and arm
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
positioning during table movement.
End fragment title: Supports - for Ingenia family except MR5300
Node title (original): Supports - for MR5300 (new images) ID: 9007317702591755
Status: Released
Philips

Knee Support 1
To support the lower extremities while
maintaining hip flexion, and to help
relieve lower back stress and pain.
Head- / Leg Support 1

To extend the tabletop as head or leg
support for very tall patients. Stain-
resistant coating.
Arm Support 2
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Supports - for MR5300 (new images)
Node title (original): Adaptive connector (MR5300 only) ID: 9007317874881035

Status: Released
Connectors
Adaptive Connector 1
Required to connect
dedicated coils (for
example dS Breast 7ch coil)
End fragment title: Adaptive connector (MR5300 only)
3.5.2 Pediatric Package

Affix: Ingenia family except MR5300 ID: 36028803482653963
Philips

Baby support for the dS 1

HeadNeckSpine coil solution
To safely position babies on Base coil
and tabletop.
Pediatric strap, medium and large 2 each
Anterior coil frame 1

To safely position the Anterior coil for
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
pediatric examinations.
Pediatric knee support 1
Child elevation mattress 1
Comfort pad 1
Philips

3.5.3 Infusion supports

Affix: For Ingenia family except for MR5300 ID: 45036002737978379
Arm Board 2
The use of contrast agent is normally based on non-contrast images. When contrast agent is
necessary, the arm board can be used as an aid for convenient injection needle insertion.
The arm board can be used with almost every coil and in combination with the trolley.
Workflow
► Move the patient partially out of the magnet. Keep the tabletop partly in the bore to
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

maintain the same off-center positioning.
► Place the arm board with its top corner under the shoulder of the patient.
► Push the arm board further under the body of the patient. The patient’s body weight will fix
the arm board in place and provide stability for insertion of the infusion needle.
► Insert the infusion needle and connect the infusion lines.
► Remove the arm board and return the patient to scan plane.
► Continue the examination with the administration of contrast agent.
Node title (original): 24291 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PH.04, ID: 45036002697964939-2
HAZ-PS.133.mira.4) Status: Released
Affix: Ingenia Optimus (equivalent to PS.55.2)
Philips

WARNING
Check patient, patient extremities, clothing, equipment and positioning aids. Guide cables
and intravenous lines.
End fragment title: 24291 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PH.04, HAZ-PS.133.mira.4)
3.5.4 Angiography Package

Affix: for all systems, but only Feet immobilizer for MR5300 ID: 27021604228067467
Node title (original): All items for Ingenia family except MR5300 ID: 118449108619
Status: Released
Feet Immobilizer 1
To ensure patient immobilization (to
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
obtain good subtraction images)

To reduce venous enhancement by
positioning the lower legs higher than
the upper legs and increasing flow to
the capillary bed.
Pediatric Knee Support 1

To support the lower extremities in
examinations of the peripheral vessels.
Philips

Anterior Coil Frame 1

To safely position the Anterior coil for
angiographic examinations.
Arm Board 2
End fragment title: All items for Ingenia family except MR5300
Node title (original): Feet immobilzer for MR5300 ID: 118449433739

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Feet Immobilizer 1
To ensure patient immobilization (to
obtain good subtraction images)
To reduce venous enhancement by
positioning the lower legs higher than
the upper legs and increasing flow to
the capillary bed.
End fragment title: Feet immobilzer for MR5300
3.5.5 FlexTrak
Status: Released
Philips
The FlexTrak patient transportation system is optional. More information, see .

Mattresses
The trolley mattresses are the same as described in the chapter “Basic Set” on page 367 with
the exception of the Head/Leg support.
Drip stand
Drip stand 1 To hang up infusion bottles or similar

equipment.
Soft body strap with holder

The soft body strap is the same as in described in the chapter “Basic Set” on page 367.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.5.6 FlexTilt
Affix: Ingenia family except MR5300 and Optimus ID: 27021604228148363
FlexTilt is a tilting device which can be used to position the Base coil (with or without Head or
HeadNeck top coil) in an angle. This is especially helpful for patients who cannot comfortably lie
flat with their head in the Base coil.
Fig. 96: Left: FlexTilt device on lowest level. Right: FlexTilt device on different levels.
Philips

Fig. 97: Base coil and FlexTilt. Left: Lowest level. Right: Highest level.
Recommended Use
FlexTilt is especially designed for the following situations:
Kyphotic spine: These patients are unable to put their head on the head cushion of the Base
coil. By tilting the coil, the patient is able to lie in the magnet bore for any examination.
Claustrophobic patients: FlexTilt is convenient for patients with claustrophobia because FlexTilt
enables the patients to look more forward into open space.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Serious illness: Patients who are seriously ill can suffer from swallowing issues. Tilting the coil
might help to overcome this problem.
Node title (original): FlexTilt workflow ID: 9007205718734347
Status: Released
Workflow
► Place the FlexTilt device between the Base coil and the tabletop.
► Position the patient on the tabletop with the head in the Base coil.
► Tilt the tilting device to an angle convenient for the patient.
► Optional: Depending on the type of examination, attach the Head or the HeadNeck top coil
to the Base coil.
Fig. 98: Examples of positioning with FlexTilt from lowest level (1) to highest level (3).
Philips

Fig. 99: Examination on the highest tilting level with a top coil attached: HeadNeck top coil (left) or Head top coil
(right) .
End fragment title: FlexTilt workflow
3.5.7 Breast Pads

Affix: for all systems, but: different sets for Ingenia family AND ID: 27021604228362635
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): Ingenia family except MR5300 ID: 118449440523

Status: Released
The breast pads are designed for ease of use in breast imaging. They can be used with the dS
Breast 16ch and the dS Breast 7ch coil.
Fig. 100: Setup for a breast examination with the breast pads and the dS Breast 16ch coil.
Philips

Number Item Photo Description/Purpose
1 and 2 Head/Arm support (1 - The shape of the mattress facilitates

Arm support, 2 - Head the examination setup:
support) • It is to be positioned at the rear
end of the tabletop.
• It determines the position of the
breast coil on the tabletop.
• The elevated border is meant to
serve as arm support.
3 Cover pad for the breast The breast cover pad is designed for
coil maximum patient comfort.
• There is no padding between the
two breasts in order to reduce the
pressure on the sternum.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4 Ramp with velcro on the The ramp is designed for maximum
bottom (left: top view, patient comfort.
right: bottom view) • The velcros on the underside of
the ramp allow easy combination
of the ramp with the leg cushion.
5 Ramp extension with The ramp extension is designed for

recess for the cables maximum patient comfort.
• The velcros on the cushion are
meant for easy combination of the
ramp extension with the ramp.
• Further the ramp extension covers
the coil cable.
End fragment title: Ingenia family except MR5300
Node title (original): Breast pads and connectors X ID: 117993914763-2

Status: Released
Philips
Breast Pads and Connectors

Item Photo Use
Cover pad for the Breast 7ch coil Designed for patient comfort.
• There is no padding between the two
breasts in order to reduce the pressure
on the sternum.
Head support Height adjustable for patient comfort.
Ramp pad with velcro on the bottom Designed for patient comfort.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Lower leg pad with velcro on the bottom Designed for patient comfort.
Philips

Item Photo Use
Head support pad Designed for patient comfort.

• To be placed around the head support.
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 3/9/2021 Designed for patient comfort.

8:24:01 AM: part of the product?}Chest • To be placed underneath the patient's
support pad chest.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Breast pads and connectors X
3.5.8 Coil Caddy

Affix: for all Ingenia systems, but slight changes text for ID: 27021604228436363
The Coil Caddy can be used to store the coils and positioning aids.
Node title (original): for Ingenia family except for MR5300 ID: 118449097867
Status: Released
Philips

Coil Caddy with:

1. Shelf space for Head top and Head/Neck top coils.
2. Shelves for dS Base coil.
3. dStream interface.
4. Side shelf for the Anterior coil.
5. Drip stand.
6. Drawer for positioning aids.
Coil Caddy with:

1. Shelf space for Head top and Head/Neck top coils.
2. Shelves for dS Base coil.
3. Shelf for dS interface.
4. Side shelf for the dS TorsoCardiac coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
5. Drip stand.
6. Drawer for positioning aids.
End fragment title: for Ingenia family except for MR5300
3.5.9 Acoustic Hood

The Acoustic Hood is designed to be used for pediatric imaging with:

• the Posterior coil
• the Base coil (with or without Head or HeadNeck top coil)
• the Anterior coil, together with the pediatric support
• dS Ped HeadSpine 8ch coil
• dS Ped TorsoCardiac 8ch coil
Node title (original): 3.0T ID: 130472262155
Status: NotReleased
Philips

• or the dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil

End fragment title: 3.0T
It will provide good acoustic noise damping for vulnerable neonatal and pediatric patients
requiring MR examinations.
Fig. 101: Acoustic Hood.
MR scans can be very loud although the level of noise is different for different types of scan
methods. Technological developments and new techniques are becoming widely utilized for
pediatric patients. The acoustic sensory system degrades slowly after birth. Many premature
patients are scanned while their acoustic sensory systems are still in development and should
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

be protected. Very small children will not always tolerate a headset. Other accessories, such as
Mini-Muffs provide some noise damping (~7dB). The Acoustic Hood will provide additional
noise damping of around 8 dB.
Safety
Node title (original): HG - Acoustic Hood - Use earplugs ID: 9007206293913483
Status: Released
NOTICE
Use earplugs.
When the Acoustic Hood is positioned correctly, it provides additional noise damping of
around 8 dB.
End fragment title: HG - Acoustic Hood - Use earplugs
Node title (original): 24266 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-AX.02 ID: 9007205715686539

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24266
Philips

WARNING
Verify that the Acoustic Hood is always at least 10 cm away from the ventilation outlet.
Do not block the flow of air through the bore and around the patient when the Acoustic
Hood is used.
End fragment title: 24266 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-AX.02
NOTICE
Patient monitoring is advised.
NOTICE
Place the Acoustic Hood over the patient and coil before moving the patient into the bore.
In this way one will have control over peripheral equipment, cables, tubes and lines.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
If an adjustment is made to the position of the Acoustic Hood, always pull it straight watching
carefully that cables, tubes and lines are not affected by the movement.
NOTICE
Do not sterilize or disinfect the hood.
Cleanabilty is limited because of the sound absorption characteristics of the Acoustic Hood.
The Acoustic Hood is water repellent, but cannot be sterilized or disinfected. If it becomes
very dirty we advise that a new one be purchased.
Patient Positioning
► Complete positioning of the patient.
For most of the examinations, proceed as follows:
• Optional: Depending on the size of the pediatric patient, place the pediatric support of
the dS HeadNeckSpine coil solution on the tabletop.
• Position the pediatric patient on the tabletop (or on the pediatric support).
• Attach the HeadNeck top coil to the Base coil.
• Place the anterior coil frame above the patient's body and position the Anterior coil on
it.
Philips

• Connect the Anterior coil to the FlexConnect socket.
Fig. 102: 1: Pediatric patient on the pediatric support. 2: The HeadNeck top coil is attached to the Base coil. 3: The
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Anterior coil is positioned on top of the anterior coil frame. 4: The Acoustic Hood is placed in the bore too.
Fig. 103: Acoustic Hood (1) with Anterior coil (2) on the anterior coil frame (3), Base (5) with HeadNeck top coil (4)
and pediatric support (6).
► Move to the light visor selection point. First use the light visor.
► Then position the Acoustic Hood over the coil and the patient.
► Ensure that all lines and peripheral equipment are correctly positioned.
Node title (original): 24265 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-AX.01 ID: 27021604395376523
Status: Released
WARNING
Check that the hood is correctly positioned by positioning the step in the correct place.
This means that the Acoustic Hood extends over the end of the tabletop – leaving the head
of the baby near the center of the Acoustic Hood, thus providing good acoustic protection.
This position will be the same for both head and body scans of a baby.
Philips

Fig. 104: Acoustic Hood on the tabletop where 'S' indicates the step and 'O' the part extending over the tabletop.
End fragment title: 24265 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-AX.01
► Travel to isocentre.
Guide the Acoustic Hood if necessary during travel to isocentre.
Patient Monitoring during the Examination

► For head examinations of a baby, the Acoustic hood will not interfere with the ventilation
in the bore.
However it is advised to monitor the temperature of the patient during scanning.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► For body or spine scans of a baby, the Acoustic Hood can be moved to cover the ventilation
exits. In this case it is advised to push the Acoustic Hood back into the bore so that there is
a 10cm gap between the ventilation exit and the Acoustic Hood.
Please also note that it is always important to monitor the temperature of the baby and to
use low SAR.
After the Examination

► When the examination is complete, first remove the Acoustic Hood and then lower the
patient support.
This is important as the Acoustic Hood extends over the end of the tabletop.
Storage of the Acoustic Hood

When not in use, store the Acoustic Hood upright so that the shape is maintained.
Lifetime of the Acoustic Hood
NOTICE
Sound absorbing properties of the Acoustic Hood are guaranteed over a lifetime of 3-5 years
when stored upright.
Philips

3.5.10 Head-and-Arm Support

Node title (original): Intro arms-up device ID: 9007245951106955

Status: Released
The head-and-arm support facilitates comfortable positioning of the arms upwards (above the
head).
End fragment title: Intro arms-up device
Node title (original): Components ID: 9007245951569419

Status: Released
Components
Arm support Head support Combined
(Rigid frame with detachable soft
padding)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Components
Node title (original): Applications arms-up device ID: 9007245870812555

Status: Released
Applications
• Body examinations with the arms up in head-first or feet-first patient position.
End fragment title: Applications arms-up device
Node title (original): Benefits arms-up device ID: 9007245870822155

Status: Released
Benefits of using the head-and-arm support for body examinations

With the arms positioned above the head, fold-over artifacts are prevented in body
examinations. This allows for a narrowed acquisition volume and RL fold-over direction instead
of AP. Compared to an examination with the arms at the side, the head-and-arm support allows
the usage of much higher dS-SENSE factors in RL direction. The higher dS-SENSE factors provide
the benefits:
• shorter breath-hold durations,
• less breath holds needed,
Philips
• improved image quality (less blurring in TSE, less distortion in DWI),

• improved image sharpness,

• comfortable positioning of the arms.
End fragment title: Benefits arms-up device
Node title (original): Use ID: 9007245870815627

Status: Released
Use
You can use the head-and-arm support with the dS Torso and the dS TotalSpine coil solution.
End fragment title: Use
3.5.10.1 Positioning the patient with the head-and-arm support

Status: Released
⊳ For feet-first and head-first positioning:

► Remove the dStream interface from the tabletop.
► Put the head support at the outermost end of the tabletop:
• for head-first examinations at the magnet end of the tabletop.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• for feet-first examinations at the distal end of the tabletop.

► Place the arm support around the head support.
► Position the patient on the tabletop with the arms upwards on the arm support.
Philips

Your MRI System Trolleys
► Proceed as usual with patient positioning for body examinations.

► When you move the patient to the isocenter, carefully check that the patients' arms do not
touch the bore.
3.6 Trolleys
3.6.1 FlexTrak patient transportation system and trolleys

Status: Released
The FlexTrak allows patient preparation for an examination while the previous patient is being
scanned. Positioning of coils, positioning aids, monitoring and triggering equipment can be
done outside the examination room.
For generic safety information, cautions and warnings refer to chapter “Safety” on page 396.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

3.6.1.1 Safety
Status: Released
Node title (original): 67773 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PS. ID: 36028858014482059-1

69.1, HAZ-PS.70.1) Status: Released
Node title (original): International/Global ID: 36028858014632971-1

Affix: Achieva Optimus Ingenia Multiva Status: Released
Philips

Trolleys Your MRI System
WARNING
Tilted tabletop due to incompatible patient transportation system.
Risk of patient falling off tabletop and serious injury.
• Only use the patient transport system intended for your system.
• On Achieva/Multiva systems: only use the Achieva/Multiva trolleys.
• On digital MR systems: only use the FlexTrak.
FlexTrak systems and compatible tabletops are labeled with FlexTrak Label.
End fragment title: International/Global
Node title (original): USA version without Multiva ID: 18014460630983563-1

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
WARNING
• On Achieva systems: only use the Achieva trolleys.
End fragment title: USA version without Multiva

End fragment title: 67773 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PS.69.1, HAZ-PS.70.1)
FlexTrak
The following warnings apply to the use of the FlexTrak and HA FlexTrak (Height Adjustable)
patient transport systems.
General
Philips

Node title (original): 60152 SYS.Label.IFU.Trolley.MassIngenia ID: 54043202371715979

ISO/IEC: IEC Ed3
Safe working load

The safe working load for the tabletop using the FlexTrak is 250 kg. This is the total weight of
patient, coils and positioning aids.
The maximum total mass of the FlexTrak is:
• Fixed height version: 360 kg.
• Variable height version (VH): 390 kg.
End fragment title: 60152 SYS.Label.IFU.Trolley.MassIngenia

WARNING
Confirm that the tabletop is locked securely on the FlexTrak before the patient is moved,
positioned or transported.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): CPR ID: 9007287339921547

Status: Released

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24328
WARNING
Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) on FlexTrak may not be effective.
Risk of death.
• Only perform CPR on a patient while the CPR performer stands next to the trolley.
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 7/22/2020 5:38:04 PM: complete text is ONE PRQ entry now, ALM
80926. Needs to be cleaned up with next release.}
When the caregiver climbs on the FlexTrak to perform CPR, the risks are:
• The tabletop may bend too much or break due to the applied forces.
• The tabletop may fall off the FlexTrak.
Philips

These effects can cause the CPR to be unsuccessful, cause serious injury or death.
End fragment title: CPR
Node title (original): 81307 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PS.39, ID: 36028859093523339

HAZ-PS.64.2, HAZ-PS.64.3, HAZ-PS.65.2, HAZ-PS.71)_FlexTrak Status: Released
Affix: FlexTrak_I
ISO/IEC: 24313
WARNING
Patient falling off the Fixed Height FlexTrak or HA FlexTrak
Risk of serious patient injury.
• Park the FlexTrak with the non side-rail side to the wall and apply the wheel locks when a
patient is left unattended on the FlexTrak.
For the HA FlexTrak with side rails on two sides: Park the FlexTrak with both side rails up
and apply the wheel locks when a patient is left unattended on the FlexTrak.
• Apply the wheel locks before a patient is moved to the tabletop.
• Apply the wheel locks when the FlexTrak is parked.
• Put the side rail(s) up once the patient is positioned on the tabletop.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Avoid fast movement, especially around corners.

• Fixate the patient if necessary.
End fragment title: 81307 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PS.39, HAZ-PS.64.2, HAZ-PS.64.3, HAZ-PS.65.2, HAZ-PS.71)_FlexTrak
Node title (original): HG - Do not move the FlexTrak by means ID: 9007206315178123
of the tabletop Status: Released
WARNING
Do not move the FlexTrak by means of the tabletop. Use the handle bar or the horizontal
support.
End fragment title: HG - Do not move the FlexTrak by means of the tabletop
Node title (original): 62879 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS. ID: 9007254810080011-1

Implemented Measure: HAZ-PS.195

Philips

WARNING
Fingers, hands, or other extremities of the patient get stuck or hit.
• Watch patient extremities during transfer onto the tabletop.
• Make sure that patient extremities remain on the tabletop during transportation and
docking to the patient support.
• Use the arm supports or fixate the patient and extremities if necessary (for example for
sedated patients).
Examination room
Node title (original): 80930 SYS.Label.IFU.HAZ-MA.02.2 - ID: 18014405569943179
FerroMagnetic_Warning Status: Released
WARNING
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Verify that there are no ferromagnetic objects present on the tabletop before entering the
examination room.
Such objects will be attracted by the magnet and may lead to serious or fatal injury of the
patient or personnel and may cause system malfunctions.
End fragment title: 80930 SYS.Label.IFU.HAZ-MA.02.2 - FerroMagnetic_Warning

SYS.Label.IFU.HangingCables_Notice Status: Released
NOTICE
Verify that no cables and connectors are hanging down from the tabletop when it is taken
over from the patient support onto the FlexTrak or vice versa.
This could lead to damage.
End fragment title: 80931 SYS.Label.IFU.HangingCables_Notice

SYS.Label.IFU.FlexTrakDocking_Notice Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
FlexTrak is adjusted for docking to only one side of the patient support.
Please contact Philips Customer Service if you want to change the docking side.
End fragment title: 80932 SYS.Label.IFU.FlexTrakDocking_Notice
3.6.1.2 Overview FlexTrak

Status: Released
The FlexTrak is the dedicated patient transportation system for your MR system. There is a
height adjustable (HA) and a fixed height (FH) version available.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 105: F lexTrak components, warning signs and labels. by example of the height adjustable version.
No./Label Description FlexTrak versions
1 Side rail. HA FlexTrak.
2 Tabletop. All.
3 Handle bar. All.
4 Bumper. HA FlexTrak.
4 Foot lever for height adjustment. HA FlexTrak.
5 Swivel wheel lock pedal. All.
6 Bumping blocks. All.

Philips

No./Label Description FlexTrak versions
Label: FlexTrak. All.

Label also present on matching patient support.
Label: MR Safe All.
Label: Maximum working load. All.
Warning label: danger of clamping. HA FlexTrak.
Label: maximum height of the FlexTrak. HA FlexTrak.
Label: swivel wheel pedal positions. All.
Label: swivel wheel pedal positions. All.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Label: Mandatory action; read manual. HA FlexTrak.
3.6.1.3 Operation
Status: Released
Swivel wheels
The swivel wheels can be locked with the foot operated pedals. Both wheels on one end are
locked simultaneously.
Unlock
Fig. 106: Unlock
Set the pedal in horizontal position:

• The wheel turns freely.
Philips

• The swivel turns freely.

Use unlocked wheels for transport of the FlexTrak.
Swivel lock
Fig. 107: Swivel lock
Press the pedal down towards the wheel:

• The wheel turns freely.
• The swivel will automatically lock when the swivel wheel is turned in longitudinal direction.
Use the swivel lock on one axis to improve manoeuverability during transport of the FlexTrak.
Wheel lock
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 108: Wheel lock
Press the pedal down away from wheel:

• The wheel is locked.
• The swivel is locked.
Lock all wheels:
• Before positioning a patient on the tabletop.
• In park position of the FlexTrak.
• When the FlexTrak is docked at the patient support.
Philips

Height adjustment (HA FlexTrak only)
Fig. 109: Foot lever
• Increase the HA FlexTrak height by operating the foot lever repeatedly downwards.
• Decrease the HA FlexTrak height by lifting the lever carefully but completely up with the top
of your foot until the desired height has been reached.
NOTICE
Decrease the FlexTrak height gently when a patient is on the tabletop.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Move the FlexTrak to its highest position to correct a possible height difference on each side
of the FlexTrak.
In some cases the FlexTrak height can differ causing a mild decline of the tabletop. This can be
corrected by moving the FlexTrak to its highest position.
Side rail (HA FlexTrak only)
Fig. 110: Fold down
Fold down
• Pull the side rail up, out of its locking position.
• Fold the side rail carefully down.
Philips

CAUTION
Do not let the side rail fall down.
Fold up
• Fold up the side rail until it snaps into its locking position.
WARNING
Verify that nothing gets clamped while folding the side rail up, e.g. fingers and infusion lines.
Docking and undocking
CAUTION
Before docking and taking over the tabletop by and from the patient support, make sure to
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
set the HA FlexTrak in its highest position by operating the foot levers.
The HA FlexTrak must be at its maximum height to avoid possible damage. Over hours the
trolley height may show a slight decrease.
Docking
► Lower the patient support to its lowest position.
► HA FlexTrak:
increase the FlexTrak height to its maximum: the maximum height indication label is
completely visible.
► Unlock the swivel wheels of the FlexTrak and position it at the patient support.
Fig. 111: Bumping blocks
► Dock the FlexTrak sideways to the patient support. Both bumping blocks of the FlexTrak
must touch the bumping blocks of the patient support.
► Apply the wheel locks.
Philips

Your MRI System Trolley
► Move the patient support up until the tabletop is taken over by the patient support.
The tabletop is automatically released from the FlexTrak and engages to the patient
support.
NOTICE
The FlexTrak can remain at the patient support while scanning. Verify that the FlexTrak stays
at its maximum height and the side rail is folded down.
Undocking
► Move the patient support up to its maximum position.
► HA FlexTrak:
increase the FlexTrak height to its maximum: the maximum height indication label is
completely visible.
► Unlock the swivel wheels of the FlexTrak and position it at the patient support.
► Dock the FlexTrak sideways to the patient support.
Both bumping blocks of the FlexTrak must touch the bumping blocks of the patient support.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Apply the wheel locks.
► Lower the patient support until the tabletop is released and engaged to the FlexTrak.
► Lower the patient support completely.
► Unlock the wheels and remove the FlexTrak sideways.
3.7 Trolley
The trolley allows patient preparation for an examination while the previous patient is being
For more information, see Using the Trolley in Preparing the Exam.
3.8 Physiology Equipment

Affix: (Concept - for Your MRI System) ID: 9007314602538635
Node title (original): 0 Intro: Wireless ID: 115347967883

Affix: IFU only Ingenia Multiva Prodiva Ambition Elition Status: Released
Philips

Physiology Equipment Your MRI System
This chapter describes features and components of Wireless Physiology and gives relevant
workflow information.
End fragment title: 0 Intro: Wireless
Node title (original): 0 Intro: Wireless and Wired ID: 115347973515

Affix: IFU only Achieva Optimus Status: Released
This chapter describes features and components of Wireless and Wired Physiology and gives
relevant workflow information. All information in this chapter is relevant for Wireless and
Wired Physiology, unless otherwise mentioned.
End fragment title: 0 Intro: Wireless and Wired
3.8.1 Functional Description

Affix: taxonomies still to be added for relevant MRI system ID: 9007314601889931
Node title (original): Wireless & Wired Physiology (Achieva & ID: 115347504523
Optimus) Status: Released
Affix: Achieva Optimus
• Wireless and Wired Physiology provide synchronization of the MRI sequences with the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
physiology signals.
• The physiology signals are displayed in the Exam Dashboard on the operator's console.
• If correctly used, Wireless and Wired Physiology reduce image artifacts caused by breathing,
pulsatile flow and cardiac motion.
• Wireless and Wired Physiology utilize sensors for
– respiration,
– VCG (VectorCardioGraphy),
– plethysmography (Peripheral Pulse Unit PPU).
End fragment title: Wireless & Wired Physiology (Achieva & Optimus)
Node title (original): Wireless Physiology (Ingenia, Ambition, ID: 9007314602429835

Elition, Prodiva & Multiva) Status: NotReleased
Affix: Ingenia Jaguar Multiva
• Wireless Physiology provides synchronization of the MRI sequences with the physiology
signals.
• The physiology signals are displayed in the Exam Dashboard on the operator's console.
• If correctly used, Wireless Physiology reduces image artifacts caused by breathing, pulsatile
flow and cardiac motion.
• Wireless Physiology utilizes sensors for
– respiration,
– VCG (VectorCardioGraphy),
Philips

Your MRI System Physiology Equipment
– plethysmography (Peripheral Pulse Unit PPU).

End fragment title: Wireless Physiology (Ingenia, Ambition, Elition, Prodiva & Multiva)
3.8.2 Safety
Status: Released
Node title (original): 24297 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PH.29 ID: 9007206010232587-1

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24297
WARNING
Do not use the physiology signals for monitoring or diagnostic purposes.
The physiology signals are distorted when the patient is inside the magnet.
End fragment title: 24297 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PH.29
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

3.8.3 Components Overview
Affix: taxonomies still to be added for relevant MRI system! ID: 115347152779
Node title (original): Components Wired Physiology ID: 27021642859010059

Status: Released
Components of Wired Physiology

Some scanners are still equipped with a Wired Physiology system using wired sensors:
Philips

Item Image
SpO2 grip sensors for PPU Either you have this set of grip sensors: Or this one:
Two different sets are available.
Respiratory belt
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Wired-VCG unit
• possibly with connection for
the respiratory belt;
• configuration-dependent
with a long ECG cable.
Wired-PPU unit (including

connection for the respiratory
belt)
Philips

Item Image
Battery charger
Wired basic triggering unit located in the magnet room (no image)
(wBTU)
End fragment title: Components Wired Physiology
Node title (original): Components Wireless Physiology ID: 27021642858981515

Status: Released
Components of Wireless Physiology

Wireless Physiology consists of the following components:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Item Image
SpO2 grip sensors for PPU Either you have this set of grip sensors: Or this one:
Two different sets are available.
Respiratory belt
Philips

Item Image
Wireless-VCG battery module

• possibly with connection for
the respiratory belt;
• configuration-dependent
with a long ECG cable.
Wireless-PPU battery module

(including connection for the
respiratory belt)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Battery charger
Wireless basic triggering unit located in the magnet room (no image)
(wBTU)
End fragment title: Components Wireless Physiology
3.8.4 Respiratory Belt

Status: Released
Philips

Property Description
Purpose To detect the patient’s breathing through abdominal or chest wall motion
Applications • Respiratory Compensation: to reduce motion artifacts due to breathing

• Visualization of the patient’s breathing
Limitations The respiratory signal cannot be used for monitoring or diagnostic purposes other than
determining the respiration wave for MR imaging
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

3.8.5 VitalEye
Status: Released
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 9/5/2018 8:30:31 AM: only for Ambition and Elition}
The VitalEye is a camera that is used to detect respiratory motion. The camera is located at the
back end of the magnet bore. VitalEye is delivered with additional infrared bore lights for better
lighting conditions.
Philips

Purpose To detect the patient's breathing through abdominal or chest wall motion.
Applications • Respiratory Compensation: to reduce motion artifacts due to breathing

• Visualization of the patient's breathing
Limitations • The respiratory signal can only be used to determine the respiration wave
to synchronize MR scans with.
• The VitalEye only works properly when the line of sight of the camera is not
obstructed.
3.8.6 Peripheral Pulse Sensor

Status: Released
Purpose Cardiac Triggering: Acquisition of imaging data at defined moments in the cardiac cycle. The
trigger signal is derived from changes in capillary blood flow during the cardiac cycle. It is
transmitted via fiber optics.
Applications • Suppression of artifacts caused by flow of blood or CSF in the spine

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Pulse rate monitoring
Limitations May alternatively be used for cardiac imaging or angiography, although there is an inherent
delay from the time of the R-peak until flow change is registered in the finger.
Node title (original): Accuracy ID: 9007244349924747

Status: Released
SpO2 and Pulse Rate Accuracy

Pulse oximetry measurements are statistically distributed.
End fragment title: Accuracy
Node title (original): Components ID: 9007244349951755

Status: Released
Philips

Quick Connect SpO2 MRI Sensor: components and applications
Fig. 112: PPU SpO2 MRI sensor. 1: Sensor cable, 2: Reusable grip sensor Pediatric (P), 3: Reusable grip sensor Adult
(A), 4-7: Disposable grip sensors in different sizes where 4 - Neonatal (N), 5 - Adult (A), 6 - Infant (I), 7 - Pediatric (P).
Depending on the system configuration, different grip sensors may be available. For more information about these
sensors, see the dedicated Instructions for Use.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The sensor cable has two legs, a receiver side (no light when powered) and an emitter side
(illuminates red when powered). Both fiber optic tips of the cable legs are identical in size and
can be snapped into either of the two retainers on the attachments.
The SpO2 attachments for PPU are delivered in two different types and in up to four different
sizes.
Attachment Application Preferred location Alternate locations
Reusable Clip A Adult: more than 40 Any adult finger, preferably index -
kg
Reusable Clip P Pediatric: between Any pediatric or small adult -

10 kg and 50 kg finger, preferably index
Disposable Grip A Adult: more than 40 Any adult finger, preferably index Toe
kg
Disposable Grip P Pediatric: between Any pediatric or small adult Toe

10 kg and 50 kg finger, preferably index
Disposable Grip I Infant: between 5 kg Any infant or small pediatric’s Big toe
and 15 kg finger, preferably index or thumb
Disposable Grip N Neonate: between 1 Any neonate’s foot Hand or wrist

kg and 5 kg
Philips

NOTICE
The patient weights above are given for orientation only. The size of the chosen limb is more
important in determining the attachment type to use.
End fragment title: Components
3.8.7 VCG (VectorCardioGraphy)

Status: Released
3.8.7.1 VCG Functional Description

Status: Released
Purpose Cardiac Triggering: Acquisition of imaging data at defined moments in the cardiac cycle.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Applications • Imaging of the heart at various phases of the cardiac cycle

• Suppression of artifacts caused by heart motion
• Suppression of artifacts caused by flow of blood or CSF
• Imaging arteries with TRANCE
Limitations The VCG signal cannot be used for monitoring or diagnostic purposes.
With VCG, the electrical activity of the heart is modeled as a vector. During the cardiac cycle
this vector changes magnitude and orientation. The vector’s projection on to a plane gives a
spatial plot of the heart’s electrical activity.
By connecting the tips of the vector at different moments loops are generated describing the
different cycles of the electrical activity of the heart: P-, QRS- and T-loop. Thus, using spatial
information of the ECG the QRS-loop can be differentiated from the loops of the artifacts.
Safety
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24297
Philips

WARNING
Do not use the physiology signals for monitoring or diagnostic purposes.
The physiology signals are distorted when the patient is inside the magnet.

SYS.Label.IFU.RechargeableBatteries Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24670
WARNING
Only use the appropriate InvivoMDE™ battery pack with the VCG module.
This battery pack may only be charged with the InvivoMDE™ battery charger.
End fragment title: 24670 SYS.Label.IFU.RechargeableBatteries
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

3.8.7.2 VCG Signal and VCG Calibration
Status: Released
3.8.7.2.1 Factors affecting the VCG signal

Status: Released
For successful cardiac triggering of MR scans, a good VCG signal with a clearly detectable R-
peak is a prerequisite.
However the VCG signal and the calibration of the VCG signal are affected by several factors:
Position of the electrodes and the distance between electrodes

Wrong electrode placement leads to disturbances in the VCG signal.
• Make certain that the electrodes are positioned correctly. See chapter “Connecting VCG to
the patient” on page 819.
Patient respiration
Some trigger loss may occur during inspiration. The severity depends on the position of the
electrodes.
• Make certain that the electrodes are positioned correctly. See chapter “Connecting VCG to
the patient” on page 819.
Philips

Flowing blood and magnetic field

The VCG signal changes in the presence of a static magnetic field, since flowing blood
(especially in the aortic arch) induces voltages that are superimposed on the measured VCG-
signal.
Alterations of the VCG-signal are mainly seen in the baseline and are usually superimposed on
the T-wave. The distortion is referred to as T-wave artifact or the Magneto-hydrodynamic effect
(MHD). The strength of the induced voltages increases with higher field strength, and is more
severe with the patient inside the bore.
• To reduce this artifact, avoid measurement of the VCG in the area of the aortic arch.
Motion
Table motion, as well as patient motion causes the VCG signal to rapidly change. For cardiac
triggered scans, patient motion negatively impacts the reliability of VCG triggering.
• Avoid table motion at all times. Instruct the patient to lie still to avoid motion.
Effects of magnetic field and motion on the VCG signal

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
1 Patient outside the bore. Lying still. Perfect VCG signal.
2 Patient outside the bore. Moving. Disturbed VCG signal.
3 Patient inside the bore. Lying still. Disturbed VCG signal.
4 T-wave artifact (indicated by circle) in VCG. Most likely occuring with the patient inside the
bore.
3.8.7.2.2 VCG calibration

Status: Released
In all scans that make use of VCG, VCG calibration is required to ensure correct triggering.
VCG calibration analyzes the detected ECG-signal to determine the R-peak in the QRS-complex:
A trigger algorithm determines which peak in the detected ECG-signal is marked as R-peak. A
trigger marker is assigned to the signal (and displayed in the Physiology Display) if all criteria of
the trigger algorithm are met.
Philips

Factors affecting the VCG calibration

When the VCG calibration is disturbed, it can happen that trigger markers are assigned to the
incorrect signal or are not assigned at all.
VCG calibration results are affected by the same factors as the VCG itself. For more information,
see chapter “Factors affecting the VCG signal” on page 416.
Methods of VCG calibration

VCG calibration can be performed in two ways:
1. It is recommended to use manual VCG calibration for problem-free cardiac triggering in all
patients.
For more results, see chapter “Manual VCG calibration” on page 419.
2. Continuous VCG calibration is easy to use. It is the default VCG calibration method.
For more information, see chapter “Continuous VCG calibration” on page 418.
3.8.7.2.3 Continuous VCG calibration

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Continuous VCG calibration is designed to automatically determine the R-peak for the purpose
of correct triggering of all scans where VCG is used. Continuous VCG calibration requires no
user interaction. Consequently results cannot be optimized. It is the default VCG calibration.
Alternatively you can use manual calibration. For more information, see chapter “Manual VCG
calibration” on page 419.
Node title (original): main features of continuous VCG ID: 115358318603
calibration Status: Released
What are the main features of continuous VCG calibration?

• It analyzes and calibrates VCG data continuously.
• The VCG calibration data of the 7 seconds prior to the start of each scan is used throughout
the scan.
This leads to a forced delay of 7 seconds for each scan.
• When calibration data is available, trigger markers and the patient's heart rate are
displayed in the Physiology Display panel.
• The disadvantages of continuous VCG calibration are:
– Different VCG calibration results for each scan lead to differences in triggering efficiency
between scans.
– It is not possible to determine the conditions under which VCG calibration is performed.
– You cannot change the trigger threshold. It is always high.
End fragment title: main features of continuous VCG calibration
Node title (original): enabling continuous VCG calibration ID: 115358442507

Philips
Status: Released

Enabling continuous VCG calibration

Continuous VCG calibration automatically takes place when manual VCG calibration is disabled.
► Deselect Manual Calibration in the Physiology Properties window.
End fragment title: enabling continuous VCG calibration
Node title (original): comparison: continuous vs manual VCG ID: 115358566411

Continuous versus manual VCG calibration

Manual VCG calibration Continuous VCG calibration
Calibration duration • single calibration of 15 seconds • continuous calibration: 7

prior to first scan seconds prior to each scan
• valid for all subsequent scans
Triggering efficiency • predictable for all scans • possibly different between scans
User interaction • required • not required
VCG calibration conditions • can be defined • cannot be defined (because it is

fixed)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Location of calibration • recommended: outside bore • always inside bore (last 7

• alternatively: inside bore seconds prior to scan)
Patient instructions • can be given • cannot be given
Trigger threshold • can be modified • cannot be modified

• can be set to high, medium or • is always high
low
Display of trigger markers / heart • only after manual calibration • immediately after 7 seconds of
rate calibration
End fragment title: comparison: continuous vs manual VCG calibration
3.8.7.2.4 Manual VCG calibration

Status: Released
You can either perform manual or continuous VCG calibration. It is recommended to use
manual VCG calibration for smooth cardiac triggering in all patients.
Node title (original): main features of manual VCG calibration ID: 115359663371
Status: Released
What are the main features of manual VCG calibration?

• Manual VCG calibration allows you to determine the conditions under which the VCG
calibration is performed.
Philips

• Manual VCG calibration analyzes 15 seconds of VCG data to ensure accurate detection of R-
peaks in all patients, also in patients at low heart rate or in arrhythmic patients.
• Manual VCG calibration can be initiated at any moment in the workflow. It is recommended
to execute it before moving the patient to the isocenter.
• You start and adjust Manual VCG calibration in the Physiology Properties window.
• You can adjust the trigger threshold during cardiac triggered scans to adjust the sensitivity
for the detection of R-peaks.
• When calibration data is available, trigger markers and the patient's heart rate are
displayed in the Physiology Display panel.
• Calibration data that is collected, is applied to all subsequent scans until
– you initiate a new VCG calibration,
– you recall a previously stored VCG calibration,
– you disable manual calibration.
• Results of manual VCG calibration depend on the tabletop position.
• The VCG calibration results are provided with an indication of Signal Strength (amplitude of
the R-peak in mV) and Trigger Quality (number of false positive and false negative signals).
• All VCG calibration results are reset when you start a new examination.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: main features of manual VCG calibration
Influence of the tabletop position on VCG calibration

The tabletop position affects VCG calibration, leading to different VCG calibration results
depending on the tabletop position:
Icon Tabletop position Description Results stored as
Outside the bore The patient is positioned and ready to Outside bore
recommended be moved to the isocenter.
edge of tabletop < 450 mm in the This is the recommended tabletop
magnet bore position, because flow artifacts,
induced by the presence of the
magnetic field, are minimized.
Inside the bore The patient is positioned at isocenter Inside bore

edge of tabletop > 450 mm in the position.
magnet bore
- Unknown position If patient support is not powered. Inside bore
- no information about tabletop position VCG calibration is not yet performed. No results are stored yet.
The tabletop position is defined relative to the edge of the head end of the tabletop and NOT to
the light visor. This definition allows for a new outside bore calibration during an examination
when moving the patient bed partially out of the bore.
Use of VCG calibration results
Philips

Operator's console Your MRI System
• If both types of calibration results are available, you can select which calibration results are
used to detect R-peaks.
• The type of calibration results used is displayed in the Physiology Properties window and in
the Extended Physiology Display.
• The calibration results are overwritten when you start a new calibration on the same
tabletop position.
3.9 Operator's console

Status: NotReleased
3.9.1 Introduction to the User Interface

Status: NotReleased
The User Interface is designed around the examination workflow.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
This section describes the most important UI elements.
3.9.1.1 General Setup

Status: Released
The User Interface consists of generic main elements that are always on top and of other
elements that vary depending on the current patient task.
Philips

Your MRI System Operator's console
Number Description More information
1 Navigation Bar chapter “Functional Description”

• Always on top on page 424
2 Patient Tasks Bar chapter “Functional Description”

3 Variable content depending on current Patient Task:

• Prepare •
• Plan • chapter “Plan Tab” on page
• Review 897
• Analysis • chapter “Review Tab” on

page 925
• Print
• chapter “Analysis Tab” on
page 1013
• chapter “Print Tab” on page
1162
4 Exam Overview chapter “Functional Description”
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

5 Exam Dashboard chapter “Functional Description”

3.9.1.2 UI Elements
Status: Released
In the user interface, the following UI elements are used:

UI element How to use Example
Tooltip A tooltip provides you with a short

explanation about a UI element.
• To display the tooltip, hover
over a button or another UI
element.
Button A button represents an action you

can perform.
• To perform the action, click the
button once.
Philips

Context menu A context menu offers a set of

choices which are relevant for the
current image and situation.
• To display the context menu,
right-click on an image. Then
select any of the options.
Text field Text fields allow you to enter (and Patient name
edit) texts.
Date field Date fields allow you to pick a date. Date of birth
Checkbox A checkbox allows to select one or

more options of a limited number of
choices. The checkbox is shown as a
square box that is ticked (checked)
when activated.
• To activate the checkbox, click in
the checkbox.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• To deactivate the checkbox, click

again.
Radio button A radio button allows to choose only

one option of a limited number of
choices.
Drop-down list The drop-down list allows to choose

one option from a list. It displays the
current option and a down-arrow
right beside it.
• To open the drop-down list, click
the down arrow.
• To select an option from the
drop-down list, click this option.
Slider A slider allows you to set a value by Movie

moving an indicator, usually
horizontally.
Icon An icon is a symbol that indicates the Planned icon in Exam Overview
status of something. It provides you icon that shows the function of the
with information. mouse
Progress bar A progress bar shows the status of an Progress of the examination
action.
Notification possibly also alert

Philips

Message box A message box displays a message in An alert is displayed which requires
a small window. This message acknowledgement that the message
prompts for a response. has ben read, usually by clicking OK,
or if a decision is needed by clicking
OK or Cancel.
Modal window A modal window is subordinate to an Tabletop is moving. Confirm ...

application's main window. When it SAR messages ... confirm
is active, it disables the main window
but keeps it visible with the modal
window on top. You must interact
with the modal window before you
can return to the main application.
Scroll bar
3.9.2 Navigation Bar

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
3.9.2.1 Functional Description

Affix: Navigation Bar-ready for translation ID: 113867942283
Last Content Modificator: Maethger, Maria Status: Released
Node title (original): Navigation Bar - intro ID: 115201523595

Status: Released
The Navigation Bar is the major navigation component and as such it is always available.
It is composed of informational components and buttons that provide access to generic
functions.
End fragment title: Navigation Bar - intro
• The Navigation Bar gives access to the Patient Dashboard and the Patient Directory.
• The Navigation Bar allows to check the status of the MRI system and of jobs.
• To change your settings, the Navigation Bar provides Settings and Tools.
• Information about the current patient and about the logged in user is displayed.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Node title (original): Table Links Navigation Bar ID: 115401560715

Status: Released
Philips

1 Patient Dashboard chapter “Functional Description” on page

438
2 Patient Directory chapter “Functional Description” on page

431
3 Patient name
4 Patient ID
5 Date of Birth and in brackets the age in years
6 Gender
7 Status of MRI system, System Health chapter “Status of MRI System” on page 426
8 Job Viewer chapter “Job Viewer” on page 427
9 Current date and time
10 Currently logged in user name
11 Message Center chapter “Message Center” on page 428

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
12 Settings and Tools chapter “Settings and Tools” on page 428
13 Help... chapter “Help” on page 430

End fragment title: Table Links Navigation Bar
3.9.2.2 Components of the Navigation Bar

Status: Released
3.9.2.2.1 Patients and Examinations

Affix: ready for translation ID: 113867946507
These buttons allow you to display the patient directory in list or thumbnail view as exam
schedule. From the Patient Directory, you select an examination to review, analyze, or print the
available imaging series.
{ Maethger, Maria, 10/12/2020 2:17:59 PM: I am not sure if this topic is necessary...}
Node title (original): Table Link Patients+Examinations ID: 115401955595
Status: Released
Philips

Buttons Description More information
Patient Dashboard chapter “Functional Description” on page

438
Patient Directory chapter “Functional Description” on page

431
End fragment title: Table Link Patients+Examinations
3.9.2.2.2 Status of MRI System

The status of the MRI System is displayed in the Navigation bar in System Health. System
Health informs about possible issues and actions that you have to take.
Button Description
(MRI) System Health
There are four types of messages, which are also indicated by the icon in the Navigation bar.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

{ Maethger, Maria, 7/29/2020 9:41:48 AM: Check needed if these are still the current icons
(taken from confluence)}
Icon System Status Description
Normal The system is running normally without any issues, and

no action is required.
Effect on future functionality Issues have arisen that affect the future functionality of
the system.
For example: Patient database 80% full.
Action required / background A background process is in progress. You have to wait

process running and take action when the process is complete.
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, For example: Patient reference position missing.
8/13/2020 12:55:47 PM:
There are always
background processes
running, I wonder why this
one has its own icon. The
background process in this
case seems to block the
normal workflow. }
System servicing required An error has occurred that you cannot solve. Contact
your service provider.
For example: Data Acquisition System not reachable.
Philips

3.9.2.2.3 Job Viewer

Node title (original): 0 functional description ID: 115749678475

Status: Released
The Job Viewer shows the status of background jobs, for example importing, exporting or
printing of imaging series. The Job Viewer is available on the Navigation bar.
Button Description
Job Viewer
In the Job Viewer,

• you can select which job types are displayed in the job list.
• you can sort the jobs by different criteria.
• you can prioritize jobs to speed them up.
End fragment title: 0 functional description
Node title (original): 1 Job Viewer display ID: 115749679499

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Status: Released
The job list displays the following information for each job.
Column Title Short Description
Name Patient name
Type Job types

• All jobs
• Import/Export jobs
• Print jobs
• Processing
Location Where the job is executed, imported from or exported to
Date Time stamp of the job
Status • Processing
• Completed
• Failed
• Canceled
• Submitted
Progress Progress of job completion in %.

End fragment title: 1 Job Viewer display
Philips

Node title (original): 2 Editing the Jobs ID: 115749680523

Status: Released
Editing the Jobs

In the Job Viewer, you have the following options to edit the jobs:
Button Short Description
Remove Remove jobs from the job list.
Cancel Cancel a submitted job or a job in processing without removal from the job list.
Redo Restart a failed or canceled job.
Prioritize Set a submitted job or a job in processing as priority. The prioritized job is next
in line.
End fragment title: 2 Editing the Jobs
3.9.2.2.4 Message Center

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The Message Center is a log of messages and operator actions or decisions. In the Message
Center, you can trace the sequence of events that lead to the current state of the system.
The Message Center is available on the Navigation Bar.
Button Description
Message Center
Each message contains a time stamp, the area you worked in, and the message itself or your
decision.
The Message Center can log 256 messages. If the number of messages exceeds the limit, the
oldest messages are deleted first.
The log of the Message Center is cleared when you log out or shut down the system.
{ Maethger, Maria, 7/29/2020 3:27:54 PM: What else can I tell the users?}
3.9.2.2.5 Settings and Tools

The Settings and Tools are available on the Navigation Bar. From here, you can access the
settings and configurations for the functions of your system.
Philips

Button Description
Settings and Tools
In the menu Short Description More information
Contrast Preset Settings... To set up and manage presets for contrast agent chapter “Functional Description”
administration. on page 478
chapter “ContrastCards for
Contrast Administration” on page
876
AutoVoice Settings... To set up pre-recorded, automated instructions to chapter “Functional Description”

the patient. on page 484
Image Display Settings... To specify the default display settings for images, chapter “Functional Description”
and to create customized settings for specific on page 490
anatomies.
Data Monitoring... To monitor data transfer. -
Navigator Display... To enable/disable the display of navigator data. -

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ExamCard Manager... To edit and create ExamCards. chapter “Functional Description”

on page 496
Edit Scan Control To edit technical parameters which control the -

Parameters... scan.
Only applicable for advanced operators and your
service provider.
SPT... To access the System Performance Tests. -
System Tuning... Only applicable for advanced operators and your -

service provider.
Feedback To give customer feedback and report an issue to

Philips.
Activate Research Patch... Only applicable for MR Research users and your -
service provider. Password-Protected.
Dicom Configuration... To add DICOM nodes to your system. chapter “Functional Description”
on page 1206
Philips

In the menu Short Description More information
Exit To exit the software. { Heuvel, Martina van den,

1/7/2021 1:28:48 PM:
check Switch Off and
Shutdown section ... etc}
Settings
• Auto export • To enable or disable Auto export. • chapter “Enabling the Auto
• Patient Dashboard • To adjust the display of the Patient Export Function” on page
Settings Dashboard. 1199
• SmartExam • To specify the settings for SmartExam. • chapter “Adjusting the

Patient Dashboard” on page
• Start Scan • To enable or disable Automatic Start Scan
441
which starts scans automatically when
planning is done. • { Maethger, Maria,
10/14/2020 8:57:51 AM:
not done yet}
• { Maethger, Maria,
10/14/2020 8:57:51 AM:
not done yet}
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

3.9.2.2.6 Help
On the Navigation Bar, you access information about the MRI system.
Menu Entry Description
Help...(F1) The Help system opens in a separate window.

To access the Help system, click Help... or press the F1 key.
• The Help system contains the Instructions for Use, the Technical
Description, and gives basic and advanced scanning information.
• In some parts of the user interface, e.g. imaging parameters, the Help
system is context-sensitive. This means that the Help shows directly
information which is relevant to what you are currently doing in the
application. If context-sensitivity is not available, the home page of the
Help system will open.
User Documentation... Here you access the Instructions for Use and the Technical Description of your
MRI system.
About... A summary of relevant hardware and software information is available in the

About... function.
Philips

3.9.3 Patient Directory

Status: Released

Affix: Patient Directory-ready for translation ID: 114528337803
The Patient Directory (F3) displays a list of the available patient data with their exam
status.
It allows you
• To select which patients are displayed:
– Scheduled: Patients whose examinations are scheduled for an examination, but the
examination has not yet taken place.
– All: Patients where examination data is already available.
– Patients in an external database (for example RIS or DICOM nodes).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• To sort the patients based on the criteria Status, Name, and ID.
• To open an examination in the Review tab.
• To lock an examination so that it cannot accidentally be deleted.
• To delete an examination.
• To modify the examination data.
• To export an examination.
• To merge or split examinations.
3.9.3.2 User Interface

Status: Released
3.9.3.2.1 Main Elements of the Patient Directory

Status: Released
Philips

1 2 3
4 5
6 7 8
Number Name Description More information
1 Patient list tabs Select which patients to view:
2 New Patient Add new patient manually chapter “Entering New

Patient Data Manually” on
page 837
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

3 Patient list List with patients of selected tab
4 Patient info Quick information on selected patient
5 Exam button Complete or discontinue the exam, or

Release patient
6 Detailed patient data Details about the study including the image chapter “Detailed Patient
series that was used and if applicable Data” on page 432
bookmarks and prior studies of the patient
7 Export Export selected data (only possible for chapter “Exporting Exam
prepared examinations) Data Manually” on page
1201
8 Review Go to Review task
3.9.3.2.2 Detailed Patient Data

The lower part of the Patient directory provides detailed information about the selected
patient.
• Study Details: Patient data with details, for example weight, height, allergies or study
comments.
• Series (if available): Information on the ExamCards or Scan Items used in the examination,
geometry settings, and export location
You can also
Philips

– export selected series or the whole study in Classic MR format (see chapter “Exporting
Exam Data Manually” on page 1201),
– delete selected series,
– refresh the list.
• Bookmarks: bookmarks of scans in the current study { Maethger, Maria, 10/6/2020 2:55:36
PM: Is this correct? what does this look like? Cannot find patients with bookmarks/cannot
create bookmarks}
• Priors: Information about previous examinations { Maethger, Maria, 10/6/2020 2:55:36
PM: What does this look like? Cannot find patients with previous examinations - don't know
how to "create" such patients.}
3.9.3.3 Routine Procedures

Affix: needs to be moved to Performing Exam???? don't know ID: 116441895307
Last Content Modificator: Status: Released
3.9.3.3.1 Locking and Unlocking of Patient Data

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
You lock patient data that is on the system to prevent accidentally deleting the data.
► To lock a patient entry, right-click on a patient entry and click Lock.
⇨ The lock symbol appears in front of the patient entry.{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 11/2/2020
11:06:47 PM: image needed?}
⇨ The patient entry cannot be deleted, a message appears describing the reason.
► To unlock a patient entry, right-click on a patient entry and click Unlock.

⇨ The lock symbol disappears in front of the patient entry.
⇨ The patient entry can be deleted.
3.9.3.3.2 Filtering the Patient Directory

You can filter the patient list by certain criteria.

► To specify your filter criteria, do any of the following:
• Click in the field under the column header and select your filter criteria.
Example: Select any (Examination) Status.
• Click in the field under the column header and type the criteria.
Example: Type the (Patient) Name.
► To delete a filter, click the x behind the filter criteria.
Philips

3.9.3.3.3 Selecting and Deselecting of Entries in the Patient Directory

You can select single or multiple entries in the Patient Directory.

► Do any of the following:
• To select a single entry, click this entry.
• To select multiple consecutive entries, click the first entry. Then press and hold Shift,
and click the last entry.
• To select multiple individual entries, click the first entry. Then press and hold CTRL, and
click the other individual entries.
• To select the entire list, press CTRL+A.
To deselect an entry from the entire list again, click this entry.
3.9.3.3.4 Changing the Sorting Order

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

You can sort the entries of the Patient Directory differently.
► Click a column header.
► Click the Down-arrow to sort in descending order,
click the Up-arrow to sort in ascending order.
• The entries are sorted in alphabetical, chronological or numerical order depending on the
selected column. For example, select the Name header, the entries are sorted by Patient
name from A to Z or Z to A.
– Status
– Merged
– Name
– ID
– Birth Date
– Sex
– Study Description
– Study Date & Time
Refreshing the Patient Directory

To return to the initial sorting, you refresh the Patient Directory.
► Right-click on the Patient Directoy and select Refresh List.
This does not change the selection state. Open exams will stay open.
Philips

3.9.3.3.5 Modifying Examination Data

Patient examination data of local and retrieved examinations can be modified.

Note that patient data cannot be modified during an examination.
⊳ In the Patient Directory:
1. Select the examination to be modified.
2. Right-click on a patient entry and click Modify.
3. If local eximanation data has been exported or the data derives from RIS, the following
warning is displayed. Click Modify to proceed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
"Modification can lead to mismatch in patient data" { Maethger, Maria, 9/28/2020 1:13:25
PM: Is it important to write the whole warning here?}
4. Modify the examination data, for example delete existing data, enter new data.
5. Do one of the following:
• Click End Modification to save the modification and go back to the Patient Directory.
• Click Undo to reset the patient data.
3.9.3.3.6 Displaying Patients from External Database

In the Patient Directory, you can select to display Scheduled or All patients. However, you can
also select to display the patients from an external database. A column is reserved for this
external database.
► Click More, then select any of the available options:
• PACS/Network with iSite
• RIS
• This Computer
• Browse Path
⇨ The tab between All and More displays the patients from the selected external database.
Philips

⇨ To change the external database that is displayed in the tab, repeat this workflow.
See also chapter “Using Patient Data from RIS” on page 839 and chapter “Importing Patient
Data from External Sources” on page 1205.
3.9.3.3.7 Merging Studies

In the Patient Directory, you can merge up to 5 studies from the RIS.
You merge studies when there are more than one requests per patient, and when it is more
efficient to combine these requests in one session.
When the examination is finished, you split the single exam into multiple exams in line with the
requests.
⊳ Prerequisites:
• You can only merge studies before the examination is performed.
• The studies have the same Patient name, Patient ID, Date of Birth and Referring Physician.
• The examinations are from RIS, or originates from RIS and is copied to the local database.
You can not merge patient studies which you created locally with New Patient.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Select multiple studies from the Scheduled list.
► Right-click and select Merge.
⇨ The studies are merged.
⇨ The Study Description of the merged study displays as: <first study description> + <number
of added studies>.
Example: When a C-spine, T-spine and L-spine study are merged, the study description
displays as: C-spine +2
⇨
To easily find the merged studies in the Patient Directory, open the All list and sort all entries
with the Merged sorting criteria.
3.9.3.3.8 Splitting Examinations

Split Exam allows you to separate an exam acquired during a single scan session into multiple
exams. This allows for correct association of imaging series to ordered/ scheduled examinations
to facilitate proper reporting, data handling and billing activities.
Split Exam allows you to:
• Split and Copy
Philips

This option creates a copy of the selected scan items and places them in the new
examination location, leaving the selected scan in the original examination.
• Split and Move
This option removes the selected scan items from the original examination and places them
in the new examination.
Before you start

To ensure proper handling of the Split Exam functionality, establish the proper workflow in
regards to MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure Step) with the facility defined RIS
administrator.
Note that Send initial MPPS is enabled by default.
Node title (original): Split exam workflow ID: 115757886475
Status: Released
Split Exam
⊳ Prerequisites:
• Split Exam is only available for completed exams.
• All open instances of the examination to be split must be closed prior to the Split Exam
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
action.
► In the Patient Directory, right-click the examination that you wish to split, and select Split.
The Split window opens with:
• Information about the current examination.
• A list of the available imaging series.
• Additional columns for the destination of the studies after split: Assign to Studies with
Current Study, and others, e.g.Study 1, Study 2.
By default, all imaging series are initially assigned to the Current Study.
► Assign imaging series to the studies.
You can assign imaging series to none of the exams or to multiple exams.
• To split and copy, select multiple destinations, e.g. the Current Study and Study 1.
• To split and move, select any destination but not the Current Study.
► Click Split.
The Patient Directory displays the new examinations immediately.
End fragment title: Split exam workflow
3.9.4 Patient Dashboard

Status: Released
Philips


Affix: Patient Dashboard ID: 115201685515
The Patient Dashboard (F4) provides a quick and easy overview for the exam schedule.
You can see the Previous patients, the Current Patient and the Scheduled patients in this order
from left to right.
Each patient is represented by a patient card. The color scheme of the patient cards indicate
their state on the Patient Dashboard.
Previous Current Patient Scheduled
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

On the Patient Dashboard, you can
• Open the examination of a patient with one click.
• Start the exam of a scheduled patient (function is available when you hover over the patient
card)
• Add a new patient manually (see chapter “Entering New Patient Data Manually” on page
837).
• Refresh the patient list.
• Scroll through all entries of the dashboard.
In Settings and Tools , you can adjust the Patient Dashboard (see chapter “Adjusting the
Patient Dashboard” on page 441).
3.9.4.2 Patient Cards

Status: Released
Node title (original): 0 Patient Card Overview ID: 115757918219

Status: Released
On the Patient Dashboard, each patient card displays patient data (name, ID, date of birth and
age, sex) and information about patient and examination:
Philips

1. Scheduled time, and if

applicable the delay time
relative to the scheduled
time
2. Current ExamCard (if
assigned)
3. Patient availability
4. Safety related patient
information
5. Exam information icons
6. Exam workflow icons
Patient on tabletop. If
applicable, this icon appears in
front of the patient name.
End fragment title: 0 Patient Card Overview

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): 1 Patient Availability ID: 115757919755

Status: Released
Patient Availability
Icon Description
In-patient (Patient admitted to the hospital)
In-patient arrived
Out-patient (OPD patient, not admitted to the hospital)
Out-patient arrived
End fragment title: 1 Patient Availability
Node title (original): 2 Safety related patient information ID: 115757921291

Status: Released
Philips

Safety related patient information

Icon Description
Pregnancy
MR Safe implant
MR Conditional implant
MR Unsafe implant
End fragment title: 2 Safety related patient information
Node title (original): 3 Exam information icons ID: 115757922827

Status: Released
Exam information icons
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Icon Description
Breathhold
Contrast agent
Contrast agent unprepared
End fragment title: 3 Exam information icons
Node title (original): 4 Exam workflow icons ID: 115757924363

Status: Released
Exam workflow icons

{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 11/13/2020 8:44:53 AM: data nodes for description needed, check
to find out what the tooltips are for all the icons}
Icon Description
Prepared exam
Unprepared exam
Exam In progress
Philips

Icon Description
Patient released
Exam discontinued
Archiving in progress
Archive completed
Archive failed
Exam Completed
End fragment title: 4 Exam workflow icons

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.9.4.3 Adjusting the Patient Dashboard

Status: Released
You can select which type of patient studies are displayed for which time frame , and you can
specify the refresh rate of the Patient Dashboard.
► On the navigation bar, click Settings and Tools , then Settings and then select Patient
Dashboard.
► Select whether to refresh the Patient Dashboard manually or automatically.
If you select Automatic refresh, enter a starting time and an interval for refreshing the
Patient Dashboard.
► Select the period from which the patients are displayed:
• Select Show only exams of today.
• If needed, also select Additionally show exams of yesterday and tomorrow.
► Select the type of examination that is displayed.
• Disable Show Completed and Discontinued Exams to show only upcoming and current
exams.
• Enable Show Completed and Discontinued Exams to include these exams in the Patient
Dashboard.
► Close the window to save the settings.
Philips

3.9.5 Patient Tasks Bar

Status: Released

Status: Released
The Patient Tasks Bar guides you through the examination. Each tab on the Patient Tasks Bar
represents a task:
• Prepare
• Plan
• Review
• Analysis
• Print
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

{ Heuvel, Martina van den,
11/9/2020 2:20:57 PM: replace with Callout graphic?}
• The Patient Tasks Bar displays which task is currently performed for the selected
examination.
The current task is underlined.
When a task is already completed, it might be grayed out or not available anymore on the
Patient Tasks Bar, e.g. Prepare or Plan might be inactive.
• The Patient Tasks Bar allows you to directly access a task by clicking on it.
• To support your workflow, the central part of the screen changes according to the current
task and provides you with the functionality needed.
3.9.6 Exam Overview

Status: Released

Affix: Exam Overview ID: 115243128331
The Exam Overview is always visible, independent of the current patient task (Prepare, Plan,
Review, Analysis, Print), as it is essential for each examination.
• The Exam Overview gives an overview of the current examination.
Philips

• It guides you through the current examination (ExamCard).

• It gives you quick access to completed imaging series, and allows to access Review and
Analysis packages from here.
• It allows to switch between the Thumbnail Overview and the Scan Overview.

Status: Released
3.9.6.2.1 UI Elements in Exam Overview

Status: Released
The Exam Overview provides you with buttons, drop-down menus and a context menu to
control the course of an examination.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Buttons and other UI Description More information

controls
1 Name of the current ExamCard -
2 Show all postprocessing steps displays all { Heuvel, Martina van den,
postprocessing steps per EC item above the 11/27/2020 1:08:31 PM:
Exam Overview. reference}
3 More Options: { Heuvel, Martina van den,
• Save ExamCard allows to save the scan 11/27/2020 1:08:31 PM:
items of the current examination as reference}
ExamCard.
• Info displays information about the { Heuvel, Martina van den,

current EC item in a separate window. 11/27/2020 1:08:31 PM:
reference}
Philips


controls
• Repeat Prescans allows to repeat { Heuvel, Martina van den,

previously performed prescans for the 11/27/2020 1:08:31 PM:
current ExamCard. reference}
Prescans are automatically performed in
the course of an examination. However,
in some cases it might be useful to
repeat the prescans, e.g. the
automatically performed B1 calibration.
• Exam Setup allows to specify generic { Heuvel, Martina van den,

parameters that are valid for a complete 11/27/2020 1:08:31 PM:
ExamCard (for all ExamCard items). Here reference}
you define patient-dependent
information, for example patient
positioning and heart rate, but also the
network nodes to transfer the resulting
imaging series to upon completion.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Prior Studies allows to access prior { Heuvel, Martina van den,
studies of the selected patient, if these 11/27/2020 1:08:31 PM:
priors are available in the local reference}
database.
4 Button to display Scan Overview chapter “Scan Overview” on page

446
5 Scan Overview
6 Archive { Heuvel, Martina van den,

11/27/2020 1:08:31 PM:
reference}
7 Button to display Thumbnail Overview chapter “Thumbnail Overview”
on page 445
Philips


controls
8 Thumbnail Overview
9 Drop-down menu: Actions that change the workflow state: { Heuvel, Martina van den,
• Start Exam • Start Exam: You start the examination 11/27/2020 1:08:31 PM:
when the patient is registered and the reference}
• Release Patient
ExamCard assigned.
• Complete Exam
• Release Patient: You confirm that the
• Discontinue
acquisition of the scans is done. You can
Exam
still review and analyze the imaging
series, while you prepare the scanner
for the next patient.
• Complete Exam: You confirm that all
work for this exam is done. Archiving is
started for all series that are marked for
archive, but have not been archived yet.
A MPPS Complete message is sent to
RIS.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Discontinue Exam: You confirm that the

current exam is to be discontinued.
Archiving is started for all series that are
marked for archive, but have not been
archived yet. A MPPS Discontinue
message is sent to RIS along with the
reason for discontinuation.
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 12/1/2020 6:49:11 PM: Confluence ... https://
confluence.atlas.philips.com/display/DINGH/Detailed+UI+Design+Spec+V1+Rev03+%7C+Post
+Processing}
3.9.6.2.2 Thumbnail Overview

Status: Released
The Thumbnail Overview shows one thumbnail (representative image) per imaging series of
the current examination in Review. It provides you with a preview of all types of imaging series
which includes scans, reformats and any type of series created by a post-processing step.
Each thumbnail shows the scan number and the scan name. When you hover of the thumbnail,
more information is displayed.
Philips

From the Thumbnail Overview,

• You drag images into the viewports of the Plan, Review, Analysis and Print tab.
• You open Review and Analysis packages for the selected imaging series.
• You export the selected imaging series to a network node.
• You add the selected imaging series to the Print Preview.
3.9.6.2.3 Scan Overview

Status: Released
The Scan Overview shows the items of the current ExamCard and their status.
In the Scan Overview, you control the course of the current examination:
• You add new EC items for scanning.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• You change the order of the EC items.
• You add a pause before the selected EC item.
• You add a contrast agent injection for the selected EC item.
• You change the laterality of the selected EC item.
• You add GeoLinks and you select Geonames.
3.9.6.2.4 Icons in Scan Overview

Affix: Reference Information (Legend) ID: 116371098379
Node title (original): 0 Status of EC items during planning ID: 116371815179

Status: Released
Status of EC items during planning

Icon Tooltip Explanation
New The scan item is new and needs planning.
Invalid The scan item is invalid and cannot be executed (e.g. because
it originates from an older release).
Unplanned The scan item needs planning.

Except for the survey, all scans are in an unplanned state when
the exam is started.
Philips

In conflict The scan item contains a parameter in conflict.
Being modified The scan item is being modified (in planning).
Conflict (being modified) The scan item containing a parameter conflict is being
modified.
Await update The scan item awaits update, when

• it shares the same geometry with the scan item which is
currently modified.
• it waits for an outstanding shim request and shim values.
• it waits for sufficient reconstruction resources.
Conflict (await update) The scan item containing a parameter conflict awaits update.
Ready to run The item is ready to run as it is fully planned.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 0 Status of EC items during planning
Node title (original): 1 Archiving ID: 116371816203

Status: Released
Archiving
Marked for archive The item will be archived upon completion.
Archive completed The item is completely archived.
Archive error Archiving failed.
Archive in progress Archiving of the current item is in progress.
End fragment title: 1 Archiving
Node title (original): 2 Safety and Tabletop ID: 116409554571

Status: Released
Philips

Safety and Tabletop

Safety warning When a scan item has high SAR, high SED or high PNS, the
tooltip of this Safety icon gives information about SAR, SED
and PNS.
Table movement normal Table moves before scanning or in between stacks within the
scan.
Table movement active While the table is moving, it is indicated in yellow warning
The tooltip gives color.
information about tabletop
movement, e.g. 12.6mm in
or Multiple Positions.
{ Heuvel, Martina van den,
1/8/2021 9:07:52 AM:
should be UI elements?}
End fragment title: 2 Safety and Tabletop
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): 4 Geometry: Links, names and propagation ID: 116371817227
Status: Released
Geometry: Links, Names and Propagation

A, B, C GeoLink:
• The selected GeoLink is indicated.
You assign a GeoLink to a scan item in the context menu of the
• Scan Overview.
Drop-down of all Example: cervical, thoracic, Geoname

geonames lumbar The selected Geoname is indicated.
You assign a Geoname to a scan item in the context menu of
the Scan Overview.
Philips

Both Left & Right Laterality

• Right The selected Laterality is indicated as B, R or L. If nothing is
displayed, the laterality is set to Unpaired.
Left
• You assign the laterality to an examination in the Exam Setup.
You assign the laterality to a scan item in the context menu of
the Scan Overview.
•
• Volume + Slice Propagation Geometry:

• Geometry The selected type of geometry propagation is indicated.
• Volume • If propagation is not enabled (No Propagation), then
• nothing is displayed.
• For Volume + Slice Geometry, the size and slices
parameters are being propagated to other scan with same
geoname.
• For Volume, the size parameter is being propagated to
other scan with same geoname.
You enable Propagation in the context menu of the Scan
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Overview.
End fragment title: 4 Geometry: Links, names and propagation
Node title (original): 5 contrast agent, pause, manual start and ID: 116371818251
breathhold Status: Released
Contrast agent injection, pause, manual start and breathhold

Scan pauses to inject x ml Patient requires contrast and contrast is prepared.

of <contrast agent name>. You enable contrast agent injection in the context menu of the
Scan Overview.
Click to specify mandatory Patient requires contrast, and contrast is not prepared.
information Enter the required information in the Contrast Injection
Parameters window which opens automatically, when you
enable Contrast.
Pause before scan Scan pauses after the completion of previous scan when
AutoContinue is enabled.
You enable the pause in the context menu of the Scan
Overview.
Philips

Breathhold The scan item requires one or more breathholds.

You enable breathholds in the Advanced Parameters.
Manual start Scan pauses after the preparation phases before the actual
image acquisition.
You enable Manual start in the Advanced Parameters.
End fragment title: 5 contrast agent, pause, manual start and breathhold
Node title (original): 6 SmartExam ID: 116371832075

Status: Released
SmartExam
Node title (original): Icons SmartExam ID: 117376974987-1
Status: Released
Smart learned Geometry is smart and learned.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Smart learned disabled Geometry is smart and learned, but Smart is disabled as
system option, or the smart survey is missing.
Smart learned locked Geometry is smart, learned and locked for further learning.
Smart learning Geometry is smart and still learning (not validated).
Smart learning disabled Geometry is smart and still learning, but Smart is disabled, or
the smart survey is missing.
Smart learning locked Geometry is smart, still learning, but locked for further
learning.
Spine smart learned Geometry is smart spine and learned.
Spine smart learned locked Geometry is smart spine, learned, but locked for further
learning.
Spine smart learning Geometry is smart spine and still learning (not validated).
Spine smart learning Geometry is smart spine and still learning but locked for
locked further learning.
Smart name conflict Geometry is smart, but given a name that already exists for a
non-smart geometry.
Philips

Smart name unknown Smart geometry name is unknown.
Smart planning The smart geometry is applied: the smart survey is analyzed
and the smart geometries are planned.
Smart spine planning The smart spine geometry is applied: the smart spine survey is
analyzed and the smart geometries are planned.
End fragment title: Icons SmartExam
End fragment title: 6 SmartExam
Node title (original): 7 Scan progress ID: 116409657099

Status: Released
Scan progress
Prescan Waiting for prescan to start.
Scan in progress Acquisition of the scan item is ongoing.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Recon in progress Acquisition is complete, reconstruction is in progress.
Awaiting recon The item awaits resources and is started as soon as sufficient
resources are available.
Completed Acquisition is complete, reconstruction is complete.
Aborted Scan is aborted.
Postprocessing Scan has postprocessing steps attached.
Postprocessing in progress New series are being generated. The progress is shown using a
horizontal progress bar in %. This bar is placed at the bottom
end of the processing icon.
Postprocessing in conflict Postprocessing parameters are in conflict.
Postprocessing aborted Postprocessing failed or was cancelled by the operator.
Postprocessing completed All postprocessing steps are executed.
End fragment title: 7 Scan progress

Philips

3.9.6.2.5 Context menus in Exam Overview

Status: Released
The context menu provides different functions depending on the status of the EC items (or
already completed imaging series ) in the Thumbnail Overview or Scan Overview.
Node title (original): 1 Functions for completed EC items ID: 116392729355

Status: Released
Functions available for completed EC items (imaging series)

Function Description More information
Allows to export the selected imaging series. See Administration

Export
Allows to add the selected imaging series to the See Printing

Add To Print Print procedure.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

Allows to open the selected imaging series in a See Reviewing

2D Review package.
MIP
MPR
Orthoview
MobiView
PicturePlus
Allows to open the selected imaging series in an See Analysis

T1Perfusion Analysis package.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NeuroPerfusion
Diffusion
DiffusionRegistration
FiberTrak
IViewBOLD
QFlow
ImageAlgebra (MR
Subtraction)
Echo Accumulation
ADA (Advanced
Diffusion Analysis)
End fragment title: 1 Functions for completed EC items
Philips

Node title (original): 2 Functions for EC items during planning ID: 116392730379
Status: Released
Functions available for EC items during planning

Allows to flag the selected EC item for See Administration

Flag for archive archive so that it is automatically archived
once completed.
See Administration
Image Export Sorting
Order
Convert to SmartExam... Allows to convert the scan geometry to a See SmartExam.

SmartGeometry.
This function opens the SmartGeometries
Editor.
See Workflow Changing the

• Copy order of the EC items
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Cut
• Paste
• Delete
Allows to link scans with different geometry See Workflow Assignng GeoLink
GeoLink parameters to each other.
Geoname See Workflow Assigning

Geoname
See Workflow Changing laterality

Laterality
See Workflow Adding a pause

Pause before scan before a scan
See Workflow Administering

Contrast contrast agent
End fragment title: 2 Functions for EC items during planning
3.9.7 Exam Dashboard

Philips
Status: Released


Affix: Exam Dashboard ID: 115267173003
The Exam Dashboard gives access to information and functionality which is needed during
scanning.
The Exam Dashboard is a vertically aligned dashboard located on the side of the screen.
1. Header with patient name and Toggle Button:
– Maximize current examination (F9) opens the examination in

the Plan tab.
– Minimize current examination (F9) closes the Plan tab and

returns to the previous display.
2. Scan Preview (F7)
3. Information about patient safety and patient comfort
4. Physiology display
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
5. Exam and scan progress

6. Scan controls

Status: Released
3.9.7.2.1 Scan Preview

Affix: in fact functional description ID: 115267317643
Philips

The Scan Preview (F7) shows the latest reconstructed image of the scan currently in progress.
Scan Preview allows you to:
• Refresh the display and display the Live scan status.
• Maximize (and minimize) Scan Preview.
• Navigate through imaging series of the current examination in maximized view.
Node title (original): Image information in maximized and ID: 116541136651

minimized Scan Preview Status: Released
The image information (displayed in Scan Preview) is different in minimized and maximized
view.
Minimized view Maximized view
Information displayed along Information of the completed scan: Information of the completed scan:
with the images • Series number. • Patient name.
• Reconstruction number. • Image information as provided in the
• Scan name. Review environment. { Heuvel,
Martina van den, 10/27/2020
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

2:58:29 PM: link to image
Information}
• Series number.
• Reconstruction number.
• Scan name.
End fragment title: Image information in maximized and minimized Scan Preview
3.9.7.2.2 Patient Safety and Comfort

Status: Released
This section of the Exam Dashboard displays safety-related information of the current scan, and
the status of AutoVoice and of the Ventilation (airflow) in the bore.
It also allows to:
• Enable (or disable) and adjust AutoVoice for the current examination: ,
– Select the AutoVoice language.
– Set AutoVoice to Manual or Automatic.
• Adjust the Ventilation settings.
Node title (original): 01 - SAR, SED and PNS ID: 116847400203
Status: Released
Philips

Safety-related Information
The SAR and PNS values are displayed for each scan in progress. The SED value increases over
time with the acquisition of each scan. The bar indicates the SED status:
• The bar shows the scheduled SED in light grey and the delivered SED in dark grey.
• Once the delivered SED exceeds 3.5 kJ/kg the color changes to yellow.
• White color (with a downward arrow) shows the current SED.
If SED, SAR or PNS exceed the upper limit, a warning icon is displayed besides the value.
Node title (original): SAR SED PNS screengrabs and explanation ID: 116847401227-2
Status: Released
• SED, SAR and • Regular SED • Regular SED • SED exceeded • SED, SAR and
PNS with no (medium), SAR PNS exceeded
data and PNS
End fragment title: SAR SED PNS screengrabs and explanation
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 01 - SAR, SED and PNS
Node title (original): 02 - SAR, SED, PNS - Hover for more ID: 116542148491
information Status: Released
More Information in the tooltips

When you hover over the parameter SAR, the tooltip displays the Whole Body SAR.
When you hover over the parameter SED, the tooltip displays detailed information about SED:
Patient Specific Energy Dose (SED)
• Delivered(kJ/kg)
• Scheduled (kJ/kg)
• Total (kJ/kg)
For more information about SAR and SED, see chapter “Safety” on page 39.
End fragment title: 02 - SAR, SED, PNS - Hover for more information
Node title (original): 03 - Status of Ventilation in Bore ID: 116545414283

Status: Released
Status of the Ventilation in the bore

Node title (original): status ventilation in Bore ID: 116543778827-1
Status: Released
• Ventilation is on or above the recommended ventilation level.

Philips
• Ventilation is below the recommended ventilation level.

• Ventilation is off.
End fragment title: status ventilation in Bore
When you hover over the icon, the current ventilation level is displayed, e.g. Ventilation Level 3
End fragment title: 03 - Status of Ventilation in Bore
Node title (original): 04 - Status of AutoVoice ID: 116545530507

Status: Released
Status of AutoVoice
• AutoVoice is enabled.
• AutoVoice is disabled.
When you hover over the icon, the AutoVoice status and selected language are displayed,
e.g. AutoVoice English (US)
End fragment title: 04 - Status of AutoVoice
3.9.7.2.3 Physiology Display
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
The Physiology Display is available on the Exam Dashboard. It allows you to

• View physiology signals, and select their source.
• Adjust the display of the physiology signals.
• Adjust the heart rate.
• Manage Breathhold scanning and Breathhold instructions (related to AutoVoice sets if
AutoVoice is set to Manual).
• Open the Physiology Properties window where you can access more functionality. For
more information, see chapter “Physiology Properties” on page 461.
Philips

Number Item Explanation
1 • Displays the patient heart rate in beats per minute.

• Allows to start Manual Calibration from here.
Heart rate
• Copies the current heart rate to the Exam Setup of the

current ExamCard.
Update heart rate in Exam Setup
• Displays the heart rate as entered in the Exam Setup.

You can edit this text field and enter a heart rate value, if
Enter heart rate manually the current heart rate differs too much from the entered
heart rate.
2 (Reserved for) VCG signal or External • Displays the physiology signals.
3 (Reserved for) PPU signal or External • Allows to select another physiology signal.
4 (Reserved for) respiratory signal • Displays icons that indicate the battery level, the
connectivity of the wireless battery module, the status of
• Respiratory Belt
VCG calibration, and the status of a Manual Breathhold.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• VitalEye (if available)

If no physiology sensors are connected, these slots are empty
• External and the following message is displayed:
Sensor(s) not detected or wrong network selected
5 Only available when AutoVoice is set Select any AutoVoice set for your manual breathhold
to Manual. scanning.
• Expiration-long:
Breathe in... Breathe out... Breathe in... Breathe out...
Hold your breath
• Expiration:
Breathe in... Breathe out... Hold your breath
• Direct:
Hold your breath
6 Use the intercom to give breath hold Displays the advice to use the intercom for breath hold
instructions instructions.
Context menu
The context menu provides you with more functionality:
Item Explanation
Time range Allows you to set the time range to 1, 2, 5, 10 or 25 seconds.
Physiology properties Allows you to access the Physiology Properties window

Philips

3.9.7.2.4 Physiology Signals with Status Information

Status: Released
In the Physiology Display, icons indicate the battery level, the connectivity of the wireless
battery module, the status of VCG calibration, and the status of a Manual Breathhold.
When you right-click the Physiology Display, the Extended Physiology Display opens. It displays
the same icons in a larger window. You can reposition or resize the Extended Physiology Display
when you drag the header or the borders.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Icon Explanation
WiFi signal: more than 33%
WiFi signal: 33% and less
Battery state: more than 50%
Battery state: 50% - 26%
Battery state: less than 26%
VCG: Auto Calibration

Philips

Icon Explanation
VCG: Manual Calibration
In bore manual VCG Calibration
Out bore manual VCG Calibration
Table docked manual VCG Calibration
Manual Breathhold: Playing
Manual Breathhold: Stop
Manual Breathhold: Talk

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.9.7.2.5 Physiology Properties

Status: Released
Physiology Properties allow you to

• Check the status of wireless communication (not applicable for Wired Physiology).
• Select the VCG calibration method (automatic or manual), and start the VCG calibration if
set to manual.
• View the battery status of the currently used VCG or PPU module (which is only indicated if
low).
• View the status of the wireless communication (which is only indicated if low)
(not applicable for Wired Physiology).
• View and adjust the signal strength of the VCG signals.
Node title (original): 1 Display options ID: 116071230475

Status: Released
Philips

Display Options
Item Explanation
View Gridlines To enable or disable the display of gridlines with the physiology signals.
Magnet Display To enable or disable the display of physiology signals on the Magnet Display
(only available on Achieva systems, depending on their configuration).
The Magnet Display uses the same settings as the Physiology Display in the
Exam Dashboard. You cannot change the settings on the Magnet Display itself.
Scale To select the scale of the signal:

With AutoScale, the scale is automatically adapted to the maximum detected
signal in the displayed time span (after a complete sweep of the signal).
With VCG 0.5mV VCG 1mV VCG 2mV VCG 5mV VCG 10mV, a fixed scale is used.
These settings are only available for VCG:
• Signals higher than the maximum value are skipped.
• The mV values represent the full peak-peak dynamic range.
• The mV-indicator in the Physiology Display is modified according to the
selected scale.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 1 Display options
Node title (original): 2 VCG Calibration ID: 116071784459

Status: Released
VCG Calibration
Item Explanation
Manual Calibration To enable or disable Manual VCG calibration.

With manual calibration, you can retrieve calibration results and select the
trigger threshold for VCG R-peak detection.
Start Calibration To start manual calibration.
Outside bore To inspect the results of manual calibration:

Signal Strength
Displayed immediately after manual calibration as color scale and expressed in
mV.
Inside bore
Philips

Item Explanation
To inspect the results of manual calibration:

Trigger Quality
Displayed immediately after manual calibration as color scale.
Trigger threshold To change the trigger threshold.

Possible values: Low, Medium, High
Only applicable for VCG:
Allows you to adjust the sensitivity for the detection of R-peaks.
Node title (original): Calibration results color scale ID: 116072958219-1

Status: Released
Color scale Description Signal strength Trigger quality

(Percentage of false
signals)
Excellent results. Proceed. >2.0 mV <5%

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Very good results. Proceed. 1.5 mV - 2.0 mV between 5% and10%
Good results. Proceed. 1.0 mV - 1.5 mV between 10% and

15%
Sub-optimal results. Corrective 0.6 mV - 1.0 mV between 15% and

actions recommended. 20%
Bad results. Corrective actions <0.6 mV >20%

strongly recommended.
End fragment title: Calibration results color scale
Node title (original): immediate effect on display of signal ID: 116069933579-1

Affix: reused in Physiology Properties of ExamDashboard Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
When you change any setting of VCG calibration, this change has immediate effect on the R-
peak detection.
This is valid for: manual or continuous VCG calibration, inside or outside bore VCG calibration
and change of the trigger threshold.
End fragment title: immediate effect on display of signal

End fragment title: 2 VCG Calibration
Node title (original): 3 Battery Level ID: 116071785995

Status: Released
Battery Level
Icon Explanation
Indicates the battery level of the VCG and PPU/Resp module.

• Green: Fully charged, or sufficiently charged for operation.
• Orange: Needs to be charged.
The VCG or PPU/Resp signal may deteriorate.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 3 Battery Level
Node title (original): 4 Communication Strength ID: 116071787531

Status: Released
Communication Strength
Only applicable for Wireless Physiology, and not for Wired Physiology.
Icon Explanation
Indicates the strength of the wireless communication signal.

• Green: Sufficient signal.
• Orange: Insufficient signal.
The VCG or PPU/Resp signal may deteriorate.
End fragment title: 4 Communication Strength
Node title (original): 5 Wireless Connection ID: 116071789067

Status: Released
Wireless Connection
For Wireless Physiology, you need to select the wireless network. .
Philips

Icon Explanation
Network Selection
To select the wireless network for your type of VCG and PPU/Resp module.
Expression MR200
Expression MR400
End fragment title: 5 Wireless Connection
Help
NIBP non-invasive blood pressure
Close
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.9.7.2.6 Exam Progress and Scan Controls

Status: Released
On the Exam Dashboard, you see the progress of the current examination, and you start, stop,
pause and resume the examination.
Philips

Number Item Description
1 Information about current scan Once the ExamCard is started, this scan protocol
protocol information is displayed here:
• Name of scan protocol
• Remaining scan duration
• Number of scan protocol in ExamCard as
<current number/total number of all scans in
ExamCard>
2 Information about current ExamCard Once the ExamCard is selected, this ExamCard
information is displayed are:
• Name of ExamCard
• Remaining examination duration
3 AutoContinue button When AutoContinue is enabled, all scan protocols

proceed automatically one after the other.
When AutoContinue is disabled, each scan
protocol needs to be started manually.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4 Start, Stop, Pause, Resume buttons The Stop button is always available.
Depending on the scan status, Start, Pause or
Resume are available.
• Start is available when the next scan of an
ExamCard is planned and ready to run.
• Pause is available when a scan is running.
• Resume is only available for previously
paused scans.
3.9.7.3 Routine Procedures

Status: Released
3.9.7.3.1 VCG calibration

Status: Released
In all scans that make use of VCG, VCG calibration is required to ensure correct triggering.
VCG calibration analyzes the detected ECG-signal to determine the R-peak in the QRS-complex:
A trigger algorithm determines which peak in the detected ECG-signal is marked as R-peak. A
trigger marker is assigned to the signal (and displayed in the Physiology Display) if all criteria of
the trigger algorithm are met.
Philips

Factors affecting the VCG calibration

When the VCG calibration is disturbed, it can happen that trigger markers are assigned to the
incorrect signal or are not assigned at all.
VCG calibration results are affected by the same factors as the VCG itself. For more information,
see chapter “Factors affecting the VCG signal” on page 416.
Methods of VCG calibration

VCG calibration can be performed in two ways:
1. It is recommended to use manual VCG calibration for problem-free cardiac triggering in all
patients.
For more results, see chapter “Manual VCG calibration” on page 419.
2. Continuous VCG calibration is easy to use. It is the default VCG calibration method.
For more information, see chapter “Continuous VCG calibration” on page 418.
3.9.8 ExamCards
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Affix: of ExamCards ID: 116877153163
ExamCards are essential for successful MR examinations.

Node title (original): What is an EC? ID: 116852746123
Status: Released
What are the main features of ExamCards?

• An ExamCard (EC) is the electronic version of a clinical MRI examination procedure. It has to
be defined once and can then be reused for other patients with similar examinations to
simplify the daily routine.
• An ExamCard consists of ExamCard items:
– Scan protocols (for example survey, T1- and T2-weighted scans in different
orientations).
– SmartLine processing steps
which are postprocessing presets that are automatically performed as part of an
ExamCard.
For more information, see .
• An ExamCard contains
Philips

– Geometry reuse:
Scan protocols within an ExamCard can share the same geometry settings.
If you plan one scan protocol with a specific geometry, all scan protocols with the same
geometry are planned automatically.
Geometries are mapped by name.
– Information about the ExamCard and the scan protocols:
A short description is available with an example image.
– ExamCard Properties:
ExamCard Properties are parameters that are valid for the complete examination, such
as Patient position (for example: supine or prone).
For more informatiation, see chapter “Functional Description of the Exam Setup” on
page 849.
• ExamCards are organized in ExamCard databases.
• You can create your own ExamCards according to your specific needs.
End fragment title: What is an EC?
3.9.8.2 Organization of ExamCards

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
3.9.8.2.1 ExamCard Databases

Status: Released
Node title (original): EC Databases ID: 116856025355

Status: Released
You find examples of ExamCards and scan protocols in the ExamCard databases (EC databases),
and you can store your own ExamCards here.
An EC database can be locked or unlocked:
• Locked EC databases cannot be changed, deleted, or overwritten.
• A lock is indicated by the Lock icon besides the EC database name.
Philips

EC database Database contents Properties of the EC database
Philips Philips ExamCards and scan • ExamCards and scan protocols in this database can
protocols only be used for scanning.
• The Philips EC database is always locked and cannot
be changed or overwritten.
• Some ExamCards are delivered as an example and
as starting point for the creation of your own
ExamCards. You find them in the Philips EC
database in the folder ExampleCards.
Hospital Hospital ExamCards and scan • ExamCards and scan protocols in this database can
protocols be used for scanning. They can be changed, deleted,
and overwritten.
• You can lock the Hospital EC database using
password protection.
For more information, see password protection.
Other Reserved for Import and Export of • ExamCards and scan protocols can always be stored
ExamCards and scan protocols in this database.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• You cannot lock the Other EC database.
Node title (original): password protection of EC Hospital ID: 117069873803-1

database Status: Released
Password Protection of the EC Hospital database

To ensure consistency and to protect the quality of the ExamCards, only authorized operators
can modify the contents of the Hospital database.
NOTICE
The default password is: Philips
End fragment title: password protection of EC Hospital database
Node title (original): reference to CPM ID: 116856162699

Status: Released
Philips

With Central Protocol Management (CPM) being used in your institution, your Hospital
ExamCard database is locked and you cannot edit it.
For more information about CPM, see chapter “Central Protocol Management (CPM)” on page
470 and the Instructions for Use of CPM.
End fragment title: reference to CPM
End fragment title: EC Databases
3.9.8.2.2 Automatic storage and retrieval of ExamCards

Status: Released
ExamCards are saved to and retrieved from the patient database with the examination.
• Saving an examination will also save the corresponding ExamCard
– when saving into any patient database;
– when exporting to devices.
• Retrieving an examination will also retrieve an ExamCard
– when retrieving from any patient database;
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

– when importing from devices.
NOTICE
ExamCards are not retrieved from datasets acquired with previous software releases.
Automatic ExamCard backup

• A backup of ExamCards is automatically generated and preserved for 3 hours. This can be
especially helpful after crashes.
– Simply reselect the examination and the ExamCard will be restored including planned
geometry.
– Double-click on the ExamCard to confirm.
3.9.8.2.3 Central Protocol Management (CPM)

Status: Released
Central Protocol Management (CPM) is a software cloud solution which is part of

PerformanceBridge and which you enter via the PerformanceBridge portal. CPM is to support
the MRI operator in the standardization of MRI ExamCards that are used on connected MRI
systems of the same field strength, system type, gradient, and software level.
Philips
CPM aims at improving workflow efficiency and standardization of ExamCards:

• It provides a central repository for all Hospital ExamCards for all connected MRI systems.
• It enables editing of ExamCards in the central repository (with validity check).
• It makes central ExamCards available for the use on local MRI systems.
The CPM service solution is compatible with Philips MRI systems on software release 5.4 and
higher.
For more information, see Instructions for Use of CPM.
How does CPM affect your work?

With CPM,
• the Hospital ExamCard (EC) database is locked for any ExamCard editing on your local
MRI system.
– You cannot unlock the Hospital EC database.
– Authorized operators edit Hospital ExamCards only centrally, but not on the local MRI
systems.
• the Other EC database is not locked.
– To edit local ExamCards on your MRI system, save the ExamCard to the Other EC
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
database.
– Distribute the validated ExamCard to connected MRI systems via CPM.
3.9.8.2.4 ExamCards Restart (EC Restart)

Status: Released
ExamCards are automatically restarted when a failure in the ExamCards application occurs.
This prevents the need of restarting the complete application software and consequently saves
time.
What are the main properties of ExamCards restart?

• During EC restart, the system's functionality is restricted.
– Planning and scanning cannot be performed
If an ExamCard is running, it aborts.
– In the planning viewports the planning geometry (lines) is cleared.
– Reviewing and analyzing of images is still possible.
However it is not possible to generate new imaging series.
• After restart, the ExamCards application is functional again.
ExamCards are restored to the last saved state.
– The aborted ExamCard is populated and available after EC restart.
– The ExamCard items retain their state (completed, aborted, not started yet).
Philips

– The previous planning and reviewing sessions are restored.

Any parameter modifications made to non-executed scans during that examination may
be lost.
– The ExamCard items show the previously opened analysis and review packages as inline
steps (stippled).
– A previously completed QuickSurvey is retained. It is not necessary to acquire a new
QuickSurvey.
– When you were editing an ExamCard independently of a patient examination (in Prep
mode without entering patient data), after EC restart this ExamCard is not restored for
editing.
• You are notified about the EC restart and about its progress.
How are you notified about the ExamCards restart?

• By a message in a pop-up window.
The message is cleared once the process is restored.
• By an icon on the system tray of the main menu bar.
The icon is cleared once the process is restored.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• The progress of restart is also indicated on the system tray.
What is not restored by ExamCards restart?

Anything that is not restored by EC restart, has to be redone:
• You have to plan the non-executed scans to make them ReadyToRun.
You can still use the already performed survey for planning.
• To continue with Smart Planning, you have to redo the SmartSurvey.
• Since any parameter modifications made to non-executed scans may be lost, you have to
check and probably modify these parameters again.
3.9.9 SmartExam
Affix: MAP ID: 117137044875
This section describes the main features of SmartExam, and also covers SmartExam Spine and
SmartExam Breast.

Status: Released
Node title (original): SmartExam ID: 117137099275

Affix: all system types Status: Released
Philips

breast, cervical and lumbar spine examinations. Automatic planning and scanning is realized by
SmartPlan, automatic processing by SmartLine Processing.
End fragment title: SmartExam
Node title (original): prerequisites for SmartExam ID: 117137212427

Status: Released
Prerequisites for SmartExam

There are several prerequisites for SmartExam in an ExamCard.
SmartSurvey
• The Smart ExamCard has to start with a SmartSurvey. The SmartSurvey is a dedicated 3D
survey scan covering the anatomic region completely.
You cannot change the parameters of the SmartSurvey.
SmartGeometries
• In a Smart ExamCard, only SmartGeometries can be planned automatically.
• Existing ’normal’ geometries need to be
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
– replaced with existing SmartGeometries

– converted into SmartGeometries.
NOTICE
SmartGeometries can be locked to protect them against being overwritten.
For more information, see Lock and unlock Smart geometries.
Refer to the Coils chapter to find out which coils can be used and are supported for SmartExam.
End fragment title: prerequisites for SmartExam
3.9.9.2 SmartPlan
Status: Released
Node title (original): SmartPlan with mention of breast (now all ID: 116871217163
system types) Status: Released
Affix: Ingenia Achieva Optimus Multiva Jaguar-Atl
Philips

SmartPlan is available for head, knee, shoulder, breast, cervical and lumbar spine examinations.
It is a tool that helps in automatically planning scans with respect to the geometry parameters
offcenter and angulation.
End fragment title: SmartPlan with mention of breast (now all system types)
SmartPlan makes use of an algorithm that automatically detects some typical anatomic
structures in a Smart survey, e.g. corpus callosum for brain examinations, but also symmetry
aspects are taken into account. These typical structures are recognized, stored and used as a
reference for further automatic planning.
SmartGeometry Database
SmartPlan makes use of a SmartGeometry database. In this database, anatomy-specific
SmartGeometries are stored. These SmartGeometries are predefined with the most common
way of planning and allow for the immediate use of SmartExam. If another way of planning is
preferred, user-specified Smart geometries can be created:
In the Philips geometry database, all angulations are set to zero for shoulder, breast, cervical
and lumbar spine. This is also referred to as ’Snap-to-table’.
NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

If you mirror or flip the source images, SmartPlan cannot analyze the images properly.
In this case, SmartLine processing steps (such as calculation of Maximum Intensity Projections
or Multiple Planar Reformats are not performed.
3.9.9.3 SmartLine Processing

Status: Released
SmartLine Processing performs intelligent background processing of multiple image datasets in

parallel with image acquisition which saves time.
Node title (original): SmartLine processing suited packages ID: 117384237579-1
Status: Released
SmartLine Processing applies for the following Review render modes:

• MPR and MIP
• Orthoview
• MobiView
• PicturePlus
End fragment title: SmartLine processing suited packages
Node title (original): workflow related ID: 117384278667

Status: Released
Once a new imaging series is created with a Review package,

• a new imaging series is created,
Philips

• a postprocessing item is added to the ExamCard.

The performed operation is part of the current ExamCard and in such a way automatically
performed whenever the ExamCard is executed again.
End fragment title: workflow related
NOTICE
The maximum number of SmartLine processing steps is 6.
Node title (original): Smart MPR ID: 116868246411

Status: Released
Smart MPR
If a 3D scan is planned using SmartExam, angulations are stored relative to the volume in the
Smart MPR.
This means that every MPR will have the same orientation if this ExamCard is stored with the
SmartLine MPR, .
End fragment title: Smart MPR
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.9.9.4 SmartExam Spine

Status: Released
A SmartExam Spine examination requires additional features to cope with variations in planning
procedures compared to head, knee and shoulder examinations.
Every spine examination is unique. It is not always known beforehand at which disc level the
transverse scans need to be positioned. SmartExam Spine comes with a unique graphical user
interface. A schematic drawing of the spine allows easy definition of the precise levels for each
stack.
Often a high resolution scan is necessary to determine the precise locations at which the
transverse stacks must be planned. A Philips-unique snapping mechanism is implemented:
dragging a stack in the graphical planscan user interface from one disc level to another results
in the stack snapping precisely to the new disc level. This snapping occurs according to the user
prefered planning as learned during the training phase.
If necessary, all stacks can be freely manipulated to tweak and train SmartExam planning
better. The graphical planscan user interface automatically differentiates between manual fine
tuning of individual stacks and dropping stacks at different levels.
NOTICE
Severe pathology or metal might cause SmartExam Spine to fail.
Philips

3.9.9.5 SmartExam Breast

Status: Released
Different to other anatomies, Image Based (IB) Shimming is automatically performed as part of
SmartExam Breast, based on the SmartBreast shimming algorithm.
SmartBreast shimming requires that a SmartBreast survey is performed. The SmartBreast
survey is designed to acquire the entire volume of tissue placed in the breast coil. It is
important to position the patient so that they are in the center of the chosen coil. As with other
Smart Surveys, first 3D images are acquired, then orthogonal reconstructions (including both
left and right breasts) are created and automatically updated in the view ports upon completion
of the SmartExam analysis.
Smart Surveys with the
orthogonal reconstructions.
To provide optimal shimming for the tissue of interest, SmartBreast shimming uses the 3D
volume acquired during the SmartBreast Survey: an automatic segmentation is performed that
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

excludes the lungs, heart, arms and silicone if present.
Segmentation of the breasts to
exclude lungs, heart, arms and
silicone.
Shimming is performed on the remaining breast and axillae, leading to a uniform flip angle in
the areas of interest and uniform fat suppression. Optimal shimming is obtained by calculating
a B0 map before shimming and making adjustments to the shim in order to optimize the B0 in
the segmented area.
B0 maps.
Once calculations are completed they are available to the system to be applied to any sequence
in which SmartBreast shimming is the enabled shim parameter.
Philips

NOTICE
To utilize the segmentation algorithm for the SPIR and SPAIR sequences, enable SmartBreast
shimming by the 'Shimming' parameter on the 'Contrast' tab.
A shim box is not visualized, and the values calculated by SmartBreast shimming are used.
Node title (original): 3.0T systems ID: 116872806923

Status: Released
Additionally, if performing on a 3.0T system, RF shimming must be adaptive and therefore a B1

calibration scan is required.
End fragment title: 3.0T systems
A system with SmartBreast enabled is delivered with trained Smart Geometries. The
SmartBreast geometries are trained at 0 angle, covering the breasts:
• Cor_PH –centered right to left
• Sag_PH – centered foot to head according to the breast tissue
• Tra_PH – centered to just anterior to the subcutaneous adipose tissue and chest wall,
midway right and left between the breasts.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Planning example.
If the provided Smart Geometries do not meet the user's individual needs, site specific
geometries can be trained. For more information, refer to the section SmartExam:
Workflow ’Set up a Smart ExamCard’.
Related parameters
• Shim (values relevant for SmartExam Breast: IB-Volume, SmartBreast)
• RF Shim (values relevant for SmartExam Breast: IB-Volume, SmartBreast)
• Interactive F0
3.9.10 Settings and Tools

Affix: see Ready for Review ID: 115202957451
Philips

3.9.10.1 Contrast Preset Settings

Status: Released
3.9.10.1.1 Functional Description

Affix: Contrast Preset Settings ID: 114088586763
Presets for contrast administration store contrast-agent specific attributes. Use these presets to
avoid repetitive typing when you enter mandatory contrast agent information.
The Contrast Preset Settings are available in the Settings and Tools on the Navigation Bar.
You can add new presets and you can modify, delete and share them among MRI systems. The
presets are password-protected.
Each contrast preset contains the following information.
Node title (original): 1 - contrast-agent specific attributes ID: 114088722955
stored in presets Status: Released
Contrast-agent specific attributes stored in Possible values
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

presets
Commercial name (of contrast agent) Free text uniquely identifying the preset such as
• Magnevist
Ingredient Drop-down menu with

• Air
• Barium
• Carbon Dioxide
• Gadolinium (which is the default setting)
• Iodine
• Iron
• Oxygen
• Water
• Xenon
Philips

Contrast-agent specific attributes stored in Possible values

presets
Agent Drop-down menu, for example with

• Gadodiamide
• Gadolinium
• Metrizamide
• Oxygen
• Radiopaque medium
• Sodium diatrizoate
• ...
Route Drop-down menu with

• intravenous (which is the default setting)
• intra-arterial
• intramuscular
• subcutaneous
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• intracutaneous
• intraperitoneal
• intramedullary
• intrahecal
• intra-articular
• intraepithelial
• topical
• oral
• transluminal
• intraluminal
• extraluminal
• by inhalation
Concentration numerical value in mmol/ml
Dosage numerical value in ml/kg and mmol/kg

End fragment title: 1 - contrast-agent specific attributes stored in presets
Guidance
{ Maethger, Maria, 8/24/2020 4:00:06 PM: Not sure what's this section. Maybe it is better in
the operation "Adding a new Preset" 114088842507?}
Carefully read the contrast agent label and look up the maximum dosage prescribed. The
Contrast Preset Settings window guides you with the message:
Philips

Fill in concentration and dosage with the values

prescribed on the contrast agent label.
3.9.10.1.2 Routine Procedures

Status: Released
3.9.10.1.2. Adding a New Contrast Preset

1 Last Content Modificator: Maethger, Maria
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

ID: 114088842507
Status: Released
The goal of this workflow is to add a new contrast preset for the registration of contrast agent
injection.
• You add new presets independent of an examination.
• During an examination, you select the preset instead of manually entering all mandatory
contrast-agent specific attributes.
Node title (original): adding preset from contrast admin ID: 114088961675
window & from System menu Status: Released
► To open the Contrast Preset Settings, click Settings and Tools in the Navigation Bar
and then Contrast Preset Settings....
► To unlock the preset database, click Unlock to Customize and enter the password.
► Click Add Preset (1), then do any of the following:
• Select Create Preset (2) from the drop-down menu.
This option allows to create a new preset from scratch.
• Select Duplicate Current Preset (3) from the drop-down menu.
This option allows to modify a duplicate of the current preset and save with a different
name.
• Select Import Presets (4) from the drop-down menu.
This option allows you to import presets from other systems to your system. For more
information on importing contrast presets, see chapter “Importing presets” on page 483.
Philips

1
2
3
4
► Enter or select values for all contrast-specific attributes. All fields are mandatory, missing
fields are marked by an orange asterisk.
For more information about contrast-agent specific attributes, see chapter “Functional
Description” on page 478.
5
6
7
8
9
10
• Specify a unique Commercial name (5).

The commercial name is also used as preset name.
• Select an Ingredient (6) from the drop-down menu.
• Select an Agent (7)from the drop-down menu.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Select the Route (8) from the drop-down menu.

• Enter the Concentration (9) in mmol/ml.
• Enter the Dosage (10) in ml/kg.
• To save the preset when all mandatory fields are entered correctly and to close the
window, click Save.
• To close the window without saving, click Cancel.
End fragment title: adding preset from contrast admin window & from System menu
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/15/2020 9:42:10 AM: I have not reviewed in detail, since I think
that you reused most of the old texts and replaced the graphics. It looks good to me so far.
More when I'm back from my vacation.}
3.9.10.1.2. Editing a Contrast Preset

2 Last Content Modificator: Maethger, Maria ID: 114088847243
Status: Released
The goal of this workflow is to edit a preset for the registration of contrast agent injection.
⊳ In the Contrast Preset Settings window:
► Select the preset you want to modify from the preset drop-down menu, then click Edit.
Philips

► Edit the values for the contrast-specific attributes you want to change. All fields are
mandatory, missing fields are marked by a red asterisk.
For more information about contrast-agent specific attributes, see chapter “” on page 478.
• To save the preset when all mandatory fields are entered correctly and to close the
window, click Save.
• To close the window without saving, click Cancel.
3.9.10.1.2. Deleting a Contrast Preset

3 Last Content Modificator: Heuvel, Martina van den ID: 114088952459
Status: Released
The goal of this workflow is to delete a preset for the registration of contrast agent injection.
► Select the preset you want to delete from the preset drop-down menu, then click Delete.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨ A query pops up: "Are you sure you want to delete <preset name>?"
• To delete the preset, click Yes.
• To still keep the current preset, click No.
3.9.10.1.2. Sharing Contrast Presets

Status: Released
You can share contrast presets among your MRI systems. By this there is no need to manually
enter identical presets at all systems.
To copy contrast administration presets from one MRI system to other MRI systems:
• First you export your presets to a USB stick.
• Then at the other MRI systems you import these presets from the USB stick.
You can also use the Export/Import functionality to backup your presets.
Node title (original): Exporting Contrast presets ID: 114115008267
Status: Released
Exporting presets
Philips

► To export all contrast presets, click Export.
► To select the destination, browse to the desired folder (possibly located on a USB stick).
► To start the export procedure, click Export.
• Every preset is saved as a separate file.
• The name of the preset is used as name of the file.
• If a file of the same name already exists, it is overwritten by the newest version.
⇨ When the export is completed, the message "Successfully exported x presets" is displayed.
"x" is the number of exported presets.
End fragment title: Exporting Contrast presets
Node title (original): Importing Contrast presets ID: 114115123723

Status: Released
Importing presets
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► To import contrast presets from a folder, click Add (1) and select Import Presets... (2) from
the drop-down menu.
► To select the source, browse to the desired folder (possibly located on a USB stick).
► Select the presets that you want to import.
• To select one preset, click on its name.
• To select multiple consecutive presets, hold Shift while dragging over the presets.
• To select multiple individual presets, hold Ctrl while clicking on the presets.
► To start the import procedure, click Import.
If a preset of the same name already exists, it is overwritten by the newest version.
Philips

⇨ When the import is completed, the message "Successfully imported x presets" is displayed.
"x" is the number of imported presets.
End fragment title: Importing Contrast presets
3.9.10.2 AutoVoice Settings

Status: Released

Affix: AutoVoice ID: 114132716427
Node title (original): AutoVoice_general ID: 114132908683

Status: Released
AutoVoice provides the option to give pre-recorded, automated instructions to the patient
during scanning. Use AutoVoice to instruct or inform the patient about:
• Breathholds
• Scan duration
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Tabletop movement
Preferred instruction settings can be set at system level. Settings related to language and
breathholds can also be customized at examination level or scan level. AutoVoice Settings... are
available in the Settings and Tools on the Navigation Bar.
End fragment title: AutoVoice_general
Node title (original): Customize AutoVoice ID: 114133057931

Status: Released
Displaying preset instruction sets

{ Maethger, Maria, 10/30/2020 9:31:24 AM: I am not sure what to do here. This is a bit short
for an own topic. But it is operational...}
Presets of AutoVoice instructions are delivered with the MRI system. These Philips presets are
available in various languages and cannot be changed.
To view the instructions that are available in the presets:
► Click Settings and Tools , then AutoVoice Settings....

► In the AutoVoice window, click the Customize instruction sets tab.
► Click the arrow next to the drop-down menu and select the language you want to view.
⇨ The list with instructions available within the chosen set is shown.
A brief description of each instruction is listed:
Description Type of instruction: Breathhold, scan duration, tabletop movement
Instruction label Name of the specific AutoVoice instruction

Philips

Duration Time (in seconds) required to play the instruction
Instruction text <language> Actual text of the instruction (displayed in the selected UI language).
You can also create your own presets and save them as a new set of instructions, see chapter
“Customizing Instruction Sets” on page 486.
End fragment title: Customize AutoVoice
3.9.10.2.1. Breathhold Settings on Scan Level

1 Last Content Modificator: Drunen, Jenneke van ID: 114134677259
Status: Released
Node title (original): Breathhold settings on scan level ID: 114129462923

Status: Released
For each breathhold scan, settings are displayed on the Physiology Display in the Exam
Overview (see table). All or some of these settings can be adjusted, depending on the type of
scan.
Breathhold mode Indicate whether breathholds must be done during inspiration or expiration.
Slices/Breathhold Set the number of slices that must be scanned during a single breathhold.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Duration Set the duration of the breathhold in seconds.
Voice instruction (AutoVoice Select the type of instruction that must be played: direct, normal, or long
only) duration.{ Maethger, Maria, 10/19/2020 2:00:56 PM: UI Text "long, direct,
normal"??}
Breath hold guidance (AutoVoice Select the type of breathhold guidance. Select Use AutoVoice settings to use
only) the system level settings (when enabled on system level), AutoVoice will be
used.
Select Manual to force a manual instruction, even when AutoVoice is enabled
on system level.
Tab. 22: Breathhold parameters on scan level.

End fragment title: Breathhold settings on scan level

Status: Released
3.9.10.2.2. Setting AutoVoice on System Level

Status: Released
Node title (original): Enable or disable AutoVoice_system level ID: 114135471371

Status: Released
To enable AutoVoice on system level and to define which features of AutoVoice to use:
Philips

► Click Settings and Tools in the Navigation Bar and then AutoVoice Settings....
⇨ The AutoVoice window opens.
► On the Settings tab, click the AutoVoice check box, to enable or disable AutoVoice.
End fragment title: Enable or disable AutoVoice_system level
Node title (original): Select AutoVoice instructions_system level ID: 114135618187

Status: Released
Once AutoVoice is enabled, select the type of instructions or information you want AutoVoice
to provide.
► Click the check box in front of an instruction to enable or disable it. You can select:
• Guide all patients through breathhold scans.
• Inform all patients about the duration of the scan before the start of each scan.
• Warn all patients before the table moves.
Setting the default language for AutoVoice

To select the default AutoVoice language:
► Click on the Select Language drop-down menu.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Select the desired default language for AutoVoice.
The selected instructions are played for all patients during all scans.
You can still change language settings for individual examinations, see chapter “Setting
AutoVoice on Examination Level” on page 844.
If language is changed at examination level, the system will reset to the default language for the
following new examination.
Setting the default recovery time for breathholds

The recovery time controls the interval between successive breathhold instructions in a single
scan. To set the recovery time:
► Click the drop-down list next to Recovery time for all patients, between successive
breathholds in a single scan.
► Select the preferred recovery time from the preset list (5–30 seconds).
You can still change the recovery time between successive breathholds for individual
examinations, see chapter “Setting AutoVoice on Examination Level” on page 844.
End fragment title: Select AutoVoice instructions_system level
3.9.10.2.2. Customizing Instruction Sets

Status: Released
Node title (original): AV Instruction sets_general ID: 114129941131

Status: Released
Philips
The AutoVoice preset instructions are listed in the AutoVoice window. To view the presets:

► Click Settings and Tools in the Navigation Bar and then AutoVoice Settings....
► Select the Customize instruction sets tab.
⇨ The list with all available instructions within a set are displayed.
The Phillips presets are available in various languages. To select a different language:
► Click the arrow next to the language drop-down menu.
► Select the language you want to use.
► To play an instruction, click the Play icon in front of the instruction.
End fragment title: AV Instruction sets_general
Node title (original): AV Create customized set ID: 114130118411

Status: Released
Creating a customized set

To create a customized set of AutoVoice instructions:
► Click Add Set, then do one of the following:
• To create a whole new set, click Create new set.
• To copy the current set and make adaptations to it, click Duplicate current Set.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• To import a set from another location, click Import set from a file.
The Philips presets cannot be changed but they can be duplicated and then customized. The
Philips presets are indicated by a lock icon in front of the preset name.
End fragment title: AV Create customized set
Node title (original): AV Create a new set ID: 114130267659

Status: Released
Create a new set

When you click Add Set and Create new set, a pop-up window appears.
► Enter a name for the new set.
► Click Create.
⇨ A new list with all required instructions appears. The description shows a window for the
new instruction text that can be entered in the Edit & Record instruction window and the
text used in the last selected preset.
⇨ The new name is added to the language drop-down menu.
• Each instruction must be recorded manually.
• Instructions without recording are indicated with an orange asterisk.
• Instructions with an orange asterisk must be recorded before the set can be used during
scans.
• Instructions with a recording are indicated with a Play button.

• The notice 'Incomplete' is added behind the name of a set for which not all instructions are
Philips
recorded.

► Click the instruction you want to edit. The instruction line is highlighted.
► Click the Edit button at the right-end of the instruction.

⇨ The Edit & Record instruction window opens (see chapter “Editing and Recording
Instructions” on page 489).
End fragment title: AV Create a new set
Node title (original): AV duplicate and edit a set ID: 114130443403

Status: Released
Duplicate and adapt a current set

When you click Add Set and Duplicate current Set, a pop-up window appears.
► Enter a name for the duplicate set. The system provides a name suggestion.
► Click Duplicate.
⇨ A copy of the list you duplicated appears. The description shows both the text of the
original set and a window to contain the text for the adapted set.
⇨ The new name is added to the language drop-down menu.
To play a recording, click Play in front of an instruction.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

To edit or record an instruction:
► Click the instruction you want to edit. The instruction line is highlighted.
► Click the Edit button at the right-end of the instruction.

⇨ The Edit & Record instruction window opens (see chapter “Editing and Recording
Instructions” on page 489).
End fragment title: AV duplicate and edit a set
Node title (original): AV import a set ID: 114130619915

Status: Released
Import a set from a file

Once you click Add Set and Import set from a file:
► Navigate to the location of the set you want to import. Select the file.
► Click Select.
► If the name of the file is already present in the preset list, you are prompted to either type
another name or to overwrite the existing file. Click Import to import the file under the
selected name.
When the import is complete, the message Import successful is displayed.
► Click OK.
⇨ The set is imported and the name of the file is added to the drop-down menu.
End fragment title: AV import a set
Node title (original): AV Rename a set ID: 114291081867

Philips
Status: Released

Renaming a set
Philips preset instructions cannot be renamed. These presets are indicated with a lock icon in
front of the name.
► Select the set you want to rename.
► Click Edit above the instruction list.

► Enter a new name for the instruction set.
► Click Rename.
End fragment title: AV Rename a set
Node title (original): AV Delete a set ID: 114130796427

Status: Released
Deleting a set
Philips preset instructions cannot be deleted. These presets are indicated with a lock icon in
front of the name.
To delete a customized set:
► Select the set you want to delete.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Click Delete.
► Confirm that you want to delete the set and click Yes.
End fragment title: AV Delete a set
Node title (original): AV export a set ID: 114130972939

Status: Released
Export a preset
To export a preset for back-up or use on other systems:
► Select the preset you want to export.
► Click the Export button.
► Choose the location where you want to save the preset.
► Click Select.
⇨ The preset is saved as a zip-file.
End fragment title: AV export a set
3.9.10.2.2. Editing and Recording Instructions

Status: Released
⊳ In the Edit & Record instruction window:

► Click in the Instruction text box.
► Type the text of the new instruction.
Philips

To make a new recording:

► Click Record.
► Press Talk on the operator-patient intercom. The recording starts when Talk is pressed.
► Speak the instructions into the microphone of the operator-patient intercom.
► To stop the recording, release Talk on the operator-patient intercom.
► To hear the new instruction, click Play.
► If you want to re-record the instruction, repeat the steps above.
► Click OK to save and go back to the instruction set.
While recording the instruction, the sound waves are indicated in blue in the Edit & Record
instruction window. You can increase or decrease the period of silence before and after an
instruction. To do so
► Hover the cursor over one of the two vertical blue lines. The cursor changes to a horizontal
arrow.
► Click the blue line and drag to the left or right.
⇨ The silent period is indicated with a horizontal blue line. Silent periods are increased (or
decreased) per second. The number of seconds is indicated underneath the vertical line.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Once you release the vertical line, the silent period is set. You can see the total duration of
the instruction underneath the right vertical blue line.
Fig. 113: Sound waves indicated in the Edit & Record window. Without (a) and with (b) an extra silent period before
and after the instruction.
3.9.10.3 Image Display Settings

Status: Released

Affix: Image Display Settings ID: 114156255883
Philips

In the Image Display Settings, you can change the way you look at the images (image
orientation) and the way images are numbered (slice order) at system level. You can:
• Change the default display settings.
• Create customized settings for specific anatomies.
Settings apply to the operator's console, remote workstations and PACS systems after system
restart.
NOTICE
Ensure that information regarding patient position, patient orientation and anatomic region is
entered correctly in the ExamCard Properties (see ). Only then the image display is correct for
each anatomy and each way of positioning.
The Image Display Settings are available in the Settings and Tools on the Navigation Bar.
The Display settings for field shows for which anatomies the displayed settings are applicable.
The display settings and slice order are indicated by an image for each plane, sagittal, coronal
and transverse.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
You can change the default settings using the buttons described in chapter “Changing Image
Display Settings” on page 491.
When you create customized settings for specific anatomies, a new field is added underneath
the default field (see chapter “Setting Anatomy-Specific Image Display Settings” on page 493).
The top field always displays the default settings.

Status: Released
3.9.10.3.2. Changing Image Display Settings

Status: Released
The image display settings are locked and require a password to change.
To change the image display settings:
⊳ In the Image Display Settings window:
Philips

► Click Unlock to Customize and enter the password.

► At the bottom, click the Select Anatomy drop-down menu to select an anatomy to change.
⇨ If you hover over the images, buttons to change the image display appear underneath each
plane.
Mirror button Flip button Change slice order button

(sagittal orientation only)
Tab. 23: Image display change buttons
Mirror or flip image

► Point the cursor in the field that requires a change. Buttons appear underneath each plane.
► Click the Mirror button (sagittal only) or Flip button under the plane you want to change.
The images that indicate display settings change direction accordingly.
► Click the button again to return to the previous setting.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

a
Fig. 114: The images indicate the selected display settings. a. Original settings. b. Sagittal plane image display settings
are mirrored. c. Sagittal and coronal plane image display settings are flipped.
Slice order
► To change slice display order, click the Change slice order button under the plane for which
you want to change the reviewing slice order.
The direction of the arrow indicating the slice order changes. The arrow on the slice order
button also changes direction.
► Click the Change slice order button again to return to the previous setting.
Philips

Fig. 115: Change of slice order. a. Original settings. b. Slice order change for transverse orientation. The arrow
indicating the slice order and the arrow on the slice order button both change direction.
Save changes
► Click Save to save changes you made to the image display settings.
► Click Reset at the left top, to remove all changes and to return to previously saved
settings but to remain within the Image Display Settings window.
After reset, you go back to the earlier settings.
► Click Cancel to close the Image Display Settings window without saving changes.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.9.10.3.2. Setting Anatomy-Specific Image Display Settings

Status: Released
You can set display settings for specific anatomies.

► Click Unlock to Customize and enter the password.
► Do one of the following:
• In the Display settings for field, click the required anatomy.
In the pop-up window, click Customize display settings for <selected anatomy>*.
• At the bottom of the window, click the Select Anatomy drop-down arrow.
Select the required anatomy.
⇨ A new field appears underneath the default field.
► To customize the display settings for the selected anatomy, use the buttons as described in
chapter “Changing Image Display Settings” on page 491.
* The name of the selected anatomy appears here.
To ensure consistency, the sagittal slice order of unpaired anatomies (head, neck, spine, thorax,
abdomen, breast, and pelvis) can only be set in the default settings at the top. To change the
sagittal slice order for unpaired anatomies, first change the default settings, then create the
required anatomy-specific settings.
Philips

NOTICE
When display settings are already customized for an unpaired anatomy, sagittal slice order can
no longer be changed at default level. To change the sagittal slice order for unpaired
anatomies, remove anatomy-specific settings for unpaired anatomies first. The sagittal slice
order for paired anatomies such as knee and elbow can always be customized.
Anatomy-specific settings that differ from the default settings are highlighted in blue.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

c
Fig. 116: Image display settings that are different from default settings are highlighted in blue. a. Default settings. b.
Mirrored settings for sagittal head images, flipped settings coronal head images. c. Slice order change for transverse
head images.
To assign multiple anatomies to a customized display setting:

► Click the Add Anatomy drop-down arrow within the customized field.
► Select the required anatomy from the drop-down menu
► To add additional anatomies, repeat the process.
NOTICE
Customized settings cannot be combined for all anatomies. Paired anatomies (hips, knees,
ankles, feet, shoulders, elbows, wrists, and hands) cannot be combined with head, neck,
thorax, spine, abdomen, breast, and pelvis anatomies.
Examinations with paired anatomies

When you create a custom setting for a paired anatomy, the new field automatically shows left
and right settings. For sagittal images, it is possible to mirror or change the slice order settings
for the left or the right side only. Flipping an image is always applied to both sides, as are slice
order changes for coronal and transverse images.
Philips

Fig. 117: Image display settings that are different from default settings are highlighted in blue a. Flipped images for
transverse foot images, applicable for both sides. b. Mirrored sagittal images for the right foot only. c. Slice order
change for sagittal images of right foot and coronal images, applicable for both sides.
Removing display settings for specific anatomies

To remove an anatomy with customized Image Display Settings:
► Click on the anatomy name.
► In the pop-up window, click Remove customization. The anatomy reappears in the default
field.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Save settings
► To save changes to Image Display Settings, click Save.

► To close the Image Display Settings window without saving changes, click Cancel.
3.9.10.3.2. Exporting and Importing Image Display Settings

Status: Released
You can export customized image display settings to:

• Load settings onto another scanner.
• Create a back-up.
To export Image Display settings:

► Click Export at the top right of the Image Display Settings window.
► Click Browse and navigate to the location where you want to save the settings.
► Click Select.
► Click Export to finalize the export. The Image Display settings are saved under file name
Philips
"Export.preset".

To import Image Display Settings:

► Click Import , at the top right of the Image Display Settings window.
► Click Browse and navigate to the location where previously stored settings are saved.
► Select the required file and click Select.
► Click Import in the Import Preset window to start the import.
3.9.10.4 ExamCard Manager

Status: Released
This section describes the ExamCard Manager and how to edit ExamCards independently of the
current examination.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
The ExamCard Manager is available in Settings and Tools on the Navigation Bar.
With the ExamCard Manager, you modify the Hospital ExamCard database independently of
the current examination. The ExamCard Manager allows you:
• To create a new ExamCard.
• To edit (copy, modify, rename, delete, import and export) an existing ExamCard in the same
way as during an examination.
• To edit EC items (scan protocols) in the Advanced Parameters.
• To reorder EC items.
• To filter ExamCards based on their RIS code.
• To assign a popularity to the ExamCard. ExamCards with a higher popularity appear higher
on the list of ExamCards (with similar RIS code).
• To save this ExamCard so that you can reuse it in the examinations.
• To manage SmartGeometries in the SmartGeometries Database.
The ExamCard Manager provides you with
• Realistic information about SED (Specific Energy Dose).
The calculation of the SED is based on the knowledge of the patient weight, and the values
on the scan information page are coil dependent. For a calculation as accurate as possible,
you must enter a patient weight and select the coil you are going to use.
• The scan information page.
For more information, see chapter “Scan Information Page” on page 919.
Philips

Node title (original): password protection of EC Hospital ID: 117069873803-2

database Status: Released
Password Protection of the EC Hospital database

To ensure consistency and to protect the quality of the ExamCards, only authorized operators
can modify the contents of the Hospital database.
NOTICE
The default password is: Philips
End fragment title: password protection of EC Hospital database
Hospital administrators or your service provider can change or reset the ExamCard Manager
password.
3.9.10.4.2 User Interface

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
The ExamCard Manager... opens with four columns where the left-most column displays the
ExamCard databases. Initially the other three columns are empty and only filled from left to
right when an ExamCard database is selected.
1. ExamCard databases and
(sub-)anatomy folders with
the RIS Code filter
2. ExamCards in selected
(sub-)anatomy folder
3. ExamCard items of selected
ExamCard
4. Information for selected
ExamCard or ExamCard
item
When you edit or create an ExamCard, the Exam Setup and the Scan Overview are displayed
and allow to work in the usual way.
Philips

When you edit an ExamCard item, the Scan Overview and the Advanced Parameters are
displayed and allow to work in the usual way.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

ExamCard Summary
The ExamCard Summary provides you with information about the ExamCard. It allows you to
assign characteristics to the selected ExamCard which help you in finding the best-suited
ExamCard for your examination.
From left to right, the ExamCard Summary displays:
• Validity of the ExamCard related to the patient's age (< 3 years) and weight (around ... kg).
• Anatomy and Anatomic Region.
• Safety information (SED as indicated by value and approximate level).
• RIS Code
• Popularity of the ExamCard ( The more light gray bars, the higher the popularity).
• A button to adjust Smart Exam: depending on the ExamCard either Convert to SmartExam
or Manage SmartExam
3.9.10.4.3 Managing ExamCards

Philips
Status: Released

You create and edit ExamCards independently of the current examination with the ExamCard
Manager.
Node title (original): 0 Starting up the EC Manager ID: 117081117579
Status: Released
Starting up the ExamCard Manager

► On the Navigation bar, click Settings and Tools (F10). Then select ExamCard Manager....
Alternatively press Ctrl+K.
► To unlock the ExamCard Manager..., enter the password. Then click Unlock.
⇨ The ExamCard manager opens in a new window.
End fragment title: 0 Starting up the EC Manager
Node title (original): 1 setting up a new ExamCard ID: 117081199627

Status: Released
Setting up or editing an ExamCard

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• To create a new ExamCard, click New ExamCard.

• To edit an existing ExamCard, browse to the ExamCard, and double-click it.
Alternatively filter the existing ExamCards based on their RIS code, and use the RIS Code
filter.
► To add a scan protocol from the database to the ExamCard, browse to the scan protocol
and select it. Then click Add Scan .

Repeat this step as often as needed.
► To remove a scan protocol from the ExamCard, right-click the scan protocol and select
Delete.
► Set up the ExamCard in the usual way:
• To adjust the ExamCard properties, modify the Exam Setup.
• To adjust an ExamCard item in the Advanced Parameters, double-click the ExamCard
item. Then change the parameters.
• To change the order of the ExamCard items, drag the items in the Scan Overview.
• To add a pause, contrast agent injection or breathhold, right-click the items in the Scan
Overview.
You can also edit an ExamCard in Split View. Split View provides you with two views of EC
databases and ExamCards. It allows you to drag and drop ExamCards and protocols from one
view to the other. As such, Split View simplifies the workflow.
End fragment title: 1 setting up a new ExamCard
Node title (original): 2 saving EC ID: 117085208715

Status: Released
Philips

Saving the ExamCard

► First assign ExamCard characteristics to the ExamCard. To do so, enter the following data
into the ExamCard Summary:
• RIS Code
• Popularity
To set the ExamCard to the highest popularity, click (Set Highest Popularity).
To reset the ExamCard popularity, click (Reset Popularity).

• Validity of the ExamCard based on patient's age and patient weight: For Patients of < 3
years and around ... kg.
• Anatomy and anatomic region.
► Then do any of the following:
• Click Save to save the ExamCard under the initial name.
• Click Save As to save the ExamCard under a different name. Then browse to the new
destination, and enter a name for the ExamCard.
End fragment title: 2 saving EC
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

3.9.10.4.4 Managing SmartGeometries
Status: Released
Node title (original): SmartEx: SmartGeometry DB Editor ID: 117137572619

Status: Released
The ExamCard Manager allows you:

• To view the existing SmartGeometries for all anatomic regions: the Philips prelearned ones
and the user defined ones;
• To delete a user defined SmartGeometry or to delete all samples of a user defined
SmartGeometry.
• To import or export SmartGeometries.
• To lock the SmartGeometries Database.
NOTICE
Philips prelearned SmartGeometries are grayed out and cannot be deleted.
End fragment title: SmartEx: SmartGeometry DB Editor
Node title (original): Workflow Managing SmartGeometries ID: 117384337547

Status: Released
Philips
⊳ Prerequisite: You are in the ExamCard Manager.

► Click SmartGeometries.
The SmartGeometries Database window opens.
► To browse to the SmartGeometries that you want to change, select the anatomy and
anatomic region from the drop-down list.
► To delete a SmartGeometry, select the geometry. Then click Remove Selected.
► To delete samples of a SmartGeometry, select the Samples. Then click Remove Selected.
► To import or export a SmartGeometry, click Import or Export. Then select the destination.
► To lock the SmartGeometries Database, click Lock Database.
► To leave the SmartGeometries Database, click Close.
End fragment title: Workflow Managing SmartGeometries
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.9.10.4.5 Managing ExamCard Databases

Affix: MAP ID: 117405749515
You import and export ExamCards, and you lock or unlock the Hospital ExamCard Database
with the ExamCard Manager.
3.9.10.4.5. Locking and Unlocking ExamCard Databases

Status: Released
You lock the Hospital ExamCard Database to write-protect it and to prevent it is overwritten by
mistake.
⊳ You are in the password-protected ExamCard Manager.
► Ciick Databases.
► To lock the Hospital database, right-click it. Then select Lock Database.
► To unlock the Hospital database, right-click it. Then select Unlock Database.
Philips

3.9.10.4.5. Exporting of ExamCards

Status: Released
Node title (original): Intro: Reason for export or import ID: 117405810315-1
Status: Released
You export or import ExamCards to reuse the ExamCard on another Philips MRI scanner.
In this case, always make sure that the configurations of the systems are identical.
Otherwise the ExamCard(s) possibly do not work or provide lower quality than expected.
End fragment title: Intro: Reason for export or import
⊳ You are in the ExamCard Manager.

► To select an ExamCard or multiple ExamCards for export, click the ExamCard(s) in an
ExamCard database.
Multiple selection is possible with the Shift or Ctrl keys.
► Right-click the selection. Then select Export ExamCards....
► Browse to the destination folder.
To confirm, click Export.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The function Export to NetForum exports the selected ExamCard(s) to the FTP-destination E:\
\Export\ExamCards\*.NetForumExamCard.
Node title (original): Contact service provider for export or ID: 117408870667-1
import of EC database Status: Released
If you want to import or export a complete ExamCard database, contact your service provider.
End fragment title: Contact service provider for export or import of EC database
3.9.10.4.5. Importing of ExamCards and EC Databases

Status: Released
Node title (original): Intro: Reason for export or import ID: 117405810315-2
Status: Released
You export or import ExamCards to reuse the ExamCard on another Philips MRI scanner.
In this case, always make sure that the configurations of the systems are identical.
Otherwise the ExamCard(s) possibly do not work or provide lower quality than expected.
End fragment title: Intro: Reason for export or import
Importing specific ExamCards

Make sure that the releases are the same or newer for the system where you want to import an
ExamCard to.
⊳ You are in the ExamCard Manager.
Philips

⊳ Prerequisite: The software release of the import destination folder is the same as or newer
than the source folder.
1. Right-click any ExamCard database, then select Import ExamCards....
2. Browse to the ExamCard which has to be imported. Then click Import.
⇨ The Import destination always is the InBox of the Other ExamCards database.
⇨ During the import of ExamCards, geometry filtering removes the unused geometries from
the ExamCards.
Node title (original): Contact service provider for export or ID: 117408870667-2
import of EC database Status: Released
If you want to import or export a complete ExamCard database, contact your service provider.
End fragment title: Contact service provider for export or import of EC database
3.9.10.5 Customer Feedback

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3.9.10.5.1 Providing Feedback

Status: Released
When you face problems during your daily operation, you provide feedback with the Feedback
tool. This tool is available in Settings and Tools on the operator's console of your MRI system.
Inform your service provider when you submitted feedback: The service provider must read out
your feedback and forward it to Philips.
Node title (original): Preparing DICOM images for the Customer ID: 117119938315
Feedback tool Status: Released
Preparing DICOM images

If you want to include DICOM images in your feedback, prepare these images first.
► Clean the Disk Files partition first:
• In the Patient Directory, browse to the E:\DICOM folder.
• Right-click the contents of this folder, then select Refresh List.
• Right-click again, then select Delete.
• Select all examinations, then click Delete.
► Select the images you want to include. Then choose the destination:
• In the Patient Directory, click All.
• Select the images to be included.
Philips

• Right-click the selected images, then select Export.

• Select the E:\DICOM folder as destination.
• Optional: Select De-identify Patient Name.
• Click Export to confirm.
⇨ The selected images are available in a zip file on the Disk Files partition.
⇨ A message indicates the successfully completed export of the images. Also the Job Viewer
displays the status of this export.
End fragment title: Preparing DICOM images for the Customer Feedback tool
Node title (original): Providing customer feedback ID: 117120020747

Status: Released
Providing customer feedback

1. On the Navigation bar, click Settings and Tools. Then select Feedback.
The Customer Feedback window opens.
2. Click the Feedback tab, if it is not active. Fill in the empty data fields:
• Hospital Name:
Is filled in automatically. You cannot change the value.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• System ref number:
Is filled in automatically. You cannot change the value.
• Occurrence date/time:
Enter date and time when the problem occurred, or select the date from the calendar
drop-down list.
• Submitter:
Enter your name.
• Description:
Give a short description of the error case.
• Actions prior to error:
Describe which actions were done just before the error occurred.
3. Check the box Include DICOM images if you want to include the prepared images (see
workflow 'Prepare DICOM images') with the problem report.
NOTICE
If DICOM images were not prepared, an error message is displayed.
In this case, follow the instructions given to include DICOM images.
4. Click Proceed to submit your feedback.

Philips

5. Inform your service provider that feedback was submitted.

End fragment title: Providing customer feedback
3.9.11 Operator-Patient Intercom

Status: Released
The Operator-Patient Intercom enables communication with the patient, it provides music to
the patient and signals when the patient uses the nurse call.
Node title (original): Achieva Bore Microphone Headset ID: 27021616838592395
Microphone Status: Released
Affix: Achieva
NOTICE
During a scan the microphone of the headset is active, when the system is idle the bore
microphone is active.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: Achieva Bore Microphone Headset Microphone
Node title (original): Operator-Patient Intercom- overview ID: 113758619915

Status: Released
Fig. 118: Operator-Patient intercom
Number Description
1 Microphone
2 Emergency Table Stop button*

Philips

Number Description
3 Talk volume
4 Music volume
5 Patient music on/off
6 Talk and Nurse call light ring
7 Listen on/off
8 Listen volume
End fragment title: Operator-Patient Intercom- overview
Node title (original): Note about configuration and eventually ID: 18014450204894475
missing Emergency Table Stop button Status: Released
Affix: all except Jaguar
*) Note that depending on your system configuration the intercom may not have an Emergency
Table Stop button.
End fragment title: Note about configuration and eventually missing Emergency Table Stop button
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Emergency Table Stop button*
This button has the same functionality as the Emergency Table Stop button on the UIM.
Pressing the Emergency Table Stop button will stop the tabletop movement. This can be reset
using the Resume button.
Talk volume +/- button

Use this button to adjust the talk volume to the patient. The level is indicated on the LED bar
next to the button.
Music volume +/- button

Use this button to adjust the music volume for the patient. The level is indicated on the LED bar
next to the button.
Patient music on/off Button

Use this button to toggle the music for the patient on and off. The button icon lights up when
music is turned on. Music is muted while the talk button is pressed.
Talk and Nurse call light ring

Press and hold this button to talk to the patient, releasing it will stop communication. Music is
muted while the talk button is pressed.
When the pinch ball of the nurse call is pressed more than once within 4 seconds or for more
than 1.5 seconds, a beep sounds and the light ring around the talk button flashes to attract the
attention of he operator. Press the talk button to stop the beep and the flashing of the light
Philips
ring.

Listen on/off Button

Use this button to toggle the listen function on and off. The button icon lights up when the
listen function is turned on. The listen function is muted while the talk button is pressed.
Listen volume +/- button

Use this button to adjust the speaker volume of the intercom. The level is indicated on the LED
bar next to the button.
3.9.12 Monitor and Keyboard

Status: NotReleased
3.9.12.1 Keyboard and Shortcut Keys

Status: NotReleased
The keyboard is used to enter text such as patient data and annotations.
At times, keyboard entry is disabled by the system. When this occurs, all new keystrokes are
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ignored and an audible signal is sounded. To rectify this, click on the window to make it active.
A keyboard overlay shows the functions of all function keys on your keyboard in the system
application software.
Node title (original): Keyboard strip Rest of World ID: 9007315358359307
(international) Status: NotReleased
End fragment title: Keyboard strip Rest of World (international)
Node title (original): Keyboard strip US ID: 9007315358360331

Status: NotReleased
End fragment title: Keyboard strip US
F1 Help...
F2 New Patient
F3 Patient Directory
F4 Patient Dashboard
Philips

F5 Refresh
F6 Job Viewer
F7 Scan Preview
F8 Start (scan)
Pause (scan)
F9 Minimize current examination

Maximize current examination
F10 Settings and Tools
F11 not used
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

F12 Stop (scan)
Print Sc Capture Screen
Scroll Lock not used
Pause Movie: Play / Stop
Philips

Preparing the Tabletop Preparing the Examination
4 Preparing the Examination

Status: NotReleased
The preparation of an MRI examination consists of patient preparation, patient positioning

(with coils, physiology sensors and peripherals) and patient registration.
Before you start with the preparation of the patient and the examination:
• Verify patient identity.
• Prescreen the patient for contraindications. { Heuvel, Martina van den, 11/16/2020
3:34:38 PM: link to safety}
• Inform the patient over the course of the examination, e.g. scan and exam duration, noise,
communication, tabletop movement, breathhold commands).
• If applicable, prepare the intravenous line.
4.1 Preparing the Tabletop

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12


SYS.Label.IFU.MaterialsReplacement Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24658
Note that for every new patient the following items must be replaced (if applicable):
• Mattress paper.
• Ear plugs.
• ECG pads.
Node title (original): NO MR5300 ID: 9007317620227339-1
Status: Released
• Endo coil probe or cover (condom).

End fragment title: NO MR5300
End fragment title: 24658 SYS.Label.IFU.MaterialsReplacement
4.1.1 Preparation of the tabletop

Status: Released
► Move the tabletop to the parking position:

• Under motor control: Press the tumble switch down to the Òut/down' position and
hold it there until the tabletop automatically stops in the parking position.
Philips

Preparing the Examination Preparing the Tabletop
• Alternatively (manual operation): Press the `Manual' button and move the tabletop out
of the magnet manually until the parking position is reached. The tabletop then locks
into place automatically.
Fig. 119: Achieva UIM with tumble switch.
► Lower the tabletop to the appropriate height by pressing the tumble switch down to the
Òut/down' position and holding it there until the appropriate height is reached.
• The table should not be at its lowest position when a heavy patient is placed upon it. It
should be raised at least 15 cm from its lowest point to ensure ease of vertical
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

movement.
Refer to the Technical Description for the maximum allowed patient weight for table and
trolley.
► Prepare the tabletop with coil(s) and mattresses.
► Position the patient on the tabletop with the appropriate patient positioning aids and, if
required, wireless PPU or VCG.
► Raise the tumble switch to the Ùp/in' position and hold it there until the tabletop stops
moving.
The tabletop is now at working level and raising the switch again will move the tabletop
inward.
4.1.2 Using the trolley

Status: Released
The trolley allows patient preparation for an examination while the previous patient is being
Philips

Trolley Compatibility
Node title (original): 67773 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PS. ID: 36028858014482059-2
69.1, HAZ-PS.70.1) Status: Released
Node title (original): International/Global ID: 36028858014632971-2

Affix: Achieva Optimus Ingenia Multiva Status: Released
WARNING
• On Achieva/Multiva systems: only use the Achieva/Multiva trolleys.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: International/Global
Node title (original): USA version without Multiva ID: 18014460630983563-2

Status: Released
Philips

WARNING
• On Achieva systems: only use the Achieva trolleys.
End fragment title: USA version without Multiva

End fragment title: 67773 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PS.69.1, HAZ-PS.70.1)
General safety
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): 67769 - SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PS.39, ID: 18014460610368395
HAZ-PS.41, HAZ-PS.71)_Trolley Status: Released
Affix: Trolley
ISO/IEC: 24313
WARNING
Patient falling off the Trolley.
• Do not to leave a patient unattended on the Trolley.
• Apply the wheel locks before a patient is moved to the tabletop.
• Apply the wheel locks when the Trolley is parked.
• Avoid fast movement, especially around corners.
• Fixate the patient if necessary.
End fragment title: 67769 - SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PS.39, HAZ-PS.41, HAZ-PS.71)_Trolley
Node title (original): 62879 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS. ID: 9007254810080011-2

Implemented Measure: HAZ-PS.195

Philips

WARNING
Fingers, hands, or other extremities of the patient get stuck or hit.
• Watch patient extremities during transfer onto the tabletop.
• Make sure that patient extremities remain on the tabletop during transportation and
docking to the patient support.
• Use the arm supports or fixate the patient and extremities if necessary (for example for
sedated patients).
Maximum working Load

SYS.Label.IFU.Trolley.SafeWorkingLoad_Mass_Trolley Status: Released
The safe working load for the tabletop on the trolley is 150 kg. This is the total weight of
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The maximum total mass of the trolley is 220 kg.
The safe working load of the trolley shall be distributed over the tabletop as with a patient in
lying position when moving the trolley.
End fragment title: 65196 SYS.Label.IFU.Trolley.SafeWorkingLoad_Mass_Trolley
Docking Left/Right
NOTICE
Trolleys for Intera systems cannot dock at the ‘Patient support control panel’ side.
NOTICE
Every trolley is adjusted for docking to a specific side of the patient support and should never
be docked to the opposite side.
Lowering patient support

Always lower the patient support by means of the tumble switch (motorized) to ensure correct
positioning of the tabletop on the trolley.
Philips

NOTICE
If manual positioning of the tabletop on the trolley is unavoidable, ensure that it is securely
locked in position by the endstops and the handle of the trolley.
Easy patient transfer from trolley to patient support

► Position the patient on the trolley using the additional set of positioning aids.
Coil(s), VCG electrodes, peripheral pulse finger clip and a respiration sensor can be installed
while the patient is still on the trolley.
► Use the arm supports to ensure that the patient's hands remain close to the body and safe
during all patient transfer operations. The arm supports can be slid easily under the
mattress. figure 120 on page 515.
NOTICE
Ensure that the patient's hands are within the arm supports, next to the body before patient
transfer:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Remove the current tabletop from the system to allow use of the trolley tabletop.
► Dock the trolley around the patient support from the side (see figure).
► Use the brakes to lock the trolley in position when it is correctly docked against the patient
support. Both vertical bars on the long side must touch the patient support cover. figure
120 on page 515.
► Move the patient support up (motorized). The tabletop is automatically unlocked, lifted
from the trolley frame and taken over by the patient support.
Keep the trolley frame docked around the support while the patient is moved into the
magnet.
► Connect the coil(s) to the scanner.
Patient transfer from patient support to trolley

► Disconnect the coil(s) and move the patient out of the magnet.
► Move the patient support down (motorized). The tabletop is automatically taken over by
the trolley frame and locked when lowered.
NOTICE
Ensure that the tabletop is in the correct and secure position on the trolley.
► Roll the trolley, with tabletop, patient, coils etc. away leaving the scanner free for the next
Philips
patient.

► Move the trolley out of the examination room.
NOTICE
For safe patient transfer, use the trolley grips to move both trolley frame and tabletop
► Put the system tabletop back onto the support, figure 120 on page 515.
When the tabletop is positioned on the support by hand, make sure the tabletop is in its
outmost position. If this is not the case, the support cannot be moved in vertical direction.
To restore this, put the support in manual mode and push the tabletop to its outmost
mechanical endstop. Return to normal mode and the support can be moved vertical again.
Node title (original): Image Trolley Achieva ID: 54043202595153547
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 120: Trolley: 1 - arm supports in use, 2 - using the brakes to lock the trolley, 3 - putting system tabletop back
onto the support.
End fragment title: Image Trolley Achieva
4.2 Preparing the Tabletop


SYS.Label.IFU.MaterialsReplacement Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24658
Note that for every new patient the following items must be replaced (if applicable):
• Mattress paper.
• Ear plugs.
• ECG pads.
Node title (original): NO MR5300 ID: 9007317620227339-2
Status: Released
Philips

• Endo coil probe or cover (condom).

End fragment title: NO MR5300
End fragment title: 24658 SYS.Label.IFU.MaterialsReplacement
4.2.1 Preparation of the tabletop

Status: Released
This section describes the workflows needed to prepare the tabletop for an examination
including:
• Moving the tabletop to its end stop,
• Lowering the tabletop.
Moving the Tabletop to its End Stop

The end stop is the position where the tabletop is moved totally out of the bore.The tabletop
can only be lowered when it is at the end stop.
► Under motor control: Press the tumble switch down to the Òut/down' position and hold it
there until the tabletop automatically stops at the end stop.
► Under manual operation (alternatively): Press the `Manual' button and move the tabletop
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

out of the magnet manually until the end stop is reached. The tabletop then locks into place
automatically.
Node title (original): Ingenia UIM 2 arrows ID: 36028804472306571
Affix: Ingenia Jaguar Status: Released
Fig. 121: User Interface Module (UIM). 1: 'Manual' button, 2: Tumble switch.
End fragment title: Ingenia UIM 2 arrows
Node title (original): Optimus UIM 2 arrows ID: 9007206708084619

Philips

Patient Positioning and Setup of Coils Preparing the Examination
Fig. 122: User Interface Module (UIM). 1: 'Manual' button, 2: Tumble switch.
End fragment title: Optimus UIM 2 arrows
Lowering the Tabletop

The tabletop needs to be lowered so that the patient can get on it easily.
► Lower the tabletop to the appropriate height by pressing the tumble switch down to the
'Out/down' position and holding it there until the appropriate height is reached.
• The table should not be at its lowest position when a heavy patient is placed upon it. It
should be raised at least 15 cm from its lowest point to ensure ease of vertical
movement.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Refer to the Instructions for Use for the maximum allowed patient weight for table and
trolley.
4.3 Patient Positioning and Setup of Coils

Node title (original): same text as used in Ingenia Positioning ID: 116964466187-1
Map node Status: Released
This chapter provides some general information about positioning and describes the positioning
procedures for the various MRI examinations.
End fragment title: same text as used in Ingenia Positioning Map node
4.3.1 About Positioning in general

Status: Released
• Be aware that the first consideration in positioning is comfort, in the patient's interest and
to minimize motion artifacts.
• Use positioning cushions, sandbags and immobilization straps for comfort and stability.
Normal X-ray positioning cushions may also be used.
Philips

Preparing the Examination Patient Positioning and Setup of Coils
• Ensure that patients fit easily into the system when positioned off-center or semi-sitting.
If positioned semi-obliquely for a shoulder examination, the patient's raised shoulder may
impede passage into the system.
• Use the arm supports to prevent the patient from grabbing around the table sides and
pinching the fingers during horizontal table motion.
Node title (original): WARNING Arm supports versus finger ID: 9007202320022539
pinching Status: Released
WARNING
Verify that patient’s hands are on the tabletop before moving the tabletop into the magnet
to avoid finger pinching.
Fingers can get pinched between tabletop and the system covers.
The special arm supports of the accessory set can be used to avoid finger pinching. The arm
supports prevent the patient from grabbing around the table sides avoiding finger pinching
during tabletop movement.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: WARNING Arm supports versus finger pinching
4.3.1.1 Hearing Protection and Nurse Call

Status: Released
Hearing Protection
Node title (original): Acoustic noise protection ID: 9007200724271371-1
Status: Released
is provided by appropriately fitted earplugs with sufficient damping (>30 dB).
NOTICE
Philips

WARNING
End fragment title: Acoustic noise protection
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 124: Nurse call (left) and headset (right).
Fig. 125: Patients with headset and nurse call.
Nurse Call
Status: Released
Philips

WARNING
The ‘Nurse call pinch ball’ must be given to every patient.
Its use should always be demonstrated. If it is pressed quickly twice or once for a longer period,
the alarm bell will be heard and the light will be activated on the intercom.
Observation of the patient

Observation of the patient is reassuring for patient and operator. It may be directly from the
console or via a video camera or mirror. Voice contact via the intercom should be
demonstrated to each patient.
4.3.1.2 General Hints

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Cables
• Cables have to run in a straight line to the connector.
Position and secure the cable on the mattress beside or in the groove.
Fig. 126: 1: Correct positioning (at the back of the magnet): the cables are straight. 2: 2: Wrong positioning (at the back of the magnet):
the cables are not straight. 3: Correct positioning: the cables are straight, a spacer is being used.
Flexible coils
• Use as many fixation bands as required to ensure stability.
• Attach the coil to the patient in such a way that respiration or normal patient movement
does not change its position.
Philips

• Do not place flexible coils ‘perpendicular’ to the patient's head-feet axis (= axis of the main
static field). In this orientation no MR signals can be received. Any other plane of
orientation is possible.
Electronics box
• Position the electronics box as far away from the FOV as possible.
• Extend the cable alongside the patient, avoiding loops, and plug it into one of the
connectors.
NOTICE
Using flexible coils for head imaging, the Q-Head coil can be used to support or immobilize the
patient. Although it is not used, its connector must be plugged into one of the sockets to avoid
irreparable damage.
NOTICE
During a scan, no coil should ever be placed inside the magnet without connecting it to a
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

control panel socket.
Failure to do this will cause RF energy to destroy the preamplifiers inside the coil.
• Plug the coil connector securely into its socket AFTER the patient has been placed in the
magnet (to avoid jamming).
• Disconnect the coil connector from its socket BEFORE removing the patient from the
magnet (to avoid jamming).
4.3.2 Q-Head coil

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Volume coil: It comprises a base, a sliding coil and a head support accessory. The
coil may be lifted using one of the horizontal bars and supporting the base.
Available for 1.5T
SENSE-compatible No
CLEAR-compatible No
Applications • Head
• Ankle or Feet
Philips

General remarks • This coil may be used in combination with any flexible coil in multi coil mode
(see chapter 6, coil combinations).
• During imaging with a flexible coil, the Q-Head coil must also be plugged into
a connector.
Multi coil imaging Yes (see section ’Multi coil imaging’)
Dual Coil imaging No
User Interface Name Head

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 127: Q-Head coil on tabletop.
NOTICE
Remember to insert the coil connector into one of the sockets.
Starting a scan without it connected will damage the coil.
4.3.2.1 Positioning
Status: Released
Brain examinations
1. Place the Q-Head coil at the very end of the tabletop.
2. Place the mattress on the table top. Make sure the head support is secure.
3. Place the patient on the tabletop with the head in the head support.
• If the patient has a short neck, it is advisable to place some padding over the lower part
of the support under the shoulders.
• Use the small wedges to immobilize the head by placing them firmly between the head
and the sides of the support.
• Use the head fixation strap for extra immobilization.
4. Pull the sliding part gently over the head and face.
Philips

• Pull gently on both sides of the coil, close to the base.

5. Attach the optical mirror to the coil so that the patient can see out of the bore. This can be
reassuring for patients.
Fig. 128: Patient positioning for brain examinations with Q-Head coil. 1: Q-Head coil open. 2: Q-Head coil closed. 3: Pediatric examination.
Ankle and foot examinations

1. Remove the headrest; place some foam cushions on the coil base.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

2. Place the feet in the coil.
• Endorotate the ankle a little to get nice anatomic orthogonal surveys.
3. Place a cushion between the feet and the RF mirror at the back of the coil to improve
image quality especially in spectral fat saturation (SPIR, SPAIR) and ProSet sequences. This
is not shown in the figure.
Fig. 129: Foot/ankle examination with Q-Head coil.
4.3.3 SENSE Head coil 6 and 8

Status: Released
Philips

Type of coil • 6 or 8 element phased-array coil

• Receive-only
Design Volume coil consisting of 6 or 8 elements
Dimensions Coil diameter: 24 cm. FH coverage 22 cm
Available for • 1.5T: SENSE Head coil 6 and 8

• 3.0T: SENSE Head coil 8
MultiTransmit-compatible Yes for SENSE Head coil 8 on 3.0T
Applications • Brain
General remarks • On systems with a 6-channel acquisition system, this coil is available as a 6-
element coil only.
• This coil should only be used for ‘Head first’ studies.
• Always use CLEAR as homogeneity correction for best image quality.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Markers on the coil • In the middle of the coil (FH direction) for light visor positioning
• On both sides for image quality verification (phantom)
User Interface Name • SENSE-Head-8 or SENSE-Head-6

• SENSE-Head on 6-channel acquisition systems
Fig. 130: Coil on tabletop.
NOTICE
Remember to insert the coil connector into one of the sockets.
Philips

4.3.3.1 Positioning for brain examination

Status: Released
1. Place the coil at the very end of the tabletop.

2. Place the mattress on the table top. Make sure the head support is secure.
3. Place the patient in the head support.
5. Attach the mirror to the coil such that the patient can see out of the bore.
This can be reassuring for patients.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 131: Patient positioning.
4.3.4 SENSE Head coil 32

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Volume coil consisting of head support and anterior coil section. Two coil
connectors.
Dimensions Height (AP): 38 cm, width (RL) : 46 cm, length (FH): 59 cm
Available for 3.0T
MultiTransmit- compatible Yes

Philips

General remarks • This coil should only be used for ‘Head first’ studies.
Dual coil imaging Yes (Use “Dual coil = yes” to be able to use both coil halves simultaneously).
User Interface Name The anterior and posterior coil part can be combined in Dual coil imaging and be
selected separately as:
• SENSE-Head-32AH
• SENSE-Head-32P
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 132: 1: Closed coil with pads and cable with connectors. 2: Elements and housing of the SENSE Head coil 32. 3:
Open coil. Head support with pads and EEG grove, and anterior section.
NOTICE
Remember to insert the coilconnector into both of the sockets.
Philips

NOTICE
Always scan with the anterior section on the head support.
4.3.4.1 Patient positioning

Status: Released
1. Place the head support of the coil at the very end of the tabletop.
3. Optional: place the EEG cable in the EEG groove of the head support.
4. Attach the anterior section to the coil.
Node title (original): HG: notice headneck coil pinching skin ID: 9007206737092875-1
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
While closing the coil verify that the patient's skin cannot be pinched between coil parts.
End fragment title: HG: notice headneck coil pinching skin
Fig. 133: 1: Patient positioning in head support. 2: Closing the coil. 3: Isocenter positioning.
4.3.4.2 Removing the anterior coil section

Status: Released
1. Tilt the lever on the anterior section upwards to unlock the anterior section.
2. Carefully raise the coil at the cranial side and take it off the head support.
Philips

3. To attach the anterior coil back to the head support, proceed in the same way in reverse
order.
Fig. 134: 1: Side view of the closed coil. 2: Upturned pin on anterior section to open the coil. 3: Tilted anterior section.
4.3.5 SENSE Head/Neck coil

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Receive-only
Design Volume coil : Combination of Q-Head coil and two quadrature neck elements.
Dimensions 2 neck elements of 16 cm in FH- and 22 cm in LR-direction
Available for 1.5T
Applications • Brain Imaging including Intracranial MRA

• Cervical Spine Imaging down to T4
• Carotid vessels from aortic arch to Circle of Willis
General remarks • All combinations of the three coil elements are possible.
• The coil can be used with or without anterior neck element.
• The mirror of the Q-Head coil cannot be used (tilted position).
User Interface Name SENSE-Head/Neck

Philips

Fig. 135: Left: SENSE Head/Neck coil with all components. Right: Patient positioning with anterior neck element.
4.3.5.1 Lifting the coil

Status: Released
• Always use the dedicated holes at both sides in the base support of the SENSE Head/Neck
coil to remove the coil from the patient table.
• Do not lift the coil by using a bar of the Q-Head coil since base support and combiner box
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

could fall off.
4.3.5.2 SENSE Head/Neck coil in head/neck and spine examinations

Status: Released
1. Position the coil’s base support at the very end of the tabletop.
2. Position the Q-Head coil on the base support.
3. Position the combiner box next to the base support (side of patient support control panel).
Fig. 136: 1: Base support. 2: Q-Head coil on base. 3: Combiner box.
4. Connect the short cable of the Q-Head coil to the lowest connector in the combiner box.
5. Replace the head rest of the Q-Head coil with the head rest and posterior element of the
Philips
SENSE Head/Neck coil.

6. Connect the short cable of the posterior element to the middle connector in the combiner
box.
Fig. 137: 1: Short cable connection. 2: Posterior element and head rest. 3: Posterior element and short cable.
7. Position the holder for the anterior element on the head coil.
8. Position the patient as close to the top part of the headrest as possible for best coverage in
FH-direction. Make sure the patient is comfortable. Move the sliding part of the Q-Head
coil down over the patient’s head.
See section ’Q-Head coil’ for more information.
9. Click the anterior element onto its holder on the Q-Head coil. Turn the lock to fixate it.
Connect the cable of the anterior element to the upper connector in the combiner box.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 138: 1: Anterior element holder. 2: Mounting of the anterior element:.
4.3.5.3 Coil elements

Status: Released
The elements are called: H (head coil), A (anterior), P (posterior), and can be selected in the
following way:
Recommended element selection

Anatomical region Coil elements Notes
Anterior neck A or AP It is possible to scan without anterior part

being connected, e.g. for large patients.
Head and neck all three elements: HAP
• H is optional
Philips

Anatomical region Coil elements Notes
Angio AP or HAP
C-spine sagittal all thress elements: HAP
C-spine axial two neck elements: AP
4.3.6 T/R Head coil

Status: Released

• Transmit/Receive
Design Volume coil
Available for 1.5T and 3.0T
SENSE-compatible No
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

CLEAR-compatible No
General remarks Coil is shorter than the standard head coil for other field strengths. Make sure
the patient is high up in the coil for maximum coverage.
User Interface Name T/R-Head
Fig. 139: T/R Head 1.5T coil.

Philips

4.3.6.1 T/R Head coil 1.5T for brain examination

Status: Released
Preparing the tabletop

1. Place the T/R Head coil 1.5T at the very end of the tabletop.
2. Place the mattress on the tabletop. Make sure the head support is secure.
Node title (original): patient positioning T/R & H head coil 1.5T ID: 9007220790443275-1
Achieva Status: Released
Patient positioning
• If the patient has a short neck, it is advised to place some padding over the lower part of
the support under the shoulders.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3. Attach the optical mirror to the coil so that the patient can look out of the bore. This can be
End fragment title: patient positioning T/R & H head coil 1.5T Achieva
Fig. 140: Left: Head coil closed. Right: open.
4.3.6.2 T/R Head coil 3.0T for brain examinations

Status: Released
Philips


Node title (original): T/R Head coil 3.0T preparing tabletop ID: 50156268299
(with pics of old models) Status: Released
► Place the T/R Head coil 3.0T at the very end of the tabletop.
► Verify that the box (of old models) or the cone-shaped end does not stick out.
► Place the mattress on the tabletop. Make sure the head support is secure.
Node title (original): pictures coil on tabletop/wrong and right ID: 50180021515-1
placement Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 141: 1: Coil on tabletop. 2: Wrong: Box sticking out. 3: Correct: Box not sticking out.
End fragment title: pictures coil on tabletop/wrong and right placement
End fragment title: T/R Head coil 3.0T preparing tabletop (with pics of old models)
Fig. 142: Cone-shaped T/R Head coil 3.0T.
Node title (original): patient positioning T/R Head coil 3.0T ID: 50180045195
Patient positioning
Philips

• Use the small wedges to immobilize the head by placing them firmly between the
headset and the sides of the support.
3. Attach the optical mirror to the coil so that the patient can look see out of the bore. This
can be reassuring for patients.
End fragment title: patient positioning T/R Head coil 3.0T Achieva
4.3.7 H Head coil

Status: Released

• Receive
Design Volume coil

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Available for 1.5T
SENSE-compatible No
CLEAR-compatible No
Applications • Brain, MR Spectroscopy
General remarks Coil is shorter than the standard head coil for other field strengths. Make sure
the patient is high up in the coil for maximum coverage.
User Interface Name H-Head
Fig. 143: H Head coil.

Philips

4.3.7.1 H Head coil for brain examination

Status: Released
Node title (original): H Head coil 1.5T preparing tabletop (old ID: 50156720395
models) Status: Released
► Place the H Head coil 1.5T at the very end of the tabletop.
► Verify that the box does not stick out.
► Place the mattress on the tabletop. Make sure the head support is secure.
End fragment title: H Head coil 1.5T preparing tabletop (old models)
Node title (original): pictures coil on tabletop/wrong and right ID: 50180021515-2
placement Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 144: 1: Coil on tabletop. 2: Wrong: Box sticking out. 3: Correct: Box not sticking out.
End fragment title: pictures coil on tabletop/wrong and right placement
Node title (original): patient positioning T/R & H head coil 1.5T ID: 9007220790443275-2
Patient positioning
Philips

3. Attach the optical mirror to the coil so that the patient can look out of the bore. This can be
End fragment title: patient positioning T/R & H head coil 1.5T Achieva
Fig. 145: Left: Head coil open. Right: closed.
4.3.8 TMJ coil / Coil Holder

Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Receive-only
Design Two flexible surface coils: circular
Dimensions 11 cm, Opening in a coil Ø 8 cm
Available for 1.5T
SENSE-compatible No
CLEAR-compatible No
Applications • Temporo-Mandibular Joint (TMJ)

• Eye, Orbit, Ear, Larynx
Limitations The penetration depth is only a few centimeters.
User Interface Name TMJ-left, TMJ-right

Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4.3.8.1 TMJ coil for TMJ examinations
Status: Released
Both joints can be imaged simultaneously (in Multi coil mode).

1. Position the patient in the TMJ coil holder rest assembly.
2. Center the patient's head and immobilize it using velcro strap and band.
3. Place your finger through the TMJ coils to locate the head of the mandible (ask the patient
to open and close the mouth).
4. Position each coil as close as possible to the patient's cheeks.
5. Use the body coil to make a survey image of both TMJs.
4.3.8.2 Positioning for examinations with the TMJ coil holder

Affix: all Best systems except MR5300 ID: 27021690579349003-1
Node title (original): all variants of Ingenia ID: 9007292070024203-1

Status: Released
Philips

TMJ, orbit or carotid examinations make use of the TMJ coil holder and the dS Flex coil solution.
End fragment title: all variants of Ingenia
Node title (original): Achieva ID: 92815284747-1

Status: Released
TMJ, orbit or carotid examinations make use of the TMJ coil holder and the SENSE Flex coils.

► Place the TMJ coil holder on the tabletop.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Place the NVC Stability pad on the TMJ coil holder.

► Optionally: Put the 15° angle sponge or the “Mickey Mouse” pad underneath the NVC
Stability pad for comfort.
► Attach the Flex coil of your choice for the exam.
Positioning the patient

► Position the patient on the tabletop with their head on the NVC Stability pad.
► Place the coils as close as possible to the anatomy of interest.
Philips

Positioning examples
TMJ
Orbits
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Carotids
4.3.9 SENSE NeuroVascular coil 8 and 16

Status: Released
Philips

Type of coil • 18 element phased-array coil, available in versions for the 8- and 16-channel
RF platforms
• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil consisting of a posterior and anterior part (cage). Optional: a
top-off anterior part (only part of the SENSE Head/Spine coil combination).
SENSE-compatible Yes; max. SENSE factor: 8 for SENSE NV coil 8, 16 for SENSE NV coil 16
MultiTransmit- compatible • SENSE NV coil 8 and 16: Yes (only applicable for Achieva 3.0T TX)
Applications • Brain imaging including intracranial MRA

• Cervical spine imaging down to T4
• Carotid vessels from aortic arch to Circle of Willis
Markers on the coil • In the middle of the coil (FH direction) for light visor positioning.
• In the middle of the anterior part.
General remarks Always use CLEAR as homogeneity correction for best image quality.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Multi coil imaging • NV8: No

• NV16: Yes (see section ’Multi coil imaging’)
Dual coil imaging • NV8: No

• NV16: Yes (see section ’Multi coil imaging’)
User Interface Name SENSE-NV-16, SENSE-NV-8
Element selection See section ’Coil elements’ for more information.
Fig. 146: 1: Posterior part with pad. 2: Posterior part with anterior part attached. 3: Dedicated headset.
Philips

Dedicated headset
Since this coil is not compatible with the Q-Head coil headset, a dedicated headset is available.
The hearing protection provided is lower than with the Q-Head coil headset. The use of
earplugs is mandatory on 3.0T and highly recommended on 1.5T. An alternative to the headset
are the gray wedge cushions which can be placed between the patient’s head and the coil.
General Considerations
NOTICE
Always close the coil before connecting it to the system.
NOTICE
Always disconnect the coil from the system before opening the coil.
NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Do not leave unused coils or coil parts on the tabletop.
When connected to the system there is a voltage of 12 volt DC present at the contacts of the
posterior part. Under normal conditions this voltage is not hazardous to patients. However for
critically ill cardiac patients this low DC voltage may have dramatic consequences. Follow the
instructions above carefully to prevent that these type of patients can touch the contacts
while the coil is connected to the system.
4.3.9.1 Positioning
Status: Released
1. Place the posterior part with the pad at the very end of the tabletop.
2. Place the patient on the posterior part so that the shoulders touch the posterior part.
3. Attach the anterior part (either cage or top-off) to the posterior part.
4. Use the two handles to close the coil.
Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
Fig. 147: 1: Attaching of anterior part to posterior part. 2: Anterior part attached to posterior part. 3: Top-off anterior part attached to
posterior part. Note that the coil may not be lifted by gripping through the holes (see arrows) between anterior and posterior part.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
4.3.9.2 Lifting up the coil

Status: Released
1. Do not lift up the coil in one piece.

2. Remove the anterior part first and then carefully lift up the posterior part.
NOTICE
Never lift the coil by gripping through the holes between anterior and posterior part.
This might lead to severe damage of the coil.
4.3.9.3 Coil elements

Status: Released
The SENSE NV coil 16 and the SENSE NV coil 8 are different coils which offer a different number
of elements for scanning. However, both coils are based on an 18-element design:
• 8 head elements,
• 4 neck elements,
• 6 chest elements.
Philips

Fig. 148: Coil elements: 8 head (red), 4 neck (green), 6 chest elements (blue).
These 18 coil elements are combined in two different ways resulting in the two SENSE
NeuroVascular coils:
• the 8-channel SENSE NV coil: SENSE NV 8
• the 16-channel SENSE NV coil: SENSE NV 16
4.3.9.4 Operating modes SENSE NV coil 8

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The SENSE NV coil 8 has two operating modes:
Head mode
• The signal from each individual head coil element is directly routed to Freewave. This
means that 8 head elements (red in figure) are used as 8 channels.
• This mode is preferred for head and brain imaging including intracranial MRA. It provides
excellent detail for small anatomical structures in the head.
NV (NeuroVascular) mode
• The signals from all elements (red, green and blue in figure) are combined resulting in an 8-
channel NV mode.
• This mode is preferred for cervical spine, neck imaging including extracranial MRA. The
maximal recommended field of view (FOV) is 44 cm.
4.3.9.5 Operating modes SENSE NV 16 coil

Status: Released
The signals from all elements (red, green and blue in figure) are combined resulting in a 16-
channel NV coil. These channels can be combined in several ways.
The table shows the full range of selection possibilities.
Philips

Channels Head Neck Ant.Chest Post.Chest
Selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
HNACPC x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
H x x x x x x - - - - - - - - - -
N - - - - - - x x x x - - - - - -
AC - - - - - - - - - - x x x - - -
PC - - - - - - - - - - - - - x x x
HN x x x x x x x x x x - - - - - -
NAC - - - - - - x x x x x x x - - -
NPC - - - - - - x x x x - - - x x x
HNPC x x x x x x x x x x - - - x x x
NACPC - - - - - - x x x x x x x x x x
TO-HNPC - x x x x - - x x x - - - x x x
TO-NPC - - - - - - - x x x - - - x x x
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
The abbreviations stand for H - Head, N - Neck, AC - Anterior Chest, PC - Posterior Chest, TO -
Top-off.
4.3.10 SENSE Head/Spine coil combination

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Coil combination of the SENSE NeuroVascular 16 coil and a rigid 15 element spine
coil. The SENSE NV 16 coil offers different coil tops: an anterior coil part (cage)
and a U-shaped cover without elements (referred to as ’top-off’).
SENSE-compatible Yes; max. SENSE factor: 16 (with anterior coil part)
MultiTransmit- compatible Yes (only applicable for Achieva 3.0T TX)
Node title (original): SENSE Head/Spine combination & ID: 6463431819-2

positioning Status: Released
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 149: SENSE Head/Spine coil combination. 1-3: Set-up for total neuro examination. 4-5: Set-up for total spine examination.
End fragment title: SENSE Head/Spine combination & positioning
NOTICE
The SENSE NeuroVascular 16 coil with top-off can be used stand-alone for the cervical spine in
claustrophobic patients.
This will result in loss of SNR due to missing anterior elements. Therefore it is not
recommended for examinations of the anterior neck, brain or carotid angiography.
See chapter ’Coil Combinations, section ’SENSE Head/Spine coil combination’ for more
information.
4.3.11 SENSE Pediatric Head Spine coil

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil

Philips

Applications Pediatric head and spine
User Interface name SENSE-Ped-HeadS

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 150: Left: SENSE Pediatric Head Spine coil. Right: Baby positioned in coil.
4.3.11.1 Positioning
Status: Released
1. Put the yellow mattress on the tabletop.

2. Place the coil on the mattress.
3. Position the child in the coil with the head in the cage-like coil part.
4.3.12 SENSE Spine coil 15

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Rigid surface coil.
Dimensions 54 cm x 95 cm
Philips

MultiTransmit-compatible Yes (only applicable for Achieva 3.0T TX)
Applications • Thoracic and Lumbar spine

• Screening total spine and total neuro in combination with SENSE NV 16 coil
and MobiTrak option.
• This coil can also be combined with the SENSE Flex-L coil.
General remarks This coil cannot be used for the cervical spine as a stand-alone coil.
Markers on the coil There are no inside markers. All elements are indicated by a marker on the
outside of the coil.
Dual coil imaging Yes (see section ’Dual coil imaging’)
User Interface name • SENSE-Spine-15
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 151: SENSE Spine coil 15 in use together with the SENSE NV coil 16. Patient positioning.
NOTICE
The mattress and the accessories might look different to the figures above.
4.3.12.1 Coil elements and element selection

Status: Released
Philips

Fig. 152: Layout of SENSE Spine coil 15 with element groups A, B, C, D and E. H stands for Head, F stands for Feet.
SENSE Spine 15 Element Combination Names

A • To be used with SENSE NV coil 16 combinations, e.g. NPC, HNPC
AB • To be used with SENSE NV coil 16 combinations, e.g. NACPC, HNPC
ABC • To be used with SENSE NV coil 16 combinations, e.g. NPC, TO-NPC

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
BCD • To be used for SENSE Spine 15
CDE • To be used for SENSE Spine 15
ABCD • To be used for SENSE Spine 15 or with NV 16 coil PC
BCDE • To be used for SENSE Spine 15
ABCDE • To be used for SENSE Spine 15
M-ABCDE • To be used for SENSE Spine 15 with Flex-L coil
See chapter 6 ’Coil Combinations’, section ’SENSE Head Spine coil combination’ for more
information on the coil combination SENSE Spine 15 and SENSE NV coil 16.
4.3.13 SENSE Spine coil 1.5T

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Rigid surface coil.
Dimensions Imaging length: 78 cm
Available for 1.5T
Philips

Applications • Cervical, thoracic and lumbar spine

• Screening total spine with MobiTrak option
• Screening total neuro with MobiTrak option and SENSE Flex-L coil
• Peripheral MRA (lower legs)
General remarks Always use either CLEAR or Homogoneity Correction set to ’Strong’ for best
image quality.
Markers on the coil This coil has two built-in MR-markers: in the middle of segment 2 and In the
middle of segment 4. All elements are indicated by a marker on the outside of
the coil.
User Interface name SENSE-Spine
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 153: 1: SENSE Spine coil 1.5T. 2: Patient positioned on tabletop. 3: Coil elements 1 to 5 (H - Head, F - Feet).
4.3.13.1 SENSE Spine coil in C-, T- and L-Spine

Status: Released
► Position the special mattress on the coil.

► Position the patient’s neck as close to the coil as possible and avoid hyperextension of the
neck.
► Use the knee cushion to minimize lumbar lordosis and to increase patient comfort.
Philips


Anatomical region Field of View Coil elements
Cervical spine 250 mm 1

(down to T4)
CT-spine 400 mm 1,2,3
Thoracic spine 350 mm 1,2,3,4

(C7-L1)
TL-spine 530 mm 2,3,4,5
Lumbar spine 300 mm 3,4,5
4.3.13.2 Total Spine workflow in ExamCards

Status: Released
Total Spine examinations can be done with the SENSE Spine coil using the MobiTrak option.
Total Spine ExamCards acquire three stacks (cervical, thoracic, lumbar) at different table
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Workflow
1. Position the patient on the SENSE Spine coil.
2. Center on the first element (cervical spine part) of the coil.
3. Start the Total Spine ExamCard.
4. Load both surveys into the MobiView package.
5. Click |Smooth fuse|.
6. Save the images to the data base.
7. Load the fused surveys into the planning environment.
8. Plan a sagittal Total Spine sequence on the sagittal survey (FH and AP offcenters) and on
9. Press |Proceed| to complete planning.
10. All scans and stations are now planned since GeoLinks and ScanAlign are applied within the
Total Spine ExamCard.
11. Start the ExamCard.
12. Images can be viewed, fused and saved in MobiView.
4.3.13.3 SENSE Spine coil in MobiTrak/MobiFlex examinations

Philips
Status: Released

In MobiTrak/MobiFlex examinations, the SENSE Spine coil can be used for improved SNR in the
lower legs. Follow the procedure as described below:
NOTICE
The SENSE Spine coil is not compatible with the MobiTrak leg support.
Positioning
1. Remove the small mattress from the end of the tabletop closest to the magnet.
2. Place the SENSE Spine coil at the very end of the tabletop.
3. Position the patient supine with feet first.
4. Raise the patient support with the patient sitting on the tabletop.
• For tall patients only: the SENSE Spine coil neck element (element 1) should stick out in
order to obtain as large as possible coverage.
5. Ensure that the middle of the abdominal stack does not lie beyond the markers on the
tabletop.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

6. Position the patient’s feet in a small exo-rotation with a cushion under the achilles’ tendon.
7. Position a small knee cushion for optimal support of both knees somewhat higher than the
knee pit. Both calves must hang freely.
8. Avoid skin-to-skin contact or place insulating material between and outside the patient’s
legs.
9. Immobilize the patient by means of sandbags and cushions.
10. Position the patient’s arms above his/her head on the support cushion or on the abdomen.
11. Use the arm supports to avoid finger pinching.
12. Ensure that the cables don’t get trapped: move the tabletop with the patient being
positioned from the lower legs up to the abdomen manually. Repeat this tabletop
movement until it is for sure that all of the cables are fixed and won’t get caught.
13. Move the tabletop to project the light visor on the middle of the lower stack (lower legs).
14. Move the lower legs to the isocenter of the magnet.
NOTICE
Check the coil for all stacks (stack A: phased-array coil, stack B and C: Q-Body coil).
The parameter ‘Multi Coil’ has to be set to ‘Yes” if a phased-array coil is used for the lower
legs.
Philips

4.3.14 SENSE Spine coil 3.0T

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Rigid surface coil consisting of 12 elements divided in 6 sections (2 coils per
section)
Dimensions Imaging length: 40 cm for each mode
Available for 3.0T
MultiTransmit-compatible • Yes (only applicable for Achieva 3.0T TX)

• Screening total spine with MobiTrak option
• Screening total neuro with MobiTrak option and SENSE Flex-L coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Peripheral MRA (lower legs)
General remarks • The coil is not compatible with the head set.
• Always use either CLEAR or Homogoneity Correction set to ’Strong’ for best
image quality.
Markers in the coil This coil has two built-in MR-markers: between element B and C, and between
element D and E.
Coil sections are indicated at the side of the pad covering the coil.
User Interface Name SENSE-Spine
Fig. 154: Left: SENSE Spine coil. Right: Patient positioned on coil.
Philips

Coil elements and combinations

• The SENSE Spine coil consists of twelve coils grouped by two, leading to six sections. Per coil
mode (cervical, thoracic, lumbar) different channel combinations can be chosen.
NOTICE
A separate refscan is required for each coil mode.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 155: Coil elements of the SENSE Spine coil 3.0T. 1 - Channel combination (C-Spine CSp, T-spine TSp, L-spine LSp),
2 - Coil part (A, B, C, D, E, F), 3 - Each coil section has two elements: a loop and a butterfly.
4.3.14.1 Positioning for C-, T- and L-Spine

Status: Released
► Position the special mattress on the coil.

► Position the patient’s neck as close to the coil as possible and avoid hyperextension of the
neck.
► Use the knee cushion to minimize lumbar lordosis and to increase patient comfort.
Philips


Anatomical Region Scan Orientation Coil elements
Cervical spine Sagittal AB or 1234

(down to T4) (due to different coil element names
in different releases)
Thoracic spine Sagittal BCD or 345612 for maximum

(C7 - L1) coverage
(due to different coil element names
Lumbar spine Sagittal DEF or 123456 for maximum

coverage
(due to different coil element names
Spine Axial Less elements than listed above
Homogeneity Correction and CLEAR

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Use CLEAR in cervical and lumbar spine in sagittal and axial orientation.
• Use Homogeneity Correction set to ’Strong’ in sagittal total spine examinations.
4.3.14.2 Total Spine workflow in ExamCards

Status: Released
Total Spine examinations can be carried out with the SENSE Spine coil using the MobiTrak
option. Total Spine ExamCards acquire three stacks (cervical, thoracic, lumbar) at different table
Workflow
1. Position the patient on the coil (SENSE Spine coil).
2. Center on the first element (cervical spine part) of the coil.
3. Start the Total Spine ExamCard.
4. Load both surveys into the MobiView package.
5. Click |Smooth fuse|.
6. Save the images to the data base.
7. Load the fused surveys into the planning environment.
8. Plan a sagittal Total Spine sequence on the sagittal survey (FH and AP offcenters) and on
9. Press |Proceed| to complete planning.
Philips

All scans and stations are now planned since GeoLinks and ScanAlign are applied within the
Total Spine ExamCard.
11. Images can be viewed, fused and saved in MobiView.
4.3.14.3 SENSE Spine coil in MobiTrak/MobiFlex examinations

Status: Released
In MobiTrak/MobiFlex examinations, the SENSE Spine coil can be used for improved SNR in the
lower legs. Follow the procedure as described below:
NOTICE
The SENSE Spine coil is not compatible with the MobiTrak leg support.
Positioning
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

1. Remove the small mattress from the end of the tabletop closest to the magnet.
2. Lower the patient support.
3. Place the SENSE Spine coil at the very end of the tabletop.
4. Position the patient supine with feet first.
5. Raise the patient support with the patient sitting on the tabletop.
6. For tall patients only: the SENSE Spine coil neck element (element 1) should stick out in
order to obtain as large as possible coverage.
7. Ensure that the middle of the abdominal stack does not lie beyond the markers on the
tabletop.
8. Position the patient’s feet in a small exo-rotation with a cushion under the achilles’ tendon.
9. Position a small knee cushion for optimal support of both knees somewhat higher than the
knee pit. Both calves must hang freely.
10. Avoid skin-to-skin contact or place insulating material between and outside the patient’s
legs.
11. Immobilze the patient as good as possible by means of sandbags and cushions.
12. Position the patient’s arms above the head on the support cushion or on the abdomen.
13. Use the arm supports to avoid finger pinching.
14. Ensure that the cables don’t get trapped beneath the tabletop: move the tabletop with the
patient being positioned from the lower legs up to the abdomen manually. Repeat this
tabletop movement until it is for sure that all of the cables are fixed and won’t get caught.
15. Move the tabletop to project the light visor on the middle of the lower stack (lower legs).
16. Move the lower legs to the isocenter of the magnet.
Philips

NOTICE
Check the coil for all stacks (stack A: phased-array coil, stack B and C: Q-Body coil).
The parameter ‘Multi Coil’ has to be set to ‘Yes’ if a phased-array coil is used for the lower
legs.
4.3.15 Synergy Pediatric coil

Status: Released
Type of coil • Q-Head coil plus 5 elements phased-array coil

• Receive-only
Design Volume coil consisting of the Q-Head coil and a dedicated 5 element phased-
array pediatric spine coil
Dimensions 40 cm long, 8 cm wide consisting of 5 elements providing a coverage of 58 cm in

FH-direction (Q-Head and pediatric spine coil)
Available for 1.5T

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
SENSE-compatible No
Applications Suitable for patients up to 5 years old

• Pediatric head and total spine imaging (from Cervical to Sacral spine) in
supine as well right-decubitus position
• Spina Bifida (in the unique vertical coil position)
• Neonatal examinations
Markers spine coil There are slots for markers in the middle of the 2nd and the 4th element.
User Interface Name Syn-Pediatric

Philips

Fig. 156: 1: Synergy Pediatric coil. 2: Supine positioning. 3: Decubitus positioning.
4.3.15.1 Coil Assembly of the Synergy Pediatric coil

Status: Released
► Put the base support of the Synergy Pediatric coil on the table.
► Place the spine coil in the base and the special mattress on the base.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Remove the headrest holder of the Q-Head coil.
► Click the holder of the spine coil into the Q-Head coil.
► Plug the short cable of the Q-Head coil into the connector housed in the holder of the
pediatric spine coil.
► Connect the large connector of the pediatric spine coil to one of the coil connectors on the
front of the magnet.
NOTICE
The Q-Head coil and the pediatric spine coil must always be positioned together on the
tabletop and be connected to each other.
NOTICE
The Q-Head coil is NOT plugged into the connectors on the front of the system but is plugged
into the holder of the pediatric spine coil.
NOTICE
Always disconnect the Q-Head coil from the pediatric spine coil before removing them from
the tabletop.
Philips

4.3.15.2 Pediatric spine examinations

Status: Released
► Place the pediatric patient on the coil.

► Slide the Q-Head coil over the patient’s head.
► Use fixation straps. Fasten them at the head fixation device.
Head and Spine

► For neonates, the Q-Head coil and the first 3 elements of the spine coil will cover brain and
spine.
► If the anatomy of interest exceeds the maximum FOV, use two scans or stacks. Use
elements H-4 for the first one and elements 1-5 (the spine coil) for the second one.
► Use free or perpendicular REST to reduce artifacts caused by the heart.
Spine
► The Q-Head coil does not need to be moved over the patient’s head.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► The Q-Head coil must always be placed on the tabletop and be connected to the coil base.
► Do not select the head coil element, but elements 1-5 (the spine coil).
Using the vertical holder for decubitus examinations
► Position and lock the Q-Head coil on the base support.
► Put the base support of the pediatric spine coil on the table.
► Place the special vertical coil holder in the base.
► Slide the spine coil into the vertical holder with the cable on the top.
► Put the special mattress on the base.
► Connect the Q-Head coil cable to the base of the pediatric spine coil.
Decubitus positioning
► Place the pediatric patient on their right side against the coil with the patient’s head in the
headrest.
► Minimize the distance between the patient’s spine and the coil.
► Slide the Q-Head coil gently totally over the patient’s head.
► For neonates (spina bifida), 4 elements (head coil and first 3 elements of spine coil) will
cover brain and spine.
Parameter settings
• FOV should be chosen according to the size of the child.
• Homogeneity correction should be set to ‘none’.
Philips

4.3.16 Q-Body coil

Status: Released

• Transmit/Receive coil
Design Built-in volume coil
SENSE-compatible No
CLEAR-compatible No
MultiTransmit-compatible • Yes (only applicable for Achieva 3.0T TX)
Application • Imaging large parts of the body

• Imaging when large fields of view are required (e.g. survey).
General remarks • All other coils (except for the T/R coils) are passive receive-only coils using
the Quadrature Body coil for transmission.
• Coils with a large effective volume (Q-Body coil) have a lower SNR than coils
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

with a relatively small effective volume.
User Interface Name Q-Body
Fig. 157: Left: Achieva system. Right: Patient in tunnel (integrated Q-Body coil).
4.3.16.1 Whole Body Imaging and DWIBS

Status: Released
Philips

Whole Body Imaging with Diffusion Weighted Whole Body Imaging with Background Signal
Suppression (DWIBS) allows scanning from head to toe with one ExamCard acquiring multiple
stations.
► To perform these scans, use the Tabletop Extender.
► To combine (fuse) the multiple stations acquired by the Total Body or DWIBS scan, use the
MobiView package.
See .
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Tabletop Extender
• designed for Whole Body Imaging.
• enables a maximum (combined) FOV of 200 cm (without Tabletop Extender: 120 cm),
making it possible to scan the majority of people from head to toe.
• consists of:
– a moveable tabletop fitted with brakes for patient safety,
– bearing plate consisting of four bearing assemblies which allows easy movement of the
patient.
– dedicated head pad,
– dedicated leg pad.
• provided with head phones, a nurse call button with longer cables and also a cable tie.
This cable tie allows the cables to be secured to the Tabletop Extender to minimize the risk
of the cables being trapped and causing discomfort to the patient.
Philips

1. Total Body tabletop

2. Bearing plate positioned on
tabletop
3. Bearing assemblies
4.3.16.1.1 Safety
Status: Released
For the Tabletop Extender (also referred to as: Total Body Tabletop), the following rules must
be followed at all times:
Coil compatibility ONLY Q-Body coil, no other coil
Patient positioning ONLY feet-first and supine only
Maximum allowed patient weight 140 kg
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
WARNING
The Total body Tabletop is designed for scanning with the patient in "feet first" and
"supine" position only.
Fixation of Tabletop Extender (Total Body tabletop)

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24309
Philips

WARNING
Verify that the Total body tabletop is locked securely on the tabletop before the patient is
positioned.
An unlocked Total body tabletop could suddenly move causing the patient to fall off and
lead to personal injury.
• Properly fix the Tabletop Extender to the tabletop. Verify that the runners on the sides of
the Tabletop Extender fit the dove tail groove properly.
• The Tabletop Extender is not interchangeable with other tabletops (e.g. of other MR
systems).
Trolley and Tabletop Extender (Total Body tabletop)

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
WARNING
It is not allowed to use the Total body tabletop with a trolley.
The Total body tabletop could suddenly move causing the trolley with tabletop to tip over.
This may lead to personal injury.
Extent of Tabletop Extender (Total Body tabletop)

Due to the lack of clearance between the back of the magnet and the wall at some sites, it may
not be possible to use the full extent of the Tabletop Extender. For this reason the extender is
fitted with an adjustable stop that will limit the inward motion of the extender. This will be
adjusted by a Philips service engineer, before first use it is advised to check that this adjustment
is correct to avoid possible damage to the Tabletop Extender or the wall.
Lowering the patient support

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24329
Philips

WARNING
patient support.
4.3.16.1.2 Patient positioning for Whole Body with DWIBS

Status: Released
Node title (original): preparing Total Body tabletop ID: 48063242635

Status: Released

► Place the bearing plate on the tabletop so that it is exactly at the magnet end of the
tabletop and centrally located.
► Position the Tabletop Extender on the MR tabletop, with the handles at the front end of the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

tabletop (furthest away from the magnet).
► Slide the Tabletop Extender towards the magnet end of the tabletop. Verify that the
runners fit properly in the dove tail groove.
Advance the Tabletop Extender until it runs over the bearing plate.
► Secure the brakes so that the Tabletop Extender cannot move when the patient is
positioned.
Philips

► Put the standard mattress and the dedicated head pad on the Tabletop Extender.
► Place the dedicated leg pad at the outmost end of the Tabletop Extender at the magnet
side.
End fragment title: preparing Total Body tabletop
Node title (original): positioning the patient ID: 48063247755

Status: Released

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Position the patient feet first on the Tabletop Extender

• with the head on the head pad to ensure complete AP coverage of the head.
• with the lower legs on the leg pad supplied and the heels at the lower end of the pad.
► Ask the patient to lay their arms along their body. This makes the patient hold the shoulders
slightly inwards (forwards), allowing for easy coverage of both shoulders and arms. If
required, use arm supports.
End fragment title: positioning the patient
Node title (original): moving patient into bore ID: 9007247318322315

Status: Released
Moving the patient into the bore

► Raise the tabletop to the operating height.
► Move the tabletop 10 cm to 15 cm into the magnet.
Philips

► Release the brake and slide the Tabletop Extender on the tabletop into the magnet.
Due to the bearing plate this is possible with one person.
► Position the patient with the eyebrows just below the marker at the side of the Tabletop
Extender (2).
This marker (brown circle or triangular marker of same color as tabletop) represents the
outmost position that can be placed in the isocenter.
This positioning allows the use of the maximum possible FOV in FH-direction whilst the
Tabletop Extender extends as little as possible over the end of the tabletop.
► Move the patient into the magnet and position the light visor at the lower rim of the orbit
(3).
► Secure the cables to the Tabletop Extender with the cable tie.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► While moving the patient into the scanner, watch carefully at the back of the magnet that
the Tabletop Extender is sliding smoothly over the covers of the bore.
Moving the patient out of the bore

► Reverse the procedure as described above.
Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24329
Philips

WARNING
patient support.

End fragment title: moving patient into bore
4.3.17 SENSE Cardiac coil 1.5T

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Volume coil consisting of five separate coil elements: two anterior flexible coils
(element 1 and 2) and three posterior coils which are encased in the coil base
(elements 3, 4 and 5).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Dimensions The top circular coils are 200 mm in diameter. The base is made of three
rectangular coils measuring 138 x 200 mm.
Available for 1.5T
Applications • Four main cardiac chambers

• Coronary arteries
• Aortic and pulmonary root
• Mediastinum
General remarks • Always use CLEAR as homogeneity correction for best image quality.
Markers on the coil The coil base contains markers to demonstrate the location of elements within
the coil.
User Interface Name SENSE-Cardiac

Philips

Fig. 158: Left: SENSE Cardiac coil - coil base and anterior elements. Right: SENSE cushion besides SENSE Cardiac coil.
4.3.17.1 Positioning with the SENSE Cardiac coil 1.5T

Status: Released
The patient lies on the base of the coil and the top section is placed on the anterior chest. There
is an adjustable fixation strap which secures the two top coils on to the patient’s chest.
1. Lie the patient on the base and use the side markers to align the patient's chest to the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

center of the coil base. The side markers denote top, middle and bottom of the elements
encased in the coil base.
2. Apply electrodes and respiratory belt if necessary.
3. Place the top section on the patient’s chest.
The top section is freely movable for positioning over the patient’s left (normal heart
location) or right side (congenital abnormality).
• The center of the two top elements should be placed just to the left of the sternum.
• Element number 1 of the top circular coil should be curved to wrap down, and over the
patient’s side. This will ensure that the lateral wall of the heart is properly covered by
the surface coil.
NOTICE
For SENSE scans, the SENSE cushion has to be attached to the top section.
See figure.
Philips

Fig. 159: 1 SENSE Cardiac coil - coil base and anterior elements. 2: Attaching the top section to SENSE cushion. 3: SENSE Cardiac coil in
cardiac examination.
4. Attach the top section to the base by using the clips on both sides of the coil base.
5. Adjust the velcro straps to give a secure, but comfortable fit.
NOTICE
In case of a PSCP (patient support control panel) on the right side of the system, the cable
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
should be placed underneath the mattress.
NOTICE
The coil top may also be positioned more towards center or right side, if the heart is not in the
normal location.
4.3.18 SENSE Cardiac coil 3.0T

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Volume coil consisting of a rigid lower part and flexible upper part. Each part
contains three phased-array coil elements.
Dimensions Coil element dimensions: 23 cm left-right by 32 cm feet-head
Available for 3.0T

Philips

Applications • Four main cardiac chambers

• Coronary arteries
• Aortic and pulmonary root
• Mediastinum
Markers on the coil A sticker displaying the element lay-out is positioned on the upper part of the
coil. The length of the coil elements is shown by a dotted line.
User Interface Name SENSE-Cardiac
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 160: SENSE Cardiac coil 3.0T: anterior and posterior part with mattress.
4.3.18.1 Positioning with the SENSE Cardiac coil 3.0T

Status: Released
1. Position the posterior coil part on the tabletop.

2. Position the mattress on the coil for patient comfort and to ensure a distance between
patient and coil.
3. Position the patient on the posterior coil part.
4. Apply electrodes and respiratory belt if necessary.
5. Place the anterior section on the patient’s chest directly above the posterior part. If SENSE
is to be used, the SENSE mattress must be attached to the coil to create a small distance
between patient and coil.
6. Strap the coil comfortably around the patient, with the respiratory belt and electrodes in
between patient and coil.
Philips

Fig. 161: Patient positioning with SENSE Cardiac coil.
4.3.19 SENSE Torso/Cardiac coil

Status: Released

• Receive-only
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Design Volume coil consisting of a flexible posterior part and a flexible anterior part.
Each part contains 16 phased-array coil elements.
Two types of mattresses are provided: a housing mattress for the posterior coil, a
posterior spacer mattress (SENSE pad) for patient comfort and a thick anterior
SENSE pad.
Dimensions Coil element dimensions: 39.4 cm left-right by 45.7 cm feet-head
Applications • Abdomen and pelvis, e.g. liver, pancreas, kidneys, bladder, prostate
• Cardiac applications, e.g.
• Four main cardiac chambers,
• Coronary arteries,
• Aortic and pulmonary root,
• Mediastinum
General remarks • Always use CLEAR as homogeneity correction for best image quality.
• Always use the spacer mattress between patient and anterior coil part for
best image quality.
Philips

Markers on the coil A sticker displaying the element lay-out is positioned on the anterior part of the
Dual coil imaging Yes (Use “Dual coil = yes” to be able to use both coil halves simultaneously).
User Interface Name The anterior and posterior coil part can be combined in Dual coil imaging and be
• HR-TorsoCardiac-A
• HR-TorsoCardiac-P
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 162: SENSE Torso/Cardiac coil with its components. 1 - Spacer mattress, 2 - housing mattress with posterior coil
part embedded, 3 - anterior coil part.
4.3.19.1 Positioning with the SENSE Torso/Cardiac coil

Status: Released
1. Place the housing mattress with the posterior coil part embedded on the tabletop.
2. Make sure that the cable of the posterior coil passes through the groove of the housing
mattress which is on the side of the Patient Support Control Panel so that it can easily be
plugged into the connector.
3. Cover with the yellow spacer mattress.
4. Stick the anterior SENSE pad to the anterior coil part by means of the velcro attachment
points.
Philips

Fig. 163: Left: Anterior coil part and anterior SENSE pad. Right: Anterior coil part and anterior SENSE pad sticked
together.
5. Position the patient on the mattress with the anatomical region to be examined above the
posterior coil part.
6. Place the anterior coil part on the patient’s breast.
NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
The posterior and the anterior coil part should be aligned such that they have the same FH
(Feet-Head) position.
NOTICE
For cardiac examinations, the top of the anterior coil part should almost reach the chin.
NOTICE
The arms can be placed inside or outside the coil.
7. Use the standard Philips table Velcro straps to fix the anterior coil.
Philips

Fig. 164: 1: Tabletop is prepared for patient positioning: housing mattress with posterior coil part embedded and spacer mattress on top,
(anterior coil part floating above). 2: Patient is positioned on tabletop, the anterior coil part (with SENSE pad) is being placed. 3: Anterior
coil part (with SENSE pad) is fixed to the patient by means of velcro straps.
4.3.20 SENSE Breast coil 4

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Receive-only
Design Volume coil with an aperture in wich the breasts can be positioned. A positioning
cushion for the lower part of the body is provided.
Applications MR Mammography (both breasts simultaneously)
User Interface Name SENSE -Breast-4

Philips

Fig. 165: SENSE Breast coil 4. Left: Coil. Right: With positioning cushion.
4.3.20.1 Positioning with the SENSE Breast coil 4

Status: Released
Node title (original): Patient preparation Breast examination ID: 6462671115-1

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Patient preparation
1. Prepare the patient as usual for an MR examination.
• It is advisable to have the patient strip to the waist and to remove any zip fasteners in
the waist area.
• Imaging is best performed when the breasts can hang freely in the coil aperture.
End fragment title: Patient preparation Breast examination
Coil Positioning
1. Place the coil on the tabletop with the coil aperture to the magnet.
2. Place the positioning cushion behind the coil.
3. Route the cable in the groove in the bottom of the cushion.
4. Put a pillow on the tabletop in front of the coil.
Philips

Fig. 166: Left: Coil with positioning cushion. Note the groove in the cushion for the cable. Right: Patient positioning
on the coil.
Patient Positioning
1. Position the patient prone on the breast coil.
2. Ensure that the breasts are hanging freely in the coil, and that the breasts and the axilla
area are free of folds.
3. Ask the patient to place the arms next to the head.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4. Centre the light visor to the middle of the breast, and move the patient into the isocenter.
5. Make sure that the patient’s head faces to the pillow.
Node title (original): Breast positng: Head NOT to side ID: 6462654475-1
Status: Released
NOTICE
The patient’s head should not be turned to the side.
This affects the position of the upper part of the body: the breasts and the shoulder may lift
up out of the coil.
End fragment title: Breast positng: Head NOT to side
4.3.21 SENSE Breast coil 7 (incl. biopsy)

Status: Released
The table below summarizes the most important coil characteristics.

For more information, refer to the following sections:
• Breast Imaging Workflow
• Breast Biopsy Components
• Breast Biopsy Methods
Philips

• Breast Biopsy Device Preparation

• Breast Biopsy Workflow
• Receive-only
SENSE-compatible Yes; max. SENSE factor:

• all elements: AP = 4.0, FH = 1.0 and RL = 7.0
• right part: AP = 4.0, FH = 1.0 and RL = 3.0
• left part: AP = 4.0, FH = 1.0 and RL = 3.0
General remarks • Switch off CLEAR as homogeneity correction for all T1-weighted and all fat-
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
suppressed scans.
• This coil can be used for biopsy with the biopsy starter kit *.
User Interface Name SENSE-Breast-7
Fig. 167: SENSE Breast 7 coil.
4.3.21.1 Positioning for breast examinations

Status: Released
Philips


Status: Released
Patient preparation
the waist area.
Coil Positioning
1. Place the coil on the tabletop with the coil aperture to the magnet.
2. Place the head support on the table in front of the coil.
Patient Positioning
1. Position the patient prone on the breast coil, with the head on the head support.
2. Adjust the height of the head support by means of the lever, see figure.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 168: 1 and 2:Head support for SENSE Breast coil 7. The arrow indicates the lever for height adjustment 3: Positioning on SENSE Breast
coil 7.
3. Ask the patient to place the arms either next to the head or alongside their body.
4. Ensure that the breasts are “hanging” freely in the coil, and that the breasts and the axilla
5. Center the light visor to the middle of the breast, and move the patient into the isocenter.
4.3.21.2 Breast Biopsy

Status: Released
Philips

4.3.21.2.1 Breast Biopsy Components

Status: Released
The coil can be used for biopsy in combination with the corresponding biopsy kit. For
information about content and assembly of the biopsy kit, please refer to the user
documentation provided with the biopsy kit.
4.3.21.2.2 Breast Biopsy Methods

Status: Released
Immobilization is required when localization or biopsy procedures are intended. Unilateral or

bilateral breast immobilization can be performed.
There are two different biopsy methods:
• Grid method (lateral or medial access)
• Pillar method (lateral or medial access)
Both methods can be performed either with lateral or medial access.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 169: Left: Grid method. Right: Pillar method.
4.3.21.2.3 Breast Biopsy Device Preparation

Status: Released
For information about content and assembly of the biopsy kit, please refer to the user
4.3.21.2.4 Breast Biopsy Workflow

Status: Released
Make sure that you are familiar with the set up and function of the biopsy device prior to use
with a patient.
Philips

Preparation
the waist area.
2. Prepare the tabletop in the same way as for Breast imaging.
Patient Positioning
1. Position the patient prone on the breast coil, with the head on the head support. Adjust
the height of the head support by means of the lever.
2. Place the medial plate in all the way prior to patient positioning. Wait until the patient is
lying down to place lateral rail.
3. Ask the patient to place the arms either next to her head or alongside her body.
4. Ensure that the breasts are hanging freely in the coil, and that the breasts and the axillae
5. Use compression from both medial and lateral sides.
• Tissue should be slightly pushing through the immobilization system. Do not over-
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

compress since this will constrict arteries.
6. Place a vitamin E capsule (serves as marker) onto the immobilization system, away from
suspected lesion location.
Determine needle entry point - Imaging Protocol and Calculation

The determination of the needle entry point requires the acquisition of a number of imaging
series. The calculation based on these series can be performed with a DynaCAD system or
manually.
Node title (original): Biopsy - Contrast Agent part ID: 9007205722947979-1
Affix: non-US Status: Released
1. Acquire a survey scan.

2. Make sure the marker (vitamin E capsule) is included in the FOV.
3. Perform a dynamic e-THRIVE protocol, containing 3 dynamics.
• The first dynamic serves as a mask.
• Proceed as usual with regular dynamic breast imaging.
Calculation of FH- and AP-offset and needle depth
1. If a DynaCAD system is available, the needle entry point (relative to the position of the
marker) and needle depth needed to target the lesion are calculated automatically.
2. If a DynaCAD system is not available, then manual targeting has to be performed in the
following way:
Philips

1. Find the lesion on the dynamic e-THRIVE sequence. Draw a region-of-interest (ROI) over
the lesion. Copy the ROI to all slices. Note the slice number of the slice containing the
lesion.
2. Find the marker (vitamin E capsule). Draw a region-of-interest (ROI) over the marker. Note
the slice number of the slice containing the marker.
3. The FH offset is given by the number of slices between the marker and the lesion
multiplied by the slice thickness.
4. Draw straight lines between the ROI of the marker and the ROI of the lesion. There should
be a 90 degree angle between both lines.
5. The vertical line length specifies the needle entry point relative to the marker in AP
direction.
6. The horizontal line length specifies the required needle depth.
End fragment title: Biopsy - Contrast Agent part
Performing Breast Biopsy

1. Place the needle block in the grid.
2. Place the needle block holder in an adjacent grid slot.
3. Lock the needle block holder by depressing the tab. This will prevent the needle block from
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
coming out when the needle is withdrawn.

4. Insert the needle to the required depth and rescan at this location to verify the proper
needle placement.
5. Once verified, obtain lesion sample.
4.3.22 MammoTrak
Status: Released
The MammoTrak enables comprehensive breast examinations including all kinds of diagnostic
imaging (such as high resolution scans, dynamic scans, fat-suppressed scans) combined with
breast biopsy. It allows for patient preparation outside the MR room.
4.3.22.1 Safety
Status: Released
General safety
PS.MAM.27 Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24332
Philips

WARNING
Verify that the table is at the same position within a set of scans that have the same
reference frame.
This is facilitated by the iso-center locking features of MammoTrak and the possibility to
enforce a new reference frame.
End fragment title: 24332 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS.MAM.27
WARNING
Verify that no magnetic object is present on the tabletop.
Magnetic objects are attracted by the magnetic field and may cause severe personal injury
when the MammoTrak is moved into to magnet.
WARNING
To avoid cross-infection always clean and disinfect the tabletop, Abdomen ramp, Breast coil
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

and cables after examination of patients where contamination of these parts may have
occurred (biopsy).
See the section ‘Cleaning and Disinfection’ for general cleaning and disinfection instructions.
WARNING
Do not use the MammoTrak with different MR systems.
The MammoTrak only matches with one system. Using the trolley with a different system
may cause personal injury while moving the tabletop into the magnet.

SYS.Label.IFU.Trolley.SafeWorkingLoad_Mass_Trolley Status: Released
The safe working load for the tabletop on the trolley is 150 kg. This is the total weight of
The maximum total mass of the trolley is 220 kg.
Philips

The safe working load of the trolley shall be distributed over the tabletop as with a patient in
lying position when moving the trolley.
End fragment title: 65196 SYS.Label.IFU.Trolley.SafeWorkingLoad_Mass_Trolley
WARNING
Verify that no person is sitting on the tabletop at the end of the magnet.
The tabletop could tip over causing injury to the patient.
WARNING
For scanning always move the tabletop to its end stop in the magnet.
This is the only position for which correct repositioning is guaranteed.
WARNING
Do not use the Tumble switch on the patient support control panel when the MammoTrak
trolley is docked to the system.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Raising the patient support can damage the MammoTrak trolley.
Patient positioning
WARNING
When positioning the patient on the tabletop lock the trolley brakes securely.
When the brakes are unlocked the trolley may suddenly move, which may cause the patient
to fall off.
WARNING
Do not to leave the patient unattended on the FlexTrak.
The patient may fall off the tabletop, which could lead to serious injury.

ISO/IEC: 24334
Philips

WARNING
Verify that the patient is not using the Breast coil or the Abdomen ramp to hold on to.
The coil and ramp are not rigidly connected to the tabletop and may fall off.
WARNING
Be careful when body parts hang over the tabletop.
These parts can scrape over the trolley sides or system bridge and injure the patient.
WARNING
When patient’s feet hang over the MammoTrak end, support the lower legs in such a way
that the patient’s toes are positioned higher than the tabletop surface.
When the patient’s length is causing the feet hang over the end of the MammoTrak, the feet
can get caught between tabletop and system parts when moving into the magnet.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

CAUTION
Do not use the brakes pedal as a step for the patient.
The pedal may get damaged.
Patient transport
WARNING
Verify that tabletop is locked securely to the trolley, do not use the tabletop lock handles to
move the trolley.
When unlocked the tabletop can be pushed off the trolley, which may lead to the tabletop
falling off and personal injury of the patient.

ISO/IEC: 24333
Philips

WARNING
Verify that the patient’s extremities remain to be on the tabletop.
Patient’s extremities can get squashed between the MammoTrak and possible colliding
objects.
WARNING
Patient’s extremities can get squash ed between the MammoTrak and possible colliding
objects.
WARNING
Verify that the trolley brake pedal does not collide with people or objects.
The brake pedal protrudes from the trolley and may cause injuries or damage to the brake
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
system.
Docking the MammoTrak
WARNING
Do not use the Tumble switch on the patient support control unit when the MammoTrak
WARNING
While docking the MammoTrak verify that the patient’s arms and hands are on the tabletop.
Arms and hands can get caught between trolley and (lowered) patient support when
docking.
WARNING
Lock the brakes after docking the MammoTrak to the system.
When the brakes are unlocked the trolley may move while the tabletop is pushed into the
magnet.
Philips

Moving the tabletop into the magnet

Status: Released
WARNING
Instruct the patient to keep hands and other body parts on the tabletop while it is moving.
Node title (original): RMM HAZ-PS.51 I patient’s extremities ID: 9007206046674571

remain on tabletop Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24316
WARNING
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Patient’s extremities can brush against the trolley sides and MR system bridge, which may
cause personal injury.
End fragment title: RMM HAZ-PS.51 I patient’s extremities remain on tabletop
Node title (original): 24331 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ- ID: 9007206047330443-2

PS.MAM.18, HAZ-PS.58, HAZ-PS.200.1) Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24331
WARNING
Due care must be taken to verify that no part of the patient's body, hair, clothing, cables or
infusion lines can get trapped or injured by any part of the equipment.
End fragment title: 24331 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PS.MAM.18, HAZ-PS.58, HAZ-PS.200.1)
Node title (original): 24319 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS.55.2 ID: 18014405301502987-2

Affix: Achieva / Multiva Jaguar (equivalent to PH.04) Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24319
Philips

WARNING
Check patient, patient extremities, clothing, equipment and accessories. Guide cables and
intravenous lines.
WARNING
With extremely heavy patients, be careful when moving the tabletop into the magnet, such
that it sticks out at the magnet end.
Due to patient weight and not optimal weight distribution the table top could break.

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
WARNING
Verify that no object can fall into the cable slab. Objects in the cable slabs may obstruct
table movement.
The tabletop can not be moved out of the magnet. Emergency removal of the tabletop is not
possible.
WARNING
When using drug delivery, Verify that no intravenous lines can get caught during tabletop
movement.
Doing a biopsy
ISO/IEC: 24335
Philips

WARNING
Do not exert unnecessary force on the MammoTrak carrier during a Biopsy.
If not required all people must keep clear of the carrier during the intervention. Too much
force will move the carrier and may result in injury of the patient or damage to the
equipment.
4.3.22.2 MammoTrak Components

Status: Released
MammoTrak is delivered with the following components:

• the MammoTrak trolley (including abdomen ramp)
• the 16 channel Breast coil (closed design):
this coil can be used for diagnosis
• the 7 channel Breast coil (open design):
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

this coil can be used for diagnosis and biopsy
• the head support
• mattresses to cover the trolley, the abdomen ramp and the area below the head support
Fig. 170: MammoTrak trolley with head support (2), 16 channel Breast coil (1) and abdomen ramp. Note that the 7 channel breast coil is
not shown here.
4.3.22.3 MammoTrak trolley

Status: Released
Philips

The figure shows the MammoTrak trolley with all its components except for the 7 channel
Breast coil. In this figure, the items which are part of the trolley itself are labeled. They are
described in detail in the following sections in the order:
Fig. 171: MammoTrak trolley. The indicated items are part of the trolley itself.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
1 Abdomen ramp
2 Connection panel
3 Tabletop handle
4 Side wing
5 Trolley handle
6 Trolley bars
7 Brake pedal
8 5th wheel
4.3.22.3.1 Tabletop handle

Status: Released
When the MammoTrak trolley is placed at the MR system for examinations, the tabletop has to
be moved to the isocenter.
With the tabletop handle, the tabletop can be released so that it can easily be moved to the
isocenter or back to the initial position.
Philips

Fig. 172: 1 - Tabletop handle left and right from the connection panel. 2 - Handle is not pressed. Tabletop cannot be moved, but is locked.
3 - Handle is pressed. Tabletop can be moved since it is released.
To release the tabletop

• Press the tabletop handle.
To move the tabletop

• Slide the tabletop while keeping the tabletop handle pressed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Whenever the tabletop handles are released, the tabletop is locked.
4.3.22.3.2 Abdomen ramp

Status: Released
The abdomen ramp is part of the trolley.
4.3.22.3.3 Connection panel

Status: Released
The connection panel is located at the end of the trolley close to the trolley handle. It offers
connections for the nurse call, the headset and the coil.
To access the connection panel

1. Open the lid.
When the lid is closed, it can be used to place equipment (e.g. required for biopsy) on it.
Philips

Fig. 173: Left: Lid of connection panel is closed. Right: Lid of connection panel is open.
To connect coil, nurse call or headset

1. Plug the coil connector, the nurse call and the headset into the corresponding connectors.
2. Guide the cables through the dedicated recesses in the lid.
4.3.22.3.4 Coil connector

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
The coil connector is located at the patient’s feet-side of the MammoTrak trolley which is to be
placed towards the magnet bore for an examination.
Fig. 174: Left: Coil cables and cable routing in the table where: 1 - connection panel, 2 - coil, 3 - magnet, 4 - coil cable, 5 - cable routing in
the table, 6 - cable with coil connector. Right: Coil connector.
1 Connection panel
2 Coil
3 Magnet
4 Coil cable
5 Cable routing in the table
6 Cable with coil connector

Philips

4.3.22.3.5 5th Wheel

Status: Released
Besides the four standard wheels, the trolley has a fifth wheel which can be used to facilitate
trolley movement for straight movement and to turn the corner. This fifth wheel can be lifted
up or set to the ground. It can be controlled by means of the brake pedal.
4.3.22.3.6 Brake pedal

Status: Released
The brake pedal can be set to three different positions.
Fig. 175: 1 - The trolley is locked and cannot be moved. 2 - The trolley is released and can be moved with the 5th
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

wheel lifted up. 3 - The trolley is released and can be moved with the 5th wheel on the ground.
Set the brake pedal to position 1

• when the patient is positioned on the trolley,
• when equipment is positioned on the trolley,
• when the examination takes place,
• when the trolley is supposed to be left in a parking position.

• when the trolley is to be positioned since position 2 allows small movements,
• when the trolley is moved towards/around the scanner’s tabletop.

• when the trolley is to be moved straight forward,
• when the trolley is to be turned around the corner.
To change the brake pedal’s position

1. Step on the brake pedal with a foot in one of the positions.
Philips

Fig. 176: 1 - The trolley is locked and cannot be moved. 2 - The trolley is released and can be moved with the 5th
wheel lifted up. 3 - The trolley is released and can be moved with the 5th wheel on the ground.
4.3.22.3.7 Trolley bars

Status: Released
The trolley bars are meant for stability. They can be used by the patient to step up/down the
trolley.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 177: The different ways of how to get on the trolley tabletop by means of the trolley bars.
4.3.22.3.8 Side wings

Status: Released
The MammoTrak trolley has two side wings, one on each side of the trolley.
They serve
• as a support for the patient when positioning herself on the coil and the abdomen ramp,
• as a handle when the trolley has to be removed from the MR system.
NOTICE
You can hold on to the grip on top of the side wing or the grip underneath.
Philips

Fig. 178: Left: Side wing. Right: Side wing serves as support for the patient.
4.3.22.3.9 Trolley handle

Status: Released
Hold on to the trolley handle to move the trolley from its parking position into the magnet
room and back.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 179: Trolley handle.
4.3.22.4 MammoTrak Breast coil 16

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Volume coil with an aperture in which the breasts can be positioned.

Philips

suppressed scans.
• This coil cannot be used for biopsy.
• Use with feet-first positioning only.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 180: Breast 16 coil with abdomen ramp and head support.
4.3.22.5 MammoTrak Breast coil 7

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Open-design volume coil with an aperture in which the breasts can be
positioned.
suppressed scans.
• This coil can be used for biopsy.
• Use with feet-first positioning only.
Philips

Fig. 181: Breast 7 coil with abdomen ramp and head support.
4.3.22.6 Head support
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
For maximum patient comfort, the height of the head support can be adjusted. You can also
adjust the distance of the head support to the breast coil by simply sliding the head support as
shown in figure. This can be done with the mattress around the head support.
Fig. 182: 1: Head support on tabletop. Mattress around head support. H = knob for heigth adjustment. 2: Head
support is close to coil (mattress removed). 3: Head support is far away from coil (mattress removed).
4.3.22.7 Workflow
Status: Released
The workflow can be split into two major parts:

• the work that has to be done outside the magnet room,
• the work that has to be done at the MR system.
Philips

4.3.22.7.1 Outside the magnet room

Status: Released
Preparation of the MammoTrak trolley

1. Lock the trolley brakes securely.
Fig. 183: Left: Locking the brakes. Right: The trolley is locked.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Coil positioning
The 16 channel breast coil can be used for diagnosis whereas the 7 channel breast coil can be
used for diagnosis and biopsy. In some cases, it might be necessary to replace the previously
used coil with the other one.
Take a coil off the tabletop
1. Remove the mattress around the head support.
2. Remove the head support.
3. Unplug the coil.
4. Take the coil off the tabletop.
Fig. 184: 1: Head support with mattress on tabletop. 2: Mattress is removed. 3: Head support is removed and cable is
being unplugged.
Philips

Fig. 185: Left: Coil has been taken off the tabletop. Right: Coil is being placed on tabletop.
Place a coil on the tabletop

1. Place the coil on the tabletop. Note that the coil is automatically positioned correctly due
to the recesses at the side of the tabletop and the two knobs on the tabletop.
2. Plug the coil connector into the connector at the connection panel.
3. Place the head support on the tabletop.
4. Place the mattress around the head support.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Patient preparation
the waist area.
Patient positioning
1. Let the patient step on the tabletop by means of the trolley bars. You can also let the
patient step up via a staircase.
NOTICE
Do not use the brake’s pedal as a step for the patient.
Philips

Fig. 186: Left: Stepping up the table. Right: Side wing serves as support for patient.
2. Tell the patient to lean onto the side wings when positioning herself on the coil and the
abdomen ramp.
NOTICE
Ensure that the patient is not using the breast coil or the abdomen ramp to hold on to.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3. Position the patient prone on the breast coil, with the head on the head support.
4. Adjust the height of the head support.
5. Ask the patient to place the arms either next to the head or alongside their body.
Moving MammoTrak trolley to the MR system

1. Release the brake and move the trolley to the MR system.
NOTICE
While transporting the patient on the MammoTrak, ensure that the tabletop is locked securely
to the trolley.
Do not use the tabletop handles to move the trolley.
WARNING
While transporting the patient on the MammoTrak, ensure that the trolley brake pedal does
not collide with people or objects.
2. Lower the MR system’s patient support to its lowest position.

Philips
3. Position the MammoTrak trolley at the system.

Fig. 187: MammoTrak trolley at MR system.
4.3.22.7.2 At the MR system

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Docking the MammoTrak
During installation, the MammoTrak trolley is set up either for docking from the left side
(standard situation) or from the right side.
NOTICE
If docking from the right side, place all cables (nurse call, coil) on the MammoTrak trolley so
that they cannot be damaged while docking.
Docking from the right or the left side
NOTICE
Ensure that the patient’s arms and hands are on the tabletop.
NOTICE
Lock the brakes after docking the MammoTrak to the system.
1. Set the patient support to its lowest position before docking the MammoTrak.
Philips

NOTICE
Do not use the tumble switch on the patient support control panel when the MammoTrak
2. Set the brake pedal to position 2 (5th wheel off the ground, brake released). Now small
trolley movements are possible.
3. Fine-adjust the trolley position: make sure that the trolley’s bumpers and the patient
support’s bumpers are against each other. Hold on to the side wings since this facilitates
trolley movement.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 188: Left: setting brake pedal to position 2. Middle: Bumpers at the trolley's end for fine-adjustment. Right:
Bumpers at the trolley's side for fine-adjustment.
4. Set the brake pedal to position 1 (trolley is locked and cannot be moved).
Fig. 189: Left: Locking the brakes. Right: The trolley is locked.
Traveling to isocenter
NOTICE
Ensure that the patient’s extremitites are on the tabletop.
Philips

To release the tabletop

1. Press the tabletop handle.
To move the coil to the isocenter
1. Slide the tabletop slowly towards the magnet while keeping the tabletop handle pressed.
2. Slow down the tabletop movement, when the tabletop handle approaches the markers on
the trolley. In this case the breast coil approaches the isocenter position.
The coil has reached isocenter when no further tabletop movement is possible.
NOTICE
Whenever the tabletop handles are released, the tabletop is locked.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 190: Upper row: Set-up on MammoTrak tabletop. 1: Connection panel with tabletop handle. 2: Head support. 3:
Coil. 4: Abdomen ramp. 5: Magnet. Lower row: Moving to isocenter. Trolley tabletop handle approaches marker as
breast coil slowly approaches isocenter.
Performing scans
► Perform the survey scan and the required diagnostic scans.
Performing biopsy
1. To release the tabletop, press the tabletop handle.
2. To move the coil out of the magnet, slide the tabletop slowly out of the magnet while
keeping the tabletop handle pressed.
Philips

Fig. 191: Trolley tabletop moved out of the magnet for biopsy. The coil is just outside of the magnet.
Undocking MammoTrak
When the examination (and/or the biopsy) is finished, MammoTrak has to be undocked again.
1. To release the tabletop, press the tabletop handle.
2. To move the MammoTrak tabletop out of the magnet, slide the tabletop completely out of
the magnet while keeping the tabletop handle pressed.
3. To move the MammoTrak trolley away from the magnet, set the brake pedal to position 2
(5th wheel off the ground, brake released). Now small trolley movements are possible.
4. Move the trolley away from the magnet. Hold on to the side wings since this facilitates
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
trolley movement.
Moving the MammoTrak trolley to the preparation room

1. Move the trolley to the preparation room.
2. Lock the trolley brakes securely.
3. Let the patient step off the tabletop by means of the trolley bars.
4.3.23 SENSE Breast 3.0T X/TX 7

Status: Released
Fig. 192: TX 7 Breast coil with abdomen ramp and head support.
The label on the coil says: Achieva TX Interventional Coil 3.0T.

Philips


• Receive-only
Design Open-design volume coil with an aperture in which the breasts can be
positioned.
Available for 3.0T TX
suppressed scans.
• This coil can be used for biopsy.
• Use with head-first positioning only.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

User Interface Name SENSE-Breast-7-TX
More information
• Positioning the patient, see chapter “Positioning for breast examinations” on page 577.
4.3.24 SENSE Body coil

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Flexible volume coil consisting of an upper (anterior) and lower (posterior) coil
part.
Each part contains two phased-array coil elements.
Dimensions 45 cm left-right by 30 cm feet-head.
Available for 1.5T
Applications • Abdomen, Thorax, Pelvis

• Abdominal Angiography, Peripheral Vascular Angiography.
Philips

Markers on the coil The elements are labelled with coil identification numbers (1, 2, 3 and 4). The
odd numbers (1 and 3) are on the cable side.
User Interface Name SENSE-Body
Fig. 193: SENSE Body coil: anterior and posterior coil part, SENSE mattress and SENSE cushion.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
General considerations
Use high SAR only if specifically required in order to perform the scan.
Status: Released
Positioning in general
The coil is usually positioned with the largest coverage in RL direction.
► Use SENSE mattress, SENSE cushion and two ‘shoulder straps’ in order to have a distance
between patient and coil and for higher comfort.
► Place the posterior coil part with the shoulder straps on the tabletop.
► Position the SENSE mattress on the coil so that the patient has no discomfort from the
electronics part of the coil.
Philips

Fig. 194: 1: Placing posterior coil part (no straps shown here) and SENSE mattress on the tabletop. 2: Schematic set-up of an examination
with the SENSE Body coil. a - anterior coil part, b - SENSE cushion, c - SENSE mattress, d - posterior coil part (no straps shown here).
► While positioning the patient, the anterior part can hang beside the table (straps are used
to connect element 1 and 3).
► Place the anterior part directly above the posterior part. The SENSE cushion must be
attached to the coil (to create a small distance between patient and coil).
► Strap the coil tightly around the patient, if necessary with the respiratory belt in between
patient and coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The arms of the patient are best left outside the coil.
Fig. 195: Placing anterior part on patient using straps.
Rotated coil
• When rotating the SENSE Body coil by 90o for large FH- coverage, a signal intensity drop
might be seen between coil loops of anterior and posterior coil part in sagittal images. This
effect can be reduced by using CLEAR.
Philips

Fig. 196: 1: SENSE Body coil on tabletop. 2: Abdomen study. 3: Rotated coil.
SENSE Body coil in body applications

• The coil is usually positioned with the largest coverage in RL-direction.
• For extra patient comfort, both coil parts have a notch at the top to avoid pressure on the
patient’s throat.
• For abdominal angio, the coil is rotated for large FH- coverage.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
SENSE Body coil for peripheral vascular angio

For PV studies (in combination with MobiTrak), this coil can be used for the lower legs to
enhance the signal in this area.
• Attention is needed in order to prevent the cables from being caught between the tabletop
and bore.
• Make sure the coil cable can handle the total table travel distance.
• The coil elements have to be shifted with respect to the posterior elements in order to
compensate for signal loss between the elements, see figure.
Fig. 197: Peripheral angio: use of SENSE Body coil and MobiTrak leg support.
Philips

Fig. 198: SENSE Body coil with leg support. Shift the elements with respect to the posterior elements either up- or
downwards as illustrated above..d - distance of 5 cm to 10 cm. The white arrow indicates the light visor position for
isocenter positioning.
SENSE Body coil in hip examinations

• Do not position the patient too low on the tabletop. Position the patient between the
markers on the table top.
• Tall patients can be positioned ’ feet first’ . The patient's hands should be on the chest.
• Position the coil with the largest coverage in RL-direction.
SENSE Body coil in MR Mammography

Use the SENSE breast mattress in conjunction with the SENSE Body coil to provide high quality
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SENSE imaging of the breast.
The mattress comprises of two parts:
• a solid foam base
• a flexible cover with fits onto the top side of the base
The base of the mattress has recesses on the top and bottom into which the anterior and
posterior elements of the SENSE Body coil fit. These recesses also contain velcro attachment
points to anchor the coil in place. Along either side of the top and bottom of the base are
grooves into which the cables of the coil should be placed. This gives the required separation
between the patient’s skin and the cables ensuring both safety and comfort.
Node title (original): Breast mattress (SENSE Body & SENSE ID: 9007205717573387-1
Flex) Status: Released
The flexible cover is designed to sit on the top of the base and cover the coil and cable. It is also
fixed to the coil and the base by use of velcro attachment. Both the base and cover are
designed for ease of cleaning for the prevention of cross-infection.
Philips

Fig. 199: Left: Breast mattress. Right: Schematic drawing of the breast mattress. 1 - flexible cover, 2- anterior coil part, 3 - base of the
mattress, 4 - posterior coil part, 5 - cables located in groove.
End fragment title: Breast mattress (SENSE Body & SENSE Flex)
Workflow
1. Put the posterior elements of the SENSE Body coil in the recesses of the base.
2. Place the cables of the SENSE Body coil in the groove on the bottom of the mattress.
3. Put the base centrally on the tabletop so that the whole device is supported.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
If the base is off-centred so that part of it is not fully on the tabletop, a risk of the mattress
tipping exists which could lead to injury to the patient.
4. Place the cables of the SENSE Body coil in the grooves on the top of the mattress.
5. Put the anterior part of the coil in the top recess of the base.
6. Put the flexible cover on the top of the base, covering both the base and the SENSE Body
coil.
7. Position the patient so that the breasts are centrally located within the holes provided.
• The patient’s arms can be positioned either alongside the body or above the head
depending on the patient’s preference.
• Ensure that the breasts are hanging freely in the coil, and that the breasts and the axilla
• Make sure that the patient’s head faces to the pillow.
8. Centre the light visor to the middle of the patient’s breasts, and move the patient into the
isocenter.
Node title (original): Breast positng: Head NOT to side ID: 6462654475-2
Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
The patient’s head should not be turned to the side.
This affects the position of the upper part of the body: the breasts and the shoulder may lift
up out of the coil.
End fragment title: Breast positng: Head NOT to side
4.3.25 SENSE XL Torso coil 16

Status: Released
Type of coil • 16 elements phased-array coil.

• Receive-only.
Design Flexible volume coil consisting of anterior and posterior sections. Each section
consists of 8 elements: 4 upper and 4 lower elements.
Dimensions • On 1.5T: 100 mm x 450 mm x 600 mm (coil half)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• On 3.0T: 74 mm x 558 mm x 600 mm (coil half), each element has a Z
coverage of 22.5 cm.
Available for 1.5T, 3.0 T
SENSE-compatible Yes; SENSE can be used routinely at reduction factors of 2 (2x2=4 in 3D) and with
a theoretical maximum value equal to the number of coil elements. SENSE can be
performed in AP, RL, and FH directions. It is advised to perform SENSE mainly in
AP and RL directions.
CLEAR can be set to Yes, Body Tuned or No
Applications • 2 station acquisition without patient repositioning: Abdomen/Pelvis, Thorax/

Abdomen, or other two-station combinations as well as individual
anatomies.
• Routine anatomical imaging, contrast-enhanced angiography, and
spectroscopy.
General remarks • Do not rotate this coil by 90o.

• Use CLEAR for uniform signal intensity across the coil elements.
• Recommended FOV is for single station coronal or sagittal examinations:
– on 1.5T systems: 45 cm x 45 cm (FH).
– on 3.0T systems: 45 cm x 38 cm. (FH)
Markers on the coil The coil has markers to indicate the effective edges of the elements as well as
Philips
the isocenters for the upper, lower and center of both combined groups.

Multi coil imaging • No
Dual coil imaging • No on 1.5T, Yes on 3.0T (see chapter 6, Coil combinations)
User Interface Name SENSE-XL-Torso
Element combinations All, Upper, Lower, and Central.
Fig. 200: SENSE XL Torso coil 16
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
Do not rotate the SENSE XL Torso coil by 90o.
Use only the orientation shown in this document.
NOTICE
Avoid routing of the RF coil cable assembly in proximity to the RF transmit coil. Avoid direct
contact of the patient’s skin with the RF coil cable assembly.
Disregard for the above listed notes may result in excessive local heating. Positioning of the RF
cable and driver box assembly must therefore be done with care. Keep a separation between
the patient's skin and the RF cables of at least 2 cm. Use the special spacer or pads of the
standard accessory set wherever the cable assembly may touch the skin.
NOTICE
If the Q-Body coil is used for acquiring a 3rd station, be sure that it is performed to the
superior end of the coil to minimize imaging in areas where the cables and driver box will be in
the Field of View.
Philips

NOTICE
On 3.0T systems: Make sure that the posterior section of the coil is the part on the table and
the anterior section on top of the patient.
Status: Released
NOTICE
For systems with the UIM (User Interface Module) on the right side, it is necessary to flip the
coil.
1. Position the posterior coil section on the tabletop. Attach the four (SENSE XL Torso coil)
positioning straps to the Velcro strips at the upper and lower ends of the coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 201: SENSE XL Torso coil: anterior and posterior part with straps.
2. Be careful to control the anterior section of the coil by placing it towards the foot end of
the tabletop to keep it from falling off of the tabletop while initially positioning the patient.
3. Position the patient head-first on the tabletop with his/her back on the posterior coil
section.
4. Place the anterior section directly parallel and above the posterior section in order to
reduce artifacts related to mispositioning of coil parts, most noticeable when using SENSE.
Position the SENSE cushion between patient and the anterior part of the coil.
NOTICE
Improved image quality can be achieved by having at least 1/3 overlap between the lateral
upper and lower elements or by keeping them separated.
Philips

5. Strap the coil tightly around the patient. If necessary place the respiratory belt between
patient and coil. For optimal results, position the arms of the patient above the head.
Fig. 202: Positioning with the SENSE XL Torso coil 16. 1 - Anterior and posterior coil sections, 2 - Prefered patient positioning with arms
above the head, 3 - Patient positioning with arms inside of the coil.
6. Be sure that the RF cable and driver box assembly is secured to the tabletop. This can be
accomplished by using the arm supports.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 203: 1 - Arm support device used to secure driver box to tabletop. 2 - In head-first positioning: place cushions between patient and
coil cable to avoid direct contact. 3 - In any patient position: avoid direct contact with coil cables. Note that pads are placed between
patient and cables.
NOTICE
Strictly follow the safety directions on cable handling as described in the Instructions for Use.
It is crucial that the cables are separated from the patient’s body. See figure above.
NOTICE
The driver box must be secured to the tabletop and not allowed to contact the façade of the
magnet.
See figure below.
Philips

Fig. 204: Incorrect (left) and correct (right) positioning of the driver box.
4.3.25.2 Coil element combinations

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 205: Coil elements of SENSE XL Torso coil 16.
• All: all 16 elements are used.

• Upper: the 8 upper elements are used.
• Lower: the 8 lower elements are used.
• Central: the 8 central elements are used (4 from anterior and 4 from posterior part). This
mode is meant for angio studies.
4.3.26 SENSE XL Torso 2.0 1.5T/3.0T

Status: Released
Philips

Type of coil • 16 elements phased-array coil.

• Receive-only.
Design • Volume coil consisting of anterior and posterior sections, each with its own
connector.
• Semi-flexible housing.
• 8 element phased array in anterior section and 8 element phased array in
posterior section.
Dimensions • Height 5cm, Width 55.5cm, Length 48.5cm.
Available for 1.5T, 3.0 T
SENSE-compatible Yes; SENSE can be used routinely at reduction factors of 2 (2x2=4 in 3D) and with
a theoretical maximum value equal to the number of coil elements. SENSE can be
performed in AP, RL, and FH directions. It is advised to perform SENSE mainly in
AP and RL directions.
• On 1.5 T systems, CLEAR can be set to Yes or No.
• On 3.0T systems, CLEAR can be set to Yes, Body Tuned or No.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Applications • 2 station acquisition without patient repositioning: Abdomen/Pelvis, Thorax/

Abdomen, or other two-station combinations as well as individual
anatomies.
• Routine anatomical imaging, contrast-enhanced angiography, and
spectroscopy.
General remarks • Do not rotate this coil by 90o.

• Use CLEAR for uniform signal intensity across the coil elements.
Multi coil imaging • No
Dual coil imaging • Yes

– Only combine the anterior and posterior sections with each other.
– Do not combine this coil with other coils.
User Interface Name The anterior and posterior section can be combined in Dual coil imaging and be
• SENSE-XL2A-Torso
• SENSE-XL2P-Torso
Philips

Fig. 206: Components of the SENSE XL Torso 2.0 1.5T coil. Left: Anterior coil, right: posterior coil.
Status: Released
► Place the posterior mattress on the tabletop.

► Embed the posterior coil section within the recess of the mattress. Route the cable through
the cable outlet.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 207: Left: Posterior mattress on the tabletop. Right: Posterior coil section in recess of the mattress.
► Position the patient with the area of interest centered to the posterior coil section.
► Position and adjust the anterior coil section to align with the posterior coil section.
This will reduce artifacts related to mispositioning of the coil parts and most noticeably
when using SENSE.
► Use Velcro straps to maintain the coil alignment and limit the coil motion during
examination.
Philips

Fig. 208: Left: Patient on the tabletop with the area of interest centered to the posterior coil section. Right: Anterior
coil section aligned with posterior coil section and attached with velcro straps. The patient's arms are positioned
alongside the body.
► The patient’s arms can be positioned either alongside the body or above the head
depending on the patient’s preference.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 209: Left: The patient's arems are positioned above the head. Right: Feet-first positioning utilizing a comfort
device between cable outlet and patient body.
► When using the coil set for feet-first positioning, use a comfort device between the cable
outlet and the patient body.
4.3.27 SENSE Torso coil 3.0T

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Volume coil consisting of a rigid lower part and flexible upper part. Lower part
contains two phased-array coil elements, upper part contains four phased-array
coil elements.
Dimensions 40 cm left-right by 35 cm feet-head
Available for 3.0T
SENSE-compatible Yes; max. SENSE factor: 6
Philips

Applications • Abdomen, Thorax, Pelvis

• Abdominal Angiography
• Peripheral Vascular Angiography
General remarks • Always use CLEAR or Body-Tuned CLEAR as homogeneity correction for best
image quality.
Markers on the coil A sticker displaying the element lay-out is positioned on the upper part of the
User Interface Name SENSE-Torso
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 210: SENSE Torso coil 3.0T.
NOTICE
Use high SAR only if specifically required in order to perform the scan.
4.3.27.1 Positioning SENSE Torso coil 3.0T

Status: Released
1. Position the posterior coil part on the tabletop.

2. Position the mattress on the coil for patient comfort and to ensure a distance between
patient and coil.
3. Position the patient on the posterior coil part.
4. Place the anterior section on the patient’s chest directly above the posterior part.
5. Strap the coil tightly around the patient, if necessary with the respiratory belt and
electrodes in between patient and coil.
Philips

Fig. 211: Patient positioned with SENSE Torso coil.
NOTICE
Always position the patient's arms above their head for coronal imaging.
4.3.28 Endo coil with disposable probe

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Node title (original): coil image Endo ID: 50331629963

Status: Released
Fig. 212: Endo coil with disposable probe: 1 - luer lock syringe used for inflation, 2 - probe cable, 3 - valve for luer lock
End fragment title: coil image Endo
Node title (original): Table Endo coil Achieva ID: 9007207397991691

Philips


• Receive-only
Design RF coil which can be positioned inside the rectum. The RF coil is fixed inside a
non-permeable balloon; both are mounted on a plastic rod which extends to a
grip. The coil amplifier and decoupling electronics are placed in a small box.
Available for • 1.5T

• 3.0T
SENSE-compatible Only in combination with specific SENSE coils. More information see ’SENSE and
CLEAR’ table entry below.
CLEAR-compatible
The Endo coil can be used as an element of a SENSE coil when combined with
some specific SENSE coils. In order to enable this SENSE coil combination, the
parameter ’Dual coil’ has to be used.
Applications • 1.5T: rectum, prostate, cervix

• 3.0T: prostate
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Contra-indications The Endo coil has several contraindications, e.g. inflammatory bowel disease.
Please refer to the section Contraindications below for the complete list.
amplifier box.

• Receive-only
box.
• The Multiva Endo coil can be filled with air only.
• Prostate
• Cervix
Contraindications The Endo coil has several contraindications, e.g. inflammatory bowel disease.
Please refer to the section Contraindications below for the complete list.
Philips

amplifier box.
Multi coil imaging Yes (see section 'Multi coil imaging')
Dual coil imaging Yes (see section 'Dual coil imaging')

End fragment title: Table Endo coil Achieva
Node title (original): 67333 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PegRF ID: 36028803653789451-1

5.2 & HAZ-PegRF 6 Status: Released
Contraindications
WARNING
Do not use the coil when any of the following is indicated:
• Inflammatory bowel disease i.e. ulcerative colitis or Crohn’s disease etc.
• Latex sensitivity.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Radiation or surgery of the prostate, rectum or surrounding area within the last 8 weeks.
• Rectal fistula.
• Severe hemorrhoids.
• Rectal obstruction or stricture.
• Impacted or excessive stool in the rectum.
• Stricture of the anal canal.
• Any exclusion normally recognized for intrarectal and endorectal devices.
• Gold seed fiducial markers within the last 3 weeks. Consult the responsible physician and
the instructions of the manufacturer of the gold seed fiducial markers.
• Brachytherapy seeds within the last 12 weeks. Consult the responsible physician and the
instructions of the manufacturer of the brachytherapy seeds.
End fragment title: 67333 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PegRF 5.2 & HAZ-PegRF 6
Safety
Node title (original): 58632 SYS.Label.IFU.Notice.HAZ- ID: 27021604186987275-1
PegRF2.1_v1 Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24285
Philips

NOTICE
The probe of the coil is intended for single use only.
The interface device is reusable.
End fragment title: 58632 SYS.Label.IFU.Notice.HAZ-PegRF2.1_v1

SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.Cleaning.HAZ-PegRF 3 Status: Released
Implemented Measure: HAZ-PegRF 3
WARNING
Liquid may leak from the balloon of the dS Endo 3.0T coil.
Risk of irritation.
• Only use liquid that is approved by the manufacturer of the dS Endo 3.0T coil for inflation
of the balloon.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 60151 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.Cleaning.HAZ-PegRF 3
Node title (original): 24287 SYS.Label.IFU.Notice.HAZ-PegRF2.2 ID: 18014405142007947-1

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24287
NOTICE
This product contains natural rubber and DEHP.
Natural rubber can cause allergic reactions such as itching, fever, dyspnea, urtication, asthma,
hypotension, and shock. When these symptoms occur, immediately stop using the coil and
take proper action. For USA only: refer to FDA March 29, 1991 Medical Alert on latex product.
DEHP may cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.
End fragment title: 24287 SYS.Label.IFU.Notice.HAZ-PegRF2.2
NOTICE
Do not expose Endo-probes to UV or direct sunlight. Always store the probes in the storage
box at temperatures below 21o C.
Deterioration speed will increase highly when exposed to UV light or high temperatures.
Node title (original): HG - Avoid excessive bending of coil rod ID: 9007205677630347-1
Philips
Status: Released

CAUTION
Avoid excessive bending of the coil rod.
Excessive bending can lead to leakage of the non-permeable balloon.
End fragment title: HG - Avoid excessive bending of coil rod
4.3.28.1 Insertion of the coil

Status: Released
1. Use a lubricating gel on the outside of the probe to ease insertion into the rectum.
NOTICE
Too much lubricant may create signal artifacts on the images.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 213: 1 - Endo coil where m - migration stop, b - balloon. 2 - Preparation for the examination. 3 - Insertion of the
coil where p - prostate, r - rectum, s - spinal column.
Node title (original): 24355 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.88.1 ID: 18014405307636363-1

Affix: Achieva Multiva Status: Released
WARNING
Do not scan with the patient in decubitus position when using the Endo coil. Only scan in the
supine or prone position with the endo coil in the center of and aligned with the body coil
axis. The coil cable must be aligned with the body coil axis.
Scanning with the patient in decubitus position could result in excessive coil heating and
ultimately causing burns to the patient.
1. Position the patient in left or right decubitus position, with the knees pulled-up.
Philips

2. Squeeze the balloon gently to remove the air and thus ease insertion.
3. Maintain alignment and orientation of the blue stripe with the anterior midline of the
patient.
4. Care should be taken when inserting the coil into the rectum; this should be done slowly,
according to the patient's tolerance.
5. After positioning the coil, the balloon must be inflated to permit the coil loop to take up its
natural form. The balloon is inflated with air using the enclosed luer-lock syringe which fits
into a valve located close to the grip.
• The inflated balloon makes it possible not only to position the coil close to the prostate,
but also to prevent further movement of the coil in the rectum.
6. Place the migration stop on the shaft.
7. Inflate the balloon to the greatest volume that the patient can tolerate (60 cc to 100 cc).
NOTICE
The 1.5 T Endo coil can be filled with air only.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
The 3.0 T Endo coil is capable of being filled with fluids approved for use by the manufacturer
of the coil, if desired for spectroscopy purposes.
NOTICE
During inflation one should continuously ask the patient if it is still tolerable.
Node title (original): HG - Do not rotate the dS Endo coil ID: 9007205677753867-1
Status: Released
CAUTION
After insertion, do not rotate the coil once the balloon is inflated.
End fragment title: HG - Do not rotate the dS Endo coil
4.3.28.2 Positioning and connecting

Status: Released
Philips

The following instructions have to be followed strictly to avoid patient injury or damage to the
coil:
Node title (original): Pos Endo coil Achieva ID: 18014406652814475
Node title (original): 24356 SYS.Label.IFU.Instruction.HAZ-RF.89 ID: 109038158475

(achieva/multiva) Status: Released
Implemented Measure: 24356
1. When the balloon is inflated, the patient must turn to a supine position. This is the
appropriate position for the examinations.
2. Position the patient head-first supine in the middle of the tabletop, with the cable routed
straight away from the patient.
3. Place the preamplifier box on the table and connect the probe cable to it.
4. Route the probe cable and preamplifier box between the patient’s legs parallel to the axis
of the bore. Make sure that the cable and the amplifier box do not touch the patient or the
bore (see figure).
5. Move the patient into the isocenter of the magnet.
6. Route the cable of the amplifier box underneath the leg to the coil socket and connect it to
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
the system.
Fig. 214: Routing of the Endo coil cable and amplifier box.
End fragment title: 24356 SYS.Label.IFU.Instruction.HAZ-RF.89 (achieva/multiva)
End fragment title: Pos Endo coil Achieva
NOTICE
The cable of the preamplifier box cannot be connect before the patient is positioned in the
isocenter.
Philips


WARNING
4.3.28.3 Removing the coil

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): HG - Deflate the balloon ID: 9007205677878155-1
Status: Released
CAUTION
After the examination, fully deflate the balloon before removing the coil.
End fragment title: HG - Deflate the balloon
1. To deflate the balloon use the stopcock close to the grip, place the luer-lock syringe on the
valve and withdraw the syringe plunger.
2. Remove the coil.
NOTICE
Emergency Patient Removal: Stop the scan, disconnect the probe from the Endo coil interface
device, and remove the patient from the examination room. After the patient is removed,
deflate the balloon and remove the probe.
4.3.28.4 Cleaning / Disinfection

Status: Released
Philips

For information about cleaning and disinfection of the Endo coil, refer to the Instructions for
Use, volume 1: chapter Maintenance and Quality Assurance.
4.3.28.5 Storage
Status: Released
1. Store the Endo coil in the original shipping container to prevent bending of the shaft.
2. Avoid transporting and storing the Endo coil imaging system at extreme temperatures and
humidity as this may cause damage to the system.
4.3.29 SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac coil

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil consisting of posterior and anterior coil part plus auxiliaries.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Applications • Pediatric body imaging
User Interface Name SENSE-Ped-BodyC
Fig. 215: SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac coil with cradle.

Philips

Status: Released
1. Put the posterior coil part on the tabletop.

2. Place the cradle above the posterior coil part.
3. Position the child on the cradle.
4. Place the anterior coil part on the posterior coil part and close the coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 216: Positioning with the SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac coil.
4.3.30 SENSE Shoulder coil 8

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil consisting of base plate and an anterior coil plus inferior,
anterior and posterior pad. The posterior coil elements are integrated in the base
plate. The anterior coil is adjustable in height.
Applications • Shoulder imaging.
User Interface Name SENSE-Shoulder-8

Philips

Fig. 217: SENSE Shoulder coil 8. 1 - coil and cable. 2 - Set-up for right shoulder imaging. 3: Set-up for left shoulder
imaging.
Status: Released
1. Place the base plate on the tabletop.

2. Put the inferior pad on the tabletop so that it fits closely to the base plate.
3. Place the posterior pad on the base plate with the wedge under the shoulder of interest for
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
best image quality and patient comfort.

4. Position the patient on the tabletop with the affected shoulder on the posterior pad.
Fig. 218: Preparation for a left shoulder examination. 1 - Base plate on tabletop. 2 - Inferior pad on tabletop and posterior pad on
baseplate. 3 - Patient on tabletop.
5. Open the connector on the base plate.

6. Make sure that the cup-shaped anterior pad is securely attached to the anterior coil.
7. Insert the anterior coil into the connector. There is a groove in the coil’s pillar and the
connector which allows inserting in only one way. Do not use the handles on the coil pillar
during insertion.
8. Assure that the coil locks in place with an audible noise.
Philips

Fig. 219: 1 - Opening the connector on the base plate. 2 -Inserting anterior coil into connector. 3 - This picture shows the groove at the
coil’s pillar and the connector and the pin which snaps against the pillar during insertion
9. Press the handles at the anterior coil’s pillar and adjust the height and the angulation of
the anterior coil.
• Make sure that shoulder tissue is not extruded from between the anterior coil and the
base plate.
• Align the lateral portion of the anterior coil with the base plate.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
To achieve optimal image quality, the lateral edge of the anterior coil part should be parallel
to the lateral edge of the base plate.
Fig. 220: 1: Handles are pressed to adjust the height of the coil. 2: Positioning for left shoulder imaging. The arrow indicates where to
make sure that no tissue is extruded. 3: The lateral portion of the anterior coil is aligned with the base plate.
10. Use the knee cushion to increase comfort.

11. Connect the SENSE Shoulder coil to the connector at the Patient Support Control Panel.
12. Prevent contact between the patient and the bore wall at the contra-lateral side.
13. Move the patient into the isocenter and perform the MR examination.
14. After the examination gently pull the anterior coil out of the base plate.
Philips

4.3.31 SENSE Shoulder coil 4

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil consisting of base plate and a small and a large coil plus
auxiliaries.
Applications • Shoulder imaging.
General remarks • On 1.5T systems, the coil has two slots on each side. On 3.0T systems, the
coil has one slot on each side only.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Applying CLEAR gives excellent homogeneity throughout the images. In fat-

suppressed scans however, image interpretation may sometimes be easier
without CLEAR.
User Interface Name SENSE-Shoulder-4
Fig. 221: SENSE Shoulder coil. Left: 1.5T version with 2 slots on each side, right: 3.0T version with one slot on each
side.
Status: Released
Philips


2. Slide the small or large coil into the slot (closest to the center of the bore).
NOTICE
Select the small coil if possible.
NOTICE
On 1.5T systems only: Do not use the outer slot since image quality might decrease.
Only in case of extremely large patients, the outer slot can be used.
3. Position the patient on the tabletop, and place the coil around the shoulder.
4. Let the patient pull up his/her shoulder so that it is as close as possible to the coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 222: Patient positioning for the right and left shoulder. Note that the shoulder is pulled up into the coil.
4.3.32 SENSE Wrist coil 4

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil. Ovoid, two-piece, split shell design which conforms closely to
the wrist.
To reduce patient motion artifacts, this coil includes a base plate to fixate the coil
and several pads.

Philips

Applications • Wrist imaging, middle hand.
General remarks • The coil can be used overhead (superman position) with the joint
horizontally, or at the patient’s side, with the joint vertically.
without CLEAR.
User Interface Name SENSE-Wrist-4

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 223: SENSE Wrist coil 4.
Status: Released
The wrist coil includes a coil holder for scans performed at the patient's side, and for scans
performed over the patient's head. The base plate is equipped with a transverse slot and two
lateral slots.
Philips

Fig. 224: Positioning with the SENSE Wrist coil 4. Left: Positioning of wrist at patient's side. Right: Positioning
overhead (superman positioning).
Overhead - Head First

1. Place the base plate on the patient table.
2. To attach the horizontal coil holder, insert the lock down button into the transverse slot
and slide into position.
3. Attach the wrist coil by gently applying downward pressure until the support pins click into
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

place in the holder.
The coil is correctly positioned when the cable points away from the magnet.
Fig. 225: 1 - Lateral (l) and transverse (t) slots. 2 - Coil holder and insert lockdown button (b). 3 - Coil cable pointing
away from magnet (m).
Left or Right Wrist - At Side - Feet First

1. Place the base plate on the patient table.
2. Slide the vertical coil holder into a lateral slot.
3. Attach the wrist coil by gently applying downward pressure until the support pins click into
place in the holder.
The coil is correctly positioned when the cable points away from the magnet (m).
Philips

4.3.33 SENSE Wrist coil 8

Status: Released

• Receive-only
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Design Rigid volume coil of 8 elements that closely encircles the wrist for high SNR. One-
piece, hinged design for easy patient set-up. To reduce patient motion artifacts,
the SENSE Wrist coil includes a rigid base plate to fixate the coil.
Applications • Wrist imaging.
General remarks • The coil can be used overhead (superman position) or at the patient’s side,
with the joint vertically or horizontally.
without CLEAR.
User Interface Name SENSE-Wrist-8

Philips

Fig. 226: SENSE Wrist coil 8.
Status: Released
The base plate is equipped with two central transverse slots and two lateral slots on each side.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 227: 1 - Base plate on tabletop. 2 - Closed coil on base plate for examination right wrist overhead (horizontally).
3 - Patient positioning right wrist - at side - feet first (vertically).
Status: Released
NOTICE

2. Slide the coil into the transverse slots.
3. Angulate the coil for right or left wrist examinations.
Philips

Fig. 228: Left: Coil positioning for left wrist - overhead. Right: Coil positioning for right wrist - overhead. With
padding.
4. Make sure that the cable does not stick out over the table. If necessary, shift the coil
downwards.
5. Put a pillow on the tabletop below the coil. Position the patient prone with the hand in the
coil and the upper body on the pillow.
6. Use cushions so that the patient lies comfortable.
7. Insert padding into the coil for patient comfort.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
8. Close the coil.

9. Insert padding into the coil through the opening, underneath the fingers.
10. Place the knee cushion under the lower legs for patient comfort.
NOTICE
The cable points towards the magnet and runs down next the coil and patient to the
connector.

2. Slide the coil vertically into the lateral slots of the base plate, either on the left-hand or on
the right-hand side.
3. Remove the mount adaptor so that the patient doesn’t lie against it.
Philips

Fig. 229: Left: Removing the mount adaptor. Right: mount adaptor removed.
4. Position the patient on the tabletop supine and feet-first with his/her hand in the coil
(vertically).
6. Close the coil.
8. Place thin cushions under the upper arm for patient comfort.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 230: Positioning at side right wrist.
4.3.34 Hand/Wrist coil 4

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coils of 4 elements that closely encircle the wrist for high SNR. One-
piece design for easy patient set-up. To reduce patient motion artifacts, the
Hand/Wrist coil includes a rigid base plate to fixate the coil.

Philips
FOV: 120 mm to 230 mm

Available for 1.5T
SENSE-compatible No
Applications • Wrist and hand imaging.
General remarks • The coil can be used overhead (superman position) or at the patient’s side,
with the joint vertically or horizontally.
without CLEAR.
User Interface Name Hand/Wrist

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 231: Hand/Wrist coil 4
Fig. 232: Left: Base plate on tabletop. The base plate is equipped with one pair of slots for 'at side' positioning (3),
two pairs of slots for 'overhead' positioning (1) and one pair of slots for the phantom holder (2). Right: 2 wedge pads,
2 hand palm supports (small and normal size), 2 flat hand supports (small and normal size).
Status: Released
Philips

Fig. 233: 1 - Coil on base plate. 2 - Examination of left wrist - at side - feet first. 3 - Examination of right wrist
overhead.

2. Slide the coil into one of the pair of slots for ’overhead’ positioning, either for right or left
wrist/hand examination.
3. Fix the coil to the base plate with the strap.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 234: Left: Coil set-up for left wrist - overhead. Right: Coil set-up for right wrist - overhead.
4. Place the hand palm support in the coil, either for a hand examination or for a wrist
examination.
Fig. 235: These figures show how the hand palm support has to be put in the coil and how the hand has to be placed
on this pad for either a hand or a wrist examination. Left: Positioning of pad and hand for wrist examination. Right:
Positioning of pad and hand for hand examination.
Philips

6. Use cushions so that the patient lies comfortably.
7. Insert one or more flat hand supports on top of the hand to stabilize the hand.
8. Insert the wedge pad into the coil through the opening above the hand to flatten the hand.
Fig. 236: Placement of wedges in the coil: 1 - flat hand support, 2 - wedge pad.
9. Place the knee cushion under the lower legs for patient comfort.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

1. Place the base plate on the tabletop such that the slots for ’at side’ positioning are at the
side of the wrist which has to be examined.
2. Slide the coil vertically into the groove, either on the left-hand or on the right-hand side.
Fig. 237: Left: Coil set-up for left wrist examination. Right: Patient positioning for a left wrist examination. The pads
are inserted into the coil.
3. Place the hand palm support in the coil, either for a hand examination or for a wrist
examination.
4. Position the patient on the tabletop supine and feet-first with his/her hand in the coil
(vertically).
5. Insert one or more flat hand supports on top of the hand to stabilize the hand.
6. Insert the wedge pad into the coil through the opening above the hand to flatten the hand.
Philips

4.3.35 SENSE Small Extremity coil 8

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Wrap-around coil on coil base with two dedicated mattresses and dedicated filler
pads.
Applications • Elbow imaging,

• Small extremities,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Pediatrics
User Interface Name SENSE-SmallExt8
Fig. 238: SENSE Small Extremity coil 8. 1 - Coil in Small Extremity coil mattress. 2 - Small Extremity coil mattress with filler pads. 3 - Cable
guide mattress.
Status: Released
This coil can be used for examinations in supine (lateral) or prone (superman) patient position.
The procedure for supine examinations is described here.
Philips

1. Place the short mattress (mattress provided with all Philips systems) at the bore end.
2. Place the Small Extremity coil mattress on the table.
3. Put the coil into the required side so that the coils lies stable. Place filler pads into the
empty spaces.
4. Place the cable guide mattress on the table.
5. Place the cable through an available guide.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 239: Left and right: Three mattresses (short mattress, coil positioning mattress and cable guide mattress) on the tabletop from
different views.
6. Position the patient on the mattress with his/her elbow into the coil.
7. Use cushions for patient comfort and stability.
8. Wrap the coil around the patient’s elbow.
Ensure that the edges of the coil overlap.
Snap the coil closed and pull the strap tight.
Philips

Fig. 240: Left: Open coil on tabletop. Right: Closed coil on tabletop.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 241: Patient's arm in coil supported by sandbag.
4.3.36 Knee/Foot coil

Status: Released
Type of coil • Quadrature detection: 12 elements

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil consisting of a coil base and an upper coil part.
Dimensions Internal diameter 18 cm; length 20 cm

Coverage: FH 22 cm, LR and AP: 18 cm, AP in foot region: extended to 28 cm due
to vertical extension.
Available for 1.5T
SENSE-compatible No
Philips

CLEAR-compatible No
Applications • Knee, Ankle, Foot
User Interface Name Knee-Foot
Fig. 242: Left: Knee/Foot coil. Right: Positioning the coil.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Status: Released
The coil should be placed with the cable coming out on the front. Make sure the coil is properly
closed.
Status: Released
NOTICE
Knee
► Use foam pads to keep the knee securely in place. Use sandbags and cushions to stabilize
the knee.
► Do not place sandbags near or inside the field of view. This will help with shimming.
Ankle /Foot
► Medially rotate the ankle a little to get nice anatomic orthogonal surveys.
Philips
► Use the foot-support coil insert to prevent motion.

► Use the fixation wedge to prevent motion of the toes/foot.

► Use the support cushion for the contralateral knee/foot.
► Support the knees with small wedges.
Fig. 243: Left: Knee/Foot coil with foot-support coil insert. Right: Knee/Foot coil applying fixation wedge.
4.3.37 Knee/Foot coil 4 (FootAnkleKnee)

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Rigid volume coil consisting of base plate, posterior coil part and two different
anterior coil parts, one for a knee examination and one for a foot/ankle
examination, plus auxiliaries.
Dimensions • Outer dimensions: height 270mm, width 320mm, length 600mm
Available for 1.5T
SENSE-compatible No
Applications • Knee, Foot, Ankle.
General remarks • Applying CLEAR gives excellent homogeneity throughout the images. In fat-
without CLEAR.
Markers • Landmark on top of anterior coil parts.
User Interface Name FootAnkleKnee

Philips

Fig. 244: Knee/Foot coil: 1 - base plate, posterior and anterior coil part for foot/ankle examination, 2 - base plate, posterior and anterior
coil part for knee examination, 3 - base plate, posterior part with accessories: a - support cushion, b foot support, c - balun cover pad, d -
lower leg support.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 245: Auxiliaries: 1 - knee pad for a knee examination, 2 - toe wedge pad and straps for a foot examination, 3 - foot support pads.
Status: Released
General preparation
2. Slide the coil in the transverse slots, and push it to the left or right side for an examination
of the left or right extremity.
The coil should be placed with the cable coming out away from the magnet.
Philips

Fig. 246: Base plate on tabletop with posterior coil part. Left: for an examination of the left knee, foot or ankle. Right:
for an examination of the right knee, foot or ankle.
3. Place the balun cover pad on the cable trap box.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 247: Placing of balun cover pad on cable trap box.
Positioning - Ankle /Foot

The following images illustrate the set-up for a left or right foot/ankle examination and where
to place the support cushion, the lower leg support and the balun cover pad.
1. Use the support cushion for the contralateral foot.
2. Use the lower leg support for the lower leg to be examined.
3. The balun cover pad can be used to support the contralateral lower leg.
Fig. 248: Left: Set-up for left foot/ankle examination. Right: Set-up for right foot/ankle examination.
4. Put the foot support on the posterior coil part.

Philips
5. Insert the pads into the foot support, and fix the straps to the coil.

6. Place the contralateral foot on the support cushion and the lower leg on the balun cover
pad.
7. Position the foot in the foot support with the lower leg on the lower leg support. Place the
straps around the foot for immobilization.
Fig. 249: 1 and 2: inserting pads into foot support. 3 - positioning and immobilizing foot in foot support.
8. Very carefully slide the anterior coil part onto the posterior coil part with both hands. Make
sure the coil is properly closed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
Special attention is needed in case of patients with damaged feet and toes, e.g. diabetes.
9. Insert the toe wedge pad into the coil through the opening, underneath the toes. This pad
can help keep the forefoot immobile.
10. Use the landmark on top of the anterior coil part for isocenter positioning.
Fig. 250: 1 and 2: Right foot examination. Contralateral leg on support cushion and balun cover pad. Foot in coil and lower leg on lower
leg support. 3 - Insertion of toe wedge pad into the coil. The arrow indicates the landmark for isocenter positioning.
Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
Positioning - Knee
1. Put the knee pad on the posterior coil part.
Fig. 251: Left: Knee pad. Right: Posterior coil part on base plate for left knee examination. Note that the knee pad is
not yet inserted into the knee coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

2. Place the contralateral knee on the knee support.
3. Position the knee on the knee pad in the coil, and the foot on the lower leg support.
Fig. 252: Left: Left knee examination with contralateral (right) knee on knee support. Right: Left knee examination
with left foot on lower leg support.
4. Close the coil.

5. Use the landmark on top of the anterior coil part for isocenter positioning.
Philips

Fig. 253: Left: Closing the coil. Right: Set-up for a right knee examination. Note that the balun cover pad can also be
used for patient positioning and comfort. The arrow indicates the landmark for isocenter positioning.
4.3.38 SENSE Knee coil 16 1.5T

Status: Released

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Receive-only
attached to it) and an anterior coil part plus auxiliaries.
Available for 1.5T
Applications • Knee imaging, feet-first examinations
User Interface Name SENSE-Knee-16
Node title (original): Knee coil 16 Receive-only AND T/R ID: 6463100043-1
overview Status: Released
Philips

Fig. 254: SENSE Knee coil 16. 1: Front view, 2: Rear view, 3: Auxiliaries, upper left: unaffected knee pad; upper right: foot support pad;
lower left: thin and thick wedge pad; lower right: knee ramp.
End fragment title: Knee coil 16 Receive-only AND T/R overview
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): Positioning Knee 16 Receive-only AND T/R ID: 9007205717836555-1
Status: Released
1. Place the coil base on the tabletop with the scale towards the magnet.
2. Put the small mattress in front of the coil base.
3. Put the knee ramp on the coil base.
Due to its design, the knee ramp can be put on the coil base in one way only.
Fig. 255: 1: Coil base with posterior coil part (p) on tabletop with small mattress in front of it. 2: Knee ramp (r) on coil
base. 3: Knee ramp can be put on coil base in one way only. s = scale on the coil base. M = arrow points to magnet.
4. Slide the posterior coil part to the left or to the right for a left or right knee examination.
5. Put the thin and/or thick wedge pad in the coil for small knees.
6. Put the unaffected knee pad on the coil base besides the posterior coil part.
Philips

Fig. 256: Set-up for feet-first knee examinations with unaffected knee pad besides posterior coil part. R: set-up for a right knee
examination with posterior coil part slid to the right side. Wedge pads are placed in the coil for a small knee. L: set-up for a left knee
examination with posterior coil part slid to the left side.
7. Position the patient on the tabletop

• with the knee to be examined in the posterior coil part,
• with the corresponding foot on the foot support pad,
• with the unaffected knee on the unaffected knee pad.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 257: Right knee examination. Left: right leg with knee in posterior coil part and foot on foot support pad. Right: left leg with knee on
unaffected knee pad.
8. Carefully place the anterior coil part on the posterior coil part.
9. Close the coil by moving the U-bolt.
Philips

Fig. 258: Closing the coil by means of the U-bolt.
10. Use the light visor and move the patient’s knee to the isocenter.
Status: Released
NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12


End fragment title: Positioning Knee 16 Receive-only AND T/R
4.3.39 SENSE T/R Knee coil 16 3.0T

Status: Released

• Transmit/Receive
attached to it) and an anterior coil part plus auxiliaries.
Available for 3.0T
Applications • Knee imaging, feet-first examinations

Philips

Node title (original): Knee coil 16 Receive-only AND T/R ID: 6463100043-2
overview Status: Released
Fig. 259: SENSE Knee coil 16. 1: Front view, 2: Rear view, 3: Auxiliaries, upper left: unaffected knee pad; upper right: foot support pad;
lower left: thin and thick wedge pad; lower right: knee ramp.
End fragment title: Knee coil 16 Receive-only AND T/R overview

RF.Jewel2.1.2_Achieva_v1 Status: Released
Affix: Achieva
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ISO/IEC: 71427
WARNING
Do not scan body parts other than the lower limbs with the SENSE T/R Knee 16 coil.
Do not scan pediatric patients under 15 kg (33 lbs) with the SENSE T/R Knee 16 coil.
Label on the coil: Do not scan pediatric patients under 15 kg (33 lbs) with this coil.
End fragment title: 71427 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.Jewel2.1.2_Achieva_v1
Status: Released
Node title (original): Positioning Knee 16 Receive-only AND T/R ID: 9007205717836555-2
Status: Released
1. Place the coil base on the tabletop with the scale towards the magnet.
2. Put the small mattress in front of the coil base.
3. Put the knee ramp on the coil base.
Due to its design, the knee ramp can be put on the coil base in one way only.
Philips

Fig. 260: 1: Coil base with posterior coil part (p) on tabletop with small mattress in front of it. 2: Knee ramp (r) on coil
base. 3: Knee ramp can be put on coil base in one way only. s = scale on the coil base. M = arrow points to magnet.
4. Slide the posterior coil part to the left or to the right for a left or right knee examination.
5. Put the thin and/or thick wedge pad in the coil for small knees.
6. Put the unaffected knee pad on the coil base besides the posterior coil part.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 261: Set-up for feet-first knee examinations with unaffected knee pad besides posterior coil part. R: set-up for a right knee
examination with posterior coil part slid to the right side. Wedge pads are placed in the coil for a small knee. L: set-up for a left knee
examination with posterior coil part slid to the left side.
7. Position the patient on the tabletop

• with the knee to be examined in the posterior coil part,
• with the corresponding foot on the foot support pad,
• with the unaffected knee on the unaffected knee pad.
Philips

Fig. 262: Right knee examination. Left: right leg with knee in posterior coil part and foot on foot support pad. Right: left leg with knee on
unaffected knee pad.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 263: Closing the coil by means of the U-bolt.
Status: Released
NOTICE

End fragment title: Positioning Knee 16 Receive-only AND T/R
► Connect the coil connectors to the sockets:

• the T/R connector to the TR socket,
• the conventional connector to the conventional socket.
Philips

Fig. 264: Connectors of the SENSE T/R Knee coil 16 3.0T in the corresponding sockets on the Achieva TX system.
4.3.40 SENSE Knee coil 8

Status: Released

• Receive-only
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Design Rigid volume coil consisting of 8 elements
Dimensions FH: 37 cm, AP: 28 cm, LR (coil): 32 cm, LR (base): 45 cm
Applications • Knee
General remarks • This coil should only be used for ‘Feet first’ studies.
without CLEAR.

Philips

Fig. 265: SENSE Knee coil 8.
Status: Released
► Use foam pads to keep the knee securely in place. Use sandbags and cushions to stabilize
the knee.
► Do not place sandbags near or inside the field of view. This will help with shimming.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 266: Positioning with SENSE Knee coil 8.
Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
4.3.41 SENSE Foot-Ankle coil

Status: Released

• Receive-only
auxiliaries.
Dimensions • Inner dimensions: FH: 200 mm, LR: 105 mm, AP: 270 mm.
• FOV: FH: 220 mm, LR: 120 mm, AP: 280 mm.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Applications • Foot, Ankle.
General remarks • Applying CLEAR gives excellent homogeneity throughout the images. In fat-
without CLEAR.
Markers • On the cable to facilitate cable routing into the groove of the base plate.
• Landmark on top of the handle for isocenter positioning.
User Interface Name SENSE-Foot/Ankle

Philips

Fig. 267: Left: SENSE Foot-Ankle coil: base plate and coil. Right: Schematic drawing of the 8 coil elements.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 268: 1: Base plate with foot support. 2: Toe wedge pad. 3: Foot support pad. 4: Knee support (2x). 5: Unaffected
foot pad.
Status: Released
1. Place the base plate on the tabletop towards the magnet so that the patient can be
examined supine and feet first.
2. Slide the foot support on the base plate to the left or the right side to accommodate left or
right foot and ankle examinations.
3. Insert padding into the foot support for patient comfort and good fixation.
• The foot support pad is used to center the ankle in the coil.
4. Position the patient on the tabletop. Place the foot to be examined in the foot support. To
improve patient comfort, use the knee supports.
5. Place the foot which is not to be imaged in the unaffected foot pad for patient comfort.
6. Use the strap to immobilize the foot to be examined.
7. Very carefully slide the coil onto the foot support with both hands.
Philips

NOTICE
Special attention is needed in case of patients with damaged feet and toes, e.g. diabetes.
NOTICE
There are no latches, the coil is held in place by gravity.
9. Route the coil cable as illustrated above. Markers on the cable indicate which part of the
cable has to be pressed into the groove on the edge of the base plate.
Proper placement of the cable simplifies cable management when the table is raised/
lowered or moved in/out of the bore.
10. Use the landmark on top of the handle for isocenter positioning.
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Fig. 269: 1: Foot positioning in foot support. 2: Sliding coil onto foot support with both hands. 3: Inserting of toe
wedge pad through opening.
Philips

Fig. 270: 1: Positioning with unaffected foot on dedicated pad. 2: Toe wedge pad in coil, and landmark (arrow) for
isocenter positioning. 3: Cable routing: part between markers in groove on coil.
4.3.42 SENSE PeriphVascular coil

Status: Released

• Receive-only
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Design Bilateral coil which consists of base pad, posterior and anterior coil.
The base pad has the shape of an elongated wedge such that one extremity is
thicker than the other. The posterior coil is larger than the anterior coil and
wraps around the patient’s legs. The anterior and posterior coil elements have to
be connected to the base pad.
Coverage 129 cm; from renal arteries to pedal arch.
Available for 1.5T
Applications • High resolution imaging of abdominal aorta and peripheral vasculature. CE-
Angio run off studies.
• Three-station contrast studies.
• Ideal in combination with MobiTrak studies.
General remarks • The complete SENSE PeriphVascular coil consists of three stations: upper,
middle and lower station for abdomen, upper and lower legs. Each station is
made up of 4 coils which can be selected separately. It can only be scanned
with one coil station at any one time.
Multi coil imaging Yes (only to combine the stations of this coil)

Philips

User Interface Name SENSE-PV
Station selection • Coil part: middle, upper, lower

• Ch. combination: 1, 12, 123, 2, 23, 234, 1234, 3, 34
Fig. 271: SENSE PV coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4.3.42.1 MobiTrak or MobiFlex Positioning
Status: Released
Coil Positioning
1. Move the tabletop completely out of the magnet without lowering it.
2. Place the base pad onto the tabletop with the thick extremity towards the magnet.
3. Place the posterior coil onto the base pad allowing the base to fit into the coil grid.
4. Bend the longest of the two short base pad cables and plug it into the posterior coil.
5. Make sure that the upper station is centered below the mark on the table to ensure that
the table can travel to isocenter.
6. The thick end of the base pad will stick out of the tabletop by 4 cm or more.
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient feet first with the heels resting on the thick square pads at the end of
the base pad.
2. Position the patient’s heels within the lower coil element (see orange marked area in
figure).
3. Place the two elongated foam cushions under the knee and under the ankles in order to
avoid calf compression.
4. Place the supplied foam cube between the patient’s legs to provide support to the anterior
coil.
Philips

5. Support the upper back and the head of the patient with a pillow or other padding material
to ensure patient comfort.
6. Position the patient’s arms above the head on the support cushion (or on the abdomen
outside the coil).
7. Place the anterior coil on top of the patient’s legs and abdomen while making sure that the
three stations’ coil centers coincide to the ones of the posterior coil.
8. Stabilize the patient’s legs with sandbags if necessary.
9. Wrap the posterior coil lateral flaps around the patient’s legs until they touch the anterior
coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 272: 1: The orange spots indicate where to position the patient's heels. 2: SENSE PV coil open. 3: SENSE PV coil
closed with straps.
10. Wrap the straps attached to the posterior coils around the patient to stabilize the anterior
coil as well as the lateral flaps.
11. Plug the base pad connector with the shortest cable into the anterior coil.
12. As the patient’s feet are in close proximity to this connector they should be padded
medially, then strapped together.
13. Plug the coil into the connector.
14. Use the light visor to position the lower station marker, marked by an engraved cross on
the anterior coil surface, into the magnet isocenter.
NOTICE
The arms of the patient are best left outside the coil on the abdomen or above the head.
NOTICE
The parameter ’Multi coil’ has to be set to ’Yes’ in order to switch between the different coil
parts per stack.
NOTICE
Cleaning of the coil is possible with a moist cloth.
Philips

NOTICE
Avoid cleaning the connector at the feet end of the coil with water.
Coil selection
It is only possible to scan with one coil station (upper, middle or lower station) at any one time.
Select the stations for the stacks as follows:
• Upper station for the abdominal stack (Stack C);
• Middle station for the upper legs (Stack B);
• Lower station for the lower legs (Stack A).
4.3.43 SENSE GP Flex L 8 coil

Status: Released

• Receive-only
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Design Flexible surface coil designed to wrap around the anatomy of interest
Dimensions 65 cm x 24 cm
Applications General Purpose (GP)

• especially designed for hip, pelvis and prostate
Dual coil imaging Yes
User Interface Name SENSE-GPFlex8-L
Fig. 273: SENSE GP Flex L 8 coil.

Philips

NOTICE
Always store the coil flat.
4.3.43.1 Positioning for Single Hip

Status: Released
► Position the patient supine.

► Wrap the coil around the hip to be examined.
► Use fixation straps to secure the coil.
► Center the anatomy in the middle of the coil, center the laser to the anatomy.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 274: Single Hip examination with the SENSE GP Flex L 8 coil: The patient is positioned supine, feet-first. The coil is
wrapped around the hip and fixed with a strap.
Combination of two coils

If two coils SENSE GP Flex L coil 8 are available on an Achieva system, these two coils can be
combined for optimum image quality. For ease of use, a dedicated GP positioning cushion is
provided in this case.
A typical application is the examination of the prostate:
► Prepare the coils as shown in the figure below.
► Wrap the coils around the patient and and use fixation straps to secure them.
Philips

Fig. 275: Left: GP positioning cushion. Right: Preparation of an examination with the two coils utilizing the GP
positioning cushion.
Coil parameters
► Enable ’Dual Coil’ mode.
► Select ’All’ or ’Overlap’ as ’Element selection’.
All Overlap
• should be used if the two coils overlap.

• should be used if the two coils do not overlap. • will deactivate the most outer elements of each coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• will activate all 16 elements: 8 for the anterior coil When overlap is used, this will become a total of 12
and 8 for the posterior coil. channels being used, 6 of the anterior coil and 6 of
the posterior coil.
NOTICE
Make sure that the ’Element selection’ is set to the correct value for both coils.
4.3.44 Microscopy coils

Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Surface coil
Dimensions Large coil: 47 mm; Small coil: 23 mm (coil’s inner diameter)
Available for 1.5T
SENSE-compatible No
Philips

Applications Applications requiring small FOV with high SNR, e.g. skin, eyes, small joints,
superficial vessels, pediatric and nipple imaging. Placed
around a finger, against the skin or close to the body surface.
General remarks To ensure a flat surface, the coils can be ‘closed’ with special coil inserts.
Limitations • Make sure, that the coil is not positioned in the transverse plane. Coils work
best when positioned in coronal or sagittal plane.
• The coil may be combined with the Q-Head coil.
• The coil may not be used in the mouth.
User Interface Name Micro-23, Micro-47

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 276: Microscopy coil.
NOTICE
Instead of a cable trap, the Microscopy coils use a driver box.
The driver box contains dedicated electronics for the Microscopy coils. This driver box looks
very similar to the cable trap and must be plugged directly in the coil connector. Do not try to
use the Microscopy coil with the cable trap as it does not fit.
Status: Released
Skin imaging
1. To achieve the best possible image quality, make sure that both the coil and the anatomy
are perfectly immobilized. Use sandbags and/or straps.
Philips

2. Start with a large FOV (450 mm) to find the location of the coil.
3. Proceed with a multistack small FOV (15 mm) survey.
4. Then perform high resolution scans.
Fig. 277: Incorrect (left) and correct (right) positioning of the Microscopy coil. The arrow indicates the axis of the
main magnetic field.
Eye studies
To avoid eye movement, ask the patient to close the eyes or to focus on a specific point in the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

bore or via a mirror on the wall behind the scanner.
Fig. 278: Positioning examples with the Microscopy coils: orbit, ear, skin.
Fig. 279: Positioning examples with the Microscopy coils: placed against the skin, around a digit and around a thumb.
The arrow indicates the axis of the main magnetic field.
4.3.45 SENSE Flex coils

Status: Released
Philips


• Receive-only
Design Flexible coils consisting of two elements;

each element labelled with an identification number
Application Imaging small Fields of View from 5 cm to 20 cm
User Interface Name SENSE Flex-L, SENSE Flex-M, SENSE Flex-S

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 280: SENSE Flex coil in three sizes.
The SENSE Flex coil is available in three sizes: S-small, M-medium, L-large.
Philips

Coil Dimensions Applications
SENSE Flex-S 2 coil elements • TMJ’s, orbits, I.A.C.

Circular, loop size 11 cm , • Small joints (e.g. wrist)
opening 8 cm • Superficial vessels (carotid arteries)
• Pediatric imaging
SENSE Flex-M 2 coil elements • Shoulder (ABER positioning)

Elliptical, loop size 14 cm x 17 cm • Single Hip, Knee, Ankle
opening 11 cm x 14 cm • Pediatric imaging
• Carotid Arteries
SENSE Flex-L 2 coil elements • Brain and brain intervention

Circular, loop size 20 cm, • Brachial Plexus
Opening 17 cm • Pediatric imaging
• Prostate
For more information on how to use the coil in different anatomic areas, refer to the following
sections:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4.3.45.1 General
Status: Released
Positioning the coil, care must be taken to avoid coupling or cross-talk between the two
elements. To avoid coupling:
• Keep a minimum distance of approximately half the size of an element between the coil
elements if they are positioned parallel.
• Ensure that the coil elements do not touch if they are positioned next to each other. It is
better if the coil elements overlap a few centimeters.
• Ensure that the elements do not touch if they are positioned at an angle. Position one
element slightly on the other instead.
• Do not connect the coil until the patient is positioned in the bore. This makes coil handling
easier.
Fig. 281: Positioning advices for the SENSE Flex coils to avoid coupling.
Philips

4.3.45.2 SENSE Flex coil spacer

Status: Released
Use the SENSE Flex coil Spacer in order to keep a distance between coil cables and the patient.
With virtually all applications of the SENSE Flex coils, the Spacer can be attached to the cables
running between the interface-box and the coil elements. The small cushion can be attached to
the interface-box whenever the interface-box cannot be positioned at the tabletop. See
examples showing the use of the SENSE Flex coil spacer.
Fig. 282: Examples using the SENSE Flex coil spacer.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
4.3.45.3 SENSE Flex-S coil in head and neck applications

Status: Released
1. Position the patient in the TMJ coil holder rest assembly, if available.
2. Center the patient’s head and immobilize it using strap and band.
3. Place the coil elements on both sides of the patient’s head or neck.
For TMJ examinations

1. Place your finger through the coil elements to locate the head of the mandible (ask the
patient to open and close the mouth).
Alternatively, the SENSE Flex-M coil could also be used.
The SENSE Flex-S coil is not suited for imaging the carotid arteries in their entire length, but
it provides excellent image quality if focussed on a specific area, e.g. the bifurcation.
Philips

Fig. 283: Left: SENSE Flex-S coil with TMJ holder for orbit. Right: SENSE Flex-S coil with TMJ holder for anterior neck.
4.3.45.4 SENSE Flex coils in body applications

Status: Released
► Do not place the coil elements too close to each other. Keep a minimum distance of 8 cm.
► Use cushions if necessary.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SENSE Flex-L in prostate examinations
► Use the imobilization strap to fix the upper element in position and minimize respiratory
motion.
► The patient can also be positioned prone, in which case extra attention should be paid to
patient comfort.
Pediatric body applications

• Children may be more comfortable prone.
Fig. 284: SENSE Flex-L for pediatric body applications.
SENSE Flex-L coil in MR Mammography

Use the SENSE breast mattress in conjunction with the SENSE Flex-L coil to provide high quality
Philips
SENSE imaging of the breast. The SENSE Flex L-coil fits precisely into the mattress.

The mattress is available for 1.5T and 3.0T systems. It comprises of two parts:
• a solid foam base
• a flexible cover with fits onto the top side of the base
The base of the mattress has recesses on the top and bottom into which the elements of the
SENSE Flex-L coil fit. These recesses also contain velcro attachment points to anchor the coil in
place. Along either side of the top and bottom of the base are grooves into which the cables of
the coil should be placed. This gives the required separation between the patient’s skin and the
cables ensuring both safety and comfort.
NOTICE
It is allowed to scan with a combination of two SENSE Flex coils in dual mode.
Node title (original): Breast mattress (SENSE Body & SENSE ID: 9007205717573387-2
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Flex) Status: Released
Fig. 285: Left: Breast mattress. Right: Schematic drawing of the breast mattress. 1 - flexible cover, 2- anterior coil part, 3 - base of the
mattress, 4 - posterior coil part, 5 - cables located in groove.
End fragment title: Breast mattress (SENSE Body & SENSE Flex)
For more information on the workflow, refer to the section 'SENSE Body coil'.
Philips

Fig. 286: SENSE Flex-L coils on dedicated breast mattress.
4.3.45.5 SENSE Flex coils in orthopedic applications

Status: Released
SENSE Flex-L or -M coil in shoulder examinations

Positioning a patient for the shoulder, one should consider the following:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

1. Position the shoulder as much in the isocenter as possible by placing the patient a little
semi-oblique.
2. Support the patient’s back and legs with cushions.
3. Place the arm next to the patient on the tabletop to minimize motion artifacts due to
breathing. Flex coils have to be positioned exactly on the gleno-humural joint.
4. Place a strap on the table. Position the patient slightly off-center so that the shoulder of
interest is positioned close to the iso-center.
Method 1
1. Place one coil element such that it encompasses the top of the shoulder and lies
approximately in the sagittal plane.
2. Place the second coil element on top of the first one approximately in the coronal plane. It
should have a 20% overlap parallel to the clavicle.
Philips

Fig. 287: SENSE Flex-M, shoulder. Method 1.
Method 2
1. Place one coil element behind the shoulder joint.
2. Place the second coil element anterior.
3. Position the elements parallel to each other. Make sure there is the required distance
between the elements and the elements do not touch each other.
4. Use the strap to keep both coil elements in place.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Do not put a sandbag on the shoulder, because this can generate movement artifacts or
artifacts that result from small ferrous particles in the sandbag.
In order to avoid breathing artifacts, try to oblique the patient towards the to-be-examined
side. Do not place the patient’s arm on the abdomen.
Shoulder at opposite side of Patient Support Control Panel

• Cables between coil elements and the combiner box should be parallel to the bore’s long
axis. The rest of the coil (outside the magnet) should run in a curved route to the control
panel.
• Make sure there is a distance between cable and patient and between patient and
combiner box (can be placed underneath the leg support).
SENSE Flex-S or -M coil in wrist examinations

1. Position the patient supine, with the arm along the patient's side.
• The hand/wrist is as much in the isocenter as possible
2. Use sandbags to immobilize leg and foot.
3. Use positioning cushions to ensure patient comfort. Avoid placing sandbags near or inside
the FOV.
4. For the SENSE Flex-M coil, use cushions between hand and coil element to avoid coupling
between the coil elements.
5. For the SENSE Flex-S coil, don’t use cushions between hand and coil element.
Philips

SENSE Flex-S coil in elbow examinations

► Position the patient supine, with the arm along the patient's side.
The elbow is as much in the isocenter as possible.
The arm is preferably in exo-rotation which means that the thumb is pointing towards the
magnet bore.
► Use positioning cushions to ensure patient comfort. Avoid placing sandbags near or inside
the FOV.
► Prevent contact between the patient and the bore wall at the contra-lateral side.
SENSE Flex coils in hip examinations

► Do not position the patient too low on the tabletop. Position the patient between the
markers on the table top.
Tall patients can be positioned feet-first. The patient's hands should be on the chest.
► Do not place the coil elements too close to each other.
► Use cushions if necessary.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4.3.46 Circular coils C1, C3, C4
Status: Released

• Receive-only
Design Flexible surface coil: Circular
Available for 1.5T
SENSE-compatible No
CLEAR-compatible No
Limitations Excess bending may affect the performance of the coil.

When using fat suppression, large left-right offcenters (e.g. shoulder imaging)
should be avoided (adverse effect on image quality).
User Interface Name C1, C3, C4

Philips

Coil Dimensions Applications
C1 20 cm Opening: Ø 17 cm Facial areas, Sagittal and transverse spine,

Shoulder, Foot , Kidney, Lower abdomen
C3 14 cm Opening: Ø 11 cm Eye, Orbit, Ear, TMJ, Throat, Shoulder, Wrist,

Testes
C4 11 cm Opening: Ø 8 cm • High resolution imaging

• Eye, Orbit, Ear, TMJ, Throat, Wrist,
Testes
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 288: C1, C3 and C4.
NOTICE
When on the tabletop, all coils (if used as positioning aid also the head coil) must always be
connected to the system, whether they are being used for imaging or not.
Status: Released
C3 or C4 in head, orbit and IAC examinations

• It is easier to position the surface coil when the patient is sitting.
• Use fixation straps to secure the coil. If used in combination with the head coil, the head
band may be used for immobilization.
– Use the optical mirror on the head coil in combination with a marker on the wall behind
the MR system to avoid eye motion. Let the patient look at this marker during
acquisition to fixate the eyes in one position.
C4 coil in anterior neck and carotid angio examinations

• Use the TMJ coil holder if available.
Philips
• Position the patient in the TMJ coil holder rest assembly.

• Center the patient’s head and immobilize it using the straps.

• Position the C4 as close as possible to the throat.
C3 and C4 in TMJ examinations

• Use the TMJ coil holder if available.
• Avoid positioning the coils so that the electronics box moves with patient respiration.
• The connector number in use must be specified in the preset procedure.
C1 coil in thoracic and lumbar spine

• Position the patient supine on the C1 coil, electronics box to the side.
• Use the coil cable as a reference to define scan plane.
Circular coils in body applications

• Use the immobilization strap to fix the coil on the patient and minimize respiratory motion.
Kidney
• Position the patient supine with the C1 coil beneath them.
• Use the coil cable as centering point.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Testes
• Use the C3 or C4 coil.
• For easier positioning and imaging, support the genitalia on a cushion or a strap spanned
across the thighs. The genitalia may be passed through (and rest on) the surface coil.
• Use fixation straps to secure the coil.
Bladder
• Use the immobilization strap to fix the C1 coil position and minimize respiratory motion.
• The patient can also be positioned prone, in which case extra attention should be paid to
patient comfort.
Circular coils in orthopedic examinations

Shoulder: in general
Positioning a patient for the shoulder, one should note:
• The shoulder is as much in the isocenter as possible by positioning the patient a little semi-
oblique.
• Support the patient’s back and legs with cushions.
• The arm is placed next to the patient on the tabletop to minimize motion artifacts due to
breathing.
Shoulder: C1 in adults
• Position the C1 coil
– either with the arm placed through the coil
Philips

– or with the coil folded over the shoulder.

Be careful that the coil will not be abnormally folded as this could decrease image
quality.
• Fixate with a strap, and use positioning cushions if necessary.
• Do not place the electronic box on the patient’s chest.
• If fat suppression is required, avoid scanning through the electronic box and make sure that
the electronic box is not touching the patient’s skin.
Shoulder: for semi-oblique position
• Place cushions under the side not being imaged so that the shoulder of interest is moved
closer to the isocenter. Use straps to hold the coil in place. Ensure that the raised shoulder
travels unhindered into the centre of the system during travel-to-scanplane.
Shoulder: C3 in small adults or children
• Position the C3 coil on top of the shoulder joint.
Elbow: C3 coil in elbow examinations
• Position the C3 coil with the arm placed through the coil
Wrist: C3 or C4 in wrist examinations
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Position the patient supine, with the arm along the patient's side.
– The hand/wrist is as much in the isocenter as possible
• Use positioning cushions to ensure patient comfort. Avoid placing sandbags near or inside
the FOV.
• Use the C3 or the C4 coil dependent on the size of the wrist.
• Insert the wrist through the coil or position the wrist on the coil.
4.3.47 Phosphorous coil (P-140/P-140-Flex)

Status: NotReleased

• All purpose 31P Transmit/Receive
Design Surface loop coil with a diameter of 14 cm

Slots around the edge of the coil can be used to attach straps to keep the coil
positioned properly.
A small disk buried at the center of the coil contains both water and
methylphosphonic acid (also in Sphere b); it can be used as a marker of coil
position.
• P-140: Manual Tuning. Two long attached rods allow for manual tuning and
matching to optimize performance.
• P-140-Flex: Fixed tuning and matching.
Philips

Available for 3.0T
SENSE-compatible No
CLEAR-compatible No
Applications MR Phosphorous Spectroscopy, e.g. leg, muscle, brain, liver, heart.
General remarks • The plane of the coil should be kept parallel to the main magnetic field.
• Proton decoupling and Nuclear Overhauser Enhancement (NOE) irradiation
are provided by the Body coil. SAR is calculated on a scan-by-scan basis and
takes into account both, the proton and phosphorous pulses.
User Interface Name P-140/P-140-Flex
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 289: Phosphorous coil.
4.3.47.1 Positioning with the Phosphorous P-140 and P-140-Flex coil

Status: NotReleased
► The plane of the coil should be kept parallel to the main magnetic field.
Node title (original): 82662 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.MN. ID: 117001120651
9b Status: Released
Philips

WARNING
Use of the Multi Nuclei coils P-140, P-140-Flex, C-140-Flex and Na-140-Flex close to the eyes.
Risk of heating of the eyes.
• Keep a distance to the eyes of at least 6 cm (2.5 inches) in all directions.
End fragment title: 82662 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.MN.9b
Node title (original): P-140 Prevent coil damage ID: 9007260173441675

Status: Released
CAUTION
Handle the coil with care to prevent damage.
• After unpacking a new coil or storage, the coil requires 24 hours of acclimatization before
first use.
• Carry the coil by its housing only.
• Do not handle the coil by its cables or connectors.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Avoid coil jolts.
End fragment title: P-140 Prevent coil damage
4.4 Patient Positioning and Setup of Coils

Node title (original): same text as used in Ingenia Positioning ID: 116964466187-2
Map node Status: Released
This chapter provides some general information about positioning and describes the positioning
procedures for the various MRI examinations.
End fragment title: same text as used in Ingenia Positioning Map node
4.4.1 About Positioning in general

Status: NotReleased
• Be aware that the first consideration in positioning is comfort, in the patient's interest and
to minimize motion artifacts.
• Use positioning cushions, sandbags and immobilization straps for comfort and stability.
Normal X-ray positioning cushions may also be used.
Philips
• Ensure that patients fit easily into the system when positioned off-center or semi-sitting.

If positioned semi-obliquely for a shoulder examination, the patient's raised shoulder may
impede passage into the system.
• Use the arm supports to prevent the patient from grabbing around the table sides and
pinching the fingers during horizontal table motion.
Node title (original): WARNING Arm supports versus finger ID: 9007206656686475
pinching Status: Released
WARNING
Verify that patient’s hands are on the tabletop before moving the tabletop into the magnet
to avoid finger pinching.
Fingers can get pinched between tabletop and the system covers.
The special arm supports (see Positioning Aids) can be used to avoid finger pinching. The arm
supports prevent the patient from grabbing around the table sides avoiding finger pinching
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: WARNING Arm supports versus finger pinching
4.4.1.1 Hearing Protection and Nurse Call

Status: Released
Philips

Node title (original): Nurse call and headset images for Ingenia ID: 118368232587
family except MR5300 Status: Released
Nurse call (left) and headset

(right)
Patients with headset and nurse

call
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: Nurse call and headset images for Ingenia family except MR5300
Hearing Protection
Node title (original): Acoustic noise protection ID: 9007200724271371-2
Status: Released
is provided by appropriately fitted earplugs with sufficient damping (>30 dB).
NOTICE
Philips

WARNING
End fragment title: Acoustic noise protection
Node title (original): Headset MR5300 ID: 118368253963

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Headset MR5300
Nurse Call
Status: Released
WARNING
The ‘Nurse call pinch ball’ must be given to every patient.
Its use should always be demonstrated. If it is pressed quickly twice or once for a longer period,
the alarm bell will be heard and the light will be activated on the intercom.
Node title (original): Nurse call MR5300 ID: 118368236811
Status: Released
Philips

End fragment title: Nurse call MR5300
► Plug the nurse call connector into the socket.

► Fix the cable of the nurse call with 3 cable clips. { Heuvel, Martina van den, 3/29/2021
12:47:35 PM: NOT valid for MR5300!}
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): nurse call clip usage - Ingenia family ID: 9007271021969163-2
Philips



Wrong cable placement:

1. Cable is not fixed with cable
clips and hangs alongside
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

the patient support.
2. The nurse call is plugged in
at the wrong side. It should
always be plugged in at the
feet side.
End fragment title: nurse call clip usage - Ingenia family except MR5300
Observation of the patient

Observation of the patient is reassuring for patient and operator. It may be directly from the
console or via a video camera or mirror. Voice contact via the intercom should be
demonstrated to each patient.
4.4.1.2 Mattress and Coil Concept

Status: Released
Node title (original): Intro Mattress and coil concept - ALL ID: 118368462347
Ingenia family Status: Released
Optimum patient positioning is crucial for a successful MR examination. The setup of coils and
mattresses is an essential part of patient positioning. Understanding the mattress and coil
concept allows for a smart setup of every MR examination.
End fragment title: Intro Mattress and coil concept - ALL Ingenia family
Node title (original): 2 different methods - Ingenia family ID: 118368463883

Philips

Two different methods

There are two different methods of setting up coils and mattresses on the patient support.
The choice made depends on the respective application and will influence the further setup of
the examination.
1. Without the dStream interface (utilizing integrated coils): applicable for
– Head and Neck examinations
– Neuro imaging: Brain, Spine and Total Spine examinations
– Shoulder examinations
– Body and Whole Body examinations
– Cardiac imaging
– MR Angiography
2. With the dStream interface (utilizing dedicated or dS Flex coils): applicable for
– All MusculoSkeletal (MSK) examinations, e.g. shoulder with dS Flex coils, wrist, hand,
knee, ankle, foot
– Breast imaging
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 291: dStream Interface on the tabletop.

End fragment title: 2 different methods - Ingenia family except MR5300
Node title (original): Mattresses part 1 - ALL Ingenia family ID: 118368482571
Status: Released
Mattresses and coils on the patient support

For the setup of all MR examinations, the following principle applies at all times:
The patient support is fully covered by mattresses and coils for any examination.
The coils and the short and long mattresses are designed such that they completely fill up the
space on the patient support when they are combined in the correct way:
End fragment title: Mattresses part 1 - ALL Ingenia family
Node title (original): Mattress philosophy for MR5300 ONLY ID: 118368492939
Status: Released
► Always leave the dS Base coil on the tabletop.

► Always leave the dS Interface on the tabletop.
Philips

► Use the comfort mattresses with the comfort mattress partner at all times: put the comfort
mattress in the comfort mattress partner.
The comfort mattress partner surrounds the comfort mattress and provides secure space
for cable positioning.
► Safely place all cables in the space of the comfort mattress partner.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

End fragment title: Mattress philosophy for MR5300 ONLY
Node title (original): Mattresses part 2 - Ingenia family except ID: 118368484107
1. Either Base, two long mattresses and one T-shape mattress

2. Or dStream interface, two short mattresses, one long mattress and one T-shape mattress.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
The short mattresses are of the same size as the dedicated coils (with their mattresses) that
are used in combination with the dStream Interface.
The short mattresses are to be substituted by a dedicated dStream coil for a specific clinical
examination.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 292: The Mattress and Coil Concept.
1 Base coil (B), two long mattresses (LM) and one T-shape mattress (TM)
2 dStream Interface (d) with two short mattressses (SM), one long mattress and one T-
shape mattress (TM).
End fragment title: Mattresses part 2 - Ingenia family except MR5300
Node title (original): Base always on tabletop! Ingenia family ID: 9007205721523211
NOTICE
Without the dStream interface, always leave the Base coil on the tabletop as head support,
even when not in use.
One exception to this rule is the dS Shoulder 8ch coil.
End fragment title: Base always on tabletop! Ingenia family except MR5300
Node title (original): Overview of positioning possiblities - ID: 118368485515

Ingenia family except MR5300 Status: Released
Overview of different positioning possibilites with the dStream Interface

Depending on the type of examination, it might be necessary to change the order of short and
long mattresses in combination with the dStream interface.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 293: Preferred locations for the dedicated coils in combination with the dStream Interface (LM - long mattress,
SM - short mattress, TM - T-shape mattress, Ded - Dedicated mattresses of the Small Extremity coil).
1 dS FootAnkle 8ch coil for feet or ankle examinations in Feet-First position
2 Knee coils (dS Knee 8ch coil, dS Knee 16ch, dS Knee T/R 16ch coil) for knee examinations in
Feet-First position
3 dS Wrist 8ch coil for wrist examinations in Feet-First position with the wrist at side
6 dS Small Extremity 8ch coil with dedicated mattresses for elbow examinations in Head-First
position
Note that the dS Small Extremity 8ch coil is to be used with its dedicated mattresses (ded).
Philips

NOTICE
The breast coils are delivered with dedicated mattresses. None of the above described setups
applies for these coils. For more information, please refer to the chapter “Positioning for
Breast Examinations” on page 723.
End fragment title: Overview of positioning possiblities - Ingenia family except MR5300
4.4.1.3 Connectors and Plugs

Status: NotReleased
The MR system provides two different kinds of coil sockets:

Node title (original): Ingenia family except MR5300 - types of ID: 9007317623031691
sockets Status: Released
• FlexConnect sockets on the tabletop.

• dStream sockets on the dStream Interface.
• Optional T/R socket located below the UIM on the left side of the magnet.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The T/R socket is used for all T/R coils.
End fragment title: Ingenia family except MR5300 - types of sockets
Node title (original): MR5300 - types of sockets ID: 9007317623033227

Status: Released
• FlexConnect sockets on the tabletop.

• dS sockets on the tabletop.
End fragment title: MR5300 - types of sockets
Node title (original): Sockets tabletop Ingenia family except ID: 54043203009404299-2
Optimus (CX) and MR5300 Status: Released
Philips

2. Not used
4. Not used.
socket
6. Not used
socket
2. Not used.
4. Not used.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
socket.
6. Not used.
socket.
1. dS socket
(to connect the dS
Interface)
(to connect the dS Base
coil)
socket
4. dS socket
(to connect the dS
Interface)
socket
6. Not used
End fragment title: Sockets tabletop Ingenia family except Optimus (CX) and MR5300
Node title (original): Ingenia family all of them ID: 119107138571

Status: Released
Philips

For specifc information about which socket is required for a specific coil, see section chapter
“Available Coils and Coil Solutions” on page 266.
End fragment title: Ingenia family all of them
Node title (original): FlexConnect socket for Ingenia family ID: 18014516877781387
except MR5300 Status: NotReleased
FlexConnect sockets
These sockets are to be used for:
• dStream Interface
• dS Base coil
• dS Anterior coil(s)
• dS Shoulder 8ch coil
Status: NotReleased
• dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 294: Connected to the FlexConnect socket: on the left the Base coil, on the right the dStream Interface.
NOTICE
The short cable length of the dS Base coil, the dS Shoulder 8ch coil and the dStream Interface
forces the operator to use the FlexConnect closest to these devices at the magnet side.
In such a way, mistakes are prevented.
End fragment title: FlexConnect socket for Ingenia family except MR5300
Node title (original): dStream socket for Ingenia family except ID: 9007317623041419
dStream socket
The dStream socket is available on the dStream Interface.
Philips

This socket is to be used for most of the dedicated coils, for example:
• Breast coils.
• Musculoskeletal coils.
• Pediatric coils.
Fig. 295: dStream interface on the patient support plugged into FlexConnect socket. Left: Open socket for the
connection of a dStream coil. Right: dStream coil is connected.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
The dStream socket/connector and the FlexConnect socket/connector are different in shape
and size.
In such a way, mistakes are prevented.
End fragment title: dStream socket for Ingenia family except MR5300
Node title (original): Plugging in - Ingenia family except MR5300 ID: 9007317623042443
Status: Released
Procedure of plugging in
An empty socket is protected by a sliding disk.
► Place the connector against the lever of the sliding disk.
► Move the connector further against the lever to open the socket.
► When the socket is completely open, plug the connector into the socket.
Philips

Fig. 296: Closed and open sockets with levers and sliding disk.
1 Sliding disk
2 Levers
End fragment title: Plugging in - Ingenia family except MR5300
Node title (original): Disconnecting - Ingenia family except ID: 9007317623043467

Procedure of disconnecting a coil from the dStream Interface

► Turn the knob.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 297: The arrow indicates the knob. Turn this knob to disconnect a coil.
End fragment title: Disconnecting - Ingenia family except MR5300
4.4.1.4 Coil and patient positioning

Status: Released
► Prepare the tabletop with coil(s), mattresses and, if required, the dStream interface.
► Position the patient on the tabletop with hearing protection, nurse call and the appropriate
positioning aids and, if required, wireless PPU or VCG.
For more information on positioning, see the following sections.
Philips

4.4.2 Positioning for Head, Head/Neck and Spine Examinations


102.3, HAZ-RF.122) Status: Released
Affix: Optimus, Ingenia
CAUTION
Damaged coil or mirror due to collision with the magnet.
Risk of injury
• To tilt the dS Head or dS HeadNeck coil, only use the tilting device dedicated for your
system.
• When the tilting device is in use, watch that the mirror does not collide with the magnet
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 60153 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-RF.102.3, HAZ-RF.122)
The set-up of a head examination, a head/neck examination or a spine examination are very
similar.
• The dS Posterior coil and the dS Base coil are used for all these examinations.
• Depending on the type of examination, the dS Head top or the dS HeadNeck top coil are
also used.
Fig. 298: Positioning for spine, head, head/neck and total neuro examinations.
Philips

1 Schematic set-up: T-Shape mattress (TM), two long mattresses (LM) and the dS Base coil (B) on
the tabletop with the dS Base coil connected to the FlexConnect socket.
2 Positioning for Cervical, Thoracic, Lumbar and Total Spine examinations: patient on the tabletop.
3 Positioning for Head and Total Neuro examinations: patient on the tabletop. The dS Head top coil
is attached to the dS Base.
4 Positioning for Head/Neck examinations: patient on the tabletop. The dS HeadNeck top coil is
attached to the dS Base.
Workflow
1. Place the dS Base coil and two long mattresses on the tabletop.
2. Connect the dS Base coil to the FlexConnect socket.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 299: 1: Base on tabletop, 2: Base with pad and mirror, 3: Base with Head top coil, pad and mirror.
3. Position the patient supine on the tabletop with their head in the dS Base coil.
4. Use the small wedges to immobilize the head by placing them firmly between the head and
the sides of the support.
5. Use the knee cushion to increase patient comfort.
Fig. 300: Set up for a spine examination. Example of a pediatric examination.
6. Optional: Attach the mirror to the base.

Philips

Fig. 301: Positioning for spine examinations. 1: Without mirror. 2: With mirror. 3: The mirror.
7. For head, head/neck and total neuro examinations:

• Attach the dS Head or the dS HeadNeck top coil to the dS Base coil.
Use the dS Head top coil for head and total neuro examinations.
Use the dS HeadNeck top coil for head/neck examinations.
• Optional: Attach the mirror to the dS Head or dS HeadNeck top coil.
• For the dS HeadNeck top coil: Adjust the movable part of the coil so that it is as close to
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
the patient's chest as possible.

Status: Released
NOTICE
Fig. 302: Left: Set-up for head and total neuro examinations. Right: Set-up for head/neck examinations.
Philips

Fig. 303: The figure shows the possible positions of the movable part of the coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Detach the dS Head or dS HeadNeck top coil from the dS Base coil
► Press the buttons at both sides of the coil to release the dS Head top coil or the dS
HeadNeck top coil from the dS Base coil.
► Lift the top coil with both hands.
Fig. 304: The arrows indicate the buttons that need to be pressed to release the top coil in order to detach it from
the dS Base coil.
Lift the coil up

► Hold on to the base to lift up and carry the coil.
Philips

NOTICE
Never lift the coil by holding on to the dS Head (or dS HeadNeck) top coil.
This might lead to severe damage of the coil.
Fig. 305: Left: Correct way of how to lift up the coil. Right: Wrong way.
Node title (original): FlexTilt Ingenia only ID: 45036004823265163

Affix: Ingenia family except Optimus and MR5300 Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
FlexTilt in head, head/neck and spine examinations

FlexTilt is a tilting device which can be used to position the dS Base coil (with or without dS
Head or dS HeadNeck top coil) in an angle. This is especially helpful for patients who cannot
comfortably lie flat with their head in the Base coil.
FlexTilt cannot be used for all types of dS-HeadNeck coil types:
End fragment title: FlexTilt Ingenia only
Node title (original): NVC tilting version 1 ID: 99079199204071307


MIRA.27 Status: Released
Affix: Ingenia
ISO/IEC: 24365
Philips

WARNING
1.5T dS-HeadNeck coil of types 45100100048* and 45980017123*:
Do not tilt the coil or put it on padding. This may cause local heating of the patient.
Always position the coil flat on the tabletop.
End fragment title: 24365 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF-MIRA.27
At the start of a scan a warning message is displayed when a 1.5T dS HeadNeck coil of types
45100100048* and 45980017123* is connected to the system.
HeadNeck is connected.
Scanning with a tilted HeadNeck coil is not allowed.
the HeadNeck coil
Press 'Cancel' to stop scanning.
Press 'Proceed' to start scanning only if the HeadNeck
coil is not tilted.
|Cancel| or |Proceed|
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

To start scanning a deliberate action is required:
Read the warning text and verify that the dS HeadNeck coil is not tilted. Click Proceed to start
scanning.
End fragment title: NVC tilting version 1
Node title (original): FlexTilt workflow ID: 45036004795681163

Affix: Ingenia family except Optimus and MR5300 Status: Released
Workflow
► Place the FlexTilt device between the dS Base coil and the tabletop.
► Position the patient on the tabletop with the head in the dS Base coil.
► Tilt the tilting device to an angle convenient for the patient.
► Optional: Depending on the type of examination, attach the dS Head or the dS HeadNeck
top coil to the dS Base coil. Philips

Fig. 306: Examples of positioning with FlexTilt from lowest level (1) to highest level (3).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 307: Examination on the highest tilting level with a top coil attached: dS HeadNeck top coil (left) or dS Head top
coil (right) .
End fragment title: FlexTilt workflow
4.4.3 Positioning for Head Examinations with the dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil
Affix: all Ingenia 3T system types ID: 45036002740071819
For head examinations on 3.0T, the dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil is an alternative solution to the
integrated Base with the Head or HeadNeck top.
The examination with the dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil is a Head-First examination with the patient
supine.
1. Place the dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil, two long mattresses and the T-shape mattress on the
tabletop.
The coil is positioned correctly when the tab on its posterior section fits into the notch on
the table.
Philips

Fig. 308: Left: Rear view of the dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil. The arrow points to the part of the posterior section that is
supposed to fit into the notch on the table. Right: The posterior section fits into the notch on the table.
2. Insert both FlexConnect connectors into the sockets.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 309: Left: dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil with the two FlexConnect connectors. Right: Inserting one of the connectors
into a socket.
3. Unlatch and remove the anterior section of the coil in preparation for the patient to be
positioned:
• Tilt the lever on the anterior section upwards to unlock this section.
• Carefully raise the anterior section at the cranial side and take it off the posterior
section.
• To attach the anterior section back to the posterior one, proceed in the same way in
reverse order. Philips

Fig. 310: 1: The anterior section attached to the posterior section. 2: Tilting the lever to unlock the anterior section. 3 : Anterior section is
unlocked.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 311: Tabletop setup with long mattresses and knee support, posterior coil section connected to dStream
interface.
4. Position the patient with his/her head in the posterior section of the coil.
Make sure that the patient's head is centered in the posterior section and that the patient's
shoulders touch the coil pads.
• Optional: Place the EEG cable in the EEG groove of the posterior section.
5. Provide hearing protection for the patient.
• For maximum patient comfort it is recommended to use both earplugs and headset.
The advantages are optimum noise reduction and good communication via the
intercom.
• For improved signal-to-noise ratio, it is recommended to use earplugs and foam
wedges.
The advantage is less noise breakthrough. However the patient will experience a higher
noise level, and the communication via the intercom could be affected.
Philips

Fig. 312: Alternative ways of positioning. Left: with earplugs and headset, right: with earplugs and foam wedges.
6. Optional: Place the EEG cable in the EEG groove of the posterior section.
7. Attach the anterior section to the coil.
8. For isocenter positioning, use the patient's eyebrow line as landmark.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 313: Left: Patient' positioning with anterior section attached to posterior section. 3: It is recommended NOT to
use the marker on the coil for isocenter positioning. Recommended is to use the patient's eyebrow line as landmark.
Fig. 314: Mirror on the coil to enable the patient to look outside the bore.
Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
4.4.4 Positioning for Head Examinations with the T/R Head coil
Affix: Available on MR5300 for safety compliance ID: 45036002742059531
The examination with the T/R Head coil is a Head-First examination with the patient supine.
► Place the coil and the mattresses on the tabletop.
Make sure the head support is secure.
► Connect the coil to the T/R socket.
► Position the patient with their head in the head support.
• If the patient has a short neck, it is advisable to place some padding under the
shoulders.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Pull the sliding part gently over the head and face.
• Pull the coil all the way down so that it 'clicks' into position: this may not be possible
with patients with large shoulders or a short neck. In this case, the coil will function
normally, although the head appears lower in the survey image.
► Attach the optical mirror to the coil or use the comfort zone so that the patient can look
outside the bore.
This can be reassuring for patients.
Fig. 315: Ready for a head/brain examination with the T/R Head coil.
Philips

Fig. 316: T/R Head coil with mirror.
4.4.5 Positioning for Body Examinations

Body examinations (e.g. cardiac imaging and all organs of chest, abdomen, pelvis and peripheral
angiography) make use of the dS Torso coil solution with its components dS Anterior coil and dS
Posterior coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Both the Head-First and the Feet-First positions are suitable for an examination with the dS
Torso coil solution.
Fig. 317: Positioning with the dS Torso coil solution.

Philips

1 Schematic set up of a Head-First examination: dS Base, two long mattresses (LM), one T-Shape
mattress (TM), and one dS Anterior coil (A) on the patient's chest connected to a FlexConnect
socket.
2 Schematic set up of a Feet-First examination: dS Base, two long mattresses (LM), a pillow (P) on
the T-Shape mattress at the bottom of the tabletop, and one dS Anterior coil (A) on the patient's
chest connected to a FlexConnect socket.
3 Patient positioned head-first on tabletop with one dS Anterior coil on his chest. Set up for body
examination.
4 Patient positioned feet-first on tabletop with one dS Anterior coil on his legs. Set up for peripheral
angiography.
Workflow for a Head-First or Feet-First examination

The workflow for a Head-First or Feet-First examination are identical except for the set up on
the tabletop.
⊳ The dS Base, two long mattresses and one T-shape mattress are placed on the tabletop.
1. Position the patient supine on the tabletop
• for Head-First examinations: with their head on the dS Base;
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• for Feet-First examinations: with their head on the T-shape mattress or if used the
Head/Leg support.
2. For cardiac imaging, place VCG electrodes and connect the leads properly.
3. Place the dS Anterior coil on the patient's chest.
4. If necessary place the respiratory belt between patient and coil.
5. The arms of the patient can either be positioned above the head or at the side.
• For optimal results, position the patient's arms above the head.
Use the delivered positioning aids to support the patient's arms and position the patient
as comfortable as possible.
• With the arms at the side, use a strap to fix the arms so that they cannot move.
Put arm supports on both sides under the patient's lower arms to have the arms safely
positioned during tabletop movement.
6. Place pads between the patient's body and arms or between legs to avoid skin-to-skin
contact.
7. Optional: Strap the coil around the patient.
Straps are recommended but not required.
8. Connect the dS Anterior coil to the FlexConnect socket.
Philips

Fig. 318: 1: Base on tabletop with dS Anterior coil (The shown cable layout may differ from the actual one). 2: Patient prepared for Head-
First examination. 3: Patient prepared for examination with strap for coil and arms. A pad is placed between the patient's body and his
arms.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 319: 1: Feet-first examination with additional dS Anterior coil and feet immobilizer. 2: with optional padding betweeen body and arm,
3: with optional strap.
NOTICE
You can place the dS Anterior coil on top of the anterior coil frame, e.g. for pediatric patients.
Philips

Fig. 320: Left: Anterior coil frame. Right: dS Anterior coil on top of the anterior coil frame (The shown cable layout may differ from the
actual one).
4.4.6 Positioning for Whole Body and MobiFlex Examinations

Use the dS Whole Body coil solution with its components: dS Posterior coil, two dS Anterior
coils, the dS Base coil and the dS HeadNeck top coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 321: Positioning with the dS Whole Body coil solution.
1 Schematic set up of a Whole Body examination: dS Base, two long mattresses (LM), one T-shape
mattress (TM), and two dS Anterior coils (A) connected to the FlexConnect socket.
2 Setup for Whole Body examination: Patient positioned head-first on tabletop with two dS
Anterior coils on his body. The dS HeadNeck top coil is not yet attached to the dS Base coil.
3 Setup for MobiFlex examination: Patient positioned feet-first on tabletop with two dS Anterior
coils on his body. The feet immobilizer is placed in front of the dS Base coil.
Philips

Workflow
⊳ The dS Base, two long mattresses and one T-shape mattress are placed on the tabletop.
1. Position the patient supine on the tabletop
• for head-first examinations: with their head on the base;
• for feet-first examinations: with their head on the T-shape mattress or if used the
Head/Leg support.
2. For optimal results, position the patient's arms along the body and use arm supports.
4. Place two dS Anterior coils on the patient, one on the chest and and one on the legs.
NOTICE
Make sure that the dS Anterior coils do not overlap.
This can affect the image quality due to coupling of the coils.
5. Use the dedicated clips to attach the two dS Anterior coils to each other.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 322: Two dS Anterior coils attached to each other by means of the dedicated clips.
6. Connect the dS Anterior coils to the FlexConnect sockets.

7. Optional: Strap the coil around the patient.
Straps are recommended but not required.
Philips

Fig. 323: Patient prepared for Head-First Whole Body examination with two dS Anterior coils (and dS HeadNeck top coil). 1: without
straps. 2: with coils and arm strapped. 3: clips to attach the two dS Anterior coils to each other.
8. Optional: for Head-First Whole Body examinations attach the dS HeadNeck top coil to the
dS Base coil.
9. If necessary place the respiratory belt between patient and coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
You can place the dS Anterior coils on top of the anterior coil frame(s), e.g. for pediatric
patients.
Fig. 324: Left: Anterior coil frame. Right: dS Anterior coils on top of the anterior coil frame(s).
4.4.7 Positioning with the dS Endo coil solution

Node title (original): 1.5T and 3.0T ID: 45036065225919243

Status: Released
Philips

The label on the coil says: eCoil 1.5T and eCoil 3.0T.
End fragment title: 1.5T and 3.0T

Status: Released


Status: Released

This section describes how to insert the coil, how to position the patient, how to remove and
store the coil.
Node title (original): 67333 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PegRF ID: 36028803653789451-2
5.2 & HAZ-PegRF 6 Status: Released
Contraindications
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

WARNING
Do not use the coil when any of the following is indicated:
• Inflammatory bowel disease i.e. ulcerative colitis or Crohn’s disease etc.
• Latex sensitivity.
• Radiation or surgery of the prostate, rectum or surrounding area within the last 8 weeks.
• Rectal fistula.
• Severe hemorrhoids.
• Rectal obstruction or stricture.
• Impacted or excessive stool in the rectum.
• Stricture of the anal canal.
• Any exclusion normally recognized for intrarectal and endorectal devices.
• Gold seed fiducial markers within the last 3 weeks. Consult the responsible physician and
the instructions of the manufacturer of the gold seed fiducial markers.
• Brachytherapy seeds within the last 12 weeks. Consult the responsible physician and the
instructions of the manufacturer of the brachytherapy seeds.
End fragment title: 67333 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PegRF 5.2 & HAZ-PegRF 6
Insertion of the coil

Node title (original): 58632 SYS.Label.IFU.Notice.HAZ- ID: 27021604186987275-2
PegRF2.1_v1 Status: Released
Philips

ISO/IEC: 24285
NOTICE
The probe of the coil is intended for single use only.
The interface device is reusable.
End fragment title: 58632 SYS.Label.IFU.Notice.HAZ-PegRF2.1_v1
Node title (original): 24287 SYS.Label.IFU.Notice.HAZ-PegRF2.2 ID: 18014405142007947-2

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24287
NOTICE
This product contains natural rubber and DEHP.
Natural rubber can cause allergic reactions such as itching, fever, dyspnea, urtication, asthma,
hypotension, and shock. When these symptoms occur, immediately stop using the coil and
take proper action. For USA only: refer to FDA March 29, 1991 Medical Alert on latex product.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
DEHP may cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.
End fragment title: 24287 SYS.Label.IFU.Notice.HAZ-PegRF2.2
Node title (original): HG - Avoid excessive bending of coil rod ID: 9007205677630347-2
Status: Released
CAUTION
Avoid excessive bending of the coil rod.
Excessive bending can lead to leakage of the non-permeable balloon.
End fragment title: HG - Avoid excessive bending of coil rod

Philips

WARNING
1. Use a lubricating gel on the outside of the probe to ease insertion into the rectum.
NOTICE
Too much lubricant may create signal artifacts on the images.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 325: Left: Insertion of the dS Endo coil. Right: Location of the coil when inserted (1 - Prostate, 2 - Rectum, 3 -
Spinal column).
2. Position the patient feet-first in left or right decubitus position, with the knees pulled-up.
3. Squeeze the balloon gently to remove the air and thus ease insertion.
4. Maintain alignment and orientation of the blue stripe with the anterior midline of the
patient.
5. Care should be taken when inserting the coil into the rectum; this should be done slowly,
according to the patient's tolerance.
6. After positioning the coil, the balloon must be inflated to permit the coil loop to take up its
natural form:
• The inflated balloon makes it possible not only to position the coil close to the prostate,
but also to prevent further movement of the coil in the rectum.
• The balloon is inflated using the enclosed luer-lock syringe which fits into a valve
located close to the grip.
7. Place the migration stop on the shaft.
Philips

8. Inflate the balloon. During inflation, continuously check with the patient if it is still
tolerable. Inflate the balloon to the greatest volume that the patient can tolerate (60 cc to
100 cc).
9. When the balloon is inflated, the patient must turn to a supine position. This is the
appropriate position for the examinations.
SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.Cleaning.HAZ-PegRF 3 Status: Released
Implemented Measure: HAZ-PegRF 3
WARNING
Liquid may leak from the balloon of the dS Endo 3.0T coil.
Risk of irritation.
• Only use liquid that is approved by the manufacturer of the dS Endo 3.0T coil for inflation
of the balloon.
End fragment title: 60151 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.Cleaning.HAZ-PegRF 3

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): HG - Do not rotate the dS Endo coil ID: 9007205677753867-2
Status: Released
CAUTION
After insertion, do not rotate the coil once the balloon is inflated.
End fragment title: HG - Do not rotate the dS Endo coil
Positioning and connecting

Examinations with the dS Endo coil can only be performed with the patient in Feet-First
position. The dS Endo coil works in conjunction with the Posterior coil. Furthermore it is
possible to also use the Anterior coil.
Node title (original): Tbd for RfVD picture: Endo coil exam set- ID: 18014404975996427
up Status: Released
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 326: Positioning with the dS Endo coil solution.
1 Schematic set-up for examination with dS Endo coil: the dStream Interface (d), two short mattresses (SM), a long
mattress (LM) and T-Shape mattress (TM) on the tabletop with the dS Endo coil connected to the dStream
Interface. Patient on tabletop in Feet-First position.
2 Schematic set-up as in 1), but then with the optional Anterior coil.
3 Patient on the tabletop with the Head-/Leg support in order to perform examinations on tall patients.
End fragment title: Tbd for RfVD picture: Endo coil exam set-up
The following instructions have to be followed strictly to avoid patient injury or damage to the
coil:
Node title (original): 82423 SYS.Label.IFU.Instruction.HAZ-RF. ID: 9007308273203595
89_HAZ-PegRF.1 (dS systems) Status: Released
1. Prepare the tabletop as shown in figure 326 on page 719:

• for tall patients with the Head-/Leg support,
• for other patients with a pillow.
2. Position the patient feet-first supine in the middle of the tabletop, with the cable routed
straight away from the patient.
3. Place the preamplifier box on the table and connect the probe cable to it.
4. Route the probe cable and preamplifier box between the patient’s legs parallel to the axis
of the bore. Make sure that the cable and the amplifier box do not touch the patient nor
the bore (see figure).
Philips

5. Route the cable of the amplifier box to the dStream interface and connect it.
6. Recommended: Place the Anterior coil on the patient and connect the coil to the socket at
the handgrip side of the tabletop. See figure 326 on page 719.
NOTICE
Always connect the Anterior coil to the socket at the handgrip side. See figure 326 on page
719.
It is strongly advised against connecting the Anterior coil to the socket at the magnet side, as
in this configuration the patient cannot be positioned in a manner in which they do not touch
7. Move the patient into the isocenter of the magnet.

End fragment title: 82423 SYS.Label.IFU.Instruction.HAZ-RF.89_HAZ-PegRF.1 (dS systems)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 327: Routing of the Endo coil cable and amplifier box.
Node title (original): 24355 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.88.1 ID: 45036002734683531

ISO/IEC: 24355
Philips

WARNING
Do not scan with the patient in decubitus position when using the dS Endo coil. Only scan in
the supine or prone position with the endo coil in the center of the body coil.
Removing the coil

Node title (original): HG - Deflate the balloon ID: 9007205677878155-2
Status: Released
CAUTION
After the examination, fully deflate the balloon before removing the coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: HG - Deflate the balloon
1. To deflate the balloon use the stopcock close to the grip, place the luer-lock syringe on the
valve and withdraw the syringe plunger.
2. Remove the coil.
Coil storage
1. Store the dS Endo coil in the original shipping container to prevent bending of the shaft.
2. Avoid transporting and storing the dS Endo coil solution at extreme temperatures and
humidity as this may cause damage to the system.
Emergency Patient Evacuation

In an emergency situation that requires a quick evacuation of the patient from the examination
room do the following:
1. Stop the scan.
2. Move the patient on the tabletop out of the magnet bore.
3. Disconnect the probe from the dStream Interface and evacuate the patient from the
examination room.
4. After the patient is evacuated, deflate the balloon and remove the coil.
More information
Node title (original): More info -> Safety chapter IfU ID: 1889549835
Status: Released
Philips

For more information, refer to the Safety chapter of the Instructions for Use.
End fragment title: More info -> Safety chapter IfU
The Safety chapter contains generic warnings. Furthermore cleaning and disinfection of the coil
are covered.
4.4.8 Positioning for Breast Examinations

Node title (original): Breast screening ID: 98936341387-2

Status: Released
Breast examinations can be used to visualize lesions using high-resolution and/or time-resolved
imaging, which may assist diagnosis in women with pre-identified cancer, and provide adjunct
screening information in women with high risk to develop cancer. Identical coil solutions and
sequences are used to support diagnosis or screening. Additional coil solutions are available to
enable breast biopsies.
End fragment title: Breast screening
Coil Solution Application
dS Breast 16ch optimally suited for high resolution imaging

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
dS Breast 7ch ideal for routine imaging and breast biopsy
dS Breast Adaptive16ch optimally suited for high resolution imaging and breast biopsy
dS Flex Breast ideal for routine imaging
NOTICE
Patient positioning is identical for the dS Breast 16ch and the dS Breast 7ch coil solution.
4.4.8.1 Positioning with the dS Breast 16ch / 7ch coils

Status: Released
The breast examination is to be performed prone in feet-first position.

Philips

Fig. 328: Positioning with the dS Breast 16ch / 7ch coil solution. Left: tabletop ready for breast examination: d-Stream interface, ramp
extension, (abdomen) ramp, dS Breast coil, head/arm support. Right: Patient positioned on the coil prone feet-first with head set.
NOTICE
A dedicated nurse call is delivered with the breast coils.
Feet-first breast examinations require a nurse call with a longer cable than usual.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Workflow: Coil positioning
► Place the arm support on the tabletop.
► Position the head support on top of this mattress.
► Place the breast coil on the tabletop adjacent to the arm support.
► Put the breast coil cover pad on the coil.
► Plug the coil cable in the socket of the dStream interface.
► Place the ramp and the ramp extension on the tabletop adjacent to the coil.
Make sure that the ramp and the ramp extension are fixed together by means of the velcro
tape.
Fig. 329: 1 - Arm support. 2 - Head support. 3 -dS Breast 16ch coil with cover pad. 4 - Ramp. 5 - Ramp extension.
Philips

NOTICE
Note that without a patient lying on it, the ramp is higher than the coil. However with a
patient on the coil, the ramp will be squeezed down to the same height.
Fig. 330: The image shows the difference in height between ramp and coil when no patient is positioned.
Workflow: Patient positioning

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Prepare the patient as usual for an MR examination.

It is advisable to have the patient strip to the waist and to remove any zip fasteners in the
waist area.
► Prepare the tabletop as shown above.
► Position the patient prone on the breast coil, with the head on the head support.
► Adjust the height of the head support.
► Ask the patient to place the arms either next to her head on the arm support or alongside
her body.
► Ensure that the breasts are hanging freely in the coil, and that the breasts and the axilla
► Center the light visor to the middle of the breast, and move the patient into the isocenter.
Fig. 331: Left: 1 - Knob to adjust the height of the head support. 2 - dS Breast 16ch coil is placed adjacent to the arm support. 3 - Marker
for isocenter positioning on the coil. Right: Patient positioned on the coil prone feet-first with head set.
Philips

4.4.8.1.1 Breast Immobilization with dS Breast 7ch

Status: Released
Breast immobilization can be used to reduce motion artifacts. Additional advantage of

immobilizing the breast in cranial-caudal direction is the reduction of the breast volume and the
number of slices required to cover the breast tissue in scanning procedures. This helps in
reducing the scan time.
In the delivery of the dS Breast 7ch coil solution, different immobilization kits are included for
diagnostic and/or interventional purposes. This section describes each kit with its components,
its purpose and a workflow description.
Bilateral CC Immobilization kit

The Bilateral CC Immobilization kit is provided with the dS Breast 7ch coil solution for diagnostic
imaging only. It consists of a base plate and two cranio-caudal compression plates. The
compression plates are to be mounted on the base plate. The complete setup is to be inserted
into the coil and locked in place.
Workflow
► Place the compression plates close to each other before inserting the base plate into the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

coil.
► Insert the base plate into the coil.
► Lock the base plate lockers.
► Position the patient as usual.
► Adjust the compression plates and lock the position of the compression plates.
Fig. 332: Left: Base plate and cranio-caudal compression plates. Right: complete setup placed in the coil with the
base plate lockers (b) and the compression plate lockers (c).
Bilateral M-L Immobilization kit

The Bilateral M-L Immobilization kit is provided with the dS Breast 7ch coil solution for
diagnostic imaging and for lateral and/or medial breast biopsy. It is compatible with both, the
grid and the pillar method.
It consists of a base plate and two medio-lateral compression plates. The compression plates
are to be mounted on the base plate. The complete setup is to be inserted into the coil and
locked in place.
Philips

Workflow
► Slide the medial plate in.
► Slide the lateral plate in.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 333: 1: Compression plates on base plate, inserted into coil. 2: The arrows indicate the base plate lockers. 3:
Compression plates adjusted. 4: The arrows indicate the compression plate lockers.
Unilateral CC Immobilization kit

The Unilateral CC Immobilization kit is provided with the dS Breast 7ch coil solution for cranial
interventional purposes only. It is compatible with both, the grid and the pillar method.
It consists of a base plate and two cranio-caudal compression plates. The compression plates
are to be mounted on the base plate. The complete setup is to be inserted into the coil and
locked in place.
Philips

Fig. 334: Left: Base plate and cranio-caudal compression plates. Right: Base plate and medio-lateral compression
plates.
Use of the cranio-caudal compression plates

► Place the compression plates close to each other before inserting the base plate into the
coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 335: 1: Compression plates on base plate, inserted into coil. 2: The arrows indicate the base plate lockers. 3: The
arrows indicate the compression plate lockers.
4.4.8.1.2 Breast Biopsy with dS Breast 7ch

Status: Released
4.4.8.1.2.1 Breast Biopsy Components

Status: Released
Philips

4.4.8.1.2.2 Breast Biopsy Methods

Status: Released
Immobilization is required when localization or biopsy procedures are intended. Unilateral or

bilateral breast immobilization can be performed.
There are two different biopsy methods:
• Grid method (lateral or medial access)
• Pillar method (lateral or medial access)
Both methods can be performed either with lateral or medial access.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 336: Left: Grid method. Right: Pillar method.
4.4.8.1.2.3 Breast Biopsy Device Preparation

Status: Released
4.4.8.1.2.4 Breast Biopsy Workflow

Status: Released
with a patient.
Preparation
the waist area.
Philips

Patient Positioning

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

manually.
Node title (original): Biopsy - Contrast Agent part ID: 9007205722947979-2

following way:
lesion.
Philips

direction.

needle placement.
4.4.8.2 Positioning with the dS Breast Adaptive 16ch coil

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Affix: Ingenia ID: 45036004533670155

The dS Breast Adaptive 16ch coil provides means for breast immobilization. Immobilization can
useful for diagnostic procedures, for localization and/or for biopsy procedures.
The breast examination is to be performed prone in feet-first position:
Fig. 337: Prone feet-first positioning with the dS Breast Adaptive 16 ch coil solution.
NOTICE
A dedicated nurse call is delivered with the breast coils.
Feet-first breast examinations require a nurse call with a longer cable than usual.
Philips

Workflow: Coil Setup for Diagnostic Purposes

► Place the arm support pad on the tabletop at the handgrip side of the tabletop. Be sure
connector openings are accessible.
► Place the coil base on the tabletop directly next to the arm support pad.
Fig. 338: Arm support pad and coil base on tabletop.
► Connect the coil to the FlexConnect socket at the handgrip side of the tabletop.
► Place the head support with the head support pads in the cut-out of the arm support pad.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 339: Head support in the cut-out and coil base connected to FlexConnect socket.
► Slide the medial diagnostic plate along rails to the center of the coil.
For diagnostic exams, ensure the medial diagnostic plate is in the unlocked position and
insert onto the coil base.
Philips

Fig. 340: Sliding the medial diagnostic plage.
► Center the plate on the coil base so the edges of the plate align with the alignment marks.
► Secure the plug connection between the plate and the carriage. Verify that a positive
connection is made by checking the status indicator lights.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 341: Left: Centered plate aligned with the alignment marks (A). C indicates the connection that needs to click
into a locked positioning. Right: The arrow indicates the status indicator lights (S).
► Attach the patient pad to the coil base utilizing velcro attach points. Lock the medial
diagnostic plate.
Fig. 342: Attaching patient pad to coil base.
► Place the ramp pad on the tabletop against the coil and attach it to the patient pad using
velcro attach point.
Philips

Fig. 343: Placing ramp pad.
► Attach the patient top sling pad to the handrails utilizing clips to secure.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 344: Patient top sling pad attached to handrails. The rails have 3 line markings, and the sling pad clips are
centered so you can see each of the markings in between the clips.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 345: This figure shows the complete set up of coil and pads for an examination (except for the coil cable), where: 1 - arm support pad,
2 - head support spacer, 3 - head support with head support pad, 4 - coil base, 5 - patient top sling pad, 6 - patient pad, 7 - ramp pad, 8
ankle bolster.
Workflow: Patient positioning

waist area.
► Prepare the tabletop as shown above.
► Load the patient on top of the coil utilizing handrails.
► Instruct the patient to grasp arm support pad hand grip features avoiding the cable.
Philips

Fig. 346: Patient on tabletop. Left: patient utilizing handrails. Right: grasping arm support pad hand grip features.
This can be achieved when the base of the breast is at the edge of the pad, and any belly is
up on the patient top sling pad, to keep it out of the hole.
► Place the ankle bolster under the patient's ankles.
► Adjust the height of the head support as needed.
You can remove the pad under the headrest if the headrest is too tall. Optionally an angled
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

sponge can be used on the headrest to relieve occasional pressure on the cheeks.
Fig. 347: Left: Ankle bolster under the patient's ankles. Right: Head support.
Philips

Fig. 348: Left: Patient positioning prone feet-first, still without headset and nurse call. Right: Additionally you can use
the wedges 15o under the lateral ribs.
Workflow: Lateral Setup

► Confirm lateral axilla supports are installed in each lateral plate.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 349: Installing lateral axilla supports.
► Ensure the lateral frame assembly has its lever in the unlock position and attach onto the
coil base. Secure the plug connection between the frame and the carriage (1). The
connector carriage must be positioned at the lateral most extent in order to secure the
frame connection. Verify that a positive connection is made by checking the status indicator
light. Position the breast tissue so that the nipple is facing downward and centered within
the aperture opening. Slide the lateral frame to immobilize tissue. Once positioned, lock the
frames by rotating lever (2). Verify electronic connection via indicator lights.
Philips

Fig. 350: Left: Lateral frame assembly attached to coil base with: 1 - carriage, 2 - rotating lever. Right: The arrow
indicates the status indicator lights where the abbreviations stand for: R-L = right lateral, M = medial, L-L = left
lateral.
► Adjust patient tissue as needed through access areas in lateral plates.

► Install lateral solid immobilization plates in each lateral plate
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 351: Left: adjusting patient tissue. Right: Installing lateral solid immobilization plates.
Workflow: Accessory Setup of the Grid Localization System

► (Optional) For maximum immobilization use the medial saddle and additional medial clip-on
spacer(s).
Fig. 352: Use of medial saddle and additional medial clip-on spacer.
Philips

► Insert the grid plate into the lateral frame assembly. Attach two (2) sealed fiducial
assemblies to the bottom of the lateral frame assembly.
Fig. 353: Left: Inserting grid plate. Right: Attaching two sealed fiducial assemblies.
Workflow: Lateral Accessory Setup of the Grid Localization System

► Insert the lateral solid plate and the axilla solid plate in the lateral frame assembly.
Note that the solid plate in the lateral side is only needed with a medial-only biopsy.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 354: Lateral frame assembly: Left: Inserting lateral solid plate. Right: Inserting axilla solid plate.
► (Optional) For maximum immobilization use the lateral spacer plate.
Fig. 355: Using the lateral spacer plate.

Philips

Workflow: Medial Biopsy Setup of the Grid Localization System

► Attach two (2) sealed fiducial assemblies to the bottom of the medial biopsy frame.
Fig. 356: Left: Inserting the medial grid plate. Right: Attaching 2 sealed fiducial assemblies to the bottom of the
medial biopsy frame.
► Place the breast blocker over the contra-lateral aperture blocking off the opening.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 357: Breast blocker placed over the contra-lateral aperture.
► Slide the medial and lateral frames to immobilize tissue. When the breast tissue is
sufficiently immobilized, lock the levers to secure each frame. Work from the unaffected
side, reaching under the breast blocker plate to the affected side of the medial biopsy grid
plate.
► Remove the medial diagnostic plate from the coil base and replace it with the assembled
medial biopsy frame and grid. If doing a medial biopsy, fiducials need to be in the slots.
Secure the plug connection between the medial biopsy frame and the carriage connection.
Verify that a positive connection is made by checking the status indicator light.
Philips

Fig. 358: Left: Medial biopsy frame and grid in place. Right: The arrow indicates the status indicator lights.
► Insert the medial grid plate into the medial biopsy frame assembly. Align arrows with grid
plate and frame.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 359: Align arrows on medial grid plate and medial biopsy frame assembly when inserting the medial grid plate.
NOTICE
Grid can only be inserted from one side with arrows facing up.
4.4.8.2.1 Breast Biopsy with dS Breast Adaptive 16ch

Status: Released
4.4.8.2.1.1 Breast Biopsy Components

Status: Released
Philips

4.4.8.2.1.2 Breast Biopsy Device Preparation

Status: Released
4.4.8.2.1.3 Breast Biopsy Workflow

Status: Released
with a patient.
Preparation
the waist area.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Patient Positioning

manually.
Philips

Node title (original): Biopsy - Contrast Agent part ID: 9007207729430923


following way:
lesion.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

direction.

needle placement.
4.4.8.3 Positioning with the dS Flex Breast coil solution

Status: Released
Philips

Use the Breast mattress in conjunction with the dS Flex-L coil solution and the Posterior coil to
provide high quality SENSE imaging of the breasts.
The dS Flex L-coils fit precisely into the mattress.
The mattress comprises of two parts: a solid foam base and a flexible cover which fits onto the
top side of the base.
The base of the mattress has recesses on the top into which the elements of the Flex-L coil fit.
Along either side of the top of the base are grooves into which the cables of the coil should be
placed. This gives the required separation between the patient's skin and the cables ensuring
both safety and comfort.
The flexible cover is designed to fit on the top of the base and cover the coil and cable. Both the
base and cover are designed for ease of cleaning.
► Place the dStream interface on the tabletop and connect it to the socket at magnet side.
► Place the foam base of the breast mattress on the tabletop.
► Place the dS Flex L coils into the recesses and the cables into the grooves.
► Place a short mattress above the cables on the tabletop.
► Place the cover of the breast mattress on the foam base with the coils.
► Place the head support in front of the breast mattress at magnet side.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 360: 1: Breast mattress: solid foam base on tabletop. 2: with coils in recesses, 3: with mattress above the cables, 4: with cover on top.

waist area.
► Position the patient head-first prone on the breast coil, with the head on the head support.
► Ask the patient to place the arms either next to her head or alongside her body.
Philips

Fig. 361: Patient positioned with the dS Flex Breast coil solution.
4.4.9 Positioning for Shoulder Examinations

Shoulder examinations can be performed with the following coil solutions:

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

dS Shoulder 16ch optimally suited for high resolution and routine imaging
dS Shoulder 8ch routine imaging
dS Flex coil solutions routine imaging
4.4.9.1 Positioning with the dS Shoulder 16ch coil

Status: Released
Node title (original): 00-intro Shoulder16ch coil ID: 18014458905381003

Status: Released
The shoulder examination with the dS Shoulder 16ch coil is to be performed with the patient
supine Head-First.
Philips

End fragment title: 00-intro Shoulder16ch coil
Node title (original): 1-preparing tabletop shoulder exam with ID: 18014458905383051
dS Shoulder 16ch coil Status: Released
Preparing the tabletop for a shoulder examination with the dS Shoulder 16ch coil
⊳ The dStream interface is on the tabletop and plugged into the FlexConnect socket.
► For the first use of the coil: attach the anterior and posterior coil pad to the coil using the
attached velcro tabs.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Place the coil at the head end of the tabletop leaving room for a pillow.
► Secure the coil:

Philips

• Verify that the feet on the bottom of the coil are aligned with the groove on the table.
This helps to immobilize the coil.
• Turn the lateral stabilizing legs of the coils up so that the coil is laying in the tabletop
groove.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Turn the medial stabilizing legs of the coils down to level the coil to the curved tabletop.
► Connect the coil to the dStream socket on the dStream interface.

Philips

► Place a pillow on the tabletop such that it does not lie on the dStream interface.
► Place the dedicated table mattresses on the tabletop, with their track on the bottom side in
the table groove to keep the mattresses in place.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• the small one beside the coil

• the large one below the coil to cover the tabletop
► To move and rotate the anterior coil to the side, unlock the Anterior Height Lock. Lift the
anterior coil up to the maximum height and rotate it laterally.
Philips

Tabletop with T-shape mattress,

short mattress and the dS
Shoulder 16ch coil with the
dedicated mattresses.
This set up can be used for auto-
iso positioning.
End fragment title: 1-preparing tabletop shoulder exam with dS Shoulder 16ch coil
Node title (original): patient positioning shoulder exam dS ID: 18014458905384075

Shoulder 16ch coil Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Patient positioning for a shoulder examination with the dS Shoulder 16ch coil
1. Lay the patient on the coil and move them up and lateral so that their shoulder fits
comfortably against the posterior coil.
2. Rotate the anterior coil over the patient. Lower it until it touches the patient's shoulder.
Philips

3. To align the anterior coil with the anatomy, unlock the Anterior Tilt Lock. Adjust the angle
of the anterior coil so that the apex of the coil touches the edge of the shoulder and the
base of the coil is just above the chest. The angle can vary greatly depending on patient
shape and size.
Verify that the anterior coil is parallel to the patient's chest. Adjust the anterior coil till this
is the case.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
4. Lock both locks.
5. Place the knee cushion under the patient's knees and a sandbag under their arm for
comfort.
Philips

6. Establish a landmark using the reference mark on top of the coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

7. When the examination is completed, release the Anterior Tilt and Anterior Height Lock. Lift
the anterior coil to the maximum height and rotate it laterally before sitting the patient up.
End fragment title: patient positioning shoulder exam dS Shoulder 16ch coil
4.4.9.2 Positioning with the dS Shoulder 8ch coil

Status: Released
Shoulder examinations make use of the dS Shoulder 8ch coil solution.

The shoulder examination is to be performed in Head-First position.
Philips

Fig. 362: Positioning with the dS Shoulder 8ch coil solution.
1 Schematic set up of a shoulder examination: the coil (C), the Shoulder mattress (ShM), two short
mattresses (SM) on top of each other, two long mattresses (LM) on top of each other and the T-
shape mattress (TM)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
2 Patient on tabletop positioned in dS Shoulder 8ch coil.
NOTICE
Place the dS Shoulder 8ch coil as close as possible to the outermost end of the tabletop.
Use the dedicated shoulder mattress and two long mattresses with this coil.
NOTICE
Use the dedicated head support and the wedge 15o to support the head. Do not cover the coil
with a pillow.
Workflow
1. Prepare the tabletop as shown above.
2. Connect the dS Shoulder 8ch coil to the FlexConnect socket.
3. Place the posterior pad on the base plate for best image quality and patient comfort.
Philips

Fig. 363: Connected Shoulder coil on tabletop (the shown posterior pad may differ from your actual one).
4. Position the patient supine on the tabletop with his/her head on the head support of the
Shoulder coil.
5. Open the connector on the base plate.
6. Make sure that the cup-shaped anterior pad is securely attached to the anterior coil.
7. Insert the anterior coil part into the connector. There is a groove in the coil’s pillar and the
connector which allows inserting in only one way.
Do not use the handles on the coil pillar during insertion.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8. Assure that the coil locks in place with an audible click.
Fig. 364: 1: Opening connector on base plate. 2 and 3: Inserting the anterior coil part into connector.
9. Press the handles at the anterior coil’s pillar and adjust the height and the angulation of
the anterior coil part.
• Make sure that shoulder tissue is not extruded from between the anterior coil and the
base plate.
• Align the lateral portion of the anterior coil with the base plate.
Philips

Fig. 365: 1: Set-up of a right shoulder examination. 2: Set-up of a left shoulder examination. 3: Adjusting the height of the anterior coil
part.
NOTICE
To achieve optimal image quality, the lateral edge of the anterior coil part should be parallel
to the lateral edge of the base plate.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

12. Move the patient into the isocenter and perform the MR examination.
13. After the examination gently pull the anterior coil part out of the base plate.
Fig. 366: Patient positioned ready for the examination. Left: complete setup. Right: The lateral portion of the anterior
coil is aligned with the base plate.
4.4.10 Positioning for Hand and Wrist Examinations

Philips

Hand and wrist examinations can be performed with the following coil solutions:
Coil Solution Application Examination Patient orientation/
position
dS HandWrist 16ch optimally suited for high With the hand at the side feet-first supine
resolution and routine
Overhead positioning head-first prone
imaging
(superman)
dS Wrist 8ch routine imaging With the hand at the side feet-first supine
Overhead positioning head-first prone

(superman)
Alternatively you can use the dS SmallExtremity 16ch coil, the dS SmallExtremity 8ch coil and
the dS Flex coil solutions.
4.4.10.1 Hand/wrist with the hand at the side - dS HandWrist 16ch

Status: Released
Node title (original): intro positioning Hand/wrist dS SmallExt ID: 60786217739
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

16ch - at side Status: Released
Hand/wrist examinations with the dS HandWrist 16ch coil are to be performed with the patient
either prone with the arm overhead, or supine with the arm at side. This section describes how
to position the patient supine with the arm at the side.
End fragment title: intro positioning Hand/wrist dS SmallExt 16ch - at side
Node title (original): preparing tabletop Hand/wrist dS SmallExt ID: 9007260040960267

Preparing the tabletop for hand/wrist with the hand at the side and the dS Hand/Wrist 16ch
coil
► Put a short mattress on the tabletop beside the dStream interface. Place the base plate next
to it with the groove on top of the base plate on the affected side (with Feet-First supine
positioning).
Philips

Verify that the rail is in the table groove and the base is placed securely.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Attach the coil to the base plate: slide the coil onto the base plate (hubs of coil go into rail
on base plate) with the cable pointing towards the bore. Then add the base plate mattress.

Philips

► Open the coil: pull the lock button towards the wrist end of the coil and pull the coil open.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Place pads for patient comfort:
• On the medial side of the coil: either the long or short palm pad
• Against the coil: the elbow/arm pad with the thick side to the coil
• For smaller patients, add an extra palm pad.
End fragment title: preparing tabletop Hand/wrist dS SmallExt 16ch - at side
Node title (original): pat pos - Hand/wrist dS SmallExt 16ch - at ID: 9007260040961291
side Status: Released
Patient positioning for hand/wrist at the side with the dS Hand/Wrist 16ch coil
► Position the patient Feet-First supine on the tabletop with their hand vertically in the coil.
Philips

Place the knee cushion under the patient's knees for comfort.
► Place the posterior palm pad over the patient's hand.

This pad is optional for patients with large hands, because it could hamper the coil being
closed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Place the wedge pad under the patient's fingers to hold the fingers straight.
► Close the coil carefully. Pay attention to the patient’s fingers.

Depending on the size and shape of the patient’s hand you may have to remove some of
the pads.
Philips

NOTICE
Scanning impossible with the coil not fully closed
Always fully close the coil. Push the top end down until it fully closes.
► Use the landmarks on top of the coil for isocenter positioning.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: pat pos - Hand/wrist dS SmallExt 16ch - at side
4.4.10.2 Hand/wrist with the hand overhead - dS HandWrist 16ch

Status: Released

Philips

Hand/wrist examinations with the dS HandWrist 16ch coil are to be performed with the patient
to position the patient prone with the arm overhead.

Preparing the tabletop for hand/wrist with the hand overhead and the dS HandWrist 16ch
coil
► Place the base plate on the tabletop beside the dStream interface. Cover the remaining
tabletop with mattresses.
If the patient is tall, also place the head-/leg support on the tabletop to support the
patient's feet.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Verify that the rail is in the table groove and the base is placed securely.
► Connect the mount adaptor to the base plate:

• align the two hubs on the mount adaptor to the holes in the base plate;
• then push up so that the hubs are in the two grooves allowing lateral motion and
rotation of the mount adaptor.
Philips

► Attach the coil to the mount adaptor on the base plate, with the cable pointing to the head
end.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Route the cable towards the bore and connect the coil to the dStream socket on the
dStream interface. Verify that there are no loops in the cable.
► Open the coil: pull the lock button towards the wrist end of the coil and pull the coil open.
Philips

► Place pads for patient comfort:

• On the bottom of the coil: either the long or short palm pad
• For smaller patients, add an extra palm pad.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Patient positioning for hand/wrist overhead with the dS HandWrist 16ch coil
► Rotate the coil for the appropriate wrist.
► Position the patient Head-First prone on the tabletop with their hand in the coil. Put a
pillow under the patient's chest for comfort.
Fine-tune the coil angle to make the patient as comfortable as possible.
Philips

► Place the posterior palm pad over the patient's hand.

This pad is optional for patients with large hands, because it could hamper the coil being
closed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Place the finger pad under the patient's fingers to hold the fingers straight.
► Close the coil carefully. Pay attention to the patient’s fingers.

Depending on the size and shape of the patient’s hand you may have to remove some of
the pads.
Philips

NOTICE
Scanning impossible with the coil not fully closed
Always fully close the coil. Push the top end down until it fully closes.
► To slightly elevate the patient's legs, put a pillow under their ankles.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Use the landmarks on top of the coil for isocenter positioning.
4.4.10.3 Wrist with the hand at the side - dS Wrist 8ch coil
Status: Released
The wrist examination can be performed in Feet-First position with the hand at side or in Head-
First position with the hand overhead. This section describes how to position the patient Feet-
First supine with the arm at the side.
Philips

1 Schematic set up of a wrist examination: the dStream Interface (d), one long mattress (LM), the
coil (C), one short mattress (SM) and a pillow (P) on the T-shape mattress at the end of the
tabletop.
2 Patient placing their hand in the coil for an examination in Feet-First position with the hand at
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

side.
3 Patient positioned on tabletop in Feet-First position with the hand at side.
1. Prepare the tabletop as shown above with the base plate for examinations at the side.
2. Set up the coil for the examination:
• Slide the coil vertically into the groove of the base plate.
• Remove the mount adaptor from the coil if applicable.
• Put the coil mattress on the base plate.
• Connect the coil to the dStream socket on the dStream interface.
NOTICE
Make sure that the groove in the base plate is on the side of the wrist to be examined.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 367: 1: Baseplate on tabletop for left wrist examination. 2: Baseplate on tabletop for right wrist examination. 3:
Coil set up for left wrist examination. 4: Coil set up for right wrist examination.
3. Position the patient on the tabletop: supine and Feet-First with their hand (vertically) in the
coil.
Fig. 368: Left: Open coil. Right: Patient on tabletop with hand in coil.
4. Close the coil.

Philips

Fig. 369: Left: Closing the coil. Right: Inserting padding.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 370: Patient positioned ready for wrist examination.
Status: Released
NOTICE
4.4.10.4 Wrist with the hand overhead - dS Wrist 8ch coil

Status: Released
The wrist examination can be performed in Feet-First position with the hand at side or in Head-
First position with the hand overhead. This section describes how to position the patient Head-
First prone with the hand overhead.
Philips

Fig. 371: Setup for overhead examinations. d - dStream interface, C - coil (on base plate), SM - short mattress, LM -
long mattress, TEx - Head- / Leg Support.
1. Prepare the tabletop as shown above with the base plate for overhead examinations.
NOTICE
Make sure that the short longitudinal slot in the base plate is on the side of the wrist to be
examined.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
2. Attach the mount adaptor to the coil if applicable.
Fig. 372: The mount adaptor has to be attached to the coil for overhead positioning and removed for positioning at
the patient's side. Left: Removing the mount adaptor. Right: mount adaptor removed.
3. Slide the coil horizontally into the transverse slot of the base plate.
4. Angle the coil for right or left wrist examinations.
Philips

5. Press the coil cable with the balun into the cable holders (clips in the base plate).
6. Connect the coil to the dStream socket on the dStream interface.
8. Use cushions so that the patient lies comfortable.
10. Close the coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

For the contra-lateral wrist:

► Completely disconnect the coil and remove the cable from the cable holders.
► Angle the coil and connect as shown in the image:
Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
4.4.11 Positioning for Knee Examinations

Node title (original): 1.5T and 3.0T systems ID: 18014483343835531

Status: Released
Knee examinations make use of the dS (T/R 3.0T) Knee 16ch or dS Knee 8ch coil solution.
End fragment title: 1.5T and 3.0T systems

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Knee examinations make use of the dS Knee 16ch or dS Knee 8ch coil solution.
The knee examination is to be performed in Feet-First position.
Fig. 373: Positioning with the dS Knee 16ch coil solution.
1 Schematic set up of a knee examination: the dStream Interface (d), one short mattress (SM), the
coil (C), one long mattress (LM) and a pillow (P) at the very end of the tabletop.
2 Patient on tabletop and Head/Leg support positioned in dS Knee 16 ch coil.
3 Patient on tabletop positioned in ds Knee 8 ch Knee coil.

Philips

Workflow
3. Only for the dS T/R Knee 16ch coil on 3.0T systems: Also connect the coil to the Transmit
plug at the Patient Support Control Panel.
• Slide the posterior coil part to the left or to the right for a left or right knee examination.
• Put the thin and/or thick wedge pad in the coil for small knees.
• Put the knee pad on the coil base around the posterior coil part.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 374: Set up with dS Knee 8ch coil. 1: Coil on the base plate. The arrow indicates the groove in the base plate. 2: Set up of a left knee
examination. 3: Set up of a right knee examination.
Fig. 375: Set up with dS Knee 16ch coil. 1: Coil on the base plate. The arrow indicates the groove in the base plate. 2: Set up of a left knee
examination. 3: Set up of a right knee examination.
5. Position the patient supine with:

• the affected side knee in the posterior coil
• unaffected side knee on knee pad.
Philips

Fig. 376: Left knee examination feet-first.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 377: Closing the dS Knee 8ch coil: first putting the anterior coil part on the posterior coil part, and then closing by means of U-bolt.
Fig. 378: Closing the dS Knee 16ch coil by means of the U-bolt.
Philips

Fig. 379: Left knee examination feet-first. Left: Examination with the dS Knee 8ch coil. Right: Examination with the dS
Knee 16ch coil.
Status: Released
NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4.4.12 Positioning for Foot and Ankle Examinations

Foot and ankle examinations can be performed with the following coil solutions:
dS FootAnkle 16ch optimally suited for high resolution and routine imaging
dS FootAnkle 8ch routine imaging
dS Flex coil solutions routine imaging
4.4.12.1 Foot and Ankle Examinations with dS FootAnkle 8ch coil

Status: Released
Foot and ankle examinations make use of the dS FootAnkle 8ch coil solution.
The foot and ankle examinations are to be performed in Feet-First position with the patient
supine.
Philips

Fig. 380: Positioning with the dS FootAnkle 8ch coil solution.
1 Schematic set up of the foot or ankle examination in Feet-First positioning: the dStream Interface
(d), the coil (C), one short mattress (SM), one long mattress and one T-shape mattress (TM).
2 Foot/ankle examination in Feet-First position.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Workflow
• Slide the foot support to the left or the right side to accommodate left or right foot and
ankle examinations.
• Put the coil mattress with integrated unaffected foot pad over the coil.
• Insert the foot support pad into the foot support for patient comfort and good fixation.
Fig. 381: Preparation. Left: coil in base plate. The groove is visible. Right: Coil in base plate. FootAnkle pad on top of
the base plate.
Philips

Fig. 382: Examination set up. Left: left side examination, right: right side examination.

• affected foot in the foot support
• unaffected foot on the FootAnkle pad.
4. Use the strap to immobilize the foot to be examined.
5. To improve patient comfort, the knee supports can be used.
6. Carefully slide the coil onto the foot support with both hands.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Special attention is needed in case of patients with damaged feet and toes, e.g. as in diabetes.
NOTICE
Fig. 383: 1: Affected side foot in foot support. 2: Sliding the coil onto the foot support. 3: Connecting the coil.
Philips

Fig. 384: Positioning. 1: Positioning of the feet in the coil and on the pad. 2: inserting toe wedge pad through opening. 3: Toe wedge pad
in coil, and landmark for isocenter positioning (arrow).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 385: Ready for the examination.
Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
Positioning aids
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 386: Positioning aids. 1: Toe wedge pad. 2: Foot support pad. 3: FootAnkle pad. 4: Dedicated knee support.
4.4.12.2 Foot and Ankle Examinations with dS FootAnkle 16ch coil

Status: Released
Node title (original): intro pos - dS FootAnkle 16ch ID: 60786201099

Status: Released
The foot and ankle examinations with the dS FootAnkle 16ch coil are to be performed in Feet-
First position with the patient supine.
End fragment title: intro pos - dS FootAnkle 16ch
Node title (original): prep tabletop - FootAnkle 16ch ID: 9007260040943627

Status: Released
Preparing the tabletop for a foot and ankle examination with the dS FootAnkle 16ch coil
1. Put the base plate with foot support at the end of the tabletop. Verify that the tracts on
the base plate are secure in the table grooves.
Place the table mattresses next to the coil.
Philips

2. Slide the foot support to the left or the right side to accommodate left or right foot and
ankle examinations.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3. Put the coil mattress over the base plate.

Insert the foot support pad into the foot support with the wider part against the vertical
plate.
4. Optionally: to increase patient comfort, place the tilt device under the base plate with the
thin end towards the magnet.
Philips

• Verify that the tract on the tilt device is aligned with the groove on the tabletop.
• Verify that the base plate is securely aligned with the tilt device before placing the
patient's foot in the coil.
End fragment title: prep tabletop - FootAnkle 16ch
Node title (original): pat pos dS FootAnkle 16ch ID: 9007260040944651

Status: Released
Patient positioning for a foot and ankle examination with the dS FootAnkle 16ch coil
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Move the patient down so that their heel is all the way against the vertical plate.
• affected foot in the foot support

• unaffected foot on the coil mattress.
2. Optional - for ankle imaging only: have the patient flex their foot forward and place the
wedge pad behind the patient's foot.
Philips

3. Place wedges under the patient's knees for comfort.

With the tilt device in place, consider using a pillow under the patient's knees.
4. Carefully slide the coil onto the foot support with both hands.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Verify that the patient's skin cannot be pinched between coil parts.
• Take care of the patient's toes.
NOTICE
Special attention is needed in case of patients with damaged feet and toes, e.g. as in diabetes.
5. Insert the small pad into the coil through the opening, underneath/in front of the toes.
Fold the pad double if needed.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: pat pos dS FootAnkle 16ch
4.4.13 Positioning with the dS SmallExtremity 8ch coil

Elbow and hand/wrist examinations make use of the dS SmallExtremity 8ch coil solution.
Philips

Number Examination Patient orientation Patient position
1 Elbow with the arm at the side head-first supine
2 Hand/wrist with the arm at the side feet-first supine
3 Overhead positioning (superman) - head-first prone

suited for elbow, hand or wrist
4.4.13.1 Elbow positioning with the arm at the side

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Status: Released
This section describes how to position the patient with the arm at the side. Alternatively the
patient can be positioned with the arm overhead (see instructions chapter “Overhead
(superman) positioning ” on page 786).
► Prepare the tabletop for left- or right-sided examinations with
• the dStream interface (d)
• the dedicated mattress with the cable groove (Mg)
The groove has to be at the side of the anatomy of interest.
• the dedicated mattress with the coil cut-out (Mc)
The cut-out has to be at the side of the anatomy of interest.
• the long mattress (LM)
• and the T-shape mattress (TM).
Philips

► Put the coil in the notch of the mattress so that the coil lies stable.
► Place the cable in the groove.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 387: Left: Tabletop set up for a left side examination. Right: Tabletop set up for a right side examination.
► Position the patient head-first supine on the tabletop with their elbow in the lower coil
part.
► Use cushions for patient comfort and stability.
► Wrap the coil around the patient's elbow and close the strap.
► Put sandbags under the patient's lower arm.
Philips

Fig. 388: Ready for elbow examination in head-first position.
4.4.13.2 Hand/wrist positioning with the hand at the side

Status: Released

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Put the coil in the notch of the mattress so that the coil lies stable, and place the cable in
the groove.
Philips


► Position the patient feet-first supine on the tabletop with their hand/wrist in the lower coil
part.
► Wrap the coil around the patient's hand/wrist and close the strap.
► Put sandbags under the patient's lower arm.
The wrist can be positioned with the thumb up.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 389: Hand/wrist positioning with the dS SmallExtremity 8ch coil.
Fig. 390: Ready for hand/wrist examination in feet-first position.
4.4.13.3 Overhead (superman) positioning

Status: Released
el
Overhead positioning can be used for hand, wrist or elbow examinations.
Philips

• the two short mattresses (SM)

Alternatively use the head-/leg support (HLS). In superman position, the patient's feet
may be off the end of the table.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Place the coil on the short mattresses on the tabletop.
► Put sandbags on either side of the coil to stabilize.

The cable must not be looped or touching the dStream interface.
Philips

► Put the wedge 15o in front of the coil to support the arm. Place the wider part next to the
coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Put a pillow on the tabletop below the coil.
► Position the patient head-first prone on the tabletop with their hand, wrist or elbow in the
► Insert padding into the coil for patient comfort.
► Wrap the coil around the patient's hand, wrist or elbow and close the strap.
Philips

4.4.14 Positioning with the dS SmallExtremity 16ch coil

You can use the dS SmallExtremity 16ch coil solution for elbow and hand/wrist examinations.
Examination Patient orientation Patient position
With the arm at the side feet-first supine

Overhead positioning (superman) - head-first prone

4.4.14.1 Elbow positioning with the arm at the side

Status: Released
Elbow examinations with the dS SmallExtremity 16ch coil are to be performed with the patient
to position the patient supine with the arm at the side.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Preparing the tabletop for elbow at the side with the dS SmallExtremity 16ch coil
Philips

► Place another long mattress on top the first one.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Place the coil in the cut-out of the mattress such that it lies stable.
Route the cable under the cable mattress.

Philips

► Place pads in the coil for patient comfort:

• For adult-sized patients, place the elbow pad in the coil.
This pad keeps a slight bend in the elbow.
• For pediatric and smaller patients, use the hand/small part pad to immobilize the
elbow.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Patient positioning for elbow at the side with the dS SmallExtremity 16ch coil
► Position the patient head-first supine on the tabletop with their elbow in the coil.
Use extra pads for patient comfort and stability.
Put sandbags under the patient's hand and lower arm.
Philips

► Wrap the coil around the patient's elbow so that the flap with the centering mark is on the
top. Closing the coil in the opposite direction may result in decreased image quality.
Close the buckle clip and tighten the straps.
► Place the knee cushion under the patient's knees for comfort.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4.4.14.2 Hand/wrist positioning with the hand at the side

Status: Released

Hand/wrist examinations with the dS SmallExtremity 16ch coil are to be performed with the
patient either prone with the arm overhead, or supine with the arm at side. This section
describes how to position the patient supine with the arm at the side.

Philips

Preparing the tabletop for hand/wrist with the hand at the side and the dS SmallExtremity
16ch coil
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Place another long mattress on top the first one.
► Place the coil in the cut-out of the mattress such that it lies stable.
Route the cable under the cable mattress.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Place the hand/small part pads in the coil for patient comfort:
Patient positioning for hand/wrist at the side with the dS SmallExtremity 16ch coil
► Position the patient feet-first supine on the tabletop with their wrist/hand in the coil (in the
hand/small part pad).
Put sandbags or pads under the patient's upper arm.
Philips

► Place the finger wedge pad under the fingers to keep the hand straight.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Wrap the coil around the patient's elbow so that the flap with the centering mark is on the
top. Closing the coil in the opposite direction may result in decreased image quality.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4.4.14.3 Hand/wrist/elbow overhead (superman) positioning

Status: Released
Node title (original): intro pos - hand wrisst elbow - dS SmallExt ID: 60786133515
16ch - overhead Status: Released
Hand/wrist or elbow examinations with the dS SmallExtremity 16ch coil are to be performed
with the patient either prone with the arm overhead, or supine with the arm at side. This
section describes how to position the patient prone with the arm overhead (superman).
End fragment title: intro pos - hand wrisst elbow - dS SmallExt 16ch - overhead
Node title (original): prep tabletop - hand wrisst elbow - dS ID: 9007260040876043
SmallExt 16ch - overhead Status: Released
Preparing the tabletop for overhead examination with the dS SmallExtremity 16ch coil
Philips

• the two short mattresses (SM)

Alternatively use the head-/leg support (HLS). In superman position, the patient's feet
may be off the end of the table.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Place the coil on the tabletop. Put sandbags on either side of the coil to stabilize it.

The cable must not be looped or touching the dStream interface.
Philips

► Place the hand/small part pads in the coil for patient comfort:
End fragment title: prep tabletop - hand wrisst elbow - dS SmallExt 16ch - overhead
Node title (original): pat pos - hand wrisst elbow - dS SmallExt ID: 9007260040877067
16ch - overhead Status: Released
Patient positioning for hand/wrist at the side with the dS SmallExtremity 16ch coil
► Position the patient head-first prone on the tabletop with their wrist/hand or elbow in the
coil and the upper body on a pillow.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Prevent looping or crossing cables.
Place a pad to separate the cable if needed.
Philips

► Wrap the coil around the patient's hand/wrist or elbow so that the flap with the centering
mark is on the top. Closing the coil in the opposite direction may result in decreased image
quality.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: pat pos - hand wrisst elbow - dS SmallExt 16ch - overhead
Philips

4.4.15 Positioning with the dS Flex coil solutions

The dS Flex coil solutions can be used for a wide range of applications such as joints and
pediatric imaging. They consist of two dS Flex coils and the dS Posterior coil. Depending on the
size of the anatomy to be examined, either the Small (S) or the Medium (M) or the Large (L) coil
solution can be selected.
Fig. 391: dS Flex coil solution. 1 - L, 2 - M, 3 - S.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Positioning in general
► Place either one dS Flex coil or both dS Flex coils on the anatomy to be examined.
You can either scan with two dS Flex coils and the dS Posterior coil or with just one dS Flex
coil and the dS Posterior coil.
Node title (original): Combination Flex coils different sizes ID: 27021604230235915-2
Status: Released
NOTICE
Single dS Flex coils of different sizes can be combined with each other and with the dS
Posterior coil.
Using dS Flex coils with or without the dS Posterior coil

By default, the dS Flex coils are used in combination with the dS Posterior coil to achieve
optimum image quality.
► To use the dS Flex coils without the dS Posterior coil, enable Disengage Posterior coil in the
⇨ The dS Posterior coil is disengaged for the current ExamCard as long as Disengage Posterior
coil remains enabled.
End fragment title: Combination Flex coils different sizes
► Fix the coil(s) with a strap.

Philips
► Connect the coil to the Flex socket on the dStream interface.

► Especially for shoulder and wrist examinations: prevent contact between the patient and
the bore wall at the contra-lateral side.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 392: Examples of how to use the dS Flex coil solutions. 1: Neck examinations, 2 and 3: Shoulder examinations, 4: Elbow examination,
5: Foot examination.
4.4.16 Positioning for examinations with the TMJ coil holder

Affix: all Best systems except MR5300 ID: 27021690579349003-2
Node title (original): all variants of Ingenia ID: 9007292070024203-2

Status: Released
TMJ, orbit or carotid examinations make use of the TMJ coil holder and the dS Flex coil solution.
End fragment title: all variants of Ingenia
Node title (original): Achieva ID: 92815284747-2

Status: Released
TMJ, orbit or carotid examinations make use of the TMJ coil holder and the SENSE Flex coils.

► Place the TMJ coil holder on the tabletop.
Philips

► Place the NVC Stability pad on the TMJ coil holder.

► Optionally: Put the 15° angle sponge or the “Mickey Mouse” pad underneath the NVC
Stability pad for comfort.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Attach the Flex coil of your choice for the exam.

► Position the patient on the tabletop with their head on the NVC Stability pad.
► Place the coils as close as possible to the anatomy of interest.
Philips

TMJ
Orbits
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Carotids
4.4.17 Positioning for Pediatric Examinations

4.4.17.1 Positioning for Pediatric Head and Spine Examinations

Status: Released
► Place the dStream interface on the tabletop and connect it.

Philips

► Place the dS Ped HeadSpine 8ch coil on the tabletop with the base plate aligned to the table
groove.
► Connect the coil to the dStream interface.
Fig. 393: Coil on the tabletop connected to the dStream interface.
► Verify that the coil is placed as far away from the dStream interface as possible so that the
cable is not bent, but runs as straight as possible.
► Check that the base plate is slid into the table groove so that the coil is stable.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Position the table pad to fit around the Pediatric Head Spine coil with the cable cutout over
the coil cable.
► Put the patient pad on the coil.
Philips

Fig. 394: 1- Coil on the tabletop with the table pad around the coil and patient pad on the coil, 2 - table pad, 3 -
patient pad,
► Position the child in the coil with the head in the cage-like coil part.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 395: Pediatric patient in the coil.
4.4.17.2 Positioning for Pediatric Torso and Cardiac Examinations

Status: Released
Coil handling
• Carry the dS Pediatric TorsoCardiac 8ch coil in one piece. To do so, hold on to the posterior
part and lift the coil.
• Never lift the coil by gripping through the holes of the anterior part.
NOTICE
Light-weight connection between anterior and posterior part
This connection is not designed to hold the two parts together when only holding the anterior
part.
Philips

Positioning
► Place the dStream interface on the tabletop and connect it.
► Place the dS Pediatric TorsoCardiac 8ch coil on the tabletop with the base plate slid into the
table groove.
► Connect the coil to the dStream interface.
Fig. 396: Coil on the tabletop connected to the dStream interface.
► Verify that the coil is placed as far away from the dStream interface as possible so that the
cable is not bent, but runs as straight as possible.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Check that the base plate is slid into the table groove so that the coil is stable.
► Position the table pad around the coil with the cut-out over the coil cable.
► Position the two torso inserts to fill the voids making sure the one with the cable cutout is
at the cable end of the coil.
Fig. 397: Tabletop prepared with the coil, torso inserts (also left image) and table pad (also right image).
► Position the patient pad on the coil.

Philips

Fig. 398: Tabletop prepared with coil, torso inserts, table pad and patient pad (also left image).
► Press the yellow buttons at the side of the coil and detach the anterior coil part.
► Position the pediatric patient on the patient pad.
► Place the anterior coil part on the posterior coil part and close the coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 399: Positioning with the SENSE Pediatric Body/Cardiac coil.
4.4.18 Positioning with the dS Microscopy coils

1. Place the dStream interface on the tabletop and connect it.

2. Connect the dS Microscopy coil to one of the small sockets on the dStream interface.
The arrows indicate these sockets.
Philips

3. Position the patient on the tabletop either feet-first or head-first as close as possible to the
isocenter. The preferred patient position depends on the type of the examination and the
size of the patient. Most important is that the patient position allows the coil to be
positioned on the area of interest with a coil cable that runs straight.
4. Do not position the coil in the transverse plane with respect to the bore axis.
Coils work best when positioned in coronal or sagittal plane.
Fig. 400: Incorrect (left) and correct (right) positioning of the Microscopy coil. The arrow indicates the axis of the
main magnetic field.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

5. To achieve the best possible image quality, make sure that both the coil and the anatomy
are perfectly immobilized. Use sandbags and/or straps.
Eye studies
To avoid eye movement, ask the patient to close the eyes or to focus on a specific point in the
bore or via a mirror on the wall behind the scanner.
Fig. 401: Positioning examples with the Microscopy coils: orbit, ear, skin.
Fig. 402: Positioning examples with the Microscopy coils: placed against the skin, around a digit and around a thumb.
The arrow indicates the axis of the main magnetic field.
Philips

Scanning
► Start with a large FOV (450 mm) to find the location of the coil.
► SmartSelect will only work with the Posterior coil in scan position. If the Posterior coil is
used in holdback position, manual selection of the Microscopy coil is necessary.
► Proceed with a multistack small FOV (15 mm) survey.
► Then perform high resolution scans.
4.4.19 Positioning with the Phosphorous P-140 Coil

Affix: both (coil and description) applicable for Achieva Ingenia ID: 54043215125990795
CX(Optimus) Status: Released
Place the coil with the rods for manual tuning and matching towards the handgrip side of the
tabletop.
Node title (original): positioning with the coil - correct for both ID: 9007318037143691
MN coils Status: Released
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 4/13/2021 1:52:26 PM: This workflow is valid for the P-140 Coil
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
AND for the P-140-Flex coil. And btw for ALL MN-140-Flex coils. When we move this content to
the IFU, it seems to be wise, to use only one description, and add that the workflow is valid for
all MN coils.}
► Place the coil on the anatomy of interest, with the gray surface towards the anatomy.
Keep the plane of the coil parallel to the magnetic field.
► Fix the coil with a strap.
Tightly fix the coil with a strap so that the coil surface slightly flattens the patient’s skin. The
flattened skin is visible on the proton survey images and may help to localize the coil during
planning.
► Connect the coil to the T/R socket.
► Verify that the dS Posterior coil is disengaged (kept “in holdback”) before you move the
patient to the isocenter.
► Set the light visor at the laser marking on the coil housing. Then move the patient to the
isocenter.
End fragment title: positioning with the coil - correct for both MN coils
Safety
Comply with the following safety measures:
Philips

Node title (original): Safety handling of MN coils ID: 119099069451

Status: Released
• Handle the coils with care to prevent damage.

• After unpacking a new coil or storage, the coil requires 24 hours of acclimatization before
its first use.
• Carry the coil by its housing only.
• Do not handle the coil by its cables or connectors.
• Avoid coil jolts.
End fragment title: Safety handling of MN coils
Node title (original): 43933 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.MN. ID: 36028808895885963

9 Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

WARNING
Use of the Phosphorous coils P-140 and P-140-Flex close to the eyes.
Risk of heating of the eyes.
• Keep a distance to the eyes of at least 6 cm (2.5 inches) in all directions.
End fragment title: 43933 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.MN.9
Positioning Examples
Liver examination
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Examination of the calf muscle

Philips

Preparing the Examination Applying Physiology Sensors
Examination of the forearm

muscle
Overhead (superman) positioning
Examination of the forearm

muscle
Supine positioning with the arm
at the side
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4.5 Applying Physiology Sensors
Affix: Workflows (Preparing chapter) ID: 9007314603228683
4.5.1 Positioning of the Respiratory Belt

Status: Released
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 10/14/2020 2:23:31 PM: purpose of workflow: one sentence}
► Place the belt on the patient’s upper abdomen or lower chest (whichever expands most
during inspiration - preferably the area to be scanned).
For optimal signal, place the belt directly under the coil in longitudinal direction.
► Use a velcro strap to affix the sensor.
► Connect the flexible tube to the wireless module (or to the UIM).
NOTICE
Avoid excessive bending of the flexible tube as this may impair detection of the patient's
respiration.
Philips

Applying Physiology Sensors Preparing the Examination
► Check the respiratory signal in the Physiology Display window.
► Position the patient in the magnet.
If the Respiratory Signal appears to weaken

Instruct the patient, between scans, to breathe more deeply during the scan (thus creating
more movement at the sensor).
Related Parameters{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 10/14/2020 2:23:31 PM: preferably blind link
to parameter Respiratory Compensation}
• Respiratory Compensation
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): More info -> Help ID: 1059466635

Status: Released
For more information, refer to the system's Help Topics.

End fragment title: More info -> Help
4.5.2 Detecting respiratory motion with the VitalEye

Status: Released
This workflow applies to detect respiratory motion with the VitalEye and to visualize the
respiratory signal at the physiology display units (Physiology Display window, VitalScreen).
• You do not need to switch the VitalEye on or off. It is always ready to use.
• The infrared bore lights switch on automatically.
► Enter a New Examination. Select an ExamCard with at least one respiratory triggered scan
or one breathhold scan.
With any ExamCard, you can enable the display of the VitalEye respiratory signal
Once patient and ExamCard are selected at the console, a message is displayed at the
physiology display units:
“Move patient to isocenter to view the respiratory signal”.
► Position the patient with coils and positioning aids on the tabletop.
► Travel the patient to the isocenter.
When the tabletop reaches the isocenter, the VitalEye camera switches on automatically
and the VitalEye respiratory signal gets displayed.
Philips

► Verify that the line of sight of the camera is not obstructed.

If the line of sight of the camera is obstructed, also apply the respiratory belt.
The line of sight is possibly obstructed when you use

• the head-and-arm support (when the patient is positioned with the arms up),
• the knee support with patient feet-first,
• the FlexTilt device with the dS HeadSpine or the dS HeadNeckSpine coil solution,
• the anterior coil frame,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• anything that significantly covers the patient's chest.
► At the physiology display units, select VitalEye and check the quality of the VitalEye
respiratory signal.
Philips

Display of respiratory traces

• The respiratory signal that is selected for display is always used for respiratory triggering
(without the need of an imaging parameter to select the respiratory trigger device).
• The display of the VitalEye respiratory signal is paused during tabletop movement.
In this case, the respiratory trace is replaced by the tabletop movement icon.
• It is not possible to display the respiratory traces from the VitalEye and the respiratory belt
at the same time.
• Dependent on the physiology enabled in the ExamCard and the physiology sensors
connected to the patient, default signal traces are displayed at the physiology display units:
Physiology enabled in ExamCard Physiology connected to patient Default signal traces at physiology
display units
• Respiratory compensation nothing • Respiratory signal of VitalEye

(triggering or breath-hold)
• Respiratory compensation Wireless-PPU battery module • Respiratory signal of respiratory

(triggering or breath-hold) (which has a connection for the belt
• but not PPU triggering respiratory belt)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Respiratory compensation Wireless-PPU battery module • Respiratory signal of VitalEye

(triggering or breath-hold) (which has a connection for the (The respiratory belt signal is not
• PPU triggering respiratory belt) replacing the VitalEye signal at
the physiology display units.)
• PPU signal
To override the default signal traces, manually select another signal trace. { Heuvel, Martina
van den, 9/5/2018 9:39:45 AM: (link to selecting trace in Physiology Display & VitalScreen).}
4.5.3 Positioning of the Peripheral Pulse sensor

Status: Released
Node title (original): Positioning of the PP sensor ID: 115351575435

Status: Released
NOTICE
Do not place the wireless unit in proximity of the System Body coil.
► Push the fiber optic tip into the retainer of the attachment firmly until you hear the click.
Assure the sensor cable is snug on the attachment and does not fall off. It may swivel but
not wiggle.
► Repeat for the other cable leg.
Philips

► Attach to limb. Light may shine on top or on bottom of the limb.
NOTICE
Failure to insert the tip properly will compromise the measurement accuracy, and may cause
error messages to be displayed on the monitor or prevent a reliable measurement.
► Select the proper attachment for the application.

• Always select the attachment that provides a snug fit.
• Make sure the sensor windows are completely covered by skin or nail.
NOTICE
Avoid placing the sensor on extremities with an arterial catheter, intravascular venous infusion
line, or inflated blood pressure cuff. Failure to do so may result in inaccurate readings or false
alarm indications.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Apply the attachments.
NOTICE
Fit the sensor while the patient is outside the magnet.
NOTICE
The finger must not be moved during the scan.
End fragment title: Positioning of the PP sensor
Node title (original): attaching reusable clips ID: 9007244350089099

Status: Released
Reusable Clips
► Press the clip to open.
► Push the clip over a finger so either fiber head is on the top over the root of the nail and the
other fiber head opposite to it. It does not matter which head is on top.
► Assure that the finger is touching the stop at the cushion and lays nicely centered in the
clip.
Philips

NOTICE
You may swivel each fiber head into a position that provides most comfort to the patient and
bends the cable least.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 403: PPU SpO2 attaching reusable clip A.

End fragment title: attaching reusable clips
Node title (original): attaching disposable grips A, P, I ID: 9007244350007307

Status: Released
Disposable Grips A, P and I

► Lift off the release liners that protect the adhesive.
► Put the finger or toe onto either side of the attachment - they are symmetrical - such that
the tip covers the window completely and the finger does not protrude over the hinge.
► Close the grip.
► If the fit is good, press the attachment firmly on the finger or toe. If the fit is not good,
reposition the attachment.
► Wrap the foam wings around the finger and attachment and stick to the opposing grip side.
Do not stretch the foam to apply excessive pressure.
NOTICE
Philips

Fig. 404: PPU SpO2 attaching disposable clip A.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 405: PPU SpO2 attaching disposable clip I.
End fragment title: attaching disposable grips A, P, I
Node title (original): attaching disposable grip N ID: 9007244350034315

Status: Released
Disposable Grip N
► Lift the release liners that protect the adhesive part.
► Foot application: Align the hinge on the outside facing ridge of the foot. Make sure the
attachment is as far as possible toward the small toe but never over it.
Hand/wrist application: Align the hinge on the outside facing ridge of the hand or wrist. You
may have to swivel the fiber heads to an optimal position to ease the application.
► If the hinge is in line with the ridge of the foot/hand/wrist, press one side to the skin.
► Wrap the other side around the limb pulling the long foam piece gently.
► Press both fiber heads gently to attach the adhesives.
► Secure the longer foam piece by pressing it firmly to the foam/adhesive of the opposing
side.
► Assure the two fiber heads are opposing and have good skin contact. The angle between
the two fiber heads should be as small as possible not exceeding 45o. If the attachment
opens too much, reattach or try another side.
Philips

NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 406: PPU SpO2 attaching disposable clip N.

End fragment title: attaching disposable grip N
Node title (original): display PP sensor signal ID: 18014443604720523

Status: Released
Displaying the PP sensor signal

► Check the PP sensor signal and the trigger pulses in the display, see .
NOTICE
Instruct the patient that the finger must not be moved during the scan.
If the signal is too weak,

• fit the sensor to another finger on the same hand or on the other hand.
• keeping the finger warm may help.
Excessive pressure on the finger will decrease the blood flow and weaken or suppress the
signal.
End fragment title: display PP sensor signal
4.5.4 Connecting VCG to the patient

Status: Released
Philips

Node title (original): intro VCG positioning ID: 115357506315

Status: Released
Patient preparation and electrode positioning play an important role in obtaining high quality
VCG signals. The recommended workflow is described in this section.
The quality of the VCG signal is also influenced by other factors. For more information, see
chapter “Factors affecting the VCG signal” on page 416.
End fragment title: intro VCG positioning
Node title (original): 24292 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PH. ID: 18014418636833419

08.1, HAZ-PH.08.2, HAZ-PH.08.3) Status: Released
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 6/25/2015 7:10:12 AM: Risk measure that combines several 'old' risk
measures from both RMM and IEC2-33 into 1. Includes HAZ-PH.08.1 (24292), HAZ-PH.08.2
(24293), HAZ-PH.08.3 (new in Atlantis, no ALM#), IEC 2-33 SYS.Label.IFU.ECGPatientPreparation
(old version of 24467), IEC 2-33 SYS.Label.IFU.NeverUseECGElectrodesPastExpiration (24519),
IEC 2-33 SYS.Label.IFU.UseFreshECGElectrodes (24565), IEC 2-33
SYS.Label.IFU.UseSafeECGElectrodes (24567)}
{ Drunen, Jenneke van, 6/25/2015 7:10:12 AM: For administration purposes, entered in ALM
twice: under HAZ-PH.08.1 (24292) and under SYS.Label.IFU.SafeECGUse (24467) but will receive
same verification test case, so only added to ST4 under SYS.Label.IFU.SafeECGUse (24467)}
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

WARNING
Wrong usage of ECG electrodes.
Risk of patient skin burns
• When positioning ECG electrodes for the VCG module:
• Only use MR Safe or MR Conditional electrodes and leads.
• Make sure electrodes have not passed their expiration date. ECG electrodes can dry
out resulting in bad electrical contact.
• Properly prepare the patient and apply electrodes correctly.
• Never reposition or reuse electrodes. Always use new electrodes.
• Always carefully read and strictly follow the Instructions for Use of the electrode
manufacturer.
End fragment title: 24292 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PH.08.1, HAZ-PH.08.2, HAZ-PH.08.3)
Node title (original): HG Recommended electrode type ID: 18014405565584011

Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
For best results, it is recommended to use the Philips M2202A radio translucent foam
monitoring electrode.
(http://shop.medical.philips.com)
End fragment title: HG Recommended electrode type
Node title (original): HG - Pediatric and adult ECG electrodes ID: 9007206293927435
Status: Released
WARNING
Do not use pediatric ECG electrodes on adults or Adult ECG electrodes on pediatric patients.
The use of wrong ECG electrodes may result in skin burns.
End fragment title: HG - Pediatric and adult ECG electrodes
Node title (original): preparing patient ID: 115357382411

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Status: Released
Preparing the patient's skin

► Prepare the patient's skin according to the electrodes manufacturer's Instructions for Use.
To reduce skin impedance and to ensure good contact between electrodes and skin, proper
skin preparation is required. Proper skin preparation
• prevents electrodes from coming loose and consequently avoids signal loss.
• prevents high skin impedance that leads to noise in the VCG and to warming of the skin.
End fragment title: preparing patient
Position the electrodes

Node title (original): instruction VCG positioning NEW ID: 115357629451
(introduced R3.2.3 Addendum & Unify) Status: Released
NOTICE
Position the electrodes as described in this section.
Do not use the alternative lead placements that are described in the manuals of InVivo
monitoring equipment (e.g. Expression, Expression MR400). Do not use the lead placement
instruction as indicated on the label of the VCG-cable.
These alternative lead placements are not optimized for the purpose of cardiac
synchronization in MRI-sequences.
Philips

► Position the first electrode below the first intercostal space, just left of the sternum.
► Position the second electrode just left of xiphoid, approximately 10 cm to 15 cm below the
first one.
► Position the third electrode at the patient's left side, forming a 90o angle with the other two
electrodes. Keep the distance between black and red similar to the distance between white
and black. If positioned correctly, the imaginary line (between the second and the third
electrode) runs under the nipple line.
► Position the fourth electrode just below the second electrode.
► Connect the leads to the electrodes.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 407: The black and green electrodes are exchanged from wireless physiology to wired physiology, while white
and red are identical.
► Make certain that the cables are correctly inserted into the VCG module.
End fragment title: instruction VCG positioning NEW (introduced R3.2.3 Addendum & Unify)
NOTICE
The color coding is compliant with international standards.
The recommended lead positioning provides proper interoperability with the Precess monitor
of Invivo.
Philips

Color Codings of the ECG/VCG clips

Color of the Clip Function Function Physiology Display
with Wireless Physiology with Wired Physiology
white active 1 active 1 upper trace VCG1
red active 2 active 2 lower trace VCG2
green common ground common active
black common active common ground
NOTICE
Color coding as described above follows the AAMI/AHA (American standard) color coding
standard. With Expression MR400 monitor, cables may be provided that follow the IEC
(European standard) color coding Standard.
Function of the clips in the IEC color coding standard:
• Red = active 1 /upper trace VCG1
• Green = active 2 / lower trace VCG2
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Black = common ground

• Yellow = common active
Deviations from the recommended electrode positioning

Under certain conditions, you can deviate from the recommended electrode positioning.
1. In patients with sternal wires:
– Position the white and black electrodes more towards the patient’s right side.
– Alternatively position them on the patient's back.
– Take care that you do not place the leads too high on the back (consider the imaginary
nipple line).
2. Patient dependent in case of insufficient VCG signal:
– The optimal distance between the electrodes varies per patient.
– A greater distance increases the SNR of the QRS-complex, but also noise and baseline
distortions (T-wave artifact).
– A smaller distance decreases the SNR of the QRS-complex, and also decreases baseline
distortions (T-wave artifact).
Philips

NOTICE
When using InVivo monitoring equipment (e.g. Expression, Expression MR400) in an MRI-
environment, ensure that the monitor is in Magnet mode. This ensures that the scanner
controls the Module Filter settings.
The warning ‘Interoperability Mode Disabled’ is displayed in the PSA when Magnet mode is
disabled
For more information about magnet mode, see the InVivo user documentation.
Fig. 408: Warning: Interoperability Mode Disabled
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4.5.5 Placing the VCG battery module
Status: Released
⊳ The electrodes are positioned. The leads are connected. The cables are correctly inserted in
the VCG battery module.
► Put the VCG battery module on the tabletop either between the legs or to the side.
► If you put the VCG battery module to the side, you can place the knee cushion on top of the
VCG module.
► Place the cable in a straight line and fixate it with a velcro strap. You can use one strap for
VCG battery module and respiratory belt.
Make certain that the cable is not under tension.
► Let the patient deeply breathe in and out to make certain that leads and cables don't move
during deep inspiration and expiration.
If leads and cables move, fix them with straps.
► Make certain you adhere to the following warnings.
Node title (original): HG - VCG module/unit NOT directly on ID: 9007206294251787
patient's skin Status: Released
Philips

WARNING
Do not place the VCG battery module (VCG or PPU unit) directly on the patient’s skin.
Direct contact may cause heating of the skin. Keep a distance to the patient’s skin of at least
1 cm using pads of the standard auxiliary set.
End fragment title: HG - VCG module/unit NOT directly on patient's skin
Node title (original): 24296 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PH.17 ID: 9007205676800651

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24296
WARNING
Do not place the VCG battery module (VCG or PPU unit) close to the imaging volume.
This may cause image artifacts.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): 24294 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PH.09 ID: 9007205677030795

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24294
WARNING
Avoid cable loops and twisted cables.
Loops can cause excessive heating of the cables which may result in burns upon (full or
partial) contact to patient’s skin.
Special attention is needed when VCG is used with Transmit-Receive coils.
4.5.6 Adjusting the Display of the Physiology Signals

Status: NotReleased
When physiology sensors are applied to a patient, the physiology signals are displayed in the
Physiology Display of the Exam Dashboard.
You adjust the display of the physiology signals in the Physiology Display, in the Extended
Physiology display and in the Physiology Properties window.
Node title (original): 0 to access Physiology Properties ... ID: 116671447179-1
Status: Released
Philips

► To access the Physiology Properties window, right-click the Physiology Display and select
Physiology properties.
► To access the Extended Physiology Display, click any of the physiology signals in the
Physiology Display.
End fragment title: 0 to access Physiology Properties ...
Node title (original): 1 selecting physiology sensor for display ID: 9007315803031307-1
(Ambition Elition) Status: NotReleased
Selecting (or changing) the physiology sensor for display

⊳ In the Physiology Display:
► Right-click the slot reserved for physiology signals, and select: VCG, PPU, Respiratory Belt,
VitalEye (if available) or External.
or External.
End fragment title: 1 selecting physiology sensor for display (Ambition Elition)
Node title (original): 2 entering and updating the heart rate ID: 116619222795-1
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Entering and updating the heart rate

In examinations with VCG or PPU (or a similar External device), you enter the heart rate for the
examination in the Exam Setup. Cardiac synchronization uses this entered heart rate for the
calculation of triggers and no-trigger periods. When the entered heart rate differs too much
from the current heart rate, proper cardiac synchronization is not possible anymore.
► Check the entered heart rate and the current heart rate.
If the difference is large, do any of the following to update the entered hear rate:
• Click Update heart rate.
• Click the text field of the entered heart rate (tooltip: Enter heart rate manually), and
enter the heart rate.
End fragment title: 2 entering and updating the heart rate
Node title (original): 3 adjusting time range ID: 116590622731-1

Status: Released
Adjusting the time range for display

► Right-click the physiology signals, and select Time range.
► Select 1s, 2s, 5s (default), 10s or 25s seconds.
End fragment title: 3 adjusting time range
Node title (original): 4 Adjust Display Options ID: 116666805131-1

Status: Released
Philips

Adjust the Display Options of the Physiology Display
⊳ In the Physiology Properties window:

► Enable or disable to View Gridlines.
► Enable or disable the display on the Magnet Display.
► Set the Scale of the physiology display to AutoScale, or (only available for VCG only) to a
fixed value (in mV).
End fragment title: 4 Adjust Display Options
4.5.7 Checking Connectivity and Battery Level

Status: Released
The physiology sensors work with a battery module. In case of a wireless battery module, the
module needs to connect to a network. For proper functioning of the physiology equipment,
battery level and connectivity are crucial.
You check connectivity and the battery level in the Physiology Display, in the Extended
Physiology Display or in the Physiology Properties window.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Physiology Display.
Node title (original): checking battery status ID: 116667322891

Status: Released
Checking battery status and communication strength

⊳ Only applicable for wireless modules!
⊳ You are in the Physiology Display, in the Extended Physiology Display or in the Physiology
Properties window.
► Visually check the battery status (VCG and/or PPU/Resp).
► Visually check the communication strength (VCG and/or PPU/Resp).
End fragment title: checking battery status
Node title (original): selecting wireless network ID: 116667425803

Status: Released
Selecting the wireless network

For wireless physiology, you need to select the wireless network.
Philips

► To open the Physiology Properties window, right-click the Physiology Display and select
For compatibility with InVivo monitoring equipment (e.g. Expression), ensure that all
components (VCG or PPU battery module, operator's console and InVivo monitor) are on
the same wireless network.
► To select the wireless network, select A, B, C D or E for Network Selection (10)
• Note: Module type and related network selection must be selected if interoperability
with Expression MR400 is provided.
End fragment title: selecting wireless network
4.5.8 Calibrating the VCG signal manually

Affix: Manual VCG Calibration ID: 115358894859
Node title (original): 1 - Starting and executing manual ID: 115359251339

Starting and executing manual calibration
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⊳ You have entered the examination data of the patient.
⊳ You have positioned the patient on the tabletop with nurse call, hearing protection, coil,
VCG, PPU (recommended, but not mandatory) and respiratory belt.
⊳ The tabletop is still outside the bore, since this position is recommended for manual VCG
calibration.
Alternatively you can perform manual VCG calibration inside the bore.
► To open the Physiology Properties window, right-click in the Physiology Display panel and
select Physiology properties.
► Select Manual Calibration.
This setting is persistent over examinations.
• Trigger markers are not yet displayed on the VCG signal in the Physiology Display, but
only when VCG calibration is complete.
• The patient’s measured heart rate is not yet displayed.
► Click Start Calibration.
Alternatively click the yellow blinking measured HR icon in the Physiology

Display.
⇨ A message is displayed indicating that VCG calibration is requested and the duration of the
calibration is 15 seconds.
► Instruct the patient to lie still and to breathe regularly.
► To start VCG calibration, click Proceed.
Alternatively to stop the VCG calibration, click Cancel.
Philips

⇨ During calibration, a message pops up telling that VCG calibration is in progress and
indicating the remaining time.:
VCG calibration in progress, please wait... Time remaining
End fragment title: 1 - Starting and executing manual calibration
Calibration results
Node title (original): Calibration results into ID: 115359978763-1
Status: Released
Upon completion of manual VCG calibration, the results are automatically analyzed and
displayed as:
• Signal Strength (as color scale and expressed in mV)
• Trigger Quality (as color scale).
End fragment title: Calibration results into
Node title (original): 2 - Effects of manual VCG calibration ID: 115359526027

visible in displays Status: Released
The effects of manual VCG calibration are immediately visible:

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• In the Physiology Display

– The results of the calibration are applied immediately to allow visual inspection of the
VCG triggering quality.
– The patient's measured heart rate is displayed.
– Trigger markers are overlaid on the VCG signal.
• In the Extended Physiology Display
– The VCG calibration icon indicates successful manual VCG calibration.
End fragment title: 2 - Effects of manual VCG calibration visible in displays
Node title (original): 3 - performing clinical scans based on ID: 115359388683

calibration results Status: Released
Performing clinical scans based on the calibration results

► Continue depending on the quality of the results.
Philips

Preparing the Examination Travelling to scan-plane
If the results are good, very good or excellent If the results are sub-optimal or bad
► Click Accept. ► Click Cancel to discard the results.

⇨ The results are stored with their tabletop position. Previous results (if available) are applied for this
You can access the stored calibrations results in the scan.
Physiology Properties window.
OR
► To switch between different VCG calibration results
► Take corrective actions. For more information, see
(if available), enable in- or out-bore results for
chapter “Troubleshooting” on page 1400.
display.
► Click Repeat to discard the results and repeat the
► Move the tabletop to the isocenter and start the
calibration.
examination.
► Control if the measured heart rate corresponds with

the entered heart rate in the Exam Setup.
► To update the entered heart rate with the current
heart rate (if needed), click (Update heart

rate).
Alternatively, enter the value in the text field or in
the Exam Setup.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 3 - performing clinical scans based on calibration results
Usage of manual VCG calibration results

Stored manual VCG calibration results are applied until the operator:
• initiates a new VCG-calibration.
• recalls a previously stored VCG-calibration.
• disables manual calibration.
Node title (original): repeating manual VCG calibration ID: 115359113995
Status: Released
Repeating manual VCG calibration

Repeat a manual VCG calibration in case of
• unsatisfactory results of the recent VCG calibration (e.g. low signal, low quality)
• change in patient conditions during the examination (e.g. size of MHD-artifact disturbs
triggering, change in heart rhythm / breathing conditions during stress)
End fragment title: repeating manual VCG calibration
4.6 Travelling to scan-plane

Philips

Travelling to scan-plane Preparing the Examination
4.6.1 Moving patient to isocenter

Status: Released
This workflow describes how to position the patient in the isocenter. This includes the
workflows:
• Raising the tabletop to working level
• Centering by means of the light visor,
• Travelling to scanplane,
• Return to scanplane after moving the tabletop out of the magnet.
• Manual operation.
Raising the Tabletop to Working Level

⊳ The patient is positioned on the tabletop with the coils and all required positioning aids.
The tabletop is still lowered.
► Raise the tumble switch (2) to the Ùp/in' position and hold it there until the tabletop stops
moving.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 409: User Interface Module (UIM) with 'Light visor' button, Tumble switch, 'Travel-to-scanplane' button, 'Manual'
button, Indicator for isocenter positioning.
⇨ The tabletop is now at working level.
Centering by means of the Light Visor
NOTICE
Using the light visor:
• Instruct the patient not to stare into the beam, Class II (FDA) / Class 2 (IEC) laser.
• Use the light visor for its intended use only, avoid unnecessary exposure of the patient to
laser radiation.
• For non-responsive patients (babies, anaesthetized patients) provide adequate protection
to avoid direct laser light in the eyes.
Philips

► Raise and hold the tumble switch again to the Ùp/in' position to horizontally move the
tabletop until the area of interest is short before the magnet bore.
► Press the 'Light visor' button once to switch on the light visor beams.
• The light visor beams indicate the mid-sagittal and a transverse plane.
► Raise the tumble switch to the ’Up/In’ position and hold it until the area of interest lies
within the light visor beams.
• Coil and area of interest do not have to be in the middle of the beams. The closer the
area to be imaged is to the isocenter, the better the image quality.
• lights green when isocenter positioning is possible with the current light visor position.
• flashes green when isocenter positioning is not possible with the current light visor
position.
Reposition the patient feet-first or move him/her closer to the magnet.
The indicator for isocenter positioning
NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Ensure that patients’s hands are on the tabletop and arm supports are used before moving
the tabletop into the magnet to avoid finger pinching.
Fingers can get pinched between tabletop and finger switch plate.
NOTICE
The examination/patient data must be entered before the 'Travel-to-scanplane' button can be
used.
► Press and hold the ’Travel-to-scanplane’ button for about 2 seconds.

Alternatively, briefly press the 'Travel-to-scanplane' button and raise the tumble switch (2)
to the ’Up/In’ position and hold it until the isocenter is reached.
⇨ The tabletop will automatically be moved into the magnet until the isocenter is reached.
• Care should be taken that cables (coils, VCG) or tubes (IV drip, catheter) do not get caught.
• Note that if the ’travel-to-scanplane’ tumble switch is released before table motion has
ceased, the table will stop before reaching the isocenter.
The indicator for isocenter positioning flashes green to indicate that the isocenter has not
been reached yet. In this case, raise the switch again and the tabletop will resume its
predefined travel.
Philips

NOTICE
In order to stop automatic table movement, touch the tumble switch or press the 'Travel-to-
scanplane' button.
Return to scanplane after moving the tabletop out of the magnet

This function makes it possible to return to the original position after the table has been
moved. This feature is especially helpful for studies with contrast agent administration.
► Use the tumble switch to move the table out of the magnet after the scans have been
performed.
► After administering contrast agent, simply press and hold the ’Travel-to-scanplane’ button
(3) again for about 2 seconds.
The tabletop will stop at the previously indicated isocenter position.
NOTICE
Do not move the table right out to the end stop, and do not press the 'Light visor' button.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
These actions would reset the isocenter position.
For manual operation

► Release the tabletop by pressing the ‘Manual’ button.
► Move the tabletop manually towards the magnet until the area of anatomical interest lies
► Press the ‘Manual' button again to lock the tabletop.
► Press the 'Travel-to-scanplane' button.
► Raise the tumble switch to the ’Up/In’ position and hold it until the isocenter is reached.
4.7 Travelling to scan-plane

4.7.1 Moving patient to isocenter

Status: Released
This workflow describes how to position the patient in the isocenter. This includes the
workflows:
• Raising the tabletop to working level
Philips

• Centering by means of the light visor,

• Travelling to scanplane,
• Return to scanplane after moving the tabletop out of the magnet.
• Manual operation.
Related User Interface Module (UIM) Buttons

Node title (original): Ingenia UIM buttons ID: 45036003729689099
Fig. 410: User Interface Module (UIM) at the magnet, with 1: 'Manual' button, 2: Tumble switch, 3:'Light visor'
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

button, 4: 'Travel-to-scanplane' button, 5: Indicator for isocenter positioning.
End fragment title: Ingenia UIM buttons
Node title (original): Optimus UIM buttons ID: 27021605220208139

Fig. 411: User Interface Module (UIM) at the magnet, with 1: 'Manual' button, 2: Tumble switch, 3:'Light visor'
button, 4: 'Travel-to-scanplane' button, 5: Indicator for isocenter positioning.
End fragment title: Optimus UIM buttons
Raising the Tabletop to Working Level

⊳ The patient is positioned on the tabletop with the coils and all required positioning aids.
The tabletop is still lowered.
► Raise the tumble switch (2) to the Ùp/in' position and hold. Release the switch when the
tabletop is in its highest position.
⇨ The tabletop is now at working level.
Node title (original): Ingenia tumble switch behaviour ID: 60856374027

Philips
Status: Released

NOTICE
When holding the tumble switch continuously in the up/in position, the tabletop movement
continues in horizontal direction after reaching its highest position.
End fragment title: Ingenia tumble switch behaviour
Centering by means of the Light Visor

► Raise and hold the tumble switch (2) again to the Ùp/in' position to horizontally move the
tabletop until the area of interest is near the magnet bore or at the magnet bore.
► Press the 'Light visor' button (3) once to switch on the light visor beams.
The light visor beams indicate the mid-sagittal and a transverse plane.
► Raise the tumble switch (2) to the ’Up/In’ position and hold it until the area of interest lies
Coil and area of interest do not have to be in the middle of the beams. The closer the area
to be imaged is to the isocenter, the better the image quality.
The indicator for isocenter positioning (5)
• lights green when isocenter positioning is possible with the current light visor position.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• flashes green when isocenter positioning is not possible with the current light visor
position.
Reposition the patient feet-first or move him/her closer to the magnet.
NOTICE
The examination/patient data must be entered before the 'Travel-to-scanplane' button can be
used.
► Press and hold the ’Travel-to-scanplane’ button (4) for about 2 seconds.
Alternatively, briefly press the 'Travel-to-scanplane' button (4) and raise the tumble switch
(2) to the ’Up/In’ position and hold it until the isocenter is reached.
⇨ The tabletop will automatically be moved into the magnet until the isocenter is reached.
• Care should be taken that cables (coils, VCG) or tubes (IV drip, catheter) do not get caught.
• Note that if the ’travel-to-scanplane’ tumble switch (2) is released before table motion has
ceased, the table will stop before reaching the isocenter.
The indicator for isocenter positioning flashes green to indicate that the isocenter has not
been reached yet. In this case, raise the switch again and the tdfletop will resume its
predefined travel.
Philips

Preparing the Examination Patient Registration
NOTICE
In order to stop automatic table movement, touch { Heuvel, Martina van den, 9/15/2016
12:46:31 PM: delete "in order" for next time!
and check if "touch" needs to be replaced by "push"!!!}the tumble switch or press the 'Travel-
to-scanplane' button.
Return to scanplane after moving the tabletop out of the magnet

This function makes it possible to return to the original position after the table has been
moved. This feature is especially helpful for studies with contrast agent administration.
► Use the tumble switch to move the table out of the magnet after the scans have been
performed.
► After administering contrast agent, simply press and hold the ’Travel-to-scanplane’ button
(4) again for about 2 seconds.
The tabletop will stop at the previously indicated isocenter position.
NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Do not move the table right out to the end stop, and do not press the 'Light visor' button.
These actions would reset the isocenter position.
For manual operation

► Release the tabletop by pressing the ‘Manual’ button (1).
► Move the tabletop manually towards the magnet until the area of anatomical interest lies
► Press the ‘Manual' button (1) again to lock the tabletop.
► Press the 'Travel-to-scanplane' button (4).
► Raise the tumble switch (2) to the ’Up/In’ position and hold it until the isocenter is reached.
4.8 Patient Registration

Status: Released
This section describes the different possibilities of how to enter patient data, or how to select a
patient from RIS for an examination.
Philips

Patient Registration Preparing the Examination
4.8.1 Entering New Patient Data Manually

If you cannot import patients from RIS or other sources, you can also manually enter a new
patient. With this process, the patient data is stored locally on your computer.
Node title (original): Entering new examination data manually ID: 114515448331
Status: Released
►
In the Navigation Bar, select either Patient Dashboard or Patient Directory , then
click New Patient.
⇨ The Prepare tab opens.
► In the Prepare tab, enter the examination data.
• To proceed to the next data field, press Tab or click on a field to make it current. The
pointer identifies the active data field.
• All fields with an asterisk (*) and highlighted in orange are mandatory.
⇨ Patient data is saved automatically and added to the Patient Dashboard, if the preparations
are not completed, or to the Scheduled tab in the Patient Directory, if the patient is ready
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
for scanning.{ Maethger, Maria, 10/27/2020 3:01:13 PM: Is this correct? I cannot really
determine where it goes and why.}
For information on how to add an ExamCard and further patient preparations, see chapter
“Selecting an ExamCard” on page 847.
End fragment title: Entering new examination data manually
Node title (original): 24278 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PA.17.1 ID: 9007220762105227-1

Status: Released
WARNING
Verify that the patient date of birth is filled-in correctly.
Sound levels may be unacceptable for patient of below 3 years of age and a warning is
displayed.
End fragment title: 24278 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PA.17.1

Status: Released
Philips

WARNING
Verify that the patient weight is filled-in correctly.
Incorrect weight leads to incorrect SAR values. SAR values are calculated based on patient
weight.
Node title (original): Format of the new examination data ID: 114515600011
Status: Released
Format of the examination data

Examination data Format / comment
Patient name Maximum of 64 characters.
Patient ID Maximum of 64 characters.
Date of Birth & Age The format of the date is configured at system installation. Correct format for the
date is shown in the input field. Age is calculated based on the entered date of birth
and can not be changed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Sex Male, Female, or Phantom.
Weight & Height The unit of weight and height (kg/cm or lbs/in) is configured at system installation.
Weight value cannot be greater than 400 kg (881 lbs). Hight value cannot be greater
than 300 cm (120 in).
Alternatively enter the patient weight in the ExamCard Properties or at the
VitalScreen if available. { Maethger, Maria, 9/28/2020 10:03:23 AM: Is this correct?
Where to find this?}
Pregnant Yes, No, Possibly.

See .
Implant Yes, No.

See .
SAR mode Normal, 1st Level.

If you select Normal, the SAR for all scans for this patient will be restricted to normal
operating mode.
Medical Alerts Maximum of 64 characters.
Allergies Maximum of 64 characters.
AutoVoice On/Off; and default language or select a different language for this examination only.
Study Comments Use this input field to provide any additional information relevant to this patient (for
example if a patient is claustrophobic).
Study date & time Current date and time is selected by default, select different date and time if the
examination is later.
Philips

Study description Maximum of 64 characters.
Accession number Maximum of 16 characters.

Worklist opens the Worklist (RIS).{ Maethger, Maria, 9/3/2020 2:21:34 PM: Is this
described somewhere?}
Referring physician Maximum of 64 characters.
Performing physician Maximum of 64 characters.
Operator name Maximum of 64 characters.
Operator notes Use this input field to provide any additional information about the course of the
examination.
Node title (original): LE ID: 114515790091

Status: Released
{ Maethger, Maria, 10/6/2020 3:24:28 PM: Is this relevant for Artes?}

* or at the VitalScreen (depending on your system configuration).
End fragment title: LE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
Date format, weight and height unit are set at system installation.
To change the date format, weight or height unit, contact your Philips service engineer.
End fragment title: Format of the new examination data
4.8.2 Using Patient Data from RIS

If the operator console is connected to the Radiology Information System (RIS), you can use
data from the RIS on the operator console.
► In the Patient Directory, click the More tab.
► Select RIS.
⇨ The tab for external sources shows RIS.
⇨ You can use the patient data from RIS for examinations without importing it to the system.
4.8.3 Entering Asian Patient Names

Affix: To do for Hubert? ID: 115164377483
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 12/21/2020 10:13:52 AM: needs to be checked, this is old
information from the previous release }
Philips

If your system is set to Japanese or Simplified Chinese, it is automatically possible to enter

patient names in the selected language. If your system is set to another language, use the
Windows© Input Method Editor (IME) to enter Chinese, Japanese or Korean names.
Refer to the Microsoft (MS) Windows help for more information.
For Asian languages the Patient name line consists of three fields:
• Field 1 (left), name in Latin characters, maximum 64 characters.
• Field 2 (middle), name in ideographic characters, maximum 30 characters.
• Field 3 (right), name written phonetically, maximum 30 characters.
Fig. 412: Example of the 3 input fields for 'Patient name'.
Changing MS Windows input settings

Change the MS Windows input settings when your patient name language is different than your
system language.
1. Press the Windows key on your keyboard to show the Windows task bar.
2. Select Start > Control panel.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

3. Double-click the Region and Language icon.
The Region and Language window is displayed.
4. Click Change keyboards....
NOTICE
Do not change the default input language.
5. In Installed Services:
Check your keyboard layout (Chinese, Japanese or Korean).
If your keyboard layout is not present in the field, click Add...:
• On the ‘Add Input Language’ window select the input language from the top scroll list
and your keyboard layout.
• Confirm by clicking OK.
6. Confirm by clicking OK to close the window..
7. Click OK to close the 'Region and Language' window.
The IME is displayed on your screen. If the IME is not visible press the Windows key on
your keyboard.
8. Select the patient name language on the IME.
9. From the main menu bar, select Patients > New Examination.
10. Enter the patient name as described below.
Philips

Entering Japanese patient names

1. Field 1: Enter the patient name in Latin characters.
2. Field 2 and 3:
• Open the IME (Input Method Editor): right-click in the field and select Open IME or
press Alt + ~.
• Enter the patient name.
• Press the Space Bar, open the scroll list with the arrow-down key. To select the correct
writing:
• Use the arrow keys and press Enter
• Right-click, select the correct writing with the cursor and press Enter.
3. To close the IME, right-click in a field and select Close IME or press Alt + ~.
Reconversion
If an incorrect writing is chosen in field 2 or 3 it can be corrected:
• Highlight the name to be changed.
• Right-click in the field and select Reconversion
• Select the new writing and press Enter.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Entering Chinese names

2. Field 2:
• Right-click in the field to open the IME (Input Method Editor) and select Open IME or
use shortcut keys Alt + ~.
• Enter the required character(s).
• Press Enter or the Space Bar to confirm or press the Arrow-back key to open a list with
proposed characters. Select the correct character and press Enter to confirm.
3. Field 3: Enter the patient name phonetically in Pinyin.
NOTICE
To close the IME, right-click in any field of the IME and select Close IME or use shortcut keys
Alt + ~.
NOTICE
When the IME is active click Ctrl + Space Bar or shift to switch between entering Latin and
ideographic characters.
Philips

Preparing the Examination Adapting patient comfort settings
Entering Korean names

2. Field 2 and 3: Enter the patient name in Korean characters.
4.9 Adapting patient comfort settings

Status: Released
4.9.1 Adjusting Ventilation in Bore

Status: Released
Node title (original): intro bore ventilation ID: 116040117259

Status: Released
The MR system has a recommended ventilation level. This is a static level based on average
scans and system specific conditions.
The system does not change the recommended ventilation level for e.g. high SAR scans,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

examination room temperature and patient weights, clothing and conditions. It is solely the
responsibility of the operator to determine the level of ventilation for different scans and
conditions together with the patient.
End fragment title: intro bore ventilation
The ventilation in the bore can be adjusted from the UIM as well as from the Exam Dashboard
on the console.
Node title (original): Ingenia-Ambition/Elition textual addition ID: 116040211595
Affix: Ingenia - Atlas Status: Released
If your MRI system is equipped with a VitalScreen instead of a UIM, you can adjust the
ventilation in the bore from the VitalScreen and from the console.
End fragment title: Ingenia-Ambition/Elition textual addition
NOTICE
For interventional procedures it is advised to scan with patient ventilation switched off and in
normal operating mode. Recommended examination room temperature is 21 °C (70 °F).
⊳ On the Exam Dashboard:
► Click .
The Ventilation Control opens and shows the available options, where
Philips

Adapting patient comfort settings Preparing the Examination
• 0 (off) means ventilation off.

• 1 and 2 stand for levels below the recommended ventilation level.
• 3 is the recommended ventilation level.
• 4 and 5 are levels above the recommended ventilation level.
► Select a ventilation level.

The Ventilation Control closes.
The button indicates the current ventilation status:
Node title (original): status ventilation in Bore ID: 116543778827-2
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Ventilation is on or above the recommended ventilation level.
• Ventilation is below the recommended ventilation level.
• Ventilation is off.
End fragment title: status ventilation in Bore
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 12/9/2020 10:29:13 AM: next warning: must be updated for Artes,
hopefully it is in PRQ ...}
{ Geenen, Hubert, 12/30/2020 11:39:27 AM: replaced by new PRQ text}
Node title (original): 82799 SYS.Label.IFU.Message.HAZ-RF. ID: 117000147211
12.3_v1 Status: Obsolete
Text displayed in warning dialog
The patient ventilation is below the recommended level.

See Instructions for Use.
Current patient ventilation level
Level 3 or higher is recommended.
Use drop-down menu to modify the patient ventilation level.
Press <Proceed> to proceed with the current patient ventilation level.
Press <Cancel> to cancel the scan.
The Patient Ventilation Warning requires a deliberate action:

• Select the level of patient ventilation from the drop-down list.
Philips

• Click Proceed
The set ventilation level is accepted. The Patient Ventilation Warning disappears and a scan
can be started.
• Click Cancel
The scan is not started. The Patient Ventilation Warning disappears.
End fragment title: 82799 SYS.Label.IFU.Message.HAZ-RF.12.3_v1
NOTICE
Once ventilation is set to a level below the recommended level in an examination, the set level
is accepted for the current scan and all subsequent scans of the current patient.
The Patient Ventilation Warning will not be displayed anymore for this patient.
With a new patient and ventilation set below recommended level, the Patient Ventilation
Warning is displayed again when a scan is started.
4.9.2 Setting AutoVoice on Examination Level

Last Content Modificator: Maethger, Maria ID: 114131600011
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): AutoVoice button ID: 114131794955
Status: Released
AutoVoice button
Use the AutoVoice button in the Exam Dashboard to:
• Enable or disable AutoVoice for the current examination only.
• Change the AutoVoice language for the current examination only.
• Adjust the breathhold settings for the current examination only. Breathhold settings that
can be adapted at examination level are:
– Breathhold guidance (automated or manual)
– Recovery time between successive breathholds in a single scan
AutoVoice button in Prepare tab AutoVoice button in Exam Dashboard
The AutoVoice button can appear in three different states.

Philips

Adapting patient comfort settings Preparing the Examination
AutoVoice is disabled.
AutoVoice is enabled.
AutoVoice is enabled and an instruction is playing.
End fragment title: AutoVoice button
Node title (original): Enable/disable AutoVoice_examination ID: 114132069643

level Status: Released
Enable or disable AutoVoice on examination level

To enable or disable AutoVoice for an individual patient:
► In the Exam Dashboard, click the AutoVoice button.
► Click AutoVoice - On or AutoVoice - Off, depending on the current AutoVoice settings
► Select whether you want AutoVoice on or off for this examination.
If AutoVoice is disabled at system level, but enabled at examination level, the instructions that
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
are selected at system level will be played.

For example:
• At system level both Guide all patients through breathholds and Warn all patients before
table moves are selected but AutoVoice is disabled.
• You then enable AutoVoice at examination level.
• Both the breathhold instruction and the information about table movement will be played
during the examination.
End fragment title: Enable/disable AutoVoice_examination level
Node title (original): Change AutoVoice language_examination ID: 114131932299

Changing AutoVoice language at examination level

To change the AutoVoice language for an individual patient:
► In the Exam Dashboard, click the AutoVoice drop-down menu.
• Click on a frequently used language, listed in the drop-down menu.
• Click Select Language and select a language from the displayed list of languages.
The selected language is used for the current examination only. For subsequent examinations,
the system will use the default language again.
End fragment title: Change AutoVoice language_examination level
Node title (original): AV breathhold guidance_examination ID: 114132206987

Philips

Setting breathhold guidance at examination level

The AutoVoice button allows you to set Breath hold guidance to Automated or Manual. The
current selection for breathhold guidance is shown in the AutoVoice button drop-down menu.
• Automated: The system gives the breathhold instructions to the patient without your input.
If the respiratory belt is connected, initiation of the instructions is based on the signal from
the respiratory belt. Once the breathhold instruction is played, the system starts the scan
automatically.
• Manual: a pop-window appears before the start of the breathhold (see chapter “Breathhold
interaction window in the Exam Dashboard” on page 846). You can provide the
instruction yourself or let AutoVoice play an instruction. Once the patient has started the
breathhold, you are required to manually initiate the scan.
To select breathhold guidance mode:
• In the Exam Dashboard, click the AutoVoice drop-down menu.
• In the Prepare tab, click the AutoVoice drop-down menu.
► In the sub-area Breath hold guidance{ Maethger, Maria, 8/24/2020 1:34:00 PM: Wrong
spelling in UI: "Breath hold guidance"}, select either Automated or Manual
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The selected Breathhold guidance mode is applied to the whole examination for the current
patient but can be changed between scans of an examination, if required.
When AutoVoice is disabled at system level but enabled in the Exam Dashboard, breathhold
guidance will automatically be set to Manual.
End fragment title: AV breathhold guidance_examination level
Node title (original): AV Recovery time_examination level ID: 114132344331

Status: Released
Setting recovery time at examination level

Some patients require a longer or shorter period of time to recover between breathholds, than
the time set at system level. For these patients, you can set the recovery time on an individual
basis. To do so:
► In the Exam Dashboard, click the AutoVoice drop-down menu.
► Select the preferred Recovery time from the list (5–30 seconds).
End fragment title: AV Recovery time_examination level
Node title (original): Breathhold interaction window ID: 114132481675

Status: Released
Breathhold interaction window in the Exam Dashboard

The Breathhold interaction window appears in the Exam Dashboard when:
• A breathhold scan is started with AutoVoice disabled.
• Breathhold guidance is set to Manual.
You can choose to give the breathhold instruction yourself or to use one of the pre-recorded
breathhold instructions for this scan.
Philips

ExamCard Selection Preparing the Examination
To give the breathhold instruction yourself:

► Provide the breathhold instruction by using the operator-patient intercom.
► Once the patient holds his/her breath, click Resume.
To use one of the pre-recorded breathhold instructions for this scan:
► Click the Play button on the instruction you want to use (direct, normal or long).
{ Maethger, Maria, 10/30/2020 8:58:42 AM: Is "direct, normal, long" UI text?}
► Once the patient holds his/her breath, click Resume.
End fragment title: Breathhold interaction window
4.10 ExamCard Selection

Status: Released
You select an ExamCard for your convenience, or as an advanced operator you create an
ExamCard from scan protocols from scratch.
4.10.1 Selecting an ExamCard

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Ideally you select an ExamCard for the anatomy of interest

• Which contains all the scan protocols needed.
• Which only needs graphical planning of the stacks.
• Which does not need further modifications.
Checking examination and patient data

► Before you select the ExamCard, first check that the examination data is correct in the
Prepare tab.
If you need to modify patient data, see .
Status: Released
Philips

Preparing the Examination ExamCard Selection
WARNING
Verify that the patient date of birth is filled-in correctly.
Sound levels may be unacceptable for patient of below 3 years of age and a warning is
displayed.

Status: Released
WARNING
Verify that the patient weight is filled-in correctly.
Incorrect weight leads to incorrect SAR values. SAR values are calculated based on patient
weight.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

ExamCard Selection
The feature ExamAssist supports you in finding the correct ExamCard easily. Based on the RIS
code of your examination, the most-suited ExamCards are proposed to you automatically.
ExamAssist removes the need of browsing to the required ExamCard.
1. Select an ExamCard database from the drop-down list: Philips or Hospital.
2. To browse to the required ExamCard, select a folder of the required anatomy and anatomic
region.
⇨ The list of ExamCards in this folder shows up.
ExamCards are indicated by the ExamCard icon: .

3. To select the ExamCard for the examination, do any of the following:
• Double-click the ExamCard.
• Hover over the ExamCard, then click the blue plus icon Add ExamCard.
• Drag and drop the ExamCard into the Exam Overview.
⇨ The ExamCard with its scan items is displayed in the Exam Overview.
⇨ The Exam Setup pops up and provides guidance on how to position the patient with the
selected ExamCard.
⇨ You can adapt the Exam Setup now, if needed. Or you can start the examination.
Philips

Adapting the Exam Setup Preparing the Examination
4.10.2 Selecting Multiple Scan Protocols

Status: Released
You select multiple scan protocols from the Hospital or Philips ExamCard database.
1. Select an ExamCard database from the drop-down list: Philips or Hospital.
2. To browse to the required scan protocols, select a folder of the required anatomy,
anatomic region and type of scan (for example Survey, T1W, T2W).
⇨ The list of scan protocols in this folder shows up.
Scan protocols are indicated by the scan protocol icon: .

3. To select the scan protocol for the examination, do any of the following:
Repeat this step as often as needed for all scan protocols.
• Double-click the scan protocol.
• Hover over the scan protocol, then click the blue plus icon .
• Drag and drop the scan protocol into the Exam Overview.
⇨ The scan protocols are displayed in the Exam Overview.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⇨ In the Exam Overview, you can save the scan protocols as an ExamCard.
⇨ The Exam Setup pops up and provides guidance on how to position the patient with the
selected scan protocol.
⇨ You can adapt the Exam Setup now, if needed. Or you start the examination.
4.11 Adapting the Exam Setup

Status: NotReleased
This section provides you with information about the Exam Setup and about how to change the
settings.
4.11.1 Functional Description of the Exam Setup

Affix: Exam Setup ID: 116877195403
The Exam Setup provides you with generic ExamCard properties such as patient positioning and
heart rate.
These ExamCard properties are saved with the ExamCard. When you select an ExamCard, the
ExamCard properties are retrieved from the ExamCard and displayed in the Exam Setup. You
can leave the ExamCard properties unchanged, or you can modify them.
The Exam Setup allows you
Philips

Preparing the Examination Adapting the Exam Setup
• To specify the properties of the Exam Setup once for the complete ExamCard.
These settings are valid for all ExamCard items. The settings are saved with the ExamCard.
• To specify the positioning-related ExamCard properties graphically.
• To specify the other ExamCard properties numerically, or you select the values from a drop-
down menu.
Node title (original): 01-accessing the Exam Setup ID: 116877615371

Status: Released
Accessing the Exam Setup

You access the Exam Setup in two different ways:
1. In the Exam Overview, click and then select Exam Setup.

2. The Exam Setup opens automatically when you select an ExamCard.
End fragment title: 01-accessing the Exam Setup
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4.11.2 Listed ExamCard Properties
Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): intro EC Properties ID: 117411125003-1

Status: Released
When you select an ExamCard, the ExamCard properties are retrieved from the ExamCard and
displayed in the Exam Setup.
End fragment title: intro EC Properties
Node title (original): 01-EC property Anatomy ID: 116880927243

Status: Released
Philips

Anatomy
Possible values Description
DICOM values in alphabetical The value of this parameter is used:

order: for example • To display the images correctly.
• Abdomen For more information, see chapter “Functional Description” on page 490.
• Head • To select the default Review or Analysis packages.
End fragment title: 01-EC property Anatomy
Node title (original): 02-EC property Anatomic region ID: 116880966667

Status: Released
Anatomic Region
DICOM values in alphabetical The value of this parameter is used:

order: for example • To display the images correctly.
• Brain For more information, see chapter “Functional Description” on page 490.
• Circle of Willis • To select the default Review or Analysis packages.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 02-EC property Anatomic region
Node title (original): 03-EC property Laterality ID: 116880967691

Status: Released
Laterality
• Left This parameter is primarily used for paired anatomies such as knee, shoulder,
• Right ankle, and so on. The laterality value is used by PACS systems.
• Unpaired • Left or Right - To be used for left or right joint.
• Both • Unpaired - To be used for unpaired anatomies, for example in abdomen

examinations.
• Mixed
• Both - To be used when both joints are scanned within one scan.
• Mixed - To be used when both joints are scanned within one ExamCard, but
in different scans.
End fragment title: 03-EC property Laterality
Node title (original): 04-EC property Heart rate ID: 116880992651

Status: Released
Philips

Heart rate (beats/min) [bpm]

<numerical value: beats per The heart rate value you enter here is used for cardiac synchronization. You can
minute> update the value in the Exam Dashboard during the examination if necessary.
End fragment title: 04-EC property Heart rate
Node title (original): 05-EC property Align Overlap ID: 116880995851

Status: Released
Align Overlap (mm)

<numerical value> Align Overlap (mm) is needed for multistation scans such as Whole body.
• For sagittal and coronal scan protocols, use a 30 mm overlap between the
stations.
• For transverse scan protocols, change Align Overlap (mm) to 0 prior to
scanning (to avoid that the transverse scans are scanned with 30 mm
overlap).
End fragment title: 05-EC property Align Overlap
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): 06-EC property GeoLink Propagation ID: 116880999051
Status: Released
Philips

GeoLink propagation
• No (Default) GeoLink propagation propagates the SmartLine processing steps to all scans of
• Yes the same GeoLink.
Use case 1: Running a SmartLine postprocessing step

• With GeoLink propagation set to No, a SmartLine postprocessing step is
only added to the current scan.
• With GeoLink propagation set to Yes, a SmartLine postprocessing step is
added to all geo-linked scans (scans with the same GeoLink as the current
scan).
Use case 2: Loading imaging series into Review packages (for

example, VolumeView)
• With GeoLink propagation set to No, only the current imaging series is
loaded into these packages.
• With GeoLink propagation set to Yes, all geo-linked imaging series (scans
with the same GeoLink as the current scan) are loaded into these packages.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
For more information about GeoLinks, see GeoLinks.

For more information about SmartLine processing, see SmartLine processing.
End fragment title: 06-EC property GeoLink Propagation
Node title (original): 07-EC property Disengage Posterior coil ID: 9007316135743499
Status: NotReleased
Disengage posterior coil

• No • No means that the posterior coil moves with the connected coil into the
• Yes bore.
• Yes means that the posterior coil is disengaged. A Lock icon on the Coils tab
indicates that the posterior coil is hold back on its home position outside
the bore.
– You use this scenario if you want to force the posterior coil to remain
on its home position outside the bore.
– If the posterior coil is in conflict with other connected coils, and if the
table is completely moved out, the MR system automatically holds
back the posterior coil (Disengage posterior coil = Yes).
– For a few coils, Yes is the mandatory setting.
Philips

Error handling
In case of errors, you will be asked to move the table completely out to disengage the posterior
coil.
End fragment title: 07-EC property Disengage Posterior coil
Node title (original): 08-EC property Table Usage ID: 116881031307

Status: Released
Table Usage
• Use { Heuvel, Martina van den, 12/22/2020 12:33:40 PM: info

• Ignore needed}
End fragment title: 08-EC property Table Usage
Node title (original): 09-EC property Docking mode ID: 116881034507

Status: Released
Docking mode
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Front This parameter applies for patient trolleys.{ Heuvel, Martina van den,
• Rear 12/22/2020 12:33:40 PM: more info needed}
End fragment title: 09-EC property Docking mode
Node title (original): 10-EC property RF Excitation mode ID: 116881036043

Status: Released
RF Excitation mode
• On { Heuvel, Martina van den, 12/22/2020 12:33:40 PM: no idea}

• Off
End fragment title: 10-EC property RF Excitation mode
4.11.3 Graphical ExamCard Properties

Status: Released
The Exam Setup automatically displays the recommended positioning for the selected
ExamCard regarding Patient Orientation and Patient Position.
• In general, follow these recommendations and position the patient accordingly.
• Only if the medical state of the patient does not allow this recommended positioning,
position the patient in a different way and modify the settings.
Philips

Node title (original): 1 Patient Orientation ID: 116882865163

Status: Released
Patient Orientation
The value of this parameter is used to display the images correctly.
Possible values are: Head-First and Feet-First.
End fragment title: 1 Patient Orientation
Node title (original): 2 Patient Position ID: 116882868747

Status: Released
Patient Position
The value of this parameter is used to display the images correctly. Possible values are:
• For all kinds of examinations, except for elbow, hand, and wrist:
– Supine
– Prone
– DecubitusRight
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
– DecubitusLeft
• For elbow, hand and wrist:
– Neutral
– Endorotation
– Exorotation
– Superman
End fragment title: 2 Patient Position
Example Images
Head-first Feet-first Head-first Feet-first Head-first Head-first
Supine Supine Prone Prone Decubitus Left Decubitus Right
Philips

Head-first Head-first Head-first Head-first Head-first Head-first

Supine Supine Supine Prone Prone Supine
Endorotation Exorotation Neutral Neutral Superman Superman
Examination of Examination of Examination of Examination of Examination of Examination of
the right hand or the right hand or the right hand or the left hand or the right hand or the right hand or
wrist wrist wrist wrist wrist wrist
4.11.4 Adjusting the ExamCard Properties
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Node title (original): intro EC Properties ID: 117411125003-2

Status: Released
When you select an ExamCard, the ExamCard properties are retrieved from the ExamCard and
displayed in the Exam Setup.
End fragment title: intro EC Properties
► To change any of the listed properties, do any of the following:

• Enter another value for any of the listed properties.
• Select another value from the drop-down list.
► To change any of the graphical properties, do any of the following:
• To change the Patient Orientation from Head-First to Feet-First and vice versa, click
.
• To change the Patient Position from Supine, to Prone, or DecubitusRight or
DecubitusLeft, click or , if needed repeatedly.

• To change the orientation of the hand for hand and wrist examinations, click the hand
buttons.
Neutral, Endorotation , Exorotation or Superman (overhead) .

Philips

Depending on the current Patient Position and Patient Orientation, the hand buttons change
and possibly represent different hand positions. Check out the tooltips of the hand buttons for
guidance.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

Starting, Running and Stopping Performing the Examination
5 Performing the Examination

Status: NotReleased
5.1 Starting, Running and Stopping

Status: Released
5.1.1 Starting and Running the Examination

Status: Released
When you start the examination, the examination progresses into the Plan task. The Exam
Overview and the Exam Dashboard are displayed which support you in your workflow and
provide you with important information about the examination.
⊳ Prerequisite: The scan protocols for the selected examination are available in the Exam
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Overview.
⊳ Prerequisite: The patient is positioned in the isocenter and ready for the examination.
► Click Start Exam.
► Click Start to start the survey.
⇨ The survey and the reference scans start. Once the survey is completed, the survey images
show up in the Plan viewports.
► To plan the scan protocols on the survey images, click Plan. When planning of a geometry is
completed, click Accept.
For information about planning, see the Planning chapter.
► Click Start to start the scan protocols which are ready to run.
► To load images of finished scans, drag and drop the imaging series from the Exam Overview
into the Plan viewports.
► To plan the remaining scan protocols, click Plan. When planning of a geometry is
completed, click Accept.
Repeat this step as often as needed.
► Click Start to start the scan protocols which are ready to run.
► Inspect the imaging series and check their image quality and diagnostic value.
► When the scan protocols are completed, release the patient from the tabletop and click
Release Patient.
► When the examination is complete, click Complete Exam to mark it as complete on the RIS.
Philips

Performing the Examination Starting, Running and Stopping
Node title (original): Tabletop movement ID: 117433489291

Status: Released
Tabletop movement during scanning

If an ExamCard issue requires tabletop movement for optimum isocenter positioning, a
message will pop up asking if tabletop movement can be performed. If this is confirmed,
another message will pop up indicating that the tabletop is moving automatically. In order to
stop this automatic tabletop movement, click Stop.
Moving TableTop
The tabletop is moving automatically.
• Stop
For more information, see Safety chapter.

End fragment title: Tabletop movement
5.1.2 Discontinuing an Examination

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The examination is ready to run: The examination data are entered, the scan protocols are
selected.
But still you have to discontinue the examination.
► Select Discontinue Exam from the drop-down list of the workflow state button.
You confirm that the current exam is to be discontinued. Archiving is started for all series
that are marked for archive, but have not been archived yet. A MPPS Discontinue message
is sent to RIS along with the reason for discontinuation.
► Select a reason for discontinuation from the drop-down list. Then click Discontinue.
5.1.3 Stopping reconstruction

Status: Released
Image reconstruction takes place during and at the end of every scan. Under certain
circumstances image reconstruction blocks scanning of the next scans, since it uses scan
resources.
You only stop the reconstruction when reconstruction is not beneficial and hinders your
workflow:
Philips

Starting, Running and Stopping Performing the Examination
Scenario Consequences
• You stop a scan. Acquisition is not Acquisition data are partially or completely lost.
completed. To obtain all images, rescanning is needed.
Reconstruction of the partially acquired • Depending on the scan type and the moment that you stop the
data is still ongoing. reconstruction, some images might be available in the
• You stop the reconstruction. examination database, for example the first dynamic series of a
dynamic scan.
• A scan aborts. Acquisition is not
• A message in the scanner status bar informs you about the
completed.
status.
Reconstruction of the partially acquired
data is still ongoing.
If the imaging parameter Save raw data is enabled, you can perform
• You stop the reconstruction.
delayed reconstruction to calculate as many images as possible of
the partially acquired data.
• The acquisition of the current scan is Acquisition data are partially or completely lost.
completed. To obtain all images, rescanning is needed.
The reconstruction is ongoing, but takes • Depending on the scan type and the moment that you stop the
very long and hinders the next scan to reconstruction, some images might be available in the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
start. examination database, for example the first dynamic series of a

• You stop the reconstruction. dynamic scan.
• A message in the scanner status bar informs you about the
status.
To prevent rescanning of the scans where you foresee long

reconstruction times:
• enable the imaging parameter Save raw data,
• and perform delayed reconstruction when the acquisition is
completed, see .
How do you stop the reconstruction?

► Right-click on the ExamCard item (scan protocol) in the List View.
► Click Stop reconstruction.
• When EC items are grouped, you can only stop the reconstruction of single EC items of
this group, when the acquisition of the group is completed.
• You cannot stop suspended scans.
⇨ Stop reconstruction switches off the automatic start of the next scans.
5.1.4 Repeating Prescans of the Current ExamCard

Status: Released
Philips

Performing the Examination Preparation Phases
Prescans are automatically performed in the course of an examination. However, in some cases
it might be useful to repeat the prescans, e.g. the automatically performed B1 calibration.
Repeat Prescans allows to repeat previously performed prescans for the current ExamCard.
⊳ You are in the Scan Overview.
► Click More Options. Then select Repeat Prescans.
5.2 Preparation Phases

Status: NotReleased
5.2.1 B0 Shimming
Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): Intro- purpose, prep phase - B0 shimming ID: 119260764683
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
B0 shimming is used to optimize the B0 magnetic field homogeneity:

Shimming involves a preparation phase or a B0 prescan in which small inhomogeneities in the
anatomy are measured and corrected.
End fragment title: Intro- purpose, prep phase - B0 shimming
Node title (original): applications shim ID: 119258208523

Status: Released
Applications
• Fat- or water-suppressed scans.
– For optimal fat or water suppression, the homogeneity should be better than 3.4 ppm
(frequency difference water and fat) over the volume of interest.
• Scans with large offcenters
• EPI and GRASE sequences
• Balanced FFE / TFE
End fragment title: applications shim
Node title (original): Overview shimming methods ID: 119260766219

Status: Released
Overview of Shimming Methods

Depending on the configuration of your MRI system and depending on the selected scan type
(MR imaging or MR spectroscopy), not all shim methods are available.
Node title (original): Default shim method ID: 118787665035
Philips
Status: Released

Preparation Phases Performing the Examination
Default
Automatic shimming is automatically performed in scans utilizing:
• Water or fat suppression techniques (SPIR, SPAIR, and ProSet), and/or
• Balanced FFE / TFE.
Only first order shim corrections are performed.
In all other kinds of scans, shimming is not performed.
End fragment title: Default shim method
Node title (original): Auto shim method ID: 118787666571

Status: Released
Auto
Auto(matic) shimming is done over the whole volume representing the stacks in a scan.
• In multistack scans, autoshim is applied separately to each stack.
• Autoshim cannot be combined with radial stacks.
• Only first order shim corrections are performed.
End fragment title: Auto shim method
Node title (original): Volume shim method ID: 118787668107

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Volume
Volume shimming allows to draw a user defined volume targeting first order optimization to
that region, no matter how many stacks are defined.
• During planning, a shim volume VOI appears inside the FOV frame. The size and shape of
this VOI can be manipulated and optimized.
• Volume shimming can be combined with parallel and radial stacks.
• Only first order shim corrections are performed.
End fragment title: Volume shim method
Node title (original): SmartShim shim method ID: 118787925643

Status: Released
SmartShim
SmartShim performs an image-based B0 shim, based on an automatically inserted B0-Prescan.
• On 3.0T systems, higher order shim correction (second order) is applied.
(Most 3.0T systems are equipped with the higher order shim hardware).
In multistack scans, only first order shim corrections (linear) are applied.
• On 1.5T systems, only first order shim corrections (linear) are applied.
• Shimming is performed over the whole imaging volume. A volume shim box is not applied
for the B0 shim.
• SmartShim is only recommended for whole body diffusion imaging (DWIBS).
Philips

Performing the Examination Preparation Phases
• When SmartShim is combined with another technique also requiring a B0-Prescan, an extra
prescan is inserted.
End fragment title: SmartShim shim method
Node title (original): smartBreast shim method ID: 118787927179

Status: Released
SmartBreast
SmartBreast is an Image Based shimming technique. The shim volume is selected based on a
"Smart" (derived from SmartExam) segmentation. This setting is applicable for SmartExam
Breast examinations.
End fragment title: smartBreast shim method
Node title (original): IB volume shim method ID: 118787928715

Status: Released
IB-volume
IB-volume is an Image Based shimming technique.
• Shimming is only performed in the user defined shim volume.
• Higher order shim correction (second order) is applied on 3.0T systems.
(most 3.0 T systems are equipped with the higher order shim hardware).
• On 1.5T systems, only first order shim corrections (linear) are applied.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• A B0 field map calibration scan is required for IB-volume. (B0 field map = calibrate)
End fragment title: IB volume shim method
Node title (original): PB auto shim method ID: 118787999371

Status: Released
Node title (original): PB-auto subheading ID: 120120270219

Status: Released
PB-auto
End fragment title: PB-auto subheading
Node title (original): Uses multip PB acquisitions ID: 120102185355-1

Status: Released
Uses multiple pencil beam acquisitions to compute shim values.

End fragment title: Uses multip PB acquisitions
• Higher order correction (first and second order) is possible.

• A separate shim volume is not defined. Optimization is targeted on the center of the
Spectro VOI.
End fragment title: PB auto shim method
Node title (original): PB volume shim method MRS ID: 118788000907

Status: Released
Node title (original): PB-volume subheading ID: 120120271755

Status: Released
PB-volume
End fragment title: PB-volume subheading
Node title (original): Uses multip PB acquisitions ID: 120102185355-2

Status: Released
Philips

Preparation Phases Performing the Examination
Uses multiple pencil beam acquisitions to compute shim values.

End fragment title: Uses multip PB acquisitions
• Higher order correction (first and second order) is possible.

• Optimization is targeted on the center of the planned shim volume.
End fragment title: PB volume shim method MRS
For MRI only:

• PB volume shimming can be combined with parallel and radial stacks.
• PB volume shimming for MRI is available on 3.0T systems only.
Node title (original): Iterative VOI shim method ID: 118788053643
Status: Released
Node title (original): iterative VOI subheading ID: 120120273291

Status: Released
Iterative VOI
End fragment title: iterative VOI subheading
Node title (original): Uses an interative shimming algorithm ... ID: 120102189451-1
Status: Released
Uses an iterative shimming algorithm optimizing the T2-decay of the water FID.
End fragment title: Uses an interative shimming algorithm ...
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• The FID signal of unsuppressed water is measured, and field homogeneity is optimized using
the gradient coils.
• A separate shim volume is not defined. Optimization is targeted on the center of the
Spectro VOI.
End fragment title: Iterative VOI shim method
Node title (original): Iterative Volume shim method ID: 118787996171

Status: Released
Node title (original): iterative volume subheading ID: 120120274827

Status: Released
Iterative volume
End fragment title: iterative volume subheading
Node title (original): Uses an interative shimming algorithm ... ID: 120102189451-2
Status: Released
Uses an iterative shimming algorithm optimizing the T2-decay of the water FID.
End fragment title: Uses an interative shimming algorithm ...
• The FID signal of unsuppressed water is measured, and field homogeneity is optimized using
the gradient coils.
• Optimization is targeted on the center of the planned shim volume.
End fragment title: Iterative Volume shim method
End fragment title: Overview shimming methods
Node title (original): More info with reference to Shim ID: 119260767243
parameter Status: Released
Philips

Performing the Examination Raw Data Acquisition and Delayed Reconstruction
More information
• In Online Help (F1): Enabling shimming
End fragment title: More info with reference to Shim parameter
5.3 Raw Data Acquisition and Delayed Reconstruction

Status: Released
5.3.1 Delayed Reconstruction

Status: Released
In general, MRI scans are automatically reconstructed immediately after their acquisition.
However the automatic reconstruction can be switched off, and a manual reconstruction can be
performed instead.
Such a delayed reconstruction can be performed at anytime, and the reconstruction
parameters can be defined according to the user's personal preference. This offers the
possibility to generate multiple imaging series with different reconstruction settings and
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

compare them on completion.
Parameters that can be defined during the delayed reconstruction are e.g. :
• Uniformity,
• Recon voxel size,
• Reconstruction matrix,
• Preset window contrast,
• Multichannel images.
Delayed reconstruction is integrated in the Exam Overview.
A prerequisite for delayed reconstruction is that raw data are saved during scanning.
5.3.2 Performing Delayed Reconstruction of Raw Data

Status: Released
This workflow applies for scans where raw data were acquired.
⊳ The parameter Save raw data (Postproc tab of the Advanced Parameters) was set to Yes.
► After scan completion, right-click on the scan in the Exam Overview.
► Right-click the ExamCard item, then select Reconstruction and Delayed Reconstruction.
A Delayed Reconstruction processing step is automatically added to the current ExamCard
under the corresponding scan.
► Rename the delayed recon processing step so that it can easily be identified.
Philips

Display of Physiology Signals and Scan Preview Performing the Examination
► Double-click the delayed recon processing step.

The Delayed Recon Parameter Editor opens with the subset of parameters available for
delayed reconstruction.
► Edit the parameters as usual in the ExamCard environment.
The user interface is identical to the Advanced Parameters Editor.
► Click Accept to confirm the parameters.
► To start the reconstruction, click Pause before scan in the delayed recon processing step.
Delayed reconstruction is performed as background process and does not affect the
performance of the system, e.g. the acquisition of further scans.
Reuse of Delayed Reconstruction processing steps

Once a Delayed Reconstruction processing step is defined, it can easily be reused:
• Simply drag and drop it to another scan in the same ExamCard.
• Or right-click on the source to copy this step,
and then right-click on the destination scan to paste it.
Note that the result may depend on the source data.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
It is recommended to rename copied processing steps immediately for ease of identification.
NOTICE
You can also copy/paste or drag/drop a delayed recon processing step to another ExamCard in
the Hospital dababase.
5.4 Display of Physiology Signals and Scan Preview

Status: NotReleased
5.4.1 Changing the Display of Scan Preview

Status: Released
By default, Scan Preview shows up in minimized view, and displays an image of the scan
currently in progress.
Node title (original): 1 minimizing and maximizing Scan Preview ID: 116541980555
Status: Released
Minimizing and maximizing Scan Preview

► To maximize the Scan Preview, double-click the minimized view.
Philips
► To resize the maximized Scan Preview, drag its edges and corners.

Performing the Examination Display of Physiology Signals and Scan Preview
► To move the maximized Scan Preview, drag its header.
► To minimize the maximized Scan Preview, click .

End fragment title: 1 minimizing and maximizing Scan Preview
Node title (original): 2 changing image display ID: 116542037387

Status: Released
Changing the image display in Scan Preview
► To refresh the Scan Preview with the latest reconstructed images, click Go Live.
The text Live indicates that Scan Preview is up to date.
► To display the next imaging series (in maximized view only), click .
To display the previous imaging series (in maximized view only), click .
In examinations which make use of Fast next scan, the and button are not
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

available.
Just as in the Review tab, you can zoom, pan, window and scroll through images, and reset the
settings if needed.
End fragment title: 2 changing image display
5.4.2 Adjusting the Display of the Physiology Signals

Status: NotReleased
When physiology sensors are applied to a patient, the physiology signals are displayed in the
Physiology Display of the Exam Dashboard.
You adjust the display of the physiology signals in the Physiology Display, in the Extended
Physiology display and in the Physiology Properties window.
Status: Released
Physiology Display.
Node title (original): 1 selecting physiology sensor for display ID: 9007315803031307-2
(Ambition Elition) Status: NotReleased
Philips

Display of Physiology Signals and Scan Preview Performing the Examination
Selecting (or changing) the physiology sensor for display

VitalEye (if available) or External.
or External.
End fragment title: 1 selecting physiology sensor for display (Ambition Elition)
Node title (original): 2 entering and updating the heart rate ID: 116619222795-2
Status: Released
Entering and updating the heart rate

In examinations with VCG or PPU (or a similar External device), you enter the heart rate for the
examination in the Exam Setup. Cardiac synchronization uses this entered heart rate for the
calculation of triggers and no-trigger periods. When the entered heart rate differs too much
from the current heart rate, proper cardiac synchronization is not possible anymore.
► Check the entered heart rate and the current heart rate.
If the difference is large, do any of the following to update the entered hear rate:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Click Update heart rate.

• Click the text field of the entered heart rate (tooltip: Enter heart rate manually), and
enter the heart rate.
End fragment title: 2 entering and updating the heart rate
Node title (original): 3 adjusting time range ID: 116590622731-2

Status: Released
Adjusting the time range for display

► Right-click the physiology signals, and select Time range.
► Select 1s, 2s, 5s (default), 10s or 25s seconds.
End fragment title: 3 adjusting time range
Node title (original): 4 Adjust Display Options ID: 116666805131-2

Status: Released
Adjust the Display Options of the Physiology Display
⊳ In the Physiology Properties window:

► Enable or disable to View Gridlines.
► Enable or disable the display on the Magnet Display.
Philips

Performing the Examination Showing Information and Postprocessing Steps
► Set the Scale of the physiology display to AutoScale, or (only available for VCG only) to a
fixed value (in mV).
End fragment title: 4 Adjust Display Options
5.5 Showing Information and Postprocessing Steps

Status: Released
5.5.1 Showing the Postprocessing Steps of the Current ExamCard

Status: Released
You can get an overview of all postprocessing steps within an examination.

► Click Show all postprocessing steps.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨ All postprocessing steps are displayed per EC item above the Exam Overview.
5.5.2 Displaying the Information for a Scan Item or ExamCard

Status: Released
Philips ExamCards and scan protocols are delivered with application information in English
language.
► To display this information, click More Options. Then select Info.
5.6 Customizing the Examination

Status: NotReleased
5.6.1 Changing Scan Items during Scanning

Status: Released
Philips

Customizing the Examination Performing the Examination
5.6.1.1 Selecting a Scan Item in the Exam Overview

Status: Released
You can only modify a scan item when you select it first. You can select multiple scan items if
needed.
► To select one scan item, click the scan item.
► To select multiple consecutive scan items, pres and hold Shift. Then drag over the scan
items.
► To select multiple individual scan items, press and hold Ctrl. Then click the scan items.
► To deselect, click the selected items.
5.6.1.2 Cutting, Copying and Pasting Scan Items

Status: Released

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⊳ Prerequisite: One or more scan item(s) are selected.

► To copy a scan item, do any of the following:
• Press Ctrl+C.
• Right-click the scan item, select Copy.
⇨ The scan item is copied to the Clipboard.
► To cut a scan item, do any of the following:
• Press Ctrl+X.
• Right-click the scan item, select Cut.
⇨ The scan item is copied to the Clipboard, but removed from the Scan Overview.
► To paste a scan item from the Clipboard, do any of the following:
• Press Ctrl+V.
• Right-click the scan item, select Paste.
⇨ The item is moved from the clipboard to the current examination (Scan Overview). It will be
inserted after the currently selected item.
5.6.1.3 Duplicating Scan Items

Status: Released
There is a better option to duplicate scan items than to Copy and Paste scan items.
Philips

Performing the Examination Customizing the Examination

► To duplicate a scan item, press and hold Ctrl. Then drag the scan item to another location.
⇨ A duplicate is available now at this location.
5.6.1.4 Moving Scan Items

Status: Released
You can change the order of scan items.

► To move an item, simply drag the item to the desired position.
Items can only be moved if they are not yet executed (prepared, running, in reconstruction or
similar).
Otherwise a copy will be created.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

5.6.1.5 Deleting Scan Items
Status: Released

► To delete a scan item, do any of the following:
• Press the Delete key.
• Right-click the scan item, then selecte Delete.
⇨ The item is deleted from the current ExamCard.
Items can only be deleted if they are not yet executed (prepared, running, in reconstruction or
similar).
5.6.2 Managing Geometry of Scan Items

Status: NotReleased
5.6.2.1 Assigning a Scan Geometry to a Scan Item

Status: Released
The Geoname is used to simplify planning.

Philips

Node title (original): Geoname sharing ID: 117433704843-1

Status: Released
Scans sharing the same Geoname by default have:

• The same slice orientation.
• The same number of stacks.
• Each stack with identical angulations and offcenters.
End fragment title: Geoname sharing

► To assign a Geoname to a scan item, right-click the scan item. Then select a Geoname from
the list.
► To remove a Geoname from a scan item, right-click the scan item. Then select No Geoname
from the list.
For survey scans, the geometry name can be deleted. Doing so indicates that the scan does
not need further planning and is ready to run.
5.6.2.2 Applying a GeoLink

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
The GeoLink (Geometry Link) between scans includes that scans with different geometry
parameters are linked to each other. The linked protocols are combined within a geometrically
linked group.
A GeoLink
• Groups scans that are planned at once within Graphical PlanScan.
• Aligns scans within the GeoLink group (which is applied constantly when planning the
GeoLink until it is switched off).
• Includes that all scans within a geometrically linked group get the same scan number.
• Is only possible for scans of the same scan type.
• Can be defined only once under a specified name.
For example, if a scan of a GeoLink is stopped or aborted, the remaining scans of this same
link have to be updated to another link name.
Typical applications are examinations with a large Field-of-View in Feet-Head direction, such as
MobiFlex and whole body imaging. These examinations are performed in multiple stations with
table movement between the stations to cover the complete area.
► To apply a GeoLink, right-click a scan item. Then select GeoLink.
Select any GeoLink (A, B, C, ...).
► Repeat this step for the scan items that need to be linked.
Philips
► To remove a GeoLink from a scan item, right-click the scan item. Then select No GeoLink.

5.6.2.3 Propagating the Coverage

Status: Released
Node title (original): Geoname sharing ID: 117433704843-2

Status: Released
Scans sharing the same Geoname by default have:

• The same slice orientation.
• The same number of stacks.
• Each stack with identical angulations and offcenters.
End fragment title: Geoname sharing
When Propagation is enabled, these scans also share:

• The FOV (including RFOV and fold-over direction)
• The slice coverage (volume in slice direction):
– In 3D scans, the number of slices will be adapted.
– In 2D scans, the slice thickness will never be touched, but only the FOV, the rectangular
FOV and the fold-over direction.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

– In M2D and MS scans, it depends on the kind of scan from which the geometry has to
be taken over. Refer to the table below for more informations.
The following parameters are affected by Propagation:

• Number of stacks and slices
• FOV in measurement, phase and slice direction
• Slice thickness and gap
• Fat shift direction
• Fold-over direction and the amount of fold-over suppression
When you use Propagation, always be aware that the fold-over direction is taken over.
Philips

Take over geometry What happens?
3D scan -> M2D or MS • The number of slices will be adapted such that the coverage of the M2D or
MS scan is identical to the 3D scan.
M2D or MS -> M2D or MS Number of slices

• The number of slices will always be taken over to guarantee comparable
slices.
Slice thickness and slice gap
• If the slice thickness has initially been the same, it will stay the same and
changes to this parameter will be taken over, i.e. increasing the slice
thickness from 5 mm to 6 mm, all other scans will also increase from 5 mm
to 6 mm - if their initial value has been 5 mm. The slice gap will be adapted
also.
• If the slice thickness has initially NOT been the same, the slice thickness and
the slice gap will be adapted to the new slice distance (distance between
adjacent slice centers) where the thickness / gap ratio stays the same. I.e.
changing the slice thickness from 5 mm to 4 mm, in a scan with initially 4
mm / 0.8 mm will change to 4.58 mm / 0.92 mm. This is done in such a way
with respect to IR scans where typically a slice gap of 20% of the slice
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
thickness is used.
Node title (original): propagate coverage ID: 116861080459

Status: Released
Workflow
1. Select multiple ExamCard items with the same geometry name in order to propagate the
coverage.
To select multiple successive items, press and hold Shift, then click to select.
To select multiple items, press and hold Ctrl, then click to select.
2. Right-click and select Propagation.
3. Select the type of propagation:
• For Volume + Slice Geometry, the size and slices parameters are being propagated to
other scan with same Geoname.
• For Volume, the size parameter is being propagated to other scan with same Geoname.
4. Open one of the scan items (with Propagation enabled) in the Advanced Parameters
Editor.
5. Change geometry parameters as needed.
6. Click Accept to confirm planning.
7. Automatically all otherscan items with Propagation enabled will have the same coverage
settings.
End fragment title: propagate coverage
Philips

5.6.3 Scan Pause and Contrast Agent

Status: Released
5.6.3.1 Inserting a Pause prior to a Scan Item

Status: Released
Some scans require a manual start. In this case, you need to insert a pause prior to a scan item.
1. To insert a pause, do any of the following:
• Right-click the scan item, then select Pause before scan.
• Press Ctrl+U.
⇨ The scan item displays the Pause icon. Now the scan item stops before acquisition and
requires a manual start.
5.6.3.2 ContrastCards for Contrast Administration
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): 0 - purpose Contrast Preset Settings ID: 114087592459

Status: Released
{ Maethger, Maria, 8/24/2020 3:24:52 PM: Don't know where to put it in the Topic structure}
ContrastCards facilitate the administration of contrast agent injections in post-contrast and
dynamic scans. Contrast Cards allow you to store data of the contrast agent injection with the
examination. The contrast agent injection itself is not affected by ContrastCards.
End fragment title: 0 - purpose Contrast Preset Settings
Node title (original): 1 - features/characteristics Contrast ID: 114087755147

Admin Status: Released
ContrastCards allow the registration of

• the type of contrast agent
• the concentration of the contrast agent
• the recommended dosage
• the volume of the contrast agent for injection
Based on patient's weight and dosage, contrast agent administration calculates and
proposes a volume for injection (body weight x ml/kg dosage = ml volume).
• the contrast agent route (e.g. intravenous)
• and the point in time of injection:
– for dynamic scans: the dynamic scan number of contrast agent administration
Philips

– for non-dynamic scans (pre- and post-contrast) if contrast agent injection occurs at start
of scan
ContrastCards work with presets for contrast administration.

• These presets allow you to predefine and easily apply contrast agent scripts. For more
information about contrast administration presets, see chapter “Functional Description” on
page 478.
• You can share the presets for contrast administration among your MRI systems.
ContrastCards make use of a timer which facilitates the timing of the injection related to the
start of the scan.
End fragment title: 1 - features/characteristics Contrast Admin
Node title (original): 2 - DICOM and Contrast Admin ID: 114087917835

Status: Released
The implementation of ContrastCards meets the DICOM requirement.

End fragment title: 2 - DICOM and Contrast Admin
Node title (original): 3 - starting up Contrast Admin ID: 114088053259

Status: Released
Implementation of ContrastCards
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ContrastCards are implemented in scan items of the Exam Overview. The Contrast Injection
Parameters window opens when
• you enable contrast injection for a scan item in an ExamCard.

This allows you to select a preset for contrast administration.
• you click the contrast injection icon of a scan item in an ExamCard.
This allows you to enter and edit mandatory contrast agent information.
End fragment title: 3 - starting up Contrast Admin
Contrast injection is enabled from the right-mouse menu.{ Maethger, Maria, 10/30/2020
9:30:34 AM: In old IfU "from drop-down menu". Also in Artes?}
Node title (original): 4 - Contrast Admin window ID: 114088188683
Status: Released
Philips

Contrast Injection Parameters window

1. Drop-down menu for the selection of presets for
contrast agent injection
1 4
2. Display of data of selected preset:
2
– contrast agent and route
3 – concentration (mmol/ml)
– dosage (ml/kg)
5 3. Entry field for volume
– either enter value manually,
– or accept automatically calculated proposal
(body weight x ml/kg dosage = ml volume)
4. Drop-down menu for the selection when contrast
agent is injected:
– Inject at: start of scan,
– Inject at: start of dynamic number X,
– if user confirmation is needed for contrast
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

agent injection.
5. Presets button to create/edit presets
6. Confirm to accept, Cancel to close window without
changes
Message about injected volume

Carefully read the contrast agent label and look up the
maximum dosage prescribed.
The dialog guides you with the message:
"Verify that the injected volume doesn't exceed the
maximum dosage prescribed on the contrast agent
label."{ Maethger, Maria, 9/24/2020 3:53:09 PM:
Messages in quotation marks acc. to style guide}
End fragment title: 4 - Contrast Admin window
Node title (original): 5 - Scan identifier Contrast Admin ID: 114088325643

Status: Released
Identification of images with Contrast Administration

• Images where Contrast Administration was used, are labeled Contrast on the top right of an
image (1).
Philips

• The contrast delay time (time between injection and scan start) is shown on the next to the
Contrast label.
End fragment title: 5 - Scan identifier Contrast Admin
5.6.3.3 Registering contrast injection

Status: Released
Node title (original): objective of workflow: contrast admin in ID: 114085279499

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
post-contrast scans Status: Released
{ Maethger, Maria, 10/28/2020 11:02:05 AM: Please check this. I am not sure about if this
workflow is complete.}
You execute this workflow to register data of the contrast injection (such as contrast agent,
injected volume)
• in post-contrast scans,
• in dynamic scans.
End fragment title: objective of workflow: contrast admin in post-contrast scans
Node title (original): enabling contrast agent injection for a ID: 114085401483
post-contrast scan Status: Released
Enabling contrast injection in post-contrast scans

⊳ In the current ExamCard on the Exam Overview: { Maethger, Maria, 10/28/2020 11:02:05
AM: " or when editing an ExamCard in the ExamCard Editor" (from old IfU) Please check
about the ExamCard Manager. I did not understand what to do there}
► Right-click the post-contrast or dynamic scan item of the ExamCard, then select
Contrast.
⇨ The Contrast Injection Parameters window opens:
• Contrast agent data is retrieved from the preset (which is stored with the ExamCard) and
displayed.
Philips

• Based on patient's weight and dosage, contrast administration calculates and proposes a
volume for injection (body weight × ml/kg dosage = ml volume).
► Fill in the mandatory contrast information now or later.
► Select a contrast preset from the drop-down menu.
► Verify that all contrast-agent specific attributes are entered correctly.
If needed, select another preset from the preset drop-down menu.
► To enter the volume in ml, do any of the following:
• Click Use x ml to accept the automatically calculated volume in ml.
• Enter a user-defined volume in ml at the red asterisk.
NOTICE
Carefully read the contrast agent label and look up the maximum dosage prescribed.
The dialog guides you with the message: "Verify that the injected volume doesn't exceed the
maximum dosage prescribed on the contrast agent label."
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Click Confirm and close the window.
⇨ The injection icon indicates that contrast injection is enabled and that all contrast
injection information is entered. The scan is now ready to run.
⇨ The orange asterisk indicates that some contrast injection information is still missing.
► To disable contrast injection, right-click on the scan item and de-select Contrast.
End fragment title: enabling contrast agent injection for a post-contrast scan
Node title (original): Running EC with contrast injection ID: 114085523467

Status: Released
Running an ExamCard with contrast injection enabled

► Select an ExamCard with contrast injection enabled. { Maethger, Maria, 10/28/2020
11:58:06 AM: I am not sure what this next step from old IfU describes: In post-contrast
scans, select Inject at: start of scan. In dynamic scans, select Inject at: start of dynamic nr,
and enter the dynamic number. }
► Execute the ExamCard as usual:
Start ExamCard, run survey scan and plan scans.{ Maethger, Maria, 10/28/2020 12:40:30
PM: Please check if this is proper Artes Workflow terminology.}
Before the contrast agent scan is going to start, the ExamCard pauses and the Contrast
Injection window opens with the messages:
"Scan is paused to inject x ml of <contrast agent>."
► Inject contrast agent, and at the same time do any of the following:
Philips

• Click Start Timer.

The timer (see location below) starts and indicates how much time elapsed since contrast
agent injection.
Start the scan when sufficient time elapsed.
The current scan starts immediately and the ExamCard proceeds as usual.
• Click Start Scan And Timer.
The timer (see location below) starts and indicates how much time elapsed since contrast
agent injection.
The current scan starts immediately and the ExamCard proceeds as usual.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Click Cancel.
The Contrast Injection window closes.
The contrast agent information is stored as DICOM attribute.
End fragment title: Running EC with contrast injection
5.6.3.4 Retrieving contrast agent of previously performed scans

Affix: not ready ID: 114085646219
{ Maethger, Maria, 10/5/2020 9:20:52 AM: Not edited yet, I cannot find out how this works in
Artes.}
You need to retrieve the contrast agent information of a previously performed scan.
► On the System menu, click Open for Review... and select the previously performed
examination.
► In the List View, hover over the Injection enabled icon of the previously performed contrast
agent scan.
⇨ The contrast agent information is displayed such as:
⇨ "Completed - Injection of 16 ml of Magnevist-Gadopentetate at start of dynamic 2."

⇨ "Completed - Injection of 12 ml of Magnevist-Gadopentetate."
Philips

Alternatively you retrieve contrast agent information in the Image information of an imaging
series, see .{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 10/2/2017 2:00:35 PM: <link to Image Information,in
chapter: Operator's Console, Introduction to the UI and general information>}
5.6.4 Grouping and Splitting

Status: Released
5.6.4.1 Grouping and Ungrouping Scan Items

Status: Released
The main purpose of grouping scans is to make sure that a scan is not started before another
one is planned. Grouped items cannot be modified after one of them was started.
This is especially relevant for contrast uptake studies e.g. BolusTrak where the pre-contrast
scan, the 2D real-time reconstructed scan and the post-contrast scan are typically grouped. In
such a way, the subtraction results will be reliable due to identical pre- and post-contrast scans.
Grouping
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

1. Select multiple consecutive items.
2. Then do any of the following:
• Right-click the selection. Then select Group/Split, and then Group.
• Press Ctrl+G.
Ungrouping
1. Click on the group to select it.
2. Then do any of the following:
• Right-click the group. Then select Group/Split, and then Ungroup.
• Press Ctrl+G.
5.6.4.2 Split Dynamics

Status: Released
You use this function to split dynamic scans that consist of multiple dynamic series into single
scans.
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 1/20/2021 1:41:39 AM: purpose missing and some explanation}
Philips
1. Right-click on the dynamic scan. Then select Group/Split, and then Split.

⇨ The current dynamic scan will be split up in single scans.
5.6.5 Saving the Current ExamCard

Status: Released
You can save an ExamCard during your daily routine, and not only in the ExamCard Manager.
NOTICE
The maximum number of ExamCard items is 250. The maximum number of inline
postprocessing steps is 6.
► Click More Options. Then select Save ExamCard.

► Enter a name for the ExamCard, and click Save to confirm. .
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
The ExamCard will be saved in the Saved folder of the Other database.
5.6.6 Working with SmartExam

Affix: MAP ID: 117364177803
5.6.6.1 SmartGeometries Editor

Status: Released
The SmartGeometries Editor

• Allows you to create and modify a Smart ExamCard.
• Allows you to add a Smart survey to the current ExamCard.
• Allows you to assign existing SmartGeometries to scans or to create new SmartGeometries.
• Indicates if the name of a SmartGeometry is known, unknown, or if a name conflicts with an
existing SmartGeometry name.
You access the SmartGeometries Editor from the context menu of the Scan Overview with
Convert to SmartExam... or Manage SmartExam....
Node title (original): SmartEditor figure (&table) ID: 116866760715
Status: Released
Philips

1 Drop-down menu for the selection of the anatomic region
2 To enable or disable Add SmartSurvey to ExamCard
3 Name of the non-Smart geometry
4 To convert the geometry to a SmartGeometry
5 SmartGeometry name
6 Reserved for remarks like New Smart Geometry or similar
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: SmartEditor figure (&table)
Related Tools
• In the SmartGeometries Database (available in the ExamCard Manager), you delete
SmartGeometries or samples, or you lock the complete database.
• In the SmartExam Settings, you enable or disable User-Confirmation Mode, and Add
Sample Data Allowed.
5.6.6.2 SmartExam Settings

Status: Released
You specify the SmartExam Settings in Settings and Tools -> Settings -> SmartExam.
Node title (original): 1 User-Confirmation Mode ID: 117382249227

Status: Released
User-Confirmation Mode
This option allows to ask for confirmation of the Smart planning in a Smart ExamCard.
• With User-Confirmation Mode enabled, the ExamCard stops so that you can inspect the
planning, and modifiy if needed.
Philips

• With User-Confirmation Mode disabled, a validated Smart ExamCard is executed

automatically. A confirmation of the planning is not needed.
End fragment title: 1 User-Confirmation Mode
Node title (original): 2 Add Sample Data Allowed ID: 117382250251

Status: Released
Add Sample Data Allowed

This option adjusts how newly planned samples are treated.
NOTICE
Samples are never automatically added to a SmartGeometry.
User confirmation is always required in the Add Sample dialog.
Add Sample Data Effect

Allowed
If Unchecked • You are not prompted to add samples to the SmartGeometry Database.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Samples are not added to a SmartGeometry.

This is the default setting.
If Checked • You are prompted to add manually planned samples to the SmartGeometry Database
at the end of the examination:
Adding manually planned samples to the SmartGeometry database? OK or Cancel?
• To add the samples to a SmartGeometry, click OK.
To discard the samples, click Cancel.
The dialog is only displayed if any of the SmartGeometry plannings is modified and
confirmed.
End fragment title: 2 Add Sample Data Allowed
5.6.6.3 SmartExam Icons

Status: Released
The SmartExam icons indicate the status of a scan item:

• In the Exam Overview.
• In the ExamCard Manager.
• In the SmartGeometries Database Editor.
• In the SmartGeometries Editor.
Node title (original): Icons SmartExam ID: 117376974987-2
Status: Released
Philips

Smart learned Geometry is smart and learned.
Smart learned disabled Geometry is smart and learned, but Smart is disabled as
system option, or the smart survey is missing.
Smart learned locked Geometry is smart, learned and locked for further learning.
Smart learning Geometry is smart and still learning (not validated).
Smart learning disabled Geometry is smart and still learning, but Smart is disabled, or
the smart survey is missing.
Smart learning locked Geometry is smart, still learning, but locked for further
learning.
Spine smart learned Geometry is smart spine and learned.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Spine smart learned locked Geometry is smart spine, learned, but locked for further
learning.
Spine smart learning Geometry is smart spine and still learning (not validated).
Spine smart learning Geometry is smart spine and still learning but locked for
locked further learning.
Smart name conflict Geometry is smart, but given a name that already exists for a
non-smart geometry.
Smart name unknown Smart geometry name is unknown.
Smart planning The smart geometry is applied: the smart survey is analyzed
and the smart geometries are planned.
Smart spine planning The smart spine geometry is applied: the smart spine survey is
analyzed and the smart geometries are planned.
End fragment title: Icons SmartExam
5.6.6.4 Setting up a Smart ExamCard

Status: Released
Philips

5.6.6.4.1 Converting an ExamCard into a Smart ExamCard

Status: Released
With this workflow, you convert an existing ExamCard into a Smart ExamCard.
This conversion includes that you add a SmartSurvey to the ExamCard, and that you use
SmartGeometries in the ExamCard.
⊳ Prerequisite: You are in the Scan Overview, or in the Scan Overview of the ExamCard
Manager.
⊳ Prerequisite: The current ExamCard is the ExamCard that you want to convert into a Smart
ExamCard.
► To access the SmartGeometries Editor, right-click on a ExamCard item and select Convert
to SmartExam....
The SmartGeometries Editor opens.
► Select an anatomic region from the drop-down list.
• Brain
• Knee
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Shoulder
• Breast
• Cervical spine
• Lumbar spine
⇨ Only for cervical spine and Lumbar spine, one more column shows up in the Smart Editor
window: the Grid Snap column.
► To add a SmartSurvey to the current ExamCard, click Add SmartSurvey to ExamCard.
► To enable SmartExam, first select a SmartGeometry from the Replace With drop-down list,
or enter a name for a new SmartGeometry.
Then select Smart in the Smart column.
NOTICE
Each SmartGeometry name must refer to a unique planning.
Use unique geometry names throughout all anatomic regions.
► Only for cervical spine and Lumbar spine, enable or disable Grid Snap.
• Set Grid Snap to No for the SmartGeometries where acquisition is always done for a the
same range, for example in the sagittal spine.
• Set Grid Snap to Yes for the SmartGeometries where acquisition is done on different
levels, for example in the transverse spine.
Philips

► To apply your changes to the ExamCard, click Apply.

To leave the Editor without changes, click Done.
5.6.6.4.2 Validating a new Smart ExamCard

Status: Released
A newly defined SmartGeometry has to be planned and executed several times before it turns
into a validated SmartGeometry and does not require planning anymore.
Node title (original): validating Smart ExamCard ID: 116872538635
Status: Released
⊳ Prerequisite: The option Add Sample Data Allowed is enabled in Settings and Tools ->
Settings -> SmartExam.
This option allows to add samples to a newly defined SmartGeometry.
► Start the Smart ExamCard that needs to be validated.
The SmartSurvey and the reference scan are executed automatically.
► When the SmartSurvey is completed, double-click on the EC items of the diagnostic scans to
plan them.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Plan as accurately as possible. Keep in mind that the planning contributes to the
SmartGeometry samples.
► Start the planned diagnostic scans.
► After completion of the last scan, you are prompted to add manually planned samples to
the SmartGeometry Database:
Adding manually planned samples to database? OK or Cancel?
To add the samples to a SmartGeometry, click OK. To discard the samples, click Cancel.
NOTICE
First add samples to the SmartGeometry database. Only then move the patient out of the
bore.
Otherwise the samples are lost and cannot be added to the SmartGeometry Database
anymore.
End fragment title: validating Smart ExamCard
5.6.6.4.3 Adding Samples to a SmartGeometry

Status: Released
Philips

To improve your SmartGeometries, you can add samples (relevant plannings from other
examinations) to your SmartGeometry.
⊳ Prerequisite: The option Add Sample Data Allowed is enabled in Settings and Tools ->
Settings -> SmartExam.
This option allows to add samples to a newly defined SmartGeometry.
⊳ Prerequisite: The option User-Confirmation Mode is enabled in Settings and Tools ->
Settings -> SmartExam,
This option prompts you to confirm that samples are added to the SmartGeometry.
► Execute the Smart ExamCard.
Upon completion of the ExamCard, you are prompted to confirm the update of the
SmartGeometries with new samples.
► Confirm to update the SmartGeometries.
5.6.6.5 Executing a Smart ExamCard

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
5.6.6.5.1 Executing a Smart ExamCard

Status: Released
A Smart ExamCard can contain Smart items in different states. Depending on the status of the
Smart items, the workflow is different.
Node title (original): Workflow: Smart items are in validating ID: 117382298763
Executing a Smart ExamCard with Smart items in validating mode

1. Select an ExamCard.
2. Start the ExamCard (to acquire survey images).
3. Plan the items of the ExamCard geometrically, or fine-tune the suggested planning and
confirm.
4. Resume the ExamCard.
5. When the ExamCard is completed, you are prompted to add (or not to add) the samples to
the SmartGeometry database.
End fragment title: Workflow: Smart items are in validating mode
Node title (original): Workflow Smart items are validated ID: 117382300299
Status: Released
Executing a Smart ExamCard with validated Smart items

1. Select an ExamCard.
Philips

2. Start the ExamCard (to acquire survey images).

• With User-Confirmation Mode disabled, a validated Smart ExamCard is executed
automatically. A confirmation of the planning is not needed.
• With User-Confirmation Mode enabled, the ExamCard stops so that you can inspect the
planning, and modifiy if needed.
•
End fragment title: Workflow Smart items are validated
5.6.6.5.2 Executing a Smart Spine ExamCard

Status: Released
For SmartExam Spine acquistions, two features are available:

• Vertebrae labeling and
• (Disc) Level specific scanning.
Node title (original): 1 Vertebrae Labeling ID: 117382366475
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Vertebrae labeling
You have to confirm vertebrae labeling to allow level-specific scanning.
1. Start the SmartExam Spine ExamCard.
2. When the SmartSurvey is finished, the Confirm Vertebrae Labeling window pops up.
It displays the sagittal survey image with vertebrae labels on the image: ... T10, T11, T12 L1,
L2, L3, L4, L5, ...
3. Select L6 present, if L6 exists in a patient.
The labels on the image change, and L6 is added.
4. Now you have the choice to accept or to change the proposed vertebrae labeling.
Do any of the following:
• To accept the proposed vertebrae labeling, click Proceed.
• To change the vertebrae labeling and move the vertebrae labels up or down, click the
UP or DOWN arrow
Select Manual to continue with manual planning. Click Proceed to continue.
End fragment title: 1 Vertebrae Labeling
Node title (original): 2 Level-specific scanning ID: 117382369675

Status: Released
Level-specific scanning
You can define the disc levels to be scanned beforehand or after scanning the high resolution
sagittal scan.
Philips

Node title (original): lvel-specific: defining disc levels ID: 117384214923

beforehand Status: Released
Defining the disc levels beforehand

► In the Advanced Parameters Editor, click the smartstacks tab.
In all scans with a level-specific Smart Geometry (if level-specific{ Heuvel, Martina van den,
1/17/2021 9:48:08 AM: where to enable level-specific?} is enabled ), the smartstacks tab is
available: Geometry - Contrast - Motion - Dyn/Ang - Postproc - smartstacks
⇨ The level-specific PlanScan window opens. It provides you with:
• An indication of the current SmartGeometry and the disc levels (for example L5-S1).
• A schematic drawing of the lower and upper sagittal spine with vertebrae labeling. and lines
for the transverse stacks.
• Red lines for the current transverse stack, and gray lines for proposed transverse stacks.
• Up and down arrows to move the transverse stacks.
• A window with guidance.
► To change the stacks and the planning, do any of the following:
• To add a stack, click on the gray lines.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• To remove a stack, click on the red lines.

• To shift a stack up or down, click the UP or DOWN arrow.
End fragment title: lvel-specific: defining disc levels beforehand
Node title (original): Level-specific: defining after high res scan ID: 117384216459
Status: Released
Defining the disc levels after scanning the high resolution scan
1. On the high resolution T2w sagittal scan, drag the stacks to the desired scanning location.
The snapping mechanism (Grid Snap) recognizes the levels automatically and snaps the
transverse stacks to the required levels.
NOTICE
During the validating phase, fine tuning adjustments can be made without snapping.
End fragment title: Level-specific: defining after high res scan

End fragment title: 2 Level-specific scanning
5.6.6.6 SmartLine Processing in Practice

Status: Released
Philips

5.6.6.6.1 Adding a postprocessing step to an ExamCard

Affix: NEW operation whatsoever ID: 117120813707
You can add a postprocessing step (SmartLine processing) to an ExamCard. Each time you
execute this ExamCard, the postprocessing step is executed automatically.
Node title (original): SmartLine processing suited packages ID: 117384237579-2
Status: Released
SmartLine Processing applies for the following Review render modes:

• MPR and MIP
• Orthoview
• MobiView
• PicturePlus
End fragment title: SmartLine processing suited packages
► Execute the ExamCard.

► Then process the imaging series with a Review or Analysis package.
• MIP, MPR etc
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Create a new imaging series with the results.
⇨ The postprocessing step is added to the ExamCard.
► Close the Review or Analysis package as usual.
► Save the ExamCard to the database.
⇨ The next time that this ExamCard is executed, the postprocessing step is carried out
automatically as soon as the source images are available. No operator interaction is
required.
⇨ In some cases, user interaction is required. In this case, double-click the processing step to
open the processing step. This allows for customization of the parameters, and allows to
add a pause before the execution of the processing step.
5.6.7 Quick Surveys

Affix: MAP ID: 9007316659239051

Affix: Quick Surveys - All systems ID: 116863869451
Survey images of sufficient image quality are required to plan an examination. For time
efficiency, you need survey images in a very short time.
Node title (original): 0 - main features Quick Surveys ID: 116864501771
Status: Released
Philips

What are the main features of Quick Surveys?

• Quick Surveys skip certain preparation phases and pre-scans with the purpose of speeding
up.
• Quick Survey scans provide you with adequate image quality which is very well suited for
planning.
End fragment title: 0 - main features Quick Surveys
Node title (original): 1 - Requirements of a Quick Survey ID: 116865267211

Status: Released
Requirements of a Quick Survey

You can only convert a survey scan into a Quick Survey, if it meets the following requirements:
Node title (original): 1b-requirements Quick Survey 1st bulleted ID: 116865437707
list Status: Released
• It is the first (non-aborted) scan after the light visor is (re)set.

• It has no named geometry defined.
End fragment title: 1b-requirements Quick Survey 1st bulleted list
Node title (original): 1c-requirements Quick Survey 2nd ID: 116865524875

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
bulleted list Status: Released
• The scan time does not exceed 15 seconds per stack (on average) before converting into a
Quick Survey.
• It is no SmartSurvey scan.
• It is not a spectroscopy, but an imaging survey.
• It is no pre-scan.
• It is no interactive scan.
• The scan produces modulus images only.
• It does not use SENSE, CLEAR, k-t BLAST, k-t SENSE.
End fragment title: 1c-requirements Quick Survey 2nd bulleted list
Node title (original): China related ID: 116865351947

Status: Released
• It does not use CS-SENSE.

End fragment title: China related
End fragment title: 1 - Requirements of a Quick Survey
Node title (original): 2 - What is skipped, what are affected ID: 116864592011
imaging parameters Status: Released
Preparation phases, pre-scans and imaging parameters affected by Quick Surveys

Node title (original): 2b - without title - what is skipped, what ID: 116864680587
are affected imaging parameters Status: Released
Philips

In a Quick Survey, certain preparation phases and pre-scans are skipped. This is realized by
automatically setting certain imaging parameters to well-defined values. The affected imaging
parameters are hidden and you cannot change them.
The table lists which preparation phases and pre-scans are skipped, what is performed instead
and which imaging parameters are affected.
Skipped Instead performed Affected imaging parameter
Preparation phases Automatic preparation is performed. Preparation mode is set to auto.
SENSE reference scan Classic uniformity is used. Uniformity is set to classic.
B0 pre-scan B0 compensation is switched off. Shimming is set to no.
B1 pre-scan B1 shimming is switched off. MultiTransmit (only 3.0T systems) is

switched off.
Coil survey pre-scan Preferred coils are automatically Not applicable

selected by an algorithm based on
the connected coils.
If this algorithm cannot be used, the
coil survey pre-scan is executed.
End fragment title: 2b - without title - what is skipped, what are affected imaging parameters
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 2 - What is skipped, what are affected imaging parameters
Node title (original): 3 - behavior of Quick Survey scans ID: 116864771595

Status: Released
Behavior of Quick Survey scans

Survey scans that meet most of the Quick Survey requirements behave differently based on
their position in the ExamCard or execution list (List View).
Example of two identical Quick Surveys at position 1 and position 2
1. Quick Survey (referred to as QSurvey-1) • Since QSurvey-1 is at position 1 in the execution list, it is fully
2. Quick Survey (referred to as QSurvey-2) qualified as Quick Survey.
3. T2W – Preparation phases and pre-scans are skipped.
4. and so on – Imaging parameters affected by Quick Survey are neither

visible nor accessible.
• Since QSurvey-2 is at position 2 in the execution list, it is not
qualified as Quick Survey.
– Preparation phases and pre-scans are not skipped.
– The imaging parameters affected by Quick Survey are
visible and accessible.
• Since QSurvey-1 and QSurvey-2 are executed differently with
different total scan times, the resulting image quality is of
comparable, but not of identical quality.
End fragment title: 3 - behavior of Quick Survey scans
Philips

5.6.7.2 Converting a survey into a Quick Survey

Status: Released
Node title (original): 0 - Advanced Organizer converting survey ID: 116864230027

into Quick Survey Status: Released
The purpose of this workflow is to convert a conventional survey into a Quick Survey. The
workflow covers both situations:
• The survey is part of an ExamCard.
• The survey is a separate scan protocol in your protocol database.
End fragment title: 0 - Advanced Organizer converting survey into Quick Survey
Node title (original): 1 - workflow converting into Quick Survey ID: 116864366731
Status: Released
⊳ In the ExamCard Manager or in the ExamCard of the current examination:

► Browse to the survey scan you want to convert into a Quick Survey and double-click.
This survey scan can be part of an ExamCard or can be a separate scan protocol in your
database.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
The Advanced Parameters open.

► Verify that the survey scan meets the requirements of a Quick Survey, see chapter
“Functional Description” on page 892.
► When all requirements are met:
open the Postproc tab, set the imaging parameter Quick Survey to yes or to default.
► Save the survey as Quick Survey.
It is recommended to save the Quick Survey under a new name.
► To save the ExamCard with the Quick Survey, click More Options in the Exam Overview and
select Save ExamCard.
It is recommended to save the ExamCard under a new name.
End fragment title: 1 - workflow converting into Quick Survey
5.6.7.3 Running an ExamCard with a Quick Survey

Status: NotReleased
The purpose of this workflow is to run an ExamCard which uses a Quick Survey instead of a
conventional survey.
Node title (original): Amb/Elit with mention of VitalScreen ID: 9007316119735563
Status: NotReleased
⊳ Prerequisite: AutoStart is enabled.

► Position the patient on the tabletop.
► Move the patient to the isocenter.
Philips

► Press Start scan at the UIM or Start at the VitalScreen (depending on your system
configuration).
► Leave the examination room and close the door.
With AutoStart enabled, the survey automatically gets started now, if no table movement is
required.
⇨ When you reach the operator's console, the survey is running or first images are already
available.
► Start planning and proceed as usual.
End fragment title: Amb/Elit with mention of VitalScreen
Node title (original): Ing Optimus Achieva Multiva Prodiva ID: 116865091083
without mention of VitalScreen Status: Released
⊳ Prerequisite: AutoStart is enabled.

► Position the patient on the tabletop.
► Move the patient to the isocenter.
► Press Start scan at the UIM.*
► Leave the examination room and close the door.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

With AutoStart enabled, the survey automatically gets started now, if no table movement is
required.
⇨ When you reach the operator's console, the survey is running or first images are already
available.
► Start planning and proceed as usual.
Node title (original): Ingenia LE ID: 116865186827
Status: Released
* Or press Start at the VitalScreen (depending on your system configuration).

End fragment title: Ingenia LE
End fragment title: Ing Optimus Achieva Multiva Prodiva without mention of VitalScreen
Philips

Plan Tab Planning the Examination
6 Planning the Examination

Status: NotReleased
6.1 Plan Tab

Status: Released
In the Plan tab, you plan the examination (e.g. stacks and slabs) graphically. If needed, you
change advanced imaging parameters. The following UI elements support you:
1. Plan toolbar which allows you to adjust the display of imaging series, stacks and slabs
according to your preference, and which gives access to advanced planning features.
2. Viewports for planning.
3. Scan Dashboard which provides you with important information about the currently
planned scan.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
6.2 Plan Toolbar

Status: NotReleased

Affix: Plan toolbar ID: 113926595723
Philips

Planning the Examination Plan Toolbar
Node title (original): Intro Plan Toolbar ID: 115201516939

Status: Released
The Plan Toolbar is available on the Plan tab.

It is composed of buttons and drop-down menus that provide access to generic functions to
plan an examination. For drop-down menus, always the currently selected button is visible.
End fragment title: Intro Plan Toolbar
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Number Button or button group description More information
1 Selection of a Geometry chapter “Geometry” on page 898
2 Management of the Geometries
3 Display of the Imaging Volume chapter “Display of the Imaging Volume” on page 899
4 Advanced Planning chapter “Advanced Planning” on page 899
5 Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan, chapter “Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan,
Window Window, ...” on page 900
6 Measurements and Annotations chapter “Measurements and Annotations” on page
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

901
7 Image Information chapter “Image Information” on page 904
8 Image View Settings chapter “Image View Settings” on page 905
6.2.2 Geometry
Status: NotReleased
These controls allow you to add or delete stacks and slabs, and to switch between stacks and
slabs during planning.
Only the current stack or slab can be edited.
Drop-down Short Description More information
menu
Selected Geometry: To switch between stacks and slabs. •
Duplicate Geometry: To create and insert a copy of the selected stack or • chapter
slab. “Managing
Geometries” on
Remove Geometry: To delete the selected stack or slab.
page 911
Philips

Plan Toolbar Planning the Examination
6.2.3 Display of the Imaging Volume

Last Content Modificator: Mann, Michael ID: 114228971659
Status: Released
These buttons allow you to adjust the display of the planned imaging volume.
Button Short Description Instructions
Show Slices: To display the planned imaging volume as slices. • chapter

“Changing the
Display of the
Stack” on page
Show 3D Box: To display the planned imaging volume as a 3D box.
914
Show Midplanes: To enable/disable the display of all midplanes.
6.2.4 Advanced Planning

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
These buttons provide access to advanced planning settings.

Set Orthogonal: To plan the current stack or volume orthogonal to the • chapter
slice in the selected viewport. “Planning
Orthogonal to
the Selected
Slice” on page
916
Set Center: To plan the current stack or volume with the same offcenter • chapter
values as the slice in the selected viewport. “Planning a Stack
or Volume with
Current
Offcenter
Values” on page
916
Philips

3-Point Planning: To enable/disable 3-Point Planning and define an • chapter

irregular plane. “Defining an
Irregular Plane
with 3-Point
Planning” on
page 916
ScanAlign: To align scans, especially with table movement to cover long • chapter
anatomical areas. “Aligning Scans
with ScanAlign”
on page 917
6.2.5 Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan, Window, ...

Status: Released
When you drag (with left mouse button) in a viewport, by default you scroll through images.
Click any of these buttons to change this behavior, and then use the drag function to perform
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

any of the actions listed below:
Scroll (default setting): • chapter

Drag to scroll through the imaging series (when this button is enabled). “Scrolling
through Images”
on page 944
Zoom: • chapter
Drag to magnify or reduce the image (when this button is enabled). “Zooming in and
out of an Image”
on page 947
Pan: • chapter
Drag to pan a magnified image (when this button is enabled). “Panning an
Image” on page
948
Window: • chapter
Drag to adjust brightness and contrast of an image (when this button is “Windowing:
enabled). Adjusting
Brightness and
Contrast” on
page 946
Roll/Rotate: • chapter “Rolling

Drag to roll or rotate the image (when this button is enabled). and Rotating an
• Available only in MPR, MIP and Orthoview. Image” on page
Philips
992

Plane Opacity: • chapter

Drag to change the opacity of all planes (when this button is enabled). “Changing the
• Available only in Orthoview. Plane Opacity”
on page 994
Opacity: • chapter
Drag to change the opacity of the fused overlay image (when this button is “Changing the
enabled). Opacity of Fused
• Available only in Orthoview. Overlay Images”
on page 995
Enhance PicturePlus: • chapter

Drag to adjust the PicturePlus filter settings (when this button is enabled). “Enhancing an
• Available only in PicturePlus. Image with
PicturePlus” on
page 951
6.2.6 Measurements and Annotations

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Last Content Modificator: Mann, Michael ID: 113906232075-1

Status: Released
Node title (original): 00 Intro Measurements and Annotations ID: 115328962059-1

Status: Released
These buttons allow you to perform measurements on the imaging series and overlay the
images with the measurement results and other annotations.
• Depending on the type of graphical object chosen, different numeric results are provided.
• Every graphical object is defined by one or more anchor points. The anchor points are
visible upon creation, when the mouse hovers over the object, and when the object is
selected.
• To select a graphical object, click on it.
• To resize or reshape a graphical object, drag any of its anchor points.
• To move a graphical object or a measurement label, drag it to the desired location.
• Dedicated context menus offer more functionality such as the calculation and display of
histograms and profiles.
End fragment title: 00 Intro Measurements and Annotations
Node title (original): 01 Buttons Measurements based on lines ID: 115328791179-1

Status: Released
Philips

Measurements based on lines

Drop-down Short Description Instructions
menu
Distance: To measure the distance of two points on an image. • Performing

Measurements
with Lines and
Angles
Smooth Polyline: To measure the length of a smooth polyline defined by { Mann, Michael,
several points on an image. 12/22/2020
12:53:04 PM: To
do: Link to MAP-
node for
Polyline: To measure the length of a polyline defined by several points on
measuring
an image.
operations}
Angle: To measure the angle defined by three points on an image.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Open Angle: To measure the open angle defined by four points on an
image.
End fragment title: 01 Buttons Measurements based on lines
Node title (original): 02 Buttons Measurements based on ROIs ID: 115328792203-1

Status: Released
Measurements based on Regions of Interest (ROIs)

Results include the size, diameter and perimeter of the ROI.
menu
Freehand Contour: To measure an area based on a Freehand contour ROI. • Performing

Measurements
with ROIs
{ Mann, Michael,
Smooth Polygon: To measure an area based on a ROI with the shape of a 12/22/2020
smoothed polygon. 12:53:09 PM: To
do: Link to MAP-
node for ROI
operations}
Philips


menu
Ellipse: To measure an area based on a ROI with an elliptical shape.
Circle: To measure an area based on a ROI with a circular shape.
Rectangle: To measure an area based on a ROI with a rectangular shape.
End fragment title: 02 Buttons Measurements based on ROIs
Node title (original): 03 Buttons Text annotations ID: 115328793227-1

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Text Annotations
menu
Text Annotation: To overlay a text box to an image. • Annotating

Images
{ Mann, Michael,
10/30/2020
Arrow + Text Annotation: To overlay an arrow with a text box to an 7:44:42 AM:
image. doctima To do:
Link to MAP-node
for annotations}
End fragment title: 03 Buttons Text annotations
Node title (original): 04 Buttons Measurements per voxel ID: 115328794251-1

Status: Released
Philips

Measurements per Voxel

menu
Pixel Value: To extract the pixel value from a voxel. • Extracting Values
• Not available on RGB (SC) images from Images
{ Mann, Michael,
10/30/2020
Image Location: To extract the image location value from a voxel. 7:44:42 AM:
doctima To do:
Link to MAP-node
of value
extraction
Patient Location: To extract the patient location value from a voxel.
options}
• Available only when patient coordinates are known.
• Not present for most SC images/screen captures.
End fragment title: 04 Buttons Measurements per voxel
Node title (original): 05 Buttons Toggle graphical objects ID: 115328795275-1

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Hide and Show Measurements and Annotations
Hide Annotations: To show or hide all types of graphical objects (including • chapter
lines, ROIs, text, annotations, arrows, results of measurements). “Toggling the
Display of
Graphical
Objects” on page
972
End fragment title: 05 Buttons Toggle graphical objects
6.2.7 Image Information

Status: Released
These buttons allow you to adjust the amount of information given for images and imaging
series. Image information includes: scan number and image number, scan date, information
about scanning settings and duration.
Philips

Viewports in Plan tab Planning the Examination

menu
Full Image Information: To display the maximum amount of information • chapter

about the image. “Extending or
Restricting the
Image
Information” on
Intermediate Image Information: To display much, but not all image
page 952
information.
Limited Image Information: To display only basic image information.
No Image Information: To display no image information.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
6.2.8 Image View Settings

Status: Released
This button provides access to image sorting settings and scrolling settings.
Sort Images: To adjust how the different image types are sorted and to • Adjusting Image
configure scrolling with mouse and keyboard. Sorting and
Scrolling (Image
View Settings)
{ Mann, Michael,
10/30/2020
7:42:42 AM:
doctima To do:
Link to MAP node
for Image View
Settings}
6.3 Viewports in Plan tab

Status: Released
Philips

Planning the Examination Viewports in Plan tab
6.3.1 Viewports in Planning

Status: Released
On the Plan tab (also referred to as PlanScan), you have three viewports to plan in all three
orientations.
Node title (original): 0 Viewport intro ID: 116103709451-1
Status: Released
A viewport is a window dedicated to the display of images, e.g. MR slices, reformats or

parameter maps.
• You can maximize (or minimize) and close a viewport.
• Each viewport provides you with information about the image in the viewport.
• To display images in viewports differently, use the toolbars and the context menus.
Context menus are available for each viewport upon right click.
End fragment title: 0 Viewport intro
1. Scan number and scan name, e.g. 1,1 or 2,1 or 3,2

where the first digit increases for the scan and the second digit for a
postprocessing step (and a newly created imaging series).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

2. Image information
For more information, see Toolbars.
3. Fold-over indicator
indicating the fold-over direction in which typically MR artifacts occur.
4. Maximize button
5. Caliper
6. 3D coordinate system
indicating the directions Head-Feet Anterior-Posterior and Left-Right (LR),
and the slice orientation in this 3D coordinate system.
7. Movie Bar: only available when you hover over the bottom of the
viewport.
Allows you to plan on movies.
6.3.2 Context Menu in Planning

Status: Released
Node title (original): 0 about context menus ID: 116330488843-1

Status: Released
Context menus are available throughout all applications to facilitate the use of the system and
to offer various interaction possibilities.
Philips

Viewports in Plan tab Planning the Examination
To access the context menu, simply right-click on any viewport (or other screen area).
End fragment title: 0 about context menus
Node title (original): 1 Context menu Planning - mouse ID: 116330493707-1

behavior Status: Released
Available Options Description More information
• Scroll To change the left mouse behavior: chapter “Left Mouse

• Zoom When you drag (with left mouse button) in a viewport, Behavior: Scroll,
• Pan by default you scroll through images. These options (and Zoom, Pan,
possibly others depending on the render mode) allow Window, ...” on page
• Window 900
you to change this behavior.
Rotate/Mirror To Rotate Clockwise, Rotate Counter- chapter “Rotating or

ClockwiseMirrorFlip images. Mirroring an Image”
on page 949
Reset Window To reset window, zoom/pan to the initial settings after chapter “Resetting All
Reset Zoom/Pan you have changed these settings. Changes” on page
951
Reset All
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 1 Context menu Planning - mouse behavior
6.3.3 Stacks and Other Graphical Objects in PlanScan

Status: Released
On the Plan tab (also referred to as PlanScan), you plan all objects of a scan graphically. These
objects are overlaid to the (survey) images in the viewports.
• Rectangular shapes with border lines and round and square anchor points represent the
stack, and if applicable the REST slab, the shim box and the navigator. The anchor points
serve as handle for adjustments of the shapes.
• Initially all graphical objects are displayed as predefined in the selected scan protocols of
the ExamCard.
• Stacks (when selected for planning) are displayed with the midplanes, the border lines and
the number of slices.
• On the Plan toolbar, you can change the display of the stacks and select to Show Slices,
Show 3D Box or Show Midplanes.
Object displayed Color
Stack (imaging volume) blue
REST saturation slab (if REST is enabled) blue
Shimbox (if Shimming is enabled) pink
Navigator (if Navigator respiratory compensation is yellow

enabled)
Philips

Planning the Examination Viewports in Plan tab
Object displayed Color
Oversample area (if Fold-over suppression is set to blue

oversampling)
Point Markers for 3-Point Planscan blue
Examples
Stack
displayed with
• Number of slices
• Fold-over indicator (double-
arrow icon in Fold-over
direction outside of the stack)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Truncated stack with planning which Stack displayed as Field of View
is angulated to the displayed slice when planned parallel to the
displayed slice
REST saturation slab
Shimbox
Philips

Scan Dashboard Planning the Examination
Navigator
FOS Oversample area

Displayed outside of stack in fold-
over direction
Only applicable if Fold-over
suppression is set to oversampling
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
6.4 Scan Dashboard

Status: Released

Affix: Scan Dashboard ID: 116211934475
The Scan Dashboard is available on the Plan tab. It assists you in planning.
• It shows the effects on important scan parameters immediately during planning.
• It allows to access information about scan protocols.
• It allows to access Advanced Parameters.
• It allows to undo, redo, reset, cancel or accept your planning.
Philips

Planning the Examination Scan Dashboard
1 Scan name and scan orientation -
2 Important information about: Arrows indicate visually if the value has been
• Scan Duration increased or decreased. Their colors indicate if the
Format: actual scan duration (initial scan change is critical or uncritical.
duration) • Critical change with decreased value, e.g.
• Resolution Rel. SNR or Resolution.
Format: actual Acquisiiton voxel size
• Critical change with increased value, e.g.
• Rel. SNR (Relative Signal-to-NoiseRatio) SAR or PNS.
Format: Factor actual SNR relative to
initial SNR (1) • Improvement, e.g.
• TE • No or only minor effect.

Format: in ms
• TR • Safety notification, e.g. for SAR or PNS.
Format: in ms
When you hover over the Scan Dashboard, tooltips
• SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) are displayed which provide you with more
Format: in W/kg information about the displayed information.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• PNS (Peripheral Nerve Stimulation) Example:
iFormat: in % Acquisition Voxel Size
Value 0.90x1.53x4.00mm
Original 0.90x1.53x4.00mm (100%)
Smaller voxel size leads to higher resolution.
3 Buttons:
• Info
Displays more information about the use and typical application of a scan protocol or
ExamCard.
• Advanced Parameters
Allows to access the advanced parameters. This is recommended for experienced operators
only.
• :
Undo reverses your last action.
Reset resets all changes and goes back to the initial values.
• Redo:
Redoes something you have undone.
• Cancel:
Philips
Resets all changes made to the planning, and closes the current planning session.

Routine Procedures Planning the Examination

• Accept:
Accepts the planning. Next step is to start the planned scan or to continue planning of other
scans.
6.5 Routine Procedures

Status: NotReleased
6.5.1 Managing Geometries

Status: NotReleased
During planning, you edit the planning volumes (stack, slab, shim box, navigator) to adjust them
to the patient's anatomy.
• You can only modify the selected geometry (stack, slab, shim box, navigator).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• In some cases, you need to duplicate or delete the selected geometry.

Node title (original): 0 Selecting Geometry ID: 9007315461821451
Status: NotReleased
Selecting a Geometry
► Hover over a planning volume in a viewport, then click on it.
Alternatively select the planning volume from the Selected Geometry drop-down menu on
the Plan Toolbar .

⇨ On the Plan Toolbar, the Selected Geometry is indicated as: Stack A or Stack B, Slab 1 or
Slab 2, Navigator A or Navigator B, Shim volume, FOS A or FOS B (only applicable if the
parameter Fold-Over Suppression is set to oversampled).
Philips

Planning the Examination Routine Procedures
Unselected stack Selected stack
• without anchor points • with anchor points

• without slice numbers • with slice numbers
• without midlines • with midlines
End fragment title: 0 Selecting Geometry
Node title (original): 1 Duplicate Geometry ID: 9007313579151115
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: NotReleased
Duplicating the currently selected geometry
► On the Plan Toolbar, click Duplicate Geometry .

⇨ A copy of the selected geometry is created and can now be used for planning.
End fragment title: 1 Duplicate Geometry
Node title (original): 2 Delete Selected Geometry ID: 114324277771

Status: Released
Deleting the selected geometry
► On the Plan Toolbar, click Remove Geometry .

⇨ The selected geometry is deleted.
End fragment title: 2 Delete Selected Geometry
6.5.2 Graphical Planning

Status: Released
For accurate planning, you adapt the planning volumes to the patient's anatomy. You plan
ExamCard items graphically on the previously performed scans (e.g. on survey images or other
scans). You can also plan on movies which is especially helpful in Cardiac imaging.
Philips

• You can only edit the geometry of the current planning volume (stack, REST slab, shim box,
or navigator).
• You can undo changes step by step { Heuvel, Martina van den, 11/18/2020 1:08:50 PM:
HOW?}or reset the planning with the Reset { Heuvel, Martina van den, 11/23/2020 5:04:25
PM: check data node: Reset}button .

► Hover over the current planning volume (stack, REST slab, shim box or navigator).
The mouse pointer changes and indicates which action you can perform.
► Drag the planning volume, the anchor point or the border line to change the geometry of
the planning volume.
Purpose Hover over Mouse Affected imaging parameters
pointer
To move the planning The center area of The values of the Offcenter parameters are
volume the planning volume automatically adapted.
To rotate the A round anchor point The values of the Angulation parameters are
planning volume of the planning automatically adapted.
volume
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
To change the size of A border line of the If you resize the stack, the value of the Field-of-View is
the planning volume planning volume automatically adapted.
If you resize any other planning volume (REST slab, shim

box, navigator), the value of the corresponding size is
automatically adapted.
Philips

Purpose Hover over Mouse Affected imaging parameters

pointer
To change the A border line of the The number of slices are automatically adapted.
number of slices stack
To change the slice A square anchor The slice gap is automatically adapted.
gap point of the stack
Only possible when
slice gap is set to
manual/user defined.
NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

These parameter changes could affect the scan duration or the signal-to-noise ratio.
Check out the Scan Dashboard. It provides you with immediate information about the effects
of your planning.
To modify other imaging parameters (such as slice thickness), open the Advanced Parameters
window.
6.5.3 Changing the Display of the Stack

Status: Released
In planning, you can choose how to display the imaging volume of the stack.
► On the Plan toolbar, do any of the following:
• To display the imaging volume as slices, click Show Slices .

Philips

• To display the imaging volume as 3D box, click Show 3D Box .

{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 11/19/2020 6:29:24 PM: image needed}
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• To display of all midplanes, click Show Midplanes .
6.5.4 Copying Geometry Parameters from an Image to the Stack

Status: Released
When you need to plan the current scan identical to a previously scanned image, you copy the
geometry parameters from this previously scanned image to the current stack.
Node title (original): 07 Copy Position, FOV, Slice Thickness ID: 115350253579
from Image Status: Released
► On the Plan tab, right-click the image from which you want to copy the geometry values,
and select Copy From Image.
⇨ A submenu opens.
Philips


• To copy the position (i.e. offcenter, angulation and orientation), click Position.
• To copy the position and the field of view, click Position + FOV.
• To copy the position, the field of view and the slice thickness, click Position + FOV +
Slice Thickness.
⇨ The selected geometry parameters are copied and applied to the stack.
End fragment title: 07 Copy Position, FOV, Slice Thickness from Image
6.5.5 Planning Orthogonal to the Selected Slice

Status: Released
This option allows you to plan the current stack orthogonal to the slice in the selected viewport.
It copies the angles from the image in the selected viewport.
► In a planning viewport, scroll to the slice which you want to plan the stack orthogonally to.
► On the Plan Toolbar, click Set Orthogonal .
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨ The planning of the current stack or volume is updated immediately.
6.5.6 Planning a Stack or Volume with Current Offcenter Values

Status: Released
This option allows you to plan the current stack or volume with the same offcenter values as
the slice in the selected viewport. It copies the offset values from the image in the selected
viewport.
► In a planning viewport, scroll to the slice which you want to use to center the stack.
► On the Plan Toolbar, click Set Center .

⇨ The planning of the current stack or volume is updated immediately.
6.5.7 Defining an Irregular Plane with 3-Point Planning

Status: Released
3-Point Planning (also referred to as 3 Points PlanScan, 3PPS) is a tool which helps to define an
irregular plane. The plane is determined by the placement of three points on two or more
images of different orientations.
Philips

► On the Plan Toolbar, click 3-Point Planning .

⇨ The 3-Point Planning window opens.
3-Point Planning
► To place the three points, click three times in any of the three images selected in the
planning view ports.
To change a point, click on the corresponding button on the 3-Point

Planning window, then click in the image to define the new point.
► To restart, click 3-Point Planning .
► To create the plane based on the 3 points, click 3-Point Planning .

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
6.5.8 Aligning Scans with ScanAlign

Status: Released
ScanAlign allows you to align scans which have been acquired in multiple stations with table
movement to cover long anatomical areas. Typical applications are Whole Body and MobiFlex
or MobiTrak scans.
► Select a scan which has been acquired in multiple stations with table movement.
► On the Plan toolbar, click ScanAlign .
6.5.9 Planning on Movies

Status: Released
You can plan on movies which is especially helpful in Cardiac imaging.

► On the Plan tab, hover over the bottom of a viewport.
⇨ The Movie Bar appears at the bottom of all viewports:
Philips

Planning the Examination Advanced Parameters
► To start the movie, click Play .

Node title (original): Table Movie bar buttons ID: 115196135691-1
Status: Released
Button Description
Set the dimension that is played, e.g. slices or phases.
Set repeat/bounce options:

• Cycle Forward: The images are displayed in a loop in the order 1 ... n, 1 ... n etc.
• Cycle Backward: The images are displayed in a loop in the order n ... 1, n ... 1 etc.
• Bounce: The images are displayed in the order 1 ... n, n ... 1, 1 ... n, etc.
Previous Image: Step backwards through the images of the selected dimension.
Play: Start movie playback.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Pause/stop movie playback.
Next Image: Step forwards through the images of the selected dimension.
Frame Rate: Set movie playback speed.
Toggle Auto Hide:

• If activated, the movie bar disappears when you move the mouse away from it, and
/
reappears when you move the mouse near its place.
• If deactivated, the movie bar keeps visible.
• The button shows the current setting.
Tab. 24: Movie bar buttons

End fragment title: Table Movie bar buttons
6.6 Advanced Parameters

Status: NotReleased

Affix: Advanced Parameters ID: 116296141195
Philips

Advanced Parameters Planning the Examination
The Advanced Parameters allow you to edit all imaging parameters. Only experienced
operators should edit the Advanced Parameters.
You access the Advanced Parameters from the Scan Dashboard: .

• You can minimize, maximize or close the Advanced Parameters window.
• The Advanced Parameters window displays the imaging parameters in groups.
• Besides the imaging parameters, detailed information about the currently planned scan is
given on the scan information page.
6.6.2 Parameter Groups

Status: Released
In MRI, there is a high number of imaging parameters. TheseAdvanced Parameters are divided
in different groups:
• Geometry
All geometry-related parameters.
• Contrast
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
All contrast-related parameters.

• Motion
All motion- and motion compensation-related parameters.
• Dyn/Ang
All parameters related to dynamic and angio imaging.
• Postproc
All parameters related to postprocessing.
• Offc/Ang
All offcenter and angulation parameters.
• Coils
Coil-specific information.
To display the parameters of a group, click on the tab with the group name.
The selected parameter group is displayed on one or more pages. A scroll bar indicates if more
parameters are available.
6.6.3 Scan Information Page

Status: Released
The Scan Information Page (also referred to as Info Page) is automatically displayed in the
Advanced Parameters window. The Scan Information Page displays the scan characteristics of a
planned EC item.
Philips

The table lists the most important scan characteristics applicable for every kind of scan.
Item displayed Description
Total scan duration Scan duration of the current ExamCard item.
Rel. SNR Relative Signal-to-Noise Ratio, more info see below.
ACQ heart phases Actual number of acquired heart phases.
REC heart phases Actual number of reconstructed heart phases
ACQ matrix M x P Acqusition matrix Measurement x Preparation direction.
ACQ voxel MPS (mm) Acquisition voxel size in Measurement, Preparation and Slice
selection direction in millimetres.
REC voxel MPS (mm) Reconstruction voxel size in Measurement, Preparation and Slice
selection direction in millimetres.
Scan percentage (%) Current scan percentage considering all imaging parameters.
WFS (pix) / BW (Hz) Actual Water-Fat Shift in pixels and Bandwidth in Hertz.
SAR / head Specific Absorption Rate / head in %. Depending on the anatomy

scanned, the SAR could also be indicated as e.g. Local torso SAR or
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Local Extremities SAR.
Whole body SAR / level Whole Body SAR in W/kg, and the level indicated as normal or first
level controlled operating mode.
SED Specific Energy Dose in kJ/kg.
Coil Power in %
B1+rms Average RF deposition in the patient, also denoted as B1+RMS in

uTesla.
Max B1+rms Maximum Average RF deposition in the patient, also denoted as

Max B1+RMS in uTesla.
PNS / level Peripheral Nerve Stimulation, and the level indicated as normal or
first level controlled operating mode..
dB/dt The strength of the switching gradient used for imaging.
Sound Pressure level (dB) Sound pressure level. The sound pressure level is given with respect
to an internal acoustic reference level which can be understood as
the standard system noise level. Accordingly, negative/positive
values indicate that the actual sound pressure level is below/above
this reference level.
For more information on SAR, SED, B1, PNS and dB/dt, see Safety chapter of the Instructions for
Use.
Node title (original): 1 EFO ID: 116301971979

Philips
Status: Released

Extended Functional Options on the Scan Information Page

If functionality of the commercial package EFO (Extended Functionality Options) is being used,
an informational parameter EFO Options used is shown on top of the Info Page. This parameter
indicates the number of EFO SW Options used.
End fragment title: 1 EFO
Node title (original): 2 RSL ID: 116301973515

Status: Released
Relative SNR
The Relative SNR
• shows the effects on the SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio) when modifying parameters.
• is displayed as factor where a value of 1.0 is identical to the SNR of the original scan
protocol.
• is not an absolute value, but relative to the SNR of the initial scan protocol.
It is important to realize that the Relative SNR is based on a relative calculation.
Example
If the original slice thickness is halved, the displayed Relative SNR will be 0.5 (relative to the
original procedure).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
If this procedure is saved and retrieved again, the Relative SNR will still be displayed as 0.5.
Modifications are always relative to the starting point which is the original scan protocol.
The Reference Tissue parameter is also included in the RSL-calculation, but it does not affect
the SNR of the image. It can be set to e.g. white matter, muscle, liver, bone marrow and CSF.
The T1- and T2-values of the tissues are taken into account to give a more realistic
interpretation of the SNR changes.
End fragment title: 2 RSL
6.6.4 Editing Advanced Parameters

Status: NotReleased
When you want to edit a parameter, you have to select this parameter first. Once the
parameter is selected, you can enter a new value manually, or select a value from a drop-down
menu or update the current value stepwise.
Selecting a parameter for editing

► To navigate to the parameter for modification, do any of the following:
• In the selected parameter group, scroll with the Down Arrow or Up Arrow keys.
• In the selected parameter group, scroll with the scrollbar.
• { Heuvel, Martina van den, 11/23/2020 2:30:58 PM: needs to be checked}Search for a
parameter:
Type in the first letter of the required parameter’s name. The cursor jumps to the first
Philips

parameter starting with this letter.

Type in the first letter of the required parameter’s name again. The cursor jumps to the
next parameter starting with this letter.
Example (for English UI): Type R. First time cursor jumps to Respiratory compensation.
Type R again. Cursos jumps to REST.
► Click to select the parameter for modification.
Editing the current parameter

There are different ways of how to change the value of the current parameter:
1. Enter the value manually:
– Click into the value field to make it current.
Click again to position the cursor in the value field.
– Delete with the Delete or Backspace key, then enter the value with the keyboard.
2. Select the value from the drop-down menu (applicable for parameters with text strings):
– Click to open the drop-down menu.
– Select the value.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

3. Increase or decrease the parameter values (especially used for numerical values) with
arrow keys or buttons as shown in the table:
Effect Keyboard arrow keys
buttons
To increase parameter value by one Press [Right Arrow] key. Click the Up Arrow button.
To increase parameter value to Press [Shift+Right Arrow]. Press and hold [Shift],
highest possible value then click the Up Arrow button.
To decrease parameter value by one Press [Left Arrow] key. Click the Down Arrow button.
To decrease parameter value to Press [Shift+Left Arrow]. Press and hold [Shift],
lowest possible value then click the Down Arrow button.
Restoring the original value

► To restore the original (or last stored) value of the selected parameter{ Heuvel, Martina
van den, 11/23/2020 2:35:59 PM: check}, press [Shift+Enter].
► To restore the values of all parameters, click and select Reset.

Philips

Undoing previous changes

► To undo previous changes, press{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 11/23/2020 2:35:59 PM:
check} [Ctrl+Z], or
click and select Undo.

The Undo function does not work after having clicked Accept (to accept the planning and the
changes made).
Display helptext for selected parameter

► Press F1 to display the information about the selected parameter.
NOTICE
Not all combinations of parameter values are possible.
In case of conflicts, { Heuvel, Martina van den, 11/23/2020 2:35:59 PM: don't know how this
goes on Artes}. To solve the conflict, refer to the ’Conflicts' tab and the 'Assistance'.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
6.6.5 Parameter benefits and trade-offs

Status: Released
NOTICE
For information about all MR imaging parameters, refer to the Parameter Help.
Press F1 or select Help... from the Navigation bar.
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 11/23/2020 6:22:27 PM: CHECK NEEDED}The relationships
between MR imaging parameters are complex. The table shows the effects of increasing or
enabling a parameter (set to “Yes”) on scan time, resolution, signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and
artifact level for some parameters.
↓ lower, ↑ higher, = unchanged, * more information available in following table
PARAMETER Scan time Resolution SNR Artifacts
NSA ↑ = ↑ ↓
REST ↑ = = ↓
Voxel Size ↓ ↓ ↑ ↓/↑

Philips

PARAMETER Scan time Resolution SNR Artifacts
FOV (in combination with fixed matrix = ↓ ↑ =

size) *
FOV (in combination with fixed voxel ↑ = ↑ =

size) *
Rectangular FOV (%) ↑ = ↑ =
Scan percentage (%) ↑ ↑ ↓ =
Slice thickness = ↓ ↑ =
Scan matrix ↑ ↑ ↓ =
Halfscan ↓ = ↓ ↑
SMART = = = ↓
Water Fat Shift = = ↑ ↑
3D Slices ↑ = ↑ =
SE Flip Angle = = ↓ =
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Flowcomp FFE, TSE = = ↓ ↓
Flowcomp SE = = = ↓
Partial Echo = = ↓/↑ ↓/↑
SPIR / ProSet ↑ = = ↓
SENSE ↓ = ↓ =
The effect of the parameter FOV can differ depending on the way of working: you can either
adjust the matrix size or the voxel size. The table illustrates the effects.
Way of working FOV Scan Pixel size TE TR Scan time SNR
matrix
Matrix size ↓ = ↓ ↑ 1) ↑ 2) ↑ ↓ 3)
Voxel size ↓ ↓ = = = ↓ ↓ 4)
Footnotes:
1. This is valid in case of TE = shortest.
For TE = user defined, this could lead to a conflict
2. This is valid in case of TR = shortest.
3. This is caused by smaller voxels.
4. This is caused by the reduction of scan time.
Philips

Review Tab Reviewing Images
7 Reviewing Images
Status: NotReleased
7.1 Review Tab

Status: Released
In the Review tab, you review the imaging series and you can choose to display the imaging
series differently, e.g. as Maximum- or Minimum-Intensity-Projection, or as Multiple Planar
Reformat. The following UI elements support you:
1. Review toolbar which allows you to optimize the display of the images, and to perform
measurements.
2. Viewports for reviewing.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
7.2 Opening an Imaging Series in the Review Tab

Status: Released
There are various ways of how to open and review imaging series in the Review tab.
Node title (original): 1 Open examination from Patient ID: 116539545227
Directory Status: Released
⊳ From the Patient Directory:

Philips

Reviewing Images Review Toolbar
• Double-click an examination.
• Right-click an examination, then select Review.
• Click an examination, then click the Review button.
⇨ The examination opens in the default layout of 3x2 and displays the center slice of the first
6 imaging series.
End fragment title: 1 Open examination from Patient Directory
Node title (original): 2 Open imaging series from Exam ID: 116539546251
Overview: drag Status: Released
⊳ From the Exam Overview:

► Drag an imaging series from the Thumbnail Overview (or Scan Overview) into a
Reviewviewport.
⇨ The center slice of this imaging series is displayed in the viewport.
A previously displayed imaging series is replaced by the new one.
End fragment title: 2 Open imaging series from Exam Overview: drag
Overview: select 2D Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Right-click an imaging series in the Thumbnail Overview (or Scan Overview), then select
any of the render modes for review, where 2D is the default viewer.
⇨ The imaging series opens in the default layout of 3x2 and displays the center slice of the
first 6 imaging series.
End fragment title: 3 Open imaging series from Exam Overview: select 2D
7.3 Review Toolbar

Status: NotReleased

Affix: Review Toolbar ID: 9007312917176587
Node title (original): Intro Review Toolbar ID: 9007314463903371

Status: NotReleased
The Review Toolbar is available on the Review tab.

It is composed of buttons and drop-down menus that provide access to generic functions to
review imaging series. For drop-down menus, always the currently selected button is visible.
The toolbar changes with the selected render mode.
The Review Toolbar allows you to:
Philips

Review Toolbar Reviewing Images
• Adjust the complete viewing area, including layout selection and the level of image
information.
• Scroll through images, and zoom, pan and window images.
• Perform measurements on images and add annotations.
• Access advanced functionality, such as image sorting, time-intensity diagrams or fibers.
• Capture, export and print images.
End fragment title: Intro Review Toolbar
Node title (original): Review Toolbar ID: 9007313262219659

Status: NotReleased
When you access the Review tab, the default render mode is 2D.
When you switch to other render modes (MPR, MIP, Orthoview, PicturePlus, MobiView),
optional buttons become available.
1 Layout chapter “Layout” on page 928

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
2 Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan, chapter “Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan,
Window, ... Window, ...” on page 928
3 Measurements and Annotations chapter “Measurements and Annotations” on page

929
4 Interaction between Imaging Series chapter “Connecting Viewports and Comparing Imaging
Series” on page 933
5 Image Information chapter “Image Information” on page 934
6 Other Ways of Reviewing Imaging Series chapter “Other Ways of Reviewing Imaging Series” on
page 935
7 Refresh Display chapter “Refresh Display” on page 935
8 Print and Capture Images chapter “Print and Capture Images” on page 936
Tab. 25: Review Toolbar: Default buttons and button groups
Button or button Description Availability More information

group
Orientation of • MPR chapter “Orientation” on page 936

imaging series • MIP
• Orthoview
Roll/Rotate • MPR chapter “Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan,

image • MIP Window, ...” on page 928
• Orthoview
Philips

Button or button Description Availability More information

group
Plane Opacity • Orthoview chapter “Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan,
Window, ...” on page 928
Opacity • Orthoview chapter “Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan,

Window, ...” on page 928
Enhance with • PicturePlus chapter “Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan,
PicturePlus Window, ...” on page 928
Hide Planes • Orthoview chapter “Hide Planes” on page 937
Show Fibers • Orthoview chapter “Other Ways of Reviewing Imaging Series”

on page 935
Tab. 26: Review Toolbar: Optional buttons and button groups

End fragment title: Review Toolbar
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

7.3.2 Layout
Status: Released
The Layout drop-down menu allows you to select how many viewports are distributed over the
screen in rows and columns.
menu
Layout: To select any of the layouts from the drop-down menu. • chapter
“Selecting a
Layout for the
Review Screen”
on page 941
7.3.3 Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan, Window, ...

Status: Released
Philips

Scroll (default setting): • chapter

Drag to scroll through the imaging series (when this button is enabled). “Scrolling
through Images”
on page 944
Zoom: • chapter
Drag to magnify or reduce the image (when this button is enabled). “Zooming in and
out of an Image”
on page 947
Pan: • chapter
Drag to pan a magnified image (when this button is enabled). “Panning an
Image” on page
948
Window: • chapter
Drag to adjust brightness and contrast of an image (when this button is “Windowing:
enabled). Adjusting
Brightness and
Contrast” on
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
page 946
Roll/Rotate: • chapter “Rolling

Drag to roll or rotate the image (when this button is enabled). and Rotating an
• Available only in MPR, MIP and Orthoview. Image” on page
992
Plane Opacity: • chapter

Drag to change the opacity of all planes (when this button is enabled). “Changing the
• Available only in Orthoview. Plane Opacity”
on page 994
Opacity: • chapter
Drag to change the opacity of the fused overlay image (when this button is “Changing the
enabled). Opacity of Fused
• Available only in Orthoview. Overlay Images”
on page 995
Enhance PicturePlus: • chapter

Drag to adjust the PicturePlus filter settings (when this button is enabled). “Enhancing an
• Available only in PicturePlus. Image with
PicturePlus” on
page 951
7.3.4 Measurements and Annotations

Status: Released
Philips


Status: Released
selected.

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

menu

Measurements
with Lines and
Angles
12:53:04 PM: To
do: Link to MAP-
node for
measuring
an image.
operations}
Philips


menu

image.

Status: Released

menu
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Measurements
with ROIs
{ Mann, Michael,
do: Link to MAP-
node for ROI
operations}

Status: Released
Philips

Text Annotations
menu

Images
{ Mann, Michael,
10/30/2020
Link to MAP-node
for annotations}
Node title (original): 04 Buttons Measurements per voxel ID: 115328794251-2

Status: Released
Measurements per Voxel

menu
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Pixel Value: To extract the pixel value from a voxel. • Extracting Values
• Not available on RGB (SC) images from Images
{ Mann, Michael,
10/30/2020
Image Location: To extract the image location value from a voxel. 7:44:42 AM:
doctima To do:
Link to MAP-node
of value
extraction
Patient Location: To extract the patient location value from a voxel.
options}
• Available only when patient coordinates are known.
• Not present for most SC images/screen captures.
End fragment title: 04 Buttons Measurements per voxel
Node title (original): 05 Buttons Toggle graphical objects ID: 115328795275-2

Status: Released
Philips

Hide and Show Measurements and Annotations

Hide Annotations: To show or hide all types of graphical objects (including • chapter
lines, ROIs, text, annotations, arrows, results of measurements). “Toggling the
Display of
Graphical
Objects” on page
972
End fragment title: 05 Buttons Toggle graphical objects
7.3.5 Connecting Viewports and Comparing Imaging Series

Status: Released
These buttons provide several ways to connect the display of the viewports in order to compare
imaging series of the same examination.
These buttons allow you to connect the display of the imaging series in relation to other
imaging series of the same examination.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Show Cross-Reference Lines

Cross-reference lines visualize how the imaging series correlate to each other and to the
planned volume.
menu
Show Cross-Reference Lines (Single Slice): To show the displayed slice of • chapter
the selected view as reference line. “Displaying
Cross-Reference
Lines” on page
973
Show Cross-Reference Lines (Box): To show the outline of the whole
scanned volume, and the mid slice and the current slice.
Show Cross-Reference Lines (All Slices): To show all slices.
Show Cross-Reference Lines (3D Mode): To show how the intersection is

oriented in 3D space.
Philips

Relate Views
Relate Views: To relate the viewports so that the images in all viewports • chapter
follow and show the same position. “Relating the
Views” on page
946
Link Imaging Series (SmartLink)

Link: To apply a link between imaging series of the current examination so • chapter “Linking
that the viewports synchronize during activities. Imaging Series
(SmartLink)” on
page 974
7.3.6 Image Information

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

These buttons allow you to adjust the amount of information given for images and imaging
series. Image information includes: scan number and image number, scan date, information
about scanning settings and duration.
menu
Full Image Information: To display the maximum amount of information • chapter

about the image. “Extending or
Restricting the
Image
Information” on
Intermediate Image Information: To display much, but not all image
page 952
information.
Limited Image Information: To display only basic image information.
No Image Information: To display no image information.

Philips

7.3.7 Other Ways of Reviewing Imaging Series

Status: NotReleased
These buttons provide access to other ways of reviewing imaging series.

Movie Bar: To display the movie bar and play an imaging series as a • chapter “Playing
movie. Movies” on page
976
Image View Settings: To adjust how the different images of a series are • Adjusting Image
sorted in the viewport and to configure scrolling with mouse and Sorting and
keyboard. Scrolling (Image
View Settings)
{ Mann, Michael,
10/30/2020
7:47:51 AM:
doctima To do:
Link to MAP-node
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
for Image View

Settings}
Time-Intensity Diagram: To calculate a Time-Intensity Diagram based on 1 • chapter
or more ROIs. “Calculating a
Time Intensity
Diagram (TID)”
on page 979
Show Fibers: To display the result of Fiber Tracking. • chapter

• Available only in Orthoview “Displaying
Fibers” on page
994
7.3.8 Refresh Display

Status: Released
This button allows you to refresh the display when new images are available.
Refresh: To refresh the display. • chapter

“Refreshing the
Display” on page
953
Philips

7.3.9 Print and Capture Images

Status: Released
These buttons allow you to print images or create and save screen captures.
Node title (original): Print Images ID: 115195784331
Status: Released
Print Images
menu
Add Series To Print: To add an imaging series to the print jobs. • chapter “Adding
Images to Print”
on page 974
Add Images To Print: To add single images to the print jobs.
End fragment title: Print Images
Node title (original): Capture Images ID: 115195785355

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Capture Images
Capture Screen: To create a secondary capture of the viewing area where • chapter
the image data is displayed. “Capturing the
Screen” on page
975
Advanced Capture: To create a secondary capture image of the selected
view as images or series and give the capture a name.
End fragment title: Capture Images
7.3.10 Orientation
Status: Released
Only in MPR, MIP and Orthoview, these buttons allow you to select the orientation (axial,
coronal, or sagittal) for the imaging series.
Philips

Viewports in Review Tab Reviewing Images
Axial: To select an axial orientation for the imaging series. • { Heuvel,

Martina van
den, 12/3/2020
Coronal: To select a coronal orientation for the imaging series.
6:39:26 PM:
reference to
Sagittal: To select a sagittal orientation for the imaging series. MPR MIP
Orthoview}
7.3.11 Hide Planes

Status: Released
In OrthoView, these buttons allow you to hide the plane of the corresponding orientation (axial,
coronal, or sagittal).
Hide Axial Plane: To hide the axial plane. • chapter “Hiding

Planes” on page
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Available only in Orthoview

995
Hide Coronal Plane: To hide the coronal plane.

Hide Sagittal Plane: To hide the sagittal plane.

7.4 Viewports in Review Tab

Status: NotReleased
7.4.1 Viewports in Reviewing

Status: NotReleased
On the Review tab,

• you select the number of viewports with the Layout button, and the number of images per
viewport with the Inner Layout functionality.
• the viewports provide you with a dedicated button to access the review packages MPR,
MIP, OrthoView, MobiView and PicturePlus.
Philips

Reviewing Images Viewports in Review Tab
Node title (original): 0 Viewport intro ID: 116103709451-2

Status: Released
A viewport is a window dedicated to the display of images, e.g. MR slices, reformats or

parameter maps.
• You can maximize (or minimize) and close a viewport.
• Each viewport provides you with information about the image in the viewport.
• To display images in viewports differently, use the toolbars and the context menus.
Context menus are available for each viewport upon right click.
End fragment title: 0 Viewport intro
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

1. Scan number and scan name, e.g. 1,1 or 2,1 or 3,2
where the first digit increases for the scan and the second digit for a postprocessing step (and a newly created
imaging series).
2. Image information
For more information, see Toolbars.
4. Maximize and Close buttons
5. Link icon
6. 3D coordinate system
indicating the directions Head-Feet Anterior-Posterior and Left-Right (LR), and the slice orientation in this 3D
coordinate system.
7. Render mode drop-down menu:
Allows you to access the review packages MPR, MIP, OrthoView, MobiView and PicturePlus.
Philips

Viewports in Review Tab Reviewing Images
7.4.2 Render Modes Overview

Affix: translation set 2 ID: 115631037451
Different render modes (algorithms) are provided to perform review operations and calculate
projections and / or reformats of the original data set.
{ Mann, Michael, 10/30/2020 11:01:21 AM: Also include information about suitable scans, as
in 9007205784209035? }
Node title (original): Render Modes (Table) ID: 115631006091
Status: Released
Button Render Mode Short Description
2D To perform standard review operations (default mode).
MPR MultiPlanar Reformat:

• To create new imaging series with a redefined orientation
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
from the original scan data.

• To create minimum Intensity Projections (new imaging
series based on the voxels with the minimum intensity).
MIP Maximum Intensity Projection:

• To create new imaging series based on the voxels with the
maximum intensity.
Orthoview To review automatically calculated orthogonal MPRs in a

multilayer environment.
Orthoview is an advanced viewer that helps to combine results
from different packages.
You can combine color overlays like f-MRI blobs along with
other objects like fibers from the FiberTrak application.
PicturePlus To apply a filter that reduces the visibility of noise and

artifacts, thereby enhancing the anatomical structures in the
images.
MobiView To create one image from multiple images acquired at several

stations.
Tab. 27: Available Render Modes

End fragment title: Render Modes (Table)
The current render mode is displayed as a button on the viewport toolbar in the upper right of
the viewport. Clicking it opens the drop-down menu for the render modes. Only those render
modes that can be applied to the selected imaging series are displayed in the menu.
Philips

Reviewing Images Viewports in Review Tab
7.4.3 Context Menu in Reviewing

Status: Released
Node title (original): 0 about context menus ID: 116330488843-2

Status: Released
Context menus are available throughout all applications to facilitate the use of the system and
to offer various interaction possibilities.
To access the context menu, simply right-click on any viewport (or other screen area).
End fragment title: 0 about context menus
Node title (original): 1 Context menu Planning - mouse ID: 116330493707-2

behavior Status: Released
Available Options Description More information
• Scroll To change the left mouse behavior: chapter “Left Mouse

• Zoom When you drag (with left mouse button) in a viewport, Behavior: Scroll,
• Pan by default you scroll through images. These options (and Zoom, Pan,
possibly others depending on the render mode) allow Window, ...” on page
• Window 928
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

you to change this behavior.
Inner Layout To select the inner layout for a viewport. chapter “Changing
the Inner Layout of a
Viewport” on page
941
Apply Window To To copy the window settings of the selected image to chapter “Windowing:
other images. Adjusting Brightness
and Contrast” on
page 946
Rotate/Mirror To Rotate Clockwise, Rotate Counter- chapter “Rotating or

ClockwiseMirrorFlip images. Mirroring an Image”
on page 949
Color Map To select a color map for display, chapter “Changing

the Color Scheme of
an Image” on page
950
Invert Gray Scale To invert the gray scale. chapter “Changing

the Color Scheme of
an Image” on page
950
Reset Window To reset window, zoom/pan to the initial settings after chapter “Resetting All
Reset Zoom/Pan you have changed these settings. Changes” on page
951
Reset All
Philips
End fragment title: 1 Context menu Planning - mouse behavior

Routine Procedures Reviewing Images
7.5 Routine Procedures

Status: NotReleased
7.5.1 Setting up the Review Screen

Status: Released
On the Review tab, you specify the Layout and the Inner Layout:
• The Layout specifies the number of viewports.
• The Inner Layout specifies the number of images in a viewport (rows by columns).
7.5.1.1 Selecting a Layout for the Review Screen

Status: Released
You select the number of viewports (in rows by columns) that suits your examination and its
number of imaging series.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
One viewport is reserved for one imaging series.
► On the Review Toolbar, select a layout from the Layout drop-down menu:
> 1x1 ... 4x4.
• The default layout is 2x3, i.e. 2 rows and 3 columns.
• It is not possible to drag and resize the viewports.
• If there are more imaging series than viewports on the screen, viewport tabs provide access
to the surplus series.
7.5.1.2 Changing the Inner Layout of a Viewport

Affix: Layout: Inner Layout ID: 114221923083
Last Content Modificator: Mann, Michael Status: Released
You can apply a predefined layout to a viewport, have a layout applied automatically, or add
and remove rows and columns manually.
Node title (original): Inner Layout 01 - Apply standard layout ID: 114262776075
Status: Released
Philips

Reviewing Images Routine Procedures
To apply any of the standard layouts
► Right-click a viewport and select Inner Layout > 1x1 to 4x4.

End fragment title: Inner Layout 01 - Apply standard layout
Node title (original): Inner Layout 02 - Auto Layout ID: 114262777099

Status: Released
To apply a layout automatically (Auto Layout)
► Right-click a viewport and select Inner Layout > Auto Layout .

• Auto Layout is based on the number of images in the current imaging series.
• Auto Layout shows as many rows and columns as possible, but does not exceed 4x4.
• Auto Layout preferably shows square-shaped tiles and avoids empty rows or columns.
End fragment title: Inner Layout 02 - Auto Layout
Node title (original): Inner Layout 03 - Add or remove rows and ID: 114263405323
columns Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

To add or remove rows and columns
► Right-click a viewport and select Inner Layout .

• To add a row (below), select Add Row [Ctrl+Down Arrow] .
• To add a column (to the right), select Add Column [Ctrl+Right Arrow] .
• To remove a row, select Remove Row [Ctrl+Up Arrow] .
• To remove a column, select Remove Column [Ctrl+Left Arrow] .

Alternatively use the keyboard shortcuts:
• To add a row, press Ctrl+Down Arrow.
• To add a column, press Ctrl+Right Arrow.
• To remove a row, press Ctrl+Up Arrow.
• To remove a column, press Ctrl+Left Arrow.
End fragment title: Inner Layout 03 - Add or remove rows and columns
Node title (original): Inner Layout 04 - Quick maximize with ID: 115628764171
double-click Status: Released
Philips

To quickly maximize an image in a viewport with inner layout

► In a viewport with inner layout applied, double-click the desired image.
⇨ The inner layout of the viewport changes to 1x1 with the selected image displayed.
To restore the previous inner layout of the viewport, press Esc.
End fragment title: Inner Layout 04 - Quick maximize with double-click
Node title (original): Inner Layout 05 - Change sorting ID: 114263406347

Status: Released
To change the sorting order within a viewport

► See chapter “Image Sorting in the Tile Layout” on page 978.
End fragment title: Inner Layout 05 - Change sorting
7.5.1.3 Maximizing One Image or Viewport

Affix: Layout of Viewport Area ID: 114221873419
You can maximize the size of an image or viewport. The viewport then covers the whole
viewport area. The other viewports are moved to tabs. The toolbars and the Exam Overview
remain visible.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
There are 2 ways of maximizing images or viewport: by using the Maximize button or by
double-clicking an image. Note that double-clicking an image changes the inner layout of its
viewport to 1x1. If the inner layout already is 1x1, both ways lead to the identical result.
To maximize one viewport and preserve its inner layout

1. Click Maximize in the upper right of the viewport.
⇨ The selected viewport is maximized.
To return to the previous display:
1. Do any of the following:
• Click Restore in the upper right of the viewport.
• Press Esc.
To maximize one image of a viewport with inner layout applied

1. Double-click the desired image.
⇨ The inner layout of the viewport changes to 1x1 with the selected image displayed.
2. To maximize, do any of the following:
• Double-click the image again.
• Click Maximize in the upper right of the viewport.
⇨ The selected viewport is maximized.
To return to the previous display:
Philips
1. Do any of the following:

• Double-click the image.

• Click Restore in the upper right of the viewport.
• Press Esc.
⇨ The previous screen layout is restored. The inner layout of the viewport remains 1x1.
2. Press Esc.
⇨ The previous inner layout of the viewport is restored.
7.5.1.4 Changing the Order of the Viewports

Affix: Layout of Viewport Area ID: 114221893131
Viewports are automatically filled with imaging series in the order of their scan number (e.g.
1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 4.1, 4.2). You can change the order of the viewports in various ways.
• To close obsolete viewports, click Close .
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• To replace the current imaging series in a viewport, drag another imaging series from
the Exam Overview into this viewport.
It is not possible to drag and move the viewports.
7.5.2 Navigating through Images

Status: Released
7.5.2.1 Scrolling through Images

Status: Released
Node title (original): Scrolling ID: 113956454155

Status: Released
You scroll through images via direct mouse actions or with Arrow keys on the keyboard.
• Direct mouse actions must start in the current viewport. Mouse movement is not limited to
this viewport but to the viewing area of the screen.
• The way of scrolling through images depends on the Image View Settings and the number
of image dimensions (e.g. image type, slices, phases, echoes, dynamics).
For more information, see chapter “Specifying scrolling direction” on page 978.
► To scroll through images, use the mouse or the keyboard keys and do any of the following:
Philips
• On the Plan or Review Toolbar, click Scroll .

Click the image and drag to scroll.
• Right-click an image and select Scroll .

Click the image and drag to scroll.
• With the pointer in the image viewport, press the left and right mouse button and drag
to scroll.
• Click the viewport to make it active.
Press the arrow keys on the keyboard to scroll.
Overview of Mouse and Arrow Keys for Scrolling

To scroll through ... Press the arrow keys Mouse movement Effect on image dimension
1st image dimension Right Arrow right + / left - Movement to the right increases (to the left
Left Arrow decreases) the number of the image
dimension.
2nd image dimension Up Arrow up + / down - Upwards movement increases (downwards

Down Arrow decreases) the number of the image
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
dimension.
3rd image dimension Ctrl+Shift+Up Arrow not applicable Upwards movement increases (downwards
Ctrl+Shift+Down decreases) the number of the image
Arrow dimension.
Further function keys:

• Pos1: 1st image in upwards direction.
• End: Last image in downwards direction.
End fragment title: Scrolling
Node title (original): Scrolling Examples ID: 113956455691

Status: Released
Example: Scrolling in a scan with only one image dimension

The image dataset has only slices.
► In the image viewport, do any of the following:
• Drag upwards or downwards.
• Press the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys.
Example: Scrolling in a scan with two image dimensions

The dataset consists of multiple dynamics with multiple slices. The first image attribute are the
dynamics, the second one are the slices. First all slices for the first dynamic are displayed, then
all slices for the second dynamic and so on.
Through dynamics
Philips
► In the image viewport, drag to the left or to the right.

Through slices
► In the image viewport, drag upwards or downwards.
You can configure the scrolling behavior in the Image View Settings.
End fragment title: Scrolling Examples
7.5.2.2 Relating the Views

Status: Released
You relate the views when you want to display images with the selected target voxel in all
viewports. This is a fast way of navigating to a specific voxel (e.g. anatomic area) with only one
click.
When the views are related, all viewports show the selected voxel (from their perspective).
► On the Review Toolbar, click Relate Views .

► Click in an image to define the target voxel.
⇨ All viewports change accordingly and show an image with the selected target voxel.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

7.5.3 Changing the Display of Images
Status: Released
7.5.3.1 Windowing: Adjusting Brightness and Contrast

Status: Released
Node title (original): Windowing ID: 113956346763

Status: Released
Windowing affects the window level (brightness) and the window width (contrast).
Windowing is performed via direct mouse actions. Direct mouse actions must start in the
current viewport. Mouse movement is not limited to this viewport but to the viewing area of
the screen.
• With the pointer in the image viewport, press the middle mouse button and drag to
adjust brightness and contrast.
• On the Plan Toolbar or Review toolbar, click Window .

Click the image and drag to adjust brightness and contrast.
Philips

• Right-click an image and select Window .

Click the image and drag to adjust brightness and contrast.
Mouse behavior for windowing

• To set the brightness to a darker level, drag the mouse upwards.
• To set the brightness to a brighter level, drag the mouse downwards.
• To apply less contrast to an image, drag the mouse to the right.
• To apply more contrast to an image, drag the mouse to the left.
End fragment title: Windowing
Node title (original): Apply windowing to all images of a ID: 113956348299

dimension Status: Released
To apply the windowing settings to all images of a dimension
► Right-click the image and select Apply Window To.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Select the desired dimension from the submenu.
For example:
• All Slices
• All Phases
• All Image Types
This setting also applies to the selection of color maps and inverting the gray scale. It remains
active until you deactivate it by clicking the same menu item again.
End fragment title: Apply windowing to all images of a dimension
Node title (original): Reset windowing ID: 113956428171

Status: Released
To reset an image to its original window level and width
► Right-click the image and select Reset Window.

This also resets an inverted gray scale. If Apply Window To is active for a dimension, the
current color map is applied to all images of this dimension in the current series.
End fragment title: Reset windowing
7.5.3.2 Zooming in and out of an Image

Status: Released
Philips

Node title (original): Zooming ID: 113852005259

Status: Released
Zooming is performed via direct mouse actions. Direct mouse actions must start in the current
viewport. Mouse movement is not limited to this viewport but to the viewing area of the
screen.
• With the pointer in the image viewport, press the middle and right mouse button and
drag to zoom.
• On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, click Zoom .

Click the image and drag to zoom.
• Right-click an image and select Zoom .

Click the image and drag to zoom.
Mouse behavior for zooming
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• To zoom in (with a maximum zoom factor of 15), move the mouse upwards.
• To zoom out (with a minimum zoom factor of 0.13), move the mouse downwards.
End fragment title: Zooming
Node title (original): Reset Zooming-Panning ID: 113956436363-1

Status: Released
To reset an image to its original zoom and pan values
► Right-click the image and select Reset Zoom/Pan.

End fragment title: Reset Zooming-Panning
7.5.3.3 Panning an Image

Status: Released
Node title (original): Panning ID: 113855283467

Status: Released
Panning is performed via direct mouse actions. Direct mouse actions must start in the current
viewport. Mouse movement is not limited to this viewport but to the viewing area of the
screen.
• With the pointer in the image viewport, press the middle and left mouse button and
drag to pan.
Philips

• On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, click Pan .

Click the image and drag to pan.
• Right-click an image and select Pan .

Click the image and drag to pan.
End fragment title: Panning
Node title (original): Reset Zooming-Panning ID: 113956436363-2

Status: Released
To reset an image to its original zoom and pan values
► Right-click the image and select Reset Zoom/Pan.

End fragment title: Reset Zooming-Panning
7.5.3.4 Rotating or Mirroring an Image

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

You can rotate an image clockwise or counter-clockwise, mirror it (horizontally) or flip it

(vertically).
Node title (original): Rotate image ID: 114263424907
Status: Released
To rotate the image in a viewport

► Right-click the image and select any of the following:
• Rotate/Mirror > Rotate Clockwise
• Rotate/Mirror > Rotate Counter-Clockwise

End fragment title: Rotate image
Node title (original): Mirror or flip image ID: 114263425931

Status: Released
To mirror or flip the image in a viewport

► Right-click the image and select any of the following:
• Rotate/Mirror > Mirror
• Rotate/Mirror > Flip

Philips
End fragment title: Mirror or flip image

7.5.3.5 Changing the Color Scheme of an Image

Status: Released
You can display a negative image (invert the gray scale) of the current viewport or apply a color
map to the image.
Node title (original): Change color: Invert Gray Scale ID: 115162410251
Status: Released
To display a negative image

Displaying a negative image sets all the pixel values to their opposite value on a color wheel:
white becomes black, and vice versa.
► Right-click the image and select Invert Gray Scale .
To return to the default gray scale, right-click the image and select Invert Gray Scale
again.
End fragment title: Change color: Invert Gray Scale
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): Change color: Color map ID: 115162411275
Status: Released
To apply a color map

By applying a color map, the image is colorized: pixel values are set to a corresponding color in
the color map.
⊳ You are in 2D render mode.
► Right-click the image, select Color Map , and choose a color map.
To return to the default gray scale, select Original Grayscale from the Color Map submenu.
► To show (or hide) the color scale of the selected color map, right-click the image and select
Show Color Scale .

End fragment title: Change color: Color map
Node title (original): Apply window setting to all images or ID: 115162412299
current image only Status: Released
By default, changes in window level are applied to the whole series (e.g. all slices).
Philips

To deactivate or activate the application to all images, right-click the image, select Apply
Window To, and choose a dimension from the submenu.
End fragment title: Apply window setting to all images or current image only
7.5.3.6 Enhancing an Image with PicturePlus

Status: Released
You can enhance an image with PicturePlus by mouse actions or by entering numeric values for
Smooth and Edge.
Node title (original): Applying PicturePlus ID: 114220839819-1
Status: Released
⊳ You are in PicturePlus render mode.

▻ In PicturePlus, the left mouse behavior is automatically set to Enhance PicturePlus.
► To change edge enhancement and smoothing with the mouse, drag horizontally and
vertically.
Horizontal movement changes edge enhancement (increasing values from left to right).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Vertical movement changes smoothing (increasing values from the bottom up).
⇨ The numeric values of Smooth and Edge are displayed in real time in the top row of the
viewport.
► To change edge enhancement and smoothing by entering numeric values, click the values
Smooth and Edge in the top row of the viewport. Then enter numeric values in the input
fields, or use the Up and Down arrows next to the input fields.
► To save the images as new imaging series, enter a series name first. Then click Create.
⇨ The Create button changes to Submitted, and the Job Viewer notifies you about this new
job.
⇨ A new imaging series is created within the current examination.
End fragment title: Applying PicturePlus
Node title (original): 2 Reset PicturePlus ID: 114220854283-1

Status: Released
To reset the changes

► Right-click the image and select PicturePlus Presets > Smooth0 Edge0.
⇨ Edge enhancement and smoothing are reset to 0.
End fragment title: 2 Reset PicturePlus
7.5.3.7 Resetting All Changes

Status: Released
Resetting all changes sets the image back to its original state.
Philips

• Zooming, panning, windowing, and similar actions, are undone.

• Graphical objects (measurement lines, ROIs, annotations) are deleted.
• Mouse behavior is set to Scroll.
• Apply Window To is activated for all dimensions.
This action applies to all images of the current series.
Node title (original): Reset All ID: 114228181643
Status: Released
To reset all changes

► Right-click the image and select Reset All.
End fragment title: Reset All
7.5.3.8 Extending or Restricting the Image Information

Status: Released
Images are displayed with Image Information in the upper left corner of each viewport. By
default, Limited Image Information is displayed which provides the regular information. You
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

can extend or restrict the image information in the viewports.
This setting applies to all the viewports, not one single viewport only.
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, do any of the following:
• To display full image information, click Full Image Information .

• To display an intermediate amount of image information, click Intermediate Image
Information .
• To display limited image information, click Limited Image Information .
• To hide all image information, click No Image Information .

Philips

No Image Information Image information is hidden.
Limited Image Information • Scan number (e.g. 2,1 or 3,2 where the first digit increases for the scan and
the second digit for a postprocessing step (and a newly created imaging
series).
• Slice number/total number of slices (e.g. 7/15 stands for slice 7 of 15 slices)
• Scan technique/image type
e.g. (T)SE - (Turbo) Spin Echo, FFE - Fast Field Echo, (B-)TFE - (Balanced) TFE
e.g. M - Modulus, P - Phase, R - Real, I - Imaginary, SW_M,R,I,P -
Susceptibility Weighted-M,R,I,P
• TR, TE
• Dt (dynamic time) - only applicable for dynamic imaging series
• Td (Trigger delay) - only applicable for triggered imaging series
• Ec1, Ec2 - only applicable for multi-echo imaging series
Intermediate Image Information Limited Image Information PLUS:

• Date and time
• Flip angle
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• FOV
• Slice thickness and gap
Full Image Information Intermediate Image Information PLUS:

• NSA (Number of Signals Averaged)
• TF (Turbofactor), if applicable
• Scan duration
• Acquired voxel size
• Geometry Correction, if applicable
7.5.3.9 Refreshing the Display

Status: Released
This button is only active when new images become available in the selected series after the
reviewing started.
► On the Review Toolbar, click Refresh .
7.5.4 Measuring with Lines

Status: Released
Philips

Node title (original): Intro (Measuring Lines/Angles) ID: 115001158155

Status: Released
You measure distances and angles with lines which are defined by anchor points. The more
anchor points, the more precise the definition of an irregular line. Once the lines (for distance
or angle) are confirmed, you can still reposition or resize the lines when you drag any of the
anchor points.
You can move a line or an angle by dragging it.
End fragment title: Intro (Measuring Lines/Angles)
7.5.4.1 Measuring a Distance

Status: Released
Node title (original): Measure the distance ID: 115000305803

Status: Released
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Distance from the Measurements
drop-down menu.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Click in an image to define the start point, click again to define the end point of a line.
• Click and drag in an image to define a line.
⇨ The length of the line is displayed.
End fragment title: Measure the distance
Node title (original): Toggling measurement information for ID: 116317038603-1

lines Status: Released
To hide or show the length

► Right-click a line and select Properties > Length.
Philips

⇨ The length of the line is hidden or shown.

End fragment title: Toggling measurement information for lines
7.5.4.2 Measuring the Length of a Polyline

Status: Released
Node title (original): Measure polyline ID: 115000551435

Status: Released
• To draw a smooth polyline, select Smooth Polyline from the Measurements

drop-down menu on the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar.
• To draw a polyline, select Polyline from the Measurements drop-down menu

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
on the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar.

► To define the line by anchor points, click several times in the image.
► Double-click to end drawing and to confirm the shape.
⇨ The length of the line is displayed.
Node title (original): To add points to a polyline or smooth ID: 115000579211

polyline Status: Released
To add anchor points

► Click the polyline to select it.
► Click on the line where a + symbol is displayed at the cursor.
Philips

⇨ A new anchor point is added to the line.
⇨ You can drag any anchor point to change the shape.

End fragment title: To add points to a polyline or smooth polyline
Node title (original): To extend a polyline or smooth polyline ID: 115000585611

Status: Released
To extend a polyline or smooth polyline

► Right-click the polyline and select Extend Curve.
► To extend the line, click in the image.
⇨ A new anchor point is added to the line.
The line is extended from the end that is closest to the new anchor point.
End fragment title: To extend a polyline or smooth polyline
End fragment title: Measure polyline
Node title (original): Toggling measurement information for ID: 116317038603-2

lines Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

To hide or show the length
⇨ The length of the line is hidden or shown.
End fragment title: Toggling measurement information for lines
7.5.4.3 Displaying the Profile of a Line

Status: Released
The profile of a line is displayed as a line graph of Pixel Value versus Millimeters.
Node title (original): Displaying the profile ID: 115001220875
Status: Released
⊳ Prerequisite: You have already drawn a line (e.g. to measure a distance).

► Right-click the line and select Show Profile.
⇨ The profile is displayed within the image.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
To hide the profile

► Right-click the line and select Hide Profile.
End fragment title: Displaying the profile
7.5.4.4 Measuring an Angle between Three Points

Status: Released
Node title (original): Measure angle ID: 115000858763

Status: Released
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Angle from the Measurements
drop-down menu.
► To define the angle, click three times in an image.
⇨ The angle is displayed.
Philips

Node title (original): Display length of angle sides ID: 115207915659-1

Status: Released
To display the length of the angle sides

⇨ The lengths of the side lines are displayed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Display length of angle sides
End fragment title: Measure angle
7.5.4.5 Measuring an Open Angle

Status: Released
Node title (original): Measure open angle ID: 115001080075

Status: Released
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Open Angle from the
Measurements drop-down menu.
► To define the open angle, click four times in an image.
⇨ The angle is displayed.
Philips

Node title (original): Display length of angle sides ID: 115207915659-2

Status: Released
To display the length of the angle sides

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⇨ The lengths of the side lines are displayed.

End fragment title: Display length of angle sides
End fragment title: Measure open angle
7.5.5 Measuring with ROIs

Status: Released
Node title (original): Intro (Measuring ROIs) ID: 115001759883

Status: Released
Measuring with Regions of Interest (ROIs) allows you to retrieve information about a delimited
area within an image. These ROIs are defined by anchor points. The more anchor points, the
more precise the ROI can be drawn. Once the ROI is confirmed, you can still reposition, edit or
resize the ROI when you drag any of the anchor points.
You can move a ROI by dragging it.
End fragment title: Intro (Measuring ROIs)
7.5.5.1 Measurement Results

Status: Released
Node title (original): Legend for Measurement Information ID: 115001705483

Status: Released
When you perform measurements with ROIs, the results are displayed with the ROI. The table
gives an overview of the possible results.
Philips

Abbreviation Description
Ar Area (mm²)
Av Average value
SD Standard Deviation
Perim Perimeter (mm)
MaxD Maximum diameter (mm) [optional]
MinD Minimum diameter (mm) [optional]
LA Long axis (mm) [optional]
SA Short axis (mm) [optional]
LA via centroid Long axis / Long axis via centroid (mm) [optional]
SA via centroid Short axis / Short axis via centroid (mm) [optional]
AAD Average Absolute Deviation [optional]
Tab. 28: Legend for Measurement Results
Optional information can be displayed via the context menu > Properties. Not every type of
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

optional information is available for every type of ROI.
To move the measurement result (closer to the ROI or further away), drag the result.
End fragment title: Legend for Measurement Information
7.5.5.2 Selecting Measurement Results for Display

Status: Released
Node title (original): Toggling measurement information for ID: 115003392523

ROIs Status: Released
► Right-click the ROI and select Properties.

► In the submenu, do any of the following:
• To hide or show the maximum (MaxD) and minimum (MinD) diameter, select Max/Min
Diameter.
• To hide or show the length of the long (LA) and short (SA) axes, select Long/Short Axes.
• To hide or show the length of the long and short axes using the centroid, select Long/
Short Axes using Centroid.
• To hide or show the average absolute deviation (AAD), select AAD.
⇨ The corresponding information is hidden or shown.
End fragment title: Toggling measurement information for ROIs
Not every type of optional information is available for every type of ROI.
Philips

7.5.5.3 Measuring with a Freehand ROI

Status: Released
Node title (original): Measuring Freehand ROI ID: 115001800587

Status: Released
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Freehand Contour from the ROI
drop-down menu.
► To draw the freehand contour, click an image and drag.
► To finish the contour, release the mouse button.
⇨ The start and end points of the contour are connected by a straight line.
⇨ The measurement results are displayed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⇨
• To show the diameter lines, right-click the ROI and select Graphics Properties > Show
Diameters.
To modify the shape of a freehand ROI

► Hover over the ROI to select it.
► Click where a + symbol is displayed at the cursor and drag to draw a line.
► To finish the modification, release the mouse button.
Philips

⇨ Areas that are cut off by the line are deleted from the ROI.
Areas that are added by the line are included into the ROI.
End fragment title: Measuring Freehand ROI
7.5.5.4 Measuring with a Smoothed Polygon ROI

Status: Released
Node title (original): Measuring Smoothed Polygon ROI ID: 115002078091

Status: Released
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Smoothed Polygon from the ROI
drop-down menu.
► To define the polygon, click as often as needed (no dragging).
To cancel the entire contour, press Esc.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⇨
Diameters.
• To modify the shape of a ROI, click it to select it. Then drag any of the anchor points
available on the contour.
Philips

• To add anchor points to a smoothed polygon ROI, click it to make it active and click on the
contour where a 'plus' symbol is displayed at the cursor.
End fragment title: Measuring Smoothed Polygon ROI
7.5.5.5 Measuring with an Elliptical ROI

Status: Released
Node title (original): Measuring Elliptical ROI ID: 115002342923

Status: Released
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Ellipse from the ROI drop-down
menu.
► To define the ellipse, click in an image and drag.
► To finish the ellipse, release the mouse button.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⇨
• To rotate the shape:
– Right-click the shape and select Rotate.
– To rotate the shape, drag any of the anchor.
Take care because the shape changes while rotating.
Philips

Diameters.
End fragment title: Measuring Elliptical ROI
7.5.5.6 Measuring with a Circular ROI

Status: Released
Node title (original): Measuring Circular ROI ID: 115002608139

Status: Released
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Circle from the ROI drop-down
menu.
► To define the circle, click in an image and drag.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⇨
End fragment title: Measuring Circular ROI
7.5.5.7 Measuring with a Rectangular ROI

Status: Released
Philips

Node title (original): Measuring Rectangular ROI ID: 115002873355

Status: Released
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Rectangle from the ROI drop-
down menu.
► To define the rectangle, click in an image and drag.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⇨
• To rotate the shape:
– Right-click the shape and select Rotate.
– Drag any of the corner points to rotate.
Take care because the shape changes while rotating.
End fragment title: Measuring Rectangular ROI
7.5.5.8 Calculating a Histogram from a ROI

Status: Released
The histogram shows the distribution of Pixel Values within the area defined by the ROI.
Node title (original): Displaying a Histogram ID: 115003143819
Status: Released
Philips

► Right-click the ROI and select Show Histogram.

⇨ The histogram is shown inside the image.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨
• To move the histogram, drag it.
• To resize the histogram, click it to select it. Then drag the anchor points at the vertical and
horizontal axes.
• To hide the Histogram, right-click the ROI and select Hide Histogram.
End fragment title: Displaying a Histogram
7.5.6 Annotating Images

Status: Released
Node title (original): Intro (Annotating Images) ID: 115004485387

Status: Released
You can insert a text box or an arrow with text box at any place in an image, or you can add an
annotation to an existing line or ROI.
You can move a text box or the arrowhead by dragging it.
End fragment title: Intro (Annotating Images)
7.5.6.1 Inserting an Annotation Text Box

Status: Released
Node title (original): Overlay text box ID: 115004337547

Philips
Status: Released

► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Text Annotation from the
Annotations drop-down menu.
► Click in an image to create a text box.
► Type text into the text box.
► Press Enter to confirm.
End fragment title: Overlay text box
7.5.6.2 Inserting a Text Box with an Arrow

Status: Released
Node title (original): Overlay arrow with text box ID: 115004400267
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Arrow + Text Annotation from the
Annotations drop-down menu.
• Click in an image to set the arrowhead, click again to create a text box at that position.
• Click in an image to set the arrowhead and drag to the position for the text box.
End fragment title: Overlay arrow with text box
You can leave the text box empty and use the arrow only.
7.5.6.3 Adding an Annotation to a Line or a ROI

Status: Released
You can add an intrinsic text box to a ROI or line.

Node title (original): Add annotation via Contextmenu-Edit ID: 115004476939
Status: Released
► Right-click the line or ROI and select Edit.

⇨ A text box appears in the image.
Philips


End fragment title: Add annotation via Contextmenu-Edit
This type of annotation can be edited. It can only be deleted as part of the ROI or line, or by
removing the text from this intrinsic text box.
7.5.7 Extracting Values from Images

Status: Released
Node title (original): Intro (Extracting Values) ID: 115007846027

Status: Released
You can perform measurements per voxel and extract the value of a pixel (intensity value), the
value of the patient location, or the value of the image location.
End fragment title: Intro (Extracting Values)
7.5.7.1 Extracting the Pixel Value (Intensity Value)

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): Extracting Pixel Value ID: 115007781771
Status: Released
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Pixel Value from the
Measurements per Voxel drop-down menu.
► Click in an image to mark a point.
⇨ The intensity value for this point is displayed.
⇨
End fragment title: Extracting Pixel Value
7.5.7.2 Extracting the Patient Location Value

Status: Released
Philips

Node title (original): Extracting Patient Location Value ID: 115007894795

Status: Released
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Patient Location from the
⇨ The patient location value for this point is displayed (L-R = left-right, A-P = anterior-
posterior, H-F = head-feet).
⇨
End fragment title: Extracting Patient Location Value
7.5.7.3 Extracting the Image Location Value

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Node title (original): Extracting Image Location Value ID: 115007969291

Status: Released
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, select Image Location from the
⇨ The image location value for this point is displayed (X = horizontal, Y = vertical coordinate
value).
Philips

⇨
End fragment title: Extracting Image Location Value
7.5.8 Editing Graphical Objects

Status: Released
Node title (original): Intro (General Graphical Objects ID: 114901075979

Operations) Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Graphical objects are objects drawn on images: measurement lines, ROIs, or annotations. This
section explains how to perform general operations with graphical objects, such as copying,
deleting, changing font size or line width.
End fragment title: Intro (General Graphical Objects Operations)
7.5.8.1 Changing the Font Size of Graphical Objects

Status: Released
► Right-click the text on the image and select Graphics Properties > Font Size.
► Select a font size from the submenu.
7.5.8.2 Changing the Width of a Line

Status: Released
► Right-click the line drawn on the image and select Graphics Properties > Line Width.
► Select a line width from the submenu.
Philips

7.5.8.3 Copying a Graphical Object

Status: Released
Copy to all slices of the current series

► To copy a graphical object to all slices of the current series, right-click the object and select
Copy to All.
⇨ The object is copied to all the other slices in the current series. These objects now form a
group.
It is not possible to copy a graphical object to all the other viewports that way. To copy a object
to all the other viewports, copy and paste the object into every viewport separately.
Copy to another image

► To copy a graphical object to another image, right-click the object and select Copy.
⇨ The object is copied to the clipboard.
► Right-click the target image and select Paste Graphics.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⇨ The object is inserted into the target image.
7.5.8.4 Cutting a Graphical Object

Status: Released
► Right-click the object on the image and select Cut.

⇨ The object is deleted from the current image, but it is kept in the clipboard.
To insert a graphical object from the clipboard:
► Right-click the target image and select Paste Graphics.
7.5.8.5 Deleting a Graphical Object

Status: Released
Node title (original): To delete a graphical object ID: 114898351627

Status: Released
To delete a single graphical object

⊳ The object is not part of a group. If it is part of a group, see: To delete a graphical object
from a group.
► Right-click the object and select Delete.
Philips

⇨ The object is deleted from the current image and is not kept in the clipboard.
End fragment title: To delete a graphical object
Node title (original): To delete a graphical object from a group ID: 114898358923
Status: Released
To delete a graphical object from a group

► Right-click the object and select Remove from Group.
► Right-click the object again and select Delete.
⇨ The object is deleted from the current image. The other objects of the group still exist.
End fragment title: To delete a graphical object from a group
Node title (original): To delete an object group ID: 114898364299

Status: Released
To delete an object group

► Right-click an object that belongs to the group and select Delete Group.
⇨ All objects that belong to the object group are deleted from the series.
End fragment title: To delete an object group
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

7.5.8.6 Hiding a Graphical Object
Status: Released
Node title (original): Hide a (single) graphical object ID: 115179255179-1

Status: Released
► Right-click the object and select Hide.

⇨ The object is hidden.
There is no option to show a single hidden object. Toggle the display of all graphical objects to
display hidden elements.
End fragment title: Hide a (single) graphical object
7.5.8.7 Toggling the Display of Graphical Objects

Status: Released
You can hide, and show, all graphical objects at once, or hide single objects.
Node title (original): To toggle the display of all graphical ID: 114924089739
objects Status: Released
To toggle the display of all graphical objects

Graphical objects include lines, ROIs, textual annotations, arrows, and results of measurements.
This action affects all viewports.
Philips

► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, click Show/Hide Annotations .

⇨ If the graphical objects were displayed before, they are now hidden.
⇨ If the graphical objects were hidden before, they are now displayed.
End fragment title: To toggle the display of all graphical objects
Node title (original): To hide a single graphical object ID: 114901082635

Status: Released
To hide a single graphical object

Node title (original): Hide a (single) graphical object ID: 115179255179-2
Status: Released
► Right-click the object and select Hide.

⇨ The object is hidden.
There is no option to show a single hidden object. Toggle the display of all graphical objects to
display hidden elements.
End fragment title: Hide a (single) graphical object
End fragment title: To hide a single graphical object
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
7.5.9 Relations between Imaging Series

Affix: stupid title ID: 115164489227
7.5.9.1 Displaying Cross-Reference Lines

Status: Released
Cross-reference lines visualize how the imaging series correlate to each other and to the
planned volume.
► On the Review Toolbar, do any of the following:
• To display cross-reference lines for a single slice, click Show Cross-Reference Lines
(Single Slice) .
• To display cross-reference lines in box mode, click Show Cross-Reference Lines (Box)
.
Philips

• To display cross-reference lines for all slices, click Show Cross-Reference Lines (All
Slices) .
• To display cross-reference lines in 3D mode, click Show Cross-Reference Lines (3D
Mode) .
7.5.9.2 Linking Imaging Series (SmartLink)

Status: Released
When imaging series are linked, scrolling, zooming or panning in one viewport affects the other
viewports in the same way.
► On the Review Toolbar, click Link .
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨ SmartLink is activated and a graphic link button is displayed in every view that is linked
to the current view.
⇨ The imaging series are now linked.
► To stop SmartLink and unlink imaging series, do any of the following:
• To stop SmartLink for all viewports, click Link on the Review Toolbar.
• To unlink an individual series, click the graphic link button in its viewport.
7.5.10 Print and Secondary Capture

Status: Released
7.5.10.1 Adding Images to Print

Status: Released
► Select images:
• To select 1 image, click it.
• To select non-consecutive images, press Ctrl and click the images.
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, do any of the following:
Philips

• To print the selected imaging series, select Add Series To Print from the drop-
down menu.
• To print the selected images, select Add Images To Print from the drop-down
menu.
⇨ The selection is added to the Print tab.
► Change to the Print tab: On the Patient Tasks Bar, click Print.
► Configure the print output as desired: see chapter “Functional Description” on page 1164.
{ Mann, Michael, 10/14/2020 4:17:51 PM: doctima To do: Link to "Printing" Map node or
main "Printing" operation node }
► Click Print.
If you want to print the entire examination, you have to add all series to the Print tab.
If you want to print a series with a color map applied, you have to create an advanced capture
of this series and add this capture to print.
7.5.10.2 Capturing the Screen

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
You capture images to save them as part of the examination.

When Capture is completed, you get a message New series is available for viewing. You can
also track this job in the Job Viewer.
Node title (original): Capture Screen ID: 115183207947
Status: Released
To create a secondary capture of the current viewing area
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, click Capture Screen .

⇨ The capture is added to the current exam and can be accessed via the Thumbnail Overview
of the Exam Overview.
Capture Screen is disabled if series from multiple studies are loaded into review.
End fragment title: Capture Screen
Node title (original): Advanced Capture ID: 115183208971

Status: Released
To create a secondary capture with advanced options
► On the Review Toolbar, click Advanced Capture .

⇨ The Advanced Capture window opens.
Philips

► At Type, select the type of the new capture.

• Images: Capture the selected image(s).
This choice captures the full content of the selected viewport. If you just want to
capture a single image of a viewport with inner layout, first maximize the image within
the view.
• Series: Capture the selected imaging series.
This choice captures the series with the color map applied and send the capture to PACS
or print.
• Screen: Capture the viewing area (all viewports).
► Only if you selected the type Series, select what to include (e.g. All slices, All dynamics, All
image types).
The options available depend on the selected imaging series.
► At Name, type the name of the capture series.
► Click Capture.
⇨ The capture is added to the current exam and can be accessed via the Thumbnail Overview
of the Exam Overview.
End fragment title: Advanced Capture
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

7.5.11 Movies
Status: NotReleased
You play movies to get an overview of all images available. You can play a movie for all image
types, for example slices, phases or dynamics.
7.5.11.1 Playing Movies

Status: NotReleased
Imaging series that consist of more than 1 image can be displayed as movies.
► On the Review Toolbar, click Movie Bar .

► Hover over the bottom of a viewport.

Status: Released
Philips

Image View Settings Reviewing Images
Button Description

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Toggle Auto Hide:

/

7.6 Image View Settings

Status: Released
Node title (original): Intro (Image View Settings) ID: 115008035851

Status: Released
The Image View Settings window hat two tabs:

• Display Sorting:
To set how imaging series and dimensions are displayed in the viewports.
• Scrolling Directions:
To set which dimensions are controlled when scrolling horizontally and vertically with the
mouse or keyboard.
Philips

Reviewing Images Image View Settings
Note that all changes made in these settings take effect immediately, they do not have to be
confirmed or saved.
End fragment title: Intro (Image View Settings)
7.6.1 Image Sorting in the Tile Layout

Status: Released
Here you specify how the images are sorted in the tile layout. This setting is useful for all
imaging series with more than one imaging dimension (e.g. image type, slices, phases, echoes,
dynamics).
Node title (original): Configure display sorting ID: 115008012811
Status: Released
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, click Image View Settings .

⇨ The Image View Settings window opens.
► Click Display Sorting.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► At Image Sorting in the Tile Layout: Select the image sorting.
• 1 Dimension: One imaging dimension is shown in the viewport. All images are displayed
in one row (X direction) which is wrapped to fill the entire screen.
• 2 Dimensions (Matrix Layout): Two imaging dimensions are shown in the viewport
area, one along the X-direction, one along the Y-direction and in case of more than 2
dimensions as layers in the Z-direction.
• All Images (Sequentially): All images (all dimensions) are ordered in a line.
► At Displayed Dimension: Select the dimension(s) to be displayed (e.g. Image Type, Slices,
Phases)
► At Reverse Slice Order: Choose whether to reverse the order of the slices.
► To close the window, click .

End fragment title: Configure display sorting
7.6.2 Specifying scrolling direction

Status: Released
Here you specify the scrolling directions (horizontal or vertical scrolling) for imaging series with
multiple dimensions (e.g. image type, slices, phases, echoes, dynamics).
Node title (original): Configure scrolling directions ID: 115008068491
Status: Released
Philips

Time Intensity Diagram (TID) Reviewing Images
► On the Plan Toolbar or Review Toolbar, click Image View Settings .

⇨ The Image View Settings window opens.
► Click Scrolling Directions.
► Configure the settings.
The availability of settings depends on the configuration in the Display Sorting tab.
• At Horizontal mouse/keyboard function: Select the dimension to control.
• At Vertical mouse/keyboard function: Select the dimension to control.
• At Additional keyboard function: Select the dimension to control.
► To close the window, click .

End fragment title: Configure scrolling directions
7.7 Time Intensity Diagram (TID)

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
7.7.1 Calculating a Time Intensity Diagram (TID)

Status: Released
You calculate a TID to review the signal intensity change over time. The TID functionality
provides you with a graph and a table of results.
⊳ Prerequisite: A dynamic imaging series with multiple dynamics is displayed in the current
viewport.
► On the Review Toolbar, click Time-Intensity Diagram .

⇨ The Time-Intensity Diagram window opens.
► At Draw ROI : Select the type of ROI to be drawn from the drop-down
menu:
• Circle
• Freehand Contour
► Draw the ROI in an image.
⇨ The shape is automatically copied to all images of the (dynamic) series.
Philips

Reviewing Images MPR and MIP Render Modes
► At Show Graph : Select whether to show or hide the TID.

• Button active: The TID is displayed at the bottom of the viewport area.
• Button inactive: The TID is hidden.
► At X-axis: Select the dimension for the x-axis from the drop-down menu.
The options available here depend on the scan data. The dimension of the y-axis is the
mean pixel value (intensity).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• In the line graph, each data point corresponds to the mean pixel value (intensity) of the ROI
in a scan phase.
• A vertical bar in the diagram signals the current phase and time. If you click a scan phase
image, the bar moves to the corresponding time. If you drag the bar, the corresponding
scan phase image is highlighted. The bar can only be dragged to data points, not between
them.
• You can draw more than one ROI on the images.
• To move a ROI, drag it.
• Changes made to a ROI in one image automatically apply to the ROIs in the other images.
The results and the TID are updated automatically according to the new position and shape
of the ROI.
• To close the Time Intensity Diagram window, click Exit Window . To reopen it, click
Time-Intensity Diagram on the Review Toolbar again.
7.8 MPR and MIP Render Modes

Philips
Status: Released

MPR and MIP Render Modes Reviewing Images

Affix: MPR render mode ID: 116441865099
Node title (original): 1 MPR allows you to calculate ID: 116519533323

Status: Released
MPR render mode allows you to calculate:

• MultiPlanar Reformats (MPR).
– MPR calculation converts a volume that is acquired in a certain plane, into another
plane.
– Suitable scans are 3D scans, preferably high-resolution scans with thin slices and
isotropic voxels.
• Minimum Intensity Projections (MinIP).
– With MinIP, you visualize structures with low intensity in an acquired volume.
– Suitable scans are Black blood scans, and VENBOLD (PRESTO based) scans.
• Slab Maximum Intensity Projections (Slab MIP).
– A Slab MIP is a Maximum Intensity Projection from only a few images (whereas the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
volume MIP is calculated from the complete acquired volume).

– Suitable scans are Susceptibility weighted scans and M2D balanced-FFE scans.
End fragment title: 1 MPR allows you to calculate
Node title (original): 2 Main features of MPR render mode ID: 116519534347
Status: Released
What are the main features of MPR render mode?

• In MPR render mode, you review the selected imaging series in another plane than initially
acquired, or in the same plane as initially acquired but with another slice thickness. MPR
render mode provides you with an image display which allows to scroll through the newly
created images (projections or reformats).
• MPR render mode allows you to calculate images (projections or reformats) in any required
orientation, orthogonal, oblique, double oblique, or radial.
• You exclude (or include) regions from the calculation to focus on the anatomy of interest.
• You review the newly calculated images in real-time mode, or you create new imaging
series consisting of MPRs.
End fragment title: 2 Main features of MPR render mode

Affix: MIP render mode ID: 116519545099
Node title (original): 1 MIP render mode allows you to calculate ID: 116519554571
Status: Released
Philips

MIP render mode allows you to calculate:

• Volume Maximum Intensity Projections (MIP):
– You visualize structures with high intensity in an acquired volume.
The volume MIP is calculated from the complete acquired volume (whereas a Slab MIP
is a MIP from only a few images).
– Suitable scans are 3D PCA scan, 3D/M2D Inflow scan and Contrast-Enhanced MRA
scans.
• Volume Rendering (Vol.Rend.):
– Volume Rendering is a visualization technique which creates a 2D projection from a 3D
scan.
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 12/4/2020 1:42:41 PM: ... Once that 3D data set is
captured, rendering a 2D projection of it is next. However, it is first necessary to define
the volume relative to the position of the camera in space. Users then must define each
voxel's color and opacity, typically using an RGBA transfer function.}{ Heuvel, Martina
van den, 12/4/2020 1:44:42 PM: Volume rendering identifies and classifies relevant
information, specifically colors and opacities, and assigns them to voxels based on
information about them. Both high quality data and choice of technique affect volume
rendering quality.}
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

– Suitable scans are 3D scans, preferably high-resolution scans with thin slices and
isotropic voxels.
End fragment title: 1 MIP render mode allows you to calculate
Node title (original): 2 main features of MIP render mode ID: 116519583883
Status: Released
• In MIP render mode, you review the selected imaging series in a volumetric display as
rotating MIP or as rotating volume rendered projection.
• MIP render mode allows you to calculate projections in any required orientation,
orthogonal, oblique, double oblique, or radial.
• You exclude (or include) regions from the calculation to focus on the anatomy of interest.
• You review the newly calculated images in real-time mode, or you create new imaging
series consisting of (MIP or volume rendered) projections.
End fragment title: 2 main features of MIP render mode
7.8.3 User Interface

Status: Released
MPR render mode provides you with one large and three small viewports, and a Create New
Series panel. Furthermore, the Review toolbar has additional buttons dedicated to the
calculation of MultiPlanar Reformats. { Heuvel, Martina van den, 12/3/2020 10:58:13 AM:
<reference to Review toolbar>}.
Philips

7.8.3.1 Viewports
Affix: MPR & MIP render modes ID: 116441869707
By default, the render modes MPR and MIP open with four viewports.
• The large viewport shows a 3D view calculated in real-time.
– The default image for MPR render mode is an image of the same orientation as the
selected imaging series.
– The default image for MIP render mode is a projection.
• The three small viewports show three orthogonal views that serve as reference views (from
top to bottom: axial, coronal, and sagittal).
– One of the reference views shows the center image of the selected scan.
– The other two reference views show real-time reconstructions in the remaining two
orientations.
– Colored lines on the reference views indicate the position of the calculated image in the
large viewport and of the reference views.
• You can change the layout when you right-click on any viewport, and select Inner Layout:
References on Right,References at Bottom, 1x1, 1x2, 2x2.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Each viewport indicates the original or reconstructed slice thickness in the upper right
corner. The reconstructed slice thickness always is a quarter of the original slice thickness.
• In the lower left corner of the viewport, you see the selected algorithm:
Render mode Selectable Algorithms Calculation of
MPR Average MultiPlanar Reformats
MinIP Minimum Intensity Projections
MIP Slab Maximum Intensity Projections
MIP MIP Volume Maximum Intensity Projections
Vol.Rend. Volume Rendering

Philips

Viewports in MPR render mode

1. Create New Series panel
2. Selected algorithm:
Average
3. Indication of the slice
thickness (available in all 4
viewports)
7.8.3.2 Create New Series panel

Affix: MPR, MIP, minIP ID: 116441994251
The Create New Series panel in MPR and MIP render mode allows you to:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Create and save new imaging series out of the original dataset.
• Specify geometrical properties of the new imaging series.
• Set up, edit and save presets for the calculation of slab and volume Maximum intensity
Projections, MultiPlanar Reformats and Volume Rendering.
• Select and reuse the saved presets for any other dataset.
• Delete presets.
Node title (original): panel complete ID: 116442002059
Status: Released
Parameters in the Create Series Panel

Parameters Description More Information
Preset drop-down menu To select a Preset. chapter “Managing

Presets” on page 992
To delete a Preset. chapter “Managing

Delete Presets” on page 992
Philips

• To specify the volume of interest for the MPR chapter “Sculpting and
Sculpt with different ROI types: Clipping of the Volume of
Only available in MPR – Include Freehand ROI or Exclude Interest” on page 991
Freehand ROI
– Include Rectangle ROI or Exclude
Sculpt and Clip Rectangle ROI
Only available in MIP – Include Circle ROI or Exclude Circle ROI
– Include Polygon ROI or Exclude Polygon
ROI
• To clip the volume (Only available in MIP).
Select Type
Parallel or To define the stack type of the new imaging series. -

Radial • For MPR: preferably parallel.
• For MIP: only Radial is available.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
To specify the orientation of the new imaging chapter “Creating a new

Orientation series: series in MIP Render
Axial, Sagittal, or Coronal Mode” on page 989
chapter “Creating a new
Series in MPR Render
Mode” on page 987
Rotation To specify the rotation scheme of the projections chapter “Creating a new
together with the Orientation parameter: series in MIP Render
Mode” on page 989
Only available in MIP • Sagittal and Rotate Left or
Rotate Right calculate projections in

sagittal and coronal orientation where the
rotation direction (left versus right) reverses
the image order.
• Axial and Rotate Down or

Rotate Up calculate projections in axial and
coronal orientation where the rotation
direction (up versus down) reverses the image
order.
Philips

To create a new imaging series with the slices in -

Reverse Slice Order reverse order (when the button is enabled).
Only available in MPR
Adjust Properties
Number of Images To specify the number of images of the new chapter “Creating a new
imaging series. series in MIP Render
Mode” on page 989
chapter “Creating a new
Mode” on page 987
Thickness (mm) To specify the thickness of each reformat. chapter “Creating a new
Gap (mm) To specify the gap between the reformats.
Mode” on page 987
Applicable for parallel stack only.
Total Angle or To specify the chapter “Creating a new
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Step Angle • Step Angle: radial angle between the series in MIP Render
Only available in MIP projections. Mode” on page 989
• Total Angle: angle covered by all projections.
Advanced Options To enable Generate Reference Views which -

calculates three orthogonal images additionally to
the new imaging series.
Propagation To specify if and how the render settings are chapter “Managing
propagated. Presets” on page 992
• For Dynamics, you can select to propagate the
settings of the current dynamic to the
Preceding or Following dynamics, or to a
specific Range from ... to of dynamics.
• For the others (e.g. Phases, b-values,
Diffusion Directions, Image Types), or
Stations, you only enable or disable
Propagation.
Reset To reset all changes and go back to the initial -

settings.
Save as Preset To save the current settings as preset which can be chapter “Creating a new
reused with other examinations and imaging series in MIP Render
series. Mode” on page 989
Philips

Enter Series Name To enter a name for the new imaging series. chapter “Creating a new
Create To start the creation of the new imaging series. Mode” on page 987
End fragment title: panel complete
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 12/4/2020 2:39:29 PM: Still needed? To enter the offcenter and
angulation values numerically and to define if the angulation of the new series is relative to the
Volume or relative to the Magnet. Select Magnet for multiple stations. This compensates for
planning differences between stations and aligns the new imaging series.}
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 12/4/2020 6:31:13 PM: Still valid??? Select Single Axis for multiple
stacks or multiple stations.}
7.8.4 Routine Procedures

Status: Released
7.8.4.1 Creating a new Series in MPR Render Mode

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
You start up MPR render mode when you want to calculate MultiPlanar Reformats, Minimum
Intensity Projections or a Slab MIP (Maximum Intensity Projection).
⊳ Prerequisite: The selected imaging series is suitable for the render mode.
• For MPR: 3D scan, preferably with thin slices and isotropic voxels.
• For MinIP: Black blood scans, and VENBOLD (PRESTO based) scans.
• For Slab MIP: Susceptibility weighted scans and M2D balanced-FFE scans.
1. To access MPR render mode, do any of the following:
• In the ExamOverview, right-click a suitable scan, and then select MPR.
• From the render drop-down menu on a Review viewport, select MPR.
⇨ MPR render mode opens.

2. To select the algorithm, click in the lower left corner of the viewport, and select Average,
MinIP or MIP.
3. Select a preset from the Preset drop-down menu in the Create New Series panel.
⇨ The parameters and the viewports change according to the selected preset.
Philips

4. To change the orientation (of the image in the large viewport and the new imaging series),
click in the Create New Series panel.

⇨ The large viewport displays an image of the selected orientation.
5. To scroll through the images, drag on the large viewport.
6. To navigate to other locations, drag the colored lines (red, green, blue) which indicate the
current position.
7. To rotate the volume, hover over a round anchor point and then drag.
To move the volume, hover over a center line and then drag.
8. To change the number of slices, hover over any of the lines which represent one of the
outer slices.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Alternatively enter the number of slices numerically, or use the Up and Down arrows in the
Create New Series panel.
To change the image area (comparable to FoV), hover over any of the border lines.
9. To change the slice thickness (and the slice gap), hover over the large yellow arrows, and
then drag.
Alternatively enter the slice thickness numerically, or use the Up and Down arrows in the
Create New Series panel.
Philips

10. To undo changes, right-click and select Reset All.

11. Adjust the Propagation parameters.
These parameters are not saved with the preset and need to be specified in scans with
more than one attribute (Dynamics, b-values etc).
12. To save the images as new imaging series, enter a series name first. Then click Create.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
job.
7.8.4.2 Creating a new series in MIP Render Mode

Status: Released
You start up MIP render mode when you want to calculate a Maximum Intensity Projection
(volume MIP) or volume rendered projections.
⊳ Prerequisite: The selected imaging series is suitable for the render mode.
• For Volume Rendering: 3D scan, preferably with thin slices and isotropic voxels.
• For MIP: 3D PCA scan, 3D/M2D Inflow scan and Contrast-Enhanced MRA scans.
► To access MIP render mode, do any of the following:
• In the ExamOverview, right-click a suitable scan, and then select MIP.
• From the render drop-down menu on a Review viewport, select MIP.
Philips

⇨ MIP render mode opens.

► To select the algorithm, click in the lower left corner of the viewport, and select MIP or
Vol.Rend..
► Select a preset from the Preset drop-down menu in the Create New Series panel.
⇨ The parameters and the viewports change according to the selected preset.
► To change the orientation (of the image in the large viewport and the new imaging series),
click in the Create New Series panel.

⇨ The large viewport displays an image of the selected orientation.
► To view the projections from different angles in MIP render mode, drag on the large
viewport.
► To navigate to other locations, drag the colored lines (red, green, blue) which indicate the
current position.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► To change the number of images, enter the number of slices numerically, or use the Up and
Down arrows in the Create New Series panel.
► To change the angle (either the step angle between the projections or the total angle
covered by all projections), drag the outer projection.
Alternatively enter the Total angle or step angle numerically, or use the Up and Down
arrows in the Create New Series panel.
► To undo changes, right-click and select Reset All.

► To save the MultiPlanar Reformats as imaging series, proceed with the workflow Creating
new MPR imaging series.
Philips

► Adjust the Propagation parameters.

These parameters are not saved with the preset and need to be specified in scans with
more than one attribute (Dynamics, b-values etc).
job.
7.8.4.3 Sculpting and Clipping of the Volume of Interest

Status: Released
When you want to focus on a specific anatomic region only, you restrict the imaging volume to
a smaller part by sculpting or by clipping.
You can sculpt any volume in MPR and MIP render mode, but you can only clip volumes in MIP
render mode.
Sculpting
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► To sculpt, click Sculpt or Sculpt and Clip from the Create New Series panel.
► Then you use ROIs to select which anatomic region to exclude and which anatomic region to
include. Select a ROI type:
• Include Freehand ROI or Exclude Freehand ROI
• Include Rectangle ROI or Exclude Rectangle ROI
• Include Circle ROI or Exclude Circle ROI
• Include Polygon ROI or Exclude Polygon ROI
► Draw a ROI to include or exclude an anatomic region.
► Repeat the previous steps as often as needed.
Clipping
⊳ Only available in MIP render mode.
► To clip, select Sculpt and Clip.
⇨ A yellow rectangle is superimposed to the viewports. This rectangle defines the volume of
interest.
► Resize the yellow rectangle:
• Drag the borders and corners to make the rectangle smaller (or larger again).
• Drag the round anchor points to angulate the rectangle.
Philips

7.8.4.4 Rolling and Rotating an Image

Affix: translation set 2 - needs to be moved ID: 114220695179-1
By rolling or rotating an image you change the perspective of the display.

Node title (original): Rolling and Rotating ID: 114220701323-1
Status: Released
⊳ You are in MPR, MIP, or Orthoview render mode.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► On the Review Toolbar, click Roll/Rotate .
► To roll, click the center of the image and drag in any direction.
► To rotate, click the corner of the image and drag in any direction.
End fragment title: Rolling and Rotating
7.8.4.5 Managing Presets

Status: Released
For the calculation of reformats and projections, you set up presets for specific anatomies
which you can reuse for any similar examination.
Prerequisite: You are in MIP or MPR render mode.
Node title (original): 0 selecting existing preset ID: 116523850507
Status: Released
Selecting an existing preset
► To select an existing preset, click the Preset drop-down menu.

► Select a preset.
⇨ The preset name is displayed as selected preset.
Philips

OrthoView Reviewing Images
⇨ Now you can create a new imaging series based on this preset, or you can edit the preset or
delete it.
End fragment title: 0 selecting existing preset
Node title (original): 1 Saving preset ID: 116523852043

Status: Released
Setting up (or editing) and saving a preset

► Specify the parameters under Select Type and Adjust Properties in the Create New Series
panel, e. g. Orientation, and Number of Images.
Only these parameters (Select Type and Adjust Properties) are saved in a preset.
The Propagation parameters are not saved with the preset.
► To save the current parameters as a preset for reuse, click Save as Preset.
► Then enter a name for the preset. Confirm with Save.
⇨ The preset is saved under the entered name and available in the Preset drop-down menu.
End fragment title: 1 Saving preset
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): 2 Deleting preset ID: 116523949195

Status: Released
Deleting a preset
► Select the preset from the Preset drop-down menu in the Create New Series window.
► Click .
End fragment title: 2 Deleting preset
7.9 OrthoView
Status: Released

Affix: OrthoView ID: 116524737931
Orthoview allows you to review automatically calculated orthogonal MPRs in a multilayer

environment. Orthoview is an advanced viewer that helps to combine results from different
packages. You can combine color overlays like f-MRI blobs along with other objects like fibers
from the FiberTrak application.
• You process an imaging series in any of the Analysis packages IViewBOLD, or FiberTrak.
Philips
You save the fibers or parametric maps or segmentations in the Analysis package.

Reviewing Images OrthoView
• Then you open Orthoview and load the saved fibers, maps or segmentation as overlay.

Status: Released
7.9.2.1 Starting up Orthoview

Status: Released
► To access Orthoview render mode, do any of the following:

• In the ExamOverview, right-click a suitable scan, and then select Orthoview.
• From the render drop-down menu on a Review viewport, select Orthoview.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

7.9.2.2 Displaying Fibers
Status: Released
⊳ You are in Orthoview render mode.
► On the Review Toolbar, click Show Fibers .

{ Mann, Michael, 10/30/2020 9:20:18 AM: To do: Check if this enables any other functions
besides just displaying the fibers. I do not have example data for that. }
7.9.2.3 Changing the Plane Opacity

Affix: translation set 2 - needs to be moved ID: 114220729739
Changing the plane opacity affects the axial, coronal and sagittal planes at once.
Node title (original): Changing Plane Opacity ID: 114220749451
Status: Released
► On the Review Toolbar, click Plane Opacity .

Philips

OrthoView Reviewing Images
► Click the image and drag horizontally to adjust the plane opacity.
Movement to the right increases and movement to the left decreases the opacity.
End fragment title: Changing Plane Opacity
7.9.2.4 Changing the Opacity of Fused Overlay Images

Affix: translation set 2 - needs to be moved ID: 114220779787
This function is only available with fused images. Opacity controls the opacity, or transparency,
of the overlay. It is displayed as Alpha factor when Full Image Information is selected.
Node title (original): Changing the Opacity ID: 114220799883
Status: Released
⊳ You are inOrthoview render mode.
► On the Review Toolbar, click Opacity .

► Click the image and drag horizontally to adjust the opacity.
Movement to the right increases and movement to the left decreases the opacity.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: Changing the Opacity
7.9.2.5 Rolling and Rotating an Image

Affix: translation set 2 - needs to be moved ID: 114220695179-2
By rolling or rotating an image you change the perspective of the display.

Node title (original): Rolling and Rotating ID: 114220701323-2
Status: Released
⊳ You are in MPR, MIP, or Orthoview render mode.
► On the Review Toolbar, click Roll/Rotate .

► To roll, click the center of the image and drag in any direction.
► To rotate, click the corner of the image and drag in any direction.
End fragment title: Rolling and Rotating
7.9.2.6 Hiding Planes

Status: Released

Philips

Reviewing Images MobiView
• To hide the axial plane, click Hide Axial Plane .
• To hide the coronal plane, click Hide Coronal Plane .
• To hide the sagittal plane, click Hide Sagittal Plane .
7.10 MobiView
Status: NotReleased

Affix: MobiView ID: 116524741259
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 12/8/2020 1:57:24 PM: how to treat different image types with
MobiView? We had a specific description on this topic in the old software!}
MobiView allows you to stitch multistation datasets being acquired as different stacks in Head-
Feet direction.
Typically, MobiFlex (or MobiTrak), Whole Body and Total Spine scans are viewed in this way.
• Stitching creates one image from multiple images acquired at several stations.
• On the stitched images, markers indicate the stitching area.
• Stitching executes the following tasks:
– Zooming of the images.
– Panning in the image directions.
– Propagating these view settings to all images in such a way that the different stations
are aligned if being displayed in a column.
– Combining the images and creating one image.
– Removing the overlapping area either smooth or with a hard-cut.
• For stitched imaging series originally acquired in 3D mode, MobiView calculates MultiPlanar
Reformats.
• MobiView allows you to navigate through these MPRs in MPR render mode or to review
them from different angles in MIP render mode.
Philips

MobiView Reviewing Images
7.10.1.1 Screen layout

Status: Released
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 12/7/2020 4:42:58 PM: don't know if something like this is still
needed}
The MobiView package automatically comes up with a screen layout related to the number of
stacks within the selected scan, e.g.
• If the scan contains of 3 stations, the default screen layout is 3 x 3.
• If the scan contains of 5 stations, the default screen layout is 5 x 5.
• Corresponding slices (same AP, RL offcenter values) are automatically combined within one
view.
Image Info Display

The matrix information in the Image Info corresponds to the fused image.
E.g. the matrix is displayed as "252 / 3518 x 512r"
• where 252 represents the initially scanned resolution per station of 252 in FH direction
• where 3518 represents the resolution of the fused images in FH direction
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• where 512r represents the resolution in LR direction (r=reconstructed).
7.10.2 Safety
Status: Released
Node title (original): 24367 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-VP. ID: 9007205898731915

20.2,HAZ-VP.21.2) Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24367
Philips

WARNING
After applying the fusion operation, double-check whether the result of the fusion operation
is correct. Always keep the original images.
Horizontal lines on the image indicate where the operation took place. Check for any
artifacts that could indicate a fusion error, like cut-off objects or anatomy. The fused images
must be of the same acquired plane. Be aware that the resolution at the edges of a station
can be lower than in the center.
End fragment title: 24367 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-VP.20.2,HAZ-VP.21.2)
NOTICE
Unfuse the images in case of artifacts.
This is to make sure that previously present artifacts which have not been visible on screen
prior to fusing are not mistakenly interpreted as pathologies.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
7.10.3.1 Viewports
Affix: MobiView ID: 116530381963
By default, MobiView opens with the Create New Series panel and one viewport. This viewport
displays a stitched image where the default Stitch settings are applied (Soft fuse and Auto
window).
• On the viewport, markers indicate the Stitch area.

• You can change the layout when you right-click on any viewport, and select Inner Layout:
1x1, 2x2, 3x2, 4x4 and Auto Layout.
Philips

7.10.3.2 Create New Series panel

Status: Released
When you open a suitable imaging series in MobiView, the imaging series is recognized as
multiple station series and automatically stitched (2D or 3D stitching) based on the properties
of the imaging series.
The Create New Series panel in MobiView allows you to:
• Create and save new imaging series out of the original dataset.
• Modify the stitch results (Modify Stitch Results).
Node title (original): panel complete ID: 116530273547
Status: Released
Parameters in the Create New Series panel

Remove or Add Station To remove a station from or add a station to the -

stitched result images.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Remove Station
• Add Station
Stitching Options To select the way the images of the multiple chapter “Stitching 2D” on page
stations are stitched. 1000
chapter “Stitching MPR (and
• Stitch 2D Display in MIP)” on page 1001
• Stitch MPR
• Stitch MPRs and Display in MIP
Manual / Auto Window To specify how to window the images. -

• Either window manually:
Manual
• Or use automatically determined window
settings:
Auto
Philips

Hard / Soft Stitching To specify how to treat the overlapping area of the Examples of hard and soft
multiple stations. stitching:
• Hard fuse
• Soft fuse
Apply To apply the changes. chapter “Stitching 2D” on page

1000
Enter Series Name To enter a name for the new imaging series.
chapter “Stitching MPR (and
Create To start the creation of the new imaging series.
Display in MIP)” on page 1001
-
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: panel complete

Status: Released
7.10.4.1 Stitching 2D
Status: Released
You use Stitch 2D for imaging series with a slice gap between the slices of the multiple stations.
Stitch 2D combines the related slices of multiple stations into one image.
⊳ Prerequisite: The selected imaging series is suitable for MobiView.
1. To access MobiView render mode, do any of the following:
• In the ExamOverview, right-click a suitable scan, and then select MobiView.
• From the render drop-down menu on a Review viewport, select MobiView.
⇨ MobiView render mode opens and presents you with stitched images (created based on
default settings).
Philips

2. To scroll through the images and to check the image quality, drag on the large viewport.
3. To change the stitching parameters, click Modify Stitch Results and modify the
parameters.
For more information about the parameters, see chapter “Create New Series panel” on
page 999).
Then click Apply to apply your changes and check the results immediately on the viewport.
4. To save the images as new imaging series, enter a series name first. Then click Create.
job.
7.10.4.2 Stitching MPR (and Display in MIP)

Status: Released
You use Stitch MPR and Stitch MPRs and Display in MIP for 3D imaging series without a slice
gap between the slices of the multiple stations. Both methods combine the related slices of
multiple stations into one image.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
After the calculation of the stitched images,

• Stitch MPR accesses MPR render mode. It allows you to calculate MultiPlanar Reformats in
any direction and to scroll through them.
• Stitch MPRs and Display in MIP accesses MIP render mode. It allows you to calculate
Maximum Intensity Projections and to review them from different angles.
⊳ Prerequisite: The selected imaging series is suitable for MobiView.
1. To access MobiView render mode, do any of the following:
• In the ExamOverview, right-click a suitable scan, and then select MobiView.
• From the render drop-down menu on a Review viewport, select MobiView.
⇨ MobiView render mode opens and presents you with stitched images (created based on
default settings).
2. To scroll through the images and to check the image quality, drag on the large viewport.
3. To change stitching settings, click Modify Stitch Results, and modify the parameters.
For more information about the parameters, see chapter “Create New Series panel” on
page 999).
Then click Apply to apply your changes.
⇨ The stitched imaging series opens in MPR or in MIP render mode.
Philips

Reviewing Images PicturePlus
7.11 PicturePlus
Status: Released

Status: Released
PicturePlus applies a filter that reduces the visibility of noise and artifacts, thereby enhancing
the anatomical structures in the images. It uses an intelligent algorithm of smoothing and edge
enhancement, e.g. background noise is smoothed while vessels are sharpened.
PicturePlus can be used for most image types (including modulus, real, flow) and all processed
images (MPR, MIP, subtracted images).
Preferred combinations of edge enhancement and smoothing can be saved as PicturePlus
Presets. These presets allow you to enhance images exactly in the same way for each imaging
series.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
7.11.2.1 Enhancing an Image with PicturePlus

Status: Released
You can enhance an image with PicturePlus by mouse actions or by entering numeric values for
Smooth and Edge.
Node title (original): Applying PicturePlus ID: 114220839819-2
Status: Released
⊳ You are in PicturePlus render mode.

▻ In PicturePlus, the left mouse behavior is automatically set to Enhance PicturePlus.
► To change edge enhancement and smoothing with the mouse, drag horizontally and
vertically.
Horizontal movement changes edge enhancement (increasing values from left to right).
Vertical movement changes smoothing (increasing values from the bottom up).
⇨ The numeric values of Smooth and Edge are displayed in real time in the top row of the
viewport.
► To change edge enhancement and smoothing by entering numeric values, click the values
Smooth and Edge in the top row of the viewport. Then enter numeric values in the input
fields, or use the Up and Down arrows next to the input fields.
Philips

QFlow Analysis Reviewing Images
job.
End fragment title: Applying PicturePlus
Node title (original): 2 Reset PicturePlus ID: 114220854283-2

Status: Released
To reset the changes

► Right-click the image and select PicturePlus Presets > Smooth0 Edge0.
⇨ Edge enhancement and smoothing are reset to 0.
End fragment title: 2 Reset PicturePlus
7.11.2.2 Saving a PicturePlus Preset

Status: Released
You can save the current PicturePlus settings as preset.

► Right-click the image and select PicturePlus Presets > Save PicturePlus Preset....
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⇨ The Save PicturePlus Preset... window appears.

► Enter a name for the new preset.
► Click Save to confirm.
7.12 QFlow Analysis

Status: NotReleased

Affix: not for Multiva in China, comp: postproc ID: 117193521931
The QFlow (Quantitative Flow) Analysis package calculates quantitative information from
QFlow scans.
The QFlow Analysis package allows you:
• To calculate numerical and graphical results based on user defined ROIs.
• To add a color overlay with flow information to the images.
• To export the result view to a CSV file.
Suitable Scans
Suitable scans are Quantitative Flow scans (which are triggered PCA scans):
Philips

Reviewing Images QFlow Analysis
• With at least PCA/P images and FFE/M, and optionally PCA/M images.
• Acquired perpendicular to the vessel of interest.
Node title (original): Information in images ID: 117197525771
Status: Released
In the acquired QFlow images, the gray value (or the color value if color overlay is used)
indicates the flow direction:
• Positive flow is flow into the plane (maximum positive: displayed white), for example in
Feet-to-Head direction and in Right-to-Left direction.
• Negative flow is flow out of the plane (maximum negative: displayed black), for example in
Head-to-Feet direction and in Left-to-Right direction.
End fragment title: Information in images
Node title (original): 67856 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-GR. ID: 18014405153220747-2

35_part2 Status: Released
WARNING
For Q-Flow measurements the field-of-view (FOV) must be positioned in the isocenter of the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

magnet to avoid misinterpretations due to incorrect Q-Flow calculations.
End fragment title: 67856 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-GR.35_part2

Status: Released
7.12.2.1 Viewports
Affix: QFlow ID: 117196947211
QFlow opens with four viewports, the QFlow panel, and the QFlow toolbar.
Philips

1 QFlow panel
2 Review toolbar with dedicated QFlow buttons
3 Image, by default: FFE/M

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
4 image, by default: PCA/P
5 Numerical results (table)
6 Graphical results (graphs versus Trigger Time (ms) )
Node title (original): QFlow Context Menus ID: 117350646923

Status: Released
Context Menus
The Context Menu of the viewports allows you:
• To change the default behavior of the left mouse (scroll, zoom,window, pan).
• To reset window and zoom settings.
• To rotate, mirror of flip an image.
• To add color overlay to the images in the viewports.
• To start drawing a freehand ROI.
• To delete ROIs or to propagate ROIs.
The Context Menu of the graphical results allows you to modify the results display.
End fragment title: QFlow Context Menus
7.12.2.2 QFlow Panel

Status: Released
Node title (original): Qflow Panel ID: 117205527051

Philips
Status: Released

The QFlow panel allows you:

• To select the phase for display.
You use this function to select the best-suited phase to draw a ROI, and you scroll through
the phases to display all phase results.
• To define the vessel contour.
You use this function to draw a ROI. Available ROI types are: Single Click Contour, Freehand
Contour, and Ellipse Contour.
• To enable the automatic propagation of a ROI to all phase images (Auto propagate).
• To enable automatic contour detection and adaptation (Fit contour to vessel).
End fragment title: Qflow Panel
7.12.2.3 QFlow Toolbar

Status: Released
Node title (original): Qflow Toolbar ID: 117205528587

Status: Released
Dedicated QFlow Buttons on Review Toolbar
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The QFlow toolbar is the Review toolbar with dedicated QFlow buttons.
• Drop-down list for image type selection: FFE/M, PCA/M or PCA/P.
To select the image type for display in the current viewport (upper left or upper right
viewport).
• Show/Hide color overlay

To add a color overlay to the image in the current viewport (in the upper left or upper right
viewport).
• Result setting
To access the Table and Unit Settings window and adjust the results display.
• Export Result view to CSV file

To store the QFlow results in a format easily accessible independent of the MR console.
Philips
End fragment title: Qflow Toolbar


Status: NotReleased
7.12.3.1 Analyzing QFlow Imaging Series

Status: NotReleased
You analyze a QFlow imaging series to obtain quantitative results.

► Right-click a suitable imaging series in the Thumbnail Overview (or Scan Overview), then
select QFlow .
⇨ The imaging series opens in the QFlow Analysis package.
► To navigate to the best image to draw a ROI, do any of the following:
• Drag on the phase images.
• Drag the Current Phase slider in the QFlow panel.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Drag the vertical slider in the graphical results viewport.

Usually the end diastolic FFE/M image shows the largest diameter which is best for the
automatic contour detection.
► Optionally: To enable PCA/P color overlay, do any of the following:
• On the toolbar, click Show/Hide color overlay.

• Right-click on an image. Select PCA/P Color.
► Before you draw a ROI, verify that Auto propagate and Fit contour to vessel are enabled.
• Auto propagate enables the automatic propagation of a ROI to all phase images.
• Fit contour to vessel enables the automatic contour detection and adaptation.
► To draw a ROI, first select a ROI type in the QFlow panel: Single Click Contour, Freehand
Contour, or Ellipse Contour.
For correct contour detection, a Freehand Contour is best suited. A Single Click Contour
works best with large vessels.
Then draw the ROI:
• For Single Click Contour, click once within the vessel.
• For Freehand Contour or Ellipse Contour, drag to define the contour. Release to close
the contour.
When the ROI is completed, the numerical and graphical results are displayed immediately.
Philips

NOTICE
Repeat this step if more ROIs are needed.
► To check the ROIs on all images, click Show/Hide movie bar on the Review toolbar.
Then click Play on the movie bar. Click Stop when done.
► To manage your ROIs, do any of the following:
• To edit an existing ROI, right-click the ROI and select Edit. Then drag the ROI to move it
or drag the contour to reshape it.
• To delete a ROI, right-click the ROI and select Delete.
• To delete propagated ROIs, right-click the ROI and select Delete Propagated Contours.
Then select the direction (Delete Left, Delete Right, Delete All).
• To propagate a ROI that was not propagated automatically, right-click the ROI and select
Propagate. Then select the propagate direction (Propagate All, Propagate Left,
Propagate Right).
► Inspect the results. Possibly modify the results display.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► To export the results as CSV (Comma-Separated Values) file, click Export Result view
to CSV file. Browse to the export destination. Then click OK to confirm.
To view the results of the CSV file, open the file in Microsoft Excel.
7.12.3.2 Modifying the QFlow Results Display

Status: Released
The numerical Phase results always display the results for the current phase image.
By default, the Flux (ml/s) graph is displayed versus the Trigger Time (ms) .
► To display the Phase results of another phase, scroll to another phase image. Do any of the
following:
• Drag on the phase images.
• Drag the Current Phase slider in the QFlow panel.
• Drag the vertical slider in the graphical results viewport.
► To display another result as graph versus Trigger Time (ms) , right-click the graphical
results. Then select a result type:
Area, Flux, Mean Velocity, or Peak Velocity.
► To enable or disable the display of a graph, right-click the graphical results. Then select
Show/Hide ROI, and select or deselect the ROI from the list.
Philips

► To select the default results for display and to specify their default units, click (Result
setting) on the toolbar.
⇨ The Table and Unit Settings window opens.
► In the Table and Unit Settings window, adjust the settings:
• Enable or disable the display of flow (analysis) results and phase results.
• To specify the (default) unit, select the unit from the drop-down list.
• To display forward flow as positive flow in the graph, enable Display Forward Flow as
Positive.
Dependent on your QFlow acquisition, this setting possibly inverts the graph.
► To save the settings as your default, click Save.
To leave the window without changes, click Cancel .
Result Available units Default unit
Area mm2, cm2 cm2
Distance cm, mm, m cm

3
Flux mm /s, ml/s, ml/min, 1/min ml/s
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Trigger Delay ms, s ms
Velocity mm/s, cm/s, m/s cm/s
Volume mm3, ml, cc, cm3 ml
7.12.4 Results
Status: Released
7.12.4.1 Graphical and Numerical Results

Status: Released
Graphical results and numerical results are presented in the lower viewports.
Philips

All voxels which partly or fully contribute to the drawn ROI, are considered for quantitative flow
calculations.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): Numerical Results ID: 117200517003
Status: Released
Numerical Results
The shown Heart Rate is derived from the acquisition.

The Flow Results are valid for the complete imaging series.
Stroke Volume (ml) • Absolute value of the difference between forward and backward flow.
Regurgitant Fraction (%) • Fraction of backward to forward flow.
Mean Flux (ml/s) • Stroke volume x heartbeat / 60
Stroke Distance (cm) • Netto distance the blood proceeds in the vessel in 1 RR-interval.
Mean Velocity (cm/s) • Stroke distance x heartbeat / 60
Peak Velocity (cm/s) • Either maximum velocity or minimum velocity, whichever has the
highest absolute value.
The Phase Results differ from phase to phase.

Philips

Trigger Delay (ms) • Time between R-peak and acquisition of the specific slice.
Area (cm2) • Area of the pixels that are partially or fully included in the contour. To
visualize this area, right-click in an image viewport and select 'Filled
graphics'.
Flux (ml/s) • Blood volume that passes the contour per second. Flux is identical
to ’mean velocity * area'. This value is only calculated if the flow
direction is perpendicular to the image.
Mean Velocity (cm/s) • Mean blood flow velocity.
Peak Velocity (cm/s) • Highest measured positive or negative flow in the contour.
Velocity Standard Deviation [cm/s] • Standard deviation of the mean velocity.
Number of pixels • Pixels that are partially or fully included in the contour.
End fragment title: Numerical Results
Node title (original): Graphical Results ID: 117197517579

Status: Released
Graphical Results
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Results (from one or more ROIs) of one type are displayed as graphs versus the Trigger Time
(ms) .
You can select any of these results for display: Area, Flux, Mean Velocity, or Peak Velocity.
End fragment title: Graphical Results
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

Analyzing Images Finalizing the Examination
8 Finalizing the Examination

Status: NotReleased
8.1 Analyzing Images

Status: NotReleased
8.1.1 Analysis Tab

Status: Released
In the Analysis tab, you perform advanced analysis of your imaging series. The Analysis
packages come with a Task Guidance which supports your workflow. The screen setup is
optimized for each analysis package.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
8.1.2 Opening an Imaging Series in the Analysis Tab

Status: Released
You open an imaging series in the Analysis tab from the Exam Overview.
Philips

Finalizing the Examination Analyzing Images

► Right-click an imaging series in the Thumbnail Overview (or Scan Overview), then select
any Analysis package.
⇨ The imaging series opens in the dedicated layout.
8.1.3 General information

Last Content Modificator: Kovalsky, Cheryl ID: 18014514186246411
Status: Released
NOTICE
The results of analysis depend on the quality of the acquisition. Ensure that the scan settings
are set correctly for the patient at the time of acquisition to assure best results.
Node title (original): N: Follow Operator instructions on screen ID: 9007314933562891

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Attention is needed for operator instructions displayed on the viewing screen.
End fragment title: N: Follow Operator instructions on screen
Node title (original): Color Scheme ID: 10249280779

Status: Approved
NOTICE
The color scheme of the UI described in this manual may be different from the color scheme
on the product as it appears on the screen. However, this does not affect the functionality or
usability of the system in any way.
End fragment title: Color Scheme
NOTICE
In cases where two icons are displayed, select the icon that is relevant for your application
version.
Philips

Multi-vendor support
The applications described in these Instructions for Use can be used with a wide range of data
sets from other vendors. For details of supported scanners, please contact your Philips
representative. Processing unsupported data sets may lead to inaccurate or unusable results.
8.1.3.1 MR Preferences
Status: Released
For information on MR Preferences, please refer to the Preferences section of the IntelliSpace
Portal Instructions for Use.
8.1.3.2 Definitions
Status: Released
The following terms are used throughout this documentation:

Term Description
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Patient The 'Patient' directory contains the studies of a patient over time.
Study A 'Study' consists of imaging series, e.g. CT and/or MRI imaging series.
(Imaging) Series A series consists of one or more images. A typical image is a slice.
8.1.3.3 The various controls

Status: Released
These controls are:

• a package-specific Task Guidance panel
Follow the steps of the task guidance for ease of use and optimum results.
• the Series/Package/Key Images/Bookmarks switch button
This button can be used to switch between the display of the available imaging series, the
Task Guidance panel, added key images and the Bookmarks panel.
• various right mouse menus
Right mouse menus are available to facilitate the use of the postprocessing packages and to
offer various interaction possibilities. They are available for image and map viewports, and
for graphs.
– Simply right-click on any viewport to access the right mouse menu.
• keyboard functions
Keyboard functions can be used for several purposes, e.g. for scrolling through images by
means of the arrow keys.
Philips

Most of the functions in an analysis package can be performed via all controls. It's purely a
matter of taste which control is going to be used.
8.1.3.4 Right mouse menus

Status: Released
Node title (original): all controls in all CT/MR-Portal packages ID: 9007314932752779
Status: Released
In IntelliSpace Portal MR packages, the most important functions can be performed via the
toolbar and the generic control panel. However, there are more functions to be performed. You
can find these in the right mouse menus.
End fragment title: all controls in all CT/MR-Portal packages
Dedicated right mouse menus are described in the 'More functions' of the corresponding
package.
The universally valid right mouse menu functions are described here:
Define the mouse usage

1. Right-click on the source image or the maps.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

2. Select any option:
Option Icon Former Icon Description
Scroll Drag to scroll through the dataset.
Pan Drag to pan the source image or map.
Zoom Drag to zoom the source image or map.
Windowing/Gray Drag to adjust the level and width (or contrast and
Level brightness).
Mask Drag to adjust the mask.
Select Mask Color no icon no icon
Draw ROI no icon no icon Drag to draw a freehand ROI.
Opacity (only Drag to adjust the intensity of the color overlay.

available on maps)
Philips

NOTICE
This table lists all options for the left mouse usage.
Note that not all options are available in all packages.
Reset the source image or the maps

1. Right-click on the source image or the maps.
2. Select any option:
Option Icon Former Icon Description
Reset Zoom/Pan The source image or the maps will be displayed with
their original zoom and pan settings again.
Reset Windowing The source image or the maps will be displayed with
their original window settings again.
Reset All Applies Reset Zoom, Pan, Windowing and removes all
graphics, including ROIs.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Modify the Results Display

These functions are available in the MR T1 Perfusion, MR Neuro Perfusion and the MR
Permeability packages.
1. Right-click on the graph viewport.
2. Click to select one of the options (see table) to modify the display.
Function Possible values
ROI Average Enabled/Disabled: If enabled, the graph displays the ROI average.
Auto Scale Enabled/Disabled: If enabled, the graph will be automatically scaled.
Dynamic Time Enabled/Disabled. Allows to toggle between dynamic time and dynamic
number.
8.1.3.5 Select a series and launch an analysis package

Status: Released
It's easiest to launch an MR analysis package in the Directory tab of the activity bar.
NOTICE
Please wait until pre-processing has finished before opening series in an analysis package.
Philips

1. Click Directory on the activity bar.

2. Select the source folder in the Studies panel.
3. Click to select a study from the list of studies.
⇨ The series panel will show all series and reconstructions from the selected study.
4. Click the application icon in the Analysis panel or click the arrow to display a list of analysis
packages, and then select a suitable package.
⇨ The package opens and all series in the study are loaded.
NOTICE
If a system message is displayed indicating that the series selection is too large, you can
change the system preferences to load only selected series from the study. For details, see
Data Loading Preferences in the Preferences section of the IntelliSpace Portal Instructions for
Use.
Alternatively an analysis package can be launched via the MultiModality Viewer and the
Analysis tab of the activity bar.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Adding an Incoming Series to a Viewing or Analysis Session
If a new incoming series is received while a study is already open for viewing or analysis, and
you want to add the series to your workflow, do the following:
• In the Directory screen, right-click the new series and click Add to running application.
8.1.3.6 Scrolling through images

Status: Released
The way of scrolling through images depends on the view settings and the number of image
attributes.
You can use the mouse or the arrow keys to scroll through images.
To scroll through ... Press the arrow Mouse Effect on image attribute
keys movement
1st image attribute: slice position Mouse movement increases or

decreases the number of the image
attribute.
2nd image attribute: e.g. dynamic, Movement to the right increases (to
phase, echo number, b-value. the left decreases) the number of the
image attribute.
Philips

Example: Scrolling in a series with only one image attribute (single dimension series)
The series has only slices.
Node title (original): Navigate through slices & maps (RL) ID: 9007314933261323
Status: Released
Through slices (or resulting) maps

1. In the image (or map) viewport, drag to the left or to the right.
2. Alternatively use the left and right arrow keys.
End fragment title: Navigate through slices & maps (RL)
Example: Scrolling in a series with two image attributes

The series consists of multiple dynamics with multiple slices. The first image attribute are the
slices, the second one are the dynamics.
Node title (original): Navigate through dyn RL & slices upDown ID: 9007314933149707
Status: Released
Through dynamics
1. In the image viewport, drag to the left or to the right.
Through slices
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
1. In the image viewport, drag up- or downwards.

End fragment title: Navigate through dyn RL & slices upDown
8.1.3.7 Draw ROI

Status: Released
You can draw a ROI to focus on a specific area, e.g. a lesion.
Fig. 413: Drop-down menu for ROI type selection. 1- Fig. 414: Drop-down menu for ROI type selection. 1-
Click on the icon to draw a ROI of the current ROI type.; Click on the icon to draw a ROI of the current ROI type.;
click on the arrow to open the drop-down menu, 2 - click on the arrow to open the drop-down menu, 2 -
Option: 'Smoothed Contour', 3 - Option: 'Ellipse', 4 - Option: 'Spline Contour', 3 - Option: 'Ellipse', 4 - Option
Option 'Freehand Contour'. 'Freehand Contour'.
1. Click on the arrow in the task guidance to open the drop-down menu for ROI type
selection .
2. Select a ROI type:
Philips

• Spline Contour (suited for any type of contour)

• Ellipse (suited for any type of round or oval-shaped contour)
• Freehand Contour (suited for any type of contour)
3. Draw the ROI:
After ROI confirmation, immediately the graphical and numerical results will appear.
• For a Spline Contour: click once to define one point of the ROI contour. Repeat this till
the contour is completed. When finished, double-click to confirm the ROI.
• For an Ellipse: click twice to define the width of the ROI. Click once more to define the
height of the ROI and in such a way to confirm the ROI.
• For a Freehand Contour: click and drag to define the contour. Upon releasing, the ROI is
confirmed automatically.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 415: Three different ROI types: 1 - spline contour, 2 - ellipse and 3 - freehand contour.
Once you've confirmed a ROI (or line), you can still adjust its shape, its position and rename or
delete it.
Adjust ROI shape and position

1. Click on an anchor point and drag to adjust the ROI shape.
2. Click between anchor points and drag to adjust the ROI position.
Rename a ROI
1. Double-click the name (by default ROI1, ROI2, ROI3 etc).
2. Delete characters where needed and type the new name.
• It is advised to rename the ROIs for easier identification (e.g. left breast, right breast, tumor,
cyst).
• If multiple ROIs are renamed to the same name, automatically a numerical extension is
added to this name, e.g. Hemisphere, and Hemisphere 2
Delete a ROI
1. Right-click on the ROI and select ’Delete’ or delete from table.
Philips

8.1.3.8 Copy data

Status: Released
All data displayed on the screen can be copied into text editors and spreadsheet applications.
To copy the data:
1. In any viewport: Use the shortcut key 'Ctrl' 'C' or select 'Copy' from the right mouse menu.
2. In the text editor or in the spreadsheet application: Use the shortcut key 'Ctrl' 'V' or select
'Paste' in the text editor or spreadsheet application.
8.1.4 MR T1 Perfusion
Status: NotReleased
This postprocessing package is meant to evaluate T1 perfusion studies and generate numerical
and graphical results and maps.
T1 perfusion studies are based on the fact that contrast agent shortens the T1 relaxation times
of tissues.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Valid imaging series

A valid imaging series for the MR T1 Perfusion package is a T1w dynamic perfusion imaging
series where a stack of slices is repeatedly acquired over time. It is a series that holds slices and
dynamics. The MR T1 Perfusion package requires at least 4 dynamics.
This type of series allows to observe the changes of the T1 relaxation time and in such a way
the contrast-uptake.
8.1.4.1 Indications for Use

Last Content Modificator: David, Michal ID: 115679923339
Status: Released
The MR T1 Perfusion post-processing software is designed to evaluate Time Intensity Curves

(TIC) of a T1 signal enhancement series.

Status: Released
8.1.4.2.1 Screen layout

Status: Released
The MR T1 Perfusion package has a default layout of task guidance panel and toolbars, and four
viewports. The viewports display the following views:
Philips

• Source image in the middle of the imaging volume.

• In real-time calculated Parametric T1-maps.
• Subtracted Image Series, Table Viewer (numerical results), or Anatomical Viewer (reference
imaging series).
• Graph Viewer (graphical results) or Anatomical Viewer (reference imaging series).
Switch between Subtracted Image Series and the Table Viewer

1. Click the right or left arrow in the upper right corner of the viewport.
Switch between Graph Viewer and Anatomical Viewer

1. Click the 'Graph Viewer' tab to switch to the Graph Viewer.
2. Click the 'Anatomical Viewer' tab to switch to the Anatomical Viewer.
More information on the Graph Viewer can be found in the chapter “Results” on page 1030.
More information on the Anatomical Viewer can be found in the chapter “Workflow” on page
1024.
8.1.4.2.2 Task Guidance
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Last Content Modificator: Mazor, Ninel ID: 115682327947
Status: Released
Similar to all packages on the IntelliSpace portal, also the MR T1 Perfusion package provides a
Task Guidance panel in the left part of the screen.
8.1.4.2.3 Toolbar
Status: Released
Node title (original): Color LUT ISP6 ID: 9007314938544267

Status: Released
Color LUT (Look-Up Table)

• To select the color look-up table for the maps.
Possible settings are: 'Blue to Red', 'ASIST' and 'Gray'.
Color LUT Minimum value Maximum value
Blue to Red Blue Green Yellow Orange Red
ASIST Black Light blue Green Yellow/ Red

Orange
Gray Black Gray White

Philips

The ASIST LUT is a LUT specifically designed for acute stroke imaging. The Acute Stroke Imaging
Standardization Group - Japan (ASIST-Japan) is a group that conducts medical research projects
dedicated to the standardization of brain computed tomography (CT) and magnetic resonance
imaging (MRI) in the clinical setting of acute cerebral stroke.
End fragment title: Color LUT ISP6
Layout
To select another screen layout, click Layout and select a layout option. You
can also edit the current layout and save it as a preset using the More menu. Custom layouts
that you have saved as presets are also available in the Layout list.
Node title (original): More / Follow Mouse ID: 9007314938678027
Status: Released
Follow Mouse
Once enabled, this function displays real-time results for the current voxel (indicated by the
current position of the cursor).
End fragment title: More / Follow Mouse
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Viewing Tools
Node title (original): More / Mirror Flip RotateCW Rotate CCW ID: 9007314938923531
Status: Released
Mirror
This function mirrors the image(s) (Right <-> Left)
Flip
This function flips the image(s) (Up <-> Down)
Rotate Clockwise
This function rotates the image(s) clockwise
Rotate Counter-Clockwise
This function rotates the image(s) counter-clockwise
End fragment title: More / Mirror Flip RotateCW Rotate CCW
8.1.4.2.4 More Functions within the Perfusion packages

Philips


Status: Released
Node title (original): all controls ISP6 intro for RMM ID: 9007314937483147
Status: Released
In IntelliSpace Portal MR packages, the most important functions can be performed via the Task
Guidance and the toolbar. However there are more functions which you can access via the right
mouse menus.
End fragment title: all controls ISP6 intro for RMM
For more information, see chapter “Right mouse menus” on page 1016.
Right Mouse Menu for T1 Perfusion
NOTICE
The 'Modify the Results Display' function is only available in the Permeability and the two
perfusion packages.
Node title (original): Set as Subtraction Reference ID: 121613604107
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Set as Subtraction Reference

• To select a dynamic other than the first one as subtraction reference.
For subtraction purposes, by default the first dynamic (precontrast) is selected as reference. A
different dynamic can be used as reference via this function.
NOTICE
This function is applicable only to T1 Perfusion.
End fragment title: Set as Subtraction Reference
8.1.4.3 Workflow
Status: NotReleased
8.1.4.3.1 Launch the MR T1 Perfusion package

Status: Released
⊳ In the 'Directory' tab of the activity bar:

1. Select a suitable perfusion series.
Philips

2. Click ’MR T1 Perfusion’.

The MR T1 Perfusion package opens.
8.1.4.3.2 Scroll through images

Status: Released
Status: Released
Through dynamics
Through slices
Through maps
1. In the map viewport, drag to the left or to the right.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
For the further workflow, utilize the task guidance in order to make optimal use of the
package.
The Task Guidance window is in the left part of the screen.
Node title (original): Spatial Smoothing IntelliSpace ID: 121647739659

Status: Released
Apply Spatial Smoothing

• To spatially smooth the resulting maps.
Possible settings are: None (no smoothing), Weak, Medium or Strong.
The strength of the smoothing setting determines the size of the kernel used to average
neighboring voxels.
Philips

Spatial smoothing smooths the maps and the original images. In such a way, spatial smoothing
has an effect on the numerical results.
End fragment title: Spatial Smoothing IntelliSpace
8.1.4.3.3 Define the Mask

Status: Released
This workflow step serves to adjust the mask and to enable the display of the mask while
adjusting.
Setting a threshold mask will exclude background pixels from the functional map calculations.
All pixels with values below the mask value will be displayed blue. Only pixels with intensity
above the mask value are used for the calculations, colored areas will be excluded from the
calculation.
1. Drag the slider to define the mask.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 416: Step 2: The mask is overlaid to the current source image.
Alternatively:
You may also drag the right mouse button in the images to change the mask.
8.1.4.3.4 Select the Desired Maps

Status: Released
You can select the maps in the task guidance panel for real-time calculation and display, and for
the generation of new imaging series.
1. Click the checkbox of a map to select/deselect this map.
The display of the real-time calculated maps will be updated accordingly.
8.1.4.3.5 Select Series for Anatomical Viewer

Status: Released
Node title (original): Select Series for Anatomical Viewer ID: 27021605370361355-1
Status: Released
Philips

Upon startup of the package, the Anatomical Viewer is empty. However an additional imaging
series in the Anatomical Viewer might help during navigation through the data set and in order
to draw ROIs.
Any type of imaging series can be loaded into the anatomical viewer. The orientation of the
series in the Anatomical Viewer is always identical to the orientation of the source image and
the map. This might require the calculation of real-time Multiple Planar Reformats.
NOTICE
When you load an imaging series with an orientation different to the source image into the
Anatomical Viewer, the series in the Anatomical Viewer will be a real-time Multiple Planar
Reformat (MPR).
Always be aware that the imaging parameter of this series determine the image quality of the
resulting MPR. Low resolution imaging series will result in blurry MPRs and might hamper the
workflow.
To load an imaging series into the Anatomical Viewer

1. Click the Anatomical Viewer tab to switch to the Anatomical Viewer.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
2. Right-click the Anatomical Viewer and click Select Series from the right mouse menu.
3. Click on a series in the Select Series window and click OK to confirm the selection.
4. You can also load a series by dragging and dropping a series.
Tip
When you save a layout, the series displayed in the viewer at that time is saved with the
layout. When you reload the layout for another case, the same series is also reloaded in the
viewer. You can save a layout using the More menu in the task guidance panel.
End fragment title: Select Series for Anatomical Viewer
8.1.4.3.6 Draw ROI

Status: Released
You can draw a ROI to focus on a specific area, e.g. a lesion.

For information on how to draw, modify and rename a ROI, see chapter “Draw ROI” on page
1019.
Philips

Fig. 417: Three different ROI types with numerical and graphical results. ROI1 - Spline Contour, ROI2 - Ellipse, ROI3 -
Freehand Contour.
If desired, you can remove the last drawn ROI. Do one of the following:
• Press Ctrl+Z.
• Right-click the ROI and then click Delete Last Drawn ROI in the shortcut menu.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

More options
You can enable/disable the display of curves in the Graph Viewer.
1. Check the checkbox 'Roi1', 'Roi2' or any 'Roi' in the Graph Viewer to enable the display of
the related graph.
2. Uncheck the checkbox 'Roi1', 'Roi2' or any 'Roi' in the Graph Viewer to disable the display
of the related graph.
3. To view the results with a fitted curve, right-click the Graph Viewer and click Fitted Curve.
8.1.4.3.7 Select Underlay

Status: Released
Node title (original): Select Underlay ID: 36028804625357323-1

Status: Released
You can select an MR series as underlay of the parametric maps allowing for better allocation.
In order to optimize the display you can also adjust the opacity of the overlaying parametric
maps.
Philips

NOTICE
MR series are suitable source images. Secondary captures are not suitable because they are
lacking in general geometry information.
The underlay is automatically reformatted to the geometry of the overlay. The resolution is
determined by the resolution of the overlay in the preview viewer.
Select Underlay
1. Select an option:
• None
The parametric maps will be displayed without underlay.
• Source as Underlay
The source series will be displayed as underlay.
• Select Other Underlay
Browse to the series you would like to use as underlay and click OK to confirm. You can
also load a series by dragging and dropping a series.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Tip
End fragment title: Select Underlay
Node title (original): N: Mismatch Underlay/overlay ID: 115681545611

Status: Released
NOTICE
There can be a mismatch between underlay and overlay also in the Anatomical viewer if there
was any patient motion between the acquisitions of these series.
End fragment title: N: Mismatch Underlay/overlay
Adjust the opacity of the overlay

1. Drag the slider to adjust the opacity of the parametric maps.
You may also drag the right mouse button in the color maps to change the opacity of the
overlay.
Philips

Fig. 418: Left: 100% opacity of the parametric maps. Right: 20% opacity of the parametric maps.
8.1.4.3.8 Generate Series

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): Generate Maps ID: 36028804621058443-1

Status: NotReleased
You can generate a new imaging series containing the parametric maps and results as defined
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

in the previously described workflow.
1. To generate a standard DICOM-compatible series, select Generate Series using the
Secondary Capture option.
2. Enter the name of the new imaging series in the Name box.
3. To generate a series as RGB images (high resolution color maps), select Generate Series
using the Secondary Capture RGB option.
End fragment title: Generate Maps
Register Data While Saving

Once enabled, this function performs registration when generating actual maps. In such a way
image quality will most likely improve in the maps.
NOTICE
If the input data is unregistered, there can be a mismatch between the previewed and
generated maps as the generated maps are calculated after registering the input.
8.1.4.4 Results
Status: Released
The package calculates the following results:

Philips

Graphical and numerical results

• The graphical results present a Time-Intensity Diagram (intensity versus time).
In 'Follow Mouse' mode, the graph correlates to a specific pixel and shows the intensity
value (intensity) over the time for this pixel.
• The results will be provided as parametric maps and in a table of results.
Scrolling through the maps, the type of the map is indicated in the map’s series type field.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 419: Results screen: source image and maps with ROIs, Table Viewer and Graph Viewer. The vertical lines in the
graph represent the variable dynamic and the reference dynamic
Node title (original): ROI-Based Windowing ID: 54596693899-1

Status: Released
To draw a windowing ROI, right-click a map and then click Draw Windowing ROI. The color
scale of the map is recalculated to display maximum color heterogeneity inside the ROI. You
can draw windowing ROIs on each map independently.
Philips

Fig. 420: Drawing a windowing ROI

End fragment title: ROI-Based Windowing
Measurement Type Selection

To change the type of measurement for all parametric maps, right-click the results summary
table and select an option.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Region Parameters (Factory default): The application calculates T1 parameters using the
time intensity curve for the drawn ROI and displays the values in the table viewer.
• Mean Voxel Parameters: The application calculates the mean of all the voxels inside the
ROI of the output parameters and displays the values in the Table Viewer.
The table heading is updated based on the selected type.
Show ROI Statistics

You can right-click the results summary table and choose to show ROI voxel statistics (or) select
from More menu.
An additional numerical results table is displayed as floating window and display Maximum,
Minimum, Median, Average and Standard deviation of the quantitative parameters for the ROI
voxels with in the parametric maps.
When the number of columns in the table viewer exceeds default width or number of rows
exceeds default height, the auto scroll is visible to allow the user to scroll to see all the columns
and rows
To export table results:
1. Select Copy to Clipboard, open either Microsoft Word or Excel and paste the contents from
your clipboard into the application.
2. Select secondary capture. A dialog box is displayed allowing you to select a file name, file
format, and destination. You can save the series in DICOM format, or in non-DICOM
format. If you select a non-DICOM format, you should additionally select a file system
destination for exporting the table results.
Relative Enhancement [%] (RELENH)
Philips

• The signal enhancement of a pixel of certain dynamic relative to that same pixel in the
reference dynamic. The reference dynamic is normally the first, pre-contrast dynamic. The
reference dynamic can be set to another dynamic via the right mouse menu function ’Set as
Subtraction Reference’.
Relative Enhancement = [ I(D)

I(Dref) - 1 ] x 100
Fig. 421: Formula
• where I(D) stands for pixel intensity of current dynamic and I(Dref) stands for pixel intensity
of reference dynamic.
Maximum Enhancement (MAXENH)
• Difference between peak intensity S1 and S0.
Maximum Relative Enhancement [%] (MAXRELENH)
• Maximum of all relative enhancements over all dynamics.
T0 - Time of Arrival [s] (T0)
• Time at which the signal intensity increases for at least 20% compared to the baseline
(referred to as initial signal intensity S0).
The baseline is the average of the signal intensities of all timepoints before the contrast
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
uptake starts.
• As long as the signal intensity doesn't exceed more than 20 % from the baseline, it will not
yet be identified as the start of the contrast uptake (T0).
S0 - Initial Signal Intensity
• The baseline signal intensity S0 is the average of the signal intensities of all timepoints
before the contrast uptake starts.
Time to Peak [s] (TTP)
• Time till contrast agent bolus reaches peak intensity.
Wash-In Rate [l/s] (WASHIN)
• Maximum slope between T0 and time of peak intensity T1.
Wash-In = Maximum [ I(D) -TI(D-1) ]

Fig. 422: Formula
Wash-Out Rate [l/s] (WASHOUT)

• Maximum slope between time of peak intensity T1 and the end of the measurement.
Wash-Out = ABS (Maximum [I(D) T- I(D-1) ] )

Fig. 423: Formula
Brevity of Enhancement [s] (BREVENH)

• Time between point of maximum wash in rate and maximum wash out rate.
Philips

Area under the curve (AREACURV)

Sum of all intensities under the curve.
Node title (original): graph characterizing parameters ID: 9007314936825355
Status: Released
Graph characterizing parameters
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 424: T1 Perfusion - Results.
Abbreviation Description
SI Signal intensity
t Time
S0 Initial intensity
S1 Peak intensity
T0 Time of Arrival (time of initial intensity)
T1 Time of peak intensity
WO Wash-Out Rate
WI Wash-In Rate
TTP Time to Peak
BrevEnh Brevity of Enhancement

End fragment title: graph characterizing parameters
8.1.4.4.1 References
Status: Released
Philips

Kuhl, et al. "Breast neoplasms: T2* susceptibility-contrast, first-pass perfusion MR imaging".

Radiology, No. 202 (1): 87-95, January 1997.
8.1.5 MR T2* Neuro Perfusion

Status: NotReleased
This postprocessing package is meant to evaluate T2* perfusion studies and generate numerical
and graphical results and maps.
Paramagnetic contrast agents influence the local magnetic field and reduce the T2* relaxation
time of surrounding tissue.
If a valid Diffusion input series is available with the loaded study, Diffusion-Perfusion Mismatch
can be performed.

A valid imaging series for the Neuro Perfusion package is a series which is sensitive to T2*
changes over time. In other words a series where a stack of slices is repeatedly acquired over
time (dynamics). The MR Neuro Perfusion package requires at least 5 dynamics.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
The Philips Medical Systems' MR T2* Neuro Perfusion application is a post processing software
application supporting the analysis of Dynamic Susceptibility Contrast (DSC) T2* perfusion
studies to generate numerical and graphical results The Philips Medical Systems' MR T2* Neuro
Perfusion application is a post processing software application supporting the analysis of
Dynamic Susceptibility Contrast (DSC) T2* perfusion studies to generate numerical and
graphical results of TTP, T0, MTT, rCBV, corrected rCBV, rCBF, Tmax and K2 (leakage). Four
methods are available for analysis, including Gamma Variate, Model Free, Leakage Correction
and manual Arterial Input Function (AIF). AIF also enables Perfusion-Diffusion Mismatch
analysis if a Diffusion input dataset is available in addition to the Perfusion series.

Status: Released

Status: Released
The MR Neuro Perfusion package has a default layout of task guidance panel and toolbars, and
four viewports. The viewports contain the following views:
Philips

• In real-time calculated parametric perfusion maps.

• Table Viewer (numerical results) and Anatomical Viewer
• Graph Viewer (graphical results) and Anatomical Viewer
Switch between Graph Viewer, Table Viewer and Anatomical Viewer

3. Click the 'Table Viewer' tab to switch to the Table Viewer.
More information on the Graph Viewer and the Table Viewer can be found in the Results
section.
More information on the Anatomical Viewer can be found in the Workflow section.

Status: Released
Similar to all packages on the IntelliSpace portal, also the MR Neuro Perfusion package provides
a Task Guidance panel in the left part of the screen. The task guidance panel provides the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

following steps:
• Select the Desired Maps
• Select Underlay
• Analysis
• Generate Maps
• Optional step: Diffusion-Perfusion Mismatch - this step can be performed if a valid Diffusion
input series is available.
Follow the steps of the Task Guidance to make optimal use of the package.
The following workflow description is based on this Task Guidance.
8.1.5.2.3 Toolbar
Status: Released
Node title (original): Color LUT ID: 18014406109790603-1

Status: Released

Philips


Orange
End fragment title: Color LUT
Layout
To select another screen layout, click Layout and select a layout option. You
can also edit the current layout and save it as a preset using the More menu. Custom layouts
that you have saved as presets are also available in the Layout list.
Follow Mouse
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Select this option to display real-time results for the current voxel (indicated by the current
position of the cursor).
8.1.5.2.3.1 More Menu

Status: Released
Show Skip Dynamics Step

Select this option to display an additional step in the Analysis task guidance panel. If desired,
you can skip the first dynamics in a study to ignore the initial dynamics in which the steady
state has not yet been reached. To skip dynamics, enter the number of dynamics that you want
to skip in the box in the Skip Dynamics step.
Save Layout Preset

Select this option if you want to save a custom layout that you have created. Enter a name in
the Create New Preset dialog box that is displayed when you select this option, and then click
Save. Your layout is now available in the drop down list of the Layout button in the toolbar.
Delete Layout Presets

Select this option if you want to delete one or more custom layouts that you have previously
saved. Select the layouts to be deleted in the Layout dialog box that is displayed when you
select this option, and the click Delete.
Philips

Tip
You can only delete custom layouts. You cannot delete system layouts. Additionally, you
cannot delete a custom layout if it is currently selected. First select a different layout, and
then delete it.
Viewing Tools
Node title (original): Mirror Flip RotateCW Rotate CCW ID: 120758368779
Status: Released
Mirror
Flip
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Rotate Clockwise
End fragment title: Mirror Flip RotateCW Rotate CCW
8.1.5.2.4 More Functions within the Perfusion packages

Status: Released
Status: Released
mouse menus.
Philips

8.1.5.3 Workflow - MR Neuro Perfusion

Status: NotReleased
MR Neuro Perfusion supports analysis workflows with and without using AIF (Arterial Input
Function). The following analysis techniques can be used:
• Gamma Variate: This workflow is based on the assumption that the ideal shape of a passing
contrast bolus as acquired in a T2* perfusion series is highly comparable to the gamma
variate function.
• Model Free: This workflow does note require a specific shape or model. The analysis
detects the start and the end of the bolus passage by determining a baseline at the front
and at the end.
• Manual AIF (Deconvolution): The AIF analysis workflow uses a deconvolution algorithm
based on the knowledge of the Arterial Input Function to calculate the perfusion values. The
AIF describes the input of contrast agent into the tissue of interest. When using this
workflow, you define the AIF by selecting voxels (typically in or around an artery) that show
the T2* effect as induced by the passage of the contrast agent bolus. The average of the
selected voxels represents the shape of the arterial input function. This arterial input
function is used to calculate the parametric maps.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Leakage Correction: This workflow allows you to assess brain perfusion curves that have
been corrected for leakage of contrast agent into the brain tissue. Leakage Correction in MR
Neuro Perfusion uses the Boxerman – Weisskoff approach.
You can choose between these techniques in the Analysis task guidance step (instructions are
provided in the procedural steps later in the this section). The other task guidance steps are the
same for all techniques.
8.1.5.3.1 Launch the MR Neuro Perfusion package

Status: Released

1. Select a suitable perfusion series.
2. Click ’MR NeuroPerfusion’.
The MR Neuro Perfusion package opens.

Status: Released
1. To scroll through dynamics, drag to the left or to the right in the image viewport.
Philips

2. To scroll through slices, drag upward or downward in the image viewport.
3. To scroll through maps, drag to the left or to the right in the map viewport.
8.1.5.3.3 Analysis
Status: Released
1. In the Analysis list in the task guidance panel, select one of the following methods:
• Gamma Variate (non-AIF workflow)
• Model Free (non-AIF workflow)
• Manual AIF
• Leakage Correction (non-AIF workflow)
2. Set the mask by dragging with the right mouse button in the source data. For details, see
chapter “Define the mask” on page 1043.
3. If you selected a non-AIF workflow, continue to the section "Creating a ROI".
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4. If you selected Manual AIF analysis, you should first define the AIF. The Define AIF window
is displayed automatically when you select Manual AIF analysis. The Define AIF window
displays the middle slice.
⇨ A red square is displayed in the image viewport. The red square spans the size of 7x7 voxels.
In the right viewport the dynamic curves of these 7x7 voxels are shown.
Fig. 425: Define AIF window. Left: Middle image with rectangular ROI of 7x7 voxels. Right: Time-Intensity curves of
these voxels.
5. Navigate to the slice with the vessel relevant for Manual AIF definition.
6. Zoom, pan and window the slices so that this vessel is clearly visible.
7. Drag the red box over this vessel.
The display of the curves will automatically be updated.
8. Click on individual graphs to include them in the definition of the AIF.
Philips

The selected graphs are yellow. For best results, the selected voxels should show an AIF
curve with a narrow and high peak.
Fig. 426: The AIF is defined

⇨ To exclude a voxel that you previously included, click the graph again.
9. Click Apply to confirm.
The AIF is identified and the resulting maps are displayed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Tip
To open the Define AIF window again and adjust the AIF definition, click Define AIF in the
task guidance panel.
8.1.5.3.4 Manual AIF Results

Status: Released
Node title (original): N: AIF display with units ID: 9007314962561675

Status: Released
NOTICE
Using the AIF function, the relCBF and the relCBV are also displayed with units: relCBF [ml/
100g/min] and relCBV [ml/100g].
The calculation is based on known delay-insensitive deconvolution techniques and results may
be influenced by incorrect assumptions in such a model.
End fragment title: N: AIF display with units
Manual AIF analysis measures relCBF (relative Cerebral Blood Flow) and relCBV (relative
Cerebral Blood Volume) using a deconvolution between the time courses of tissue signal and an
Arterial-Input-Function (AIF).
Philips

The results of deconvolution perfusion analysis may under- or overestimate the true perfusion
depending on various factors:
WARNING
Inaccurate definition of the AIF: The AIF may suffer from partial-volume effects. Due to the
limited temporal resolution, the AIF is not very accurately sampled. A very sharp high peak
is in general not well represented by the user-defined AIF. For this reason the AIF time
course will not correctly represent a 100% blood signal.
WARNING
Patient motion: Patient motion during the scan may introduce irregularities in the definition
of the AIF and individual tissue signal time courses, causing deviations from the correct
relCBF and relCBV.
NOTICE
Temporal resolution: The temporal resolution of the measurement may be too low, causing
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

difficulty to identify the bolus curve giving poor results.
NOTICE
Poor bolus injection: If the contrast bolus is too slow, the relCBF and relCBV may be incorrectly
calculated. Results may be influenced by the assumptions in such a model.
Delay maps with AIF algorithm

If the AIF algorithm has been chosen for processing, the Generate Series window provides the
possibility of enabling the calculation of a Delay map. For each pixel, the delay map shows the
time between the AIF peak concentration, and the tissue peak concentration. The time is
measured in seconds, with accuracy defined by the dynamic scan time of the acquisition
sequence. The delay time is often referred to as Tmax.
Status: Released
Philips


The strength of the smoothing setting determines the size of the kernel used to average
neighboring voxels. Respective kernel sizes are 1, 3x3, 5x5, and 7x7.
Spatial smoothing smooths the maps and the original images. In such a way, spatial smoothing
Node title (original): Apply Temporal Smoothing ID: 121651946251

Status: Released
Apply Temporal Smoothing

• To temporally smooth the resulting maps.
The temporal smoothing makes use of a uniform filter with user-adjustable width. The width
describes the total number of dynamics contributing to the filter; the applicable sizes are 1, 3,
5, and 7.
End fragment title: Apply Temporal Smoothing
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
8.1.5.3.5 Define the mask

Status: Released
This optional workflow step serves to adjust the mask and to enable the display of the mask
while adjusting.
Drag with the right mouse button on the source image to adjust the mask.
Leakage Correction
When you adjust the mask, the reference voxels are affected. If you are using Leakage
Correction analysis, this may have some effect on the results.

Status: Released
You can select the maps in the task guidance panel for real-time calculation and display, and for
Philips

Leakage Correction
If you are using the Leakage Correction analysis method, you can enable advanced maps in the
More menu in the toolbar. This option adds the following additional information:
• Goodness of Fit is added to the parametric maps and the results page.
• Ref Voxels are added to the parametric maps.

Status: Released
Status: Released
to draw ROIs.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Reformat (MPR).
workflow.

Philips

Tip
8.1.5.3.8 Creating a ROI

Status: Released
1. You can draw a ROI to focus on a specific area, for example, a lesion.
For information on how to draw, modify, and rename a ROI, see chapter “Draw ROI” on
page 1019.
2. To display a mirror line, select Show Mirror Line.
A vertical mirror line will show up in the middle of the image. If desired, drag the line to
move it to another position.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3. To create a contra-lateral ROI when you draw the first ROI, select Create contra-lateral ROI
automatically.
4. Draw a ROI.
When finished, the drawn ROI will be mirrored and the contra-lateral ROI will be created
automatically.
5. Drag the mirror line to change the position of the contra-lateral ROI.
NOTICE
You should manually align the brain center-line to get exact mirroring between both sides.
⇨ Lesion/reference ratio values are displayed in the results panel.

6. If desired, you can remove the last drawn ROI. Do one of the following:
• Press Ctrl+Z.
8.1.5.3.9 Setting a Reference ROI

Status: Released
As an alternative, you can mark a single ROI as a reference ROI, and view the ratios of all other
ROIs in relation to the selected reference ROI.
Philips

1. Right click the ROI that you want to set as the reference ROI and click Declare as reference
ROI in the shortcut menu.
⇨ The label "-ref" is added to the name of the ROI to indicate that it is currently selected as
the reference ROI.
⇨ The ratio table in the table viewer displays the ratio of all other ROIs in relation to the
reference ROI.
⇨ If you create a bookmark, the selection of the reference ROI is maintained in the bookmark.
2. You can change the reference ROI at any time.
⇨ All ratio results are updated automatically when you change the reference ROI.
NOTICE
Mirrored ROIs are not included in the ratio results for a reference ROI. Results for a mirrored
ROI only show the ratio in relation to the ROI that it is mirrored from. However, if you break
the link for a mirrored ROI, then both ROIs are included in ratio results for a reference ROI.
Note that there can only be one reference ROI.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8.1.5.3.10 Displaying Curves in the Graph Viewer
Status: Released

the related graph.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 427: Three different ROI types mirrored from left to right hemisphere with graphical and numerical results.

Status: Released

Status: Released
maps.
NOTICE
Select Underlay
• None
Philips


Tip

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE

overlay.
Fig. 428: Left: 100% opacity of the parametric maps. Right: 20% opacity of the parametric maps
Philips


Status: NotReleased

Status: NotReleased

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
8.1.5.4 Results
Status: Released

• The results will be provided as parametric maps and in a table of numerical results.
Philips

Fig. 429: Results screen: source image and maps with ROIs, Table Viewer and Graph Viewer. The dynamic reference
line indicates the currently shown dynamic.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

time intensity curve for the drawn ROI and displays the values in the table viewer.
Show ROI Statistics

from More menu.
An additional numerical results table is displayed as floating window and display Maximum,
voxels with in the parametric maps.
When the number of columns in the table viewer exceeds default width or number of rows
and rows
1. Select Copy to Clipboard, open either Microsoft Word or Excel and paste the contents from
your clipboard into the application.
Philips

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8.1.5.4.1 Gamma Variate Results

Status: Released
The figure below gives an overview of the Neuro Perfusion results when using gamma variate
analysis.
Philips

Fig. 431: Time Intensity Diagram for Gamma Variate Analysis
The relCBV is determined by calculation of the area under the curve.

The Mean transit time is derived as MTT = Σ (Si * ti)/ Σ Si.
The CBF is calculated based on central volume principle CBF = CBV / MTT.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8.1.5.4.2 Model Free Results
Status: Released
The figure below gives an overview of the Neuro Perfusion results when using model-free
analysis.
Fig. 432: Time Intensity Diagram with definitions of relCBV, T0, TTP, MTT.
Mean Transit Time [s] (MTT)

Philips
• MTT = Area (S*t) / Area (S)

• The time the bolus spends in the region of interest before leaving.
T0 - Time of Arrival [s] (T0)
• Arrival of the contrast agent, i.e. begin of the enhancement curve.
Time to Peak [s] (TTP)
• Time till contrast agent bolus reaches peak intensity.
relCBV (relCBV)
• The calculated area under the curve.
relCBF (relCBF)
• relCBV divided by the MTT.
8.1.5.4.3 Leakage Correction Results

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 433: Time Intensity diagram, showing T1 and T2 effects, and the effect of recirculation
Graphical results provide a best-fit curve for the time signal.

Philips

Fig. 434: Leakage Correction graphical results and results table
Leakage Correction analysis provides the following results for all defined ROIs:
• relCBVuncor: Uncorrected relative cerebral blood volume.
• relCBVcorr: Corrected relative cerebral blood volume.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• K1: This is the scaling factor to fit the contrast passage signal of the reference voxels to the
bolus passage of a voxel.
• K2: This is the scaling factor needed for an optimal fit of the leakage term. The leakage term
is derived from the reference curve. The reference curve is the average of all non-enhancing
or reference voxels. The leakage term is the time integral of the reference curve. It is
specified in [1/min] and is a measure for the leakage.
• Reference curve: This is the reference signal used to fit with the help of linear regression K1
and K2 to match the acquired signal: K1 scales to bolus passage peak (typical range [0 -2]),
K2 scales the leakage tail, K2 is positive in case of T1 dominance (the tail of the actual curve
is higher than the tail of the reference curve), K2 can be negative in case of T2/T2*
dominance (the tail of the actual TID is lower than the tail of the reference curve).
• R2: (Advanced map, available from the More menu in the toolbar.) This represents the
goodness of the fit.
• Ref Mask: (Advanced map, available from the More menu in the toolbar.)The reference
mask show all pixels that have been used to determine the reference signal, which is
assumed to be the signals from the voxels that don't show leakage/signal enhancement.
If Follow Mouse mode is enabled in the More menu, you can view real-time results for the
voxel at the current pointer position.
Philips

Fig. 435: Leakage Correction maps

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
8.1.5.4.4 References
Status: Released
Gamma Variate Analysis

Davenport R. "The derivation of the gamma-variate relationship for tracer dilution curves". J
Nucl Med, No. 24: 945–948, 1983.
Thompson J., Starmer F., Whalen R., McIntosh H. " Indicator transit time considered as a
Gamma variate". Circ Res, 14, 1964.
Belliveau, JW., Rosen, BR., Kantor, HL., Rzedzian, RR. "Functional cerebral imaging by
susceptibility-contrast NMR". Magn Reson Med, No. 14(3): 538-546, 1990.
Benner, T., Heiland, S., Erb, G., Forsting, M., Sartor, K. "Accuracy of gamma-variate fits to
concentration-time curves from dynamic susceptibility-contrast enhanced MRI: influence of
time resolution, maximal signal drop and signal-to-noise". Magn Reson Imaging, No. 15:
307-317, 1997.
Model-Free Analysis
Meyer-Bäse, A., Lange, O., Wismüller, A., Hurdal, M. K. "Analysis of Dynamic Susceptibility
Contrast MRI Time Series Based on Unsupervised Clustering Methods". IEEE Transactions on
Information Technology in Biomedicine, Vol. 11, No. 5: 563-573, 2007.
Philips

Leakage Correction Analysis

Boxerman J. L., Schmainda K. M., Weisskoff R. M. "Relative cerebral blood volume maps
corrected for contrast agent extravasation significantly correlate with glioma tumor grade,
whereas uncorrected maps do not". AJNR Am J Neuroradiol. 2006 Apr; 27 (4): 859-67.
Tmax
Calamante, F., Christensen, S., Desmond, P. M., Østergaard, L., Davis, S. M., Connelly, A. "The
Physiological Significance of the Time-to-Maximum (Tmax) Parameter in Perfusion MRI". Stroke,
No. 41: 1169-1174, 2010.
Deconvolution
Wu, O., Ostergaard, L., Weiskoff. R. M., Benner, T., Rosen, B. R., Sorensen, A. G. "Tracer arrival
timing-insensitive technique for estimating flow in MR perfusion weighted imaging using SVD
with a block-circulant deconvolution matrix". Mag Res Med No. 50: 164-174, 2003.
8.1.5.5 MR Diffusion-Perfusion Mismatch

Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The Diffusion-Perfusion Mismatch stage of the MR Neuro Perfusion application helps to
distinguish potentially reversible from irreversible ischemia, which in turn aids in the decision to
undertake intravenous or intra-arterial thrombolysis.
8.1.5.5.1 Performing Diffusion-Perfusion Mismatch

Status: Released
WARNING
If the anatomical data sets are not in the same frame of reference, the anatomical image
might be mispositioned.
WARNING
Volume construction may require interpolation.
NOTICE
For DTI/DWI series or if only multivendor maps are available, ADC iso and/or EADC iso maps
are automatically generated when you launch the Diffusion-Perfusion Mismatch stage. This
allows you to analyze mismatch without having to perform MR Diffusion analysis first.
Philips

NOTICE
In the Diffusion-Perfusion Mismatch application, the first volume of the perfusion series is
automatically registered to the b0 volume of the diffusion series. Since the contrast of the b0-
volume and the first dynamic of the T2* series are very similar, the co-registration makes use
of the local correlation algorithm by default.
1. Click MR Diffusion-Perfusion Mismatch.

⇨ A 2x2 layout is displayed:
• The upper-left viewport contains the latest diffusion maps and series in tabbed viewports.
• The upper-right viewport contains perfusion maps and series that you created in the
perfusion workflow.
• The table and graph viewports are empty.
⇨ The diffusion viewports and the perfusion viewports are registered and linked for position,
zoom, and pan interactions. If desired, you can edit the registration using any diffusion
series with the perfusion series as a reference.
⇨ If desired you can select a 2x3 layout using the Layout tool in the toolbar.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
You can also edit the current layout and save it as a preset.
2. To perform mismatch analysis, you can choose between Manual analysis and Automatic
analysis. Both options are described below.
8.1.5.5.2 Co-Registration Inspection

Status: NotReleased
When co-registration is performed, you should verify the accuracy of the registration. You can
inspect and edit the registration using the Review & edit co-registration step.
NOTICE
If you edit and accept the registration, the results are updated accordingly in the mismatch
stage of the application.
1. Click Review co-registration in the toolbar to open the Review & edit co-registration step.
⇨ The input series and the reference series are displayed as fusion views in three orthogonal
orientations. You can change the orientation of the view, if desired.
⇨ The initial alignment is calculated using the Normalized Mutual Information algorithm.
2. To change the alignment algorithm, select an option from the drop-down list in the task
guidance panel.
Philips

3. You can make the following manual adjustments to the registration using tools in the task
guidance panel:
• Translation Tools: Click an arrow to nudge the registration in the corresponding
direction, or use the Translate tool to move the registration manually.

• Rotation Tools: Click an arrow to rotate the registration clockwise or counter-clockwise,
or use the Rotate tool to rotate the registration manually.
4. To undo an adjustment, click Undo.
5. To reapply an adjustment that you have undone, click Redo.
6. To reset the registration to the original position, click Reset All Alignment.
7. To save the registration and continue with the analysis, click Save co-registration.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8. To ignore the changes, go back to analysis.
8.1.5.5.3 Manual Mismatch Analysis

Status: Released
1. Click Manual in the task guidance panel if it is not already selected.

2. Select a Diffusion ROI type and draw an ROI on the diffusion series.
⇨ The ROI is propagated to the other diffusion series and maps, and to the perfusion series
and maps.
3. Select a Perfusion ROI type and draw an ROI on the perfusion series.
⇨ The ROI is propagated to the other perfusion series and maps, and to the diffusion series
and maps.
8.1.5.5.4 Automatic Mismatch Analysis

Status: Released
1. Click Automatic in the task guidance panel if it is not already selected.

2. In Apply segmentation click to mark a seed point on the ADC or Delay map.
⇨ After you mark a seed point, segmentation is calculated according to the threshold ranges
indicated in the task guidance panel.
⇨ The threshold deficit mismatch is displayed as an overlay in the anatomical viewer.
Philips

⇨ The corresponding volume measurements are displayed in the tables.

⇨ Signal intensity plots corresponding to the perfusion and diffusion deficits are displayed in
the graph.
3. To adjust the default threshold values, enter new values in the task guidance panel and
click Apply Resegment.
4. To segment additional regions, add additional seed points from the task guidance panel on
the map.
5. To edit the segmented regions, draw an ROI to exclude the area in the segmentation that
you want to erase.
⇨ After you edit the segmentation, the results viewers are automatically updated.
8.1.5.5.5 Adjust Segmentation Color Opacity

Status: Released
From the right click context menu, select Segmentation Opacity and adjust Segmentation color
opacity independently in different view ports (ADC map, Delay map and Anatomical view-
ports).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
8.1.5.5.6 Results
Status: Released
The type of results generated depends on the type of analysis that your performed:
• Manual analysis mode generates area results (ROIs).
• Automatic analysis mode generates volume results (segmentation).
When you have created diffusion ROIs/segmentation and perfusion ROIs/segmentation,
mismatches are calculated. The results are displayed as penumbra in the anatomical views, and
numerical results are displayed in the table viewport and graph viewport.
Anatomical Viewers
Penumbra is displayed in the anatomical viewers with details of the ROIs, the amount of
mismatch, and the mismatch ratio.
1. Click the Anatomical Viewer tab in one of the lower viewports.
2. Drag a series from the Series panel to the anatomical viewer.
⇨ The series in the anatomical viewer is displayed as MPR images and is automatically co-
registered with the perfusion input series. ROIs in the diffusion and perfusion viewers are
propagated to the anatomical viewer.
⇨ You can scroll over dimensions in the anatomical viewer (up to a maximum of three
dimensions). Scrolling is linked to the diffusion and perfusion viewers.
Philips

3. To view penumbra as a color overlay in the anatomical viewers in manual segmentation,

select Fill Color Overlay in the task guidance panel.
Tables
The table viewport displays the following tables:
• Table 1 displays details about each ROI/segmentation and ADC for each item. Clicking a
column in the table displays the corresponding slice.
• Table 2 displays mismatch information and mismatch ratio (%) for each pair of analyzed
diffusion/perfusion results. The mismatch ratio is calculated as (Perfusion-Diffusion)/
Perfusion.
Graph
The graph viewport displays a signal intensity graph corresponding to the perfusion ROIs/
segmentation. You can select or deselect results as desired using check boxes.
8.1.6 MR Permeability
Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
The MR Permeability application is designed to visualize T1 Weighted Dynamic Contrast-

Enhanced (DCE) 3D datasets and assist in analyzing the tissue response. The MR Permeability
application supports any related conditions for which permeability analysis is indicated as part
of patient management, such as conditions involving the prostate and the brain.
8.1.6.2 Overview
Status: Released
The MR Permeability package allows the analysis of a contrast bolus passing through the tissue.
The package assesses the permeability differences between tissues according to the Tofts
Model.
The purpose of the package is twofold:
1. Generating parametric maps
The package generates parametric maps (in color or grayscale and with or without an
underlay) that reflect different parameters describing the time intensity curve per pixel.
2. Detailed analysis of parametric maps calculated by the Permeability package
Based on Regions Of Interest (ROI's) in different parts of the area under examination,
numerical results can be calculated and presented in graphs.
Philips


MR Permeability has the following acquisition requirements.
Three series are required as follows:
• A Dynamic Contrast-Enhanced (DCE) series with 20 dynamics or more is needed, typically
with high temporal resolution and flow artifact reduction.
• Two reference series.
To calculate the baseline T1 relaxation time per pixel (baseline T1 map), two T1-FFE reference
series with different flip angles (for example, 5 and 15 degrees) are required.
The two reference series should be identical to the DCE series in terms of, for example, field of
view, orientation, resolution, slice thickness, number of slices.
The two reference series should fulfill the following criteria:
• They should not be a dynamic series.
• TR about 10 ms (should be identical for reference series 1 and reference series 2).
• TE about 2 ms (should be identical for reference series 1 and reference series 2).
• Reference series 1 has a flip angle of 5 degrees.
• Reference series 2 has a flip angle of 15 degrees.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
In exceptional cases a single reference series can also be used. But in that case the TR and the
TE of the reference series and the DCE series have to be identical. They still need to have
different flip angles.
8.1.6.3 Perfusion model for result calculation

Status: Released
The pharmacokinetic calculation is done on a pixel-by-pixel basis using a 2-compartment model.

The calculation is based on the Extended Tofts Model (ETM):
where:
C(t) Contrast concentration in tissue
vp Fractional value of blood plasma (also referred to as Volume fraction of plasma space)
Ca(t) Arterial Input Function (Contrast concentration in feeding artery)

see explanation in the section below
Ktrans Transfer constant between blood plasma and extravascular extracellular space (EES)
kep Rate constant between EES and blood plasma
For more details refer to “Quantitative MRI of the Brain” by Paul Tofts; Ch 10: T1-W DCE-MRI:
T1-Weighted Dynamic Contrast-Enhanced MRI (pages 341–364).
Philips

For the population average AIF a bi-exponential analytical model is used (this is a mathematical
equation instead of, for example, a list of numbers), which makes the model suitable for any
temporal resolution. Furthermore, the bi-exponential Weinmann plasma curve is used, which
means that the model shape is very simple and does not incorporate recirculation effects after
the first bolus passage (this may be seen in other more complicated models as described by, for
example, Fritz-Hansen or Parker).
Arterial Input Function (AIF)

The calculation of permeability characteristics can be done based on a model based AIF or
based on a manual AIF.
The model based AIF can have 3 different bi-exponential shapes. The different shapes are
controlled by the user selected injection duration which is a property of the injection preset
and can be set to:
• short (less than 5 s)
• medium (from 5 to 10 s)
• long (longer than 10 s)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 436: The 3 different bi-exponential shapes used for the model based AIF: 1 - short, 2 - medium, 3 - long.
The values in the Philips injection presets serve as an example and are based on a common
contrast agent Gd-DTPA, a commonly used injection dose of 0.1 mmol/kg, typical medium
injection duration (between 5 s and 10 s) and a normal hematocrit value of 45%. However
every hospital has to define their own injection protocols, that match their contrast agents and
injection characteristics.
The manual AIF requires manual placement of a square of 7x7 pixels on a user selectable
vessel. Based on a user selected collection of about 5 pixels out of the 7 x 7 matrix that in shape
and timing best match an expected AIF, the system will determine an average AIF function to
calculate the permeability characteristics.
Philips

Fig. 437: Defining the Manual AIF. Left: ROI over the feeding artery and the corresponding curves of each pixel. Right:
Average AIF.
Other properties affecting the results

Other hospital dependent injection properties affecting the calculation of permeability
characteristics are the contrast relaxivity which depends on the contrast agent in use, and the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

injection dose. Since the contrast relaxivity is field strength and contrast agent dependent, per
field strength and contrast agent a different injection preset is required if applicable. The
hematocrit value is a patient dependent parameter, that has a default value of 45%.

Status: Released

Status: Released
The MR Permeability package has a default layout of four viewports with toolbar, control panel
and task guidance. The viewports display the following views:
• In real-time calculated Parametric Permeability maps.
• Table Viewer (numerical results) and Anatomical Viewer.
• Graph Viewer (graphical results) and Anatomical Viewer.
Switch between Graph Viewer, Table Viewer and Anatomical Viewer

3. Click the 'Table Viewer' tab to switch to the Table Viewer.
Philips

More information on the Graph Viewer and the Table Viewer can be found in the chapter
“Results” on page 1076.
More information on the Anatomical Viewer can be found in the chapter “Workflow” on page
1067.

Status: Released
The MR Permeability package provides a task guidance in the left part of the screen.
Follow the steps of the task guidance to make optimal use of the package.
The following workflow description is based on this task guidance.
8.1.6.4.3 Toolbar
Status: Released
Node title (original): Color LUT ISP6 ID: 9007314953785739

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12


Orange
End fragment title: Color LUT ISP6
Layout
To select another screen layout, click Layout and select a layout option. You can
also edit the current layout and save it as a preset using the More menu. Custom layouts that
you have saved as presets are also available in the Layout list.
Philips

Node title (original): More / Follow Mouse ID: 9007314954114187

Status: Released
Follow Mouse
Once enabled, this function displays real-time results for the current voxel (indicated by the
current position of the cursor).
End fragment title: More / Follow Mouse
Node title (original): More / Select Reference Series ID: 9007314954751627

Status: Released
Select Reference Series

By default, during analysis suited reference series are automatically detected and used. The
function 'Select Reference Series' allows to use other series as reference series if required.
1. Click 'Select Reference Series' from the 'More' drop-down menu in the toolbar.
2. Then browse to the series you would like to use as reference series (Reference 1 and
Reference 2) and click OK to confirm.
Node title (original): N: ref series with min/max flip angle ID: 9007314954862219
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
By default, the application uses the reference series with minimum and maximum available
flip angle to compute the permeability maps.
According to literature, it is best to use reference series with flip angle of 5o and 15o. More
information can be found in the article: Optimizing the Precision in T1 Relaxation Estimation
Using Limited Flip Angles By Henry Z. Wang e.a. MRM 5, 399-416 (1987).
End fragment title: N: ref series with min/max flip angle

End fragment title: More / Select Reference Series
Viewing Tools
Status: Released
Mirror
Flip
Philips

Rotate Clockwise
8.1.6.5 Workflow
Status: NotReleased
8.1.6.5.1 Launch the MR Permeability package

Status: Released

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
1. Select a suitable permeability series.

2. Click ’MR Permeability’.
The MR Permeability package opens.

Status: Released
Status: Released
Through dynamics
Through slices
Through maps
1. In the map viewport, drag to the left or to the right.
Philips

8.1.6.5.3 Analysis
Status: Released
In the Analysis list in the task guidance panel, select one of the following methods:
• Model based AIF
For additional information see chapter “Co-Registration Inspection” on page 1057.
• Manual AIF
8.1.6.5.4 Optional: Define Manual AIF

Status: NotReleased
Manual AIF allows applying the manual AIF method in the result calculation, instead of the
model based AIF that is performed depending on the injection parameters.
1. Select 'Manual AIF' from the 'More' drop-down menu in the toolbar.
The 'Define AIF' window opens.
Moreover the analysis step 'Define AIF ...' will be added to the Task Guidance as part of the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

step 'Analysis' allow to easily access the 'Define AIF' window.
Fig. 438: 'Define Manual AIF' window. The left part of the window shows the anatomical image with the red box for
vessel definition. The right part shows the corresponding Time-Intensity diagrams of each pixel.
2. Navigate to the slice with the vessel relevant for Manual AIF definition.
3. Zoom, pan and window the slices so that this vessel is clearly visible.
4. Drag the red box over this vessel.
The display of the curves will automatically be updated.
5. Click the pixels where the curve shape best represents the expected AIF (i.e. high
amplitude and/or steep upslope).
Philips

Fig. 439: Average AIF of selected pixels: contrast concentration curve reconstructed from the above selected signal
intensity curves (yellow after selection).
6. Click 'Apply' to confirm this selection and in such a way start the calculation.
Clicking 'Cancel' leaves the window without any change.
Clicking 'Undo Changes' resets the position of the red box to its previous position.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
Unreliable AIFs should be avoided to guarantee that the analysis works within its limitations.
In particular, AIF with strong shape distortion should be avoided.
The Tofts model designed is based on a proper AIF.
Fig. 440: Example of unreliable AIFs.
8.1.6.5.5 Select Input Parameters

Status: Released
Philips
1. Select an injection preset from the drop-down menu in the Task Guidance.

If a suitable injection preset is not yet available, an injection preset needs to be created.
See the "More" functions description in chapter “Toolbar” on page 1065 for details.
Node title (original): W: Preset matches acquisition ID: 9007314951756043
Status: Released
WARNING
Verify that the selected preset matches the injection conditions during acquisition.
End fragment title: W: Preset matches acquisition
Node title (original): N: Blood T1 values ID: 9007314951613707

Status: Released
NOTICE
The Blood T1 values used for the calculations are different depending on the used magnetic
field strengths.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The table gives the used values. More information can be found in the following article: Blood
longitudinal (T1) and transverse (T2) relaxation time constants at 11.7 Tesla. Ai-Ling Lin e.a.
Magn Reson Mater Phy; DOI 10.1007/s10334-011-0287-2.
Magnetic Field Strength (Tesla) Blood T1 value (millisecond)
1.0 1345 ms
1.5 1412 ms
3.0 1613 ms
7.0 2149 ms
End fragment title: N: Blood T1 values
You can select what injection protocol is used depending on the tissue which was scanned. The
preset details of each protocol can be viewed and edited with the 'view' option.
Create New Preset ...

This function allows to create analysis presets that match the injection protocols used.
During the analysis, you can select the preset corresponding to the current injection
characteristics via the Task Guidance function "Select Input Parameters".
For ease of use, these presets can be saved under a user defined name. However, it is
recommended to create a new preset only when necessary.
1. Click 'Create New Preset ...' from the More drop-down menu in the toolbar.
2. Enter a name for this preset.
Philips

3. Select the Magnetic Field Strength of the used MR system in Tesla.

4. Enter the Contrast relaxivity in s-1 x mmol-1.
5. Enter the Injection dose in mmol/kg.
6. Set the Injection duration to short, medium or long.
Select Short when the bolus takes less than 5 s; select Medium when the bolus takes 5 s to
10 s; select Long when the bolus is longer than 10 s.
With 'Manual AIF' the injection duration is not applicable. Instead the 'Manual AIF' is used
for the calculation.
7. Enter the Hematocrit in %.
Node title (original): More / Delete Presets ID: 122276131979
Status: Released
Delete Presets ...

This function allows to delete injection protocol presets.
End fragment title: More / Delete Presets

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Spatial smoothing smoothes the maps and the original images. In such a way, spatial smoothing
Node title (original): Apply Temporal Smoothing ID: 122276134539

Status: Released
Apply Temporal Smoothing

• To temporally smooth the resulting maps.
End fragment title: Apply Temporal Smoothing

Status: Released
You can select the maps for real-time calculation and display, and for the generation of new
imaging series.
Philips

Display T1 and Delay Maps

• To display T1 and Delay maps in the maps viewport.

Status: Released
Status: Released
to draw ROIs.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Reformat (MPR).
workflow.

Philips

Tip

Status: Released

Status: Released
maps.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
Select Underlay
• None
Philips

Tip
NOTICE
A warning is displayed if the selected series does not match the geometry, which may cause
the anatomical image to be mispositioned.

Status: Released
NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12


overlay.
Fig. 441: Left: 100% opacity of the parametric maps. Right: 20% opacity of the parametric maps.
Node title (original): N: Image registration disabled ID: 115696054667

Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
The image registration is disabled which may cause undesired results.
End fragment title: N: Image registration disabled
8.1.6.5.9 Draw ROI

Status: Released
1. If desired, draw a ROI to focus on a specific area.

For information on how to draw, modify, and rename a ROI, see chapter “Draw ROI” on
page 1019.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 442: Different ROI types with numerical and graphical results.
2. If the current series is a brain scan, you can display a mirror line and create contra-lateral
ROIs automatically. If desired, select the following options in the task guidance panel:
• Show mirror line
• Create contra-lateral ROI automatically
• Press Ctrl+Z.
More options
the related graph.
Philips


Status: Released
Secondary Capture option from the drop-down list, and then click the button.

NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8.1.6.6 Results
Status: Released
NOTICE
Various factors like inaccurate definition of AIF, patient motion, temporal resolution, and
bolus injection conditions influence permeability values.
NOTICE
From synthetic validation studies it has been shown that for small extracellular extravascular
space and large transfer constant of diffusable tracer from the vessel to the EES, the fitted
results are not accurate. Therefore note that in parametric area the measured results should
be interpreted with caution.

Philips

• The results will be provided as parametric maps and in a table of results.
NOTICE
Please note that the pixel location remains in the table viewer, even after moving out of the
image frame.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 443: Results screen: source image and maps with ROIs, Table Viewer and Graph Viewer. The dynamic reference
line indicates the currently shown dynamic
NOTICE
If you hide the dynamic reference line, you can display it again by right-clicking in the Graph
view and selecting it from the context menu.

Status: Released
Philips



3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

time intensity curve for the drawn ROI and displays the values in the Table Viewer.
Show ROI Statistics

from the More menu.
An additional numerical results table is displayed as a floating window and displays Maximum,
voxels within the parametric maps.
When the number of columns in the Table Viewer exceeds thr default width, or number of rows
and rows.
1. Select Copy to Clipboard an open either Microsoft Word or Excel and paste the contents
from your clipboard into the application.
Philips

Parameters
Ktrans
• Transfer constant between blood plasma and Extravascular Extracellular Space (EES), also
called vascular permeability
kep
• Rate between EES and blood plasma (also called Tracer Efflux Rate)
ve
• Extravascular Volume fraction (Leakage space)
• Defined as Ktrans / kep
vp
• Plasma Volume fraction (Vp)
AUC
• Area Under the Curve of all time curves
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 445: Result maps of the Permeability package.: Ktrans, kep, ve, vp, Area under the curve.
Node title (original): T1 and Delay map ID: 115697416203

Status: Released
T1 and Delay map

The T1 and the Delay map are added for quality control purposes.
End fragment title: T1 and Delay map
8.1.7 MR Diffusion
Status: NotReleased
This postprocessing package is meant to evaluate Diffusion studies and generate parametric
maps.
The process of diffusion of water molecules through tissue can be measured using MRI
Diffusion imaging.

A valid imaging series for the Diffusion package is a Diffusion weighted series containing
multiple b-values.
Philips

NOTICE
To calculate the Apparent Diffusion Coefficient (ADC map), diffusion weighted images
acquired using at least 2 different b-values are needed.
NOTICE
Anisotropy maps (FA or Directional FA) need an acquisition with at least 6 different diffusion
directions in addition to a diffusion weighting (b=0).

Status: Released
The MR Diffusion application is designed to assist in evaluation of MR Diffusion Weighted

Imaging (DWI) and Diffusion Tensor Imaging (DTI) data to analyze diffusion and anisotropic
properties of tissue.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: NotReleased

Status: Released
The MR Diffusion package has a default layout of task guidance panel and toolbars, and two
viewports. The viewports display the following views:
• In real-time calculated Parametric Diffusion maps.

Status: Released
Similar to all packages on the IntelliSpace portal, also the MR Diffusion package provides a Task
Guidance panel in the left part of the screen.
8.1.7.2.3 Toolbar
Status: NotReleased
Philips

Node title (original): Color LUT ID: 18014406109790603-2

Status: Released


Orange
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Color LUT
Node title (original): Layout - select another layout ID: 27021605364763659

Status: NotReleased
Layout
• To select another screen layout.
Click Layout and select:
• 1x1.
• 2x2.
End fragment title: Layout - select another layout
Node title (original): More / Select b-values ID: 36028912691355147

Status: NotReleased
Select b-values
Use this function to select at least 2 b-values for processing.
End fragment title: More / Select b-values
Advanced Diffusion Tensor Maps

Select this option to allow additional maps to be selected in the Diffusion Tensor Maps section
of the task guidance panel. The following advanced diffusion tensor maps are available:
• Axial Diffusivity
Philips

• Radial Diffusivity
• Relative Anisotropy
Node title (original): More / Generate Maps using Registered ID: 36028912691808523
Data Status: NotReleased

Once enabled, this function performs registration between diffusion directions when
generating actual maps. In such a way image quality will most likely improve in the maps.
Node title (original): N: Mismatch if unregistered ID: 36028912692117259
Status: NotReleased
NOTICE
End fragment title: N: Mismatch if unregistered
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: More / Generate Maps using Registered Data
Node title (original): N: Prefix Reg ID: 36028912691653387

Status: NotReleased
NOTICE
The newly generated registered series can be recognized by the prefix 'Reg' in Series
description.
End fragment title: N: Prefix Reg
Node title (original): More / Mask ID: 36028912691187211

Status: NotReleased
Mask
Once enabled, this function displays the mask on the source image(s).
End fragment title: More / Mask
Status: Released
Mirror

Philips

Flip
Rotate Clockwise

8.1.7.2.4 More Functions within the Diffusion package

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Status: Released
mouse menus.
8.1.7.3 Workflow
Status: NotReleased
8.1.7.3.1 Launch the MR Diffusion package

Status: Released

1. Select a suitable diffusion series.
2. Click ’MR Diffusion’.
The MR Diffusion package opens.

Philips
Status: Released

Through slices (or resulting) maps

1. In the image (or map) viewport, drag up- or downwards.
2. Alternatively use the up and down arrow keys.
Through b-values
2. Alternatively use the left and right arrow keys.

Status: Released
In the task guidance panel you can select the maps for real-time calculation and display, and for
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Depending on the imaging parameters, not all types of parametric maps might be available.
Parametric maps that cannot be calculated with a specific dataset are grayed out, and a
message is displayed in the bottom line of the view ports.
Node title (original): N: Preview Diff maps ID: 115670235659

Status: Released
NOTICE
The preview of ADC, EADC and DWI iso maps is not available; however they can be generated
and reviewed.
End fragment title: N: Preview Diff maps
8.1.7.3.4 Define the Mask

Status: Released
This workflow step serves to adjust the mask and to enable the display of the mask while
adjusting.
Philips

Setting a threshold mask will exclude background pixels from the functional map calculations.
All pixels with values below the mask value will be displayed blue and will be excluded from the
calculation. Only pixels with intensity above the mask value are used for the calculations.
1. Drag the slider to define the mask.
Fig. 446: The mask is overlaid to the current source image.
Alternatively:
You may also drag the right mouse button in the images to change the mask.
8.1.7.3.5 Generate Maps

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: NotReleased

Status: NotReleased
8.1.7.4 Parametric Maps

Status: Released
The results will be provided as parametric maps. The type of the map is indicated in the map’s
series type field.
Philips

Fig. 447: Examples of maps. Clockwise from upper left: ADC map, eADC map, FA direction map, FA map
Scrolling through the maps shows which types of maps are available for the current series (not
all types of maps are suitable for every type of diffusion series).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

If an ADC iso and eADC iso map are available, directional ADC and directional eADC maps can
also be generated (even though they are not available in the preview).
DWI iso
The DWI iso map is calculated by first finding the net ADC from all of the available gradient
directions.
This net ADC is then used together with the b=0 image to create the DWI iso map. Since this
uses all available directions, the SNR of the DWI iso map is improved especially with DTI series.
• The DWI iso images show a better image quality when the number of diffusion directions
increases. The DWI iso images will have less noise. There is an increase in signal when more
than 16 directions are acquired. The higher signal gives a sharper appearance.
• The option to create DWI iso images is not available for diffusion series that are acquired
with gradient overplus as the P_oblique, M_oblique and S_oblique directions are not saved
in the database. The DWI iso option is also only available when 2 b values are selected.
ADC and ADC iso

The Apparent Diffusion Coefficient (ADC) identifies the average diffusion as measured by the
diffusion imaging sequence.
The ADC is given in ’mm2/s’ and can be expected to have an order of magnitude of 0.6 to 1.0 x
10-3 mm2/s for a tissue like white matter.
The ADC can be obtained for each separate diffusion direction (identified as ’ADC’) but also the
average or isotropic ADC (ADC iso) can be obtained when enough non-colinear diffusion
directions were acquired.
Philips

Tissue characteristics Signal DW images Signal ADC maps Signal eADC maps
High ADC (rapid diffusion) hypointense, more signal High signal intensity Low signal intensity
attenuation
Low ADC (slow diffusion) hyperintense, less signal Low signal intensity High signal intensity
attenuation
Tab. 30: Signal in ADC and eADC maps
ADC maps provide anisotropic information and are available for each diffusion direction: S, M,
P.
eADC and eADC iso

The exponential-ADC or eADC is used to show the diffusion weighting effect of a tissue. The
eADC is calculated as exp(-b*ADC). In the eADC maps, CSF has very low signal so that subtle
periventricular (e)ADC differences are more easily noticed.
FA (Fractional Anisotropy) map

Fractional anisotropy (FA) maps can be calculated from the DTI information. The FA values
indicate the degree of anisotropy and range from 0 to 1. In case of no anisotropy (or normal
isotropic diffusion, e.g. in grey matter tissue) the FA equals 0. For most white matter regions
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
the FA value is much higher (for example, in the corpus callosum the FA value is around 0.6).
At least six different diffusion directions are needed to uniquely describe the diffusion pattern
and to calculate the diffusion tensor matrix per pixel. From this calculation, the fractional
anisotropy can be displayed in a FA map. High signal intensity corresponds to high fractional
anisotropy and low signal intensity to low anisotropy.
Two different types of FA map are available: FA greyscale map (also referred to as FA map) and
FA direction map.
FA (greyscale) map
Directional information is not provided.
FA Direction map
The color indicates the most important diffusion direction of a voxel:
• Blue for FH-direction.
• Red for RL-direction.
• Green for AP-direction.
8.1.7.4.1 Advanced Diffusion Tensor Maps

Status: Released
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 448: Clockwise from upper left: FA, FA direction, Axial Diffusivity, Radial Diffusivity
Axial Diffusivity
The Axial Diffusivity map displays diffusivity along the principal axis. It is also called the
longitudinal diffusivity or the parallel diffusivity. It is associated with neuro-degenerative
diseases.
Radial Diffusivity
The diffusivities in the two minor axes are often averaged to produce a measure of radial
diffusivity:
This quantity is an assessment of the degree of restriction due to membranes and other effects,
and proves to be a sensitive measure of degenerative pathology in some neurological
conditions. Radial diffusivity is used as a measure of myelin of white matter. It is also called the
perpendicular diffusivity.
Relative Anisotropy (RA)

The RA maps appears very similar to the FA map. However, the RA map uses a slightly different
calculation:
Philips

8.1.8 MR FiberTrak
Status: NotReleased
This postprocessing function provides an additional step in the Diffusion package, and is meant
to visualize diffusion tensor data in the form of white matter tracts in Diffusion studies.
NOTICE
Visualization of fibers can be used to visualize the white matter structure in the brain.
Together with other forms of MRI data it can give a more complete diagnosis.

A valid series for the FiberTrak step of Diffusion package is a Diffusion Tensor series containing
at least 6 diffusion directions and a minimum of 2 b-values.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
The MR FiberTrak application supports the user with the viewing, processing and analysis of
Diffusion Tensor Imaging (DTI) data from MR diffusion imaging and with the creation and
visualisation of white matter tracks (or diffusional structure) in the brain and spinal tracts.

Status: NotReleased

Status: Released
The MR FiberTrak step of the MR Diffusion package has a default layout of a main viewport
with three reference viewports to the right, and a toolbar, and task guidance panels to the left.
Main viewport
The large viewport contains a view of the selected dataset as a combination of three
orthogonal slices. Rotating, panning and zooming this view allows viewing of white matter
tracts from all angles.
Philips

Reference viewports
The small viewports each contain an orthogonal view and serve as reference views (from top to
bottom: transverse, coronal, sagittal view). Each of the views is overlaid by colored lines
indicating the position of the shown slices. The slices in the main viewport are linked to the
slices in the orthogonal views.

Status: Released
Similar to all packages on the IntelliSpace portal, also the MR FiberTrak step provides a task
guidance panel in the left part of the screen. The task guidance panel provides the following
steps:
• Select Underlay & Overlay
• Track Fiber Bundle
• Save Fiber Bundles
The Workflow section later in these Instructions for Use is based on this Task Guidance. For
details, see chapter “Workflow” on page 1093.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Follow the steps of the Task Guidance to make optimal use of the FiberTrak function.
Guidance
While you are locating fiber bundles, a guidance panel is optionally available on the right side of
the main display area. The guidance panel provides information about locating common fiber
bundles. Details of how to use this panel are provided in the following workflow description.
8.1.8.2.3 Toolbar
Status: NotReleased
Orientation
Click the arrow next to the Orientation tool to display the slices in the main
viewport in one of the following predefined orientations:
• Axial Feet
• Anterior (frontal)
Philips

• Sagittal Left
View Slices
Click a slice indicator to show or hide any of the following slices in the main viewport:
• Transversal Slice
• Coronal Slice
• Sagittal Slice
Layout
Click the arrow next to the Layout tool to select one of the following layouts for the main
display area:
• Layout 1x1
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• References at Right
Each of the reference views displays one orthogonal slice. The other 2 orthogonal slices are
represented by lines. The color of the lines indicates the plane of the slice.
In the reference views, you can adjust the position of slices by using the Plane Position
interactor on the displayed slice, or by dragging the lines of the other slices. The position of the
slice is shown in the upper-right corner of each reference view.
The plane of the slice is also shown in the upper-right corner of each reference view, and
indicates the direction of fibers perpendicular to the slice.
Fiber Bundle Settings

1. The Fiber Bundle Settings dialog box is displayed. You can modify the following settings:
• Minimum FA
• Maximum Angle Change
• Minimum Fiber Length
Optimum settings for the FiberTrak algorithm

It is difficult to define the best settings for tracking fibers. They depend on the quality of the
data, the curvature of the expected tracts, and many other qualities of the underlying data.
Lowering the FA and enlarging the Angle options will yield more fibers. This should only be
done as long as the resulting tracts are shown as a coherent fiber bundle. Erroneous fibers will
be shown when these values are too low.
Philips

WARNING
When fibertract settings are changed to low values (meaning no signal threshold, very low
FA, and very high curvature acceptance) the white matter tracts may include erroneous
results.
This may consequently lead to misdiagnoses. It is advised to use default settings whenever
possible.
NOTICE
Low SNR in the DTI dataset can influence the results, leading to limited or no tracts.
Follow Mouse
You can use the single point fiber tracking, also known as fiber probing.
To probe fibers, move/hover the mouse in the main viewer.
A fiber strand is displayed for the voxel at the current pointer position in the main viewer.
Statistical values of the fiber strand are displayed beneath the main viewer (coordinates,
fractional anisotropy (FA), and apparent diffusion coefficient (ADC)).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 449: Fiber probing with the Follow Mouse function
Single ROI in high density

An alternative fiber tracking algorithm uses neighbor voxels (high density) when tracking fibers
with a single ROI. The default fiber tracking algorithm does not use neighbor voxels.
Tracking fibers with high density turned on is beneficial if you plan to exclude sections of the
fiber bundle using an "exclude" ROI. In this case, turning on the option Single ROI in high
densityprovides more consistent results.
Philips

NOTICE
This option is for use when tracking fibers with a single ROI only. If you track fibers with
multiple ROIs, the default fiber tracking algorithm is recommended.
Delete From Guidance

You can use the More menu to delete a fiber bundle from the guidance panel.
1. Click the arrow besides More.
2. Click Delete From Guidance in the More menu.
⇨ The Delete Fiber Bundles From Guidance dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the fiber bundles that you want to delete and click Delete.
8.1.8.2.4 More Functions within the FiberTrak step

Status: Released
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
mouse menus.
8.1.8.3 Workflow
Status: NotReleased
8.1.8.3.1 Launch the MR FiberTrak step from the MR Diffusion package

Status: NotReleased

1. Select a suitable diffusion series.
2. Click 'MR Diffusion'.
The MR Diffusion package opens.
3. Select FiberTrak from the task guidance panel on the left.
⇨ The MR FiberTrak step opens.
Philips

8.1.8.3.2 Select Underlay & Overlay

Status: NotReleased
In this step of the FiberTrack process you can select an underlay and an overlay, if desired.
1. To show an underlay, select the check box next to the underlay selector to show the
underlays.
⇨ A list of available underlays is displayed.
2. Select an underlay from the list, or click Select Anatomical Series at the top of the list.
⇨ If you clicked Select Anatomical Series, a dialog box is displayed with available anatomical
underlays. Select an anatomical underlay and click OK. The anatomical series is
automatically co-registered with the diffusion input series.
⇨ When used, an underlay adds additional anatomical information to the slices in the main
display area.
NOTICE
When changing an anatomical underlay with results, all computed results are deleted. A
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

message appears. Select Continue or Cancel.
If Continue is selected, all results are deleted. The new underlay is applied and is automatically
registered with the overlay.
3. To select an overlay, select the check box next to the overlay selector in the task guidance
panel.
4. Select an overlay from the list, or click fMRI Statistical Parametric Maps at the top of the
list.
⇨ FA Directional overlay: The colors used in a directional map indicate the direction of
diffusion:
• Blue: head and feet
• Green: anterior and posterior
• Red: right and left
⇨ If you clicked fMRI Statistical Parametric Maps, a dialog box is displayed with available
fMRI maps. Select a map and click OK. The map is automatically co-registered with the
diffusion input series.
8.1.8.3.3 Track Fiber Bundle

Status: NotReleased
Philips

In this step of the FiberTrack process you draw ROIs in the main display area to track fiber
bundles. A guidance panel is optionally available to help you locate and identify common fiber
bundles.
Using the Guidance Panel

1. To display the guidance panel, select Show guidance in the task guidance panel.
⇨ The guidance panel is displayed on the right side of the main display area. It provides
information about specific fiber bundles.
2. To show guidance for a different fiber bundle, click the fiber bundle name at the top of the
guidance panel and select a fiber bundle from the list.
3. The guidance panel can be collapsed or expanded, to accommodate your workflow
requirements.
⇨ In expanded mode, all text and image guidance panel for the selected fiber bundle is
displayed in one scrollable panel.
• Click to collapse the guidance panel.

⇨ In collapsed mode, the guidance panel displays only images to indicate the location of the
ROIs to track that fiber bundle.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Click to view the text guidance associated with the currently displayed image.
⇨ Images are displayed in sequence, according to the actions needed to locate and identify a
fiber bundle. Pause the pointer at the bottom edge of the guidance panel to display
thumbnails of the images in the sequence, and then click an image thumbnail to display the
image.
• Click to expand the guidance panel.
Tracking a fiber bundle

1. Manipulate the slices in the main display area to display the location of the start of the
fiber bundle.
To manipulate the slices, you can use the following tools in the right mouse menu:
• Plane Position
• Pan
• Zoom
• Roll/Rotate
• Gray Level
• Threshold
• Plane Opacity
2. To change the position of a slice, you can also use the reference views: use the Plane
Position interactor on the displayed slice, or by drag the lines of the other slices.
Philips

3. To display a predefined orientation, select an orientation using the Orientation tool in the
toolbar.
You can also select a predefined orientations using the Switch To View command in the
right mouse menu.
4. To hide or show a slice, click one of the View Slices buttons in the toolbar.
You can also hide or show slices using the View Slices command in the right mouse menu.
5. When the location of the fiber bundle is displayed, click one of the ROI tools in the task
guidance panel.
• Multi ROI Manual Tracking: This tool allows you to identify multiple ROIs and then
manually start tracking them.
• Single ROI Auto Tracking: This tool allows you to identify a single ROI and track it
automatically.
6.
If the selected ROI tool does not display the type of ROI that you want to use, click the
down arrow next to the tool and select one of the following ROI tools:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Smoothed Polygon
• Ellipse
• Seed 2D
• Seed 3D
7. Create an ROI at the location of the fiber bundle.
To create an ROI using the polygon, ellipse, or contour tool, select the tool and do the
following:
To create an ROI using one of the seed tools, select the tool and then click at the location
of the fiber bundle.
• Click at the edge of the fiber bundle location.
• Move the pointer and click around the edge of the fiber bundle location.
• Double-click to complete the ROI.
⇨ If you used Single ROI Auto Tracking, the ROI is automatically tracked. If you are manually
tracking multiple ROIs, continue with this procedure from the fiber tree.
• Press Ctrl+Z.
Philips

9. If desired, modify the shape of the ROI by pausing the pointer over the edge of the ROI and
then dragging.
10. To create another ROI, do the following:
• Manipulate the slices to display the next location that the fiber bundle passes through.
• Click the ROI tool in the Fiber bundles panel.

• Draw the next ROI.
11. When you have finished drawing ROIs, click Track under the fiber bundle to track the fiber.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 450: Tracked fiber bundle

⇨ The tracked fiber bundle is displayed.
Modifying the current fiber bundle

After creating a fiber bundle, you can edit it, or modify its appearance.
1. Right-click the current fiber bundle and then select an option from the shortcut menu.
• Edit
Use this option to modify or add ROIs.
• Hide
Use this option to hide the ROI in the display. You can show the ROI again at a later
stage using the Manage Fibers and ROIs panel in the task guidance panel.
• Show ROIs
• Use Directional Color
• Color
Philips

Select a color from the submenu. This option is not available if Use Directional Color is
selected.
• Delete
• Edit settings
This option displays the Fiber Bundle Settings dialog box, which you can use to set
configuration options for the fiber bundle.
• Rename
Managing fiber bundles

You can manage fiber bundles that you have created using the Fiber bundle panel in the task
guidance panel.
1. Click the down arrows in the task guidance panel.
⇨ The Fiber bundle panel is displayed. This panel contains color-coded entries for each fiber
bundle and associated ROIs that you have tracked.
2. To view the ROIs associated with a fiber bundle, expand the fiber bundle.
3. To display a fiber bundle or ROI in the main display area, click the item in the Manage
Fibers and ROIs panel.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4. To turn the visibility of a fiber bundle or an ROI on or off, select or clear the check box next
to the item.
5. To rename a fiber bundle or an ROI, right-click the item, click Rename, and then enter a
new name.
6. To delete a fiber bundle (and associated ROIs), right-click the fiber bundle and then click
Delete.
7. To delete an ROI without deleting the fiber bundle, right-click the ROI and then click
Delete.
8. To exclude an ROI from the calculation of the fiber bundle track, select Exclude the new
ROI, before adding a new excluded ROI or right-click the ROI and then click Exclude.
The ROI is not deleted, but it is marked as 'excluded', and the fibers contained in the ROI
are not included in the tracked fiber bundle.
9. To include an ROI that you have previously excluded, right-click the ROI and then click
Include.
10. To change the color of a fiber bundle, right-click the fiber bundle and select one of the
following options:
• Use Directional Color
• Select a custom color from the Color submenu.
11. To add another ROI to a tracked fiber bundle, do the following:
• Select the fiber bundle and click Edit in the task guidance panel, or right-click the fiber
bundle and click Edit.
• Manipulate the slices to locate the desired position of the ROI.
Philips
• Draw the ROI.

• In the task guidance panel, click Track.
Excluding fibers
You can explicitly exclude some fibers from a tracked fiber bundle.
1. Select the fiber bundle and click Edit in the task guidance panel, or right-click the fiber
bundle and click Edit.
2. Manipulate the slices in the main display area to display the location of the fibers that you
want to exclude.
3. Select an ROI tool in the task guidance panel.
4. Draw an ROI around the location of the fibers that you want to exclude, and double-click to
complete the ROI.
5. Right-click the ROI and click Exclude.
6. Click Track in the task guidance panel to track the fiber bundle.
⇨ All fibers in the new ROI are excluded from the tracked fiber bundle.
8.1.8.3.4 Save Fiber Bundles

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
In this step of the FiberTrak process you can save fiber bundles with the series for review in
MultiModality Viewer.
1. Ensure that the fiber bundles that you want to save are displayed.
2. Click Save Fiber Bundles.
8.1.8.3.5 Fiber Statistics

Status: Released
1. To show statistics about fibers and ROIs that you have created, click Show Statistics.
⇨ The statistics panel is displayed below the main viewport.
2. Click Show Fiber Statistics to display details of fibers.
3. Click Show ROI Statistics to display details of ROIs.
4. To export the statistics for fibers and ROIs, click Export, and then save the statistics file
using the Save As dialog box..
⇨ The statistics file is saved in CSV format, which can be opened in a spreadsheet application.
5. To close the statistics panel, click the Close button in the panel's title bar.
Philips

8.1.8.3.6 Review and Edit Co-registration

Status: NotReleased
When co-registration is performed, you should verify the accuracy of the registration. You can
inspect and edit the registration using the Inspect/Correct Data Alignment step.
NOTICE
If you edit the registration and save your adjustments, all computed results are deleted.
1. Click Review co-registration in the toolbar to open the Inspect/Correct Data Alignment
step.
guidance panel.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

guidance panel:

6. To reset the registration to the original position, click Reset All Alignment.
7. To save the registration and continue with the analysis, click Save.
8. To ignore the changes, click Cancel.
Philips

WARNING
Before Analysis Alignment between functional and anatomical series, series should be
inspected and corrected using the registration inspection step in IViewBOLD and FiberTrack.
When saving changes performed in registration, all earlier computed results are deleted.
8.1.8.3.7 Creating and Saving Batches/Saving in Surgical Navigation Format

Status: Released
You can create a batch of images and export to surgical navigation from a volume using the
Batch/export to surgical navigation option in the Task panel.
The following batch types can be created:
Parallel: Creates a set of parallel slabs, in the current orientation of the slab displayed in the
main image.
Freestyle: Creates a freestyle batch based on user-defined key-frames.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
8.1.8.3.7.1 Creating a parallel batch

Status: Released
1. Select the Batch/export to surgical navigation icon (or via the Batch dropdown in the Task
guidance panel.)
2. Select viewport in the viewing area and click Parallel.
3. Navigate to the start point in the view and click Start.
4. Navigate to the end point in the view and click End.

5. If desired, select Axial, Sagittal or Coronal batch preset to create a parallel batch covering
the entire volume.
6. If desired, modify the batch properties:
• Nr Images: Number of images to be generated.
• Increment: The incremental step size in terms of the distance between the centers of
the slabs. Initially this is equal to the current slab thickness of the image in the viewport.
• Thickness: The slab thickness of the images to be generated. This is always equal to the
current slab thickness of the image in the view. This helps in previewing the quality of
the final result.
⇨ The effect of the selected range is visible by means of reference lines in the reference
Philips
images indicating the positions of the images that are to be generated.

⇨ The number of images and the incremental step size are linked. For example, increasing the
number of images decreases the incremental step size, keeping the distance between the
center of the first slab and the last slab constant.
7. To preview the batch, do one of the following:
• Click Play/Stop to preview the batch automatically.
• Click Batch scroll interactor to scroll through the batch manually.

• Clear batch is used for resetting the parameters for all kinds of batches, including
parallel, radial and freestyle.
8.1.8.3.7.2 Creating a freestyle batch

Status: Released
1. Select the Batch/export to surgical navigation icon (or via the Batch dropdown in the Task
guidance panel.)
2. Click Freestyle.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

3. Navigate to the start point in the view and click Add Key-frame.
4. Manipulate the view to display the next point that you want to capture in the batch and
click Add Key-frame again.
5. Optional step: To remove the last Key-frame that you added, click Remove last Key-frame.
6. Continue to add Key-frames as desired.
7. To remove all Key-frames and start over, click Remove all Key-frames.
NOTICE
When creating a freestyle batch, reference lines of batch image positions are not displayed.
8. To preview the batch, do one of the following:
• Click Play/Stop to preview the batch automatically.
• Click Batch scroll interactor to scroll through the batch manually.

9. To adjust the speed of the move, drag the slider between Slow and Fast.
Philips

10. Enter a number in the Playing time box (measured in seconds) to set the duration of the
movie.
11. Choose between setting a number of frames per second, or setting a total number of
frames for the movie.
NOTICE
The speed and duration of the movie, and the number of images used are linked, and as you
change one parameter, the other parameters are adjusted to achieve the requested result.
Select one parameter that you wish to define and allow the application to configure the other
parameters.
8.1.8.3.7.3 Saving a batch

Status: Released
1. To save the batch, click Save Batch As in the Common tools panel.
2. The Save Batch As dialog is displayed, allowing you to select a file name, file format, and
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
destination. You can save the series in DICOM format, or in non-DICOM format. If you
select a non-DICOM format, you can additionally select a file system destination for
exporting.
3. When saving the batch in Movie format, the following settings are available:
• Quality: drag the slider between Low or High. The higher the quality, the larger the size
of the saved movie file.
• De-identify: When selected, the De-identify Patient dialog box is displayed, allowing you
to manually typing new patient details (this function removes patient information
before saving the movie).
4. Click Save.
⇨ The batch is automatically previewed once in the main display area before it is saved.
8.1.8.3.7.4 Saving to Surgical Nav. Format for MR Data

Status: Released
You can save 3D anatomical volumes, fibers and SPM's (Statistical Parameter Maps) from the
MR FiberTrak application in surgical nav. format for surgery systems for review, preparation,
and navigation during surgical interventions.
The following MR data types can be saved to surgical nav. format:
• Routine MR anatomical data (DICOM data)
• fMRI results (activation areas) as generated by the iViewBOLD package in IntelliSpace Portal
Philips

• White matter tracts (also called "fibers") as generated by the Diffusion Package in
IntelliSpace Portal
NOTICE
Saving images in ‘Surgical navigation format’ is possible only if the source DTI sequence is
aligned / registered with the selected (Anatomical) underlay.
1. Select the data that you want to save to surgical nav. format.
⇨ If a user-defined batch is not available, a parallel batch covering the entire volume is
automatically generated. The number of slices, the slice thickness and the orientation of the
batch are the same as the anatomical data.
⇨ Alternatively, you can create a batch and define the parameters according to your needs.
2. Click to Save to Surgical Nav. Format in the Common tools panel to display the Save to
Surgical Nav. Format dialog box.
3. Enter a Description for the saved data, if desired (to a maximum of 64 characters).
⇨ A description is provided by default based on the type of data being saved.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

4. Select the Options to apply to the saved data:
• Combine Data: Results are combined (for example, underlay, overlay, maps, and fibers).
This option is useful if the surgery system that you are exporting to does not support
fusion. (Fused images can be saved if they meet the export requirements, for example:
an MR series overlaid with another MR series.)
• Apply Transparency: Selecting this option saves fibers and fMRI activation areas
with transparency, so that they can be used as overlays on corresponding (co-
registered) anatomical images on the surgery system. If this option is not selected,
overlay data is opaque.
• Separate Data: Results are saved as separate series. Gray values for fMRI are preserved
(but they are converted to standard MR data). For fibers and segmentations, the
maximum gray value is used. This option is useful if the surgery system that you are
exporting to supports fusion. Each object is stored with a different gray value, which
maps to a specific color during fusion. Additionally, positive and negative activation (if
available) in the SPM map are saved as separate objects, so that they can be easily
distinguished on the surgery system.
⇨ The saved data can be exported to the following surgery systems:
• Stealth Navigation (Medtronic)
• iNtellect Cranial (Stryker)
• VectorVision (BrainLAB)
Philips

WARNING
When using the “Saving to Surgical Nav. Format for MR Data” option, there is a remote
possibility that even with all registration steps being performed on the fused images (fMRI
maps or Fiber Tracks aligned to anatomical images), there is still a residual misalignment
which may be introduced due to small patient motion during the acquisition of the images.
This may result in inaccurate information for surgical planning and it is recommended for
the surgery planning review board to inspect the results.
Click Back to MR FiberTrack to return to Track Fibers stage.
8.1.9 MR IViewBOLD
Status: NotReleased
This processing package helps to identify active regions of the brain, relying on local metabolic
and hemodynamic changes that occur in activated cortical brain. MR IViewBOLD indicates those
pixels with a significantly increased signal intensity.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Contrast mechanisms
• BOLD (Blood Oxygen Level Dependent): During brain activation (increase of metabolism),
the oxygen consumption of local tissue increases by approximately 5%.
• Vasodilatation: Vasodilatation occurs resulting in a local increase of blood volume and flow
by 20% to 40%.
The above hemodynamic response to brain activation leads to an increased local oxygen level
resulting in a signal increase in T2*W sequences.

• Heavily T2*weighted sequence. With matrices of around 64 - 96, this will yield a TR of 2 s to
4 s depending on the number of slices used.
• Dynamic study, e.g. 80 dynamics or more: Acquisition of 10 dynamics in rest, 10 dynamics
during activation until a minimum number of dynamics (e.g. 80 is obtained).
• Basic fMRI BOLD scans typically take 4 min. to 5 min with typically 25 slices, 80 dynamics of
3 s each.
• Also the 3D PRESTO is often used for BOLD imaging (utilizing phase navigation). With this
type of acquisition high temporal resolution can be produced by applying SENSE-factors in
both phase and slice encoding directions.

Status: Released
Philips

The MR iViewBOLD application assists users in the processing, viewing and analysis of fMRI
Data. The application is designed to support the user to identify and visualize functional regions
of the brain, relying on local metabolic and hemodynamic changes that occur in activated brain
areas.

Status: NotReleased

Status: Released
The MR IViewBOLD package has a default layout of viewport displaying source images and
panels to the left.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: NotReleased
Similar to all packages on the IntelliSpace portal, also the MR IViewBOLD package provides a
NOTICE
Follow the steps of the Task Guidance to make optimal use of the IViewBOLD function.
Task guidance depends on the computation method that you want to use from Analyze SPMs in
the left task guidance.. The available methods are described below.
Compute Using "Block" Paradigm

The block paradigm is typically used to detect correlations between brain activation and a task
that the subject performs during the scan. A block paradigm requires that the subject perform a
certain task in time blocks that are interleaved with time blocks of rest.
• Set Smoothing Width
• Select Anatomical Underlay
• Select Paradigm
• Compute SPMs
• Save SPMs
Philips

A block paradigm calculates statistical parameter maps based on activation and control tasks
performed for a duration of at least a few dynamics.
Compute Using "Event" Paradigm

The event paradigm is used to discover correlations with specific cognitive states that are
induced in the subject, such as memory and recognition. Typically this is done by randomly
offering the subject a known visual stimulus, such as a picture.
• Select Paradigm
• Compute SPMs
• Save SPMs
An event paradigm calculates statistical parameter maps using randomized stimuli (not task
based, as with the block paradigm).
Compute Using "Resting State" Data

Brain activity is present even in the absence of an external task, and the resting state paradigm
evaluates such interactions that occur in the brain when the subject is resting. This activity
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
represents the functional connectivity of a number of networks which are consistently found in
healthy subjects, and which represent specific patterns of synchronous activity. The resting
state paradigm is useful for exploring whether the functional organization of the brain is altered
in neurological or psychiatric diseases.
• Draw a ROI to automatically generate a paradigm
• Save SPMs
Compute using resting state data allows you to draw a contour on the anatomy to set the
reference area for SPM calculation. Fluctuations in the BOLD signal during resting state (as a
result of tissue vascularization, for example) can be indicators for disease.
8.1.9.2.3 Toolbar
Status: Released
NOTICE
MR IViewBOLD does not provide a toolbar. All functions are selected from the task guidance
panel or from the right mouse menu.
Philips

8.1.9.2.4 More Functions within the MR IViewBOLD package

Status: NotReleased
Status: NotReleased
mouse menus.
The following functions are available:
• Manage Paradigms
• Use Smoothing Step
• Show Skip Dummy Dynamics Step
• Series selection for multi sessions
Manage Paradigms
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

A paradigm is a set of instructions that are given to the patient during acquisition. These
instructions are focused on delineating a certain area of brain function.
The Manage Paradigms function allows you to add, edit, or delete paradigms using the Manage
Paradigms dialog box.
1. To add a new paradigm, click New in the Manage Paradigms dialog box.
⇨ The Paradigm Editor is displayed. The Paradigm Editor consists of the following two steps:
• Step 1: Select the paradigm type and provide a name for the new paradigm.
• Step 2: Configure the paradigm tasks.
2. To create a block paradigm, do the following in Step 1 of the Paradigm Editor:
• Select Block Paradigm.
• Select whether to measure the duration in Seconds or Dynamics.
• Enter a unique name for the paradigm.
3. Click Next to move to Step 2 of the block paradigm process in the Paradigm Editor.
4. At the top of Step 2 of the Paradigm Editor, select whether blocks will run sequentially or
whether they can run in parallel.
5. Click the down arrow in the first task box, and select a rest period.
6. Continue to add tasks and rest periods as desired.
7. To assign or change color overlay, click on the color legend next to the added task and
select from the predefined color presets.
8. Continue adding tasks or rest periods until the block paradigm is configured.
Philips

9. To change the duration of a task or rest period, drag the end sliders to the corresponding
block.
10. To remove a block, click Delete next to the block.
11. Click Save to save the block paradigm.
12. To create an event paradigm, do the following in Step 1 of the Paradigm Editor:
• Select Event Paradigm.
• Click Browse and select the event file that you want to use.
Presentation files can be selected for analysis of events created with Presentation
software.
• Enter a unique name for the paradigm.
13. Click Next to move to Step 2 of the event paradigm process in the Paradigm Editor.
⇨ Tasks for the event paradigm are configured according to the events file specified in Step 1.
14. Click Save to save the event paradigm.
15. To modify an existing paradigm, select the paradigm in the Manage Paradigms dialog box
and click Edit.
Modify the settings of the paradigm using the Paradigm Editor (you can't change the type
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
of paradigm).
16. To create a copy of an existing paradigm, select the paradigm in the Manage Paradigms
dialog box, click the down arrow next to the New button and then click Copy.
⇨ A copy of the selected paradigm is added to the paradigm list as a new paradigm. You can
then modify the new paradigm using the Paradigm Editor.
17. To delete an existing paradigm, select the paradigm in the Manage Paradigms dialog box
and click Delete.
Show Smoothing Step

This function is enabled by default and is available in the task guidance panel when you start
IViewBOLD. If desired, you can hide this function. For details, see chapter “Set Smoothing
Width” on page 1111.
Show Skip Dummy Dynamics

Selecting the Show Skip Dummy Dynamics option in the More menu adds an optional step to
the task guidance panel called Skip Dummy Dynamics.
Skipping dynamics allows you to ignore a number of the initial dynamics, in which the steady
state may not have been reached. This may be apparent as "dummy scans" in the Time
Intensity Display. Skipping these dynamics improves the analysis. After skipping dynamics, you
need to compute the SPMs again.
This optional step is available for all computational methods.
Philips

Series selection for multi-sessions

Use this function to add series to the selection when you are performing a multi-session
analysis. When you select this item, the Select Series dialog box is displayed, allowing you to
select additional series.
8.1.9.3 Workflow
Status: NotReleased
8.1.9.3.1 Launch the MR IViewBOLD package

Status: Released

1. Select a suitable fMRI series.
2. Click ’MR IViewBOLD’.
The MR IViewBOLD package opens.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨ Co-registration is performed automatically as the package opens, according to the
reference series settings in the MR preferences. For more information, see Anatomical
Reference Preferences.
8.1.9.3.2 Review and Edit Co-registration

Status: NotReleased
When co-registration is performed, you should verify the accuracy of the registration between
the functional and anatomical series. You can inspect and edit the registration using the Review
and edit co-registration step.
NOTICE
If you edit the registration and save your adjustments, all computed results are deleted.
1. Click Review co-registration in the toolbar to open the co-registration step.

guidance panel.
Philips
guidance panel:


6. To reset the registration to the original position, click Reset to default

registration.
7. To save the registration and continue with the analysis, click Save.
8. To ignore the changes, click Cancel.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
8.1.9.3.3 Set Smoothing Width

Status: Released
Selecting the Show Smoothing Step option in the More menu adds an optional step to the task
guidance panel called Set Smoothing Width. Smoothing reduces noise level while retaining the
underlying signal.
NOTICE
If very small activation regions are expected, smoothing should not be performed to avoid
signal reduction.
This step is optional, but it is enabled by default when you start IViewBOLD. If desired, you can
hide this function.
This step is available for all computational methods.
1. To adjust the smoothing width, drag the slider in the task guidance panel.
⇨ An appropriate setting for the smoothing width is twice the in-plane resolution (voxel size)
of the images.
⇨ To fine-tune the smoothing width by small increments, click the slider control and then use
the left and right arrow keys on the keyboard.
⇨ Increasing the smoothing width smooths the boundaries of calculated areas. This reduces
Philips
noise in the image, but also reduces spatial resolution.

8.1.9.3.4 Anatomical Series

Status: NotReleased
WARNING
Software does not recognize wrong correlation between tasks specified by input paradigm
and acquired data. Correlation can be manually checked by users using time intensity
display.
If desired you can select an underlay to provide additional anatomical information in the image.
1. To display an anatomical underlay, select Use anatomical series as underlay in the task
guidance panel.
⇨ Select a different anatomical series from the drop down list using select anatomical series
dialog box.
⇨ Alternatively, a message is displayed if an anatomical series is not available.
2. Select a series from the dialog box and click OK.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨ The anatomical series is loaded as an underlay in the main viewport with co-registration.
The name of the series used is displayed in the task guidance panel.
NOTICE
When changing an anatomical underlay with results, all computed results are deleted. A
message appears. Select Continue or Cancel.
If Continue is selected, all results are deleted. The new underlay is applied and is automatically
registered with the overlay.
3. To hide the underlay, clear the Use anatomical series as underlay check box in the task
guidance panel.
⇨ The underlay remains available in the task guidance panel. To display it, select the check
box again.
4. To use a different series as the underlay, click the Select dropdown list and choose an
alternative series, if available.
8.1.9.3.5 Analyze SPMs

Status: NotReleased
Philips

NOTICE
This task is applicable to block and event paradigms only. For Resting State Data, continue to
the "Compute SPMs" task.
1. Click the down arrow in the Select Paradigm box in the task guidance panel and select the
paradigm that you want to use for the analysis.
2. Optional step for Event paradigms: you can override the configured event file for the
paradigm and use a file with different timepoints. Select Change the Event File and click
Browse to select an alternative file.

3. In the Select SPMs tasks for display box, select the statistical parameter maps that you
want to calculate.
4. To assign or change color overlay, click on the color legend next to the added task and
select from the predefined color presets.
8.1.9.3.6 Compute SPMs

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: NotReleased
1. Additional step for Resting State Data only: Select an ROI tool in task guidance
panel and draw a contour on the anatomy to set the reference area for SPM calculation.
Click the arrow next to the ROI tool to access the following options:
• Smoothed Polygon
• Ellipse
• Press Ctrl+Z.
3. For all paradigms or Resting State Data: In the Compute SPMs section of the task guidance
panel, select the masks to be used for the computation. The following masks can be used
separately or together:
• Select Apply Default Mask to use the default correction algorithm. This mask
suppresses calculation and display of activation areas outside the brain. It also provides
faster calculation.
Philips

• Select Suppress Motion Related Artifacts to use the motion correction algorithm.
However, if the motion has a similar pattern to the stimulus, it may also reduce
interesting activation.
NOTICE
When analyzing series that have been registered on the MR console, the option to suppress
motion-related artifacts option is not available. This option is only available for series that
have been registered on the IntelliSpace Portal.
4. Click Compute SPMs to start the analysis and display the statistical parameter maps in the
main viewport.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 451: Statistical parameter maps after computation
5. To change the layout of the tiled viewports, right-click a viewport and select a new layout
in the right mouse menu.
6. To change SPM (Statistical Parameter Map) color overlay, right click on the image, select
Color and select from the predefined color presets.
7. To change the T-score of the colormap, move the pointer over the upper threshold or the
lower threshold, and drag up or down to change that threshold.
⇨ The T-score range is indicated in the colormap legend in the viewport. Changing the T-score
allows you to increase or decrease the range of pixels included in the color overlay.
8. To change the blending (transparency) of the SPMs, right-click the image and click Alpha
Blending in the right mouse menu.
• Drag up or down to adjust the blending. The level of blending is displayed as a
percentage at the top of the viewport.
9. Double-click a viewport to view a single slice in detail.
10. To view the Time Intensity Display (TID) for an activation area, right-click the activation
area and click Show TID or select Mark activation area for TID and place the seed point on
the image at the center of the activation area.
Philips

11. Limit TID Computation to Marked Slice Only: By default the Time Intensity Display shows
the average value of the total 3D activation volume. Set this option to limit the
computation to the 2D area in the selected plane.
⇨ The TID is displayed below the viewport, with the average TID displayed in the graph on the
left.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 452: Time Intensity Display for a picked activation area

⇨ If the signal response was taken from a region of interest with a high statistical value, the
response should closely follow the applied paradigm.
⇨ You can hide or show the TID by clicking the double arrow in the upper-right corner of
the TID.
⇨ The colormap scale is displayed on the right side of the viewport. By default, only positive
values are displayed.
12. To view negative values, right-click the viewport and click Show Negative T-Scores.
Philips

Fig. 453: Displaying negative T-Scores
13. To view the Quality Check graph, click the fMRI Quality Check Graph tab above the TID
display.
⇨ The Quality Check graph is displayed below the viewport.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 454: fMRI Quality Check Graph

⇨ The left axis of the Quality Check graph displays the translation in mm symmetric around
zero, and the right axis displays the rotation in degrees symmetric around zero. The graph
uses the following colors:
⇨ You can show or hide individual plots using the check boxes above the graph.
• Red: trans x (representing the shift in the x direction)
• Green: trans y (representing the shift in the y direction)
• Dark blue: trans z (representing the shift in the z direction)
Philips
• Yellow: rot x (representing the rotation around the x-axis)

• Pink: rot y (representing the rotation around the y-axis)

• Light blue: rot z (representing the rotation around the z-axis)
14. To change the cluster size, click the ClusterSize viewport control and enter a value.
⇨ Changing the cluster size allows you to filter out smaller activation areas or "false positives".
WARNING
Before Analysis Alignment between functional and anatomical series, series should be
inspected and corrected using the registration inspection step in IViewBOLD and FiberTrack.
When saving changes performed in registration, all earlier computed results are deleted.
8.1.9.3.7 Save Results

Status: NotReleased
1. To save the statistical parameter maps, enter a name in the Save SPMs section of the task
guidance panel and click Save.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⇨ The saved SPMs are saved with the series and are available from the Series panel.
8.1.10 MR SpectroView
Status: Released
The MR SpectroView package is used to analyze and present spectroscopy data after
processing. The package can be used for the evaluation of Single Voxel and Multi Voxel
(Chemical Shift Imaging CSI) data. It handles both time and frequency domain data presented in
the following form possibilities:
• Graphs
– Processed spectra
– Fitted spectra
• Tables providing information on
– Peak position including label
– SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio)
– Height
– Peak Area
– FWHM (Full Width Half Maximum)
– Area Ratio
• Metabolite images (in color overlay), optional with quality indicator and mini spectra (Multi
Voxel)
Philips

• Ratio images (in color overlay), optional with quality indicator and mini spectra (Multi
Voxel)
• Spectral grids on reference images
– Display of user-selected subset from an array of spectra

Status: Released
MR SpectroView is a task-guided application for the post-processing and visualization of Proton

Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy (MRS) imaging, providing hydrogen single and multi-voxel
spectra, metabolite maps, and/or ratio maps. Refer to chapter “Specify Metabolites” on page
1126 for details on how to properly select metabolites and metabolite ratios for anatomies
such as Brain, Breast, Liver, Muscle and Prostate.

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
The MR SpectroView package has a default layout of a viewport displaying the spectrum with
metabolite information and reference views.
8.1.10.2.1. Reference Views

1 Last Content Modificator: Marshall, Tom ID: 115664884363
Status: Released
Reference views display information according to the type of spectroscopy analysis: single voxel
or multiple voxels.
Reference view Content of viewport with SVS data Content of viewport with CSI data
Top Planning Planning

• by default: Axial Feet (A) • by default: Axial Feet (A),
• by default with quality indicator and • by default with quality indicator and
mini spectra mini spectra
Middle Planning Coronal Front (C) Metabolite map

• by default with quality indicator and • by default without quality indicator and
Philips

Reference view Content of viewport with SVS data Content of viewport with CSI data
Bottom Planning Sagittal Left (S) Metabolite map

• by default with quality indicator and • by default without quality indicator and
For all The voxel is displayed as a cube in A grid is displayed on all viewports with the
orthogonal reference views. selected voxels highlighted.
For more information about quality indicator and mini spectra, refer to chapter “More
Functions within the MR SpectroView package” on page 1122
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 455: Reference view layout for single voxel analysis (left) and multiple voxel analysis (right)
8.1.10.2.1. Reference Box

Status: Released
NOTICE
The reference box in the reference views represents the PRESS box (Point Resolved
Spectroscopy) as stored in the volume localization sequence. Only voxels with their center
located inside the box are processed and displayed. If the volume localization sequence is not
present, all spectroscopy grid slices are displayed.
The reference box is color-coded as follows:

• Green: unprocessed.
• Light green: processing in progress.
• Cyan: processed.
Philips

8.1.10.2.1. Quality Indicator

Status: Released
The quality of a spectrum is based on the following properties:

• Field homogeneity of the magnetic field
• Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR)
Full Width Half Maximum

The field homogeneity is specified by the Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM) of the
unsuppressed water peak as present in the water reference frame.
If the water reference frame is not present, the FWHM is derived from the water peak in the
clinical spectrum (if the clinical spectrum is fitted for the water peak).
If the water peak is not present in the clinical spectrum, or if it is not fitted, the highest peak is
used (excluding the fat peak).
The FWHM assessment is based on the following values:
FWHM H2O [ppm] Quality of Homogeneity
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

≤ 0.10 Good
0.10 < FWHM H2O ≤ 0.16 Moderate
> 0.16 Poor
Tab. 31: FWHM H2O Quality Indicator
FWHM Other Peaks [ppm] Quality of Homogeneity
≤ 0.07 Good
0.07 < FWHM ≤ 0.14 Moderate
> 0.14 Poor
Tab. 32: FWHM Other Peaks Quality Indicator
For prostate, the FWHM assessment is based on the following values:

≤ 0.4 Good
0.4 < FWHM ≤ 0.6 Moderate
> 0.6 Poor
Tab. 33: FWHM Citrate Quality Indicator
The formula used for calculating ppm (parts per million) is as follows:
• Delta f (at half max) / fres * 106.
Philips

Signal-to-Noise Ratio
The signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) is defined in the frequency domain (FD) as the height of the
largest metabolite peak divided by the root-mean-square (rms) amplitude (¼ SD) of the noise in
a signal- and artifact-free part of the spectrum.
SNR is based on the highest peak, excluding the water and lipid peak.
The SNR assessment is based on the following values:
> 10 Good
5 < SNR < 10 Moderate
<5 Poor
Tab. 34: SNR Quality Indicator
The quality indicator supports an assessment of the quality of the spectrum, based on the
homogeneity and the signal-to-noise ratio on a voxel by voxel basis.
It supports an assessment of whether the quality of the spectrum of a voxel is clinically
acceptable based on FWHM and SNR, and as a consequence, it indicates the confidence level of
results derived from the spectrum.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
The assessed quality of the spectrum is indicated using colors: green, orange and red. The
colors indicate that the quality of the spectrum is good, moderate, or poor based on the
described characteristics.
The colors represent the following combination of FWHM and SNR:
Fig. 456: FWHM / SNR Quality Indicator
1 Poor
2 Moderate
3 Good
Philips


Status: Released
Similar to all packages on the IntelliSpace portal, also the MR SpectroView package provides a
Task Guidance panel in the left part of the screen. The task guidance panel provides the
following steps:
• Select the Anatomy
• Adjust Phase
• Specify Metabolites
• Save Graphs and Maps
NOTICE
Follow the steps of the Task Guidance to make optimal use of the MR SpectroView function.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8.1.10.2.3 More Functions within the MR SpectroView package
Status: Released
Status: Released
mouse menus.
Additional right mouse functions with MR SpectroView

In addition to the standard right mouse functions, MR SpectroView provides the following
package-specific functions in the right mouse menu:
Function Description
Show Actual Spectrum Displays the line representing raw data (yellow line)
Show Fitted Spectrum Displays the smoothed line representing processed data for the selected
metabolites (light blue line)
Show Fitted Baseline Displays the baseline of the fitted spectrum (pink line)
Philips

Real Displays the data in the analysis graph using real spectrum components
Modulus Displays the data in the analysis graph using the magnitude values of the
spectrum
Tab. 35: Analysis graph
Show Grid Displays the spectroscopy grid (voxel) - can be displayed per viewport
(Right click outside the grid, if
displayed)
Align View to Grid Aligns the view to the same plane as the grid
(Right click the grid)
Show Quality Indicator Applies a color-coded background color per voxel to indicate the quality of
(Right click the grid) the spectrum from the voxel
Quality is indicated as:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• green representing good quality;

• orange representing intermediate quality;
• red representing poor quality.
The quality assessment is based on the line width of the unsuppressed
water peak and signal-to-noise ratio of the highest metabolite peak, in
most cases in brain examinations this will be NAA or creatine.
Show Mini Spectra Displays a spectra icon in the voxel as a miniature representation of the
(Right click the grid) actual analysis results
Tab. 36: Reference views - Single voxel
Show Grid Displays the spectroscopy grid - can be displayed per viewport
(Right click outside the grid, if
displayed)
Align View to Grid Aligns the view to the same plane as the grid
(Right click the grid, only in the
anatomical (upper) view)
Show Quality Indicator Applies a color-coded background color to each voxel in the grid to
(Right click the grid) indicate the quality of the spectrum from the voxel
More information, see table 'Reference views - Single voxels'.
Philips

Show Mini Spectra Displays a spectra icon in each voxel in the grid as a miniature
(Right click the grid) representation of the actual analysis results
Smoothen Smooths the color scale gradients in the metabolite map

(Right click outside the grid, only in the
map views)
Color Scale Displays the color scale on the right side of the metabolite map
(Right click outside the grid, only in the
map views)
Orient to Grid Plane Aligns orientation of the underlying anatomy to the grid plane.
Orient to Grid Rows Aligns orientation of the underlying anatomy to the grid rows.
Orient to Grid Columns Aligns orientation of the underlying anatomy to the grid column.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Tab. 37: Reference views - Multiple voxels
8.1.10.3 Workflow
Status: Released
8.1.10.3.1 Launch the MR SpectroView package

Status: Released

1. Select a suitable spectroscopy series and a suitable imaging series.
NOTICE
Ensure that all series that are required for analysis are selected. For example, a spectroscopy
series also requires an anatomical series for reference. If you do not select all the required
series, the application cannot be launched.
Philips

⇨ When you make a selection of multiple series and start an analysis package, only the
selected series are displayed in the series browser. To add a series to an analysis after the
analysis package has been started, right-click the series in the Directory and click Add to
running application.
2. Click ’MR SpectroView’.
The MR SpectroView package opens.
8.1.10.3.2 Select the Anatomy

Status: Released
When you open a spectroscopic dataset in SpectroView, the system automatically comes up
with a default set of processing steps that are performed to analyse and display a spectrum (or
set of spectra). This default set of processing steps depends on the selected spectroscopic
dataset and on the examined anatomy.
In order to make sure that the correct processing steps will be performed on your dataset,
select the anatomy (if the displayed option is not correct):
• Brain,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Breast,
• Liver,
• Muscle,
• Prostate.
NOTICE
For frequency domain data loaded into SpectroView, the Task Guidance steps are grayed out.
SpectroView transforms time domain data into frequency domain data. Of course frequency
domain data can be viewed.
8.1.10.3.3 Select a voxel for analysis

Status: Released
1. Zoom and pan the reference views to optimally display the voxels of interest:
2. Optional: enable/disable the display of the grid:
• Right-click outside the grid and check/uncheck 'Show Grid'.
3. Optional: enable/disable the display of mini spectra and quality indicator:
• Right-click inside the grid and check/uncheck 'Show Mini Spectra' and 'Show Quality
Indicator'.
4. Once the display is optimal, select a voxel by clicking on it.
Philips

The corresponding spectrum is displayed in the analysis graph viewport.
8.1.10.3.4 Adjust Phase

Status: Released
Spectrum Phase Adjustment

• Allows the user to correct the phase of the spectrum using zero-order (global) term.
– Zero-order phase correction: being used if there are small delays between the transmit
and reception of the signal in which the phase error has an influence on all peaks.
– Corrections are performed on 3x3 voxels in the center of the grid and propagated to all
other voxels.
• Both auto phasing and manual phasing can be selected.
Although any spectrum can be adjusted, this capability is most relevant for proton spectra
acquired without an unsuppressed reference scan.
Automatic phase adjustment is performed by default.
When automatic adjustment is not optimal, you can manually adjust the phase to make sure
that the major peaks are as symmetric as possible and closer to the baseline.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Manual Phase Adjustment
1. Drag the upper slider to interactively change the zero-order phase correction.
Drag the lower slider to finetune the zero-order phase correction.
2. Alternatively enter the degrees directly instead of dragging the sliders.
Clinically, this option is probably not useful, but for experiments requiring you to process
the same dataset using the same parameters more often– this improves workflow.
3. Click Apply to apply the changes and see the effects on the spectrum.
Clicking Cancel doesn't apply the changes, but resets the phase to the previous settings.
8.1.10.3.5 Specify Metabolites

Status: Released
The selected metabolites are used for peak fitting and labeling. Metabolite maps and ratio
maps can be calculated accordingly.
1. If you want to add/delete metabolites, use the drop-down menu and choose the desired
ones.
2. Proceed similarly for the maps.
3. Click on the button to add a metabolite/ratio map.
The following metabolites and metabolite maps can be selected for the anatomies:
Philips

Abbreviation Name of Metabolite Brain Breast Liver Muscle Prostate
Ac Acetate x - - - -
Cho Choline x x x - x
Cit Citrate - - - - x
as Cit, Cit140,
Cit38
Cr Creatine x - - x x
Cr2 Creatine x - - x -
Glx Glutamate and Glutamine x - - - -
Lac Lactate x - - - -
lip Lipid x x x x x
as lip1, lip2, lip3,
lip4, lip5
mI myo-Inositol x - - - -
NAA N-acetylaspartate x - - - -
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
sI scyllo-Inositol x - - - -
TMA Trimethylamine - -- - x -
H2O Water - - x - -
Pa Polyamine (spermine) - - - - x
Tab. 38: Metabolites
NOTICE
Water is only selectable for liver. Unsuppressed water reference measurements (if available)
are automatically processed for the anatomies.
Abbreviation Brain Breast Liver Muscle Prostate
Cho x x x - x
Cho/Cit140 - - - - x
Cho/Cr x - - - -
Cho/NAA x - - - -
Cit140 - - - - x
Cr x - - x -
H2O - - x - -
Philips

Abbreviation Brain Breast Liver Muscle Prostate
lip - - x x -
as lip and lip H2O as lip1, lip2
NAA x - - - -
NAA/Cr x - - - -
TMA - - - x -
Tab. 39: Metabolite and Ratio Maps
The table above displays the default metabolite and ratio maps. You can create other
metabolite and ratio maps as desired.
8.1.10.3.6 Save Graphs and Maps

Status: Released
1. To save the graphs and metabolite maps as a new series, click Save Graphs and Maps.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8.1.11 MR Cartilage Assessment
Status: Released
The Cartilage Assessment package can be used for the quantitative analysis of cartilage and
cartilage lesions. It is based on the difference between T2 relaxation times of healthy and
damaged cartilage.
Valid Imaging Series

A Multi-Echo Spin-Echo series with all echoes is required to analyze the T2 times in the Cartilage
Assessment package. The analysis also requires a calculated T2 map, but if map calculation was
not enabled in the ExamCard when scanning, a T2 map is automatically calculated when a
series is opened. T2 maps are also calculated automatically when you open multi-vendor series
in the application.
In order to provide good results, a certain minimum quality of data is needed. A preset
procedure is available to generate such data (anatomy folder ’Knee Other’).

Status: Released
The MR Cartilage Assessment application is intended to assess the integrity of cartilage on MRI
Data.
Philips


Status: Released

Status: Released
The Cartilage Assessment (CA) package has a default layout of four viewports with toolbar and
panels. The viewports display the following views:
• Source image in the middle of the imaging volume, 1st echo.
• In real-time calculated Parametric CA maps with color bar:
– Shortest T2 values: dark red to red,
– intermediate T2 values: yellow to green,
– longest T2 values: blue.
• Numerical results.
• Graphical results.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Similar to all packages on the IntelliSpace portal, also the Cartilage Assessment package
provides a Task Guidance panel in the left part of the screen. The task guidance panel provides
the following functions:
• Rectangular layered ROI
• Curved layered ROI
• Optimize Color Overlay
• Generate Series
NOTICE
In most of the IntelliSpace packages, the Task Guidance contains the recommended step-by-
step procedure that you should follow. This is different with the Cartilage Assessment
package.
The Task Guidance contains the most important functions, but not in a step-by-step
procedure. Perform the required steps for optimal results for your scan and your needs.
Philips

NOTICE
Standard Measurements like retrieving a pixel value or measuring a distance can be
performed via the Common Tools panel.
8.1.11.2.3 Toolbar
Status: Released
The toolbar functions are meant to customize the presentation of the T2 maps. The T2 values in
the parametric maps are directly related to specific colors, and the color coding can be set to
predefined values, but can also be adjusted according to everyone's needs.
Color Map
Possible settings are: 'Rainbow', 'Reversed Rainbow' and 'Autumn'.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 457: Examples of the color maps. 1 - Rainbow, 2 - Reverse Rainbow, 3 - Autumn.
Rainbow Violet Blue Lightblue/ Yellow/ Red

Green Orange
Reverse Rainbow Black/Red Orange Yellow Green Blue
Autumn Black/Blue Green Yellow Orange Red/Black
Color Range
• To select a predefined color range or to adjust the color range according to the own
preferences.
Possible settings are: '1-81', '0-100' and 'Modify Range'.
Philips

Fig. 458: 1: Color bars of 0-100 and 1-81 besides each other to visualize the effect on the color display. 2: Reversed Rainbow color map
with color range 0-100 . 3: Reversed Rainbow color map with color range 1-81.
8.1.11.2.4 More Functions within the Cartilage Assessment package

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Status: Released
mouse menus.
Export the results

1. Press CTRL+C to export the results as CSV file (Comma Separated Values) to the clipboard.
2. In a spreadsheet application, press CTRL+V to paste the CSV file.
8.1.11.3 Workflow
Status: Released
8.1.11.3.1 Launch the MR Cartilage Assessment package

Status: Released

1. Select a suitable cartilage multi-echo series.
2. Click ’MR Cartilage Assessment’.
The MR Cartilage Assessment package opens.
Philips


Status: Released
Through echoes
1. In the image or map viewport, drag to the left or to the right.
Through slices
8.1.11.3.3 Standard Measurements

Status: Released
Standard ROIs can be used to quickly analyze focal lesions. For each ROI, the average relaxation
time and standard deviation is calculated and displayed on screen. Additionally, it is possible to
measure distances and read the pixel values. The standard measurements are available via the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Common Tools panel.
1. In the Common Tools panel, click on the arrow to open the Standard Measurement drop-
down menu.
This menu offers the options:
• Pixel value
• Freehand
• Rectangular
• Ellipse
• Distance
2. Select any of the Standard Measurements and proceed as described below.
Pixelvalue
1. Select 'Pixel Value'.

2. Click any pixel in the source image and/or in the map.
The pixel value for this pixel will be displayed.
3. Click any pixel in the map.
The calculated T2 relaxation time in milliseconds for this pixel will be displayed.
Philips

Fig. 459: Pixel value measurement. Left: on source image. Right: on map.
Freehand
1. Click once to define one point of the ROI contour. Repeat this till the contour
is completed. When finished, double-click to confirm the ROI.
2. Do this on the source image and/or on the map.
The results will be displayed per ROI:
• the area in mm2
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• the mean value (pixel value on the source image and relaxation time on the map)
• the standard deviation (pixel value on the source image and relaxation time on the
map)
• the minimum value (pixel value on the source image and relaxation time on the map)
• the maximum value (pixel value on the source image and relaxation time on the map)
Fig. 460: Freehand measurement. Left: on source image. Right: on map.
Rectangular
1. Click once to define the first vertex of the rectangular ROI.

2. Click again to define the second vertex.
3. Move the mouse to enlarge/reduce the immediately displayed rectangular ROI.
4. Click to confirm the opposite border and in this way the rectangular ROI.
Philips

5. Perform the previous steps on the source image and/or on the map.
The results will be displayed:
• the area in mm2
map)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 461: Standard Measurement Rectangular on source image and on map with results. On the map the 3 anchor
points (2 vertices and the 3rd one to define the opposite border) are visible.
Ellipse
1. Click once to define the first point of the ellipse.

2. Click once more to define the width of the ellipse.
3. Move the mouse to enlarge/reduce the immediately displayed ellipse.
4. Click to confirm the ellipse.
5. Perform the previous steps on the source image and/or on the map.
The results will be displayed:
• the area in mm2
map)
Philips

Fig. 462: Standard Measurement Ellipse on source image and on map with results. On the map the 4 anchor points
(defining length and width) are visible.
Distance
1. Click to define the first point.

2. Click to define the second point.
The result in mm is displayed immediately.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 463: Standard Measurement Distance on source image and on map.
8.1.11.3.4 Rectangular Layered ROI

Status: Released
Rectangular layered ROIs can be used to analyze focal lesions. A ROI is divided into layers. For
each layer the average relaxation time is calculated. Place the first two points on the bone
interface and the final point at the cartilage surface.
⊳ You can draw a rectangular layered ROI on the map and on the source image.
1. Zoom the images for best cartilage visualization.
2. Optionally: drag the slider to reduce the number of layers from 3 to 1 or 2.
3. Click 'Draw layered ROI'.

4. Click on the bone interface to define the first vertex of the rectangular layered ROI.
Philips
5. Click once more on the bone interface to define the second vertex.

6. Move the mouse to resize the immediately displayed rectangle.

7. Click to define the third anchor point on the opposite border of the ROI and in this way to
confirm the ROI.
The ROI is automatically divided in the three layers (depending on the layer slider this
might also be two or one): Deep, Intermediate and Superficial, and the numerical and
graphical results are displayed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 464: Rectangular Layered ROI on map and source image with results. The 3 anchor points are visible on both
images.
8. To modify a current ROI

• Move the cursor over the ROI to make it current.
The ROI lines will show up thicker and the anchor points will be displayed.
• Then click any of the anchor points to resize or angle the ROI.
• Click and drag in the center of the ROI to move it.
9. To draw multiple ROIs

• Click 'Draw layered ROI' to enter drawing mode again.
• Then repeat the above mentioned steps.
8.1.11.3.5 Curved Layered ROI

Status: Released
Curved Layered ROIs can be used to analyze complete cartilage structures. A ROI is divided into
layers and segments. For each cell the average relaxation time is calculated.
A ROI is defined by drawing two curves. The first curve is drawn along the bone interface, the
second along the cartilage surface. Draw curves by placing multiple points and close the
Philips
drawing by double-clicking the last point.

⊳ You can draw a curved layered ROI on the map, on the source image and even on the map
AND the source image.
NOTICE
Entanglements are automatically disentangled.
1. Zoom the images for best cartilage visualization.

2. Optionally: drag the slider to reduce the number of layers from 3 to 1 or 2.
3. Optionally: drag the slider to reduce the number of segments from 3 to 1 or 2.
4. Optionally: reduce the opacity of the color map to better visualize the cartilage structure.
5. Optionally: select a source echo that best depicts the cartilage structure and or lesion.
6. Click 'Draw bone interface'.

7. Click several times to define multiple points along the bone interface.
8. Double-click to confirm this contour.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
9. Click 'Draw cartilage surface'.

10. Click several times to define multiple points along the cartilage surface.
Fig. 465: A: Drawing bone interface. B: Drawing cartilage surface. The anchor points are visible for both workflow
steps.
11. Double-click to confirm this contour and in such a way the ROI.
The curved layered ROI is automatically divided into multiple cells (layers and segments).
The numerical and graphical results are displayed immediately.
Philips

12. To draw multiple ROIs
• click 'Draw bone interface' and 'Draw cartilage surface' to

enter drawing mode again.
• Then repeat the above mentioned steps.
8.1.11.3.6 Modify a ROI (or line)

Status: Released
Once you've confirmed a ROI (or line), you can still adjust its shape, its position and rename or
delete it.
Adjust ROI shape and position

1. Click on an anchor point and drag to adjust the ROI shape.
2. Click between anchor points and drag to adjust the ROI position.
3. Press and hold 'Ctrl' while clicking between anchor points to add an anchor point.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Rename a ROI
1. Double-click the name (by default ROI1, ROI2, ROI3 etc).
2. Delete characters where needed and type the new name.
• It is advised to rename the ROIs for easier identification (e.g. lesion, healthy). It might be
helpful to add the slice number to the name so that navigation to the respective ROI is
facilitated.
Delete a ROI
1. Move the cursor over the ROI to make it current.
2. Right-click on the ROI and select ’Delete’.
8.1.11.3.7 Optimize Color Overlay

Status: Released
The presentation of the color maps can be customized by limiting color display to relevant areas
and by adjusting the color opacity.
1. Click the checkbox in the task guidance to enable (or disable) 'Suppress Colors outside
ROIs'.
Philips

Fig. 466: Left: No suppression of colors outside ROIs. Right: Suppressed colors outside ROIs.
2. Click 'Draw color cut-out region' to enter drawing mode.

3. Click several times to define a color cut-out ROI.
4. Double-click to close and confirm the ROI.
Colored areas outside the ROI will be displayed without color overlay immediately.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 467: Left: No cut-out ROI. The colors outside the ROI are not yet suppressed. Right: Cut-out ROI drawn and colors
outside the ROI are suppressed.

Status: Released
Node title (original): Generate Maps in general ID: 9007314929751051

Status: Released
1. Click 'Generate Series'.
Philips

2. Enter the name of the new imaging series.

End fragment title: Generate Maps in general
NOTICE
Once maps are generated via 'Generate series', these maps behave differently when viewing
them.
Generated Maps cannot be used anymore for measurements. ROIs are not displayed. If a cut-
out ROI is drawn to supress colors outside, the outline of that ROI will be supressed.
NOTICE
Newly generated series can easily be compared in the Viewer.
8.1.11.4 Results
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The package calculates the T2 relaxation times per voxel (using Ratio Least Squares method)
and presents them as:
• parametric Cartilage Assessment map
• as numerical results in a table
• as graphical results in a bar chart display.
Parametric Cartilage Assessment map

The parametric color overlay represents the values of the T2 relaxation times per voxel.
In the parametric map, each color stands for a specific value/range of the T2 relaxation time.
The vertical color bar serves to decode the color values into relaxation times. Different color
maps can be used which also influence the display of the bar chart.
Fig. 468: Comparison of results display with different color ranges: 1 - Reverse Rainbow color map with 0-100 color
range, 2 - Reverse Rainbow color map with 10-60 range.
Philips

Numerical results and graphical results

The calculation of the numerical and graphical results is based on the segments and layers of
the ROIs.
The rectangular and curved ROIs are both automatically divided in three layers: Deep,
Intermediate and Superficial. Furthermore the curved ROIs are divided in the segments A, B and
C (from left to right).
• The table lists the calculated T2 relaxation times with standard deviation for each layer and
segment.
• The graphical results in the diagram plot the T2 relaxation time (in milliseconds) versus the
relative cartilage depth.
The white lines at the upper part of each bar indicate the standard deviation.
The numerical results in the table and the graphical results use the same colors as for the ROIs
so that they can easily be recognized.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 469: Results with rectangular ROIs (Average T2 values per layer).
Fig. 470: Results with curved ROIs (Average T2 values per layer and segment).
Philips

NOTICE
Graphical results are only shown for the ROIs on the current slice.
The numerical results of all ROIs are however displayed in the table.
Display the slice of any drawn ROI

1. Click on a ROI name in the table.
The display will automatically be changed and the slice will be shown with the ROI that has
been double-clicked before.
8.1.12 MR Subtraction
Status: Released
The MR Subtraction package can be used to perform pixelwise image calculations, e.g.
subtracting a pre-contrast dynamic scan from the consecutive post-contrast dynamic scans in
order to observe the contrast-uptake. A preview is available which shows the resulting image
for the current scan/scans. New imaging series can be easily generated and stored.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
MR Subtraction is a post-processing application enabling basic calculations between two

volumes, including addition, subtraction and ratio from within a single dynamic series.
8.1.12.2 Available Calculations

Status: Released
The package provides the possibility to perform different calculations for two e.g. (groups of)
slices or dynamic scans, being referred to as source (S) and reference (R) and Weight Factor
(W).
It is possible to apply a weighting factor, depending on the type of calculation for source or
reference.
Addition of images
• S+(W*R)
Subtraction of images
• S-(W*R)
Relative subtraction of images
• (S – (W * R))/(S + (W * R))/2
Philips
Ratio calculations

• S/R
Magnetization Transfer Ratio
• ((R – (S * W) / R) * 100
NOTICE
The selected series can be swapped easily to perform the calculations vice versa.
To swap the series, use the ' Swap' option from step 1 of the Task Guidance.
Requirements for MR Subtraction datasets

The components Source (S) and Reference (R) can be images of one scan, but also images of
different scans. In order to perform calculations with R and S, they have to have the same slice
distance (slice thickness and slice gap), FOV and patient position.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released

Status: Released
The MR Subtraction package has a default layout of three viewports with toolbar and panels.
The viewports display the following views:
• Source image in the middle of the imaging volume (by default: dynamic 2).
• In real-time calculated subtracted image.
• Reference image in the middle of the imaging volume (by default: dynamic 1).

Status: Released
Similar to all packages on the IntelliSpace portal, also the MR Subtraction package provides a
Philips

NOTICE
Dependent on the selected type of operation, not all workflow steps might be available in the
Task Guidance.
With the 'Ratio' type of operation, the workflow step 'Set Weight' is not available.
8.1.12.3.3 Toolbar
Status: Released
Subtraction
• To select a type of operation for the source and the reference imaging series:
– Subtraction
– Ratio
– Magnetic Transfer Ratio
– Relative Subtraction.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Viewing Tools
Status: Released
Mirror
Flip
Rotate Clockwise
Philips

8.1.12.3.4 More Functions within the Subtraction package

Status: Released
Status: Released
mouse menus.
8.1.12.4 Workflow
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
8.1.12.4.1 Launch the MR Subtraction package

Status: Released
You can perform MR Subtraction either on a single dynamic scan or on two different scans. This
requires the selection of one or two scans. This selection preferably needs to be done at the
launch of the package, but can also be done in the package itself.
1. Select a suitable series.
2. Click ’MR Subtraction’.
The MR Subtraction package opens.
8.1.12.4.2 Select the type of calculation

Status: Released
1. Click the Operation drop-down menu from Task Guidance.

2. Click to select the required type of calculation.
Philips

8.1.12.4.3 Select Series (Source and Reference)

Status: Released
By default, the current imaging series is used as source and as reference series. You can
however select different series for both.
Select another Source Series

1. Click the button besides the 'Source'.
2. Then browse to the series you would like to use as source series and click OK to confirm.
Select another Reference Series

1. Click the checkbox 'Use other series as reference' to enable the selection of another
reference series.
2. Click the button besides the 'Reference".
3. Then browse to the series you would like to use as reference series and click OK to confirm.
Swap the series
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

1. Click the 'Swap' icon to swap the source and the reference series.
8.1.12.4.4 Select Range for Source

Status: Released
By default, all dynamics except for the first one will be selected.
Set range for subtraction

1. Drag the outer edges of the bar to define the range.
The selected dynamics will be indicated by number on bottom of the bar.
2. Alternatively scroll through dynamics, from the context menu (right click) and click 'Set
Start Dynamic' to confirm the first dynamic.
Scroll again and click 'Set End Dynamic' to confirm the last dynamic.
NOTICE
In order to select a single dynamic for subtraction, use the range scrollbar to scroll to the
preferred dynamic and from the context menu click 'Set Start Dynamic' and 'Set End Dynamic'
on the same dynamic.
Philips

8.1.12.4.5 Select Reference

Status: Released
You may define the dynamic being used as reference.

⊳ By default, the 'First Dynamic' will be used as reference.
1. Drag the slider selection to select any other dynamic as reference.
2. Or scroll through dynamics, and from the context menu, click 'Set Reference Dynamic' to
make the current dynamic the reference.
8.1.12.4.6 Set Weight (Apply Weight Factor)

Status: Released
1. Check the checkbox 'Use weight factor' to enable the slider.

2. Define the weighting factor by dragging the slider.
The image in the preview will be updated in real-time.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
8.1.12.4.7 Define Mask

Status: Released
1. Apply mask individually on Source and Reference by selecting source or reference.

2. Enable link to sync the mask threshold edits on both Source and Reference.

Last Content Modificator: Kovalsky, Cheryl ID: 9007314921105547-1
Status: Released
You can generate a new imaging series containing the results as defined in the previously
described workflow.
8.1.13 MR Echo Accumulation

Status: Released
The MR Echo Accumulation package can be used to perform pixelwise echo cumulations. A
preview is available which shows the resulting image for the current series. New imaging series
can be easily generated and stored.
The package provides the possibility to perform echo accumulation for imaging series with
Philips
multiple echoes.

Cumulation
• Result = Sum of multiple echoes

A valid imaging series is a series with multiple echoes.

Status: Released
MR Echo Accumulation enables the calculation of new images based on the selected sum of
echo times, of MRI series with multiple echoes.

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
The MR Echo Accumulation package has a default layout of two viewports with toolbar and
panels. The viewports display the following images:
• In real-time calculated image.

Status: Released
Similar to all packages on the IntelliSpace portal, also the MR Echo Accumulation package
provides a Task Guidance panel in the left part of the screen. The task guidance panel provides
the following steps:
• Set Range for accumulation
• Generate series
8.1.13.2.3 Toolbar
Status: Released
Philips

Status: Released
More / Mirror
More / Flip
More / Rotate Clockwise

More / Rotate Counter-Clockwise

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8.1.13.2.4 More Functions within the MR Echo Accumulation package

Status: Released
Status: Released
mouse menus.
8.1.13.3 Workflow
Status: Released
8.1.13.3.1 Launch the MR Echo Accumulation package

Status: Released
The Echo Accumulation package requires a data set with multiple echoes.
Philips

1. Select a suitable series.

2. Click ’MR Echo Accumulation’.
The MR Echo Accumulation package opens.
8.1.13.3.2 Select Range for Accumulation

Status: Released
You may either choose to do the operation using all echoes or you may select a range of
echoes.
By default, all echoes will be accumulated.
Set Range for Echo Accumulation

1. Drag the outer edges of the slider bar to define the range.
The selected echoes will be indicated by number on the bottom of the bar.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Last Content Modificator: Kovalsky, Cheryl ID: 9007314921105547-2
Status: Released
described workflow.
8.1.14 Advanced Diffusion Analysis (ADA)

Status: Released
Introduction
Philips Medical Systems' Advanced Diffusion Analysis (ADA) application is post-processing
software to be used as an advanced visualization application of diffusion MRI medical images.
The ADA application is intended to perform image viewing, process and analysis of MRI
Diffusion Weighted Images (DWI).
The ADA application can display images acquired at different b-values, where the b-value is a
factor that reflects the strength and timing of the gradients used to generate diffusion-
weighted images. The ADA application provides advanced supportive analysis and visualization
tools of diffusion MRI images and parametric maps, which can be used by the physician for
further analysis. The physician retains the ultimate responsibility for making the final diagnosis.
The ADA application is launched from Philips Medical Systems’ IntelliSpace Portal (ISP)
environment.
Philips

8.1.14.1 Key Features

Status: Released
ADA application has the following key features:

1. Support visualization and processing of isotropic diffusion-weighted MRI data.
2. Calculate and display a computed Diffusion Weighted Image (cDWI) at a b-value of choice.
3. Support input image registration in a pre-processing step.
4. Present a default analysis model based on the available original DWI images and provide a
selection of alternative available models.
5. Provide diffusion analysis models, as well as parametric maps of Perfusion fraction (f),
Pseudo Diffusion coefficient (D*), Diffusion coefficient (D) and Kurtosis (K).
6. Provide a ‘Goodness of fit’ map, 'Goodness of fit’ value, and fitted curve showing the fitting
quality of the selected model.
7. Display parameter values from user defined ROI’s (Regions of Interest).
8. Display the ROI results in tabular and graphical formats.
9. Support export of the parametric maps as grayscale or RGB images for visualization in
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
other viewers or PACS systems.
8.1.14.2 About the Instructions for Use

Status: Released
This Instruction for Use is intended to assist users in the safe and effective use of the Philips
software product described. The user is considered to be not only the body with authority over
the software product but also those persons who use the software product.
This Instruction for Use does not describe the use of the IT equipment on which the Philips
software product is installed. Refer to the documentation of the IT equipment concerned.
Before attempting to use this medical device software, you must read these Instructions for
Use. Thoroughly, paying particular attention to all WARNINGS, Cautions and Notes it contains.
You must pay special attention to all the information given, and procedures described, in the
chapter Safety. In addition you must pay special attention to onscreen messages and help
information containing WARNINGS, Cautions and Notes that may be related to the function
being executed.
WARNING
Warnings are directions, which if not followed, could cause fatal or serious injury to an
operator, patient or any other person, or could lead to a misdiagnosis or mistreatment.
Philips

CAUTION
Cautions are directions, which if not followed, could cause damage to the equipment
described in this Instructions for Use and/or any other equipment or goods, and/or cause
environmental pollution.
NOTICE
Notices highlight unusual points as an aid to an operator.
Electronic Instructions for Use

An electronic (PDF) version of the Instructions for Use was provided on a USB. Please contact
the administrator if you do not have access to this material.
8.1.14.3 Indication for Use

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The Philips Medical Systems' Advanced Diffusion Analysis (ADA) application is a post processing
software application to be used by trained professionals including but not limited to physicians
and medical technicians. The Philips Medical Systems' Advanced Diffusion Analysis (ADA)
application can be used to perform image viewing, process and analysis of MRI Diffusion
Weighted Images (DWI).
8.1.14.4 Limitations for Use

Status: Released
CAUTION
In the United States, Federal law restricts this device to sale, distribution and use by or on the
order of a physician.
NOTICE
When using a virtualization solution, images should be reviewed by a responsible physician to
ensure appropriate clinical image quality.
8.1.14.5 ADA Application Operation Manual

Status: Released
Philips Medical Systems' Advanced Diffusion Analysis (ADA) application is post-processing

Philips
software to be used as an advanced visualization application of diffusion MRI medical images.

The ADA application is launched from Philips Medical Systems’ IntelliSpace Portal (ISP)
environment. The ADA application provides advanced supportive analysis and visualization
tools of diffusion MRI images and parametric maps, which can be used by the physician for
further analysis.
The proposed Advanced Diffusion Analysis (ADA) application consists of two main analysis
modes:
• "Compute DW Image" (cDWI) mode: This mode allows to calculate the expected signal
intensity for unscanned b values based on the scanned b values and the selected diffusion
analysis model and produce computed DW images. This mode provides calculated b-value
contrasts to the user according to the b value selected with the slider.
• "Analyse Diffusion Signal" mode: Depending on the available b values and the selected
analysis model, this mode provides the following parametric maps:
– Diffusion Coefficient (D)
– Perfusion fraction (f)
– Pseudo Diffusion coefficient (D*)
– Kurtosis (K)
– Goodness of fit
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
8.1.14.6 Using Compute DW Image (cDWI) Mode

Status: Released
1. In the Patient Directory, select the study (an Isotropic Diffusion weighted image) that you
want to investigate.
2. Click MR ADA in the Review panel of the Portal client to start the application.
⇨ When the application starts, the selected mode is the one that was last used.
NOTICE
Ensure that all studies belong to the same patient before launching the ADA application. The
application displays a warning message whenever data from multiple studies is combined.
3. In the task guidance panel, select Compute DW image.

⇨ A 2x1 viewport layout is displayed:
• The left image shows the source data (input image).
• The right image shows the cDWI calculated for a selected b value for the selected model.
Philips

Fig. 471: cDWI Mode in ADA

⇨ The application selects the Mono-exponential diffusion model by default.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
WARNING
Image quality (compression annotation) to be displayed on all the viewers images where
lossy compression is used.
4. If you want to use an alternative diffusion model, select a model from the drop-down list in
the task guidance panel, Select Model.
Depending on the number of b values that are available in the study, you can use the
following diffusion models with cDWI mode:
• Mono-exponential: This model is based on two b values.
• Simplified IVIM: This model requires at least three b values.
• Bi-exponential: This model requires at least four b values.
⇨ The list displays diffusion models that are appropriate for the available b values in the
study.
5. To change the b values used for the analysis, do the following:
• Click Edit input b-values in the task guidance panel.
• In the Select B-values dialog box, select the b values to be used and click Apply.
Philips

⇨ The cDWI image is recalculated using the selected b values.
NOTICE
Depending on the selected diffusion model, some b values in the Edit input b-values dialog
box may be grayed out, in which case their setting cannot be changed. Additionally, the
minimum number of b values required for the selected diffusion model is always maintained.
For example, if four b values are required for the selected model, you cannot clear further
selections if only four b values remain selected.
NOTICE
The user may adjust the thresholds for including and excluding b values from analysis models.
For more information, see chapter “Setting B-Value Thresholds” on page 1160.
6. Select a b value to calculate by dragging the b value slider in the task guidance panel, Select
b-value for computation.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⇨ The computed cDWI is displayed in the right image. The slider moves in increments of 100.
Specific values can be entered directly in the box by the user.
⇨ By default, the application automatically adjusts the window width and window level for
the calculated b value. However, you can change this behavior using the Control WW/WL
adaptation function.
7. To use ADC-based segmentation to view the CDWI image, select the Control WW/WL
adaptation check box and, if desired, set the threshold (the default value is 600).
⇨ The application adjusts the WW and WL settings such that pixels below the threshold ADC
are intensified as you select higher b values, while pixels above the threshold ADC reduce in
intensity as you select higher b values.
8. To apply a mask to hide unwanted pixels in the calculation, set the mask from task
guidance or via the context menu by right-clicking the image.
9. To generate a series for the cDWI image, click Generate series in the task guidance
panel.
⇨ The generated series and images can be opened in MultiModality Viewer or sent to a PACS.
The file name of the generated series contains details of the mode name (cDWI), the
applicable diffusion model, and registration indication (if applicable). Independent of the
series name, full information is available in the DICOM tag.
8.1.14.7 Using Analyse Diffusion Signal Mode

Status: Released
Philips

1. In the Patient Directory, select the study (an Isotropic Diffusion weighted image) that you
want to investigate.
NOTICE
Ensure that all studies belong to the same patient before launching the ADA application. The
application displays a warning message whenever data from multiple studies is combined.
2. Click MR ADA in the Review panel of the Portal client to start the application.
⇨ When the application starts, the selected mode is the one that was last used.
3. In the task guidance panel, select Analyse Diffusion Signal.
⇨ A 2x2 viewport layout is displayed:
• The upper-left viewport displays the DWI image used as input. Scrolling vertically displays
anatomical slices and scrolling horizontally displays the acquired b values.
• The upper-right viewport displays parametric maps. The type of maps that are displayed
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

depends on the selected diffusion model. To change the displayed maps view in the upper-
right viewport (from all selected parametric maps to one parametric map), into
presentation of only one parametric map, double click one of the parametric maps. To
change the displayed map, click the title of the map viewport and select a different map.
• The lower-left viewport displays results in the Table Viewer.
• The lower-right viewport displays the Graph viewer.
WARNING
Image quality (compression annotation) to be displayed on al the viewers images where
lossy compression is used.
Philips

Fig. 472: IVIM analysis in MR ADA

⇨ For any given set of b values, the application presents a default diffusion model.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
4. The user may choose an alternative diffusion model from the drop-down list in the task
guidance panel as suggested by the application. The alternative models in the drop-down
list depend on the number and range of the b values which were acquired for the study,
Select Model.
The following diffusion models are available in the Analyse Diffusion Signal mode:
• Mono-exponential: This model is based on at least two b values and generates diffusion
coefficient map comparable to routine ADC map.
• Simplified IVIM: This model is based on at least three b values and creates diffusion
coefficient map and perfusion fraction map.
• Bi-Exponential: This model is based on at least four b values and creates diffusion
coefficient map, perfusion fraction map and pseudo diffusion coefficient map.
• Kurtosis (Mono-exponential): This model requires at least three b values and creates
diffusion coefficient map and kurtosis map.
• Kurtosis (Simp-IVIM): This model is based on at least four b values and creates diffusion
coefficient map, perfusion fraction map and Kurtosis map.
⇨ The models that are suggested by the application are also affected by default thresholds for
the applicable b value range (the IVIM threshold and the Kurtosis threshold), these
thresholds may be manually adjusted by the user.
⇨ The list displays only diffusion models that are appropriate for the available b values in the
study.
5. To change the b values used for the analysis, do the following:
• Click Edit input b-values in the task guidance panel, Select Model.
Philips
• In the Edit input b-values dialog box, select the b values to be used.

⇨ The output parameters are recalculated using the selected b values.
NOTICE
Depending on the selected diffusion model, some b values in the Edit input b-values dialog
box may be grayed out, in which case their setting cannot be changed. Additionally, the
minimum number of b values required for the selected diffusion model is always maintained.
For example, if four b values are required for the selected model, you cannot clear further
selections if only four b values remain selected.
NOTICE
The user can adjust the thresholds for including and excluding b values from analysis models.
For more information, see chapter “Setting B-Value Thresholds” on page 1160.
6. Select the parametric maps that you want to generate in the task guidance panel, Select
Maps.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
The parametric maps that are available depend on the selected diffusion model.
7. To apply a mask to hide unwanted pixels in the calculation, set the threshold of the mask
from the task guidance or the context menu by right-clicking a map.
8. To view real-time values of pixels in the maps, use Follow Mouse.
⇨ When this option is enabled and you move the pointer over an image, the pixel value at the
mouse pointer position is indicated in the table viewer, and the graph viewer displays a
curve of the signal intensities of the pixel across the b values.
9. To draw an ROI, click the ROI tool in the task guidance panel, Measure ROIs.
You can draw up to ten ROIs across different slices in the study.
⇨ The application calculates the average value of the output parameters inside the ROI and
displays the value in the Table Viewer. The color of the ROI corresponds to the color of the
curve in the Graph Viewer.
⇨ Click the top of a column in the Table Viewer to display the slice containing the
corresponding ROI in the input DWI image.
⇨ Click a curve in the Graph Viewer to highlight the corresponding b values.
Philips

NOTICE
If you change the mode at any time (to Compute DW image) any ROIs that you have created
are removed.
Before changing the mode, bookmark your progress in the current mode if you want to return
to it later.
⇨ The generated series and images can be opened in MultiModality Viewer or sent to a PACS
system. The file name of the generated series contains details of the parametric map name,
the diffusion model, RGB indication (if applicable), and registration indication (if applicable).
Independent of the series name, full information is available in the DICOM tag.

NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Generate Series
described workflow.
Secondary Capture option from the drop-down list, and then click the button.

time intensity curve for the drawn ROI and displays the values in the Table Viewer.
Philips

Show ROI Statistics

from the More menu.
An additional numerical results table is displayed as a floating window and displays Maximum,
voxels within the parametric maps.
When the number of columns in the Table Viewer exceeds thr default width, or number of rows
and rows.
1. Select Copy to Clipboard an open either Microsoft Word or Excel and paste the contents
from your clipboard into the application.
8.1.14.7.1 Setting B-Value Thresholds
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
For advanced workflows, users can adjust the b-value threshold settings. The two b-value
threshold values described below control the availability of the different models.
• Simplified IVIM Threshold
– This threshold is applicable to the models that use Simplified IVIM: a) Simplified IVIM
and b) Kurtosis (simplified-IVIM).
– Any b-value between 0 and this threshold is eliminated from the data for processing.
The default value of the simplified IVIM threshold is 100 mm2/s.
• Kurtosis Threshold
– This threshold is applicable to the models that support Kurtosis analysis: a) Kurtosis
(mono exp) and b) Kurtosis (simplified-IVIM).
– The dataset should contain diffusion-weighted images at this b-value threshold or
above, for processing. The default value of the Kurtosis threshold is 800 mm2/s.
The below table summarizes the conditions (to be satisfied by a dataset) under which the
suitable models become active.
Philips

Model Diffusion Parameters Conditions and Recommendations

(output)
Mono-exponential D Required
Minimum number of b-values: 2
Recommended
IVIM threshold (Default 100) ≤ b-values < Kurtosis threshold
(Default 800)
Simplified IVIM D, f Required

• Minimum number of b-values: 3
• b-value = 0 is present
• Excluded: 0 < b-values < IVIM threshold (Default 100)
Recommended
b-values < Kurtosis threshold (Default 800)
Bi-exponential D, f, D* Required
Minimum number of b-values: 4
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Recommended
• At least 1 b-value in the range 0 < b < IVIM threshold
(Default 100)
• b-values < Kurtosis threshold (Default 800)
Kurtosis + Mono D, K Required

exponential • Minimum number of b-values: 3
• At least 1 b-value ≥ Kurtosis threshold (Default 800)
Recommended
b-values ≥ IVIM threshold (Default 100)
Kurtosis + Simplified IVIM D, K, f Required

• Minimum number of b-values: 4
• Excluded: 0 < b-values < IVIM threshold (Default 100)
• At least 1 b-value ≥ Kurtosis threshold (Default 800)
To set threshold values:

1. To adjust the b-value threshold settings, click Model Threshold editing from the More
menu..
2. To set the Simplified IVIM threshold, enter a value in the corresponding box.
⇨ B values above this threshold will be included when the Simplified IVIM model is selected.
Philips

Finalizing the Examination Printing
3. To set the Kurtosis threshold, enter a value in the corresponding box. Note that the
Kurtosis threshold cannot be set below 600 mm2/s.
⇨ B values above this threshold will be included when one of the kurtosis models is selected.
4. Click Apply to confirm your settings and close the dialog box.
NOTICE
Changes to the thresholds are not stored and will revert to default values the next time that
the application is launched.
8.2 Printing
Status: NotReleased
8.2.1 Print Tab

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
In the Print tab, you set up the images and imaging series for print output. The following UI
elements support you:
1. Protocol panel.
2. Print toolbar.
3. Print preview.
Philips

Printing Finalizing the Examination
8.2.2 Opening an Imaging Series in the Print Tab

Status: Released
There are various ways of how to open and review imaging series in the Print tab.
Overview: drag Status: Released

► Drag an imaging series from the Thumbnail Overview (or Scan Overview) into the Print
Preview.
⇨ The center slice of this imaging series is displayed in the viewport.
A previously displayed imaging series is replaced by the new one.
End fragment title: 2 Open imaging series from Exam Overview: drag
⊳ From the Plan or Review tab:

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Click Add Series To Print .

⇨ The imaging series is added to the Print Preview.
► To go to the Print tab, click Print.
8.2.3 Print Preview

Status: Released
The Print Preview displays an exact preview of how the print output will look like (WYSIWYG:
What you see is what you get). The Print Preview displays 1, 2, or 4 print pages next to each
other. The default layout of a print page is 3x2 image viewports. You can modify this layout and
save your changes as a new printout protocol (on the Protocol Panel) for later reuse.
To display images in the Print Preview differently, use the Print Toolbar, the Protocol Panel and
the context menus.
{ Mann, Michael, 12/22/2020 6:29:02 PM: Info for editors (Martina): Viewports on the Print
Preview are different from review or planning viewports: no title bar with maximize button etc.,
no switching to render packages}
1 1. Image information
3
as configured in the Image Information settings.
2
Philips
3. Buttons for the selection of images.

Node title (original): Buttons in Print Preview ID: 116845700619

Status: Released
Buttons for the selection of images

Button Short description More information
Select all images on this page: To select all images on chapter “Selecting Images
the currently selected print preview page. on Print Pages” on page
1181
Select all images on all pages: To select all images on all
print preview pages.
Select all images of this series: To select all images of

the currently selected series on the print preview pages.
End fragment title: Buttons in Print Preview
8.2.4 Print Toolbar
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released

Affix: Print Toolbar ID: 115240131851
Node title (original): Intro Print Toolbar ID: 115240134283

Status: Released
The Print Toolbar is available on the Print tab. It is composed of buttons and drop-down menus
that provide access to generic functions to print single images and whole imaging series. For
drop-down menus, always the currently selected button is visible.
The Print Toolbar allows you to:
• Configure the print page layout
• Adjust the images or image details (Zoom, Pan, Window Level)
• Include annotations and measurement information into the images
End fragment title: Intro Print Toolbar
Node title (original): Print Toolbar ID: 115240400651

Status: Released
The following buttons are available in the Print Toolbar.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Philips

1 Print Preview and Print Page Layout chapter “Setting the Number of Print Pages in the Print
Preview” on page 1175
2 Image Display chapter “Changing the Display of Images on Print Pages

(Zoom, Pan, Window)” on page 1184
3 Measurements and Annotations chapter “Measuring and Annotating Images on Print

Pages” on page 1185
4 Image Rotation chapter “Mirroring, Flipping, and Rotating Images on

Print Pages” on page 1184
5 Invert Gray Scale chapter “Displaying a Negative Image on Print Pages” on

page 1187
6 PlanScan Drawing Tool chapter “Adding a PlanScan Image to the Images on the
Print Page” on page 1180
7 Edit Images (Copy, Paste etc.)
Tab. 40: Print Toolbar: Buttons and button groups

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
{ Mann, Michael, 10/14/2020 3:10:39 PM: Question: Are there optional buttons? I am pretty
sure that I have seen buttons like "Activate Shutters" , "Circular Shutter" etc. a while ago, but I
do not see them anymore. Are they only active with particular image types? Or do they not
exist anymore? }
End fragment title: Print Toolbar
What do you want to do?

{ Mann, Michael, 12/17/2020 3:11:20 PM: To do: Include links to MAP nodes}
• Insert or delete page breaks
• Delete pages
• Select a screen layout
• Adjust an image or image detail (Zoom, Pan, Window)
• Mirror, flip or rotate an image
• Display a negative image
• Cut, copy, paste or delete images
• Perform measurements with lines or angles
• Perform measurements with ROIs
• Insert annotations
• ... { Mann, Michael, 12/17/2020 3:11:20 PM: [To do: Maybe add actions from context
menus and other buttons]}
Philips

8.2.4.2 Layout of Print Preview and Print Pages

Status: Released
These buttons allow you to select the number of pages displayed in the print preview area, and
to organize the print page layout by inserting page breaks or deleting whole print pages.
Print Preview Area

menu
Single Page Mode: To display 1 page in the print preview area. • chapter “Setting
the Number of
Print Pages in
2-Page Mode: To display 2 pages in the print preview area. the Print
Preview” on
page 1175
4-Page Mode: To display 4 pages in the print preview area.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Print Page Layout
Buttons Short Description Instructions
Delete Page: To delete the current page. •
Insert Page Break: To insert a page break before the current image.
Remove Page Break: To delete the page break before the current image.
8.2.4.3 Left Mouse Behavior: Zoom, Pan, Window

Status: Released
Philips

Zoom: Drag to magnify or reduce the image with the left mouse (when • chapter
this button is enabled). “Changing the
Display of
Images on Print
Pan: Drag to pan a magnified image with the left mouse (when this button
Pages (Zoom,
is enabled).
Pan, Window)”
on page 1184
Window: Drag too adjust brightness and contrast of an image with the left
mouse (when this button is enabled).
8.2.4.4 Measurements and Annotations

Status: Released

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

selected.
Measuring and annotating work as described in the instructions for reviewing. Annotating with
predefined annotations is a feature available on the Print Toolbar only.
Status: Released
Philips


menu

Measurements
with Lines and
Angles
12:53:04 PM: To
do: Link to MAP-
node for
measuring
an image.
operations}
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

image.

Status: Released

menu

Measurements
with ROIs
{ Mann, Michael,
do: Link to MAP-
node for ROI
operations}
Philips


menu

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Text Annotations
menu

Images
{ Mann, Michael,
10/30/2020
Link to MAP-node
for annotations}
Node title (original): 04 Predefined Annotations ID: 115328951563

Status: Released
Predefined Annotations
Predefined Annotations: To overlay a predefined text to an image. • chapter “Using

Predefined
Annotations” on
page 1185
End fragment title: 04 Predefined Annotations
Philips

8.2.4.5 Edit Images on Print Pages (Insert, Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete)
Status: Released
These buttons allow you to perform basic editing operations with images: cutting, copying,
pasting, and deleting. Furthermore, blank images can be inserted into the print pages.
Insert blank image: To insert a blank image. •
Cut selected images: To cut the selected image(s).
Copy selected images: To copy the selected image(s).
Paste images: To insert the image(s) you cut or copied.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Delete selected images: To delete the selected image(s).
8.2.4.6 Image Rotation

Status: Released
These buttons allow you to rotate, mirror and flip images.

menu
Mirror: To mirror an image (horizontally). • chapter

“Mirroring,
Flipping, and
Flip: To flip an image (vertically). Rotating Images
on Print Pages”
on page 1184
Rotate Clockwise: To rotate an image 90° clockwise.
Rotate Counter-Clockwise: To rotate an image 90° counter-clockwise.

Philips

8.2.4.7 Invert Gray Scale

Status: Released
This button allows you to display a negative image where all the pixel values are set to their
opposite value on a color wheel: white becomes black, and vice versa.
Invert Gray Scale: To display a negative image. • chapter

“Displaying a
Negative Image
on Print Pages”
on page 1187
8.2.4.8 PlanScan Drawing Tool

Status: Released
{ Mann, Michael, 12/20/2020 10:15:51 PM: Check if this is correct! Input was: "MR specific
PlanScanDrawing Tool which will draw the reference lines to be box mode or line mode." }
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
These buttons allow you to display the reference lines to the planned volume.
menu
Defaults: To display the reference lines in default mode. • chapter

“Displaying
Reference Lines
Box Mode: To display the reference lines in box mode. on Print Pages
(PlanScan
Drawing Tool)”
Slice Mode: To display the reference lines in slice mode.
on page 1188
3D Mode: To display the reference lines in 3D mode.
8.2.5 Protocol Panel

Status: Released
8.2.5.1 Functional Description [Protocol Panel]

Status: Released
Philips

Node title (original): Martina reworked ID: 116207521675

Status: Released
The Protocol Panel is available on the Print tab.

The Protocol Panel allows you to:
• Select and save print layouts.
You set up a print layout once, and you select this layout for all similar examinations.
• Select and save print protocols.
You set up a print protocol once, and you select this protocol for all similar examinations.
In the print protocol, you specify:
– if PlanScan images are included in the printout.
– Which images of the selected imaging series are included or excluded in the printout (by
a filter) and how these images are sorted.
– The amount of image information on the printout.
• Set up a print-out which shows two imaging series side by side and which allows to compare
these imaging series.
• Set the Printer settings and specify your printer preferences.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The Print Preview supports you in setting up your printout, as it shows you What You See Is
What You Get.
End fragment title: Martina reworked
8.2.5.2 UI Elements in Protocol Panel

Status: Released
Node title (original): UI Elements - Martina rework - please ID: 116517613707

continue here! Status: Released
Affix: Martina rework
The table lists the buttons and drop-down menus which are available on the Protocol Panel.
Philips

UI Element Short description More information
<Protocol selection drop- To select a protocol for print. chapter “Saving and
down menu> Loading Print Protocols
(Printout Protocols)” on
page 1191
Drop-down menu which allows:

Layout • To select a layout for the printout.
• To apply the selected layout to all pages or to the
selected page.
• To select the filling order: Horizontal Filling,
Vertical Filling, and user defined:

Select Filling Order.
To add a PlanScan image to the printout. chapter “Adding a PlanScan

PlanScan Image to the Images on the
Print Page” on page 1180
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• To specify the sorting order of the images on the chapter “Filtering and
Sort and Filter printout. Sorting the Images in a
• To filter and restrict the images for the printout by Print Page Viewport” on
setting an image range. page 1180
• To specify page breaks between films based on the

number of images.
To change the header and footer and specify the type of chapter “Adjusting Header
Header and Footer information displayed in the header and footer. and Footer of a Print Page”
on page 1192
Image Info
• To select the amount of image

information in the same way as on the Review tab.
• To hide the image information for the

selected series.
• To access Image Information Settings

where you adjust the amount of information per
image (Image Level Info) and per imaging series
(Series Level Info).
Philips

Enlarge Image Information To enlarge the font size of the image information on the chapter “Enlarging the
Print Preview. Image Information on the
Preview” on page 1190
displays information about this feature: This info

is only displayed on the preview
The font size is enlarged only on the preview to identify
essential information such as the slice number. It is not
enlarged on the print output.
Save Protocol To save current layout settings as a printout protocol. chapter “Saving and
Loading Print Protocols
(Printout Protocols)” on
page 1191
To view series side by side (else: sequentially) and chapter “Printing in

Compare Mode compare the images. Compare Mode” on page
1179
displays information about the feature.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Printer To select a printer. chapter “Configuring
Printer and Print Output”
Media Size To set the media size of the output.
on page 1193
Show More To show the following print settings from Orientation to

Edit Default Print Settings on the Protocol Panel, which
are hidden by default.
Orientation To set the page orientation (Portrait, Landscape). chapter “Configuring

Copies To set the number of copies to print.
on page 1193
Pages To define which pages to print.
Collate To collate print pages.
Life-Size Printing To activate life-size printing.
De-Identify To automatically render the print output anonymous.
Edit Default Print Settings To configure and save the Print Preferences. chapter “Configuring
on page 1193
Show Less To hide the print settings from Orientation to Edit

Default Print Settings.
Pages to Print No interaction. The number at Pages to Print is the

current number of pages in the Print Preview.
Philips

Clear To delete all images from all print pages.
Print To start the print job. chapter “Printing Images

and Imaging Series” on
page 1175
End fragment title: UI Elements - Martina rework - please continue here!

Status: NotReleased
8.2.6.1 Printing Images and Imaging Series

Status: Released
During planning, reviewing or analyzing, you can send single images and whole imaging series
to the Print tab. In the Print tab, you can
► Open an imaging series in the Print tab.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Configure the page layout and print settings before printing the images.
Use the functions available on the Print toolbar and the Protocol Panel.
► In the Protocol Panel, click Print.
Print History
The Print history can be looked up in the Job Viewer. There, you can also cancel a running print
job or redo a previous print job.
{ Mann, Michael, 12/22/2020 10:36:01 AM: Insert link to Job viewer description? }
8.2.6.2 Navigating through Print Pages

Status: Released
8.2.6.2.1 Setting the Number of Print Pages in the Print Preview

Status: Released
Imaging series with more than 16 images do not fit on one print page.
To get an overview of all print pages, change the display mode.
► On the Print Toolbar, select a layout from the screen modes drop-down menu:
Philips
• To display one page, click Single Page Mode .

• To display two pages, click 2-Page Mode .
• To display four pages, click 4-Page Mode .
8.2.6.2.2 Scrolling through the Print Pages

Status: Released
If there is more than one print page, use the mouse wheel or the keyboard to navigate through
the pages.
► With the keyboard, do any of the following:
• To navigate to the previous page, press Up Arrow.
• To navigate to the next page, press Down Arrow.
Unless deactivated in the header and footer configuration, the current page number and the
total number of print pages are displayed at the bottom right of each page preview.
The total number of print pages is also displayed in the Protocol panel, at Pages to Print.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8.2.6.3 Adjusting the Layout of the Print Page
Status: Released
Node title (original): Intro Adjusting Print Page Layout ID: 115334941067
Status: Released
The default layout of a print page is 3x2 images with all images sorted sequentially. You can
adjust that layout and display more or less images on a page, or insert page breaks. The
viewports of the Print Preview can be resized by dragging.
Furthermore, you can use the compare mode and split the print page horizontally or vertically
to display images or imaging series next to each other for comparison.
End fragment title: Intro Adjusting Print Page Layout
8.2.6.3.1 Changing the Layout

The Print Preview displays one or more (maximum 16) viewports with images of one imaging
series next to each other.
• You can apply a layout to the Print Preview.
You select either a standard predefined layout, or you select a previously saved anatomy-
specific layout.
• You can select a predefined layout for a viewport.
Philips
• You can individually resize a viewport.

Applying a predefined layout to the Print Preview

► In the Protocol Panel, select a predefined layout.
Selecting a predefined layout for a viewport
► Right-click a viewport and select Inner Layout > 1x1 to 4x4.
Resizing a Viewport
You resize a viewport of the Print Preview individually to adjust it to the anatomy of interest.
► Drag the viewport border until the viewport has the desired size.
• You can only drag borders that adjoin to other viewports.
• If you drag horizontally, the whole column is resized.
• If you drag vertically, the single viewport within the row is resized.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): saving a layout ID: 116993547147

Status: Released
Saving a layout
► To save a layout for reuse, click Save Layout on the Protocol Panel.
This button is only available when the current layout of the Print Preview deviates from the
already saved layouts.
► Enter a name for the layout, then click Save.
End fragment title: saving a layout
8.2.6.3.2 Inserting and Removing Page Breaks

Status: Released
Node title (original): 01 Insert a page break ID: 115334994187

Status: Released
To insert a page break

• On the Print Toolbar, click Insert Page Break .
• Right-click an image and select Insert Page Break .

Philips

⇨ A page break is inserted before the current image.

End fragment title: 01 Insert a page break
Node title (original): 02 Remove a page break ID: 115334999051

Status: Released
To remove a page break

⊳ There is a manually inserted page break before the current image.
• On the Print Toolbar, click Remove Page Break .
• Right-click an image and select Remove Page Break .

⇨ The page break before the current image is deleted.
End fragment title: 02 Remove a page break
8.2.6.3.3 Deleting Print Pages
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
If you delete a page from the print preview, all the images on that page are removed from the
Print tab.
Node title (original): 03 Delete a print page ID: 115335047819
Status: Released
► On the Print Toolbar, click Delete Page .

⇨ The current page is deleted.
End fragment title: 03 Delete a print page
8.2.6.3.4 Changing the Number of Images on a Print Page

Status: Released
Node title (original): 04 Change number of images on print ID: 115335096587

page Status: Released
► In the Protocol Panel, open the Layout drop-down menu.

• To apply the new layout to all print pages, click Apply the layout to all pages .
Philips

• To apply the new layout to the current page only, click Apply the layout to the selected
page .
► Select a layout: 1x1 ... 4x4.
⇨ The new layout is applied instantly.
End fragment title: 04 Change number of images on print page
8.2.6.3.5 Changing the Filling Order of Print Pages

Status: Released
Node title (original): 05 Change order of images on print page ID: 115335146507
Status: Released
► In the Protocol panel, open the Layout drop-down menu.

► At Filling Order, do any of the following:
• To fill the images by rows on the page, click Horizontal Filling .

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• To fill the images by columns on the page, click Vertical Filling .
• To apply an individual filling order, click Select Filling Order , click the images on
the print preview in the desired order, and confirm with OK.
⇨ The new layout is applied instantly.
End fragment title: 05 Change order of images on print page
8.2.6.3.6 Printing in Compare Mode

Status: Released
Use Compare mode to view series side by side when active, else sequentially.
The Compare mode allows you to compare series with each other, e.g. series of the same
orientation but with different contrast.
Different setups are available: 1-1, 2, 2-2, 1-1-1, 2-2-2, 1-2 (and 1-2-2, 2-1, 2-2-1, 2-1-2, which
are not shown here).
► Select any setup for the Print Preview from the Compare Mode drop-down menu on the
Protocol Panel.
► From the Thumbnail overview of the Exam Overview, drag imaging series into the viewports
of the Print Preview.
Philips

To reset the page layout

► Select Off from the Compare Mode drop-down menu in the Protocol Panel.
8.2.6.3.7 Filtering and Sorting the Images in a Print Page Viewport

Status: Released
You can set the slice order and sorting dimensions, and filter the images to be displayed.
The filtering and sorting settings are configured individually for every imaging series. Some of
the options are only active when the current imaging series has more than 1 dimension.
► In the Protocol Panel at Sort and Filter, click Sort and Filter Images .
⇨ The Filtering and Sorting window opens.
► To set the slice order, do any of the following:
• To have the slices ordered from 1 to n, select Ascending Slice Order .
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• To have the slices ordered from n to 1, select Descending Slice Order .
► At Sorting Dimensions, set the primary and secondary dimension for sorting as desired.
► At Filter, specify the range of images to be displayed for every dimension: Enter the
numbers of the first and last image to be displayed into the text fields.
Alternatively, use the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the numbers by 1.
► At Show Every Nth Image, enter the value for N into the text field to display only every Nth
image.
Alternatively, use the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the number by 1.
► At New Film Every, select a dimension to automatically insert a page break when the
selected dimension changes.
► To confirm, click Apply.
8.2.6.3.8 Adding a PlanScan Image to the Images on the Print Page

Status: Released
You can add a PlanScan image to the imaging series that is selected on the print page.
There are 2 ways of adding a PlanScan image. Both ways can be combined:
• Insert the PlanScan image at the start or the end of the selected series.
• Inset the PlanScan image in each viewport that shows an image of the selected series.
⊳ A PlanScan image is available: The PlanScan button is enabled.
Philips

► In the Protocol Panel, click PlanScan .

⇨ The PlanScan window opens.
► To insert the PlanScan image at the start or the end of the selected series:
• Activate the checkbox at PlanScan Image.
• At Placement, select whether to insert the image at the start or the end of the series.
• At Select PlanScan Image, select the PlanScan image you want to insert.
⇨ The setting is applied instantly.
► To inset the PlanScan image in each viewport that shows an image of the selected series:
• Activate the checkbox at Inset Planscan.
• At Position, select the viewport corner in which to inset the image.
• At Inset PlanScan Image, select the PlanScan image you want to inset.
⇨ The setting is applied instantly.
► To confirm, click Done.
To remove the PlanScan images, deactivate the corresponding checkboxes in the PlanScan
window.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
8.2.6.4 Changing the Display of Images

Status: Released
You can change the display of each individual image. You can mirror, flip and rotate images. You
can perform basic operations such as copy, paste and delete. You can insert blank images. Prior
to performing any of these operations, select an image or select multiple images.
8.2.6.4.1 Selecting Images on Print Pages

Status: Released
Node title (original): 01 Select images from the print page ID: 115329031051
Status: Released

• To select an image, click it.
• To select non-consecutive images, press Ctrl and click the images.
• To select consecutive images, click the first image, press Shift, and click the last image
with Shift pressed.
• To select all images on the currently selected print page, click Select all images on this
page on the Print Preview.

Philips

• To select all images on all pages, click Select all images on all pages on the Print
Preview.
• To select all images of the currently selected series, click Select all images of this series
on the Print Preview.

• If more than one image is selected, the selected images are marked by a yellow square icon
at their right border: .
• To deselect the images, click any image.
End fragment title: 01 Select images from the print page
8.2.6.4.2 Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete of Images

Status: Released
Node title (original): 02 Cut images from the print page ID: 115329093899
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Cutting Images from Print Pages
► Select at least 1 image.
• On the Print Toolbar, click Cut selected images .
• Right-click an image and select Cut Selected Images .

• Press Ctrl+X.
⇨ The selected images are deleted from the current page, but are kept in the clipboard.
End fragment title: 02 Cut images from the print page
Node title (original): 03 Copy images from the print page ID: 115329156363
Status: Released
Copying Images on Print Pages

• On the Print Toolbar, click Copy selected images .
• Right-click an image and select Copy Selected Images .

Philips
• Press Ctrl+C.

⇨ The selected images are copied to the clipboard.

End fragment title: 03 Copy images from the print page
Node title (original): 04 Paste images in the print page ID: 115329218443
Status: Released
Pasting Images on Print Pages

⊳ At least 1 image is in the clipboard.
► Select a target viewport.
• On the Print Toolbar, click Paste images .
• Right-click the viewport and select Paste Images .

• Press Ctrl+V.
⇨ The images are inserted. The former content of the target viewport and subsequent
viewports is shifted backwards.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 04 Paste images in the print page
Node title (original): 05 Delete images from the print page ID: 115329280907
Status: Released
Deleting Images from Print Pages

• On the Print Toolbar, click Delete selected images .
• Right-click an image and select Delete Selected Images .

• Press the Del key.
⇨ The images are deleted from the current page and are not kept in the clipboard.
End fragment title: 05 Delete images from the print page
Node title (original): Delete all images from all print pages ID: 116878742667
(Clear) Status: Released
To delete all images from all print pages

► In the Protocol Panel, click Clear.
Philips

► To confirm, click Remove Images.

End fragment title: Delete all images from all print pages (Clear)
8.2.6.4.3 Inserting Blank Images on a Print Page

Status: Released
Node title (original): 07 Inserting blank images in the print page ID: 116832283531
Status: Released
► Select a target viewport.

• On the Print Toolbar, click Insert blank image .
• Right-click the viewport and select Insert Blank Image .

⇨ A blank image is inserted. The former content of the target viewport and subsequent
viewports is shifted backwards.
End fragment title: 07 Inserting blank images in the print page
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8.2.6.4.4 Mirroring, Flipping, and Rotating Images on Print Pages
Status: Released
► Select an image.
► On the Print Toolbar, do any of the following:
• To mirror the image, click Mirror on the Mirror/Flip drop-down menu.
• To flip the image, click Flip on the Mirror/Flip drop-down menu.
• To rotate the image 90° clockwise, click Rotate Clockwise on the Mirror/Flip
drop-down menu.
• To rotate the image 90° counter-clockwise, click Rotate Counter-Clockwise on

the Mirror/Flip drop-down menu.
8.2.6.4.5 Changing the Display of Images on Print Pages (Zoom, Pan, Window)
Status: Released
Philips

On the Print Preview, you can zoom in and out of the images, pan the images, and apply
windowing to the images. Use the corresponding button on the Print Toolbar or the context
menu to activate the desired action. Zooming, panning and windowing work as described in the
instructions for reviewing:
• chapter “Zooming in and out of an Image” on page 947
• chapter “Panning an Image” on page 948
• chapter “Windowing: Adjusting Brightness and Contrast” on page 946
• chapter “Resetting All Changes” on page 951
8.2.6.4.6 Measuring and Annotating Images on Print Pages

Status: Released
On the Print Preview images, you can perform measurements with lines, angles, and ROIs, and
insert annotations. Use the corresponding button on the Print Toolbar to activate the desired
action. Measuring and annotating work as described in the instructions for reviewing:
• chapter “Measuring with Lines” on page 953
• chapter “Measuring with ROIs” on page 959
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• chapter “Annotating Images” on page 966

Apart from using annotations as in reviewing, in the Print Preview you can also use
predefined annotations: chapter “Using Predefined Annotations” on page 1185
8.2.6.4.7 Using Predefined Annotations

Status: Released
You can insert predefined annotations from a list via drag and drop, and you can add
predefined annotations to the list.
Node title (original): 01 Insert a predefined annotation ID: 115329525643
Status: Released
To insert a predefined annotation into an image
► On the Print Toolbar, click Predefined Annotations .

⇨ The Predefined Annotations window opens.
► At Annotation Type, do any of the following:
• To insert the annotation as text only, click Text only .

Philips

• To insert text with an arrow, click Text + Arrow .

► At Select Category, select the fitting category from the drop-down menu.
⇨ The list of predefined annotations of the selected category is displayed.
► Drag an annotation to the desired target image.
If the annotation type Text + Arrow is selected, releasing the mouse sets the arrowhead,
and clicking again sets the annotation text.
End fragment title: 01 Insert a predefined annotation
Node title (original): 02 Add an annotation to the predefined ID: 115329526667

list Status: Released
To add an annotation to the predefined list

► At Select Category, select the desired category from the drop-down menu.
► Right-click an existing annotation.
⇨ The context menu opens.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► In the context menu, do any of the following:
• To insert an annotation before the selected annotation, click Add Before.
• To insert an annotation after the selected annotation, click Add After.
► Enter the annotation text.
► To confirm, press Enter.
End fragment title: 02 Add an annotation to the predefined list
Node title (original): 03 Delete a predefined annotation from ID: 115329528203

the list Status: Released
To delete a predefined annotation from the list

► Right-click the annotation and select Delete from the context menu.
To delete the last remaining annotation of a category, you have to delete the category.
End fragment title: 03 Delete a predefined annotation from the list
Node title (original): 04 Edit a predefined annotation in the list ID: 115329529739
Status: Released
To edit a predefined annotation in the list

► Right-click the annotation and select Edit from the context menu.
► Edit the annotation text.
Philips


End fragment title: 04 Edit a predefined annotation in the list
Node title (original): 05 Add a category ID: 115329531275

Status: Released
To add a category
► At Select Category, select Add New from the drop-down menu.
► Enter the category label.
End fragment title: 05 Add a category
Node title (original): 06 Edit a category label ID: 115329532811

Status: Released
To edit a category label

► Right-click the category label and select Edit from the context menu.
► Edit the text.
End fragment title: 06 Edit a category label
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): 07 Delete a category ID: 115329534347

Status: Released
To delete a category
► Right-click the category label and select Delete from the context menu.
► To confirm, click Confirm.
End fragment title: 07 Delete a category
8.2.6.4.8 Displaying a Negative Image on Print Pages

Status: Released
You can display a negative image (invert the gray scale) of the selected image. Displaying a
negative image sets all the pixel values to their opposite value on a color wheel: white becomes
black, and vice versa.
• Select the image you want to modify and click Invert Gray Scale on the Print
Toolbar.
• Right-click the image and select Invert Gray Scale .

To return to the default gray scale, perform any of these actions again.
Philips

8.2.6.4.9 Displaying Reference Lines on Print Pages (PlanScan Drawing Tool)

Status: Released
The reference lines visualize the planned volume.

► On the Print Toolbar, do any of the following:
• To display default reference lines, click Defaults .
• To display reference lines in box mode, click Box Mode .
• To display reference lines in slice mode, click Slice Mode .
• To display reference lines in 3D mode, click 3D Mode .
8.2.6.5 Managing the Image Information on the Print Page

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
8.2.6.5.1 Extending or Restricting the Image Information on Print Pages

Status: Released
Node title (original): 01 Extend / Restrict image information ID: 115348619019

Status: Released
There are 4 preset configurations of image information that can be displayed along the images
in the viewports, ranging from no information to all information available.
This setting applies to all the images and imaging series on the print pages.
► In the Protocol Panel at Image Info, do any of the following:
• To display full image information, select Full Image Information from the
drop-down menu.
The amount of information displayed depends on the image information settings. Default
for Full Image Information is: scan and image type, slice number, contrast-related
information such as TR, TE, flip angle, date and time, slice thickness and gap, FOV, PLUS
turbofactor (if applicable), scan duration, acquired voxel size.
Philips

• To display an intermediate amount of image information, select Intermediate Image
Information from the drop-down menu.

for Intermediate Image Information is: scan and image type, slice number, contrast-related
information such as TR, TE, flip angle, date and time, slice thickness and gap, FOV.
• To display limited image information, select Limited Image Information from

the drop-down menu.
for Limited Image Information is: scan and image type, slice number, contrast-related
information such as TR, TE, flip angle.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• To hide all image information, select No Image Information from the drop-
down menu.
End fragment title: 01 Extend / Restrict image information
8.2.6.5.2 Configuring the Image Information Settings per Series

Status: Released
The image information settings are managed in the Image Information window. It has two tabs
to configure image information for images (Image Level Info) and imaging series (Series Level
Info). In each tab, the list of available information labels is displayed on the left and an image
preview is displayed on the right.
These settings apply to the current imaging series. They have to be configured for each series.
Node title (original): 03 Manage image information settings ID: 115348742923
Status: Released
► In the Protocol Panel at Image Info, click Image Information Settings .

⇨ The Image Information window opens.
• To configure settings on image level, select the Image Level Info tab.
• To configure settings on imaging series level, select the Series Level Info tab.
► To remove all information labels from the image preview, click Remove All.
► To apply the default settings, click Defaults.
Philips

► To add or move an information label, drag it to the desired area of the image preview.
► To remove an information label from the image preview, drag it to the list.
► Repeat these steps until the image information is configured as desired.
► To confirm, click Save.
► To cancel editing, click Cancel.
End fragment title: 03 Manage image information settings
8.2.6.5.3 Toggling the Display of Image Information for the Selected Series
Status: Released
Node title (original): 02 Toggle image information for current ID: 115348678155
series Status: Released
► In the Protocol Panel at Image Info, click Hide Image Information Level .
⇨ If the image information for the currently selected series was displayed before, it is now
hidden.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨ If the image information for the currently selected series was hidden before, it is now
displayed.
End fragment title: 02 Toggle image information for current series
8.2.6.5.4 Enlarging the Image Information on the Preview

Status: Released
You can enlarge the font size of the image information on the preview to identify essential
information such as the slice number. Note that the font size is enlarged only on the preview,
not in the print output.
Node title (original): 04 Enlarge image information on preview ID: 115348791947
Status: Released
► In the Protocol Panel, activate the Enlarge Image Information check box.
⇨ The font size on the preview is enlarged.
To reset the font size, deactivate the Enlarge Image Information check box.
End fragment title: 04 Enlarge image information on preview
8.2.6.6 Managing Print Protocols

Status: Released
Node title (original): Intro (Managing Image Information) ID: 115348807307

Status: Released
Philips

You can select the amount of information to display on all images and series, configure which
information to display per image series, toggle the information display per series, and enlarge
the text size in the preview.
End fragment title: Intro (Managing Image Information)
8.2.6.6.1 Saving and Loading Print Protocols (Printout Protocols)

Status: Released
You can save your current layout settings as a printout protocol for later reuse and you can load
previously saved protocols. In a protocol, the configuration of these settings is saved: Layout
(page layout), PlanScan (inclusion of PlanScan images to the image viewports), Header and
Footer (information displayed in the header and footer of each print page), and Image
Information Settings (information displayed in each image viewport).
In the Protocol Panel, the topmost drop-down menu displays the name of the currently
selected protocol. An asterisk at the name (e.g. 'Default*') indicates that unsaved changes have
been made to the protocol settings.
Node title (original): 01 Save print layout ID: 115337300875
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
To save print layout settings as a printout protocol

► In the Protocol Panel, click Save Protocol.
⇨ The Save Protocol window appears. The current protocol name (Name) and category
(Category) are already filled in.
► At Name, do any of the following:
• To overwrite the current protocol, do not change the pre-filled name.
• To create a new protocol, enter a new name.
► At Category, select a category for the protocol.
► To confirm, click Save.
⇨ The current layout settings are saved and can now be loaded from the protocols drop-down
menu.
End fragment title: 01 Save print layout
Node title (original): 02 Load print protocol ID: 115337302411

Status: Released
To load a printout protocol

► In the Protocol Panel, select the desired protocol from the topmost drop-down menu.
{ Mann, Michael, 12/17/2020 4:32:28 PM: Note: It doesn't have a general label or tooltip}
⇨ The protocol is applied instantly.
Philips

Note that the protocols are organized in categories. Look for the fitting category for the
protocol you want to load.
End fragment title: 02 Load print protocol
Node title (original): 03 Undo changes to a protocol ID: 116878817547

Status: Released
To undo unsaved changes made to a printout protocol

► In the Protocol Panel, select any but the current protocol from the topmost drop-down
menu.
⇨ The protocol is applied instantly.
► Select the previous protocol from the topmost drop-down menu.
⇨ The original previous protocol is applied without changes.
Note that the settings that are saved in the protocols comprise Layout (page layout), PlanScan
(inclusion of PlanScan images to the image viewports), Header and Footer (information
displayed in the header and footer of each print page), and Image Information Settings
(information displayed in each image viewport). Other settings persist when loading a protocol
and have to be changed manually.
End fragment title: 03 Undo changes to a protocol
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): 04 Delete saved protocol ID: 115337303947
Status: Released
To delete a saved printout protocol

► In the Protocol Panel, open the topmost drop-down menu.
► At the desired entry, click Delete .

The delete button appears when you hover over the entry.
► To confirm, click Yes.
End fragment title: 04 Delete saved protocol
8.2.6.7 Specifying Generic Print Settings

Status: Released
8.2.6.7.1 Adjusting Header and Footer of a Print Page

Status: Released
You can select which information to include in the headers and footers of the print pages.
► In the Protocol Panel, click Header and Footer .

⇨ The Header and Footer window opens. It displays the list of available information labels on
Philips
the left and a print page template (Preview) on the right.

► To remove all information labels from the Preview page, click Remove All.
► To apply the default settings, click Defaults.
► To add or move an information label, drag it to the desired area of the Preview page.
► To remove an information label from the Preview page, drag it to the list.
► Repeat these steps until the header and footer is configured as desired.
► To confirm your changes, click Save.
► To cancel editing, click Cancel.
8.2.6.7.2 Configuring Printer and Print Output

Status: Released
You can configure and save your Print Preferences as the default. Notwithstanding this, print
settings can also be configured individually for each print job. General print settings are:
selection of printer and media size, specification of page orientation, number of copies and
page selection, and activation of page collating. Furthermore, you can activate life-size printing.
The following settings can only be configured in the Print Preferences: Auto Print Zoom Factor,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Auto Clear Images after Print, Print Page Count Warning.

The following settings can only be configured individually for each print job: Pages, Collate,
Life-Size Printing, De-Identify.
Node title (original): 01a Edit default print settings ID: 116846134667
Status: Released
To edit the default print settings (Print Preferences)

You can configure and save the default print settings to make them correspond to your usual
requirements.
► In the Protocol Panel, at Print Settings, click Show More.
► Click Edit Default Print Settings .

⇨ The Print Preferences window appears.
► Configure the Print Preferences as desired:
• At Default Printer, select a default printer.
If you select Print To File, the output file will be saved in E:\Export.
• At Default Media Size, select a default media size.
• At Default Layout, select a default layout for the print output.
• At Number of Copies, enter the default number of copies to be printed.
• At Orientation, select the default page orientation.
• At Auto Print Zoom Factor, select the default zoom factor for printing.
Philips

• At Auto Clear Images after Print, choose whether to automatically remove all images
from the Print preview after printing has finished.
• At Print Page Count Warning, enter the number of print pages from which on a warning
should be issued.
• Adjust the page header and footer by dragging information labels from Patient Details,
Examination Details, or Page Details to the desired areas of the Preview page template.
To remove all information labels from the Preview page, click Remove All.
To apply the default settings, click Defaults.
► To confirm your changes, click Save.
► To cancel editing without saving, click Cancel.
End fragment title: 01a Edit default print settings
Node title (original): 01b Select a printer ID: 115336178699

Status: Released
To select a printer
► In the Protocol Panel, at Print Settings, select a printer from the Printer drop-down menu.
If you select Print To File, the output files will be saved in E:\Export.
End fragment title: 01b Select a printer
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): 02 Set media size ID: 115336183051
Status: Released
To set the media size

► In the Protocol Panel, at Print Settings, select a media size from the Media Size drop-down
menu.
End fragment title: 02 Set media size
Node title (original): 03 Set page orientation ID: 115336186251

Status: Released
To set the page orientation

► At Orientation, select a page orientation.
End fragment title: 03 Set page orientation
Node title (original): 04 Set number of copies ID: 115336187787

Status: Released
To set the number of copies to be printed

► At Copies, enter the desired number of copies into the text field.
Alternatively, use the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the number of copies by 1.
End fragment title: 04 Set number of copies
Node title (original): 05 Define pages to print ID: 115336189323

Status: Released
Philips

Administration Finalizing the Examination
To define which pages to print

► At Pages, do any of the following:
• To print all pages, select All.
• To print selected pages, enter the selection into the text field.
Example:
Enter 1-5 to print pages 1 to 5.
Enter 8 to print page 8.
Enter 1-5, 8 to print pages 1 to 5 and 8.
End fragment title: 05 Define pages to print
Node title (original): 06 Collate ID: 115336190859

Status: Released
To collate print pages

► At Collate, do any of the following:
• Select Yes to print all pages of each copy before printing the next copy.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Select No to print all copies of each page before printing the next page.
End fragment title: 06 Collate
Node title (original): 07 Life-size printing ID: 115337249675

Status: Released
To activate life-size printing

► Activate Life-Size Printing.
End fragment title: 07 Life-size printing
Node title (original): 08 De-identifying patient data (only cross- ID: 116884161675
reference) Status: Released
To de-identify patient data

This feature is described in a separate section:
End fragment title: 08 De-identifying patient data (only cross-reference)
8.3 Administration
Status: NotReleased
Philips

Finalizing the Examination Administration
8.3.1 Ways of Exporting and Archiving

Status: NotReleased
Archiving is used for long term storage (in PACS).

Exporting is used for sharing of data (over Workstations or USB).
Depending on the data size, the individual exam requirements (for example time pressure) and
personal preference, you use any of the following methods:
Method Use when Format and Keep in mind
Storage
Destination
Auto Export • Unlimited storage space. { Maethger, Review of images is

See chapter “Enabling the Auto • Images do not need to be Maria, not possible.
Export Function” on page 1199 reviewed. 9/7/2020
3:05:08 PM:
• All image series or only from
Which
selected ExamCard shall be
format? }in
archived.
PACS
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Archive selected image series • You want to archive only selected { Maethger,
before completing the image series of an examination. Maria,
examination • You have to provide the images as 9/7/2020
(Flag for archive + Archive soon as possible. The first scans 3:05:08 PM:
button) are already archived while the Which
later scans are still running. format? }in
PACS
Archive selected image series • You want to archive only selected { Maethger,
when completing the image series of an examination. Maria,
examination • You want to review the images 9/7/2020
(Flag for archive + Complete first. 3:05:08 PM:
Exam button) Which
format? }in
PACS
Philips

Method Use when Format and Keep in mind

Storage
Destination
Export selected examination • You want to store only selected Operator can Can only be done for
manually image series of an examination. choose. one examination at a
See chapter “Exporting Exam • You want to review the images time.
Data Manually” on page 1201 first.
• You want to select the storage
destination.
Save selected image series as • You want to store only selected Operator can Can only be done for
other format manually image series of an examination. choose. one examination at a
See chapter “Saving Exam Data • You want to review the images time.
as Selected File Format” on page first.
1204 • You want to select the storage
destination.
• You want to save the images in a
certain file format, for example
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
PNG, MP4, PAR-REC.

VP.SPICA.15_v1 Status: NotReleased
WARNING
To limit the output size for non-DICOM image storage, the system uses lossy compression.
This compression can result in loss of detail.
End fragment title: 84799 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-VP.SPICA.15_v1
8.3.2 DICOM Export: Series Split Functionality

Status: Released
Imaging series with multiple dimensions (such as echoes, dynamics, or b-values) can be split
into multiple series during DICOM export. This allows for an image sorting order based on the
series number and is especially useful for those PACS/Workstations that cannot sort on these
dimensions.
Each new series can easily be identified since its series number is derived from the series
number of the original dataset.
Splitting is done in case of
• MultiEcho scans (resulting in a series per echo)
Philips

• Dynamic scans (resulting in a series per dynamic)

• Diffusion scans (resulting in a series per b-value)
• conventional DICOM MR images
• SC (Secondary Capture) images, e.g. screen grabs
• Private images (imaging protocols, ExamCards)
With the Series Split functionality, the presentation states will not be exported.
During import on the MR console, the new split series will be merged into one series again.
NOTICE
For automatic Series Split functionality you need a special configured network node.
The network nodes can be configured according to your needs together with your Customer
Support Organization.
8.3.3 More about Storage Destinations
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Affix: not ready ID: 115064369035
The following storage devices can be available on the system.
NOTICE
Contact your local Customer Support Organization for setup.
{ Maethger, Maria, 9/22/2020 1:08:18 PM: Need to think more about this. Is this only for
Export/Archiving scan or patient data or also for storing other data, e.g. Contrast presets?}
Icon Storage device
Local Patient Database

• containing the patient examination list
DICOM Network Node

• contents of the currently configured DICOM network node.
Remote (DICOM) patient databases. Accessible via drop-down menu in the |Network|
destination.
Philips

Icon Storage device
PACS
• contents of the currently assigned PACS
Remote (DICOM) patient databases. Accessible via drop-down menu in the |Archive|
destination.
Disk files (Local DICOM directory)

By default, files are written to E:\DICOM. It is also possible to browse to a different
destination folder, create a new folder or copy to a PC via a network connection.
Database capacity indicator bar

In the upper right corner, a blue bar is available which indicates how much space of the current
database/device is used.
The bar color changes to red when 80% or more are used.
Retrieving data from PACS

During retrieval of data from a PACS, the scanner allows to delete data from the patient just
being retrieved. Check the QueueManager for completion of the job before taking new actions
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
within administration.
DICOM
Please see the ‘DICOM Conformance Statement’.
NOTICE
Prior to examination transfer to PACS, make sure that the examination is not in use in the
viewing and/or scanning environment.
Otherwise it (or parts of it) could be locked and not be transferred. In this case, a message
appears describing the cause of the problem.

Status: NotReleased
8.3.4.1 Enabling the Auto Export Function

Status: Released
The purpose of this workflow is to enable Auto export. Auto export archives all scan data
automatically.
Philips

► To open the Auto export window, click Settings and Tools , then Settings and then
select Auto export.
► To enable Auto export, click the checkbox next to Auto export to selected destinations.
► Select a destination and choose whether to include all series or only marked series (marked
with Flag to archive) .
⇨ After the scan is finished, the system automatically archives all series or only selected series
to the chosen destination.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8.3.4.2 Using Flag for Archive and Archiving
Status: Released
The goal of this workflow is to archive selected image series. First, you have to mark the series
for archiving and then archive them either before or with completion of the exam.
{ Maethger, Maria, 10/6/2020 3:04:31 PM: We need to check the terminology: scan item,
sequence, image series, scan data,...}
{ Maethger, Maria, 10/6/2020 3:04:31 PM: explain how to store "flag for archive" with
examcard}
Setting Flag for archive

► In the Exam Overview, right-click on a scan item.
► To mark a scan item for archive, click on Flag for archive.

⇨ A check mark appears in front of the menu entry Flag for archive.
⇨ On the scan item, the Marked for Archive icon appears.
Archiving selected series

► To archive the marked series, do one of the following:
• Click Archive to archive the image series in their current state, for example when you
Philips
have to provide the images as soon as possible.

• Follow the exam workflow. When you click Complete Exam, the selected image series
are exported.
Setting the order of the image series for archiving/exporting

You can choose the order of the image series that you marked for archiving.
► In the Exam Overview area, right-click on a scan item.
► Click on Image Export Sorting Order.
► In the Image Export Sorting Order window, use the arrow buttons to set the order of the
images for the export.
For example:
Order Description
Slices • Slice 1 with Echo 1 and 2

Echoes • Slice 2 with Echo 1 and 2
… • Slice 3 with Echo 1 and 2
• ...
Echoes • Echo 1 with all slices

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Slices • Echo 2 with all slices

…
{ Maethger, Maria, 9/22/2020 1:12:50 PM: Do you use the "safety message" type "Tip"
usually?}
Tip
Save your settings with the ExamCard.
If you want to use your archiving settings for other examinations, you can save the
ExamCard including the settings you made. For information on Saving ExamCards, see
here{ Maethger, Maria, 9/22/2020 1:12:02 PM: Insert reference}.
8.3.4.3 Exporting Exam Data Manually

Status: Released
There are multiple ways to manually export patient data to a selected destination. If you want
to export the data as a research file-format, see chapter “Saving Exam Data as Selected File
Format” on page 1204.
► In the Patient Directory, select the patients whose data you want to export.
To select multiple patients, do one of the following:
• Keep Ctrl pressed and select multiple single examinations.
Philips

• Keep Shift pressed and click on two examinations successively to select these two
examinations AND the examinations which are between them in the list.
► To export the selected patient data, do one of the following:
• Right-click on the selected patients, then click Export.
• Click Export in the right lower corner.
► In the Export window, select a destination and the format, see chapter “More about
Storage Destinations” on page 1198 and .
► Depending on the format, you can select { Maethger, Maria, 9/29/2020 10:20:09 AM: short
description of these? But can also be found at adding a DICOM node. Maybe we can use the
same somehow? }
• Include DICOM Viewer
• Other Series Split (Classic MR only)
• LUT to RGB (Classic MR only)
• Combine MR Rescaling (Classic MR only)
• ADC Correction
► If you want to store the exported data anonymously, enable De-identify Patient Name and
enter a new file name.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Click on Export.
⇨ Next to the Job Viewer icon, the message appears Preparing to export the data from
LocalDatabase.
⇨ The patient data is exported to the selected destination in the selected format.
8.3.4.4 Using USB storage devices

Affix: old needs to be revised ID: 9007314322954891
NOTICE
Using USB devices might be disabled by your system administrator.
Using USB storage devices can be enabled by the Hospital Admin.
USB storage devices (flash drives, hard drives) are recognized by the system and can be used for
exchanging data. The operating system automatically assigns a drive letter to the device.
Philips

CAUTION
Do not remove the USB storage device without using the "Safely Remove Hardware" option.
Removing the device without using this option can corrupt the data on the USB memory
device.
NOTICE
The USB storage device may contain confidential information.
Take appropriate measures to protect this information. It is not possible to prevent the
transfer of data to removable media.
Enable USB Devices (by Hospital Admin)

► Logon as Hospital Admin.
► Click on the Windows Start Button and select MR System Management followed by System
Management and Enable or Disable Removable Media.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Click Yes to enable or No to disable the use of USB devices.
Using "Safely Remove Hardware" option

1. Close all applications that access the USB storage device.
2. Select ‘system’ -> ‘show taskbar’ or press the |windows| key on your keyboard to show the
Windows taskbar.
3. left click once on the ‘Safely Remove Hardware’ icon in the notification area of the taskbar
and select ‘Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device - Drive (<drive letter>:)’.
4. You can safely remove your USB storage device when the ‘Safe To Remove Hardware’
message appears.
8.3.4.4.1 USB Hard Drives

Status: NotReleased
Philips

Node title (original): 24674 SYS.Label.IFU.SIPSOP.USB ID: 9007289069611147

Status: Released
CAUTION
Connecting a USB-powered external hard drive may cause the USB ports of the host
computer to stop working. All USB connected devices will not work anymore.
The hard drive may consume too much power causing the host computer to shut down the
USB ports.
End fragment title: 24674 SYS.Label.IFU.SIPSOP.USB
When this occurs the USB ports can be reactivated by:

1. Disconnect the USB hard drive.
2. Shut down the host computer and remove the power for 10 seconds.
3. Reconnect the power and start up the host computer.
The USB ports are reactivated.
The problem can be prevented by using an external USB drive with an external power
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

connection or using an external drive with a data USB cable and a power-to-USB cable.
When using a power-to-USB cable:
► First connect both USB cables to the computer.
► Connect the power-to-USB cable to the external device.
► Connect the USB data cable to the device.
8.3.4.5 Saving Exam Data as Selected File Format

Status: Released
To export scan data for research purposes, you can select certain file formats. This is not
possible with the regular export functions.
► In the Plan, Review or Print tab{ Maethger, Maria, 10/6/2020 3:15:49 PM: does it make
sense to write it down like this? Isn't it also possible from analyses - if you have anything
there?}, right-click on an image series that contains scan data.
► Click on Save as.
► In the Save As window, select in the Selection menu whether to save only the Selected
Series or the Whole Study.
► Click on Set Ranges to select an Image Typ { Maethger, Maria, 9/28/2020 9:31:26 AM:
what does this mean? I only see "M" - is this medium?} and the number of Slices you want
to save.
Do one of the following:
Philips
• Click Reset to Default to restore default settings.

• Click Set to save your settings and close the window.

• Click Cancel to close the window without saving the settings.
► Select a destination for storing the data.
Note that not all destinations support saving research files, for example iSite does not
support storing research data.
► Select Research as Format and select the formats that needed for the research data.
{ Maethger, Maria, 9/28/2020 9:31:26 AM: What does "use scan name" and "Sort" do?}
► By default, the data is stored under the patient name. Type in a new file name to change
the name.
► Click on Export.
⇨ Next to the Job Viewer icon, the message appears Export job completed successfully.
⇨ The patient data is exported to the selected destination in the selected format.
8.3.4.6 Importing Patient Data from External Sources

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
{ Maethger, Maria, 9/28/2020 12:12:24 PM: Is drag'n drop an option for export/import?}
The goal of this workflow is to import patient data from external sources, for example PACS or
USB drives, to the system.
► In the Patient Directory in the More tab, select the source from which you want to import
patient data.
⇨ The source is set as a tab in the Patient Directory and the patient data from the selected
source is displayed.
► In the list, select the patients whose data you want to import.
To select multiple patients, do one of the following:
• Keep Ctrl pressed and select multiple single examinations.
• Keep Shift pressed and click on two examinations successively to select these two
examinations AND the examinations which are between them in the list.
► To import the selected patient data, do one of the following:
• Right-click on the selected patients, then click Import.
• Click Import in the right lower corner.
⇨ The imported patient data is added to the system.
⇨ The imported data is added to the patient list on the All tab and can be used.{ Maethger,
Maria, 9/28/2020 1:49:29 PM: need to check}
8.3.5 DICOM Configuration

Philips
Status: Released


Affix: DICOM Configuration ID: 115208456203
Node title (original): DICOM main functions ID: 115208460043

Status: Released
This functionality enables you to set up a DICOM node.
What are the main functions of DICOM Configuration?

• Dicom Configuration shows you the available network nodes connected to the MR console
as part of the hospital network, and gives you information about their status.
• It allows you to add new nodes, modify existing nodes and delete obsolete network nodes
from the list. Fore more information, see chapter “Adding a New DICOM Node or Editing an
Existing DICOM Node” on page 1206 and chapter “Deleting an Obsolete DICOM Node” on
page 1210.
• Furthermore, you can test the connection with this functionality. Fore more information,
see chapter “Testing a Configured Node” on page 1209.
End fragment title: DICOM main functions
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8.3.5.2 Adding a New DICOM Node or Editing an Existing DICOM Node
Status: Released
{ Maethger, Maria, 9/21/2020 12:22:33 PM: To me it feels like there is a bit too much
explanation for an operational topic - however, the user needs the information here. Can we
find a better solution?}
⊳ A prerequisite is that a workstation, PACS- or RIS-system is connected to your hospital
network just like the MR console.
⊳ Before you start, contact your IT department to get to know technical data of the DICOM
node:
• Host name or IP address,
• port number,
• AE Title.
The AE Title consists of numbers and letters, is case-sensitive and has a maximum of 16
characters.
► To open the Dicom Configuration, click Settings and Tools in the Navigation Bar and
then Dicom Configuration....
⇨ The Dicom Configuration window opens.
► To add a new DICOM node, click + Add New.
Philips

To modify an existing DICOM node, select the DICOM node and click Editing Node in
the same line.{ Maethger, Maria, 9/21/2020 2:57:53 PM: Show editing window? ID
114500767243}
► Select the node Type: PACS, Network (workstation) or RIS.
► Enter a Name for the new node.
We advise to use a name that represents the node and its characteristics best, such as
IntelliSpace, or PACS split.
► Enter the Host name/ IP Address, the Port number and the AE Title of the node.
► If applicable: set the DICOM Transfer mode to either Classic or Enhanced MR.
Classic DICOM is recommended for multi-vendor applications, Enhanced MR for Philips
applications.
► To transfer the imaging series with presentation state, deselect Disable presentation State.
This is the default setting and the preferred situation.
The presentation state is a DICOM property that describes how to display the images. It
contains the viewing data:
• windowing and rescaling information,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• zooming, panning, rotation and mirroring settings,

• slice order, mirroring, rotation settings,
• ROIs, annotations, lines and graphics.
If the presentation state (and consequently all viewing data) is transferred to the DICOM
node, you view the images with the same viewing settings on MR console and DICOM node.
If you select Disable presentation state, these viewing data are not transferred. Only a
limited set is transferred to the DICOM node: window width, window level, ROIs,
annotations and lines.
► To maintain the scaling of your MR images when you transfer to non-Philips DICOM nodes,
select MR Combine Rescaling.
Non-Philips DICOM nodes do not understand the rescale information in Philips MR images.
Consequently the images can be displayed too light or too dark.
Be aware that you lose quantitative information such as ADC values, if you enable this
option.
This setting only applies for Classic MR transfer mode.
► Switch on ADC Correction, if your DICOM node does not receive the windowing/rescaling
values of ADC data correctly.
• The ADC values are very small values (in the range of 10-3 mm²/s) which are not received
well by all DICOM nodes.
• To display correct values on the DICOM node, ADC Correction rescales the windowing/
rescaling values to 1000 times higher values.
► To switch on the automatic conversion of color Look-Up Tables (LUT) to RGB color
Philips
secondary capture, select LUT-2-RGB Conversion.

• Not all Classic MR DICOM nodes receive color images (for example, parametric maps
with color LUT) correctly with color. Therefore MR images that contain color LUT
information are automatically converted and exported as secondary capture color RGB
images.
• If your Classic MR DICOM node does not need this automatic conversion, disable LUT-2-
RGB Conversion. In general, conversion can lead to the loss of DICOM attributes such as
geometry information.
► If applicable: To split series according to their image attributes, select Split series.
Split series is only applicable in series that consist of multiple echoes, multiple dynamics or
multiple b-values. If Split series is enabled and Echo dynamic/ Diffusion is selected,
• in a multi-echo acquisition, the slices of each echo are transferred separately.
This results in multiple series on the DICOM node: series 1 = echo 1, series 2 = echo 2,
and so on.
• each dynamic scan of a dynamic series is transferred separately.
This results in multiple series on the DICOM node: series 1 = dynamic 1, series 2 =
dynamic 2, and so on.
• in a diffusion series, the slices of each b-value are transferred separately.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

This results in multiple series on the DICOM node: series 1 = b-value 1, series 2 = b-value
2, and so on.
• in a acquisition with multiple image types, the series with different image types are
transferred separately.
This results in multiple series on the DICOM node: series 1 = image type 1, series 2 =
image type 2, and so on.
• in a acquisition with multiple sequences, each sequence is transferred separately.
This results in multiple series on the DICOM node: series 1 = sequence 1, series 2 =
sequence 2, and so on.
If Split series is enabled and Image type/Scanning sequence is selected,{ Maethger, Maria,
10/27/2020 9:51:23 AM: next list is missing in PDF-output}
To transfer a multi-echo, dynamic or diffusion imaging series as one series (independently
of their image attributes), deselect Split series.
• To save the current settings of the node and to test the connection, click Save.
• To close the window without saving, click Discard.
► Before you can send a test series, you have to restart the system.
► To send a test series, click Send Test Series.
For more information on sending a test series, see chapter “Testing a Configured Node” on
page 1209.
Philips

► To update the status display of the current node, click the Refresh icon in the Status panel.
This takes up to 5 seconds.
⇨ The Node Status shows Dicom Ping - Ok.

⇨ The new DICOM Node is successfully connected to the system.
8.3.5.3 Testing a Configured Node

Status: Released
{ Maethger, Maria, 9/22/2020 9:23:50 AM: I wonder if this could be a description. In Artes you
only have 3 possible Operations in this window. If unsuccessful: Edit Node, Try again - if
successful: Done }
► To test if the connection is correctly configured, click Send Test Series.
The Preview window opens.
1
2
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
4 5
In the Preview window, you can see

• the name of the configured DICOM node (1),
• the information (2) about the test series,
• thumbnail images of the test series (3),
• the status of the node (4),
• the buttons (5) vary according to the status of the node: If the test was unsuccessful,
click Edit Node to change settings or Try Again to restart the test. If the test was
successful, click Done to close the window.
There are three different test series available. They contain different types of images and all
options that can be set in the DICOM node Settings panel. Additional secondary captures of
the test series are also provided and sent along for reference. The transfer of test series can
take up to a few minutes.
► Check if the test series have been sent to the receiving DICOM node correctly:
• Check if the series have arrived at the DICOM node.
• Visually inspect the images at the receiving DICOM node.
Philips

8.3.5.4 Deleting an Obsolete DICOM Node

Status: Released
► To open the Dicom Configuration, click Settings and Tools in the Navigation Bar and
then Dicom Configuration....
⇨ The Dicom Configuration window opens.
► Select a DICOM node from the list.
► To remove this network node from the list, click Delete .

A query pops up: Are you sure, you want to delete the node permanently from the
configuration list?
• To delete the DICOM node, click Delete.
• To keep the DICOM node, click Cancel.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

MR Angiography Advanced Operation
9 Advanced Operation
Affix: IFU ID: 9007311124714763
9.1 MR Angiography
Status: NotReleased
9.1.1 Functional Description MRA

Affix: IFU-new with Unify ID: 116979874955
{ Geenen, Hubert, 4/11/2018 8:53:41 AM: MORE information than used to be in IFU with
Atlantis, but less than is in Scan Methods.}
Node title (original): intro about MRA ID: 116980138379
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
MRA is a method of visualizing vessels,

• either non-invasive (without the use of contrast media)
• or invasive (with the use of contrast media: Contrast-Enhanced MRA).
End fragment title: intro about MRA
Node title (original): MaxIP and MinIP ID: 116979995531

Status: Released
Maximum and Minimum Intensity Projection

MRA scans provide you with many slices which can be viewed one by one. To view the
complete vessel tree in a convenient way, calculate Maximum and Minimum Intensity
Projections from the MRA slices.
The Maximum Intensity Projection (MaxIP) is an algorithm, which is commonly used in MR
Angiography. Based on the projection direction, the voxels of a 3D dataset (acquired by the
M2D, MS or 3D scan mode) are examined along the projection rays. Each projection ray will
select the maximum voxel intensity along that ray. The maximum value of each ray corresponds
to a specific pixel in the projection image.
The calculation of a Minimum Intensity Projection is comparable, but in this case each
projection ray will select the minimum voxel intensity along that ray. This Minimum Intensity
Projection is to be calculated for Black Blood imaging.
End fragment title: MaxIP and MinIP
9.1.2 MRA Techniques

Status: NotReleased
Philips

Advanced Operation MR Angiography
9.1.2.1 Inflow MRA

Status: Released
Inflow MRA is based on enhancement of flowing blood and suppression of stationary tissue.
Node title (original): applications ID: 48006089227
Status: Released
Applications
• Intra- and extracranial vessels,
• Carotid arteries,
• Origins of vertebral and carotid arteries, pulmonary vessels,
• Depiction of the aortic arch and neck vessels,
• Femoral and popliteal arteries and the vessels in the hand,
• Screening vascular anomalies all over the body.
End fragment title: applications
Node title (original): preparing the patient for inflow MRA ID: 48004779275
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Preparing the patient for an inflow MRA scan
M2D-, 3D-, Multichunk 3D-Inflow and TONE do not require special patient preparation.
► For Gated, Dual-Gated and Turbo Inflow MRA, connect VCG to the patient.
End fragment title: preparing the patient for inflow MRA
Node title (original): planning MRA inflow ID: 9007247260833291

Status: Released
Planning Inflow MRA scans

Inflow MRA techniques are performed without contrast agent. You can perform these MRA
scans as part of every MR examination.
⊳ With the patient positioned in the isocenter,
⊳ with a current ExamCard,
⊳ with survey or anatomical images to plan on,
► Select a MRA inflow scan protocol and add it to your ExamCard.
Skip this step, if an angio scan protocol is already part of your ExamCard.
• 3DI: 3D Inflow
• M2DI: M2D Inflow
► Select suitable images for planning.
Scroll to the slice best suited for planning. Window, zoom and pan to optimize the display of
anatomic structures needed for planning.
► Plan the stack/volume as perpendicular as possible to the vessels of interest.
Philips

► Verify that the REST slab is placed correctly to selectively suppress arterial or venous blood.
If a free REST slab is used, drag this REST slab to the vessels that need to be suppressed.
End fragment title: planning MRA inflow

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): Analysis Inflow & PCA MRA ID: 48045739915-1
Status: Released
Analysis of MRA datasets

• Use VolumeView for the calculation of MaxIPs.
See .
• Use PicturePlus for image enhancement.
See .
End fragment title: Analysis Inflow & PCA MRA
Node title (original): Examples of inflow images ID: 48006093323

Status: Released
Maximum Intensity Projections of inflow images

3D-Inflow Multichunk 3D-Inflow TONE in Multichunk 3D-Inflow
(inverse display)
Philips

M2D Gated Inflow (inverse display) Turbo Inflow
End fragment title: Examples of inflow images
More information
• about artifacts, see chapter “MRA Inflow artifacts” on page 1386
9.1.2.2 Phase Contrast Angiography (PCA)

Status: Released
PCA is based on phase differences of flowing spins compared to spins of stationary tissue. A
flow sensitive and a flow compensated (reference) scan are acquired. An automatic complex
subtraction of these scans is performed.
PCA provides two types of images:
• PCA-M images (suppressed background, bright vessels).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• FFE-M images (soft tissue images).
Node title (original): applications PCA ID: 48006156811
Status: Released
Applications
• Intra- and extracranial vessels
• Origins of vertebral and carotid arteries, pulmonary vessels
• Depiction of the aortic arch and neck vessels
• Screening vascular anomalies all over the body.
End fragment title: applications PCA
Node title (original): preparing patient PCA ID: 48006209035

Status: Released
Preparing the patient for an inflow MRA scan

2D- and 3D PCA do not require special patient preparation.
► For Gated and Cine PCA, connect VCG to the patient.
End fragment title: preparing patient PCA
Node title (original): planning PCA ID: 48006210571

Status: Released
Philips

Planning PCA scans

PCA techniques are performed without contrast agent. You can perform these MRA scans as
part of every MR examination.
⊳ With the patient positioned in the isocenter,
► Select a PCA scan protocol (with PCA in the name) and add it to your ExamCard.
► Plan the stack/volume on the vessels of interest:
• Scan orientation may be the same as the vessel plane. Benefit: Fewer slices are needed
to cover the entire vessel.
• This means that you can plan the stack/volume in vessel plane, perpendicular to them
or in any other plane.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► If you use a REST slab in the scan protocol, drag this REST slab to the vessels that need to be
suppressed.
End fragment title: planning PCA
Node title (original): Analysis Inflow & PCA MRA ID: 48045739915-2
Status: Released
Analysis of MRA datasets

• Use VolumeView for the calculation of MaxIPs.
See .
• Use PicturePlus for image enhancement.
See .
End fragment title: Analysis Inflow & PCA MRA
Node title (original): Max IPs PCA examples ID: 48006285323

Status: Released
Philips

Maximum Intensity Projections of PCA images

3D PCA of the brain: PC velocities 50 cm/s, 15 cm/s, 30 Gated PCA of renal arteries
cm/s.
End fragment title: Max IPs PCA examples
More information
• about artifacts, see
9.1.2.3 Quantitative Flow (QFlow, QF)

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Quantitative Flow measurements are performed as 2D- or 3D-Phase Contrast Angiography
(PCA) technique with data acquisition synchronized to the heart cycle.
Cardiac synchronization (retrospective triggering, alternatively also prospective or gating) with
VCG is needed.
Node title (original): applications ID: 9007247262857739
Status: Released
Applications
• Flow measurement in any vessel.
End fragment title: applications
Node title (original): Sequence ID: 9007247262859275

Status: Released
Sequence
• A flow sensitive and a flow compensated (reference) scan are acquired.
• Phase subtraction is done resulting in a flow image.
End fragment title: Sequence
Node title (original): properties ID: 9007247262860811

Status: Released
Properties
• Multiphase acquisition providing
– PCA-M images (suppressed background, bright vessels).
Philips

– FFE-M images (soft tissue images).

– PCA-P images (flow images).
• Quantitative results as velocity (cm/s) or flow rate (ml/s).
End fragment title: properties
Node title (original): preparing QFlow ID: 9007247281737099

Status: Released
Preparing the patient for a QFlow scan

► For QFlow measurements, connect VCG to the patient.
End fragment title: preparing QFlow
Node title (original): planning QFlow ID: 9007247281740299

Status: Released
Planning QFlow scans

⊳ With VCG connected to the patient,
⊳ with the patient positioned in the isocenter,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Select a QFlow scan protocol (with QFLOW in the name) and add it to your ExamCard.
► Plan the stack/volume perpendicular to the vessel of interest.
QF measurements should always be made in a plane orthogonal to the vessel. Otherwise
the area covered will be larger and the QF measurement overestimated.
► If a REST slab is used, drag this REST slab to the vessels that need to be suppressed.
End fragment title: planning QFlow
Node title (original): QFlow analysis ID: 18014446541794187

Affix: not for Multiva in China, comp: postproc Status: Released
Philips

QFlow Analysis
► Use the QFlow analysis package for the calculation of various results.
See .
End fragment title: QFlow analysis
Node title (original): Examples of QFlow images ID: 9007247287045131

Status: Released
Examples of QFlow images

QFlow QFlow with aliasing artifact
(PCA-P image) (PCA-P image)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Examples of QFlow images
More information
• about artifacts, see .
• about VCG, see .
• about the QFlow analysis package, see .
• about how to perform a QFlow analysis, see .
9.1.2.4 Contrast-Enhanced MRA (CE-MRA)

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): Basics CE-MRA ID: 48325156107

Status: Released
Contrast-enhanced MRA is based on T1 shortening of blood by means of contrast agent.

Contrast agent is injected as a bolus. The CE-MRA scan is started when the bolus arrives at the
region of interest.
End fragment title: Basics CE-MRA
Node title (original): Applications CE-MRA ID: 9007247579864331

Affix: non US Status: Released
Philips

Applications
• Carotid arteries,
• thoracic and abdominal vessels,
• peripheral vessels from abdominal aorta down to pedal arch,
• Whole Body MRA.
End fragment title: Applications CE-MRA
Node title (original): properties ID: 48033187979

Status: Released
Properties of CE-MRA
• Is minimally invasive (intravenous contrast injection).
• Provides short single breath-hold scan times.
• Can be acquired parallel to a vessel for large coverage.
• Short scan times (slices can be acquired in vessel plane).
• VCG triggering is not required in areas of pulsatile flow.
End fragment title: properties
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
9.1.2.5 TRANCE techniques

Status: Released
TRANCE, b-TRANCE and 4D-TRANCE are techniques for non-contrast enhanced angiography.
Node title (original): 4D-TRANCE only on Prodiva CX ID: 116980742667-1
Status: Released
4D-TRANCE is only available on Prodiva CX.

End fragment title: 4D-TRANCE only on Prodiva CX
Comparison of the TRANCE techniques

Application Femoral arteries, popliteal arteries Renal arteries Brain
and hand vessels
MRA technique TRANCE b-TRANCE 4D-TRANCE
Description 3D-TSE technique for non-contrast 3D-balanced-TFE technique for 3D-TFE/EPI sequence visualizing
enhanced peripheral angiography. non-contrast enhanced renal vascular morphology and dynamic
Subtraction technique. angiography. blood flow without the use of a
Inflow technique. contrast agent by labeling
circulating protons in arterial blood
b-TRANCE suppresses parenchyma
with an Arterial Spin Labeling (ASL)
and venous structures with a slab-
technique.
selective inversion prepulse and a
REST slab inferior to the imaging 4D-TRANCE can be performed
slab overlying the abdomen wall. • non-selectively.
Philips

Application Femoral arteries, popliteal arteries Renal arteries Brain

and hand vessels
Free breathing is enabled by the • selectively, focusing on a
use of navigator gating. targeted vessel.
Cardiac synchronization Triggering with VCG is needed. Triggering with VCG is needed. Not needed.
Data acquisition in It is important to consider diastole It is not necessary to consider Not applicable
cardiac cycle or systole during acquisition, since diastole or systole during
the contrast is determined by the acqusition, since the contrast is
flow velocity. determined by the inversion delay
time.
Appearance of vessels The blood flow velocity in arteries The arteries appear bright due to The arteries appear bright and the
varies, depending on the cardiac the inflow of non-saturated blood veins dark, since the signal of
phase: from the aorta within the inversion labeled blood fully decays by the
• Data acquisition in systole delay time. time it enters the veins.
results in signal voids in the
arteries (due to dephasing).
• Data acquisition in diastole
results in hyperintense signal
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

in the arteries (hardly any
dephasing).
The blood flow velocity in veins is
slow and stays relatively constant
over time.
• Data acquisition in systole and
in diastole results in white
veins.
Analysis Use VolumeView for the Use VolumeView for the Use VolumeView for the
calculation of MaxIPs. calculation of MaxIPs. calculation of MaxIPs.
Analysis ImageAlgebra is needed. ImageAlgebra is not needed, since

the background is suppressed
during acquisition and does not
need to be subtracted afterwards.
Inversion Prepulse in b-TRANCE
NOTICE
Due to the selective inversion prepulse, only a relatively small volume can be acquired.
Philips

Fig. 473: Left: The selective inversion prepulse coincides with the FOV (F). The REST slab (R) prevents venous inflow.
Right: Signal Intensity (SI) versus time (t). With the optimal TI (TIopt), the acquisitoin (acq) takes place after zero
crossing of the curve inside FOV (i). Inflow of fresh spins from outside the FOV (o) occurs.

Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
9.1.3.1 Running a CE-MRA scan upon bolus arrival (BolusTrak)

Status: Released
Node title (original): intro running BolusTrak ID: 48326568075

Status: Released
The BolusTrak functionality offers the possibility to track the bolus and immediately start the
CE-MRA scan on bolus arrival. Part of the realization are real-time reconstruction and -viewing.
End fragment title: intro running BolusTrak
Node title (original): workflow ID: 116990302219

Status: Released
1. Select a BolusTrak ExamCard which typically consists of:

• Survey scan.
• Preparation-only scan or Pre-contrast scan.
• 2D Real-Time reconstructed scan (BolusTrak scan).
• Post-contrast scan (diagnostic scan).
The survey is performed.
3. Plan the ExamCard items.
The Preparation-only scan or Pre-contrast scan is performed.
Then the ExamCard pauses.
Philips

5. Start the contrast agent injection as a bolus simultaneously with the 2D real-time
reconstructed scan:
Click Resume to do so.
6. Check the arrival of contrast agent in real-time in the Scan Preview.
7. To interrupt the 2D real-time reconstructed scan and to start the post-contrast scan, click
Proceed when you see the bolus arrive.
You can execute the post-contrast scan with breath-hold commands.
8. Perform postprocessing, e.g. subtraction of pre-contrast mask, Maximum Intensity
Projection (MaxIP).
The total procedure can be run first without contrast agent to make the patient familiar with
the examination procedure.
End fragment title: workflow
Node title (original): time schedule 3D high spatial resolution ID: 116990159627
Status: Released
Time schedule of 3D high spatial resolution scan
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 474: Time schedule for 3D high spatial resolution.
Text/Icon Description Text/Icon Description
Prep (3D) Preparation phases of 3D scan BolusTrak Preparation phases of 2D Dyn

(Prep-only or Pre-contrast scan) scan
BolusTrak 2D real-time reconstructed scan 3D Post-contrast scan
Art.Ph. Arterial Phase Start Next Scan [F8] You press Start Next Scan [F8] to
stop the BolusTrak scan and start
the next scan immediately.
Store Preparation Restore preparation
Injection Aborted scan
End fragment title: time schedule 3D high spatial resolution

Philips

9.1.3.2 Running a MobiTrak scan

Status: Released
Schematic timing diagram of the MobiTrak technique:

First, three mask stacks are acquired, then the three contrast-enhanced (CE) stacks.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
1. Patient preparation and patient and coil positioning.

2. Start the MobiTrak ExamCard:
Transverse survey scan in three stacks is performed with tabletop movement during stacks.
MaxIPs are automatically calculated.
• Two dynamic scans, each consisting of three stacks: Stack A: lower legs, Stack B: upper
legs, Stack C: abdomen. Abdominal stack with breathhold commands.
3. Plan the MobiTrak scan on the sagittal MaxIPs of the survey scan. Easiest is to align the
stacks and define a stack overlap.
Contrast bolus timing scan and test bolus injection are performed:
• Dynamic coronal scan (for visualization of entire aorta) started together with the test
bolus injection.
• To be planned just before the abdominal aortic bifurcation.
Reset the geometry.
• To determine the acquisition delay between the contrast injection and the second
dynamic scan. It equals the contrast bolus arrival time just before the abdominal aortic
bifurcation.
5. Perform MobiTrak scan first dynamic
• Acquires pre-contrast images in three stacks with table movement.
• To be used for subtraction.
6. Start the contrast agent infusion
Philips
7. MobiTrak scan second dynamic

• To be started after the acquisition delay (see contrast bolus timing scan).
• Acquires contrast-enhanced images in three stacks with table movement.
NOTICE
Always allow automatic table movement.
In this way, the scan will be started as soon as the table has reached the optimal position
without prompting for an additional |Proceed|.
8. Use the MobiView render mode to calculate multistation MPRs.

MobiView allows you to navigate through these MPRs in MPR render mode or to review
9.1.3.3 Running a MobiFlex scan

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): Schematic time diagram MobiFlex ID: 18014446836144907
Status: Released
Schematic timing diagram of the MobiFlex technique:

First, three mask stacks are acquired, then the three contrast-enhanced (CE) stacks.
End fragment title: Schematic time diagram MobiFlex
Node title (original): MobiFlex ExamCard ID: 116989945739

Status: Released
MobiFlex ExamCard
The table summarizes the scans of a typical MobiFlex ExamCard with e.g. their item properties
and their GeoLinks.
Philips

Scan EC Item properties Geo Link Part of Comparable to

anatomy
1 A Lower Legs Scan 1, dyn=1
2 A Upper Legs Scan 2, dyn=1
3 A Abdomen Scan 3, dyn=1
4 BolusTrak scan
in order to
track the bolus
arrival
5 A Abdomen Scan 3, dyn=2
6 A Upper Legs Scan 2, dyn=2
7 A Lower Legs Scan 1, dyn=2

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: MobiFlex ExamCard
Node title (original): Workflow MobiFlex ID: 116989794187

Status: Released
Workflow
1. Patient preparation and patient and coil positioning
2. Setup or select a MobiFlex ExamCard including Geometrical Links.
• 6 scans for 3 stations (8 scans for 4 stations on 3.0T) plus a BolusTrak scan.
All stations need to have the same GeoLink (same bookmark behind the sequence).
• BolusTrak scan prior to post-contrast scans (injection enabled).
• Abdominal stack with breathhold commands.
• Manual start for post-contrast scans.
NOTICE
If you like to have pre-contrast source images, integrate your subtraction postprocessing into
your ExamCard. Three types of images will be available.
To do so, disable the imaging parameter ’Immediate subtraction’ in the sequence.
3. Perform the transverse survey scan in three stacks

• Table movement during stacks.
Philips

• Automatically calculated MIPs.

4. Fuse the automatically calculated MIPs.
5. Plan the scans on fused sagittal MIP’s of the survey scan.
• Use the Scan Align button to align the scans (comparable to Stack Align).
• For shorter scan times, reduce the number of slices and increase the slice thickness.
6. Perform MobiFlex scans pre-contrast
• Acquires pre-contrast images in three scans with table movement.
• To be used for subtraction.
7. Perform the BolusTrak scan with the start of the contrast agent infusion.
8. Check the bolus arrival in the Scan Preview window.
9. Press Start Next Scan [F8] upon arrival of the bolus in the abdominal aorta to abort the
BolusTrak scan.
MobiFlex scans post-contrast are automatically started due to the ’Fast next scan’
functionality.
• Acquires contrast-enhanced images in three scans with table movement.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
Always allow automatic table movement. In this way, the scan will be started as soon as the
table has reached the optimal position without prompting for an additional |Proceed|.
10. Use the MobiView render mode to calculate multistation MPRs.

MobiView allows you to navigate through these MPRs in MPR render mode or to review
NOTICE
Undo subtraction can be done by means of a weighting factor of +1 after a subtraction having
been performed with a weighting factor of -1 .
End fragment title: Workflow MobiFlex
9.1.3.4 Running a 4D-TRAK scan

Status: NotReleased
Philips

4D-TRAK (4D Time-Resolved Angiography using Keyhole) brings a new dimension to CE-MRA. It
provides drastic scan speed increases for high spatial and temporal resolution CE-MRA scans.
4D-TRAK utilizes the 3D-FFE scan technique and combines the advantages of dS-SENSE, Keyhole
and CENTRA.
Node title (original): clinical indications 4D-TRAK ID: 129178777995-1
Affix: non-US Status: NotReleased
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/3/2021 2:07:39 PM: Artes Topics: MRA -> 4D-TRAK}
4D-TRAK might be used to aid in evaluation of brain AVM, congenital heart diseases, cardiac
function, hemodialysis shunts and in diabetes patients with short arterio-venous transit time in
lower legs/feet.
End fragment title: clinical indications 4D-TRAK
Examples of 4D-TRAK MaxIPs

4D-TRAK: 4 dynamics. From left to right: early to late dynamic.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
4D-TRAK: Different Maximum Intensity Projections of the same dynamic.

Philips

9.1.3.5 Running a TRANCE scan in the Lower Extremities

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): recommended packages - for all countries, ID: 9007316236044299
not for Multiva China Status: NotReleased
Affix: non China
Recommended Analysis packages:

• Q-Flow for flow measurement,
• ImageAlgebra for subtraction.
End fragment title: recommended packages - for all countries, not for Multiva China
To obtain an image with arteries only

1. Perform two TRANCE data acquisitions:
• one with systolic triggering, and
• one with diastolic triggering.
2. Determine the trigger delay with a flow measurement in the vessel of interest.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 475: Schematic example of a flow measurement with correct trigger delay times: in this case, the systolic trigger
delay would be about 175 ms. The diastolic trigger delay would be about 775 ms or 'longest'.
3. Subtract the resulting images. Because the veins and the background have the same signal
intensity in both the diastolic and systolic images, they are not visible after subtraction. The
result of the subtraction is an image with arteries only. Philips

Fig. 476: Diastole image (A) minus systole image (B) results in a subtraction image (C).
4. Process the subtracted data in MIP render mode to obtain a MIP of the total 3D-dataset.
Multiple stations are possible. The example shows a 2 station TRANCE of the peripheral
arteries.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 477: 2-station TRANCE scan acquired on a 1.5 T system.
9.1.3.6 Running a 4D-TRANCE scan

Status: Released
Philips

Node title (original): 4D-TRANCE only on Prodiva CX ID: 116980742667-2

Status: Released
4D-TRANCE is only available on Prodiva CX.

End fragment title: 4D-TRANCE only on Prodiva CX
Node title (original): workflow instructions ID: 116981632779

Status: Released
⊳ The patient is already positioned on the tabletop. The examination is already entered or
selected. (Cardiac synchronization is not needed.)
► Select and start the Philips 4D-TRANCE ExamCard.
An anatomical survey is performed.
► Plan the sagittal and coronal PCA surveys on the anatomical survey.
► Start and run the PCA surveys.
► Plan the 3D Inflow scan on the survey images.
► Start and run the 3D Inflow scan.
► Select the 4D-TRANCE scan of your preference:
• selective (with parameter ASL label type: free), or
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• non-selective.
► Plan the 4D-TRANCE scan on the images of the PCA scan and the 3D-Inflow scan.
► Check the Scan Information page for the Label delays 1st/delta/last in milliseconds.
When the Label delay: last is much longer than the T1 relaxation time of blood, blood signal
has already decayed during the last measurements.
To decrease the Label delay: last, reduce the number of phases.
► Open the 4D-TRANCE imaging series in MIP render mode and calculate Maximum Intensity
Projections.
End fragment title: workflow instructions
Node title (original): planning examples 4D-TRANCE ID: 116981735051

Status: Released
Philips

Examples of how to plan the 4D-TRANCE scan

Non-selective
planning
Selective planning of
the right internal
carotid artery
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
the left internal
carotid artery
the vertebrobasilar
artery
End fragment title: planning examples 4D-TRANCE
Node title (original): imaging series: non-selective 4D-TRANCE ID: 116981837323

Status: Released
Philips

Advanced Operation Diffusion Imaging
Resulting imaging series

Non-selective 4D-TRANCE:
sagittal and coronal Maximum Intensity Projections,
acquired with an phase interval of 200 ms
End fragment title: imaging series: non-selective 4D-TRANCE
More information
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• About Arterial Spin Labeling, see
• In the Online Help/Parameters: parameter Arterial Spin Labeling
• In the Online Help/Parameters: Reference tissue (about the T1 relaxation time of blood)
9.2 Diffusion Imaging

Status: NotReleased

Status: Released
Node title (original): 0 overview Diffusion (slightly different to ID: 116966107787

Scan Methods: less info in sequence) Status: Released
Diffusion sequence • Excellent non-invasive method of measuring the diffusion characteristics of

biological tissue.
• Based on Spin Echo.
Properties • Incorporates Diffusion Weighted Imaging (DWI) and Diffusion Tensor Imaging
(DTI).
• Very sensitive to motion (for Multishot scanning)
Philips

Diffusion Imaging Advanced Operation
Scan methods • Single-Shot sequences

(without PPU)
• Multishot sequences
(with PPU for cardiac synchronization and fewer artifacts)
Applications • Neuro imaging

• Abdominal imaging
End fragment title: 0 overview Diffusion (slightly different to Scan Methods: less info in sequence)
The process of diffusion of water molecules through brain tissue can be measured using MRI
with diffusion weighted scanning. The actual diffusion properties depend on the local tissue.
Furthermore, the water diffusion can be anisotropic: fast diffusion in one direction and slow
diffusion in other directions.
Node title (original): 05 - DWIBS ID: 116966032523

Status: Released
Dedicated diffusion sequences

For the dedicated diffusion sequences, Philips imaging protocols are delivered with the system.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
It is recommended to use these protocols.

Diffusion sequence Short description More information
DWIBS Diffusion Weighted Whole Body • Instructions for Use: Positioning

Imaging with Background Body Signal for Whole Body
Suppression • Instructions for Use: MobiView
analysis package
IRIS Multishot diffusion with zoom -

imaging for spine examination
The abbreviation stands for: Image
Reconstruction using Image-space
Sampling.
End fragment title: 05 - DWIBS
Node title (original): 07a - cDWI ID: 116966253451

Status: Released
Computed DWI (cDWI)

cDWI is a mathematical computation technique which calculates high b-value image from DWI
MR Images acquired with at least two different lower b-values. cDWI indirectly reduces the
total acquisition time by creating synthetic high b-value images based on the input of acquired
low-b value images rather than spending time in acquisition.
The synthetic b-value image is generated using the mono-exponential model.
Philips

Advanced Operation Diffusion Imaging
In cDWI the acquired b-values are used to extrapolate synthetic high b-value images. This
extrapolation is based on a mono-exponential signal decay model. This means that from the
acquired b-values the diffusion coefficient (D) is estimated via a mono-exponential fit, similar to
what is done in the ADC post-processing package. Together with fitting the diffusion coefficient
D, the signal without diffusion weighting (S0, for b=0) is estimated. With those estimated values
(D and S0), synthetic high b-values are extrapolated with the formula:
End fragment title: 07a - cDWI
Node title (original): 07b - cDWI ID: 116966180619

Status: Released
Philips imaging protocols suited for cDWI are provided with your system.
► To calculate the high b-value cDWI images, use the Diffusion package,
see .
End fragment title: 07b - cDWI
Node title (original): Quality improvements (similar fragment in ID: 116966342155

BOLD imaging) Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Quality improvements
To improve the quality of diffusion sequences, use any of the following packages/techniques:
• The Diffusion registration package allows you to correct for patient movement which
occurred during a dynamic scan.
– Application: Diffusion imaging in the brain.
– More information .
• EPIC Brain allows you to enable EPI geometry correction in the brain in dynamic FFE- and
SE-EPI scans, and in diffusion EPI scans.
– Application Brain only: especially DWI, DTI and BOLD imaging.
– To enable EPIC Brain, set the parameter EPI Geometry Correction to yes.
More information in the Online Help (F1): Enabling EPIC Brain
Node title (original): Non-Multiva ID: 116966442635

Status: Released
• LOVA ADC (Low Variance ADC) allows you to correct for the non-linearity of the diffusion
gradient.
– Applications: Diffusion Weighted Imaging in all anatomies. Especially meant for large
FOV, e.g. abdomen.
– To enable LOVA ADC, set the parameter ADC correction to yes.
More information in the Online Help (F1): Enabling LOVA ADC
Philips

Diffusion Imaging Advanced Operation
– LOVA ADC is not available on all MRI system types.

End fragment title: Non-Multiva
End fragment title: Quality improvements (similar fragment in BOLD imaging)
9.2.2 Scanning DWI and DTI sequences

Status: Released
Node title (original): 01 - preparing patient diffusion ID: 116966694283

Status: Released
Preparing the patient for a diffusion scan

► Since DW sequences tend to be very sensitive to e.g. motion of the head and brain tissue
due to blood pulsation, patient preparation and good immobilization are crucial for good
results.
► For Multishot sequences, connect PPU to the patient.
End fragment title: 01 - preparing patient diffusion
Node title (original): 02 - planning diff ID: 116966777099

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Selecting diffusion scans

► Select a diffusion scan protocol (with DWI or DTI in the name) and add it to your ExamCard.
Skip this step, if a diffusion scan protocol is already part of your ExamCard.
• DWI: Diffusion Weighted Imaging
• DTI: Diffusion Tensor Imaging
End fragment title: 02 - planning diff

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24270
WARNING
For ADC measurements the field-of-view (FOV) must be positioned in the isocenter of the
magnet to avoid misinterpretations due to incorrect ADC calculations.
Node title (original): 03 - Analysis diffusion - referral to Diff, ID: 116966859915

DiffReg (for all systems in all countries) Status: Released
Philips

Advanced Operation Perfusion Imaging
Analysis of diffusion datasets

• For the registration of the datasets as preparation of the analysis, use the
DiffusionRegistration package,
see .
• To calculate parametric maps (e.g. ADC-, eADC-, FA-map), use the Diffusion package,
see .
End fragment title: 03 - Analysis diffusion - referral to Diff, DiffReg (for all systems in all countries)
Node title (original): 04 - Analysis diffusion - referral to FT (NOT ID: 116966522635

for Multiva in China, comp: postproc) Status: Released
• To track fibers for diffusion tensor data with at least 6 diffusion directions, use the
FiberTrak package ,
see .
End fragment title: 04 - Analysis diffusion - referral to FT (NOT for Multiva in China, comp: postproc)
9.3 Perfusion Imaging

Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Affix: identical IFU & Scan Methods ID: 116977628043
The term perfusion refers to the process of nutritive delivery of arterial blood to a capillary bed
in tissue.
There are different methods in MRI to measure tissue perfusion in vivo:
1. One method is based on the injection of a paramagnetic contrast agent that changes the
magnetic susceptibility of blood.
– Contrast agent will be injected as a bolus.
– Simultaneously, a fast dynamic scan will be started.
– This dynamic scan will be evaluated with postprocessing packages.
– Temporal resolution of the acquisition influences slope and peak amplitude of the bolus
passage.
2. The other method is based on Arterial Spin Labeling (ASL) where arterial blood is
magnetically tagged before it enters the tissue of interest. The amount of labeling is
measured and compared to a control obtained without spin labeling.
9.3.2 Basic T1 Perfusion

Affix: not for Multiva in China ID: 128989438859
Philips

Perfusion Imaging Advanced Operation
9.3.2.1 Basic T1 Perfusion

T1 perfusion studies are based on the fact that gadolinium-based contrast agent shortens the
T1 relaxation times of tissues.
Node title (original): Acquisition Basic T1 Perfusion ID: 116978491019
Status: Released
Acquisition
To observe the changes of the T1 relaxation time and in such a way the contrast-uptake, run a
dynamic T1w scan, e.g. 3D T1-FFE or -TFE scan.
End fragment title: Acquisition Basic T1 Perfusion
Node title (original): Applications T1 perfusion ID: 9007316233000715

Applications
Typical applications are contrast-uptake studies in the body, e.g. abdomen and thorax, and
neurology. { Heuvel, Martina van den, 5/19/2016 7:23:49 AM: ask Marco Nijenhuis to review,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
optionally Lars van Loon}

End fragment title: Applications T1 perfusion
Node title (original): Perfusion Contrast agent bolus injection ID: 116978627083-1
Status: Released
Contrast agent bolus injection

Contrast agent has to be injected as a bolus.
End fragment title: Perfusion Contrast agent bolus injection
Node title (original): Analysis T1 perfusion ID: 116978763147

Status: Released
Analysis
Use the Basic T1 Perfusion package for evaluation of the scan.
See .
Node title (original): part of Analysis Perfusion ID: 116978898827-1
Status: Released
This package calculates functional and parameter maps for any kind of contrast-uptake dynamic
study. New imaging series can be easily generated and stored.
Analyses are stored in the current ExamCard and performed automatically when the ExamCard
is executed again. For more information, see .
End fragment title: part of Analysis Perfusion
End fragment title: Analysis T1 perfusion
9.3.3 Neuro T2* Perfusion

Philips

Affix: not for Multiva in China ID: 128989440779

9.3.3.1 Neuro T2* Perfusion

Paramagnetic contrast agents influence the local magnetic field and reduce the T2* of
surrounding tissue.
Neuro T2* Perfusion is also referred to as Dynamic Susceptibility Contrast (DSC) imaging.
Node title (original): Acquisition Neuro T2* Perfusion ID: 116979276043
Status: Released
Acquisition
To observe the changes of the T2* relaxation time, a sequence which is sensitive to T2*
changes has to be executed, e.g.:
• PRESTO scan (TE larger than TR).
• Multishot FFE-EPI scan with relatively long TE.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Bolus passage in the brain takes approximately 10 s. The minimum temporal resolution should
be 2 s.
End fragment title: Acquisition Neuro T2* Perfusion
Node title (original): Properties Neuro T2* Perfusion ID: 116979412107

Status: Released
Properties
With such a sequence, it is possible to image microscopic flow, i.e. flow at the capillary level.
• Signal decreases during bolus passage (due to reduced T2* of surrounding tissue).
• Signal restores partially directly after the passage.
• Contrast changes are proportional to the concentration of contrast agent.
End fragment title: Properties Neuro T2* Perfusion
Node title (original): Applications Neuro T2* Perfusion ID: 116979548171

Status: Released
Applications
Typical applications are cerebral perfusion studies:
• Assessment of tissue viability and function.
• Characterization of disease processes with microvascular alterations as e.g. lesion
characterization.
End fragment title: Applications Neuro T2* Perfusion
Node title (original): Perfusion Contrast agent bolus injection ID: 116978627083-2
Status: Released
Philips

Contrast agent bolus injection

Contrast agent has to be injected as a bolus.
End fragment title: Perfusion Contrast agent bolus injection
Node title (original): Analysis Neuro T2* Perfusion ID: 116979684235

Status: Released
Analysis
Use the Neuro T2* Perfusion package for evaluation of the scan.
See .
Node title (original): part of Analysis Perfusion ID: 116978898827-2
Status: Released
This package calculates functional and parameter maps for any kind of contrast-uptake dynamic
study. New imaging series can be easily generated and stored.
Analyses are stored in the current ExamCard and performed automatically when the ExamCard
is executed again. For more information, see .
End fragment title: part of Analysis Perfusion
End fragment title: Analysis Neuro T2* Perfusion
9.3.4 Arterial Spin Labeling (ASL)

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: NotReleased
9.3.4.1 Arterial Spin Labeling (ASL)

Affix: as was in Addendum ID: 9007316232519819
Node title (original): intro ASL in IFU ID: 52897089547

Status: Released
Arterial Spin Labeling (ASL) is a method to obtain brain perfusion imaging without the use of
contrast agent. ASL uses magnetically labeled blood in the arterial blood stream as an
endogenous trace.
The ASL sequence consists of a labeling and a control part. Perfusion images are automatically
generated by subtracting the label images from the control images.
End fragment title: intro ASL in IFU
Node title (original): image control - label ID: 52897359627

Status: Released
Philips

Control - Label = Perfusion (example of 3 dynamics)
Perfusion estimation relies on the signal changes (1%-2%).

End fragment title: image control - label
Node title (original): Applications ASL ID: 52897159947

Status: Released
Applications
• Cerebral perfusion studies.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• MR Angiography in the brain, see .
End fragment title: Applications ASL
Node title (original): Basic ASL sequence ID: 52897293067

Status: Released
Basic ASL-sequence
The ASL sequence is a dynamic sequence. Depending on the clinical question, you can perform
ASL as single-phase or as multi-phase sequence using different ASL techniques.
Philips

Single-Phase ASL - using the pCASL method Multi-Phase ASL - using the STAR method
1. Labeling and control 1. Labeling and control

2. Post-label delay 2. Label delay
3. Image acquisition 3. Image acquisition
4. Phase interval
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
In multiphase ASL, perfusion is measured at multiple time points

after labeling: the same area is imaged multiple times after
labeling (or control). This results in multiple perfusion images.
1. Pre-saturation
2. Labeling/Control 1. Pre-saturation
3. Post-saturation 2. Labeling/Control
4. Read-out 3. Post-saturation
• post LD - post label delay 4. Read-out
• Lab Dur - Label duration • Ph1, 2, 3, 4 - Phase 1, 2, 3, 4
• LD1, 2, 3, 4 - Label delay 1, 2, 3, 4
– where LD1 is displayed as Label delay 1st on the Scan
Information page
– where LD4 is displayed as Label delay last on the Scan
Information page
• PhInt - Phase interval
Philips

Single-Phase ASL - using the pCASL method Multi-Phase ASL - using the STAR method
where the phase interval is displayed as Label delay delta on
the Scan Information page
• Dur - Duration of label and acquisition cycle
End fragment title: Basic ASL sequence
Node title (original): recon ASL ID: 52897489803

Status: Released
Reconstruction
Depending on the settings of ASL imaging parameters, different types of images are
reconstructed and available for viewing.
Image type Available? How to proceed?
Subtracted imaging series ASL scans automatically provide Evaluate the subtracted imaging
subtracted imaging series. series with ImageView.
ASL source images ASL source images (label, control) are

not available by default. To have these ASL source images
available, set the parameter ASL
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

source images on the Postproc tab
to last control or all.
Evaluate the ASL source images with
ImageView.
Normalized pCASL images ASL normalized pCASL images are not To acquire normalized pCASL images,
(Perfusion data is normalized by a available by default. set the parameter ASL -> normalized
proton density weighted scan.) on the Dyn/Ang tab to yes.
This is the default setting in Philips
3D pCASL preset procedures.
End fragment title: recon ASL
More information
• In the Online Help/ Parameters: Parameter Arterial Spin Labeling .
9.3.5 Planning and running Single-Phase ASL using pCASL

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): ASL vs 3D ASL ID: 52913617035

Status: Released
This workflow applies for:

• 3D pCASL:
3D pCASL acquisition with GRASE read-out, providing normalized images, using a 4 pulse
background suppression scheme.
Philips

• pCASL:
Multislice pCASL with EPI read-out, using a 2 pulse background suppression scheme.
End fragment title: ASL vs 3D ASL
Node title (original): workflow pCASL ID: 52896921099

Status: Released
► Select, start and run a multi-stack anatomical survey.
► Select, start and run a 2D-PCA survey.
► Select and plan the pCASL scan on the sagittal images of the 2D-PCA and the anatomical
survey:
Make sure to exclude the carotid siphon (indicated by the white arrow in the image).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► If needed, adjust the value of the parameter ASL post label delay according to the
recommended values in the table below.
► Start and run the pCASL scan.
⇨ When the scan is finished, subtracted imaging series are automatically calculated.
► View the subtracted images with ImageView.
Depending on the setting of the ASL parameters ASL normalized on the DynAng tab and
ASL source images on the Postproc tab, subtracted images with or without normalization
are available, and possibly also ASL source images.
► If ASL normalized images are available,
• you can view them in color or in black and white. Right-click on the image to change the
display.
• you can get numeric results. Draw a ROI on the normalized image.
Philips

End fragment title: workflow pCASL
Node title (original): recommended values post-label delay ID: 9007249412128395

pCASL Status: Released
Recommended values for the post label delay in pCASL

neonates 2000 ms
children 1500 ms
healthy subject < 70 years 1800 ms
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

healthy subject > 70 years 2000 ms
Adult clinical patient 2000 ms

End fragment title: recommended values post-label delay pCASL
9.3.6 Planning and running Multi-Phase ASL using STAR

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): workflow STAR (based on workflow pCASL) ID: 52896646923
Status: Released
► Select, start and run a multi-stack anatomical survey.
► Select, start and run a 2D-PCA survey.
► Select and plan the STAR scan on the sagittal images of the 2D-PC and the anatomical
survey:
Philips

Cardiac Imaging Advanced Operation
► Adjust the value of the parameters ASL label delay and ASL phase interval.
Example images with different label delays:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Start and run the STAR scan.

⇨ When the scan is finished, subtracted imaging series are automatically calculated.
► View the subtracted images with ImageView.
With STAR, background suppression varies over slices due to different label delay times
depending on the slice position.
End fragment title: workflow STAR (based on workflow pCASL)
9.4 Cardiac Imaging

Status: NotReleased
Philips

Advanced Operation Cardiac Imaging
9.4.1 Planning the Cardiac Views

Affix: still missing, needs to be cleaned up ID: 128990396043
Node title (original): Intro for Map node ID: 129046549771

Status: NotReleased
Planning the cardiac views is complex, because angulations in the three different directions
could be necessary to visualize the different connections between chambers.
Here you find guidelines for planning the cardiac views and for using the planning tools.
Useful tools to facilitate planning are 3-Point Planning, and PlanAlign. You can also plan on
movies.
Important is to follow a systematic way to create the different views: Always plan perpendicular
on the previous scan.
End fragment title: Intro for Map node
9.4.1.1 Guidelines for the Basic Views

Affix: Poster ID: 9007316225929483
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

This illustration shows how to obtain the different basic views.
S stands for Setup, C for Chambers & Outflow, and V for Valves.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Start with a transverse image through the left ventricle.

► Define the RAO (Right Anterior Oblique) or VLA (Vertical Long Axis) view on the transverse
image by selecting a line through apex and centre of mitral valve.
► Define an approximate Four Chamber or HLA (Horizontal Long Axis) view on the RAO by
defining a line through the apex and centre of the mitral valve.
► Define the Short Axis view, three methods are available:
Place a line orthogonal to the (long axis) line through the apex and the centre of the mitral
valve (this is the most accurate method).
Place a line parallel to the mitral valve (this method makes it easier to decide whether to
include the basal slice/s during post-processing).
Philips

Place a line orthogonal to the septum (this is the best method for Right Ventricle view).
► From the Short Axis view, the true Four Chamber view can be defined by placing a line
through the centre of the Left Ventricular Cavity and the inferior margin of the right
ventricle.
9.4.1.2 Guidelines for the Outflow Tracts

Status: NotReleased
Right Two Chamber (R2CH) view

• Can be derived from the true Four Chamber view.
• Can be defined by placing a line through the tricuspid valve parallel to the septum.
Left Two Chamber (L2CH) view

• Can be defined by placing a line through the apex and the center of the mitral valve.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Left Ventricular Outflow Tract (LVOT)
• An additional basal short axis scan can be defined which is used to plan the Left Ventricular
Outflow Tract (LVOT) by placing a line through the Left Ventricle and Aorta.
Right Ventricular Outflow Tract (RVOT)

• Is best planned on a transverse view that shows the pulmonary artery valves.
Pulmonary valve
• Is planned on the RVOT by placing a line through the pulmonary valve seen already on the
RVOT view.
Tricuspid valve
• Is planned on the R2CH by placing a line through the tricuspid valves seen on the R2CH
view.
Mitral valve
• Is planned on the L2CH by placing a line through the mitral valves already seen on the L2CH
view.
Aortic valve
• Is planned on the LVOT by placing a line through the aortic valves already seen on the LVOT.
Philips

9.4.1.3 Abbreviations of Cardiac Anatomy

Status: NotReleased
Image sets (Black blood or white blood in 3 orientations: Sag, Cor, Tra).
Abbreviation Explanation
AA Ascending aorta
Arch Aortic arch
DA Descending aorta
IVC Inferior vena cava
LA Left atrium
LB Left bronchus
LPA Left pulmonary artery
LPV Left pulmonary vein
LSPV Left superior pulmonary vein

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
LV Left ventricle
MPA Main pulmonary artery
PA Pulmonary artery
RA Right atrium
RB Right bronchus
RPA Right pulmonary artery
RPV Right pulmonary vein
RV Right ventricle
SVC Superior vena cava
Tab. 41: List of Abbreviations
9.4.1.4 PlanAlign
Status: NotReleased
PlanAlign is developed for applications which require double-oblique scans, for example cardiac
imaging.
Node title (original): PlanAlign = powerful tool ID: 129073865867
Status: NotReleased
PlanAlign is a powerful tool to avoid in-plane rotation and to avoid SENSE artifacts.
End fragment title: PlanAlign = powerful tool
Philips
You access PlanAlign as an imaging parameter on the Geometry tab.

Node title (original): when PlanAlign is set to yes ID: 129073957003

Status: NotReleased
With PlanAlign enabled, any modification of the angulations results in a recalculation of the
angulations such that the resulting images show no in-plane angulation.
• Transverse scans are aligned such that the horizontal image direction (RL) is in a non-
angulated coronal plane.
• Sagittal scans are aligned such that the vertical image direction (FH) is in a non-angulated
coronal plane.
• Coronal scans are aligned such that the vertical image direction (FH) is in a non-angulated
sagittal plane.
Double angulated coronal scans tending to sagittal are aligned like sagittal scans. This
means that the scans are aligned such that the vertical image direction (FH) is in a non-
angulated coronal plane.
End fragment title: when PlanAlign is set to yes
9.4.1.5 Defining an Irregular Plane with 3-Point Planning

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

3-Point Planning (also referred to as 3 Points PlanScan, 3PPS) is a tool which helps to define an
irregular plane. The plane is determined by the placement of three points on two or more
images of different orientations.
► On the Plan Toolbar, click 3-Point Planning .

⇨ The 3-Point Planning window opens.
3-Point Planning
► To place the three points, click three times in any of the three images selected in the
planning view ports.
To change a point, click on the corresponding button on the 3-Point

Planning window, then click in the image to define the new point.
► To restart, click 3-Point Planning .
► To create the plane based on the 3 points, click 3-Point Planning .

Philips

9.4.1.6 Planning on Movies

Status: Released
You can plan on movies which is especially helpful in Cardiac imaging.

► On the Plan tab, hover over the bottom of a viewport.

Status: Released
Button Description

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

Button Description
Toggle Auto Hide:

/

9.4.2 Cardiac Function

Affix: non US ID: 128990769163
9.4.2.1 Suited Scans
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Affix: non US ID: 9007316221775755
Cine scans are typically used to study wall motion and ventricular function. A variety of scan
methods are available for cine scans. However, balanced FFE is the preferred method for
breath-hold cine scans.
9.4.2.2 Stress-Test (Physical or Dobutamine)

Status: NotReleased
The workflow as presented here is based on the standardized acquisition guidelines by the
SCMR (Society for Cardio-vascular Magnetic Resonance). More information can be found on the
website of the SCMR: www.scmr.org
The intention of this section is only to give an illustration of how the workflow may look like in
clinical practice. Philips Healthcare cannot take liability for dose regimen, infusion schemes etc.
Coronary artery disease can result in inducible ischemia. One of the first signs for myocardial
ischemia is myocardial wall motion abnormality that occurs much earlier than ECG changes or
anginal pain. Cine scans acquired under stress conditions can therefore help to identify these
inducible ischemic areas.
The left ventricle is divided into 17 segments following the standards suggested by the
American Society of Echocardiography. For all the segments the wall motion is classified as
normal, hypokinetic, akinetic or dyskinetic.
Philips

Label Heart segment Label Heart segment Label Heart segment
1 basal anterior 7 mid anterior 13 apical anterior
2 basal anteroseptal 8 mid anteroseptal 14 apical septal
3 basal inferoseptal 9 mid inferoseptal 15 apical inferior
4 basal inferior 10 mid inferior 16 apical lateral
5 basal inferolateral 11 mid inferolateral 17 apex
6 basal anterolateral 12 mid anterolateral
Tab. 43: Labeling of Heart Segments

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
9.4.2.3 Examining the Cardiac Function

Status: NotReleased
9.4.2.3.1 Workflow
Affix: non US ID: 9007316221908747
All 17 segments can be covered using a combination of three SA slices, a 4CH slice and a L2CH
slice.
Step Scan / Action
1 Survey scan
2 L2CH- and 4CH-scans
3 Three-slice SA scan
4 Dobutamine infusion
5 Three-slice SA-, L2CH- and 4CH-scans
6 Dobutamine infusion
Philips

Step Scan / Action
7 Three-slice SA-, L2CH- and 4CH-scans
8 Next stress levels: Repeat the steps 7 and 8 for each stress level.
Tab. 44: Workflow Overview
Workflow Step-by-Step
► Perform the survey scan.
► Plan and perform the L2CH- and 4CH-scans following the approach as described in the
section Planning the cardiac views .
► Plan the three-slice SA scan on the 4CH view such that the most apical slice covers
segments 13-16, the mid slice covers segments 7-12 and the most basal slice covers
segments 1-6.
• Set the number of slices to five for planning purposes only.
• Select an end-systolic image.
• Position the slices: first one on apex, fifth through mitral valve.
• Set the number of slices back to three: leaving the slice position and slice gap
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

unchanged, these three slices now cover the desired cardiac segments.
► Perform this scan.
Fig. 478: Planning three SA slices on end-systolic 4CH view.
► Start the Dobutamine infusion to stress the patient’ s heart.

► Repeat the Three-slice SA-, the 4-CH- and the L2CH-scans after 3 min. of infusion.
► Increase the Dobutamine infusion rate to reach the next stress level.
► Repeat the Three-slice SA-, the 4-CH- and the L2CH-scans after 3 min. of infusion.
► Repeat the two previous steps for each stress level.
► If at the maximum stress level the sub-maximum age-predicted heart rate (= 0.85 x (220 -
age)) is not reached, give atropine and repeat the three scans again.
Philips

NOTICE
The patient’s cardiac frequency will most likely vary depending on the stress level.
For each stress level the cardiac frequency should be adjusted.
When the TFE shot mode is set to ‘default’ this change in heart rate will not lead to a change
in breath-hold duration or number of phases.
Make sure that the cine scans tolerate a certain variation in heart rate. This can be achieved
by setting the R-R window range to 25%, 35%.
9.4.3 Myocardial Perfusion (Temporal Enhancement)


3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Affix: Myocardial Perfusion (Temporal Enhancement) ID: 9007316226977035

MRI can be used to analyze myocardial perfusion using first pass contrast passage enabling the
detection of perfusion abnormalities.
To perform good quality perfusion scans with a high temporal resolution, dynamic slices have
to be acquired as quickly as possible. In order to carefully study the contrast uptake all dynamic
scans belonging to one slice should be performed at the same moment within the cardiac cycle.
That is the reason that cardiac perfusion scans are cardiac triggered.
Obvious compromises have to be made regarding the image quality, or more specific, spatial
resolution. The aim is now to find the right balance between the number of slices, the spatial
resolution and the temporal resolution.
Following the standards suggested by the American Society of Echocardiography the left
ventricle can be divided into 17 segments.
A three-slice approach as presented in the Cookbook is sufficient to cover 16 out of those 17
segments: the highest possible spatial resolution is chosen where three slices fit in a single
heart beat. The number of dynamic scans and thus the number of R-R intervals determine the
total scan time.
The aim of perfusion scanning is to identify inducible ischemia areas which often (in the
presence of coronary artery stenoses) only occurs under stress conditions. Therefore the
perfusion scan should be done both in rest and during stress, such as pharmacological
vasodilatation. This can be achieved using e.g. adenosine or dipyridamole.
Philips

9.4.3.2 Examining Myocardial Perfusion

Status: NotReleased
The workflow as presented here is based on the standardized acquisition guidelines by the
SCMR (Society for Cardio-vascular Magnetic Resonance). More information can be found on the
website of the SCMR: www.scmr.org
The intention of this section is only to give an illustration of how the workflow for myocardial
perfusion may look like in clinical practice. Philips Healthcare cannot take liability for dose
regimen, infusion schemes etc.
Survey scan
► First perform a survey scan followed by a 4CH view and a L2CH view under rest conditions.
Plan the three-slice SA scan such that each slice covers six segments of the left ventricle .
Stress perfusion
The next step is first to perform the stress perfusion. Stress is done first to have the best image
quality for the most important scan since there is no enhancement yet due to earlier contrast
injections.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Plan the perfusion scan exactly the same as the three-slice SA scan to cover 16 out of the 17
segments.
• To make sure that no backfolding occurs and to avoid fold-over artifacts, first run the
scan without contrast agent. This is especially important if a (b)TFE SENSE scan is used.
If necessary, increase the FOV.
• During the test scan also the breath-hold instruction can be practiced with the patient.
Although adenosine mainly acts as a vasodilator also the heart rate increases. Therefore
perform the scan with an entered heart rate higher than the initial heart rate. The simplest
choice available is reducing the in-plane resolution. Decreasing the matrix size ensures that all
three slices still fit into the R-R interval.
Adenosine infusion
After the test scan the infusion of adenosine is started to stress the patient’s heart. In the
Cookbook an infusion rate of 140 ig/kg/min is suggested for maximum six minutes. During
stress examinations, monitoring of the patient is mandatory. Among blood pressure, pulse
oximetry and symptoms also the heart rhythm is monitored.
Contrast injection
The best results for contrast uptake curves are obtained when a short compact bolus injection
is used. The Cookbook suggests a Gd-DTPA contrast dosage 0.05 mmol/kg body weight applied
with an injection rate of 4 ml/s. A saline flush of 20 ml with the same injection rate is necessary
to facilitate a compact bolus passage.
Philips

Performing perfusion scan

► Start the perfusion scan 4 minutes after the start of the adenosine infusion.
When the perfusion scan is running and the first images appear in the Scan Preview
window, start the contrast injection.
► Carefully monitor the contrast arrival. At the desired moment give a breath-hold
instruction.
The breath-hold command is needed to ease postprocessing afterwards.
Ask the patient to hold their breath as long as possible when the contrast agent is to arrive
in the right ventricle which in most of the patients happens roundabout after twice inhaling
and exhaling. If the patient cannot hold breath anymore, let them breathe once and then
hold breath again. Alternatively, let the patient breathe shallowly after they cannot hold
breath anymore.
1 Start scan
2 Injection contrast
3 Breath-hold command
4 End scan
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
A Contrast arrival RV (right ventricle)
B Contrast arrival LV (left ventricle)
C Enhancement myocardium
Fifteen minutes after termination of the adenosine infusion the heart has recovered from the
applied stress. Then the perfusion scan can be repeated during rest.
Example of myocardial perfusion scans at rest and at adenosine stress
Image analysis and postprocessing

After excluding the left ventricular cavity and the pericardium, the myocardium is divided into 6
equiangular segments per slice following the standards suggested by the American Society of
Echocardiography.
Philips

9.4.4 Late Enhancement (Spatial Enhancement)


Status: NotReleased
Different MRI techniques can be used to visualize injured myocardium.

• Cine scans are used to look at wall thickness.
• Low doses dobutamine stress examinations have the potential in differentiating between
viable myocardium (stunned and hibernating) and non-viable myocardium.
• Only the late contrast enhancement scans have the potential of visualizing the transmural
extend of an infarction.
Damaged cells take up contrast agent while in viable myocardium the contrast agent stays
extracellular. The contrast washout for damaged cells evolves much slower than the washout of
the extracellular contrast only. After a while the contrast concentration for viable myocardium
is much lower than for injured myocardium. And thus the T1 relaxation rates evolve at different
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

rates. An inversion pulse is then applied and the inversion time is chosen such that the normal
myocardium appears black, maximizing the contrast between normal (black) and injured
(white) myocardium.
Example of late enhancement
scans.
The inversion pulse is used to

cancel out any signal from the
myocardium. Infarcted areas
where still contrast is visible
show high signal intensities.
a - Enhanced myocardium curve
b - (unenhanced) myocardium
Philips

9.4.4.2 Late Enhancement Sequence

Status: NotReleased
The intention of this section is only to give an illustration of how the workflow for viability
examinations using late contrast enhancement looks like in clinical practice. Philips Healthcare
cannot take liability for dose regimen, infusion schemes etc.
Prior to performing the viability scan, it is necessary to wait until the contrast agent has cleared
from the (non-damaged) myocardium. This usually takes 10 minutes. During this time any kind
of other scans can be performed, such as series of cine scans. 10 minutes after the (last)
contrast injection the late enhancement scans can be performed.
Characteristics of the Late Enhancement sequence

This sequence is a single-phase multishot TFE scan that utilizes a single 180º-inversion prepulse.
• Acquire the shots in mid-diastole to keep the cardiac motion as small as reasonable.
• The inversion delay time to cancel the normal myocardium is patient dependent and can
not be calculated on beforehand. It also depends on the time after the contrast injection. A
longer time after injection results in a slower T1 relaxation and less contrast in the (non-
damaged) myocardium. Longer inversion times should be used. Usually the inversion time
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
varies in a range of 200 to 300 ms.

There are three ways to find out the patient specific inversion time:
1. Use a “Look-Locker” sequence.
This cine scan utilizes a single inversion pulse applied once every heart beat immediately
after the R-peak. T1 relaxation is made visible over the individual cardiac phases.
2. By trial and error: Start with a TI of 200 ms, then increase the TI using small steps of 20 or
30 ms.
3. Change the inversion delay in real-time during an interactive scan. Make sure that the scan
is running in continuous mode. { Heuvel, Martina van den, 7/22/2021 12:22:50 PM: pretty
sure that this is not correct anymore with Artes!}The inversion time depends on the steady
state that is reached over multiple heartbeats.
Remember that the inversion time found is valid only for a small period of time. Due to the
washout of the contrast media from the myocardium the T1 relaxation rate decreases slowly
over time.
‘Look-Locker’ technique to
quickly find the zero crossing
point of the myocardium within a
breath-hold.
9.4.4.3 Phase Sensitive Inversion Recovery (PSIR)

Status: NotReleased
Philips

The PSIR (“AutoViability”) IR-TFE sequence can be used for late enhancement assessment. The
advantage of this technique is that it is less sensitive to suboptimal inversion delays.
PSIR is a 2 heart-beat sequence

PSIR needs 2 cardiac cycles (per inversion prepulse).
• It is more robust against variations in heart rate, and the SNR and CNR will both be better
compared to a single heart-beat technique.
• It is intrinsically slower than single heart-beat techniques.
• The loss in imaging speed can be compensated for by using SENSE.
In the PSIR sequence, the second heartbeat is used for determination of the phase. The
inversion pulse is given only once every two heartbeats, so that the acquisition in the second
heartbeat has had more time for relaxation (so that the magnetization of all tissues should be
positive again), and can be used as a reference.
PSIR provides Corrected Real Images

The “CR” image type (Corrected Real) is the desired final phase corrected image.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
PSIR and imaging parameters: not all can be combined, others are mandatory.
Halfscan and partial echo cannot be used with PSIR.
SENSE can be used with PSIR.
CLEAR is mandatory with PSIR.
Related parameters
• TFE prepulse (no, saturate, invert)
• PSIR (no, yes)
• Flip angle (default: 5o)
The flip angle parameter “Flip angle (deg)” specifies the flip angle of the 2nd TFE shot in the
2nd heart beat, which is typically taken smaller than the flip angle in the 1st heart beat (to
prevent saturation).
9.4.4.4 Tips & Tricks

Affix: PSIR ID: 9007316228482059
Philips

Optimal inversion delay time

PSIR uses two RR intervals per inversion pulse. Compared to enhancement techniques which
use a single RR interval per inversion pulse, a longer TI should be used for PSIR (because there is
more time for relaxation). It’s always better to use an inversion delay time which is a bit too
long (with positive myocardium). This will result in optimal contrast between normal and
scarred myocardium. This is less important for PSIR scans, where a too short TI still results in
optimal contrast between the normal and scarred myocardium in the CR-image.
2D versus 3D
PSIR can be used for 2D and 3D, but for practical reasons, PSIR is mainly useful for 2D imaging.
This is mainly because of breathhold times.
Navigator echo technique and PSIR

When using navigators with PSIR, the following happens with respect to the acceptance of RR
intervals.
• If the first RR interval is accepted, also the second one will be accepted.
• If the first RR interval is rejected, also the second one will be rejected.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
9.4.5 T1 Mapping
Status: NotReleased

Affix: T1 mapping ID: 9007316230569611
Node title (original): Intended use and Main properties ID: 9007316230811147
Status: NotReleased
T1 mapping is a method that provides T1 maps of the myocardium. It is based on the Modified
Look-Locker Inversion Recovery (MOLLI) technique.
T1 maps are parametric images calculated pixel-wise where the pixel value represents the T1
value per pixel.
Application
• Myocardial tissue.
Diffuse myocardial fibrosis and other remodeling of the extracellular space are common
pathological features of many cardiac diseases. These changes can be measured non-invasively
with MRI through changes in native and enhanced myocardial T1 relaxation times.
Philips

What are the main properties of T1 mapping?

Node title (original): properties t1 mapping ID: 9007316230961035
Status: NotReleased
• T1 maps are provided for native and enhanced scans.

Optimized acquisition schemes are available which take the different T1 values in native
and enhanced scans into account.
• Images are usually acquired in standard cardiac planes.
• Cardiac triggering and breathhold technique are used to compensate for cardiac and
respiratory motion.
• T1 mapping is enabled with the imaging parameter T1 mapping.
• Philips native and enhanced imaging protocols utilizing T1 mapping are delivered with the
MR system (Folder: Heart->Function non-cine->Mapping). It is recommended to use these
protocols. They make use of acquisition schemes that are optimized for long (native) and
short (enhanced) T1 times based on literature findings.
End fragment title: properties t1 mapping
End fragment title: Intended use and Main properties
Node title (original): References ID: 9007316231142027

Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

References
For more information about T1 mapping, see literature.
End fragment title: References
More information
• Imaging parameter T1 mapping in Online Help system (F1 key)
• Background information in Online Help system (F1 key)
9.4.5.2 Performing an Examination with T1 Mapping

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): Workflow ID: 9007316231291915

Status: NotReleased
Patient positioning
► Position the patient on the tabletop with VCG, respiratory belt, cardiac coil, headset, and
nurse call.
► Explain and practice the breathhold procedure with the patient.
The quality of the T1 maps directly depends on the quality of the breathhold.
► Instruct the patient not to touch the VCG module and cables.
► Check the quality of the VCG signal prior to scanning.
Running the native T1 scan
Philips
► Enter the examination data at the console.

► Select a cardiac ExamCard with native and enhanced T1 mapping imaging protocols,
preferably in more than one imaging plane.
Images are usually acquired in standard cardiac planes.
► Enter the cardiac frequency in the Exam Dashboard.
► Start, and eventually plan and resume the ExamCard.
The survey and the cardiac scans are performed.
► Give breathhold instructions during the native T1 mapping scan.
• The breathhold takes around 11 seconds.
Since the number of ECG triggered images must be a whole number, the acquisition and
recovery periods are rounded to the nearest multiple of the RR-period to ensure an
adequate duration and hence the breathhold time is 11 to 12 seconds. The resulting
number of images is different depending on the heart rate of the patient.
• For patients with a heart rate of 60 beats per minute and a RR-interval of 1 second, 8
images are acquired with the native acquisition scheme.
With a higher heart rate, the RR interval is shorter, and more images are acquired
during the breathhold.
Node title (original): contrast agent ID: 9007316231474059
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Affix: non US Status: NotReleased
Administering contrast agent

► Inject the contrast agent.
End fragment title: contrast agent
Running the enhanced T1 scan

► Wait at least 15 minutes before you start the enhanced T1 mapping scan.
► Give breathhold instructions during the enhanced T1 mapping scan.
• The breathhold takes around 12 seconds.
Since the number of ECG triggered images must be a whole number, the acquisition and
recovery periods are rounded to the nearest multiple of the RR-period to ensure an
adequate duration and hence the breathhold time is 11 to 13 seconds. The resulting
number of images is different depending on the heart rate of the patient.
• For patients with a heart rate of 60 beats per minute and a RR-interval of 1 second, 9
images are acquired with the enhanced acquisition scheme.
With a higher heart rate, the RR interval is shorter and more images are acquired during
the breathhold.
Viewing the parametric maps
► View the native and the enhanced T1 mapping imaging series.
These series contain:
• acquired images with different inversion delay times,
Philips
• calculated T1 maps, labeled /T1map,

• confidence maps (goodness-of-fit map) as overlay of the T1 maps.

The confidence maps indicate the quality of the T1 maps.
► To scroll through the images with different inversion delay times, drag to the left or to the
right on the image viewport.
Alternatively use the left and right arrow keys.
► To scroll to the T1 maps, drag diagonally on the image viewport.
The T1 maps and the confidence maps are displayed right behind the first inversion delay
time image.
A checkerboard pattern indicates the areas with too low reliability in the data. The
confidence map provides the best representation of the reliability of the acquired data. If
the confidence map shows poor quality, the scan needs to be acquired again.
Obtaining T1 values
To obtain the T1 values, draw a ROI on a T1 map with confidence overlay.
► Right-click the T1 map with confidence overlay and select the desired ROI type from the
provided options.
► Draw a ROI.
Do not include areas of low confidence such as the checkerboard areas and vascular
structures.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Copy and paste the ROI to the T1 map without confidence overlay.
► Note the mean value of the ROI on the T1 map without confidence overlay as the T1 value.
The numerical T1 values are displayed in milliseconds (ms).
NOTICE
Possibly false results
To avoid any possible bias in the results, DO NOT use T1 values from the T1 map with
confidence overlay, because the pixels with low confidence are not automatically excluded.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Optional: Obtaining time-intensity diagram
► On the Review toolbar, click Time-Intensity Diagram .

Then follow the instructions chapter “Calculating a Time Intensity Diagram (TID)” on page
979.
End fragment title: Workflow
9.4.6 Coronary Angiography

Status: NotReleased
MRI of the coronary arteries, with the advent of the MotionTrak method is now feasible in a
clinical setting.
This chapter will introduce the various aspects needed to perform a successful coronary
examination. Covered here will be the utilization of MR methods, scan parameters, a
recommended clinical scan procedure and angulation techniques.
Philips

Node title (original): only available on Prodiva CX ID: 129046376587

Status: NotReleased
Only available on Prodiva CX!

End fragment title: only available on Prodiva CX

Status: NotReleased
Coronary scans can be made with a variety of techniques:

Balanced TFE is the most frequently used method because it is fast due to the very short TR’s
that are used and it gives a nice strong signal from blood. Other methods include TFE and Black
Blood TSE.
Breath holding could be used for respiratory motion reduction, but the total breath-hold time
available is not sufficient to achieve good quality images. Another problem for breath-hold
approaches is the high risk of unwanted movement of the diaphragm during breath holding.
The best way to acquire high-resolution images is to correct for any respiratory motion using
navigators. Navigators correct for sub-millimeter motion and allow for longer scan times, more
data acquisition and thus a higher spatial resolution. In the past these scans could easily exceed
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

10 minutes of scanning, but good results can be obtained in scans that last for a more practical
3 to 5 minutes of effective scan time.
There are two different approaches: the whole heart approach and the targeted approach
where typically one scan is needed to catch the right coronary artery (RCA) in one scan, and a
second scan is needed to catch the left coronary artery (LCA) and circumflex (LCX) together.
Remark
The most frequently made mistake is to determine the spatial resolution of coronary scan from
the voxel size only (FOV and scan matrix), totally ignoring the influences of respiratory motion
to the resolution. In other words, decreasing the acquisition resolution from 0.7 mm to 0.5 mm
does not improve the resolution if the total amount of respiratory blurring is more then 0.7
mm. Try not to focus too much on the voxel size alone. Focussing on patient comfort is more
important, reducing the risk of patient motion gives much better results!
9.4.6.2 Performing Coronary Angiography

Status: NotReleased
The best results are achieved when the patient is not moving at all since very small vessels are
to be imaged. The slightest movement of the patient during scanning results in blurred images.
It is therefore important to make sure that the patient lays very comfortable inside the magnet.
Music through the head phones can help to create a more relaxed atmosphere. Explain to the
patient the importance of keeping still during the whole examination.
This procedure describes the targeted approach for the coronary arteries and the whole heart
examination.
Philips

Multistack survey
• can best be performed in a breath hold (expiration).
This allows for better planning of the navigator beam that is used for respiratory gating and
motion tracking.
High Temp Cine scan

• is a b-FFE cine scan with a sufficient number of phases (40 or more) to allow the precise
determination of the trigger delay and shot duration.
► Position the scan in transverse orientation through the left and right ventricle. The idea is
that this scan shows the motion of RCA and thus the precise moment that diastole starts
and early systole begins.
► Acquire this scan in free breathe as breath-hold might affect the patient's heart rate. It is
important to define the precise start of diastole during free breathe since the actual
coronary scan is acquired in free breathe too (navigator).
Coronary survey (only needed for the targeted appraoch)

• is a high-resolution survey scan that covers the whole heart and that is needed for planning
of the coronary scans.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• utilizes SENSE b-TFE to speed up the image acquisition.

• uses a navigator for respiratory gating and motion tracking. Position the navigator on the
right hemi diaphragm.
• uses a trigger delay set to mid-diastole (if higher heart rates result in conflicting parameters,
the trigger delay could also be set to longest).
Fig. 479: Coronal image that shows the main pulmonary artery: position the stack such that the first slice is located
halfway the pulmonary artery, including as much of the heart as possible.
Philips

While this scan is running, the precise trigger delay and shot duration can now be determined
from the previous high temp cine scan:
► Browse through the phases and find out at what moment diastole starts. This should be the
trigger delay for the coronary scan.
► Browse through the phases to find the precise moment that the right coronary artery starts
moving again at early systole. The difference between this moment and the previously
mentioned trigger delay is the acquisition duration. The acquisition duration is displayed on
the info page and can be controlled by changing the TFE factor.
► Alternatively, the TFE shot duration can be set in milliseconds directly on the 'Contrast' tab.
The TFE factor is automatically calculated and displayed on the info page.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 480: Browse through the phases of the high temp cine scan to find out the precise moments where the coronary
motion starts and stops.
Coronary scan
Coronary scan Approach
Whole Heart Coronary scan for whole heart approach
Right Coronary scan (RCA) for targeted approach
Tab. 45: Use one of these coronary scans
► Enter the trigger delay as found using the High Temp Cine scan.
► Adjust the TFE factor or the TFE shot duration on the 'Contrast' tab.
When the images of the previous scan (coronary survey) are loaded into the main planning
viewport, three-points-planscan can be used to position the stack of slices such that they cover
the whole right coronary artery at once. To avoid any risk of respiratory ghosting artifacts over
the image select a feet-head fold-over direction.
For the whole heart approach, the examination would be finished by now. For the targeted
approach, another scan for the LCA could be necessary.
Philips

Fig. 481: Place the first point at the origin of the RCA, the second point more lateral at the most apical position and
the third point at the most distal, inferior position.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Left coronary artery (LM, LAD and LCX) scan - for targeted approach
• The left main (LM), left anterior descending (LAD) and the left circumflex (LCX) can be
acquired in a single 3D volume.
• Use three-points-planscan to position the stack.
• Fold-over direction should be set to LR to avoid any risk of respiratory ghosting artifacts.
Fig. 482: Place the first point at the origin of the LM, the second point more distal in the LAD and the third point at
the LCX.
Philips

9.4.6.3 Sequence description

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): Technical background ID: 129046354827

Status: NotReleased
• The coronary scans make use of the 3D-K-space shutter which saves 20% of the scan-time
and increases signal to noise. The technique utilizes a radial profile order, which means that
the outer corners of 3D K-space are not acquired during acquisition resulting in improved
image quality. As a result of this radial profile order, each individual TFE shot starts at the
center of 3D K-space (low-high profile order). Because of this REST and SPAIR or SPIR pulses
become more effective. Therefore it is also allowed to select fold-over suppression with
only 1 NSA (implicit use of REST slabs).
• A SPAIR or SPIR fat suppression pulse is used to enhance the contrast between the
coronary artery and the surrounding epicardial fat.
• A T2Prep pulse is used to further enhance the contrast between the coronary arteries and
the myocardium. The T2Prep pulse is a non-selective pre-pulse that suppresses tissues with
short T2 relaxation’s using a train of refocusing pulses over a short period of time. Both the
number of refocusing pulses (1, 2 or 4) and the period of time (echo time) can be adjusted
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

for the T2Prep pulse.
• It is recommended to use volume shim, which is done selectively over a volume that can be
freely chosen, but is restricted to a minimum value. Large transitions as air/tissue
boundaries should be excluded from the selected volume and also areas where large
homogeneity variations occur. When ‘ShimAlign’ is set to 'yes', any modification of the stack
off-centers and angulations will result in a recalculation of the shim volume such that the
shim volume will be aligned to the stack:
– Off-centers are adjusted such that the volume will be inside the stack.
– Angulations will be equal to the stack.
– The volume will be slightly thicker than the stack allowing easier selection in planscan
mode.
End fragment title: Technical background
In order to eliminate the contribution of fat signal into the navigator beam, a second SPIR pulse
is implemented to suppress the fat in the navigator beam. This results in a steady navigator
signal. The excitation of the navigator is moved close to the acquisition train to ensure a
minimum amount of residual motion. The order of pulses is:
Philips

Navigator coronary sequence:

1. T2 prep pulse
2. SPIR for navigator
3. Navigator
4. SPIR for image acquisition
5. Implicit REST for fold-over
suppression
6. Acquisition train (Balanced
TFE, TFE or TFE-EPI)
9.4.7 SENC (Strain Encoding)

Status: NotReleased

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Affix: in fact, not yet done: Scan Methods with the "how" only ID: 9007316222414475
for the Help Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 1 overview table (IFU) ID: 9007316222587147

Affix: IFU and Scan Methods Status: NotReleased
Pulse Sequence SENC (Strain ENCoding) is a technique to image the contracting heart muscle in a
quantitative way.
• The SENC acquisition takes place at the Philips MRI system.
• The acquisition data is intended to be processed with the MyoStrain application by the
company Myocardial Solutions (http://www.myocardialsolutions.com/).
Properties • SENC provides modulus images which are needed to calculate the SENC strain images.
These strain images contain the quantitative information.
• SENC scans also provide SENC anatomy images.
They can be used to check the planning, arrhythmia, motion artifacts, and image
quality in general.
Philips

Applications • Cardiac imaging: SENC supports strain measurements in the left and right ventricle.
Scan modes • Single-Shot TFE-Spiral

End fragment title: 1 overview table (IFU)
Node title (original): 2 what is SENC (IFU) including intended ID: 9007316222773131
use (if needed for 510k) Status: NotReleased
Affix: IFU and Scan Methods
What is SENC?
SENC (Strain ENCoding) is a technique to image the contracting heart muscle in a quantitative
way.
One SENC scan results in time series of images (typically 20 heart phases) of a single slice,
where the pixel value in each image represents strain (contraction or expansion relative to
some reference point in the cardiac cycle). Strain is a dimension-less number (expressed as a
percentage) and can be directly interpreted as a quantitative measure. Only strain in a direction
perpendicular to the slice orientation is measured. By scanning a few well-defined cardiac
views, enough information can be collected to image strain in all relevant directions covering
the whole heart.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SENC can be considered as a form of cardiac tagging – however it does NOT require elaborate
processing by way of tracking line or grid patterns.
• SENC measures strain directly.
• SENC does not rely on phase information and avoids difficulties with phase unwrapping.
• SENC has an extremely fast acquisition (1 single heartbeat per slice orientation).
– One slice acquired in a single heartbeat, providing typically 20 cardiac phases, triggered
to an R wave.
– The readout technique is spiral, with typically 3 spiral interleaves per cardiac phase.
• SENC does not require breath holding. It can be performed with respiratory triggering.
The most critical success factor is planning accuracy: the better the SENC images are planned,
the better the strain images.
End fragment title: 2 what is SENC (IFU) including intended use (if needed for 510k)
Node title (original): 3 How does SENC work? Scan Methods ID: 9007316223381771
only Status: NotReleased
Affix: Only Scan Methods, NOT in IFU
How does SENC work?

SENC applies a tagging pulse complex at the start of the cardiac cycle, immediately after the R-
wave. The tagging pulse complex produces a sinusoidal modulation of Mz magnetization, in a
direction perpendicular to the slice. The modulation typically consists of a few full periods
across the slice thickness. During subsequent signal readout, the sinusoidal modulation must be
Philips
demodulated in order to see a net signal. That demodulation is effected by applying a kz

decoding gradient, much like a kz phase encoding gradient. In order to measure relative
deformation (compression or expansion of the sinusoidal pattern), it is useful to demodulate
not at the exact modulation frequency, but instead at two slightly different frequencies called
the low and high tuning respectively. The combination of the two differently tuned images
allows a calculation of real strain.
The tagging process itself provides a volume selective excitation. Since only tagged tissue is
imaged, this prevents backfolding in spiral imaging and allows to use a small Field of View,
planned closely around the heart.
End fragment title: 3 How does SENC work? Scan Methods only
Node title (original): 8 References ID: 9007316223231115

References
For more information about SENC, see literature.
End fragment title: 8 References
Node title (original): 9 more information SENC ID: 9007316223081739

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
More information { Heuvel, Martina van den, 5/21/2018 1:55:48 PM: repair links}
• In the Online Help (F1): Enabling SENC
• In the Online Help (F1): Controlling the SENC strain range
End fragment title: 9 more information SENC
9.4.7.2 SENC Images

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 4 SENC images (IFU) ID: 9007316222929163

SENC provides different image types at different heart phases covering the complete cardiac
cycle:
Philips

SENC image type SENC modulus images SENC anatomy images
Purpose/description Needed to calculate the SENC strain images. Meant to judge image quality of the SENC
They do not provide useful visual scan:
information. • check for SNR (signal-to-noise ratio)
Instead use the SENC anatomy images to • possible patient movements
judge image quality.
Provided where • Outcome of acquisition • Outcome of acquisition

• Need to be pushed to computer with
analysis software for the calculation of
the strain images.
Example images
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 4 SENC images (IFU)
9.4.7.3 Scanning with SENC

Affix: ONLY in IFU, not in Scan Methods ID: 9007316223489675
Last Content Modificator: Marshall, Tom Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): SENC UsE - intro ID: 9007316223872779

Status: NotReleased
Use SENC in cardiac imaging to evaluate, for example, left ventricular function.
End fragment title: SENC UsE - intro
Node title (original): SENC pat positioning ID: 9007316223980043

Status: NotReleased
Patient positioning
► Position the patient on the tabletop with VCG, respiratory belt, cardiac coil, headset, and
nurse call.
► Instruct the patient not to touch the VCG module and cables.
► Check the quality of the VCG signal prior to scanning.
Philips

End fragment title: SENC pat positioning
Node title (original): SENC selecting EC ID: 9007316224088075

Status: NotReleased
Selecting the ExamCard for SENC

► Enter the examination data at the console.
► Select the cardiac ExampleCard SENC.
This ExampleCard provides guidance on planning. It contains the following Philips imaging
protocols:
Imaging protocol Number of
breathhold
s
Multistack survey (3 planes)
Pseudo 2CH CINE scan 1
Pseudo 4CH CINE scan 1
Short axis CINE (5 planes including the valves) 5

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
True long axis CINE 2CH 1
SENC long axis views 2CH, 4CH, 3CH 3
SENC short axis basal SAB 1
SENC short axis mid SAM 1
SENC short axis apical SAA 1
End fragment title: SENC selecting EC
Node title (original): SENC planning and scanning ID: 9007316224315659

Status: NotReleased
Planning and scanning

► Start the ExamCard and as such the Multistack survey.
► Do one of the following to update the cardiac frequency:
• Enter the cardiac frequency in the Exam Dashboard. Regularly check and update
throughout the complete examination.
• To update the cardiac frequency, click Update heart rate on the Exam Dashboard.
► Plan all scans as shown in the following.
Start, and eventually plan and resume the ExamCard.
Philips

Imaging protocol How to plan? Planning example
Pseudo 2CH CINE • Center on left ventricle -

scan utilizing all 3 planes of the
Multistack survey.
Pseudo 4CH CINE • Cut plane parallel on long -

scan axis 2CH bisecting the blood
pool equally.
Short axis CINE • Use Pseudo 4CH as

(5 planes including reference.
the valves) • Select end-systolic time
frame centered on the left
ventricle.
• Increase the distance factor
to image from the base to
the apex of the heart.
True long axis • FOV centered on the left 1. Cut plane should bisect LV
CINE 2CH ventricle. apex and mitral valve.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• The slice must bisect the 2. Cut plane parallel to
apex in the Pseudo 2CH ventricular septum on
view. short axis view.
• Parallel to the septum and
equidistantly away from
right ventricle insertion
points.
True long axis • FOV centered on the left 1. Cut plane to bisect the
CINE 3CH ventricle. apex.
• Bisect the apex in the 2CH 2. Avoid papillary muscle.
view. 3. Cut plane to bisect mitral
• Bisect the LV outflow tract valve.
on the short axis view. 4. Bisect LV outflow tract on
Basal Short Axis.
True long axis • FOV centered on the left 1. Rotate to go through the
CINE 4CH ventricle. apex.
• The slices must bisect the 2. Avoid papillary muscle.
apex in the 2CH and 3CH 3. Cut plane to bisect mitral
views. valve.
4. Place center of the plane
on the most angled portion
of the right ventricular
wall.
Philips

SENC long axis • Use same geometry names -

views 2CH, 4CH, as for Cine 2CH, Cine 3CH
3CH and Cine 4CH .
• Move the center of the LV
to the center of the FOV
(away from the FOV edges).
• Capture the cardiac cycle.
SENC short axis • Plan on the 3CH view at the 1. All planes should be
basal SAB end-systolic time frame. orthogonal to LV walls.
• Place the slice just below 2. Place slice just below open
the plane of the valves. leaflets of valves.
• Check the slice orientation
on 2CH, 3CH and 4CH views.
Check that the plane is
orthogonal to all walls in
the long-axis views (2CH,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
3CH, 4CH).
Philips

SENC short axis • Use the same geometry 1. All planes should be
mid SAM name as for the SAB scan. orthogonal to LV walls.
• Change the geometry name 2. Move plane towards apex.
to SAM. This action takes
over the slice position of
the SAB scan.
• Plan on the 3CH view at the
end-systolic time frame.
• Adjust the plane mid-
distance to the apex.
• Ensure the plane is
orthogonal to walls in the
long axis views (2CH, 3CH,
4CH).
SENC short axis • Use the same geometry 1. All planes should be
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

apical SAA name as for the SAM scan. orthogonal to LV walls.
• Change the geometry name 2. At ES, towards tip of the
to SAA. This action takes blood pool.
over the slice position of
the SAM scan.
• Plan on the 2CH view at the
end-systolic time frame.
• Move the plane close to the
apex.
• Ensure the plane is
orthogonal to walls in the
long axis views (2CH, 3CH,
4CH).
End fragment title: SENC planning and scanning
Node title (original): SENC reviewing ID: 9007316224198411

Status: NotReleased
Reviewing the images

► Review the SENC anatomy imaging series, preferably as movie.
► To scroll through the image types, drag to the left or to the right on the image viewport.
Alternatively use the left and right arrow keys.
► To scroll through the heart phase images, drag diagonally on the image viewport.
Philips

Functional Description Advanced Operation
End fragment title: SENC reviewing
Node title (original): typical SENC parameter settings ID: 9007316224442507

Status: NotReleased
Typical SENC parameter settings

• To automatically calculate the SENC anatomy images, the Philips SENC imaging protocols
have the imaging parameter Calculated images set to SENC anatomy.
• Since one slice is measured within one heartbeat, there are no problems with variations of
the cardiac cycle. Arrhythmia rejection is not needed.
• The recommended values of the SENC strain range parameter are +5% , -30%.
End fragment title: typical SENC parameter settings
9.5 Functional Description

Affix: IFU - not for Ingenia in China, comp: Bold ID: 9007316231773323
Node title (original): overview table BOLD ID: 9007316231997835

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Status: NotReleased
BOLD imaging • Helps identifying active regions of the brain relying on local metabolic and
hemodynamic changes which occur in activated cortical brain.
Contrast mechanisms • BOLD (Blood Oxygen Level Dependent): During brain activation (increase of
metabolism), the oxygen consumption of local tissue increases by approximately
5%.
• Vasodilatation: Vasodilatation occurs resulting in a local increase of blood volume
and flow by 20% to 40%.
The above hemodynamic response to brain activation leads to an increased local
oxygen level resulting in a signal increase in T2*W sequences.
Scan methods The BOLD effect is visible in heavily T2*weighted scans.
Properties • The BOLD contrast mechanism will benefit from high field strengths.
• Signal changes are typically in the order of 1% to 4%.
Analysis • To indicate those pixels with a significant increased signal intensity.

• Can be performed withMR IViewBOLD Analysis package.
End fragment title: overview table BOLD
Node title (original): Quality improvements (similar fragment in ID: 9007316231908747

Diffusion imaging) Status: NotReleased
Quality improvements
To improve the quality of BOLD MRI, use EPIC Brain:
Philips

Advanced Operation Functional Description
• EPIC Brain allows you to enable EPI geometry correction in the brain in dynamic FFE- and
SE-EPI scans, and in BOLD scans.
– Application Brain only: especially DWI, DTI and BOLD imaging.
– To enable EPIC Brain, set the parameter EPI Geometry Correction to yes.
More information in the Online Help (F1): Enabling EPIC Brain
End fragment title: Quality improvements (similar fragment in Diffusion imaging)
Node title (original): 24259 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-AC.01, ID: 27021604411105803

HAZ-AC.03, HAZ-AC.04, HAZ-AC.Jewel.3) Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24259
WARNING
Misinterpretation of the results of the IViewBold technique is possible due to several causes
on the system for which operator attention and training is required.
Overlaying the resulting parameter maps from the BOLD analysis on anatomical images, is
very helpful in finding the anatomical location of specific areas in the parameter maps.
However the anatomical location of these areas should be verified using the source images
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

from the dynamic scan at all times. This verification is required since various factors (like
patient movement and differences in scan techniques) may disturb the geometrical
correspondence between the overlaid parameter map and the anatomical image resulting in
an under/over estimation of the activation area.
End fragment title: 24259 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-AC.01, HAZ-AC.03, HAZ-AC.04, HAZ-AC.Jewel.3)
Node title (original): 24366 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-VP.13 ID: 9007205898485515

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24366
WARNING
Attention is needed for operator instructions displayed on the viewing screen.
End fragment title: 24366 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-VP.13
Node title (original): HG - IViewBold - interpretation of ID: 9007206312066187

displayed correlation values Status: Released
Philips

MR Spectroscopy Advanced Operation
WARNING
For the interpretation of the displayed correlation values and its threshold, the user is
referred to the literature. Interpretation is the sole responsibility of the interpretor.
Correlation of the functional images and their underlying anatomical images may be
influenced by patient motion and therefore depends on the accuracy of fixation of the
patient. The operator is responsible for the correspondence between the programmed
paradigm and the actually applied paradigm.
End fragment title: HG - IViewBold - interpretation of displayed correlation values
9.6 MR Spectroscopy
Affix: IFU - NOT for Ingenia in China: comp MRS ID: 9007316238632587
Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy (MRS) works on the same basic principles as MR Imaging
(MRI): the real differences are in the manipulation of the signal during and after acquisition.
Certain atomic nuclei in the human body, such as the protons (of water and other compounds
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
with hydrogen atoms), have a net magnetic field as a result of their spinning motion. When
these spinning nuclear magnets are placed in an external magnetic field the rotation is changed
into a precession around the external magnetic field.
For more information about MR Spectroscopy, press F1 to open the Online Help and browse to
Scan Methods and more/MR Spectroscopy.
9.6.1 Proton MR Spectroscopy: Clinical Applications

Affix: NEW Tiger-5 ID: 36028882855079947
MR spectroscopy can be used in all anatomical regions. It is a non-invasive study that can
provide information on chemical composition and metabolism of an area of interest, that might
be useful for diagnostic purposes. Literature discusses the predictive value of MR spectroscopy
in the course of some diseases.
9.6.1.1 General Considerations

Status: Released
Node title (original): 0 coils on Ingenia for MRS ID: 119837018379

Status: Released
Philips

Advanced Operation MR Spectroscopy
Coils
All Ingenia coils available can be used for MR spectroscopy.
End fragment title: 0 coils on Ingenia for MRS
Node title (original): 1 Planning ID: 119837374603

Status: Released
Planning
• About Planning Offcenters and Angulations:
– It is not recommended to use the same geometry name for SV and CSI-scans, because
some VOI offc/ang-parameters in a CSI scan are coupled to the stack offc/ang-
parameters.
– For CSI, in-plane VOI off-centers and VOI-slice angulation can be planned independently
of the stack if VOI alignment is disabled. All other offcenters and angulations of the VOI
are equal to the stack parameters.
• About Propagate Coverage:
– VOI sizes can be shared between scans with the same geometry name if Propagate
coverage is enabled.
There is one exception: the VOI thickness is not propagated to a 2D-CSI scan, as the VOI
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

thickness in 2D-CSI is determined by the slice thickness.
• About VOI Alignments:
– The VOI offcenter and angulation alignment settings are shared over all scans with the
same geometry name.
– SV scans (where VOI alignment is not applicable, so disabled) switches off the VOI
alignments in SI scans with the same geometry name.
• About Imaging and Spectro:
– Imaging scan and SV scan with the same geometry name do not share anything.
– Imaging scan and SI scan with the same geometry name have the same stack geometry.
The stack sizes are only shared if Propagate Coverage is enabled.
When you change the geometry of the imaging stack, you also change the stack and the
VOI-geometry of the CSI-scan (as some VOI parameters are linked to the stack
parameters).
• About SmartPlan:
– SmartPlan learns the VOI offcenters, angulations and sizes.
– SmartPlan automatically plans the VOI offcenters and angulations of scans using a smart
named geometry.
– SmartPlan only plans the VOI sizes in a spectro scan.
– VOIs automatically planned by SmartPlan must always be confirmed in the PlanScan
environment, because planning a VOI is very criticial.
• About Hold Geometry:
Philips

– If the user starts planning a spectro scan with a geometry name for the first time (so the
named geometry does not yet contain a planned VOI), then at the start of planning the
VOI offcenters and angulations of the latest planned VOI are copied to this scan. This
latest planned VOI is stored in the so called ’hold geometry’.
End fragment title: 1 Planning
Node title (original): 2 processing SpectroView ID: 119837013771

Status: Released
Processing in SpectroView
You process the spectroscopic data (spectra, images) in SpectroView. For more information,
see .
End fragment title: 2 processing SpectroView
9.6.1.2 Scanning with the Phantom

Status: Released
Phantom scanning can be useful for testing or training purposes and it can be used as a
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
reference for spectral quality in order to test the system’s stability.

The spectroscopy package includes a phantom, phantom A, and a positioning plate.
The phantom can be placed
• On the positioning plate in theload ring of the Q-Head coil, the H-Head coil or the Transmit/
Receive Head coil.
• On the head rest of the SENSE Head coil.
• On top of Surface or SENSE coils.
Phantom A is a sphere of 10 cm diameter, containing the following compounds resolved in
water:
• 5 ml 98% acetate (CH3OOH)
• 10 ml 80% ethanol (CH3 CH2OH)
• 8 ml 98% phosphoric acid (H3PO4)
• 1 ml 1% arquad solution + 120 mg/ml CuSO4
Because the phantom contains high concentrations of alcohol and acetate, a good signal-to-
noise spectrum can be obtained in only a few measurements.
Philips

Water-suppressed spectrum of
phantom sphere A.
The ethanol CH2 signal is a J-coupled signal, with a J-coupling constant very similar to that of
lactate (~ 7Hz). The peaks will have positive sign at very short TE and at TE = 288 ms, but will be
inverted at the echo time of 144 ms, which was used in this figure.
9.6.1.3 Preset Procedures

Status: Released
Preset procedures for spectroscopy are present in the Philips database. They are grouped
together in spectro folders per anatomy. Subfolders can be present in the spectro folder for
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

separate applications.
Example of Spectroscopy procedures for the head
• Spectroscopy_1H
– with subfolders Brain, Hippocampus
• optional: Spectroscopy_31P
Naming in MRS Preset Procedures

Term in name Standing for
SV Single Voxel
2D Two dimensional Spectroscopic Imaging (Chemical Shift

Imaging)
TSI Turbo Spectroscopic Imaging
3D Three dimensional Spectroscopic Imaging
MS Multislice
PRESS / STEAM / SE / sLASER Indicating the scan method
’Number’ Indicating the echo time
9.6.1.4 Brain
Philips
Status: Released

Proton spectroscopy in the brain is currently the most common spectroscopy application. It
might be used to aid in evaluation of e.g. tumors, abcesses, white matter diseases (like
Alzheimer), temporal epilepsia etc.
More specific, spectroscopy may help in the evaluation of
• Tumor grading / assessment
• Typing (benign / malignant / recurrent / necrosis)
• Assessment of response to therapy
Spectroscopy findings in tumor analysis might show:
Metabolite Related to
Increased choline rapid cell turnover in solid portion of the tumour
Decreased choline necrosis if in central portion
Decreased NAA non-neuronal origin of tumour
Decreased Cr/PCr compromise energy state of tumour tissue
Increased lactate product of anaerobic glycolysis

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Coil choice
All coil solutions available can be used to perform spectroscopy.
A dedicated head coil is preferred for brain spectroscopy for optimal signal-to-noise ratio,
shortest possible echo times and least chemical shift displacement in volume selection at high
field strengths.
Scan mode
Both, Single Voxel Spectroscopy and Spectroscopic Imaging are widely used in brain
applications.
Single Voxel Spectroscopy (SVS) Spectroscopic Imaging
Advantages • Good signal to noise spectrum in Information about metabolic distribution is

relatively short scan time, and available in a larger region.
• Shimming is usually much better due to
smaller volume size.
Disadvantages • Only one spectrum from a block-shaped A relatively long scan time is required for
volume is acquired: generally lower SNR per spectrum.
– no spatial information is available. Note that scan time reduction can be
– partial volume effects can occur. achieved by using TSI and/or SENSE, at the
cost of spectral resolution and/or signal to
noise.
Tab. 46: SVS versus SI

Philips

9.6.1.4.1 Performing proton spectroscopy in the brain

Status: Released
9.6.1.4.1.1 SVS Workflow

Status: Released
1. Acquire anatomical images in at least two orthogonal directions with an intersection to the
area of interest.
2. Select procedure for SVS.
3. Graphically resize and position the VOI in planscan.
4. Start scan.
5. Open monitoring window to view the results in real-time.
6. When reconstruction is complete, open the series in SpectroView. Do any of the following:
• Double-click on the scan in the planning list.
• Drag and drop the scan from the planning list into the viewing window.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

7. Run appropriate script for processing.
8. Create DICOM screen capture.
9.6.1.4.1.2 Spectroscopic Imaging Workflow

Status: Released
1. Acquire anatomical images in the imaging plane required for CSI with an intersection to the
area of interest.
• Position center slice of the stack in the required position of the CSI-scan: the geometry
used for this scan can be used to plan the CSI-scan
2. Select preset procedure for CSI.
3. Select geometry of the required anatomical, to copy the planning.
4. Change in-plane VOI size and position REST slabs.
5. Start scan.
6. When reconstruction is complete, open the series in SpectroView. Do any of the following:
• Double-click on the scan in the planning list.
• Drag and drop the scan from the planning list into the viewing window.
7. Run appropriate script for processing.
8. Create DICOM screen capture.
Philips

9.6.1.4.1.3 Alternative Workflow

Status: Released
A possible workflow is to acquire a set of fast spectroscopic images, that serve as a kind of
metabolic screening. One or more high-resolution single voxel scans are planned on these
metabolite maps.
The FOV and scan matrix define the spatial resolution of the resultant spectroscopic image,
while the VOI size (and the REST slabs surrounding the VOI) define the signal generating area.
9.6.1.4.2 Volume Selection

Status: Released
For the acquisition of short TE spectra, STEAM, PRESS, and sLASER can be used as a volume
selection method.
Node title (original): intro new ID: 119959974539
Status: Released
When you use volume selection, the localized volume for one metabolite is displaced relative to
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
that for a different metabolite with a different chemical shift. The relative size of the spatial
displacement is greater at higher field strengths, because chemical shift differences in Hz scale
with the main magnetic field.
In chemical shift imaging (CSI), the displacement of localization volumes may give rise to
artifacts. Distorted relative intensities and incorrect peak area ratios may occur in spectra from
voxels at the edges of the region of interest, where the volumes do not overlap.
• To determine which voxels lie in the overlap region for two metabolites of interest, use the
PlanScan Metabolite and Shifted Metabolite boxes displayed during scan set-up.
• To reduce chemical shift displacement, choose higher bandwidth RF pulses (sharp).
• To eliminate in-plane chemical shift displacement in 2D-CSI, use spin-echo slice localization
(plus multiple REST slabs if necessary) instead of full volume localization.
End fragment title: intro new
PRESS
The shortest possible TE is limited by the fact that three RF pulses and slice selection gradients
must be applied for full volume selection. Depending on (amongst others) the system's field
strength and the used B1-transmit field, the shortest possible TE in a PRESS sequence is ~ 22
ms.
sLASER
sLASER is a variation of the PRESS technique.
Node title (original): Ingenia related information about ID: 27021684328606731
minimum TE sLASER Status: Released
Philips

For the dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil, the minimum TE is around 30 ms.
End fragment title: Ingenia related information about minimum TE sLASER
STEAM
As in PRESS, also three RF pulses and slice selection gradients are applied. However, as the
magnetization is flipped back in the longitudinal plane between the second and third RF pulse,
the effective TE is much shorter with an approximate value of 7 ms.
STEAM has a relatively low signal-to-noise ratio. However, shorter TE on the other hand results
in increased signal-to-noise ratio again, and extra signals of tissues with short T2 relaxation
times.
Note that, with shorter TE, water suppression might be less optimal: At longer TE, residual
water signal is reduced due to T2-decay, that is relatively fast for water in comparison to the T2-
decay of brain metabolites.
Node title (original): comparison VOI methods brain ID: 18014485074233355
Affix: non-US PR MR00215602 Status: Released
Comparison
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SV PRESS TE 35 ms
SV sLASER TE 35 ms
Philips

Comparison
SV STEAM TE 35 ms
SV STEAM TE 9 ms
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• The comparison SV PRESS TE 35 ms and SV sLASER TE 35 ms show equal SNR.

• The comparison SV PRESS TE 35 ms and SV STEAM TE 35 ms show reduced SNR for the
latter spectrum.
• The comparison SV STEAM 35 ms and SV STEAM 9 ms show increased SNR for the latter
spectrum due to reduced T2 relaxation in all metabolites.
End fragment title: comparison VOI methods brain
More information
• In the Online Help (F1): Imaging parameter VOI selection method
• In the Online Help (F1): Overview of volume selection techniques in Scan Methods -> MRS -
> Volume selection methods
9.6.1.4.3 Volume Selection for CSI

Status: Released
Node title (original): full volume selection ID: 119998427019

Status: Released
Full volume selection

Full volume selection can be used for spectroscopic imaging in the brain.
It can be combined with PRESS, sLASER and STEAM.
Philips

The VOI selected is the signal generating area and should include only tissue of interest (no air-
tissue interfaces, no fat from surrounding skull.) Outer volume suppression is optimal, as no
signal is selected.
The drawback of full volume selection is that the size of the VOI in general is limited, as it is a
box-shaped volume that doesn't correspond well with the shape of the brain. If combined with
circular REST, then the VOI may be larger.
Planscan example full volume
selection.
Full PRESS volume selection

centered on NAA (3rd image).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The maps of choline (1st) and
creatine (2nd) come from a
slightly different position due to
chemical shift displacement.
Note that the signal from outside
the volume is hardly generated.
Lipid image (4th) is almost
empty. Note: volume selection
by sLASER reduces inplane
chemical shift displacement at
3T.
Chemical shift displacement

sLASER

PRESS
Philips


• Chemical shift displacement occurs in all three dimensions as slice selective gradients are
applied in three dimensions if full volume selection is enabled.
• The adiabatic refocusing pulses in sLASER significantly reduce chemical shift displacement in
the refocusing directions at 3T (see figures). Recommendation: use sLASER for 2DSI on brain
at 3T.
End fragment title: full volume selection
Node title (original): slice selection ID: 119998428043

Status: Released
Slice selection
Slice selection can be performed instead of full volume selection (as in MR imaging).
It cannot be combined with STEAM.
The VOI in planscan determines the shim volume, but everything within the selected slice will
generate signal.
To avoid fold-over, it is important that the slice FOV is large enough: all signal generating areas
must be included in the selected FOV.
With SE technique, REST slabs are to be used for outer volume suppression. Use of circular REST
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
is optimized for brain spectroscopic imaging, as the REST slabs nicely define a circular-shaped
volume, that corresponds with the shape of the brain.
Planscan example with circular
REST.
End fragment title: slice selection
Node title (original): CS displacement ID: 119998429067

Status: Released

• only occurs in the direction in which a slice selective gradient is applied. This is in
the ’through-plane’ direction.
Philips

Slice selection combined with

circular REST for outer volume
suppression. Chemical shift
displacement is not seen in
plane, but outer volume
suppression by REST slabs only is
less complete.
End fragment title: CS displacement
9.6.1.4.4 Choice of TE
Status: Released
The choice of TE is based on the metabolites of interest: if T2-relaxation times of the

metabolites of interest are relatively short ( eg. Myo-Inositol), the TE must be kept short to
detect the signal before T2-decay is complete.
The TE determines much of the appearance of the spectrum: signals with short T2 generate
broad peaks in the spectrum (Fourier Transform on a fast decaying signal), and can even
disappear in the baseline. On the other hand, they will become invisible at long TE, leaving a
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

spectrum with fewer peaks and a smoother baseline.
Proton echo volume brain
spectra with different echo
times.
Effects of TE on J-coupling
The spin coupling patterns of proton spins can cause phase twists and inversion of peaks (or
groups of peaks). A clear example is the CH3-group of lactate, which gives rise to a doublet at
~1.3 ppm.
Philips

The scalar coupling gives rise to a phase evolution of the methyl doublet, which is in-phase
every 144 ms (= 1/J = 1/7 s). For TE = 144 ms the resonance shows a phase of 180° leading to a
negative in-phase doublet, whereas an echo time of 288 ms gives rise to a positive in-phase
doublet. Since only in-phase resonances can be quantified, the signal of lactate is best detected
at TE = 144 ms or TE = 288 ms.
At TE = 1/J, the phase of the lactate doublet is opposed to the phase of the other metabolites.
Evolution of lactate signal.
NOTICE
The real signal aspect of a spectrum must be measured to observe the negative phase of the
lactate peak.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
SVS with different TE's. Left:

TE=144ms. Sign of lactate signal
is opposed to rest of spectrum.
Right: TE=288ms. Sign of lactate
signal is inverted and in phase
with rest of spectrum.
Very short TE may be used to get the lactate peak nearly in phase, but the lactate signal will
often be difficult to quantify because of the underlying lipid resonances.
Status: Released
Lactate detection and TE at 3.0T

The chemical shift caused by J-coupling of weakly coupled systems (like lactate) is independent
of main magnetic field strength. The optimal echo time for lactate detection at 3.0T is therefore
equal to the echo time used at 1.5T which is 144 ms and/or 288 ms.
Philips

However, the bandwidth of the selection pulses at 3.0T is smaller, and the CH-lactate signal at
~4.1 ppm is not included in the excitation over the entire VOI. If the CH-group does not feel the
inversion pulse, J-coupling with the CH3-group and phase evolution of the CH3-doublet will not
occur. Therefore, the resultant signal of lactate at TE = 144 ms is (partly) cancelled out:
Bandwidth at 1.5T (above, A: TE
= 144 ms, negative doublet) and
3.0T (below, B: TE = 144 ms,
positive doublet) and its
influence.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The recommended VOI selection method for lactate detection is sLASER, since the bandwidth
of the adiabatic refocusing pulses used in sLASER is larger than in the conventional PRESS
sequence. Due to the larger bandwidth, the chemical displacement artifact, which is larger at
3.0T compared to 1.5T, is reduced when sLASER is used (see detailed explanation of effect of
chemical shift displacement below).
It is recommended to set Plan Scan Metabolite to Creatine (~3.0 ppm) which is close to the
central point of the two lactate signals (1.3 and 4.1 ppm).
A problem with lactate PRESS spectroscopy (or that of any J-coupled metabolite) is chemical
shift displacement. In particular, the PRESS box that corresponds to the CH3 protons of lactate
(at 1.33 ppm) is shifted relative to the PRESS box associated with the CH protons (at 4.11 ppm),
as illustrated in figure. This effect can be minimized by using the sharp pulse. Philips

Spatial interferences in lactate

PRESS signal at TE 144 ms
This drawing shows the displacement due to the two refocusing pulses in the sequence. (There
is also a smaller displacement perpendicular to the page associated with the excitation pulse,
but it doesn't give rise to signal cancellation.) BW is the refocusing pulse bandwidth (specifically
the FWHM) in Hz, and S is the chemical shift difference between the CH and CH3 protons in Hz.
S increases linearly with field strength, and BW generally reduces with increasing field strength.
The crux of the problem is that the evolution of the CH3 spins depends on the pulses
experienced by the CH spins to which they are J-coupled. Yablonskiy et al. (Magn. Reson. Med.
39, 169-178, 1998) have described this dependence in terms of a very simple four-
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
compartment model for the CH3 PRESS box:

1. In volume V1, the PRESS box intersection, the CH protons experience both of the
refocusing pulses. As a result, the corresponding CH3 doublet inverts at TE 144 ms, TE 432
ms, etc.
2. In volume V2, the CH protons experience the first refocusing pulse but not the second one.
3. In volume V3, the CH protons experience the second refocusing pulse but not the first one.
4. In volume V4, CH protons are untouched by refocusing pulses. As such, the CH3 protons
contribute to (positive) spin echoes for any value of TE - just like uncoupled spins.
Signal loss due to spatial interference thus occurs at TE 288 ms as well, even though the
contributions from volumes V1 and V4 are in phase. The loss is minimized, however, if the first
echo time is made as small as possible.
9.6.1.4.5 Spectral Resolution

Status: Released
The spectral resolution (Δν) is expressed as the smallest frequency difference that can be
separated in the resulting spectrum, and is determined by the received bandwidth and the
number of samples.
In practice, the spectral resolution in Hz must be at least twice as high as the chemical shift to
be detected, to clearly resolve the two peaks.
Philips

In brain, choline (~3.2ppm) and creatine (~3.0ppm) are two of the main metabolites of interest.
The chemical shift of these metabolites is very small (0.158 ppm, from "proton NMR chemical
shifts and coupling constants for brain metabolites", by Govindaraju et al. NMR Biomed. 2000;
13: 129-153) and high spectral resolution is required to resolve the two peaks.
Example
On 1.5T, a ppm value of 0.158 ppm corresponds to 10 Hz.
To accurately separate choline and creatine, a spectral resolution of < 5Hz is required. To obtain
this, the Tacq must be > 200 ms (number of samples / BW < 0.2).
Bandwidth
The selected bandwidth must be large enough to include all frequencies present in the
spectrum of interest to avoid fold-over.
Increasing spectral resolution results in

• Better spectral separation
• Lower signal-to-noise ratio (but only if sampling continues after T2 has decayed)
• Longer Tacq
The Tacq is checked against the repetition time. Repetition time in brain spectroscopy is usually
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

in the order of 1500 - 2000 ms to allow sufficient T1-relaxation and long Tacq can be used
without any problems.
Status: Released
Spectral resolution in TSI at 3.0T

In Turbo Spectroscopic Imaging (see Spatial Localization in the Help), the echo spacing is the
time available to sample the signal, which in turn determines the maximal obtainable spectral
resolution.
Example
To accurately separate choline and creatine, a spectral resolution of < 5Hz is required. To obtain
this, the Tacq must be > 200 ms (number of samples / BW < 0.2).
Tacq of ~ 200 ms, as described in the example above, will fit in an echo spacing of 288 ms,
optimal for lactate detection.
At 3.0T, the chemical shift differences are twice as high as compared to 1.5T. To accurately
separate choline and creatine at 3.0T, Tacq can therefore be twice as short and an echo spacing
of 144 ms would be sufficient. Use of shorter echo spacing allows for the longer echo train
before T2 decay is (nearly) complete. In practice, a TSI factor of 6 can be used in combination
with echo spacing = 144 ms.
With an ES = 144 ms at 3T, it is possible to reconstruct lactate maps, but signal modulation in K-
space, related to the alternation in lactate phase as a function of echo number, will cause some
spatial ringing and blurring of lactate maps (and the corresponding spectra).
Philips

9.6.1.4.6 Shimming Method

Status: Released
Shimming is required for each spectroscopy scan. The shim methods available are described in
more detail in the chapter on ’Preparation phases’.
Single voxel
Small volumes in non-moving tissue are usually relatively easy to shim. Both PB-shim and
iterative VOI can be used and the results for both techniques will be equally good. Advantage of
PB-shim is the reduced preparation time with respect to iterative VOI.
Note that if the shim volume is located close to air-tissue interfaces, PB-shim might be less
effective and Iterative VOI could be used instead.
2DSI / 3DSI
The effectiveness of PB-shim tends to increase with increasing VOI size and it is the method of
choice for the larger volumes which are used in 2DSI. As field homogeneity varies more over
larger volumes, the use of higher order shimming (3.0T only) is recommended.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
9.6.1.4.7 Water Suppression Method

Status: Released
The available water suppression methods are listed in the table below.
Water suppression method Characteristics
VAPOR • T1 and b1 insensitive

• Slightly increased shortest TR (when compared to excitation)
• Recommended for brain
Excitation • Requires AWSO (Automated Water Suppression Optimization),

therefore has longer scan time than VAPOR (which does not require AWSO)
Inversion • Increased shortest TR

• Optimal for ’one’ water component only
BASING pulse • Not recommended for brain

• Not in combination with STEAM
More information
• In the Online Help (F1): Imaging parameter Water suppression
• In the Online Help (F1): Overview of water suppression techniques in Scan Methods -> MRS
-> Preparation phases
Philips

9.6.1.4.8 Coverage: Multislice versus 3D

Status: Released
If coverage of a larger volume is required, both 3D spectroscopic imaging and multislice

spectroscopic imaging can be used.
Multislice spectroscopic imaging

This technique is time-efficient as the acquisition of the second (and other) slices is performed
during the remainder of the repetition time of the first slice. The number of slices that can be
added to a single-slice acquisition is limited to the Tacq (and the time required for prepulses)
for the first slice and the TR of the sequence.
Example
• TR 2000 ms, minimal TR 800 ms
– a second slice can be added to the sequence without any cost.
– to add a third slice, the TR must be increased to ~2400 ms.
Multislice is especially beneficial for those volumes that have large dimensions in-plane and
relatively small dimension through-plane which is mainly the case in brain spectroscopic
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

imaging.
• Slice gaps can be used.
• Slice definition is improved in comparison to 3D.
3D spectroscopic imaging
This technique can be selected to cover a larger volume. Phase encodings are performed in 3
dimensions for spatial resolution. Scan time increases linearly for each slice added to the
sequence. 3D also provides a higher SNR.
3D is mainly beneficial for those volumes that have comparable dimensions in all directions.
9.6.1.4.9 Fast Imaging Mode

Status: Released
Spectroscopic imaging scans have long scan times, as spatial encoding is performed with phase
encodings only.
Fast imaging mode can be used to reduce scan time, where the selected TSI factor is the scan
time acceleration factor.
The readout time of the signal is restricted by the echo spacing selected.
CSI TSI
Scan time • long • reduced
Tacq • long Tacq allowed • limited to ES

Philips

CSI TSI
Spectral resolution • higher due to long Tacq • lower due to limited Tacq
Half echo • possible due to long Tacq • impossible due to limited Tacq
Resulting spectra • Real spectra due to half echo • Modulus spectra
Tab. 47: CSI versus TSI
Fast imaging mode is best used for long-T2-metabolites, and therefore very useful for brain
spectroscopic imaging.
More information
• More information on Spatial Localization can be found in the Help.
9.6.1.4.10 SENSE in Spectroscopic Imaging

Status: Released
SENSE can be used to reduce scan time. As phase encodings are performed in two dimensions
in spectroscopy, SENSE reduction factors can be applied in two directions simultaneously. Note
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
that the information from a reference scan is required to perform SENSE. As spectroscopy in
general is part of a comprehensive brain examination, the refscan data from the examination is
valid for spectroscopy as well.
For brain spectroscopy in general the SENSE Head Coil will be used. SENSE in this coil is allowed
in the AP- and RL-direction. This is optimal for transverse slices.
Tips and hints

• Avoid intrinsic fold-over in all directions in which SENSE is applied.
• Recommended SENSE factors: not higher than 2 in both directions. Note that SNR reduces
with increasing SENSE factors.
• Both full PRESS, sLASER, or SE-slice selection can be used:
– Full PRESS or sLASER will have less foldover artifacts.
– REST slabs for outer volume suppression can equally be used.
Example
Philips

3D TSI in the brain. SENSE factor

2x2, TSI factor 3, scan time 1:30
min.
9.6.1.5 Hippocampus
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Spectroscopy is regularly performed in the hippocampus region. As the hippocampus is located

close to the petrous bones, the maxillary sinus, larger arteries like the carotids, and close to the
caudate nuclei (high iron content), susceptibility can give rise to problems. Good shim is more
difficult to obtain, as a result water suppression is harder to achieve and spectral lines can
become wider.
Scan mode
Both Single Voxel Spectroscopy and Spectroscopic Imaging can be performed in the
hippocampus.
Single Voxel Spectroscopy

Single Voxel Spectroscopy is most commonly used as volume positioning is most easily
performed. A spectrum is usually acquired on the right and left side for comparison reasons.
Spectroscopic imaging
Spectroscopic Imaging will generate spatial information and allows for inclusion of both
hippocampi in one measurement. It is however more difficult to perform the planning, as air-
tissue interfaces can not be excluded always, and pulsatile flow of the large arteries, crossing
the CSI-slice, might generate some artifacts.
Philips

9.6.1.5.1 Planning the volume

Status: Released
Planning of the spectroscopy volume is critical in the hippocampal region and determines the
outcome of the resultant spectra to a great extent.
Single Voxel
1. Acquire anatomical images parallel and orthogonal to the hippocampus.
2. Avoid positioning the VOI close to air-tissue boundaries as much as possible (1mm of
distance can make all the difference!).
3. Select "shifted metabolite displayed" in post-proc to display the selected volumes of the
other metabolites, to check if these volumes are not including air-tissue interfaces.
4. If required, change the chemical shift direction (geometry) to manipulate the position of
the shifted VOI.
5. Use RF transition pulse "sharp" for improved voxel definition.
Note that "sharp" increases the shortest possible TE. For long TE spectra, the TE is not
affected.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
6. Use volume selection method sLASER to reduce chemical shift displacement at 3T.
7. REST slabs can be used to cover areas of susceptibility.
2D Spectroscopic Imaging
1. Acquire anatomical images in the imaging plane required for CSI with an intersection to the
area of interest.
2. Avoid positioning the VOI close to air-tissue boundaries as much as possible (1mm of
distance can make all the difference!).
3. Use full volume selection, not SE-slice.
4. Select "shifted metabolite displayed" in post-proc to display the selected volumes of the
other metabolites, to check if these volumes are not including air-tissue interfaces.
5. If required, change the chemical shift direction (geometry) to manipulate the position of
the shifted VOI.
6. Use RF transition pulse "sharp" for improved voxel definition.
Note that "sharp" increases the shortest possible TE. For long TE spectra, the TE is not
affected.
7. Use volume selection method sLASER to reduce chemical shift displacement at 3T.
8. Circular REST slabs with a high REST angulation can be used to cover areas of susceptibility
(skull base).
Philips

9.6.1.5.2 Shimming
Status: Released
The standard preset procedures are optimized to generate good results. However, in
spectroscopy, large differences over the patient population exist and shim results can greatly
vary over patients (e.g. due to the larger size of the maxillary sinus).
Iterative VOI
Iterative VOI might be the method of choice as it is less sensitive to susceptibility changes than
PB-shim. The shim results can be examined already during preparation, by popping-up the
monitoring window ("windows"-key, click monitoring in taskbar).
If shimming is completed, the FWHM of the water peak is displayed. If this value is larger than
usual, the water suppression window should be widened, to obtain full water suppression of
the entire water peak.
The position of the metabolites of interest should be taken into account: the signal of choline,
at a distance of ~1.4 ppm on the right of water, should NOT be hit by the water suppression
pulses.
Inspect monitoring during iterative VOI shimming to judge the water peak’s width.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

REST slabs can be used to add extra outer volume suppression to reduce spurious signals of
non-suppressed water.
9.6.1.6 Prostate
Status: Released
Regular MR imaging is well used for prostate imaging. It is known however, that differentiation
between benign hyperplasia and malignant carcinoma is not always easy. Additionally, normal
appearing prostate MRI doesn't always exclude presence of cancer.
MR spectroscopy is considered a helpful tool as a non-invasive monitoring of metabolite
changes that might precede anatomical changes in pathological processes.
Fig. 483: SVS, TR 1200 ms, TE 132 ms at 3.0T.
The main metabolite of interest in prostate spectroscopy is citrate (~2.6 ppm), that is the most
dominant signal in normal prostate tissue. Changes in citrate level and, additionally, in choline
levels, are said to be indicators of pathological changes:
Philips

• High level of choline, reduced level of citrate in tumors.

– Possibly caused by cells that produce citrate being replaced by malignant epithelial cells.
• High level of choline-containing metabolites can be seen in BPH (benign prostate
hyperplasia), while citrate level remains constant.
– Possibly caused by increased rate of cell proliferation.
9.6.1.6.1 Patient preparation and coil choice

Status: Released
Patient preparation
The prostate is a relatively small structure, and its position in the abdomen can slightly vary due
to bowel motion, bladder filling etc.
If the position of the prostate changes during the spectroscopy scan, partial volume effects
occur, and the resultant spectra will not be optimal.
It is therefore important to prepare the patient:
• Make sure patient has empty bladder
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Avoid scanning directly after lunch (bowel motion)

• Consider use of intra-muscular glucagon immediately before acquisition to reduce effects of
bowel peristaltis
• If the Endo-coil is used: cleanse rectum prior to examination
• Timing: post-biopsy haemorrhage can obscure MR images of the prostate, complicating
MRS planning: avoid scanning within 3 weeks after biopsy.
Coil choice
Node title (original): Coil choice Prostate ID: 9007288869528971
Affix: Ingenia Ambition Elition CX(Optimus) MR7700 Status: Released
Since all Ingenia coils can be used for MR spectroscopy, coil selection will depend on the
imaging coil used, as it is most convenient to use the same coil for both imaging and
spectroscopy. For prostate examinations, the dS Torso coil solution is applicable
End fragment title: Coil choice Prostate
Node title (original): Coil choice Prostate ID: 9007288869530507

Affix: Multiva Prodiva(Jaguar) Achieva Status: Released
Philips

Since all coils can be used for MR spectroscopy, coil selection will depend on the imaging coil
used, as it is most convenient to use the same coil for both imaging and spectroscopy.
End fragment title: Coil choice Prostate
9.6.1.6.2 Scan method

Status: Released
Single Voxel Spectroscopy

Can easily be performed in the prostate to acquire a good signal-to-noise spectrum in a few
minutes.
In general CSI (2D or 3D) is preferred, as spatial information can be obtained.
2DSI
• Small volume, thin slice for good spatial resolution
• FOV not large enough to prevent fold-over: full PRESS volume selection
• Large number of phase encodings required for optimal point spread function: lots of
"empty" voxels outside the selected (PRESS) volume.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Single slice not optimal for coverage of prostatic gland.
NOTICE
Multislice should not be used as a full PRESS volume selection is required.
3DSI
• block-shaped volume can best be adapted to the size / shape of the prostate.
• Number of phase encoding steps in-plane reduced, and increased in slice direction: total
number of steps sufficient for good voxel delineation.
Once planning of 2DSI / 3DSI is finished, one can acquire a quick SVS with equal volume
positioning to make sure that spectrum quality is edequate before spending long scan times on
CSI.
Philips
Fig. 484: Examples.


Status: Released
Volume positioning in prostate spectroscopy is critical, and should be performed very carefully:
• Include only prostate tissue in the VOI for optimal shimming (surrounding fat causes
susceptibility changes).
– Optimal shimming is required to separate choline, creatine (and spermine), and to
separate J-coupling of citrate.
NOTICE
If fat tissue is completely excluded from the VOI, fat suppression is not required.
• Use anatomical (T2) image with fat suppression in at least one plane: the (high signal of)
prostate gland is nicely separated from the suppressed fat.
• REST can be used
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
– for additional volume definition

– to suppress unwanted signals of surrounding fat
– to define a smaller volume within an overprescribed volume (to reduce chemical shift
displacement).
Status: Released
The echo time chosen determines the appearance of the spectrum and mainly is of influence on
the appearance of J-coupled systems. Citrate is a strongly coupled system, splitting into a
quartet. The appearance of the citrate peak rapidly changes with varying echo times, and its
behaviour is field strength dependent.
Reference article for 3T:"optimizing PRESS localized citrate detection at 3T", from A.
Trabesinger et al, MRM 54:51-58 (2005)
Optimal TE
Citrate has a positive sign.
• for 1.5T: 120 ms - 130 ms.
• for 3.0T: 132 ms
Philips

Fig. 485: Citrate peak appearance.
Examples
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 486: SVS prostate in a volunteer on a 1.5T system: TE 120 ms. Philips

Fig. 487: SVS prostate in a volunteer on a 3.0T system: TE 132 ms.
9.6.1.6.5 Water and fat suppression

Status: Released
All available suppression techniques can be used for water and fat suppression. This section
describes the most commonly used techniques for prostate spectroscopy.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
9.6.1.6.5.1 Fat suppression

Status: Released
Fat suppression is required for prostate spectroscopy if the volume is larger than the prostate
gland. This is usually the case in CSI.
SPAIR fat suppression

• is used best to obtain homogeneous fat suppression, independent of B1-variations.
– The SPAIR IR delay is to be set such that fat signal is nulled at the time of the excitation.
The optimal delay is related to the SPAIR-TR, that can be found on the info page.
– If SPAIR-TR is sufficiently long to allow (nearly) complete T1-relaxation of the fat signal,
the SPAIR-IR delay is equal to the STIR-inversion delay time for fat suppression.
Node title (original): 1.5 and 3.0T ID: 18014483395609355

Affix: incl. Ambition R571 Status: Released
Philips

At field strength SPAIR-IR delay
1.5T +/- 165 ms
3.0T +/- 200 ms
Tab. 48: Guideline for optimum abdominal fat suppression

End fragment title: 1.5 and 3.0T

Affix: Obsolete Status: Released
At field strength SPAIR-IR delay
1.5T +/- 165 ms
Tab. 49: Guideline for optimum abdominal fat suppression

• The SPAIR offset determines the transition between non-suppressed and suppressed tissue,
and should be chosen such that the adjacent metabolites of interest are not suppressed.
The closest metabolite of interest is citrate, at ~2.6 ppm. Suppression can safely be
performed up to ~2.0 ppm, leading to a frequency offset of +/- 0.7 ppm.
BASING pulse
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The BASING pulse can also be added to the sequence for (additional) fat suppression.
Optimization is not required. Additional pulses and gradients are placed in the sequence,
thereby increasing the shortest TE. As the optimal TE in prostate spectrscopy is usually long, the
pulse will easily fit in.
Frequency offset of the pulse must be set to the fat frequency.
Advantage
• no prepulse
• doesn’t add to minimal TR
Disadvantage
• Fat suppression might be less complete
9.6.1.6.5.2 Water suppression

Status: Released
Water suppression can be performed using either a water suppression prepulse, like excitation,
or using the BASING pulse, or using a combination of both techniques.
If SPAIR and WS excitation are combined, the water suppression prepulses are the first pulses
of the sequence. WS excitation angle is such that both water and fat signals will be nulled at the
start of the excitation.
Philips

9.6.1.7 Breast
Status: Released
Breast spectroscopy is regularly performed, mainly to measure choline levels (and choline/fat
or choline/creatine ratios) in the volume of interest.
Coil choice
Since all breast coils can be used for MR spectroscopy, coil selection will depend on the imaging
coil used, as it is most convenient to use the same coil for both imaging and spectroscopy.

Status: Released
Single Voxel Spectroscopy is most commonly performed. Two approaches for SVS planning are
described below.
First approach
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Plan the volume size such that only lesion is included, leading to no partial volume effects with
fatty tissue, but also leading to a (slight) underestimation of the metabolite levels, as the lesion
is not completely included.
Advantages
• As surrounding fatty tissue is not included in the VOI, fat suppression might not be required.
This allows for detection of free lipids.
• Shimming is easy, no susceptibility changes in the VOI.
Second approach
Plan the volume size such that the complete lesion is included, including some of the
surrounding fat tissue. Better estimation of metabolite levels in the lesion. Fat suppression
should be applied to suppress fat tissue.
Philips

Fig. 488: SVS in breast tumor: TR 1500 ms, TE 270 ms. Elevated choline level.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
All available suppression techniques can be used for water and fat suppression. For more
information refer to the section on prostate.
NOTICE
Multiple suppression techniques can be combined to suppress a specific tissue’s signal.
Example
Use SPAIR and BASING pulse for fat suppression.
Status: Released
The recommendations for the TE are:

• Use a long TE for choline detection of ~288 ms.
• Use a short TE to measure water/fat or choline/fat ratios.
Philips

9.6.1.8 Liver
Status: Released
The main application of liver spectroscopy is measuring water/fat ratios to detect fatty liver.
Additionally, evaluation of lesions can be performed. In this case, choline and creatine are the
main metabolites of interest.
Coil choice
Node title (original): Coil choice liver ID: 9007288869719307
Affix: Ingenia Ambition Elition CX(Optimus) MR7700 Status: Released
Since all Ingenia coils can be used for MR spectroscopy, coil selection will depend on the
imaging coil used, as it is most convenient to use the same coil for both imaging and
spectroscopy. For liver examinations, the dS Torso coil solution is applicable.
End fragment title: Coil choice liver
Node title (original): Coil choice liver ID: 9007288869720843

Affix: Achieva Multiva Prodiva(Jaguar) Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: Coil choice liver

Status: Released
Single Voxel Spectroscopy is most commonly performed. Two approaches for SVS planning are
described below.
Complete liver evaluation

• Plan a large volume including a large part of the liver.
• Avoid to position the VOI close to the rims of the liver to ensure that surrounding tissue
(lungs!) will not move in and out of the selected volume during breathing.
Lesion evaluation
• Adapt the VOI size to the lesion.
• Avoid partial volume effects with surrounding liver tissue.

Status: Released
Philips

All available water and fat suppression techniques can be applied for liver spectroscopy as well.
In examination of fatty liver, however, suppression is not used as the main metabolites of
interest are water and fat. Concentrations of water and fat are high, and the number of
measurements to obtain good signal-to-noise ratio is relatively low.
For more information refer to the corresponding section on prostate.
Status: Released
A short TE should be used as fat has a relatively short T2 relaxation time. At long TE, the fat
signal has decayed to a greater extent as the signal of water, leading to incorrect ratio values.
The recommendations for the TE are:
• Use a short TE to measure choline/creatine, creatine/fat or choline/fat ratios.
Note that STEAM could be used to achieve shortest possible TE.
9.6.1.8.4 Respiratory compensation
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Free breathing experiments are mainly performed. As liver tissue moves in and out of the
selected volume, partial volume effects can be present. Depending on the voxel position this
can be more severe. The least motion will occur when the volume is positioned more posterior
or more inferior.
Breathhold imaging by means of dynamic scans

Dynamic scanning can be used to divide the acquisition into several breathholds.
In this case, it is advised to use PB-autoshim instead of iterative VOI shimming, as the
preparation phase can be performed in breathhold as well.
9.6.1.9 Muscle
Status: Released
Proton spectroscopy is mainly performed in muscle tissue to measure intra-and extra-

myocellular lipids and energy metabolism disorders. Splitting of the fat peak is mainly caused by
the fact that the fibers of the muscle are parallel to the magnetic field.
Coil choice
Node title (original): Coil choice muscle all systems ID: 89615014411
Status: Released
Philips

End fragment title: Coil choice muscle all systems

Status: Released
Single voxel techniques and CSI can be used.

As the main metabolite of interest is fat being present in the muscle, it is very important that
surrounding fat signals are not included in the volume of interest.
Another point of attention is the presence of vessels, as (pulsatile) flow can cause ghosting
artifacts in phase encoding direction. As two phase encoding directions are used in
spectroscopy, ghosting could occur in two directions.
REST slabs can be positioned around the volume of interest to suppress the signals of flowing
blood, thereby reducing possible ghosting.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
• A short TE (of approximately 40 ms) is mainly used to reliably detect the fat signal.
• A long TE (of approximately 288 ms) is mainly used to detect creatine and TMA
(trimethylammonium).
Fig. 489: Spine muscle spectrum at 3.0T. TR 2000 ms, TE 40 ms. Elevated choline level. The two left images show the VOI, the right image
the zoomed spectrum.
9.6.2 MEGA
Affix: for IFU without: How does MEGA work?, without: ID: 116984026507
gradient diagram and so on Status: Released
Node title (original): 1 - overview table MEGA ID: 86115421835

Status: Released
Philips

Pulse Sequence MEGA is a spectral editing and subtraction technique designed for the detection of the
neurotransmitter GABA at 3.0 ppm in the brain.
Properties • Is a technique utilizing J-editing with subtraction of spectra.

• Provides a spectrum with GABA peak.
• Is used with the volume selection method PRESS.
Limitations Only available on 3.0T MRI systems.
Scan modes • SV
Tab. 50: Overview

End fragment title: 1 - overview table MEGA
Node title (original): 2 - What is MEGA? ID: 86115428235

Status: Released
What is MEGA?
MEGA (named after its inventors Mescher and Garwood) is a spectral editing and subtraction
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

technique designed for the detection of GABA. GABA (ɣ-aminobutyric acid) is the major
inhibitory neurotransmitter in the central nervous system. All resonance signals (peaks) of
GABA are overlapping with other resonances, making direct detection impossible. The MEGA
technique separates GABA signals from stronger overlying signals of other metabolites.
End fragment title: 2 - What is MEGA?
Node title (original): 5 - Behavior - Recommended: artifact level ID: 86115433483

Status: Released
Artifact level
Since MEGA is a subtraction technique, there is always the risk of data corruption by motion
between the acquisition of the ON and the OFF spectrum. It is recommended to set frequency
stabilization equal to VOI to update the b0 at the start of each dynamic to compensate for field
drift.
{ Marshall, Tom, 6/11/2018 9:01:10 AM: with link to related artifact chapter in IFU if applicable
AND countermeasure!}
End fragment title: 5 - Behavior - Recommended: artifact level
Node title (original): 7 - Data Export ID: 87427326475

Status: Released
Data Export
All ON and OFF acquisitions of a MEGA scan are stored and exported separately in the order in
which they are acquired. Data can be exported as DICOM or SDAT/SPAR files.
End fragment title: 7 - Data Export
Node title (original): 8 - SpectroView ID: 87427328011

Status: Released
Philips

MR Elastography (MRE) Advanced Operation
SpectroView
When loading a MEGA dataset into SpectroView:
• Choose Brain for Anatomy.
• All ON and OFF spectra are separately shown in the order of acquisition.
• Select the GABA script to display the averaged difference spectrum (based on all ON-OFF
spectra of the complete dataset) and showing the fitted GABA signal at 3.0 ppm.
SpectroView is unable to open MEGA data that have been exported to PACS and are re-
imported from PACS.
End fragment title: 8 - SpectroView
Node title (original): 9 - more information ID: 86115451531

Status: Released
More information
• In the Online Help (F1): imaging parameter MEGA ON
• In the Online Help (F1): imaging parameter MEGA OFF
• In the Online Help (F1): imaging parameter Frequency stabilization
• In the Online Help (F1): Scan Methods MEGA with information how MEGA works
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 9 - more information
9.7 MR Elastography (MRE)

Affix: check for China, according to latest CFDA IFU NOT for ID: 9007316237322507
Ingenia/Optimus in China Status: NotReleased
MR Elastography (MRE) is a software and hardware option intended for use on Philips MRI
Systems for producing images representing tissue stiffness of the abdominal area, such as liver
and muscle. MRE allows for FFE and/or SE-EPI acquisition, depending on the configuration.
MRE relies on a phase-sensitive gradient echo or spin echo acquisition, acquired at multiple
time points for each planned slice. This acquisition is performed while an external device
(Resoundant device) provides vibration at a predetermined frequency.
NOTICE
The Resoundant device is labeled as MR Unsafe. Do not take it into the examination room.
MRE generates FFE or SE-EPI Modulus, and MRE Phase images. MRE Phase images are sensitive
to the external vibration and can be processed to produce images representing tissue stiffness,
called MRE Stiffness images.
MRE Stiffness images, when interpreted by a trained physician, provide additional information
Philips
that may assist diagnosis.

Advanced Operation Imaging Techniques
MRE in MRI examinations

Philips imaging protocols that use MRE are delivered with the MR Elastography feature. It is
recommended to use these MRE protocols.
Enable or disable MRE

MRE can be enabled or disabled. Go to the Motion tab and click the imaging parameter MRE
Enable.
The MRE Enable parameter can be set to:
Possible values Effect
No MRE is disabled
Yes MRE is enabled
9.8 Imaging Techniques

Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

9.8.1 SyntAc or Multi-Dynamic Multi-Echo (MDME)
Affix: NOT for Multiva, NOT for Prodiva! ID: 9007316232079499
Node title (original): MDME concept ID: 116977499531

Status: Released
{ Geenen, Hubert, 5/25/2018 12:29:18 PM: HG: Coverted to international: MR00209929 Enable
SyntAc/MDME for US market based on clearance of K173451 }
SyntAc is a dynamic fast imaging method which produces multi-contrast data that is intended
to be processed with the SyMRI processing application by SyntheticMR AB, Sweden:
http://www.syntheticmr.com
What are the main properties of SyntAc?

• SyntAc provides a single MR scan with multiple contrast weightings as input for SyMRI
processing software.
• The SyntAc sequence acquires four dynamics with two echoes (also known as MultiDynamic
MultiEcho MDME).
• SyntAc can only be used in brain imaging of pediatric and adult examinations.
• SyntAc acquisitions provide you with Modulus and Phase images.
SyntAc scanning and postprocessing

• Philips imaging protocols utilizing SyntAc are delivered with the MR system. It is
recommended to use these protocols.
Philips

Imaging Techniques Advanced Operation
• Always check the individual SyntAc images for gross artifacts.

• SyntAc images are intended for processing with the SyMRI application, product of
SyntheticMR AB, Sweden.
• SyMRI calculates T1, T2 and PD parameter maps and generates synthetic images (T1W,
T2W, FLAIR).
• Refer to the SyMRI User Manual for further instructions and image quality considerations.
• It is recommended to process the data with SyMRI for a quality check prior to releasing the
patient from the MR system.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Philips

• To generate synthesized images in multiple orientations, SyntAc must be scanned in each

orientation separately.
End fragment title: MDME concept
Acquired images:
• 4 dynamics
• 2 echoes
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Synthesized images
Adjusting contrast:
1. adjusting TE
2. adjusting TR
3. adjusting TI
More information
• In the Online Help/Scan Methods: How does SyntAc work?
• In the Online Help/Parameters: How to enable SyntAc? (MDME imaging parameter)
Philips

9.8.2 3D APT
Status: NotReleased

Affix: 3D APT: only 3T (NO Prodiva, NO Multiva, NO MR5300, no ID: 129076555403
Ambition) Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 1 overview table (IFU) - non-China (Rest of ID: 129085610635
World except for China) Status: NotReleased
Pulse Sequence 3D APT (in the following referred to as APT) is an amide proton saturation technique which
uses a multi-point mDIXON 3D-TSE sequence to produce an APT weighted (APTW) image
contrast.
Properties • Only available on 3.0T.

• APT scans provide APTW images with a color map (overlay).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• APT scans provide S0 images as anatomical reference and for quality control.
Limitations • APT imaging is not designed to support absolute quantification.

• Contrast agent spoils the effects of APT. Therefore always perform APT as pre-contrast
scan.
Applications • Brain imaging without the use of contrast agent:

differentiate tissues on protein density.
Contrast is • Amount of proteins and peptides that are rich in amide groups, in imaging area
determined by
Scan modes • 3D
Tab. 51: Overview

End fragment title: 1 overview table (IFU) - non-China (Rest of World except for China)
Node title (original): 1 overview table (IFU) - China ID: 129084517131

Status: NotReleased
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 9/16/2021 9:03:45 AM: Difference between China- and non-China
version: APPLICATION (for NMPA, C-FDA). Slight changes in both China and international
version in Properties with respect to S0 images. Added explanation of S0 images being labeled
M, see in PROPERTIES, and made it a bulleted list.}
Philips

Pulse Sequence 3D APT (in the following referred to as APT) is an amide proton saturation technique which
uses a multi-point mDIXON 3D-TSE sequence to produce an APT weighted (APTW) image
contrast.

• APT scans provide APTW images with a color map (overlay).
• APT scans provide S0 images as anatomical reference and for quality control.
Limitations • APT imaging is not designed to support absolute quantification.

• Contrast agent spoils the effects of APT. Therefore always perform APT as pre-contrast
scan.
Applications • Brain imaging without the use of contrast agent:

high APT contrast in areas with high amide proton concentration (for example
Gliomas).
Contrast is • Amount of proteins and peptides that are rich in amide groups, in imaging area
determined by
Scan modes • 3D
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Tab. 52: Overview
End fragment title: 1 overview table (IFU) - China
Node title (original): 2 what is APT (IFU) ID: 129085708939

Status: NotReleased
What is APT?
APT imaging is based on a saturation transfer technique. The scan is designed to show higher
APT contrast in areas where there is increase in amide proton concentration, and thereby
protein density.
End fragment title: 2 what is APT (IFU)
Node title (original): 3 how does APT work (only for scan ID: 129085795851
methods at the end!) Status: NotReleased
How does APT imaging work?

The APT sequence is based on multi-point mDIXON 3D-TSE using fat suppression.
The resonance frequency of amide protons is lower than the resonance frequency of water: the
water-amide shift is -3.5 ppm.
Philips

• A frequency-selective saturation pulse with the resonance frequency of the amides is

applied for 2 seconds (recommended duration).
• This pulse saturates the amide protons.
• Subsequently the amide protons exchange magnetization with the free water pool.
• This magnetization exchange eventually leads to a saturation of the water pool.
• The essence of APT imaging is the signal reduction of the water pool in tissue of high
protein density.
– Depending on the tissue type, the magnetization exchange rate is different.
– This magnetization exchange rate is expressed as asymmetric Magnetization Transfer
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Ratio (MTR) in percentage terms.

• APT scans provide APTW images with a color map and S0 images as anatomical reference
which could be used to check for possible patient movements.
End fragment title: 3 how does APT work (only for scan methods at the end!)
Node title (original): 4 APTw images (IFU) ID: 129085894027

Status: NotReleased
APT weighted images

The APTW images are displayed with a color overlay representing the asymmetric MTR on a
scale of -5% to +5%.
In tissue, local increase of APTW contrast could be suggestive of a lesion.
Philips

Courtesy:
Kyushu University
Hospital; Fukuoka,
Japan
End fragment title: 4 APTw images (IFU)
Node title (original): 5 S0 images (IFU) ID: 129085980171

Status: NotReleased
S0 images
S0 images are 3D-TSE images obtained by detuning the saturation pulses. They are used as
reference in the calculation of MTR asymmetry.
S0 images:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Are used in calculating APTW contrast.
• Show anatomical information.
• Are labeled M(odulus).
You can use the S0 image as anatomical reference and to check for possible patient
movements. Patient movement may produce unreliable APTW images.
End fragment title: 5 S0 images (IFU)
Node title (original): more information APT ID: 129086091531

Status: NotReleased
More information
• In the Online Help (F1): Enabling APT
• In the Online Help (F1): Controlling the amount of APT
End fragment title: more information APT
9.8.2.2 Scanning with APT

Status: NotReleased
Use APT in brain imaging to differentiate tissues based on contrast reflecting the amount of
proteins and peptides that are rich in amide groups.
Node title (original): 1 positioning ID: 129086245259
Status: NotReleased
Positioning
Philips

► Position the patient on the tabletop with their head in the head coil.
► Place wedges on both sides of the head for immobilization.
► Close the coil and move the patient to the isocenter.
End fragment title: 1 positioning
Node title (original): 2 scanning ID: 129088594699

Status: NotReleased
Scanning
⊳ The patient is registered and selected for scanning.

► Select an ExamCard with an APT imaging protocol, or add an APT imaging protocol to the
current ExamCard.
NOTICE
Philips imaging protocols utilizing APT are delivered with the MR system. These protocols use
a maximum SENSE factor of 1.6. It is recommended to use the default Philips protocol without
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
changing any parameters.

Changing parameters can degrade SNR, affect homogeneity correction etc., eventually
masking out pixels and introducing higher variability in APT images.
NOTICE
Always perform APT as pre-contrast scan.
Contrast agent spoils the effects of APT.

► Plan the ExamCard items on the images.
► Plan the APT protocol in the region of interest.
► Run the APT scan.
⇨ APT scans provide APTW images with a color map and S0 images for anatomical reference.
End fragment title: 2 scanning
Node title (original): 3 Controlling APT weighting ID: 129088783243

Status: NotReleased
Philips

Controlling the amide proton saturation

► To control the amide proton saturation, decrease the imaging parameters APT saturation
duration (ms) and APT saturation B1 rms (µT) on the Contrast tab. This affects directly the
Magnetic Transfer Ratio (MTR).
NOTICE
It is recommended to leave these parameters unchanged.
End fragment title: 3 Controlling APT weighting
9.8.2.3 Reviewing APT Images and Maps

Status: NotReleased
⊳ Prerequisite: The APT scan is open In the Review tab.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Navigate through APTW maps and S0 images.
• To navigate through image types (maps), drag to the left or to the right in the image
viewport.
Or use the left-right arrow keys.
• To navigate through slices, drag up- or downwards in the image viewport.

Or use the up-down arrow keys.
► To select the color look-up table for the APTW maps and S0 images, right-click the image.
Then select Color Map , and choose a color map.

• Applicable are: Grayscale or APTW.
• The other color look-up tables are grayed out, since they are not applicable.
Philips

NOTICE
By default, the color scale of APT maps and S0 images is set to -5 % to +5 %.
You are allowed to adjust window width and window level.
• However, windowing changes the color scale and the color scale values (from -5% to +5%
to other values).
• Whenever the color scale is unequal to -5% to + 5%, be careful in drawing diagnostic
conclusions.
► To obtain results from ROIs, select Freehand Contour from the ROI drop-down menu.
• To draw the freehand contour, click an image and drag.
• To finish the contour, release the mouse button.
⇨ The start and end points of the contour are connected by a straight line.
⇨ The measurement results are displayed:
Ar (mm2) = Area
Av = Average value
SD = Standard Deviation
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
MaxD (mm) = Maximum Diameter

MinD (mm) = Minimum Diameter
Perim (mm) = Perimeter
⇨ Black pixels are excluded from the drawn ROI. They are not taken into account for the
numeric results.
9.8.3 Compressed SENSE

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): CS SENSE & SmartSpeed (Ingenia, and all ID: 130450441739
70cm bore systems) Status: NotReleased
This section provides information about Compressed SENSE (CS-SENSE) and AI Compressed
SENSE (AI CS-SENSE).
End fragment title: CS SENSE & SmartSpeed (Ingenia, and all 70cm bore systems)
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 9/22/2021 11:34:29 AM: no fragment needed for 60 cm bore
systems, the table in Functional Description in combination with the correct title is sufficient}

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 1a Table for 60cm-bore systems, and CDAS ID: 130274790795
Status: NotReleased
Philips

Pulse Sequence • Compressed SENSE is an acceleration technique that is less sensitive to noise
breakthrough than SENSE at high reduction factors. It allows to increase resolution
and/or coverage without a scan time penalty.
Properties • Compared to similar scans with (dS-)SENSE, but without Compressed SENSE:
– Shorter scan times, or
– Higher signal-to-noise ratio, or
– Higher spatial resolution or larger coverage.
• To be used with all SENSE compatible coil solutions.
• Can be used in Turbo Field Echo, Fast Field Echo, Turbo Spin Echo and Spin Echo.
Applications • All clinical areas.
Limitations • Cannot be used in EPI scans and Multislice-TSE when Partial NSA is used.
• Cannot be used in non-cartesian scans such as MultiVane.
• Cannot be used with OMAR when set to SEMAC+VAT.
• Cannot be used in MR Spectroscopy.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Cannot be used with dedicated temporal sub-sampling methods (such as k-t BLAST).
Contrast is • Contrast parameters of the imaging sequence being combined with Compressed
determined by SENSE.
Scan modes • 3D, MS, 2D, M2D

Compressed SENSE allows for highest acceleration in 3D scans.
End fragment title: 1a Table for 60cm-bore systems, and CDAS
Node title (original): 1b Ingenia CDAS and DDAS systems ID: 130275015947
Status: NotReleased
Pulse Sequence • Compressed SENSE is an acceleration technique that is less sensitive to noise
breakthrough than SENSE at high reduction factors. It allows to increase resolution
and/or coverage without a scan time penalty.
Properties • Can be used with all SENSE compatible coil solutions.

• Can be used in Turbo Field Echo, Fast Field Echo, Turbo Spin Echo and Spin Echo.
• Can be performed as CS-SENSE (without Artificial Intelligence), or as AI CS-SENSE (with
Artificial Intelligence).
– Compared to similar scans with (dS-)SENSE, CS-SENSE and AI CS-SENSE provide
shorter scan times, or higher signal-to-noise ratio, or higher spatial resolution or
larger coverage.
– Compared to similar scans with CS-SENSE, AI CS-SENSE provides shorter scan
times, or higher signal-to-noise ratio, or higher spatial resolution or larger
coverage.
Philips

Applications • All clinical areas.
Limitations With all SmartSpeed options available on your MRI system:

Without SmartSpeed option(s) available on your MRI system:
• Cannot be used in EPI scans and Multislice-TSE when Partial NSA is used.
• Cannot be used in non-cartesian scans such as MultiVane.
• Cannot be used with OMAR when set to SEMAC+VAT.
Contrast is • Contrast parameters of the imaging sequence being combined with Compressed
determined by SENSE.
Scan modes • 3D, MS, 2D, M2D

Compressed SENSE allows for highest acceleration in 3D scans.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 1b Ingenia CDAS and DDAS systems
Node title (original): 2 What is CS SENSE? ID: 129119587467

Status: NotReleased
What is Compressed SENSE?

Compressed SENSE accelerates imaging, because it undersamples k-space and consequently
saves time. Undersampling k-space leads to incoherent aliasing in the image domain. This
aliasing is resolved by Compressed SENSE, a non-linear iterative reconstruction technique
End fragment title: 2 What is CS SENSE?
Node title (original): more information Compressed SENSE ID: 129120030987

Status: NotReleased
More information
• In the Online Help (F1): Enabling Compressed SENSE
The Acceleration parameter on the Geometry tab allows you to select CS-SENSE or AI CS-
SENSE.
• In the Online Help (F1): Controlling Compressed SENSE with the imaging parameter
reduction factor
• In the Instructions for Use: Flame artifact and how to overcome?
End fragment title: more information Compressed SENSE
9.8.3.2 How does Compressed SENSE work?

Status: NotReleased
Philips

Node title (original): 4 how does method work? ID: 129119739531

Status: NotReleased
Compressed SENSE makes use of incoherent undersampling of variable density in combination

with iterative (non-linear) reconstruction.
Incoherent undersampling of variable density compared to other sampling strategies
Uniform sampling Uniform undersampling Incoherent undersampling Incoherent undersampling
of fixed density of variable density
• k-space is sampled in a • k-space is sampled in a • k-space is sampled in a • k-space is sampled in a

uniform way. regular way with fixed random way with fixed random way with
density. density. variable density.
• Resulting in an image
with incoherent noise-
like aliasing
k-space and corresponding k-space and corresponding k-space and corresponding k-space and corresponding
image: image: image: image:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Iterative (non-linear) reconstruction
The purpose of non-linear iterative reconstruction is to get rid of the incoherent noise-like
aliasing and to produce a clean artifact-free image.
For that reason, the image needs to be transformed to the wavelet space. MRI image
information in the wavelet space is sparse, which allows to identify noise quite easily and
consequently enables denoising. After denoising, the data is tranformed back to image space,
then to k-space and eventually checked against the originally measured k-space data. This
procedure is repeated in a loop:
Philips

1. Incoherently undersampled k-space This is repeated iteratively till convergence is reached and the
2. Fourier transform (k-space to image) using coil-sensitivity resulting image is free of aliasing artifacts.
data and regularization information
3. Reconstructed image (corresponding to incoherently
undersampled k-space)
4. Wavelet transform (image to sparsity)
5. Corresponding sparsity presentation
6. Denoising
7. Denoised sparsity presentation
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
8. Inverse wavelet transform (sparsity to image)

9. Reconstructed image (after denoising)
10. Comparison with originally acquired k-space
11. Output of comparison is used as input for next reconstruction
round.
Wavelet transform and sparsity: from image to wavelet space

The wavelet transform transforms the image to wavelet space. The wavelet transform is
equivalent to a series of special high- and low pass filters followed by downsampling, along the
rows and the columns. In this way details are extracted at various wavelet scales. The full image
is split up into four image types one-quarter of the original image size:
1. A low resolution image or average image (low-low LL filter).

2. Vertical details image for the original image scale (high-low HL filter).
Philips
3. Horizontal details image for the original image scale (low-high LH filter).

4. Diagonal details image for the original detail scale (high-high HH filter).
The low resolution image (LL) is split further into its own average, horizontal, vertical and
diagonal coefficients. As such the image information is split into details and contrast
information at multiple scales. This is a multi-resolution analysis.
Most of the high-value “pixels” (correctly wavelet coefficients) in this wavelet space diagram
are in the top left, and a lot of the diagram is dark. The representation is sparse. The wavelet
space diagram has the same number of values as the image, but the information is contained in
fewer values.
Scaled signal intensity (Int) versus pixel count (Px)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• w - wavelet
• i - image
Since the distributed aliasing (as a result of random k-space undersampling) is noise-like in this
domain, it can be removed by using a threshold. With such a threshold, some values are
dropped and, along with them, the low-intensity artifact from the random undersampling,
without losing much image information.
If the threshold is too low, aliasing is not completely removed. If the threshold is too high,
signal from the object could be suppressed. In both cases, artifacts could occur in the resulting
images. The threshold is automatically derived and optimized depending on each individual
scan
End fragment title: 4 how does method work?
9.8.3.3 Comparison SENSE, CS-SENSE, and AI CS-SENSE

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): Cardiac Example ID: 129275674763

Status: NotReleased
Philips

Cardiac Imaging T2W STIR BB

Acquisition with the same acceleration factor, the same resolution, and the same scan time:
• SENSE image with serious noise breakthrough and an unacceptable image quality.
• CS-SENSE image still with noise breakthrough.
• AI CS-SENSE image without noise breakthrough, but improved image quality.
End fragment title: Cardiac Example
Node title (original): Prostate ID: 129275679627

Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Prostate T2W axial

Acquisition of the same resolution and of the same scan time (despite different acceleration
factors):
• SNR gain from SENSE to CS-SENSE.
• Noise breakthrough in CS-SENSE with higher acceleration factor and increased resolution.
• AI CS-SENSE with higher resolution, and good image quality.
End fragment title: Prostate
Node title (original): ProstateVIEW ID: 129275684491

Status: NotReleased
Prostate T2W ProstateVIEW

AI CS-SENSE with higher acceleration factors than CS-SENSE, reduced scan time by almost 40%,
and good image quality.
Philips

End fragment title: ProstateVIEW
Node title (original): Breast - different acceleration times ID: 129275690123

Status: NotReleased
Breast T2W SPAIR TSE

Improved image quality with AI CS-SENSE in a shorter scan time.
• SENSE with noise breakthrough, especially in the axilla area.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• SNR gain from SENSE to CS-SENSE. Shorter scan time with CS-SENSE due to the higher
acceleration factor.
• AI CS-SENSE with improved image quality in the same scan time as CS-SENSE.
End fragment title: Breast - different acceleration times
Node title (original): Cardiac BB - different acceleration factors ID: 129275696139

(and different resolution) Status: NotReleased
Cardiac Imaging T2W STIR BB

Shorter breathholds, or higher resolution due to the higher acceleration factor in AI CS-SENSE.
Philips

End fragment title: Cardiac BB - different acceleration factors (and different resolution)
Node title (original): Cardiac Whole Heart - different ID: 129275701387

acceleration factors Status: NotReleased
Cardiac Imaging 3D bTFE Whole Heart

Shorter scan times in 3D scans with AI CS-SENSE, with the same resolution.
• SNR gain with AI CS-SENSE which allows for higher acceleration factors, and therefore leads
to shorter scan times.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: Cardiac Whole Heart - different acceleration factors
Node title (original): Brain Hippocampus - AI to speed up, or for ID: 129275706635
better resolution Status: NotReleased
Hippocampus T1W IR
Different use cases of AI CS-SENSE: either to speed up a scan protocol, or to achieve a higher
resolution.
Philips

End fragment title: Brain Hippocampus - AI to speed up, or for better resolution
Node title (original): Brain BB - effect of acceleration factors ID: 129275711883

Status: NotReleased
Brain 3D T1W TSE Black Blood

Higher acceleration factor in 3D AI CS-SENSE, and therefore a shorter scan time than with CS-
SENSE.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Brain BB - effect of acceleration factors
Node title (original): Shoulder - effect of acceleration factors ID: 129275717131

Status: NotReleased
Shoulder T1W TSE

Better image quality in shorter scan times.
• Noise breakthrough in CS-SENSE with an acceleration factor of 4.
• Signal gain and image improvement in AI CS-SENSE with the same high acceleration factor
of 4.
Philips

End fragment title: Shoulder - effect of acceleration factors
9.8.3.4 Scanning with Compressed SENSE

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 0 purpose CS ID: 129120647819

Status: NotReleased
Use Compressed SENSE

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• to scan faster with virtually equivalent image quality, preferably in 3D-scans, or

• to gain spatial or temporal resolution due to higher signal-to-noise ratio with similar scan
times.
NOTICE
Gaining confidence
When you get started with Compressed SENSE, perform the same scans in different clinical
areas with and without Compressed SENSE, and with and without Compressed SENSE AI.
Compare the results and decide how to proceed.
For information about possible artifacts and how to deal with them, see Artifacts in the
Troubleshooting chapter.
End fragment title: 0 purpose CS
Node title (original): 1 scanning and viewing ID: 129120786315

Status: NotReleased
Scanning and viewing
⊳ The patient is registered and selected for scanning.

• Select an ExamCard with a Compressed SENSE imaging protocol.
• Add a Compressed SENSE imaging protocol to the current ExamCard.
Philips

Philips imaging protocols utilizing Compressed SENSE are delivered with the MR system. It is
recommended to use these protocols and use them as a starting point for own hospital-
specific protocols.
► Plan the ExamCard items on the images.
► Run the ExamCard.
► Review the images in the Review tab.
⇨ Compressed SENSE scans provide the same images and image types as scans without
Compressed SENSE.
End fragment title: 1 scanning and viewing
9.8.4 Zoom Imaging

Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Affix: also see MDXHIACQ038a ID: 129076919691
Zoom is a reduced-FOV method.

Node title (original): Zoom fragment without reuse, but with ID: 129121896843
same text in IFU Imaging techniques AND in Parameter Fold- Status: NotReleased
over suppression
Affix: no reuse due to Japanese which needs IFU jaJP and
ParHelp enUS
Zoom behaves differently dependent on the parameter scan mode.
Philips

With scan mode MS With scan mode 2D, M2D, 3D
• enables non-coplanar zoom imaging. • enables orthogonal zoom.

(by means of non-coplanar excitation and REST slabs which A smaller FOV is excited in phase-encoding direction where
are not visible in PlanScan) the excitation pulse is orthogonal to the slice selective
• provides (relative to small FOV acquisitions without zoom refocusing pulses.
imaging enabled): • enables fast dynamic TSE and GRASE imaging by measuring a
– Excellent outer volume suppression, smaller number of profiles in one single shot or in multiple
enabling small FOV acquisitions without oversampling, shots.
thus enabling low EPI factors. – The smaller number of profiles is realized by using a
– possibly increased SAR, smaller FOV in fold-over direction.
– possibly increased PNS. • Backfolding is avoided as selective RF excitation refocusing

pulses are used to limit the FOV in fold-over direction.
NOTE: { Geenen, Hubert, 8/8/2018 12:26:45 PM: related to
MR00213195 - wehen resolved in R5.6.1 this can be remlved}
FH fold-over direction in combination with Zoom (scan mode 2D,
M2D, 3D) is not recommended
Application: high resolution DWI and DTI images in brain, spine Application: high-resolution cardiac imaging.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
and prostate. To acquire 2D, M2D (or 3D) Single Shot or MultiShot TSE or GraSE
To acquire single-shot and multi-shot SE-EPI high-resolution DWI or images with small FOV in fold-over direction.
-DTI images with small FOVs and limited distortion. Zoom enables a shorter (single) shot, and/or shorter scan time.
Zoom imaging reduces distortion artifacts.
IRIS (Image Reconstruction using Image-space Sampling)

Multishot diffusion technique with zoom imaging for spine
examination.
Philips imaging protocols are delivered with the system. It is
recommended to use these protocols.
European Journal of Radiology 80 (2011) e34-e41 f = full FOV, r = reduced FOV

End fragment title: Zoom fragment without reuse, but with same text in IFU Imaging techniques AND in Parameter Fold-over
suppression
More information
Philips

• Imaging parameter Fold-over suppression in Online Help system (F1 key)
9.8.4.2 Planning a scan with Zoom

Status: NotReleased
⊳ In the Parameter Editor:

► Open a MS SE-EPI diffusion imaging (DWI and DTI) scan protocol, or a 2D/M2D TSE/GRASE
scan protocol .
► Click the Geometry tab to display the geometry parameters of the scan protocol.
► Set the parameter Fold-over suppression to zoom.
► Reduce the FOV in fold-over direction, either graphically or numerically.
► Depending on the scan protocol, a conflict may pop up to force the scan into 2 packages.
NOTICE
With zoom imaging in MS SE-EPI diffusion imaging, scanning of at least 2 packages is
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

mandatory.
► When complete, press Proceed to save your scan protocol.
9.8.5 Black Blood Imaging

Status: NotReleased

Affix: MDXHIBBI001 ID: 129122247947
Black blood imaging is a method where the signal of flowing blood is suppressed.
Most black blood methods rely on intrinsic flow phenomena.
On your MR system, two additional black blood methods are available:
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/3/2021 1:33:33 PM: Applications fragment here is still reuse from
old folder (Tiger3), because the Tiger3 fragment is also reused in the Help (twice with BB
parameters).
When the fragment here is converted to copy, also the fragments in the Help can be changed.}
1. Double Inversion Recovery,
2. MSDE (Motion Sensitized Driven Equilibrium).
Node title (original): applications BB ID: 54223308555
Philips
Status: Released

Applications
• Brain,
• Nerve imaging in brachial and lumbar plexus,
• Liver (flow ghost suppression of aorta).
End fragment title: applications BB
More information
For more information about these methods, see the parameter help texts.
9.8.5.2 MSDE
Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): MSDE setting in TSE ID: 52901256075

Status: Released
MSDE stands for Motion Sensitized Driven Equilibrium and is a black blood method.
It applies a magnetization preparation sequence that causes moving spins to dephase, and
thereby suppresses signal from blood vessels with sufficient flow. This is achieved by additional
flow crushing gradients.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
You can use MSDE in 2D-, M2D- and 3D-TSE and -TFE sequences.
You can either select one of the predefined MSDE modes designed for specific applications, or
you can set up your own MSDE sequence by setting the parameter MSDE mode to user
defined.
End fragment title: MSDE setting in TSE
9.8.5.3 Enabling Black Blood Imaging

Status: NotReleased
► Open a 2D-, M2D- or 3D-TSE or -TFE scan protocol.

► Click the Contrast tab to display the parameters related to the contrast of the scan
protocol,
► In the TSE scan protocol:
• set the parameter BB pulse to yes or MSDE.
► In the TFE scan protocol:
• set the parameter TFE prepulse to black-blood, and
• set the parameter bb pulse type to default or MSDE.
9.8.6 3D NerveVIEW
Status: NotReleased
Philips

3D NerveVIEW allows to image the nerves in the brachial and lumbar plexus. It is the
recommended technique for nerve imaging in combination with
• MSDE to suppress blood,
• STIR or SPAIR to suppress fat.
Brachial plexus as 3D NerveVIEW (Nerve STIR) with Brachial plexus as 3D NerveVIEW (Nerve STIR)
MSDE and Refocusing control
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

9.8.7 MultiBand SENSE
Status: NotReleased

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): Intended Use MB-SENSE 1.5T and 3.0T ID: 45036049175269515
Affix: non-US MB-SENSE Status: Released
MultiBand SENSE is indicated for use in Magnetic Resonance Imaging of the brain for:
Node title (original): Bold ID: 36028873077469067-1
Status: Released
• BOLD fMRI
End fragment title: Bold
• Diffusion Weighted Imaging

Philips

MultiBand SENSE consists of an acquisition and reconstruction technique allowing simultaneous

excitation of multiple volumes to accelerate imaging acquisition times, or increasing coverage,
or number of diffusion directions without increasing scan time.
End fragment title: Intended Use MB-SENSE 1.5T and 3.0T
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/3/2021 1:38:01 PM: Fragments are reused from:
* application MB SENSE from MB SENSE parameter!
* Intended Use from old Tiger-3 content.
* MB SENSE principle from MB SENSE parameter.
* Restrictions MB SENSE from old Tiger-3 content.}
How does MultiBand SENSE work?

Node title (original): MB SENSE principle ID: 18014449390938251
Status: Released
The MultiBand SENSE technique enables simultaneous excitation and acquisition of multiple
volumes for multislice single-shot EPI sequences. The simultaneous volume excitation is done
using a multi-band RF pulse. The simultaneously acquired volumes are unfolded by means of
the SENSE algorithm. The image unfolding is improved by introducing a linear phase in k-space
in the phase direction depending on the volume position. This results in a spatial shift of the
aliased pixels in imaging space.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
MultiBand SENSE allows for shorter TRs with the same in-plane resolution and coverage in the
slice direction and consequently leads to shorter scan times. Alternatively the time savings by
the MultiBand acquisition can also be used to keep the TR unchanged and acquire more slices
in the same time.
End fragment title: MB SENSE principle
Principle of MB SENSE with

MultiBand x2.
1. Simultaneous excitation of
2 slices.
2. Acquired k-spaces of these
2 slices.
3. one resulting image before
SENSE reconstruction, two
resulting images after
SENSE reconstruction.
MB SENSE makes use of a B0 prescan to optimize the SENSE algorithm.

Node title (original): application MB SENSE ID: 45036047137005195
Status: Released
Application
Multislice single-shot EPI brain scans:
Node title (original): Bold ID: 36028873077469067-2
Philips
Status: Released

• BOLD fMRI
End fragment title: Bold
• Diffusion Weighted Imaging

End fragment title: application MB SENSE
Node title (original): Restrictions MB SENSE ID: 45036050208330763

Status: Released
Restrictions
• You can only use MB SENSE with the
– dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil.
– dS HeadSpine coil 1.5T and 3.0T
– dS HeadNeckSpine coil 1.5T and 3.0T
• Implants that are MR Conditional cannot be scanned using MB SENSE.
Instead a conflict occurs, since the B0 prescan is not compatible with implants.
End fragment title: Restrictions MB SENSE
9.8.7.2 Applying MultiBand SENSE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): MB SENSE in MRI examinations ID: 45036049175315467

Status: Released
MB SENSE in MRI examinations

Philips imaging protocols utilizing MB SENSE are delivered with the MR system. For ease of use,
it is recommended to use these MB SENSE protocols.
End fragment title: MB SENSE in MRI examinations
Node title (original): MB SENSE Imaging Parameters ID: 45036049175347467

Status: Released
MB SENSE Imaging Parameters

MB SENSE can be enabled, disabled and adjusted by means of the imaging parameters MB
SENSE and MB factor on the Geometry tab. Philips

Parameter Possible values Effect
MB SENSE • No • MB SENSE is disabled.

• Yes • MB SENSE is enabled.
MB factor • 2 ... 4 for SE-EPI Multiple slices are acquired per excitation, depending on the MB
(Diffusion) factor.
• Only integer numbers can be used.
• The higher the factor, the faster the scan.
• The number of acquired slices has to be a multiple of the MB
factor.
A MB factor of 3 acquires 3 slices per excitation. This allows for
multiples of 3 slices (e.g. 6, 9, 12).
• This range only applies for the dS Head 32ch 3.0T coil.
For the other coils, MB factor is restricted to 2.
MB factor • 2 ... 8 for FFE-EPI See above.

(BOLD fMRI)
When MB SENSE is combined with SENSE, the two SENSE factors multiply. The higher their
product, the higher the likelihood of artifacts. It is therefore advised to carefully select the
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
SENSE factors used.

End fragment title: MB SENSE Imaging Parameters
Related parameters MB SENSE

• MB SENSE
• MB factor
9.8.8 4D-TRAK XD
Status: NotReleased

Affix: 4D-TRAK XD ID: 129077586699
4D-TRAK XD (4D Time-Resolved Angiography using Keyhole) provides high spatial and temporal
resolution CE-MRA scans.
4D-TRAK XD utilizes the 3D-FFE scan technique and combines the advantages of dS-SENSE,
Keyhole, CENTRA and Viewsharing.
Node title (original): clinical indications 4D-TRAK ID: 129178777995-2
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/3/2021 2:07:39 PM: Artes Topics: MRA -> 4D-TRAK}
Philips

4D-TRAK might be used to aid in evaluation of brain AVM, congenital heart diseases, cardiac
function, hemodialysis shunts and in diabetes patients with short arterio-venous transit time in
lower legs/feet.
End fragment title: clinical indications 4D-TRAK
Node title (original): Applications 4D-TRAK XD US ID: 129179276811

Status: NotReleased
Applications
End fragment title: Applications 4D-TRAK XD US
Node title (original): 4D-TRAK XD = NOTavailable in Japan ID: 18014451405318667

Status: Released
NOTICE
4D-TRAK XD is not available in Japan.
End fragment title: 4D-TRAK XD = NOTavailable in Japan
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): Related parameters ID: 129158765579
Status: NotReleased
Related parameters 4D-TRAK XD

• Keyhole parameters
• Viewsharing parameters
• CE-angio profile order parameters
• CENTRA parameters
• Mask parameter
End fragment title: Related parameters
9.8.8.2 Running a 4D-TRAK XD scan

Status: NotReleased
⊳ The patient is positioned on the tabletop with the best-suited coil for the anatomy of
interest and all required positioning aids (see Coils chapter in the Instructions for Use for
information on coil choice).
⊳ The images of the survey scan and the anatomical scans are available for planning.
► Add a 4D-TRAK XD scan to your current ExamCard.
► Plan the slices, preferably in plane with the vessels.
As such less slices are needed to cover the vessels.
Philips

► Start the scan.

The first dynamic (which serves as a non-contrast scan) is performed.
After its completion, scanning is paused for contrast agent injection.
► Inject contrast agent as a bolus.
► Resume the scanning.
The dynamic series are acquired automatically, one after the other.
► Review the resulting images.
► Calculate Maximum Intensity Projections.
Examples of 4D-TRAK XD Dynamics and MaxIPs

4D-TRAK XD (without the use of Viewsharing) 4 dynamics. From left to right: early to late dynamic.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
4D-TRAK XD (without the use of Viewsharing): Different Maximum Intensity Projections of the same dynamic.
Philips

4D-TRAK XD: 10 dynamics in carotid arteries, from early to late dynamic.
9.8.9 3D VANE XD
Status: NotReleased
3D VANE XD is a free breathing acquisition method to achieve distortion-free images in 3D/FFE

and 3D/TFE body imaging.
You can use it for late enhancement scans, especially in patients who cannot hold their breath
as long as needed.
You cannot use it for dynamic acquisitions.
3D Free Breathing e-THRIVE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): comparison 3D/FB versus 3D BH ID: 52906269579
Status: Released
Comparison of 3D Free Breathing versus 3D Breathhold

3D Free Breathing (FB) 3D Breathhold (BH)
Suited for patients that cannot hold the breath as long as that can hold the breath as long as needed.
needed in a Breathhold sequence.
Use • pre-/post-contrast acquisition, • dynamic acquisition,

• late enhancement, • pre-contrast acquisition,
• not suited for dynamic acquisition due • late enhancement.
to too long scan times.
Can be combined e-THRIVE and mDIXON all 3D/FFE and 3D/TFE acquisitions
with (3D/T1-TFE, 3D/T1-FFE)
Philips

3D Free Breathing (FB) 3D Breathhold (BH)
Imaging parameter radial cartesian

Acquisition mode
Example of good
image quality
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Likelihood of Depending on the breathing pattern, blurring When the breathhold cannot be hold,
breathing artifacts can still be induced. blurring is induced.
End fragment title: comparison 3D/FB versus 3D BH
Imaging parameter: Acquisition Mode = Radial

The radial acquisition mode in 3D Free Breathing provides a higher robustness to motion due
to:
• intrinsic oversampling of the center of k-space,
• benign undersampling behavior,
• phase correction of the closest radial reversed radial profiles.
Radial Pseudo golden angle sampling is performed.
Philips

Imaging parameter: Number of Signals Averaged (NSA)

The parameter NSA allows you to define the number of radial profiles (and as such the radial
percentage). You enter the NSA as decimal value where for example 1.0 corresponds to a 100%
measurement, and 1.3 for a 130% measurement.
A higher NSA value
• improves SNR,
• decreases undersampling streaking artifacts,
• but increases scan time.
9.8.10 4D FreeBreathing
Status: NotReleased

Affix: 4D FreeBreathing ID: 129075215627
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): 01 table overview ID: 129075774987
Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): VitalEye ID: 129076010123

Status: NotReleased
Pulse Sequence • Free-breathing motion-robust 4D contrast-enhanced MRI

• Available on 1.5T and 3.0T { Heuvel, Martina van den, 5/21/2019 9:02:09 AM: all
system types}
Properties • Allows to follow T1 contrast enhancement in the organs of interest by continuous

acquisition over a period longer than a breath-hold.
• Continuous coverage of the arterial phase.
• Motion-robust imaging reduces artifacts due to breathing motion, cardiac pulsation
and intestinal motion.
• Free-breathing technique making use of either VitalEye, or respiratory sensor or
intrinsic navigators. { Heuvel, Martina van den, 5/14/2019 1:16:09 PM: typical scan
duration: 1.5 to 2 min}
• Real-time reconstruction for direct assessment of image quality in pre-contrast
dynamic series.
• Variable phase definition.
• To be used with SPAIR.
Applications • Abdomen (e.g. liver).{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 10/17/2019 1:48:16 PM: restricted
due to FDA}
Philips

Contrast is • Contrast parameters of the imaging sequence being combined with 4D FreeBreathing.
determined by
Scan modes • Dynamic 3D/TFE

End fragment title: VitalEye
Node title (original): Non-VitalEye and LE ID: 129075845515

Status: NotReleased
Pulse Sequence • Free-breathing motion-robust 4D contrast-enhanced MRI

• Available on 1.5T and 3.0T { Heuvel, Martina van den, 5/21/2019 9:02:09 AM: all
system types}
Properties • Allows to follow T1 contrast enhancement in the organs of interest by continuous

acquisition over a period longer than a breath-hold.
• Continuous coverage of the arterial phase.
• Motion-robust imaging reduces artifacts due to breathing motion, cardiac pulsation
and intestinal motion.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Free-breathing technique making use respiratory sensor or intrinsic navigators. *

{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 5/14/2019 1:16:09 PM: typical scan duration: 1.5 to 2 min}
• Real-time reconstruction for direct assessment of image quality in pre-contrast
dynamic series.
• Variable phase definition.
• To be used with SPAIR.
Applications • Abdomen (e.g. liver).{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 10/17/2019 1:48:16 PM: restricted
due to FDA}
Contrast is • Contrast parameters of the imaging sequence being combined with 4D FreeBreathing.
determined by
Scan modes • Dynamic 3D/TFE

Status: NotReleased
* Or VitalEye (depending on your system configuration).

End fragment title: Non-VitalEye and LE
End fragment title: 01 table overview
Node title (original): 02 - what is 4D FreeBreathing - text ID: 129075456011

Status: NotReleased
Philips

What is 4D FreeBreathing?
4D FreeBreathing is a motion-robust imaging technique (extension of 3D VANE XD) now
allowing for the acquisition of dynamic 3D/TFE contrast-uptake studies.
End fragment title: 02 - what is 4D FreeBreathing - text
Node title (original): 03a - HOW does 4D FreeBreathing work? ID: 129075529227
quick overview Status: NotReleased
How does 4D FreeBreathing work?

4D FreeBreathing is a motion-robust sampling method due to an intrinsic oversampling of the
center of k-space. It offers the unique advantage of capturing contrast uptake efficiently
independent of the scan geometry.
4D FreeBreathing makes use of:
End fragment title: 03a - HOW does 4D FreeBreathing work? quick overview
Node title (original): 04 - HOW - Variable-Density Golden-Angle ID: 129075702155

Radial Stack-of-Stars Acquisition Status: NotReleased
Variable-Density Golden-Angle Radial Stack-of-Stars Acquisition

• The 3D-acquisition is performed in a sliding window fashion (making use of overlapping
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

dynamic blocks).
• k-space sampling is optimized for scan time and optimal contrast visualization.
Acquisition with overlapping
dynamic blocks for continuous
coverage of the arterial phase
• 0 = Pre-contrast phase
• 1 = Dynamic 1
• 2 = Dynamic 2
• 3 = Dynamic 3
• 4 = Arterial phase
End fragment title: 04 - HOW - Variable-Density Golden-Angle Radial Stack-of-Stars Acquisition
Node title (original): 05 - HOW - respiratory soft gating ID: 129076080907

Status: NotReleased
Respiratory Soft Gating

Node title (original): Non-VitalEye & LE ID: 129076151435
Status: NotReleased
• The respiratory cycle is continuously sampled by either intrinsic navigators or by the

respiratory belt. *
From the respiratory cycle, the different breathing states are determined.
• k-profiles are measured continuously and weighed retrospectively according to their
Philips
breathing state (smart weighting).


Status: NotReleased
* Or VitalEye (depending on your system configuration). VitalEye has the advantage of

continuously detecting motion over time with potentially sharper images.
End fragment title: Non-VitalEye & LE
Node title (original): VitalEye ID: 129076313355

Status: NotReleased
• The respiratory cycle is continuously sampled by either intrinsic navigators, by VitalEye (if
available) or by the respiratory belt.
VitalEye has the advantage of continuously detecting motion over time with potentially
sharper images.
From the respiratory cycle, the different breathing states are determined.
• k-profiles are measured continuously and weighed retrospectively according to their
breathing state (smart weighting).
End fragment title: VitalEye
The advantage of respiratory soft gating (compared to conventional gating techniques) is that
the dynamic scan times are independent of the respiratory cycle.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 05 - HOW - respiratory soft gating
Node title (original): 07 - more information ID: 129075602059

Status: NotReleased
More information { Heuvel, Martina van den, 5/14/2019 12:17:18 PM: mandatory}
• In the Online Help (F1): Enabling 4D FreeBreathing (with the parameter Dynamic study)
• Related parameters in the Online Help (F1):
– Dynamic study: dynamic scans per phase
– Dynamic study: phase duration
– Dynamic study: phase start
– Respiratory soft gating
– Respiratory soft gating: motion detection type
– Respiratory soft gating: oversample factor
• In the Instructions for Use: 3D VANE XD
End fragment title: 07 - more information
9.8.10.2 Scanning with 4D FreeBreathing

Status: NotReleased
Use 4D FreeBreathing for motion-robust imaging in contrast-enhanced MRI.

The workflow is identical to any other dynamic contrast-enhanced MRI with a stop between
pre- and post-contrast dynamic series.
Philips

NOTICE
Philips imaging protocols utilizing 4D FreeBreathing are delivered with the MR system. It is
recommended to use the default Philips protocol without changing any parameters.
Changing parameters can degrade SNR and negatively affect image quality.
9.8.11 MultiTransmit
Status: NotReleased

Affix: MultiTransmit ID: 129078124043
Pulse Sequence • Parallel RF transmit technology.

MultiTransmit technology addresses 3.0 T challenges at the source: it prevents dielectric
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

shading effects and it adapts the RF transmit sources to each patient’s unique anatomy to
obtain uniform RF and a lower local RF deposition. For a detailed description see text below.

• MultiTransmit is always on.
Applications • Liver imaging

• Pelvic imaging
• Breast imaging
• Brain and Spine imaging.
• Cardiac imaging
Important
It is not allowed to perform a MultiTransmit scan with the patient in left or right decubitus
position.
MultiTransmit Technology
MultiTransmit technology can be explained in the easiest way by comparing
• single or multiple RF-transmission on the MR system
to light transmission with single or multiple light sources.
Philips

Single light source versus multiple light sources

Illuminating an object by a single light source results in unwanted shading. This is comparable
to the dielectric shading on a conventional 3.0T MR system (without MultiTransmit).
Illuminating the same object by multiple light sources, hardly any shading effects will occur.
This corresponds to the situation with MultiTransmit.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Depending on the object’s shape it might be necessary to adapt the light characteristics (e.g.
power, angle) for optimum results. In a comparable way, MultiTransmit adapts the RF transmit
sources to each patient’s unique anatomy to obtain uniform RF and a lower local RF deposition.
Philips

With MultiTransmit, the power, amplitude, phase and waveform of all RF sources are
automatically adjusted for optimal uniformity in each patient’s unique anatomy. In such a way,
it is possible that MultiTransmit provides better signal uniformity and better consistency.
Examples
Left: patient 1, single transmit versus MultiTransmit. Right: patient 2, single transmit versus
MultiTransmit.
9.8.11.2 MultiTransmit ExamCards
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: NotReleased
MultiTransmit ExamCards make use of the MultiTransmit technology and RF shimming.
NOTICE
The MultiTransmit technology is by default enabled on MultiTransmit capable systems.
Use the parameter RF Excitation Mode in the ExamCard properties to deactivate
MultiTransmit: select Circular Polarized to deactivate.
NOTICE
Performing a Multi-transmit scan with patient position decubitus (left or right) is not allowed.
Node title (original): More info parameters -> Help ID: 1061226507
Status: Released
For more information on all parameters, refer to the system's Help Topics which include the
parameter help texts.
End fragment title: More info parameters -> Help
RF Shim
This parameter allows to shim the B1 magnetic field in different ways:
Philips

1. Fixed
Automatically selects MultiTransmit settings that can be applied to a wide range of
applications. This setting can be used to speed up examinations that don’t suffer from B1
inhomogeneity. A B1 calibration scan is not required.
2. Adaptive
A volume shim box (fixed size: 350 mm RL, 300 mm AP) is automatically placed in the
center of the FOV. A B1 calibration scan is automatically performed.
3. Smart
In SmartExam breast examinations, you can also select ’Smart’. By means of segmentation,
the breasts and the axillae are included in the shimming area whereas the lungs, the heart
and silicones are excluded. A B1 calibration scan is automatically performed.
4. Volume
– A volume shim box can be positioned around the area of interest in which RF shimming
is applied.
– A B1 calibration scan is automatically performed.
– The size and position of the RF-shim volume will be identical to the size and position of
the B0-shim volume.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
NOTICE
The option 'Volume' is available with the dS Torso coil solution for cardiac triggered scans and
InterActive scans.
In other types of scans, this option is not visible.
B1 Calibration scan
The B1 calibration scan is needed if ’RF shim' is set to Adaptive, Volume or Smart. It results in
B1 maps which are automatically stored and not visible for the user.
Since the succeeding scans make use of the B1 map, the B1 calibration scan is the first scan to
be run after the survey.
The B1 calibration scans are inserted and performed automatically. They are of forced
transverse orientation with a fixed FOV. This fixed FOV depends on the application and is of the
order of 530 mm in RL direction and 450 mm in AP direction.
Node title (original): Repeat prescans ID: 9007249671443339-1
Status: Released
Philips

If you want to repeat the automatically performed B1 calibration scan, select Repeat Prescans
from the Examination menu.
End fragment title: Repeat prescans
NOTICE
For cardiac imaging, it is crucial that the B1 calibration scan is planned and acquired through
the middle of the left ventricle.
Reference scan
If a Reference scan is required for a clinical scan that uses RF shim (adaptive, Volume or Smart),
it will be inserted into the ExamCard automatically. In this case, the reference scan makes use
of RF shim adaptive.
9.8.11.3 MultiTransmit Workflow

Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The section describes a workflow with MultiTransmit and RF Shim set to Adaptive, Volume or
Smart in the anatomical scans.
Node title (original): MultiTransmit positioning and survey ID: 50425969163
Status: Released
Positioning and survey

(applicable for all applications)
► Position the patient with a MultiTransmit-capable coil on the patient support.
► Perform a standard survey, in case of body scans in expiration.
► If navigators are to be used in abdomen and pelvis imaging, plan a dedicated survey to aid
in positioning.
End fragment title: MultiTransmit positioning and survey
Node title (original): MultiTransmit planning brain ID: 50425970699

Status: Released
Planning for brain

• For normal brain imaging, position the B1 map at the level of the corpus callosum.
• For IAC or orbit examinations, position the B1 map at these specific areas.
End fragment title: MultiTransmit planning brain
Node title (original): MultiTransmit abdomen pelvis breast ID: 50425972235

Status: Released
Planning for abdomen, pelvis and breast

► Plan the clinical scans.
Philips

You do not have to plan the B1 calibration scan, since it is inserted and performed
automatically. The reference scan is automatically inserted into the ExamCard.
► Press Start Scan to resume the ExamCard.
End fragment title: MultiTransmit abdomen pelvis breast
Node title (original): Repeat prescans ID: 9007249671443339-2

Status: Released
If you want to repeat the automatically performed B1 calibration scan, select Repeat Prescans
from the Examination menu.
End fragment title: Repeat prescans
Node title (original): MultiTransmit planning spine ID: 50425973771

Status: Released
Planning for spine

► Plan the clinical scans.
The B1 calibration scan is inserted and performed automatically.
► Press Start Scan to resume the ExamCard.
End fragment title: MultiTransmit planning spine
Node title (original): MultiTransmit planning cardiac ID: 50425975307

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Status: Released
Planning for cardiac
Fig. 490: Planning for cardiac imaging.

End fragment title: MultiTransmit planning cardiac
9.8.12 O-MAR (Orthopedic Metal Artifact Reduction)

Status: NotReleased

Affix: O-MAR ID: 129078240779
Node title (original): O-MAR table overview ID: 129274781835

Status: NotReleased
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/20/2019 1:01:45 PM: O-MAR is MARS, O-MAR XD is SEMAC. }
Philips

Pulse Sequence • Acquisition and reconstruction technique that helps reduce susceptibility artifacts
caused by the presence of metal in both in-plane and through-plane dimensions
compared to conventional MR imaging techniques.
• Turbo Spin Echo method in combination with VAT (View Angle Tilting).
• For O-MAR with SEMAC: Slice-selective TSE acquisition with multiple encodings per
excited slice (also known as SEMAC) to recover off-resonant signal caused by magnetic
field inhomogeneities, and to reduce through-plane distortions.
Properties • O-MAR improves visualization of tissue in the vicinity of passive MR Conditional and
MR Safe orthopedic implants.
• O-MAR reduces image distortions due to magnetic field inhomogeneities, caused by
the presence of metal.
– O-MAR without SEMAC reduces in-plane distortions.
– O-MAR with SEMAC reduces in-plane and through-plane distortions.
Limitations • With larger VAT view angles (which correspond to small readout bandwidths), edges
along the slice selection direction might appear more blurry.
• The amount of artifact reduction is limited by the chosen SEMAC distortion correction
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

factor which in turn affects scan time.
• O-MAR is not compatible with Uniformity correction.
• Only O-MAR without SEMAC can be combined with mDIXON TSE.
Applications • Anywhere where the presence of metal affects image quality, especially MSK.
E.g. knee, hip, cervical and lumbar spine.
Always use ScanWise Implant in combination with O-MAR for safe scanning of patients
with implants.
Contrast is Contrast parameters of the imaging sequence being combined with O-MAR.
determined by
Scan modes • 2D, M2D, MS

End fragment title: O-MAR table overview
More info
• How to enable O-MAR? (Imaging parameter in Online Help)
• Distortion correction (Imaging parameter in Online Help)
9.8.12.2 How does O-MAR work?

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): How does O-MAR work? ID: 129275218571

Status: NotReleased
Philips

O-MAR is based on the Turbo Spin Echo method in combination with VAT (View Angle Tilting) to
reduce in-plane distortions due to magnetic field inhomogeneities, caused by the presence of
metal. To further reduce in-plane and through-plane distortions a slice selective TSE acquisition
with multiple encodings per excited slice (aka SEMAC) is used to recover off-resonant signal
caused by magnetic field inhomogeneities.
Since metallic orthopedic implants are increasingly common in patients, the need to apply MRI
techniques in the vicinity of embedded metallic hardware is growing. However, MRI images
acquired in the close proximity to metal suffer from artifacts. O-MAR addresses this problem by
offering advanced encoding algorithms that help reduce susceptibility artifacts.
O-MAR produces images which represent a combination of signals acquired at different off-
resonant frequencies, with the purpose to reduce the susceptibility related distortions in
patients with MR Safe and MR Conditional metal implants.
Comparison
Left: Standard Spin Echo, middle:
VAT Spin Echo.
Right: Through-Plan Corrected
image.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Comparison
Left: Standard-TSE.
Right: SEMAC.
O-MAR supports all clinically

relevant contrasts such as T1W,
T2W, STIR (from left to right), but
also PDW.
End fragment title: How does O-MAR work?
9.8.12.3 Compatibility for MR Safe and MR Conditional Implants Only

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): Compatibility implants ID: 129275316619

Philips
Status: NotReleased

Compatibility for MR Safe and MR Conditional implants only

For information about safety related to MR Safe and MR Conditional implants, refer to the
Safety chapter.
NOTICE
MR Safe and/or Conditional Implants
Prior to examining patients with MR Safe and/or MR Conditional metal implants, always check
the implant's MR compatibility as given by the implant's manufacturer. In case of doubt,
contact the implant's manufacturer.
End fragment title: Compatibility implants
9.8.12.4 Different O-MAR Methods

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): O-MAR methods ID: 129275484171
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: NotReleased
O-MAR can be done in different ways:

TSE-based SENSE reference scan
In O-MAR scans, the SENSE reference scan is TSE-based in order to increase the robustness of
the SENSE unfolding algorithm in the presence of susceptibility artifacts.
MARS
A slice-selective TSE scan with high readout bandwidth and high resolution is used.
SEMAC
Acquisition relies on the SEMAC (Slice Encoding for Metal Artifact Correction) technique which
uses a slice selective TSE acquisition. Multiple z-encodings per excited slice are used to recover
off-resonant signal caused by magnetic field inhomogeneities. The output image for each slice
represents a combination of the signal acquired at different off-resonant frequencies.
VAT
VAT (View Angle Tilting) technique is used to reduce in-plane distortions due to magnetic field
inhomogeneities. For this, the gradient applied during slice selection is reapplied during the
signal readout.
End fragment title: O-MAR methods
Node title (original): More about SEMAC ID: 18014416862413195

Status: Released
Philips

SEMAC in more detail

SEMAC is a multi-spectral sequence which acquires additional off-resonant data in order to
recover signal and to reduce signal-voids and through-plane distortions. The number of
additional z-encodings, the SEMAC factor, used for that purpose is defined by the chosen
distortion correction and is indicated on the Info page. In reconstruction, the off-resonant
signal of each slice is combined into one final image per slice.
Effects of choosing SEMAC
• The scan time is increased as a result of the additional z-encodings.
• A minimum number of 2 packages is required.
• The signal is increased as a result of the combination of multiple images into one.
• RF shimming is not allowed in combination with SEMAC.
Effects on the number of slices
• The minimum number of slices is equal to the SEMAC factor.
• If the number of slices is equal to the SEMAC factor, only the central slice of the image stack
will be corrected optimally.
• If the number of slices is larger than the SEMAC factor, more slices around the center of the
image stack will be corrected optimally.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Multistack imaging
For multistack imaging, all stacks need to contain the same number of slices.
End fragment title: More about SEMAC
Node title (original): More about VAT ID: 18014416862414731

Status: Released
More about VAT

The VAT functionality consists of reapplying the selection gradient during the signal readout
and thereby tilting the viewing angle. The view angle is proportional to the ratio of the selection
and readout gradient.
Effects of choosing VAT
• With larger view angles which correspond to small readout bandwidths, edges along the
slice selection direction might appear more blurry.
• No change in scan time.
Philips
• No change in SNR.

End fragment title: More about VAT
9.8.12.5 Imaging Parameters

Status: NotReleased
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): O-MAR Imaging Parameters ID: 18014416849700363
Status: Released
O-MAR Imaging Parameters
To enable O-MAR
O-MAR can be enabled or disabled by means of the imaging parameter O-MAR on the
Geometry tab.
This parameter can be set to:
Possible values Effect
No O-MAR is disabled.
MARS+VAT O-MAR is enabled making use of MARS and VAT techniques.
SEMAC+VAT O-MAR is enabled making use of SEMAC and VAT techniques.
When O-MAR by means of SEMAC+VAT is enabled, another parameter pops up:

Philips

Parameter Possible values Effect
Distortion correction weak, medium, strong Parameter controls the level of distortion
correction for SEMAC+VAT.
Changing this parameter could affect the
scan time, since it controls the number of z-
encodings per slice.
End fragment title: O-MAR Imaging Parameters
9.8.13 Spiral Brain

Status: NotReleased
Spiral Brain is a spiral acquisition technique to provide fast and robust T1 weighted SE imaging
and Time of Flight imaging in the brain.
Node title (original): Spiral Brain - table overview ID: 129075017739
Status: NotReleased
Pulse Sequence Spiral acquisition technique.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Properties • Can be used in Spin Echo, FFE and TFE.

• Compared to cartesian acquisition techniques:
– Allows considerable scan time reduction.
– Reduction of flow artifacts in T1 SE post-contrast images.
– Better visibility of peripheral vessels in 3D inflow angiography (time of flight).
Limitations • Allows to adjust the window in which spiral interleaves (comparable to shots) are
acquired.
– The larger the window, the more k-space points and less spiral interleaves are
acquired.
– With a shorter spiral acquisition window, the bandwidth increases and blurring
decreases.
– A long acquisition window can have some negative effects on the image quality,
e.g. blurring and susceptibility artiacts might increase.
• The spiral fold-over artifact might occur when the FOV is planned too small and fold-
over suppression is not applied.
Applications • Brain:
robust T1 weighted SE imaging and Time of Flight imaging.
Philips

Contrast is Contrast parameters of the imaging sequence being combined with Spiral Brain.
determined by
Scan modes • 2D, 3D, M2D, MS

End fragment title: Spiral Brain - table overview
More information
• In Instructions for Use: Spiral Fold-Over Artifact
• Imaging parameter Acquisition Mode in Online Help system (F1)
• Imaging parameter Spiral Acquisition Window in Online Help system (F1)
• Imaging parameter Spiral Deblurring in Online Help system (F1)
9.8.14 bFFE XD
Status: NotReleased
bFFE XD is a technique to reduce banding artifacts in balanced FFE sequences for inner-ear
imaging.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

More information
• Imaging parameter Banding Reduction in Online Help system (F1)
• Imaging parameter Contrast Enhancement (=Balanced) in Online Help system (F1)
• Scan method balanced FFE in Online Help system (F1)
9.8.15 3D non-selective FFE and TFE

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 3D non-selective FFE-TFE short description ID: 27021685848387851

& apps - also for IFU chapter Imaging techniques Status: Released
Allows you to enable the use of a non-selective block pulse (without the use of a slice selection
gradient). Compared to the standard situation, which has selective pulses, this means:
• Shorter repetition times, or a better SNR with the same TR.
• Shorter echo times.
• Better volume definition and less signal drop in the outer slices.
Application
• Neuro imaging
Philips

• Cardiovascular imaging
End fragment title: 3D non-selective FFE-TFE short description & apps - also for IFU chapter Imaging techniques
More information
• Imaging parameter 3D non-selective in Online Help system (F1)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

Artifacts Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting
Status: NotReleased
10.1 Artifacts
Status: NotReleased
Artifacts can occur in MRI for a number of reasons, degrading the image quality and sometimes
hindering diagnosis. They may be caused by technical problems and data handling or by
physiological effects from the patient. Since most artifacts can be reduced, it is important to
recognize them, and to know what can be done to prevent them.
SYS.Label.IFU.Artifacts.MitigationMethods Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24439
This includes methods of correcting or mitigating such artifacts (e.g. changing bandwidth,
gradient moment nulling, pre-saturation, B0 and RF shimming, etc.).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: 24439 SYS.Label.IFU.Artifacts.MitigationMethods

Affix: Used
NOTICE
10.1.1 Artifacts on High Field Strengths

Status: Released
10.1.1.1 Dielectric Shading Effect

Status: Released
Philips

Troubleshooting Artifacts
Artifact appearance Hypo- or hyperintense areas.
Caused by Non-uniform RF distribution in the body, caused by changes of the RF wave due
to the electrical properties of tissue.
This physical phenomenon is more pronounced at 3.0T since the RF wavelength
at 3.0T (approximately 25 cm) approaches the size of the body, resulting in a
standing wave.
Countermeasures • MultiTransmit technology addresses this problem at the source, no

additional countermeasures have to be taken.
• On 3.0T systems without MultiTransmit technology, dielectric shading
effects can occur depending on the patient, particularly in body imaging. To
avoid these effects, it is advised to used Body tuned CLEAR - a specific B1
filter that is designed to overcome receive inhomogeneities in body
imaging.
Left: Dielectric shading effect on 3.0T system without MultiTransmit.

Right: Same patient scanned with MultiTransmit. No dielectric shading.
Formation of dielectric shading on 3.0T system using single transmission (no
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

MultiTransmit). Without MultiTransmit , a standing wave (2) could be generated
since the wavelength of the RF-wave (1) at 3.0T lies in the same range as the
size of the body: 20 cm to 25 cm.
MultiTransmit technology is designed to avoid the occurence of dielectric

effects. With MultiTransmit, simultaneous parallel RF transmission fully adresses
the dielectric shading effect.
10.1.2 Motion Artifacts

Status: Released
Patient motion is the largest physiological effect that causes artifacts. Motion during the
acquisition results in inconsistencies in phase and amplitude, which lead to blurring and
ghosting. These artifacts appear in the phase encoding direction, independent of the direction
of the motion. The different motion artifacts and their remedies are shown below.
10.1.2.1 Cardiac Motion Artifact

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Blurring and ghosting.
Caused by Signal variation during data collection due to movement of the heart.
Philips

Countermeasures • Cardiac Synchronization.

• Triggering in combination with Flow Compensation and REST provides
maximum artifact reduction.
Related topics • Cardiac Synchronization

• REST
Preset Procedures Cardiac Synchronization is used in all heart and thorax procedures to suppress
these artifacts.
T-spine image without cardiac triggering.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
10.1.2.2 Artifact Caused by Breathing

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Blurring and ghosting.
Caused by Signal variation during data collection due to movement of the chest and the
abdominal wall.
Countermeasures Respiratory Compensation techniques:

• Respiratory Triggering: for TSE and TFE scans with a long TR (1800 ms ...
2500 ms).
• Breathhold techniques: to be used in FFE- and TFE.
• PEAR to be used in SE, FFE and IR.
Navigator echo technique
Philips

Related topics • Respiratory Triggering.

• Breathhold techniques.
• PEAR.
• SMART.
Respiratory compensation
Transverse abdomen, left: without RC, right: with RC.
• is the recommended method for abdominal scans.

• is of minor importance in the thorax area. Most artifacts are caused by cardiac motion.
• should be combined with Cardiac Synchronization in lung imaging.
• is not necessary in the pelvic area, but improves SE images.
10.1.2.3 Artifact due to Blood Flow

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Repeated ghost signal in the phase encoding direction or unwanted high
blood signal.
Caused by Flowing blood due to a misregistration effect of blood flowing within or

through the image plane, because of the difference in time between the
preparation and read-out gradient.
Countermeasures • REST and Shared REST: especially useful when applying two parallel
REST slabs in transverse imaging to saturate the signal of blood flowing
through plane. Blood will appear as a signal void instead of high signal
intensity.
• REST in combination with Flow Compensation (FC) for optimum results.
• REST in Inflow MRA to suppress venous or arterial flow.
• Cardiac Synchronization in MRA to get rid of pulsation artifacts of
vessels.
Related topics • REST (Regional Saturation Technique).
Transverse scan of abdomen:

Left: without REST and FC.
Right: with REST and FC.
Philips

10.1.2.4 CSF Pulsation Artifact

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Ghost artifacts superimposed in the image.
Caused by Signal variations during data collection due to pulsatile CSF flow.
Countermeasures • Flow Compensation has proved to be very useful in sagittal spine

images and axial liver images.
• Cardiac Triggering is an additional option if Flow Compensation is
applied and there are still flow artifacts.
• Inherently compensated: b-FFE (balanced FFE).
Related topics • Flow Compensation.

• Cardiac Triggering.
• b-FFE.
C-spine.
Left: without FC.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Right: with FC.
10.1.2.5 Flow Void Artifact

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Black hole like artifacts in axial and sagittal T2W TSE scans with a high TSE-
factor.
Caused by Fast flowing CSF.
Countermeasures • Increasing the TSE-factor (minimize echo spacing) so that the scans are
less sensitive to flow.
• Flow Compensation.
• Use of b-FFE (balanced FFE).
• Performing a 3D TSE multichunk instead of a MS TSE scan.
Related topics • Flow Compensation.

Philips

Transverse TSE spine with flow voids.
10.1.3 Chemical Shift Artifacts

Status: Released
10.1.3.1 Water-Fat Shift
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Hypo- and hyperintense lines between tissue boundaries

• in frequency encoding direction for non-EPI/GRASE scans
• in phase encoding direction for EPI/GRASE scans.
Caused by Resonance frequency diffference between water and fat resulting in

displacement between water and fat by a number of pixels. The
hypointense lines are originated by empty voxels and hyperintense lines by
superimposed signals.
Countermeasures • Set the parameter WFS (Water-Fat Shift) to a user defined value. Note
that using a smaller WFS decreases the artifact at the cost of SNR.
• Change the Fat-Shift direction.
Related topics • Water-Fat Shift.

• Fat-Shift Direction.
From left to right:

WFS on phantom.
Small WFS.
Large WFS.
NOTICE
The chemical shift artifact increases with the field strength.
Philips

10.1.3.2 Water-Fat Dephasing

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Signal dephasing in voxels containing both water and fat showing up as
black lines around anatomic structures.
Caused by • Resonance frequency differences between water and fat AND

• Use of an ‘out of phase TE’ (water and fat signals are out of phase).
Countermeasures • Choose an ‘in phase echo time’ (field strength dependent). See table
below.
Related topics • Water-Fat Shift.

• Fat Shift Direction.
Left: water and fat are in phase.

Right: water and fat are out of
phase.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
10.1.3.2.1 In Phase and Out of Phase Echo Times

Status: Released
Philips

1.0T 1.5T 3.0T
In phase TE [ms] 6.9 4.6 2.3

13.8 9.2 4.6
20.7 13.8 6.9
27.6 18.4 9.2
23.0 11.5
Water and fat are in phase when the TE is a 6.9 4.6 2.3
multiple of ... [ms]
Out of phase TE [ms] 3.45 2.3 1.15

10.35 6.9 3.45
17.25 11.5 5.75
24.15 16.1 8.05
20.7 10.35
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
These values are based on calculations.
Actual values depend on fat characteristics.
10.1.4 Aliasing Artifacts

Status: NotReleased
10.1.4.1 Aliasing
Status: Released
Aliasing artifacts are also referred to as fold-over artifact.

Artifact appearance Tissue outside the FOV which is folded back into the image, most commonly
occuring in fold-over direction (phase encoding direction).
• In 3D scans also possible in slice direction.
Caused by The spins within the FOV acquire a maximum phase shift of n x 360o. Spins
just outside the FOV have a phase shift of more than one cycle. This results
in misregistration of those spins.
Philips

Countermeasures • Fold-over suppression: Signal from outside the FOV is suppressed.

• Increase RFOV so there is no tissue outside the FOV.
• Change the fold-over direction if possible so there is no tissue to fold
back. This also depends on other artifacts that might occur.
• Use REST slabs to saturate tissue outside the FOV.
Related topics • Fold-over suppression.

• REST.
• RFOV.
• SENSE.
Transverse scan.
Left: Fold-over Direction=LR, no Fold-over Suppression.
Middle: Fold-over Direction=AP, no Fold-over Suppression.
Right: Fold-over Direction=RL with Fold-over Suppression.
10.1.4.2 Aliasing in PCA

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Decreased signal intensity in the centre of the vessel.

If a scan is made with a PC velocity smaller than the peak blood velocity, the
signal in the middle of the vessel is aliased and presented as backward flow.
Caused by Aliasing.
Countermeasures ► Select the maximum (peak) velocity in the vessel somewhat higher.
• Start with a flow measurement in the vessel of interest.
• Draw a ROI in the vessel and generate a Time Intensity Diagram (TID).
• Select the appropriate velocity encoding by means of this TID.
► Make the scan with a lower PC velocity to get a good impression of the
vessel lumen. The aliasing artifacts in the centre are in this case not
important and might not even be noticed in a MaxIP.
Related topics • PCA, see .
• QFlow, see .
Relation between signal intensity and velocity encoding in PCA-M image

The signal intensity depends on the PC velocity: it increases to a maximum PC velocity 1, drops
then and increases again until PC velocity 2. Then the maximum signal intensity at PC velocity 2
is smaller than that compared to PC velocity 1, due to spin dephasing.
Philips

Linear relation between phase (difference) Signal intensity and PC velocity encoding in PCA cross section through vessels:
and PC velocity PCA-M image In a straight vessel, there is only laminar
flow.
The velocity differs over the lumen: in the
centre the highest, at the vessel wall much
slower. This difference in velocities is seen
as phase dispersion: the signal intensities
are a mixture of the velocities over the
vessel lumen.Phase dispersion might result
in a decrease of signal intensity.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

QFlow: Aliasing in the center of the vessels
10.1.4.3 Spiral Fold-Over Artifact

Status: Released
Philips

Artifact appearance Fold-over artifacts when using Spiral Brain.
Caused by Planning with an FOV that is too small and without fold-over suppression.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Countermeasures Use fold-over suppression:

Only one value needs to be filled out, this value will be distributed
symmetrically.
Example of a symmetric distributed fold-over value
(in this case AP and LR have the same fold-over value):
Related topics • Imaging parameter Fold-over suppression

• Imaging parameter Acquisition mode = spiral
10.1.4.4 Flame artifacts

Affix: IFU ID: 9007217371412491
Artifact appearance Hypo- and hyperintense lines in flame shape, especially at tissue borders.
Caused by High-intensity signal from tissue outside the FOV is folded back into the
image, mostly caused by arms positioned alongside the body.
Philips

Countermeasures • Use ENCASE in coronal 3D-FFE/-TFE scans.

• Increase the FOV so there is no tissue outside the FOV.
• Change the fold-over direction if possible so there is no tissue to fold
back. This also depends on other artifacts that might occur.
• Use REST slabs to saturate tissue outside the FOV.
Related topics • Fold-over suppression.

• REST.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

More information
• In the Online Help: How does ENCASE work?
• In the Online Help: How to enable ENCASE?
10.1.5 SENSE Artifacts

Status: Released
10.1.5.1 Intrinsic Backfolding

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Backfolding in the center of the image or or the 3D volume:

• in-plane (fold-over direction) in M2D and MS scan mode,
• also in slice direction in 3D scan mode
Caused by FOV, RFOV or 3D volume have been planned too small. Special attention has
to be given to double-oblique cardiac scans.
Countermeasures Enlarge FOV, RFOV or 3D volume. Increase the flexible fold-over suppression
area.
Philips

Left: 3D - intrinsic backfolding in

slice direction.
Right: MS - intrinsic backfolding
in plane.
Left and right: The ear folds back

in MS scan.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
10.1.5.2 Intrinsic Backfolding of Artifacts

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Fold-over of ghost artifacts from just outside the FOV.
Caused by FOV, RFOV or 3D volume have been planned slightly too small.
Countermeasures Enlarge FOV, RFOV or 3D volume. Increase the flexible fold-over suppression
area.
10.1.5.3 Cut-Line Artifacts

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Dark area separated from a bright area by a cut-line.
Caused by The coil elements move during the scan due to breathing.
Countermeasures Right mouse: repeat prescans.

Philips

10.1.5.4 Single-Shot Sequences and Fat Shift Direction

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Susceptibility related artifact in single-shot EPI sequences with SENSE, fold-
over direction AP and fat shift direction A(nterior):
• E.g. high signal at the border of the frontal sinus.
• Especially in b0 images in diffusion weighted scans. Less pronounced in
high-b images which in turn might result in low signal in the calculated
ADC-map.
Caused by Fat shift direction set to A(nterior) in these scans.
Countermeasures Set the ’Fat shift direction’ to ’P(osterior)’ in all cases.
Related topics SENSE.

Fat shift direction.
Upper row: Fat Shift Direction =
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Anterior.
Lower row: Fat Shift Direction =
Posterior.
10.1.6 Compressed SENSE Artifacts

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): fragment for 70 cm bore systems only ID: 130450486283
Status: NotReleased
This chapter describes the artifacts which occur for Compressed SENSE (CS-SENSE) and AI
Compressed SENSE (AI CS-SENSE).
In AI CS-SENSE, the same artifacts can occur as in CS-SENSE. However, the artifact level can
differ, because AI CS-SENSE removes the noise to a higher extent than CS-SENSE.
• In AI CS-SENSE, the artifacts can be more prominent.
Philips

• In AI CS-SENSE, artifacts can be visible that are hidden just below the noise level in CS-
SENSE.
End fragment title: fragment for 70 cm bore systems only
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 9/22/2021 11:42:23 AM: no fragment needed for 60cm bore
systems}
10.1.6.1 Acceleration and effects of the reduction factor

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): intro CS SENSE artifacts vs SENSE artifacts ID: 18014469850828555-1
Status: Released
Compressed SENSE and SENSE behave very much alike with respect to acceleration, patient
motion and aliasing artifacts.
End fragment title: intro CS SENSE artifacts vs SENSE artifacts
With high acceleration in Compressed SENSE and SENSE scans, noise breaks through and
aliasing artifacts may occur.
The images below show that the Compressed SENSE images are equally affected as SENSE
images: The higher the reduction factor, the noisier the images and the more aliasing artifacts
appear.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• To improve SNR, decrease the reduction factor, or increase the denoising factor.
• To reduce aliasing artifacts, decrease the reduction factor.
Similarly, to SENSE, when the operator selects a too high reduction factor there is a potential
loss of information possible due to the reduction in SNR and increased artifacts. In the images
below it can be seen that there is a gradual decrease in image quality and that artifacts appear
when the reduction factor is too high. The default acceleration factors provided with the device
are optimized for the specific protocol and cover a range from 1-32 depending on the
application.
For contrast-enhanced applications, gradual loss of SNR may be more difficult to identify,
especially with high reduction factors. Do not use reduction factors higher than 8 for contrast-
enhanced applications.
Philips

Comparison without the Reduction factor 1 Reduction factor 2 Reduction factor 5 Reduction factor 10
use of contrast agent
Compressed SENSE
SENSE -
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 9/22/2021 10:23:24 AM: leave this paragraph in to make sure that
tables are not displayed as one}
Node title (original): tabel comparison SENSE vs CS-SENSE with ID: 9007296228604683
contrast agent (NEW) Status: Released
Philips

Comparison with the Reduction factor 1 Reduction factor 2 Reduction factor 4 Reduction factor 8 Reduction factor 12
use of contrast
agent
Compressed SENSE
SENSE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: tabel comparison SENSE vs CS-SENSE with contrast agent (NEW)
Noise appearance
The Denoising imaging parameter allows you to qualitatively specify the amount of denoising in
image reconstruction.
Possible values are:
Node title (original): fragment for 70 cm bore systems with ID: 130450491403
SmartSpeed AI Status: NotReleased
• For CS-SENSE: no, weak, medium, strong and user defined.

• For AI CS-SENSE: no, weak, medium, strong, max and user defined.
– When set to no, denoising does not take place.
– When set to weak, medium, strong, or max, denoising takes place with increasing
strength.
This means less noise in the images, but more artificial smoothing.
– When set to user defined, you can specify the denoising level numerically.
End fragment title: fragment for 70 cm bore systems with SmartSpeed AI
Node title (original): fragment for 60 cm bore systems without ID: 130450492939
• For CS-SENSE: no, weak, medium, strong and user defined.

– When set to no, denoising does not take place.
Philips

– When set to weak, medium, strong, or max, denoising takes place with increasing
strength.
This means less noise in the images, but more artificial smoothing.
– When set to user defined, you can specify the denoising level numerically.
End fragment title: fragment for 60 cm bore systems without SmartSpeed AI
CS-SENSE
Weak denoising Medium denoising Strong denoising

(system default)
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): only for 70 cm bore systems with ID: 130450494475
AI CS-SENSE
Weak denoising Medium denoising Strong denoising

(system default)
End fragment title: only for 70 cm bore systems with SmartSpeed AI
Use this parameter to set a balance between the amount of noise and the smoothness of
images, according to user preference.
• To improve SNR, increase Denoising, for example from medium to strong.
Philips

• To reduce blurring, decrease Denoising, for example from medium to weak.
10.1.6.2 Patient motion and aliasing artifacts

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): intro CS SENSE artifacts vs SENSE artifacts ID: 18014469850828555-2
Status: Released
Compressed SENSE and SENSE behave very much alike with respect to acceleration, patient
motion and aliasing artifacts.
End fragment title: intro CS SENSE artifacts vs SENSE artifacts
Aliasing artifacts may occur due to patient motion during the Compressed SENSE reference
scan, between the reference scan and the clinical scan, or during the clinical scan.
The table below compares aliasing artifacts in Compressed SENSE and SENSE scans with similar
acceleration factors:
• It shows that aliasing artifacts are similar in SENSE and CS-SENSE when similar acceleration
factors are used.
• It provides you with countermeasures for SENSE and CS-SENSE.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Comparison with similar Resulting image when patient Resulting image when patient
acceleration factors motion occurs motion occurs
during the reference scan or during the clinical scan
between reference scan and clinical
scan
Compressed SENSE
SENSE
Countermeasure In SENSE and Compressed SENSE: In SENSE and Compressed SENSE:

Repeat the reference scan. Repeat the clinical scan.
Philips

10.1.6.3 Flame artifact

Status: NotReleased
Artifact appearance Stripes
Caused by Caused by difference in imaging sequence between SENSE reference scan

and clinical scan.
Countermeasures • Decrease the reduction factor.

• Use REST slabs.
Related topics • SENSE
Influence of Compressed SENSE and the reduction factor

SENSE Low reduction factor High reduction factor
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Identical scan and reconstruction resolution, same NSA
Scan time: 6:39 min Scan time: 4:39 min Scan time: 3:29 min
10.1.7 MRA Inflow artifacts

Status: Released
10.1.7.1 Venetian Blind Artifact

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Dark bands (signal decrease) at the end of a volume in the MIP’s (Maximum
Intensity Projection) of a multichunk 3D Inflow MRA-technique. The larger
the volume, the more prominent this effect.
Caused by Saturation effects.

Philips

Countermeasures • TONE.
• CHARM. The artifact doesn’t occur anymore with CHARM being
introduced with Release 9.
Related topics • TONE.

• CHARM.
Left and right: MIP oblique

Multichunk scan.
10.1.7.2 Staircase Artifact

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Artifact appearance Staircase in the MIPs of an M2D Inflow technique.
Caused by Saturation effects.
Countermeasures • Use a slice gap with a negative value. Normally an overlap of 25% - 30%
is sufficient.
10.1.8 MR Spectroscopy Artifacts

Affix: non China (Ingenia): comp MRS ID: 36028806769671947
Like MR-imaging, MR-spectroscopy techniques can suffer from artifacts. Some of these artifacts
are hard to recognize, but can completely alter the outcome of the spectrum. It is important to
recognize the artifacts and to know how to avoid them.
10.1.8.1 Truncation at the End of the Signal

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Artifacts presented as sinc wriggles around the peaks appear in the spectrum. The
wriggles are mainly seen around the residual water peak.
Caused by Signal sampling is stopped before the signals have decayed to (close to) zero resulting
in abrupt signal intensity changes which cannot be handled well by theFourier
transform.
Philips

Countermeasure / Re-acquisition with increased Tacq is the best solution, but time is not always
Solution available to do so. For signal to decay completely to zero, the Tacq should be at least 5
x T2* relaxation time.
Increase Tacq by:
• Increased number of sampled with equal bandwidth.
• Reduce bandwidth with equal number of samples.
If re-acquisition is not an option, filtering of the time domain signal is used to
influence the signal such that abrupt signal intensity changes are removed. Note that
linewidth increases by applyingfilters.
Time-domain signal (A) that is cut off before signal has decayed, and the resulting
spectrum (B). The baseline is distorted by sinc wriggles.
Same time domain signal (A), with additional Gaussian filtering applied (6Hz). No
truncation artifacts in resulting spectrum (B), at the cost of spectral resolution.
Image examples in healthy volunteer:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SVS TE 144 ms. Different Tacq's.
10.1.8.2 Truncation with Maximum Echo Sampling

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Artifacts presented as sinc wriggles appear around the baseline of the spectrum.
Caused by If maximum echo signal sampling is used and signal sampling only starts close to the
echo top position, abrupt signal intensity changes which cannot be handled well by
the Fourier transform will occur at the start of signal sampling. This will mainly
happen if maximum echo is used with short TE.
Countermeasure / Asymmetric filtering is applied with the symmetry point set to the echo top position.
Solution
Philips

A: Unfiltered signal,
versus
B: filtered signal (asymmetric
filter) where TD is the time
domain signal and Sp
thespectrum: truncation effect is
seen in the unfiltered time
domain signal, resulting in
wriggles in the baseline of the
spectrum whereas the artifacts
are minimized when applying an
asymmetric filter.
10.1.8.3 Saturation
Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Artifact appearance Saturation effects in the spectrum.
Caused by Incomplete T1 relaxation.

To maximally measure the metabolite signals, full T1-relaxation is required before the
next excitation is performed.
Saturation effects are seen if T1-relaxation is not complete. The amount of saturation
is different for the various metabolites and saturation effects will affect the values
found during peak fitting.
Even though the saturation effect is not hindering spectral quality, it is mentioned in
the artifact section, as it something to be aware of.
Countermeasure / To allow full T1-relaxation, the TR used should be ³ 5*T1 of the metabolite of interest.
Solution As T1-relaxation times of metabolites are long, scan times would increase
tremendously.
Brain spectra (inverted) from a

healthy volunteer.
The Cho/Cre ratio is changed
from 1.69 (1000 ms) to 1.44
(4000 ms).
Philips

NOTICE
If full T1-relaxation is not achieved within the TR chosen, it is important to acquire some start-
up acquisitions.
These shots are used to place the spin system into steady state.
10.1.8.3.1 Saturation
Status: Released
10.1.8.4 Frequency Drift

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Increased linewidths. Peaks smear out.
Caused by Frequency drift.

As part of the preparation phases, a f0 determination is performed. During the long
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

spectroscopy scan, this f0 frequency could change slightly,
Countermeasure / • Save each FID separately, correct for the drift in post-processing.
Solution
As the frequency of the peak

slightly changes over time, the
resultant spectrum will show up
as a broader peak with reduced
amplitude.
• Blue lines (B): Measured
signal in each respective
excitation.
• Red lines (R): Resultant
spectrum.
10.1.8.5 Ghosting
Status: Released
Philips

Artifact appearance Distorted spectra in row of voxels with equal phase encoding gradient.
For CSI: even in two directions as phase encodings is done in two directions.
Caused by (Pulsatile) through-plane flow:

Like in MR imaging, (pulsatile) through-plane flow can cause ghosting in the phase
encoding drections in spectroscopic imaging.
Countermeasure / To reduce the signal intensity of through-plane flow, parallel REST slabs can be
Solution positioned above and below the stack of CSI-slices.
10.1.8.6 Baseline Distortions

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Baseline distortions, mainly seen in short TE spectra.
Caused by Signals of fast realaxing macromolecules and/or signals of unsuppressed water which
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
are still present in the first few points in the time domain signal.
These baseline distortion hamper good fitting and quantification.
Countermeasure / • In time-domain: take out the first points of the FID with shift with zero padding.
Solution • In frequency-domain:fit polynomial spline.
It is caused in the first few points in the time-domain signal, where signals of fast-relaxing
macromolecules and/or signals of non-suppressed water are still present.
These baseline distortion hamper good fitting and quantification.
10.1.8.7 DC-Offset
Status: Released
Artifact appearance Spike signal in the spectrum at zero frequency.
Caused by Time domain signal decay to a constant, but not to zero.
Countermeasure / • Phase cycling, to cancel the effect in subsequent measurements.

Solution • Subtract the last 10% of the FID.
Philips

10.1.8.8 Incomplete Water Suppression

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Wriggle artifacts around the (residual) water peak.
Caused by Incomplete water suppression: residual water signal from outside of the volume of
interest gives rise to stimulated echoes, causing artifacts.
Countermeasure / • Phase cycling (is already implemented in preset procedures).

Solution • REST slabs around the VOI to suppress non-suppressed water.
• Longer duration of the spoiler gradients.
10.1.8.9 Residual Signals

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Signals around -2ppm and +10ppm in corrected spectra.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Caused by Presence of high fat signal in the reference measurement.
Countermeasure / Reprocess without use of reference measurement.

Solution
10.1.8.10 Stimulated Echo Artifact

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Additional unwanted peaks and noise on the spectrum (top image: see
arrow).
Caused by Unwanted echoes are formed by a combination of the RF pulses in the

sLASER sequence. These signals can originate from regions outside the
selected VOI.
Countermeasures • Enable strong crushers (contrast tab).

• Increase the number of phase cycles (motion tab) as high as possible
(32 phase cycles is possible for sLASER).
Related topics • -
Philips

Spectrum with stimulated echo

artifacts.
The blue arrows indicate the
unwanted peaks and the noise
on the spectrum.
Spectrum without stimulated

echo artifacts.
10.1.9 Metal Artifacts

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: NotReleased
10.1.9.1 Magnetic Material Artifacts

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Signal loss around ferromagnetic material or metallic material.
Caused by • Magnetic field distortions by ferromagnetic metal implants such as hip

prostheses, surgical wires and clips, and also some eye cosmetics and
small metallic particles.
• Eddy currents induced in non-ferromagnetic metallic material by
switching gradients.
Countermeasures • Remove any kind of ferromagnetic and metallic material.
10.1.9.2 Susceptibility Artifacts

Status: Released
Philips

Artifact appearance • Signal dephasing resulting in misregistration at interfaces of tissues

with different magnetic susceptibility.
• in FFE- and EPI-scans.
Caused by • Different magnetic susceptibility (different local magnetic fields). For

example, at interfaces between air and tissue, inhomogeneities are
induced.
Countermeasures • Larger matrix size or smaller FOV (smaller pixels).

• Shorter TE.
• A smaller WFS value and control of Fat Shift Direction.
• Full acquisition (scan percentage 100%).
Related topics • FFE and EPI.

• Fat Shift direction.
Left: Sagittal brain with magnetic

field distortion (hairpin).
Middle: Same patient, transverse
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

scan.
Right: Susceptibility artifact in EPI
scan.
10.1.10 Signal Cancellation (Suboptimal Planning)

Status: NotReleased
10.1.10.1 REST Artifact

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Signal distortion in the region where the REST has been applied.
Caused by Two free REST slabs which intersect each other.
Countermeasures Applying the REST slabs such that they do not overlap.
Related topics REST.

Philips

10.1.10.2 Multiple Stack Artifact

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Black line artifacts in a multistack scan where slices of the different stacks
overlap or cross over.
Caused by When the stacks are measured in one package, the measurement is done in
an interleaved manner. Interference between the different slices occurs
which results in signal loss.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Countermeasures • Planning the stacks in different packages (Parameter ‘Stacks as

packages’).
• Changing the position or angulation of the stacks such that they do not
overlap.
Related topics • Stacks.
A: Planscan of B.
B: Transverse spine imamge with
multistack artifact.
10.1.11 Fat-related artifacts

Status: NotReleased
Philips

10.1.11.1 Fat Suppression Artifact

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Fat is not completely suppressed using the SPIR-, SPAIR- or ProSet-
technique.
Caused by • locally distorted magnetic field (B0): water could partially be

suppressed instead of fat.
and/or
• locally distorted RF field (B1): the flip angle used for the SPIR- and
ProSet-pulse could slightly vary over the FOV.
Countermeasures • There are several ways for complete fat suppression. See following list.
Related topics • STIR.

• SPIR.
• SPAIR.
• ProSet.
• Shimming.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
SPAIR, SPIR and ProSet are critical with regard to the magnetic field homogeneity.
Countermeasures
Node title (original): 1 preparation ID: 120634998795
Status: Released
Patient preparation
• Remove all metal (also dentures, dental devices) from the patient.
• Ask the patient to remove eye make-up (often containing metallic particles).
• Make sure the patient has been to the toilet, because high signal intensities (e.g. full
bladder) may disturb the autoshim.
End fragment title: 1 preparation
Node title (original): 2 positioning ID: 120635000331

Status: Released
Positioning
• Ensure that the area of interest is as close as possible to the isocenter (less than 80 mm in
any direction).
• Always move the table whenever ‘travel to scan plane’ is prompted.
Philips

• Avoid placing two objects (knees, ankles) in one FOV.

• Do not use sandbags inside or near the FOV, because they may enlarge susceptibility
effects.
• In some cases, the use of pads made out of special material (e.g. satpads®) may help. Note
that by putting the pad between surface coil and patient, the SNR may adversely be
affected (larger coil-patient distance).
End fragment title: 2 positioning
Node title (original): 3 parameters ID: 120635001867

Status: Released
Parameter settings
• Adjust the FOV to the anatomy of interest.
• Use volume shimming and select the area that needs to be fat suppressed.
End fragment title: 3 parameters
Node title (original): 4 alternative - use STIR ID: 120635285003

Status: Released
Alternative
Do not use spectral fat suppression on anatomies that suffer from large susceptibility effects
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
(neck, cervical spine, thoracic spine). Use STIR instead.

STIR-sequence
• IR or IR-TSE with a short TI.
• providing good fat suppression.
• not useful in combination with contrast agents since they will suppress all tissues with a
short T1 including contrast enhanced tissues.
End fragment title: 4 alternative - use STIR
10.1.11.2 Quadrupole Artifact

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Signal intensity variations with SPIR, especially in abdomen and pelvis.
Caused by Eddy currents in the patient. This results in B1 disturbance from left to right
and from anterior to posterior.
Countermeasures STIR or SPAIR instead of SPIR.
Related topics • STIR.

• SPIR.
• ProSet.
• Shimming.
Philips

Left: Coronal oblique.

Right: transverse.
NOTICE
Both, SPIR and ProSet are very critical with regard to the magnetic field homogeneity.
10.1.11.3 Fat Ghosting in Zoom Imaging

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Artifact appearance Fat outside the FOV which is superimposed to the image as ghost artifact,
most commonly occuring in fold-over direction (phase encoding direction).
• In 3D scans also possible in slice direction.
Caused by Different resonance frequencies of fat and water.

This leads to phase differences and consequently to ghost artifacts.
Countermeasures • Shimming.
• Change the fold-over direction if possible.
• Use REST slabs to saturate fat outside the FOV.
• Use a fat suppression technique such as SPIR or SPAIR.
Related topics • Fat suppression.

• REST.
Philips

Sagittal DWI spine scans utilizing

zoom imaging with ghosting
artifacts from fat.
10.1.12 Ringing (Gibbs) artifacts

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Ring like or linear truncation artifact, also called Gibbs artifact.
Caused by Reduced acquisition. The artifacts are induced by high contrast transititions,
and are particularly common with scan percentages below 80%.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Countermeasures • Ringing filtering: Pre-reconstruction filter which also smooths the

image.
• Higher ‘Scan Percentage’ value.
Related topics • Scan Percentage.
10.1.12.1 Zebra Stripe Artifact

Status: Released
Artifact appearance Zebra stripes.
Caused by REST saturation pulse interfering with the data acquisition in 3D-TSE scans.
Countermeasures • Change the number of REST slabs.

• Decrease the TSE factor.
• Use an even number of ‘true’ NSA.
NOTICE
This artifact does not occur anymore in TSE scans with more than 1 ‘true’ NSA.
Philips

Troubleshooting VCG Calibration
Left: 60% scan percentage

without ringing filter.
Middle: Zebra stripe artifact.
Right: Planscan 3D-TSE.
10.2 VCG Calibration

Status: Released
10.2.1 Troubleshooting
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Affix: Manual VCG calibration ID: 115359787275
Node title (original): Calibration results into ID: 115359978763-2

Status: Released
Upon completion of manual VCG calibration, the results are automatically analyzed and
displayed as:
• Signal Strength (as color scale and expressed in mV)
• Trigger Quality (as color scale).
End fragment title: Calibration results into
Node title (original): Calibration results color scale ID: 116072958219-2

Status: Released

signals)
Excellent results. Proceed. >2.0 mV <5%
Very good results. Proceed. 1.5 mV - 2.0 mV between 5% and10%
Good results. Proceed. 1.0 mV - 1.5 mV between 10% and

15%
Philips

VCG Calibration Troubleshooting

signals)
Sub-optimal results. Corrective 0.6 mV - 1.0 mV between 15% and

actions recommended. 20%
Bad results. Corrective actions <0.6 mV >20%

strongly recommended.
End fragment title: Calibration results color scale
If the VCG calibration results are sub-optimal or bad, corrective actions are recommended:
Node title (original): low signal strength ID: 115360102667
Status: Released
Low signal strength

Problem The main cause of low signal strength is a sub-optimal lead placement (for
example skin preparation, position of electrodes, distance between electrodes).
A message is displayed when the detected signal strength is 1.0 mV or lower.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Patient condition can also lead to low signal strength.
Message on screen VCG calibration completed.

• Signal strength-1.00 mV
• Trigger quality
Check the electrode setup. Correct if possible.
Countermeasures ► Check, and if possible, correct the electrode set-up.

See chapter “Connecting VCG to the patient” on page 819.
► Click Repeat to start a new calibration.
Alternatives
• Click Accept to continue with the sub-optimal results, or
• click Cancel to discard the results and continue with a previously stored
VCG calibration results.
End fragment title: low signal strength
Node title (original): low signal quality ID: 115360846091

Status: Released
Philips

Low signal quality

Problem During the evaluation of the results, a percentage of false positive, false
negative and not-classified signals is calculated.
False positive and false negative signals are more likely to occur in case of
patient motion. A message is displayed when the percentage of detected false
signals is > 15%.

Patient may have moved. Recommended to repeat.
Countermeasures ► Instruct the patient to lie still before repeating the calibration.
► Click Repeat to start a new calibration.
► If false positive or false negative signals occur during calibration, change

the Trigger threshold parameter for the cardiac triggered scans to avoid
the false positive and negative signals.
In the Physiology Properties window, set the Trigger threshold to:
• Low: With a low threshold for trigger detection, more waves in the
waveform are marked as R-peak. A low threshold reduces the possibility of
missed triggers (false negatives).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Medium: This is the recommended setting and by default used for each
new examination. An average threshold value is used.
• High: With a high threshold for trigger detection, less waves in the
waveform are marked as R-peak. A high threshold reduces the possibility of
false positive triggers (for example triggers on T-wave)
Alternatives
• Click Accept to continue with the sub-optimal results, or
• click Cancel to discard the results and continue with a previously stored
VCG calibration results.
Philips

Effects of trigger threshold

Trigger threshold Patient 1 Patient 2 Patient 3
Low
false positive signals
no false positive or false

negative signals
Medium

negative signals
false positive signals false negative signals
High
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
false negative signals

negative signals
Node title (original): immediate effect on display of signal ID: 116069933579-2

Affix: reused in Physiology Properties of ExamDashboard Status: Released
NOTICE
When you change any setting of VCG calibration, this change has immediate effect on the R-
peak detection.
This is valid for: manual or continuous VCG calibration, inside or outside bore VCG calibration
and change of the trigger threshold.
End fragment title: immediate effect on display of signal

End fragment title: low signal quality
Node title (original): arrhythmia detected ID: 115360226571

Status: Released
Philips

Arrhythmia detected
Problem During the evaluation of the results, the number of RR-intervals with different
duration than the average RR-interval is determined.
A message is displayed if more than 25% of the RR-intervals have a different
duration than the other RR-intervals.

Arrhythmia detected
Consider different imaging strategy (Single shot).
Countermeasures For mild to average arrhythmia:

• In prospective triggered scans, disable arrhythmia rejection.
• Modify the entered heart rate: enter the high value from the observed
heart-rate range, so that triggers are detected even at short RR-intervals.
For average to severe arrhythmia:
• Use prospective triggered cine sequences instead of retrospective triggered
cine sequences.
• Use Single shot sequences. The temporal and spatial resolution is lower,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

but all image data is acquired in one single RR-interval.
• Use real-time (dynamic sequences) for function-cine. The sequence is not
cardiac triggered. It is meant to visualize the heart motion over multiple
cardiac cycles.
End fragment title: arrhythmia detected
Node title (original): vcg calibration failed ID: 115360350475

Status: Released
Philips

VCG calibration failed

Problem VCG calibration can fail due to several reasons:
• VCG calibration cancelled by the operator,
• very low VCG signal,
• high noise levels in the VCG baseline,
• bad electrode contact (loose electrode).
Message on screen VCG calibration failed.

Check the electrode setup. Correct if possible.
Patient may have moved. Recommended to repeat.
Switch to PPU if calibration can't be completed successfully.
Countermeasures ► Check, and if possible, correct the electrode set-up. See chapter
“Connecting VCG to the patient” on page 819.
Alternatively continue without manual VCG calibration and use PPU-triggering
instead.
The R-peak detection is delayed compared to R-peak detection with VCG, but
the duration of the detected RR-interval is comparable.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Connect PPU. In the scan protocols, change the Trigger device from ECG to
PPU.
► To make sure that the displayed heart rate is based on the PPU signal,
select PPU for display in the Physiology display.
► For retrospective triggered scans, the first image of the cine loop is not at
end-diastole but occurs in mid-diastole.
For prospective triggered scans, the timing occurs at trigger delay time + R-
peak detection-delay. If desired, this can be compensated for: Change the
Trigger delay to user defined and reduce the trigger delay with the R-peak
detection-delay.
End fragment title: vcg calibration failed
Node title (original): sensor not detected ID: 115360474379

Status: Released
Philips

Troubleshooting Philips Communication Toolbox
Sensor not detected

Problem If the system detects a problem with the sensor or the
network when a manual calibration is started, a message
is displayed.
Message on screen Sensor(s) not detected or wrong network selected.

Check battery, check wireless connection.
Countermeasures ► Check if the battery is correctly inserted, and if the

correct network is selected.
► Rectify the problem.
► Click Proceed to continue with the calibration.

End fragment title: sensor not detected
Node title (original): lead off detected ID: 115360722187

Status: Released
Lead off detected

Problem If the system detects a lead-off situation when manual calibration is started, a
message is displayed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Message on screen Lead-off detected. Check electrode setup. Correct if possible.
Countermeasures ► Check, and if possible, correct the electrode set-up.

See chapter “Connecting VCG to the patient” on page 819.
► Click Proceed to continue with the calibration.

End fragment title: lead off detected
Node title (original): vcg calibration not performed ID: 115360598283

Status: Released
VCG calibration not performed

Problem You can not start a cardiac triggered scan if manual VCG calibration is enabled,
but not performed.
When you click Start, the scan does not start, but the calibration is requested
instead.
Message on screen To start calibration, instruct the patient to lie still. Then click Proceed.
Duration of calibration is 15 seconds.
Countermeasures ► Start VCG calibration.

End fragment title: vcg calibration not performed
10.3 Philips Communication Toolbox

Affix: MAP ID: 117426118155
Philips

Philips Communication Toolbox Troubleshooting

Status: Released
The Philips Communication Toolbox, in this section referred to as PCT, is an extension on

Microsoft Skype for Business©*.
PCT is enabled for facilities using Microsoft Skype for Business. Communication with external
Skype for Business users may be restricted by local network policy.
With PCT you can:
• Chat with other users (Instant Messaging, IM).
• Make audio (group) calls.
• Share files and screen shots.
• Share your desktop and give remote control.
For description of basic Skype functionality, refer to www.microsoft.com.
* Microsoft, Skype for Business and Exchange are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Multiple remote users

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Chats, calls and desktop sharing can be done with multiple users individually (multiple chat
windows) or in a group. Remote control is only possible with one user.
All active chats are listed in the PCT menu list.
10.3.2 Starting PCT and signing in to Skype

Status: Released
► Click at the top right of the screen and select Skype in the menu list.
⇨ The Skype application starts.
► In the Skype application, sign in with your credentials to connect to the Skype server.
You remain logged-in until actively logging out.
► To sign out the previous operator, if still signed in, click the settings Icon, select File, and
Sign Out.
Other menu items

• Show all windows: shows all hidden Skype windows when running.
• Hide all windows: hides all Skype windows.
• Help: shows help information.
Philips

Troubleshooting Philips Communication Toolbox
10.3.3 Share your desktop and give remote control

Status: Released
Share desktop
► Connect to the remote user via IM or Call.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Click the Present icon.
► Select Desktop from the menu.
► Read the implications and obligations of desktop sharing in the popup.
Select I confirm that, and click Continue to share desktop.
⇨ A blue field Screen Sharing Active appears at the top of your screen and a yellow frame
around your desktop to signal that you are sharing you screen.
⇨ The remote user needs to actively confirm a message to be able to see your screen.
Remote Desktop Sharing

Sharing control allows the remote user to initiate a scan
and table movement
Risk of injury
I confirm that
• I will stay at the MRI Console to monitor the
patient.
• I am aware that remote users have access to private
patient data.
Remote control
► Share your desktop and contact the remote user.
► Click the blue field at the top of your screen and select <name of remote user> in the Give
control list.
Philips

Remote Desktop Troubleshooting
► Read the implications and obligations of giving remote control in the popup.
Select I confirm that and click Give control.
⇨ A yellow field <name of remote user> - In Control appears on the top of your screen to
signal that you are giving remote control.
⇨ The remote user needs to actively confirm a message to be able to remotely control your
system.
Remote control permission
You are giving control permission to <name of remote
user>.
Sharing control allows the remote user to initiate a scan
and table movement
Risk of injury
I confirm that
• I will stay at the MRI Console to monitor the
patient.
• I am aware that remote users have access to private
patient data.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Always adhere to the obligations described in the popup. Remote control allows the remote
user to initiate a scan and table movement.
Stop remote control or screen sharing

► Click on the blue or yellow field at the top of your screen.
► Select Take back control or Stop Sharing screen.
Skype sign out and exit

► In the Skype application click the drop-down arrow next to the settings icon. This icon is
located on the right below your name.
► In the drop-down list select File and Sign Out to end all communication, the application
remains running in the background, or
► Select File and Exit to end all communication and to exit the application.
NOTICE
Sign out of Skype when you end your shift or scan session to prevent other operators to use
your account.
10.4 Remote Desktop

Status: Released
Philips

Troubleshooting Remote Desktop
This section describes the Remote Desktop application of your system.

Remote Desktop enables remote support or assistance on your system.
This functionality enables remote users to access your system:
• ViewOnly: remote viewing of the system desktop.
• TakeOver: remote control of the system desktop.
In a ‘Single Session’ (ViewOnly or TakeOver) you allow the remote user to view your system or
control your system for one session only. After a session is stopped or after a log-off or reboot
of your system the remote connection has to be re-enabled by the local user.
In ‘Fixed Duration’ (TakeOver) you allow the remote user to control your system for a limited
time period, from 1 to 60 hours. The remote user can access your system independently for the
complete duration of the session by using a password protected connection. This password is
set at the connection start up.
When a reboot of the system is necessary, it can be done by the remote user. After starting a
Fixed Duration session the assistance of the local user is not required.
A Fixed Duration session may be used to service your system during the time that it is not used.
WARNING
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fixed duration session shall only be performed with appropriate safety, security and privacy
measures taken according to hospital policies.
Every session can be stopped at all times by the local user. The remote connection is then
closed and has to be re-enabled by the local user if necessary. This also applies to a Fixed
Duration session.
NOTICE
When starting a Remote Desktop session a dialog box appears displaying a warning text. The
session cannot be started before the local user agrees by clicking the |I agree| button.
WARNING
During a single TakeOver session, the local user must stay at the system console and
monitor the activities performed by the remote user.
WARNING
The local user must be present at the console at all times during scanning of a patient in a
Remote Desktop session.
Philips

Remote Desktop Troubleshooting
WARNING
The local user is responsible for ensuring the safe and secure use of the system and for the
safety of his patient. It is possible to terminate a session at all times using the |Stop| button
on the screen.
WARNING
Only expert users are allowed to run a TakeOver session.
WARNING
During a TakeOver Fixed Duration session where the local user is not present, the local user
has to verify that no person is present in the examination room. Take appropriate measures
to inform people that a TakeOver session is running.
Remember that scanning is only possible when the door of the examination room is closed.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
10.4.1 Workflow
Status: Released
Contact Philips customer support in case of a system failure or problem. The service engineer
may want to view your system desktop while you are scanning or access it to remotely service
your system.
NOTICE
It is advised to keep contact on the phone for the complete length of the session.
1. Click the Windows |Start| button, go to |MR user| and select |Enable Remote Desktop| to
start the Remote Desktop application. A dialog box appears displaying the following text:
Enable Remote Desktop Session
A Remote Desktop session has been requested.
If you accept this Remote Desktop request, you confirm that you know that this is an
authorized Remote Desktop session.
You further confirm that you are the responsible local operator for the system during this
Remote Desktop session and have been fully informed about the possible consequences
regarding Safety, Security and Privacy arising from permitting remote operation of the
system, including those discussed in the system's "instructions for use".
During a single windows Take Over session, you must stay at the system console and
monitor the activities performed by the remote user. You can end the Remote Desktop
session any time by pressing the "STOP" button on your screen. As the operator of the
Philips

Troubleshooting Remote Desktop
system, you are responsible for the safe and secure use of the system.
Note that certain private information, including electronic Protected Health Information
(ePHI) about patients, will become accessible to the remote operator. Be sure to stay within
your institution's policy regarding disclosure of confidential information to third parties.
|I Agree| or |Exit Session|
2. If in doubt about the message click |Exit Session| to cancel. Click |I agree| to confirm.
An ‘Enable Remote session’ box appears on the screen.
3. Select:
(a) |Single Windows Session| or
(b) |Fixed Duration| and the amount of time (1 to max. 60 hours) you allow the remote
user to access your system, and click |OK|.
The application is active and a ‘VNC’ icon is displayed in the tray of your Windows taskbar.
• Single Windows Session

A red Stop button appears on the screen. With this button you can stop the session. The
button always stays on top and can be placed anywhere on the screen.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• ¥Fixed Duration
A dialog box appears on the screen with a |Stop| button and fields to enter/confirm a
password.
NOTICE
The password has to be entered by the remote user.
4. Inform the service engineer that the application is active.

The service engineer will start up the remote connection and a ‘VNC server acceptance’
box appears on the screen.
Fig. 491: VNC server acceptance box

Philips

Error procedures Troubleshooting
5. Click:
• |Approve| to confirm a TakeOver session or
• |View only| to confirm a ViewOnly session.
When the Remote connection is active the background color of the ‘VNC’ icon in the tray of
your Windows taskbar changes from white to black.
For a Fixed Duration the service engineer has to enter a password. After the password has been
confirmed the box minimizes to the |Stop| button. With this button you can stop the session.
The button always stays on top and can be placed anywhere on the screen. The remaining
session time is displayed in the header of the button.
NOTICE
Error messages may appear on the screen when the password is not entered correctly.
These messages are for the remote user only.
Stopping a session
The local user can stop a Remote Desktop session at all times:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• Click the red |Stop| button to stop the session. A confirmation box appears on the screen:
‘Are you sure you want to stop the remote session’.
• Click |OK| to confirm. The session is stopped.
When finishing a Single Windows Session the local user as well as the remote user can close the
session.
NOTICE
The start/stop of every Remote Desktop session is logged by your system.
The Remote Service Network logs who has been the remote user.
10.5 Error procedures

Status: Released
Node title (original): HG - Error messages on recoverable errors ID: 9007206350975883

Status: Released
Philips

Troubleshooting Error procedures
NOTICE
Error Messages concerning recoverable errors can usually be accepted by pressing the Return
key.
End fragment title: HG - Error messages on recoverable errors
10.5.1 Scan not possible

Status: Released
When scanning is not possible, various error messages may appear on the text screen, either
during the preparation phase or during measurement. Proceed as follows:
• Correct errors such as: Incorrect coil... , Connector not in... .
• Write the Error message and/or number, date and time in the system logbook.
10.5.2 Computer malfunction

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released
If the application software does not respond (hang-up), stop the application:
1. On the main menu, click System, then Exit.
To restart the computer:

► Press the Windows key on your keyboard to show the Windows taskbar.
► Click Start, then click the arrow next to the Shut down button (the button may also say Log
off).
► Select Restart to restart the computer.
Node title (original): 55516 SYS.Label.IFU.Instruction.HAZ-IC.5.2 ID: 63050413819760651

Affix: Prodiva uMDU Status: Released
On occasion it may be necessary to reset the computer by switching the power off. To do this:
Node title (original): for Eagle(Jaguar) & Rillias 1.5T (Vidar) ID: 27021655416634635-1
Status: Released
Node title (original): SRQ 67889-II ID: 9007267751960587-1

SYS.Label.IFU.ConsoleStartup_uMDU - Eagle (Jaguar) Status: Released
If the computer is located in the technical room

⊳ In the technical room:
Philips

► To open the front door of the DACC cabinet, tilt the lever of the locks upwards and rotate
them to unlock the door.
► On the universal Mains Distribution Unit (uMDU), set the switches F2 and F3 to OFF in the
right sequence:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Wait 5 seconds.
► On the universal Mains Distribution Unit (uMDU), set the switches F2 and F3 to ON in the
right sequence:
► Close the cabinet.

Philips

Step Switch Affected unit Action

number
1 F2 DACC (X15-X20) • Set to OFF

• Wait 5 seconds
3 F2 DACC (X15-X20) • Set to ON

• Wait 5 seconds

End fragment title: SRQ 67889-II SYS.Label.IFU.ConsoleStartup_uMDU - Eagle (Jaguar)
Node title (original): Rillias (identical copy to Eagle/Prodiva ID: 27021666261443595-1

version, except for properties!) Status: Released

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

right sequence:
► Wait 5 seconds.
right sequence:
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

number

• Wait 5 seconds

• Wait 5 seconds

End fragment title: Rillias (identical copy to Eagle/Prodiva version, except for properties!)
End fragment title: for Eagle(Jaguar) & Rillias 1.5T (Vidar)
End fragment title: 55516 SYS.Label.IFU.Instruction.HAZ-IC.5.2
Node title (original): Ambition/Elition-Ustart up title ID: 18014492943320715-1

Status: Released

End fragment title: Ambition/Elition-Ustart up title
Node title (original): 55516 SYS.Label.IFU.Instruction.HAZ-IC.5.2 ID: 36028865530616331

Affix: Best gMDU Ingenia (Ingenia) Status: Released
• If the computer is located in the control room, use the power button to reset the computer.
Philips

• If the computer is located in the technical room:

– In the technical room, open the global Mains Distribution Unit (gMDU).
– Do NOT remove the red panel in the cabinet.
– Flip the DACC switch (check the service key sticker to locate the correct switch) to the
off position.
– Wait 30 seconds and flip the switch back on again.
– Close the gMDU cabinet when finished.
If the computer or application software still does not respond, notify your Philips service
engineer
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Fig. 492: Examples of: (a) a closed gMDU, (b) the red panel inside a gMDU, (c) a DACC switch and (d) a service key
sticker.
End fragment title: 55516 SYS.Label.IFU.Instruction.HAZ-IC.5.2
Node title (original): Elition start up title ID: 27021692198060171-1

Status: Released

End fragment title: Elition start up title
Node title (original): RMM HAZ-IC.5.2 I Reboot from specified ID: 45036064780357131
location (uMDU) Status: Released
Affix: Rilias (Vidar) uMDU
Node title (original): for Eagle(Jaguar) & Rillias 1.5T (Vidar) ID: 27021655416634635-2
Status: Released
Node title (original): SRQ 67889-II ID: 9007267751960587-2

SYS.Label.IFU.ConsoleStartup_uMDU - Eagle (Jaguar) Status: Released

Philips

right sequence:
► Wait 5 seconds.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
right sequence:

Philips


number

• Wait 5 seconds

• Wait 5 seconds

End fragment title: SRQ 67889-II SYS.Label.IFU.ConsoleStartup_uMDU - Eagle (Jaguar)
Node title (original): Rillias (identical copy to Eagle/Prodiva ID: 27021666261443595-2

version, except for properties!) Status: Released

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

right sequence:
► Wait 5 seconds.
right sequence:
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

number

• Wait 5 seconds

• Wait 5 seconds

End fragment title: Rillias (identical copy to Eagle/Prodiva version, except for properties!)
End fragment title: for Eagle(Jaguar) & Rillias 1.5T (Vidar)
End fragment title: RMM HAZ-IC.5.2 I Reboot from specified location (uMDU)
10.5.3 Defective hardware

Status: Released
Node title (original): HG - Do not use a defective system ID: 9007206293231115

Status: Released
Philips

WARNING
If any part of the equipment or system is known (or suspected) to be defective or
incorrectly-adjusted, DO NOT USE the system until a repair has been made.
Operation of the equipment or system with defective or incorrectly-adjusted components
could expose the operator or the patient to safety hazards. This could lead to fatal or other
serious personal injury, or to clinical misdiagnoses.
End fragment title: HG - Do not use a defective system
Node title (original): HG - Do not use damaged surface coils ID: 9007206293234315
Affix: replaced by SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-RF.38 Status: Released
WARNING
Never use surface coils when coil or cables are damaged.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: HG - Do not use damaged surface coils
Node title (original): HG - Clean damaged coils before returning ID: 27021604802751627
Status: Released
NOTICE
Damaged coils which are returned to Philips Healthcare must be cleaned by the user as well as
practically possible.
For Japan: please contact us for instructions before returning damaged coils.
End fragment title: HG - Clean damaged coils before returning
10.5.4 Malware detection

Status: Released
If the virus scanning software has detected infection by malware, there is no possibility to use
automatic repair utilities because the integrity of the repaired software cannot be guaranteed.
In case of infections, always contact your local Philips Customerr Service representative to
assess and repair the system.
Be sure to also adhere to local procedures regarding malware infection of customer systems
(this may e.g. include disconnect from the network).
Philips

Start up and switch off Troubleshooting
10.6 Start up and switch off

Affix: Improved version, incl switch on from technical room ID: 108086410399056907
Last Content Modificator: Drunen, Jenneke van Status: NotReleased
10.6.1 System start up

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): HG - Updated systems may have other ID: 9007206337511435
hardware than described in IFU Status: Released
NOTICE
If your system has been upgraded to the current release, your hardware may differ from the
systems described in this manual.
If this is the case please refer to the Instructions for Use originally delivered with your System
for proper system startup and switch off. Even when this system is switched off some
subsystems remain powered.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
End fragment title: HG - Updated systems may have other hardware than described in IFU
Node title (original): 24678 SYS.Label.IFU.SystemStartup ID: 18014405352745611

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24678
Powering and system startup must be performed by a Philips service engineer. This includes
final adjustments of hardware compensation and control settings.
Under normal circumstances it is not possible to switch off the system completely or partly.
When not in use the system will switch into standby mode after approximately two hours of
inactivity. Power consumption is then minimized.
End fragment title: 24678 SYS.Label.IFU.SystemStartup
Node title (original): 24667 SYS.Label.IFU.PowerOffByService ID: 27021604607299339

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24667
Contact your Philips service engineer if a serious reason exists that requires the complete
system to be switched off.
End fragment title: 24667 SYS.Label.IFU.PowerOffByService
Node title (original): HG - System and all subsystems remain ID: 9007206337512971
powered Status: Released
Philips

Troubleshooting Start up and switch off
WARNING
The system and all subsystems remain powered.
Danger of an electric shock.
End fragment title: HG - System and all subsystems remain powered
Node title (original): HG - System switch off and opening of ID: 9007206337574283
cabinets is reserved to Philips service Status: Released
CAUTION
System switch off and opening the technical cabinets may only be done by or under
guidance of Philips service.
End fragment title: HG - System switch off and opening of cabinets is reserved to Philips service
Node title (original): HG - Helium boil-off in case of completely ID: 27021604847060363

switched off system Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

CAUTION
Helium boil-off will occur when the system is completely switched off. The cryogen cooler
will not work and the system may quench.
End fragment title: HG - Helium boil-off in case of completely switched off system
10.6.2 Computer start up and shut down

Status: Released
The computer is started by the Philips service engineer.

Node title (original): HG - Keep the computer running ID: 18014405592255499
permanently Status: Released
Keep the computer running permanently.

It is sufficient to exit the system software and to switch off the display. When the computer
runs, the system remains available for remote servicing and performs scheduled tasks (quality
checks).
• Only switch off the computer if a system hang up occurs.
• Never exit the system software while a background process (such as hard copy, DVD
Philips
recording, or Network) is still running.

• Switch off the display unit on the operator's console at night.

End fragment title: HG - Keep the computer running permanently
Node title (original): Elition start up title ID: 27021692198060171-2

Status: Released

End fragment title: Elition start up title

SYS.Label.IFU.ConsoleStartup_uMDU (Prod, Elit) Status: Released
Node title (original): Computer start up (All) ID: 9007287184429195-1

Status: Released
Computer start up
If a computer malfunction occurs, refer to chapter “Computer malfunction” on page 1414 for
instructions on how to proceed.
If the computer has accidentally been switched off, do one of the following:
If the computer is located in the control room
► Make sure that there is no (bootable) CD or DVD in your computer. The system may try to
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
start up from the CD drive.

► Use the power button to turn the computer on.
End fragment title: Computer start up (All)
Node title (original): computer is located in the technical room ID: 18014486439448331
uMDU Status: Released

Philips

right sequence:
► Wait 5 seconds.
► On the uMDU, set the switches F2 and F3 to ON in the right sequence:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

number

• Wait 5 seconds

• Wait 5 seconds

End fragment title: computer is located in the technical room uMDU
Node title (original): Computer logon (all) ID: 87930046603-1

Status: Released
Computer logon
Once the computer is started up, the logon screen appears. To log on:
1. Press the Ctrl, ALT, and Delete keys on the keyboard.
Philips

2. In the logon dialog box, type in the user name and password.
3. Click OK or press the Enter key.
⇨ The application software starts.
End fragment title: Computer logon (all)
End fragment title: 67889 SYS.Label.IFU.ConsoleStartup_uMDU (Prod, Elit)
Node title (original): Ambition/Elition-Ustart up title ID: 18014492943320715-2

Status: Released

End fragment title: Ambition/Elition-Ustart up title
Node title (original): 24649 SYS.Label.IFU.ConsoleStartup (Ach, ID: 36028884948512779

CX, INg, Inte, Mult) Status: Released

Status: Released
Computer start up
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): computer is located in the technical room ID: 9007287184495627-1
gMDU Status: Released

► In the technical room, open the global Mains Distribution Unit (gMDU) (see figure).
► Do NOT remove the red panel (see figure).
► Flip the DACC switch (check the service key sticker to locate the correct switch) to the off
position.
► Flip the switch back on again.
► Close the gMDU cabinet when finished.
Philips

sticker.
End fragment title: computer is located in the technical room gMDU

Status: Released
Computer logon
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 24649 SYS.Label.IFU.ConsoleStartup (Ach, CX, INg, Inte, Mult)

SYS.Label.IFU.ConsoleStartup_sMDU (Mult) Status: Released

Status: Released
Computer start up
Node title (original): computer is located in the technical room ID: 89740404875
sMDU Status: Released
Philips


3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► On the small Mains Distribution Unit (sMDU), set the switches F2 and F3 to OFF in the right
sequence:
► Wait 5 seconds.
► On the sMDU, set the switches F2 and F3 to ON in the right sequence:
Philips


number

• Wait 5 seconds

• Wait 5 seconds

End fragment title: computer is located in the technical room sMDU

Status: Released
Computer logon
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 67889 SYS.Label.IFU.ConsoleStartup_sMDU (Mult)

SYS.Label.IFU.ConsoleStartup_Rillias (Amb) Status: Obsolete
Affix: Obsolete see 24649

Status: Released
Computer start up
Node title (original): computer is located in the technical room ID: 9007287184495627-2
gMDU Status: Released
Philips


► In the technical room, open the global Mains Distribution Unit (gMDU) (see figure).
► Do NOT remove the red panel (see figure).
► Flip the DACC switch (check the service key sticker to locate the correct switch) to the off
position.
► Flip the switch back on again.
► Close the gMDU cabinet when finished.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
sticker.
End fragment title: computer is located in the technical room gMDU

Status: Released
Computer logon
End fragment title: 68890 SYS.Label.IFU.ConsoleStartup_Rillias (Amb)
Node title (original): HG - Different password required at first ID: 54043214871175435

logon Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
After first logon, enter a different password of at least seven characters.
Initial settings for username and password are "MRuser" and "Philips".
End fragment title: HG - Different password required at first logon
Node title (original): HG - No visual feedback of signed-in user ID: 54043214871330827

Status: Released
To view who is currently signed in, press the Ctrl, ALT, and Delete keys on the keyboard. The
user name is displayed in the subsequent dialog box. To exit the dialog box, press the Esc key
on the keyboard or click Cancel.
End fragment title: HG - No visual feedback of signed-in user
10.6.2.1 Computer shut down

Status: Released
It is strongly recommended to keep the computer running permanently (refer to chapter

“Computer start up and shut down” on page 1424).
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

If it is necessary to shut the computer down, this can be done in different ways.
To shut the computer down with the start menu:
► Press the Windows key on your keyboard to show the Windows taskbar.
► Click the Shut Down button (the button may also be labeled Log off)
If the button is labeled Log off, click the arrow next to the button and select Shut down
from the menu.
To shut the computer down from the application software:
► Exit the application software as described in chapter “Exit application software” on page
1432 to display the logon screen.
► Press the Ctrl, ALT and Delete keys on the keyboard to display the logon dialog box.
► Click Shut down.
10.6.3 Exit application software

Status: Released
Fig. 495: 5: System menu.
To exit the application software:

1. On the System menu, click Exit.
Philips
2. In the Exit Confirmation window, click Yes to exit the software. Click No to cancel.

The Stop status box is displayed until the software has been logged off.
The logon dialog box is displayed.
To start-up the application software again, log on as described in chapter “Computer start up
and shut down” on page 1424. The application software starts up automatically.
10.6.4 Setting system power on and off

Affix: Jaguar ID: 18014455154236171
You use this procedure to restart the system when it does not respond:
• when computer shut down and start up doesn't work and/or the scanner does not respond,
• after a site mains power failure,
• after a chilled water failure.
Restarting your system

1. First power the system OFF.
See chapter “Powering OFF your system” on page 1433.
2. Then power the system ON again.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
See chapter “Powering ON the system” on page 1435.
10.6.4.1 Powering OFF your system

Status: Released
Node title (original): shut down @console Eagle-Jaguar ID: 18014456162314507

Status: Released
⊳ At the MR console:
► Shut down the MRI system computer.
End fragment title: shut down @console Eagle-Jaguar
Node title (original): powering off @technical room ID: 18014456162316043

Status: Released

Philips

► On the universal Mains Distribution Unit (uMDU), set the switches to OFF in the right
sequence:
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

number
1 F1 Console • Set to OFF
2 Q3 RFA (RF amplifier) • Set to OFF
3 Q5 Gradient amplifier • Set to OFF
6 F4 SFP (System Filter Plate) /SFB • Set to OFF
7 Q1 LCC • Set to OFF

Philips

NOTICE
The LCC can only be switched off for a short time.
It must remain switched on to ensure magnet cooling.
End fragment title: powering off @technical room
10.6.4.2 Powering ON the system

Status: Released

► Verify that the technical room mains switch is set to ON.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► On the universal Mains Distribution Unit (uMDU), set the switches to ON in the right
sequence:
Philips

⇨ The MRI host computer starts up automatically.

► Close and lock the DACC front door.
number
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

1 Q1 LCC • Set to ON
• Wait 5 seconds
2 Q5 Gradient amplifier • Set to ON

• Wait 5 seconds
3 F4 SFP (System Filter Plate) /SFB • Set to ON

• Wait 5 seconds
4 Q3 RFA (RF amplifier) • Set to ON

• Wait 5 seconds

• Wait 5 seconds

• Wait 5 seconds
7 F1 Console • Set to ON
• Wait 5 seconds
10.6.5 Setting system power on and off

Affix: Multiva ID: 27021685719859467
You use this procedure to restart the system when it does not respond:
Philips
• when computer shut down and start up doesn't work and/or the scanner does not respond,

• after a site mains power failure,

• after a chilled water failure.
Restarting your system

1. First power the system OFF.
See chapter “Powering OFF your system” on page 1437.
2. Then power the system ON again.
See chapter “Powering ON the system” on page 1438.
NOTICE
Wait 20 seconds before restarting the computer after power off.
The computer may not start correctly when started too soon.
10.6.5.1 Powering OFF your system

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Status: Released
Node title (original): shut down @console Eagle-Jaguar ID: 18014486467244555

Status: Released
⊳ At the MR console:
► Shut down the MRI system computer.
End fragment title: shut down @console Eagle-Jaguar
Node title (original): powering off @technical room ID: 18014486467326731

Status: Released

► To open the front door of the general Mains Distribution Unit (gMDU), tilt the lever of the
locks upwards and rotate them to unlock the door.
Fig. 496: gMDU

Philips

Step number Action
A 400 v - 50/60 Hz
B 480 v - 60 Hz
C 380 v - 50/60 Hz
Tab. 53: gMDU versions
► On the gMDU, set the switches to OFF in the right sequence:

number
1 F6 Console • Set to OFF
2 Q1 Gradient amplifier • Set to OFF
3 Q4 DACC • Set to OFF
4 F7 SFB • Set to OFF
5 F8 Spare / PVU • Set to OFF
6 Q2 or Q20 * LCC • Set to OFF
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

7 Q3 Spare • Set to OFF
8 Q5 Spare / Ramptool • Set to OFF
9 QT Transformer ** • Set to OFF
* Only for GMDU 480V 60Hz and 380V 50/60Hz.

** Q20 only for GMDU 380V 60 Hz.
NOTICE
The LCC can only be switched off for a short time.
It must remain switched on to ensure magnet cooling.
End fragment title: powering off @technical room
10.6.5.2 Powering ON the system

Status: Released

► Verify that all the switches in the gMDU are switched to OFF and that the hospital switch is
switched to ON.
► On the gMDU, set the switches to ON in the right sequence:
Philips


number
1 QT Transformer * • Set to ON
2 Q2 or Q20 ** LCC • Set to ON (wait 5 seconds)
3 Q1 Gradient amplifier • Set to ON (wait 5 seconds)
4 F7 SFB • Set to ON (wait 5 seconds)
5 F8 { Heuvel, Martina van den, • Set to ON (wait 5 seconds)

7/20/2018 10:35:17 AM:
PVU = patient ventilation
unit}
Spare / PVU ***
6 Q4 DACC • Set to ON (wait 5 seconds)
7 F6 Console • Set to ON (wait 5 seconds)
* Only for GMDU 480V 60Hz and 380V 50/60Hz.

** Q20 only for GMDU 380V 60 Hz.
*** Only if a PVU is connected
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Close and lock the gMDU front door.

⇨ The MRI host computer starts up automatically.
10.6.6 EasySwitch
Affix: EasySwitch ID: 18014507367420043
EasySwitch is a guided magnet discharge and energize function. It allows the trained operator
to discharge and energize the magnet in a controlled way. EasySwitch consists of the following
procedures:
• Discharge Magnet: The magnet discharge and stabilize procedure requires about 2 hours.
• Energize Magnet: The magnet energize and stabilize procedure requires about 3 hours.
Additional time is required for your Service Provider to check magnet homogeneity.
EasySwitch shall be used only in very specific cases:
• Discharge the magnet if an object was attracted to the magnet.
This allows a quick response to an attraction event to restore a safe situation by removing
attracted objects, and then inspect and repair damage if needed.
• Discharge the magnet in case of a potential catastrophe that could impact system integrity
(for example, a flooding or a hurricane).
This prevents magnetic attraction hazards when the system's location is impacted (for
example, flooding in the examination room or structural building damage).
• Energize the magnet after discharge using EasySwitch or if the system was automatically
Philips
discharged due to a power outage or loss of magnet cooling.

For all other situations where the magnet needs to be discharged or energized, such as after
the Emergency Magnet Off button has been pressed or after loss of field, please contact your
Service Provider.
Password Protection
For safety and security, access to the EasySwitch function is protected by a password. The
password is configured by a service engineer and held by a trained operator who is assigned to
performing the EasySwitch procedure.
Operator Responsibilities
At the start of the magnet discharge and energize procedures, the assigned operator is required
to acknowledge responsibility for the procedure. Acknowledging responsibility for the
EasySwitch procedures means that you are aware of the following:
• General MR safety precautions.
– No one should enter the examination room during the EasySwitch procedures.
– If the examination room is provided with a lock, it should be locked to prevent staff or
patients entering the room.
– For safety information about the EasySwitch procedures, see chapter “Safety” on page
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

1441.
– For information about general MR safety precautions, see .
• Schedule a visit by your Service Provider as soon as the decision to discharge the magnet is
taken, so that they can check the magnet homogeneity after energizing.
• If the magnet was discharged because an object was attracted to it, carefully inspect the
system for damage and, if necessary, call your Service Provider to repair the system before
energizing.
Node title (original): Door Lock Recommendation ID: 108858211467
Affix: EasySwitch Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
It is strongly recommended that the entrance door to the examination room is provided with a
lock to enable EasySwitch operators to ensure that no one enters the room while they are
discharging or energizing the magnet.
End fragment title: Door Lock Recommendation
EasySwitch Dialog Box

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 497: EasySwitch dialog box
Legend
1 Current EasySwitch procedure 3 Procedure steps
2 Magnet status 4 Step guidance
10.6.6.1 Safety
Last Content Modificator: Marshall, Tom Status: Released
Node title (original): SRQ 75141 - SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ- ID: 9007308112664075

MA.87 Status: Released
Philips

WARNING
Trapped person by an object attracted by the magnet.
Risk of death or serious injury.
• Press the Emergency Magnet Off button to immediately remove the magnet field.
• Do NOT use EasySwitch.
End fragment title: SRQ 75141 - SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-MA.87
Node title (original): Emergency Magnet Off - Untraced ID: 108955684235

Status: Released
WARNING
Only use the Emergency Magnet Off button when:
• A person is trapped by an object that is attracted by the magnet.
• Fire, smoke or another event occurs, that demands immediate entry of emergency
personnel or equipment into the examination room.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Any other emergency occurs that requires immediate removal of the magnetic field.
End fragment title: Emergency Magnet Off - Untraced

MA.83.2 Status: Released
WARNING
Attraction of magnetic objects and malfunction of active implants due to unauthorized use
of EasySwitch.
• The Controlled Access Area must be protected at all times.
• EasySwitch shall not be used to (temporarily) bring magnetic objects into the
examination room.
End fragment title: SRQ 75574 - SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-MA.83.2

Philips

WARNING
Attraction of magnetic objects and malfunction of active implants due to unknown magnet
status during use of EasySwitch.
• Do not allow persons to enter the examination room.
• Restart the console and EasySwitch to check the Current Status.
• Assume the Magnet is On until the Current Status is set to Magnet is Off.
Node title (original): Process Runs Independently ID: 108955637131

NOTICE
When a magnet discharge or magnet energize has been started, the process runs
independently from the host computer. Be aware that the discharge or energize process
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
continues to run even if the EasySwitch dialog box is not visible or if the host computer is
switched off. If the EasySwitch dialog box is not visible, assume that the magnet is on until the
EasySwitch dialog box is visible again and you can check the actual status of the magnet. You
may need to reopen the EasySwitch dialog box from the System menu.
End fragment title: Process Runs Independently

MA.86 Status: Released
WARNING
Electric shock due to damaged system parts.
• Inspect the system and report non-cosmetic damage to Philips service.
• Do not energize the system in case of non-cosmetic damage.
End fragment title: SRQ 75140 - SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-MA.86

Philips

WARNING
Stay away from attracted objects while the magnet is discharged using EasySwitch.
Risk of harm due to sudden movement of attracted object.
Node title (original): Damage to the System ID: 108858204043-1

NOTICE
If an object is attracted by the magnet, damage to the system can occur. After discharging the
magnet and removing the attracted object, you should inspect the system for any damage. If
no damage can be observed visually or if observed damage is limited to scratches on cover
parts, the magnet may be energized again. If there is any damage that goes beyond scratches
on cover parts or in case of doubt, contact your Service Provider to inspect the system.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Damage to the System
Node title (original): SRQ 77560 - SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ- ID: 9007308112665739-1

WARNING
Use of EasySwitch may result in magnet homogeneity that is out of specification causing
degraded image quality, mostly visible in scans with large Field of View and off-center
scanning (e.g. shoulder imaging).
Risk of serious injury due to misdiagnosis.
• Contact an Authorized Service Provider to have magnet homogeneity checked.
• It is recommended not to use the system until magnet homogeneity was checked and
restored.
10.6.6.2 Discharging the Magnet

Philips

10.6.6.2.1 Workflow: Discharge Magnet

Workflow Step Description
Acknowledgement The operator assigned to the EasySwitch procedure should acknowledge that
they understand their responsibilities and the risks involved.
The operator should indicate the reason for the discharge.
Acknowledgement This status is displayed if the operator indicates that an object was attracted
Status: Object attracted into the system.
Acknowledgement This status is displayed if the operator indicates that a catastrophic event is
Status: Catastrophe impending.
Essential discharge This status is displayed when the system is ready to begin discharging the
Status: Ready to start magnet.
Essential discharge This status is displayed after the operator has started the discharge. A progress
Status: In progress bar is displayed with an indication of the time remaining.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
If the system indicates that it has encountered an error, read the information in
the EasySwitch dialog box and contact your Service Provider.
Essential discharge This status is displayed when the discharge has completed successfully.
Status: Successful
Damage check This phase is only displayed if the operator indicated in the Acknowledgement
step that the reason for the discharge is because an object was attracted into
the system.
The operator should inspect the system and indicate if the system has been
damaged (Yes or No).
If the operator indicated that the reason for the discharge is an impending
catastrophe, this phase is not applicable and the workflow continues straight to
the Stabilize phase after the Essential discharge phase has completed. (See
below.)
Damage check This status is displayed if the operator indicated that the system has been
Status: System damaged damaged. The operator is instructed to contact their Service Provider to repair
the system.
Stabilize This status is displayed automatically after the Essential discharge phase
Status: In progress completes.
If the Damage check phase is displayed, this status starts concurrently in the
background while that phase is still active.
Philips

Stabilize This status is displayed when the magnet has cooled sufficiently for the energize
Status: Successful workflow to be initiated (if appropriate).
Completed This phase indicates that the Discharge Magnet workflow has completed.
10.6.6.2.2 Important messages and indications

table below displays the English messages and their translation.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

Discharging the Magnet

English Translation
Initial screen Initial screen

MAGNET ON MAGNET ON
Discharge Magnet Discharge Magnet
Energize Magnet Energize Magnet
Step: Acknowledgement Step: Acknowledgement

MAGNET ON MAGNET ON
You are about to discharge. Magnet homogeneity shall You are about to discharge. Magnet homogeneity shall
be checked by your Authorized Service Provider after be checked by your Authorized Service Provider after
energize. Please contact your Authorized Service energize. Please contact your Authorized Service
Provider to make an appointment and continue. Provider to make an appointment and continue.
WARNING WARNING
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Read the section on EasySwitch in the instructions for Read the section on EasySwitch in the instructions for
use to understand related risks. use to understand related risks.
See Instructions for use See Instructions for use
[check box] I acknowledge that I am responsible for the [check box] I acknowledge that I am responsible for the
magnet discharge procedure magnet discharge procedure
The following options are displayed after you The following options are displayed after you
acknowledge responsibility for the procedure. acknowledge responsibility for the procedure.
Reason for discharge Reason for discharge
[check box] An object got attracted into the system [check box] An object got attracted into the system
[check box] A potential catastrophe like a hurricane or [check box] A potential catastrophe like a hurricane or
flood flood
Cancel / Next Cancel / Next
Philips

English Translation
Step: Essential discharge Step: Essential discharge

MAGNET ON MAGNET ON
Step status: Ready to start Step status: Ready to start
about 2 hours about 2 hours
WARNING WARNING
Attracted objects may suddenly fall down or move due Attracted objects may suddenly fall down or move due
to magnetic field discharge. to magnetic field discharge.
implants. implants.
Risk of death or serious injury Risk of death or serious injury
Cancel / Start Cancel / Start
Step status: In progress Step status: In progress
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Estimated time remaining [minutes] Estimated time remaining [minutes]
Step: Damage check Step: Damage check

This step is only displayed if you indicated that an object This step is only displayed if you indicated that an object
was attracted to the magnet. was attracted to the magnet.
MAGNET OFF MAGNET OFF
NOTICE NOTICE
The essential discharge phase has been successfully The essential discharge phase has been successfully
completed. completed.
It is safe to enter the examination room. It is safe to enter the examination room.
Inspect the system for any damage by the object. Inspect the system for any damage by the object.
For more information, refer to the Instructions for use. For more information, refer to the Instructions for use.
Has the system been damaged? Has the system been damaged?
Yes / No Yes / No
If you answer Yes: If you answer Yes:
Step status: System damaged Step status: System damaged
Contact your Authorized Service Provider Contact your Authorized Service Provider
Philips

English Translation
Step: Stabilize Step: Stabilize

Step: Completed Step: Completed

Magnet discharge successfully completed. Magnet discharge successfully completed.
Make sure an appointment has been made with your Make sure an appointment has been made with your
Authorized Service Provider to inspect any damage. Authorized Service Provider to inspect any damage.
OK OK
10.6.6.2.3 Discharging the Magnet if an Object is Attracted

This procedure guides you through discharging the magnet if an object was attracted to it,
allowing you to check the system for damage. This procedure should be performed by a trained
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
operator.
Node title (original): Schedule Visit from Service Provider ID: 108956550411-1
NOTICE
To avoid delays, it is recommended to schedule a visit by your Service Provider as soon as it is
decided to discharge the magnet. This visit is required so that your Service Provider can check
the magnet homogeneity after energizing.
End fragment title: Schedule Visit from Service Provider
Node title (original): Damage to the System ID: 108858204043-2

Philips

NOTICE
If an object is attracted by the magnet, damage to the system can occur. After discharging the
magnet and removing the attracted object, you should inspect the system for any damage. If
no damage can be observed visually or if observed damage is limited to scratches on cover
parts, the magnet may be energized again. If there is any damage that goes beyond scratches
on cover parts or in case of doubt, contact your Service Provider to inspect the system.
End fragment title: Damage to the System
Node title (original): Beeping Sound ID: 108858145547-1

NOTICE
During the EasySwitch procedure, a beeping sound can be heard from the magnet and in the
technical room. This sound is by design and does not require any action.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Beeping Sound
Node title (original): Error ID: 108957952267-1

NOTICE
If the system encounters an error during this procedure, read the safety information provided
in the EasySwitch dialog box and contact your Service Provider.
End fragment title: Error
1. On the System menu, select EasySwitch.

⇨ The EasySwitch Password dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter your password and select OK.
⇨ The EasySwitch dialog box is displayed. The status of the magnet is indicated at the top of
the EasySwitch dialog box.
3. Select Discharge Magnet.
4. Read the safety information about discharging the magnet and select the check box to
acknowledge that you are responsible for the procedure.
⇨ Reasons for the discharge are displayed as options in the EasySwitch dialog box.
5. Select An object got attracted into the system.
⇨ The status of the Acknowledgement step on the left changes to Object attracted.
Philips

NOTICE
It is not possible to select more than one reason for the discharge. If you do not select a
reason, magnet discharge will not be permitted.
6. To move to the next step in the discharge procedure, select Next in the lower-right corner
of the EasySwitch dialog box.
7. Read the safety information about starting the discharge procedure.
8. To start discharging the magnet, select Start in the lower-right corner of the EasySwitch
dialog box.
⇨ The status of the Essential discharge step on the left changes to In progress.
⇨ A progress bar is displayed, with an indication of the time remaining to complete the
discharge step.
⇨ When the discharge is complete, the status of the Essential discharge step on the left
changes to Successful, and the procedure moves to the next step, Damage check.
9. Read the information in the Damage check screen.
10. When the EasySwitch dialog box indicates that it is safe to enter the examination room,
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
carefully inspect the system for damage.
WARNING
Electric shock due to damaged system parts.
• Inspect the system and report non-cosmetic damage to Philips service.
• Do not energize the system in case of non-cosmetic damage.
11. If the system has been damaged, select Yes. The status of the Damage check step on the
left changes to System damaged. Read the information about inspection and repair of the
system and call your Service Provider after you complete this procedure.
12. If the system has not been damaged, select No. The status of the Damage check step on
the left changes to No damage.
13. Select Next in the lower-right corner of the EasySwitch dialog box to move to the next step,
Stabilize.
⇨ After discharging the magnet, the system needs to stabilize as the magnet cools down. A
progress bar is displayed with an indication of the time remaining to complete the
stabilization step.
⇨ When stabilization is complete, the status of the Stabilize step changes to Successful.
14. Select Next in the lower-right corner of the EasySwitch dialog box. The EasySwitch dialog
box indicates that the magnet discharge has completed.
Philips

15. Select OK to close the EasySwitch dialog box.

16. If the system has been damaged, call your Service Provider for inspection and repair before
energizing the magnet again.
10.6.6.2.4 Discharging the Magnet Prior to Catastrophic Event

This procedure guides you through discharging the magnet if a catastrophic event in your area
is expected. This procedure should be performed by a trained operator.
Node title (original): Schedule Visit from Service Provider ID: 108956550411-2
NOTICE
To avoid delays, it is recommended to schedule a visit by your Service Provider as soon as it is
decided to discharge the magnet. This visit is required so that your Service Provider can check
the magnet homogeneity after energizing.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Schedule Visit from Service Provider

NOTICE

NOTICE

Philips


3. Select Discharge Magnet.
4. Read the safety information about discharging the magnet and select the check box to
⇨ Reasons for the discharge are displayed as options in the EasySwitch dialog box.
5. Select A potential catastrophe, like a hurricane or flood.
⇨ The status of the Acknowledgement step on the left changes to Catastrophe.
NOTICE
It is not possible to select more than one reason for the discharge. If you do not select a
reason, magnet discharge will not be permitted.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
6. To move to the next step in the discharge procedure, select Next in the lower-right corner
7. Read the safety information about starting the discharge procedure.
8. To start discharging the magnet, select Start in the lower-right corner of the EasySwitch
dialog box.
⇨ The status of the Essential discharge step on the left changes to In progress.
discharge step.
⇨ When the discharge is complete, the status of the Essential discharge step on the left
changes to Successful, and the procedure moves to the next step, Stabilize.
⇨ After discharging the magnet, the system needs to stabilize as the magnet cools down. A
progress bar is displayed with an indication of the time remaining to complete the
stabilization step.
box indicates that the magnet discharge has completed.
10. Select OK to close the EasySwitch dialog box.
11. If the system has been damaged, call your Service Provider for inspection and repair before
energizing the magnet again.
Philips

10.6.6.3 Energizing the Magnet

Status: Released
10.6.6.3.1 Workflow: Energize Magnet

Acknowledgement The operator assigned to the EasySwitch procedure should acknowledge that
they understand their responsibilities and the risks involved.
Damage check The operator should indicate that the system is ok, or if damage was discovered,
that it has been repaired (Yes / No).
Damage check This status is displayed if the operator indicated that the system is ok.
Status: No damage
Essential energize This status is displayed when the system is ready to begin energizing the
magnet.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Ready to start
Essential energize This status is displayed after the operator has started the energize process. A
Status: In progress progress bar is displayed with an indication of the time remaining.
Essential energize This status is displayed when the energize process has completed successfully.
Status: Successful
Stabilize This status is displayed automatically after the Essential energize phase
Status: In progress completes.
Stabilize This status is displayed when the magnet has cooled sufficiently for the system
Status: Successful to be used.
Completed This phase indicates that the Energize Magnet workflow has completed.
10.6.6.3.2 Important messages and indications

table below displays the English messages and their translation.
Philips

Energizing the Magnet

English Translation
Initial screen Initial screen

Discharge Magnet Discharge Magnet
Energize Magnet Energize Magnet
If the magnet is not yet ready to be energized, the If the magnet is not yet ready to be energized, the
following message is displayed: following message is displayed:
System is not ready to start energizing. Please wait. System is not ready to start energizing. Please wait.
Estimated time remaining: [minutes] Estimated time remaining: [minutes]
Close Close
Step: Acknowledgement Step: Acknowledgement

This procedure energizes the magnet in a controlled This procedure energizes the magnet in a controlled
way. way.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
WARNING WARNING
Read the section on EasySwitch in the Instructions for Read the section on EasySwitch in the Instructions for
use to understand related risks. use to understand related risks.
[check box] I acknowledge that I am responsible for the [check box] I acknowledge that I am responsible for the
magnet energize process. magnet energize process.
Next Next
Step: Damage check Step: Damage check

NOTICE NOTICE
If the system was damaged, please make sure it has If the system was damaged, please make sure it has
been repaired before energizing the magnet. been repaired before energizing the magnet.
Is the system alright? Is the system alright?
Yes / No Yes / No
Next Next
Philips

English Translation
Step: Essential energize Step: Essential energize

Step status: Ready to start Step status: Ready to start
The complete energize procedure time takes about 2 The complete energize procedure time takes about 2
hours. hours.
WARNING WARNING
implants due to energization of magnetic field. implants due to energization of magnetic field.
Remove all loose magnetic objects from the Remove all loose magnetic objects from the
examination room. examination room.
Take general MR safety precautions unless the Magnet Take general MR safety precautions unless the Magnet
Status is OFF. Status is OFF.
NOTICE NOTICE
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The energize procedure cannot be stopped. The magnet The energize procedure cannot be stopped. The magnet
energization process runs independently on the system. energization process runs independently on the system.
It will continue even if the host is down. For more It will continue even if the host is down. For more
information, refer to the Instructions for use. information, refer to the Instructions for use.
Click Start to initiate energizing the magnet. Click Start to initiate energizing the magnet.
Cancel / Start Cancel / Start
After clicking Start: After clicking Start:
Philips

English Translation

MAGNET ON MAGNET ON
NOTICE NOTICE
The essential energize phase has been successfully The essential energize phase has been successfully
completed. completed.
The magnet is ON. The magnet is ON.
The remaining magnet stabilization time takes about 90 The remaining magnet stabilization time takes about 90
minutes. minutes.
The stabilization cannot be stopped. The stabilization cannot be stopped.
See Instructions for use. See Instructions for use.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Step status: Successful Step status: Successful

MAGNET ON MAGNET ON
Step: Completed Step: Completed

MAGNET ON MAGNET ON
Magnet energize successfully completed. Magnet energize successfully completed.
WARNING WARNING
Magnet homogeneity may be out of specification and Magnet homogeneity may be out of specification and
iIamge Quality may be degraded. iIamge Quality may be degraded.
Risk of serious injury due to misdiagnosis. Risk of serious injury due to misdiagnosis.
Contact your Authorized Service Provider to the Contact your Authorized Service Provider to the
magnet homogeneity checked. magnet homogeneity checked.
OK OK
10.6.6.3.3 Energizing the Magnet

This procedure guides you through energizing the magnet after a discharge. This procedure
should be performed by a trained operator.
Philips

NOTICE

NOTICE

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨ If the magnet has not yet cooled sufficiently to start the energizing procedure, an indication
of the time remaining is displayed. The Energize Magnet function is not available until the
system is ready. If desired, select Close in the lower-right corner of the EasySwitch dialog
box to close EasySwitch. You can return to EasySwitch when the remaining time has
elapsed.
3. When the system is ready, select Energize Magnet.
4. Read the safety information about energizing the magnet and select the check box to
5. To move to the next step in the energize procedure, select Next in the lower-right corner
6. Read the safety information.
7. To confirm that the system is not damaged (or has been repaired by your Service Provider
after damage), select Yes.
⇨ The energize magnet procedure cannot be started until you indicate that the system is not
damaged or that it has been repaired.
⇨ The status of the Damage check step on the left changes to No damage.
8. Select Next in the lower-right corner of the EasySwitch dialog box to move to the next step
in the energize procedure, Essential energize.
9. Read the safety information in the EasySwitch dialog box about energizing the magnet.
Philips

Philips Software Update installation Troubleshooting
10. To start energizing the magnet, select Start in the lower-right corner of the EasySwitch
dialog box.
⇨ The status of the Essential energize step on the left changes to In progress.
energize step.
11. When the magnet has been energized, select Next in the lower-right corner of the
EasySwitch dialog box to move to the next step, Stabilize.
⇨ After energizing the magnet, the system needs to stabilize. A progress bar is displayed with
an indication of the time remaining to complete the stabilization step.
box indicates that the magnet has been energized.
13. Read the safety information in the EasySwitch dialog box about magnet homogeneity and
ensure that your Service Provider will check the magnet.
⇨ It is recommended not to use the system until magnet homogeneity has been checked and
restored.
14. Click OK to close the EasySwitch dialog box.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): SRQ 77560 - SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ- ID: 9007308112665739-2

WARNING
Use of EasySwitch may result in magnet homogeneity that is out of specification causing
degraded image quality, mostly visible in scans with large Field of View and off-center
scanning (e.g. shoulder imaging).
Risk of serious injury due to misdiagnosis.
• Contact an Authorized Service Provider to have magnet homogeneity checked.
• It is recommended not to use the system until magnet homogeneity was checked and
restored.
10.7 Philips Software Update installation

Affix: 2017 Layout ID: 56905566859
Node title (original): New Fragment ID: 57155179275

Status: Released
Philips

Troubleshooting Philips Software Update installation
NOTICE
This chapter replaces the section Remote Software Installation of the IFU.
End fragment title: New Fragment
This section describes the Philips Software Update functionality.

Your system may receive software updates to improve system performance. The system
notifies the user when updates are available.
Software update installation can be performed by the user.
When required, permission for software installation can be assigned to the hospital or service
administrator only. Contact Philips Service.
10.7.1 Notification and Installation

Status: Released
At system login a notification pop-up window is shown to inform the user that software
updates are available to be install.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

NOTICE
The displayed approximate installation time includes reboot and restarts.
► login to the system.

⇨ A notification pop-up window is displayed.
Philips Software Update is available to install.

Approximate installation time ... minutes.1
Archive patient data and finalize jobs in the current Job
Queue before installation.
Do you want to install it now?
Buttons: Remind me later, Install.
1
This is the approximate installation time including
reboot and restarts.
► Archive patient data that is present on your system, refer to the Administration chapter of
the IFU.
► Finalize the jobs in the Jobs Queue.
► Click Install.
⇨ An installation pop-up window is displayed.
Note: click Remind Me later to postpone installation.
Philips

NOTICE
When software update installation cannot be initiated a popup windows displays:
Available updates cannot be installed. Contact Philips Service to resolve the issues.
Software Installation
1. The following updates are available for Philips
application software:
2. List: Available updates and duration (installation
time).
3. User Notes about the updates
4. ! During this installation all patient data will be
removed from the system.1
Archive patient data and finalize the jobs in the
Jobs Queue before installation.2
5. I confirm that:
– All patient data is archived
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
– all jobs in the Jobs Queue are finalized

6. This update will take ... minutes.
You will not be able to use the computer during
installation.
The computer will restart after installation.
7. Buttons: Remind me later, Install Now.
1
displayed when the update process removes patient
data.
2
displayed when the update process does not remove
patient data.
► Select I Confirm that to confirm that all patient data is archived and the jobs queue
finalized.
⇨ Installation information is displayed (6).
► Click Install Now to start installation.
Note: click Remind Me later to postpone installation. Click Remind Me later on the
notification popup.
Node title (original): pop-up at every login ID: 56974010507
Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
The notification pop-up window is displayed at every new login until the update has been
installed successfully.
End fragment title: pop-up at every login
Installation process
During installation a screen is shown displaying the progress of the installation.
1. Software installation is in progress
Preparing for installation...
2. About ... minutes remaining.
3. The computer may restart more than once during
the installation process.
Do not power off the computer during installation.
The following screen is shown when the installation was successful. The computer is restarted
automatically after 30 seconds.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

1. The installation was successful
The computer will restart in 30 seconds...
You can use the system after login.
2. Button: Restart Now.
► Click Restart Now to force an immediate computer restart if desired.

► login after the computer has restarted.
⇨ A pop-up window is displayed.
Philips Software Updates installed successfully.

Your application software is updated to version ...
Button: OK.
► Click OK to close the pop-up window.

You can start using your system.
Maintenance required
After successful installation an additional pop-up window may be displayed that your system
Philips
requires maintenance.

Maintenance is required.
Your system needs additional maintenance.
Contact Philips Service.
You can continue using your system.
Button: OK.
► Contact Philips Service.

You can start using your system.
Installation failed
When software update installation fails this is briefly shown on the installation screen. Your
system is recovered to the previous software version.
! Software updates could not be installed.
The software remains unchanged. The recovery process
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
will start in a moment.

You can continue using your Philips system after the
recovery process.
Contact Philips Service to install the updates.
► login to the system.

⇨ A pop-up window is displayed.
Philips Software Update could not be installed.

A problem occurred and updates could not be installed.
You can continue using your system as usual.
Button: OK.
► Contact Philips Service.

Restore patient data

► Restore patient data after successful installation. Refer the Administration chapter of the
IFU.
Philips

NOTICE
Only necessary when patient data was removed during installation.
When patient data is removed during installation this is mentioned in the installation pop-up
window.
Start software installation after postponing

When software installation is postponed, the installation can manually be started from the
windows taskbar later.
► Press the Windows key on your keyboard to display the Taskbar.
Fig. 498: RSI icon.
► Double-click the Philips Software Update icon on the Windows Taskbar.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨ The installation pop-up window is displayed.
10.7.2 Notification without permission to install

Status: Released
When the logged-in user does not have permission to start update installation, a window is
displayed to inform the user that software updates are available to install, and to login with a
hospital or service administrator account.
Philips Software Update is available to install.
Approximate installation time is ... minutes.
Archive patient data and login in with a Hospital or
Service admin account to install the updates.
Buttons: Learn More, Close.
► Click Learn More.

⇨ An information pop-up window is displayed.
Philips

Software Installation
1. The following updates are available for Philips
application software:
2. List: Available updates and duration (installation
time).
3. User Notes about the updates
4. login with a Hospital or Service administrator
account to install the updates.
5. Button: OK.
► Click OK to close the information window.

► Notify the Hospital or Service administrator that updates are available.
► Click Close to hide the notification pop-up window.
The system can be used normally until update installation is performed.
Node title (original): pop-up at every login ID: 56974008971
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Status: Released
NOTICE
The notification pop-up window is displayed at every new login until updates have been
installed successfully.
End fragment title: pop-up at every login

Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

Planned maintenance Maintenance and Quality assurance
11 Maintenance and Quality assurance

Status: Released
Node title (original): 66495 SYS.Label.IFU.PlannedMaintenance ID: 18014461120754955

Status: Released
Planned maintenance, Quality assurance and routine user checks are necessary to keep the
system operating safely, effectively and reliably.
Philips offers service agreements that include maintenance and repair support. For more
details, contact your Philips representative.
End fragment title: 66495 SYS.Label.IFU.PlannedMaintenance
11.1 Planned maintenance

Status: Released
Node title (original): 24532 SYS.Label.IFU.PlannedMaintenance ID: 89825850251

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Node title (original): Text reused in 24702 ID: 89826020875

SYS.Label.TD.PlannedMaintenanceCompliance Status: Released
The operator should always take all practical steps to make sure that the planned Maintenance
Program is fully up to date and that all routine user checks have been satisfactorily completed
before using the system to examine a patient.
End fragment title: Text reused in 24702 SYS.Label.TD.PlannedMaintenanceCompliance
End fragment title: 24532 SYS.Label.IFU.PlannedMaintenance

SYS.Label.IFU.PlannedMaintenance.ServicePersonnelOnly Status: Released
Node title (original): Text reused in 24703 ID: 89826090763

SYS.Label.TD.PlannedMaintenanceProgram Status: Released
Planned maintenance may only be carried out by qualified and authorized Customer Support
technicians. Philips provides a full planned maintenance and repair customer support on both a
call basis and a contract basis. Full details are available from your Customer Support
Organization.
End fragment title: Text reused in 24703 SYS.Label.TD.PlannedMaintenanceProgram
End fragment title: 24533 SYS.Label.IFU.PlannedMaintenance.ServicePersonnelOnly
11.2 Routine user checks program

Status: Released
Philips

Maintenance and Quality assurance Routine user checks program
Node title (original): 24566 SYS.Label.IFU.UserChecks ID: 36028803858985611

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24566
Routine user checks

The scheduled routine user checks are as follows:
Routine check Daily Weekly Time (min.)
Nurse call + + 1
Check Emergency Table Stop buttons on both UIM's* + + 1
Patient support + + 5
Coils and positioning aids + + 10
Magnet check + 5
Check virus scanner definition date. The last update should not + 2
be older than one week.
Operator's console + 5
Printer + 5
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Periodic Image Quality Test (PIQT) + 15
* When pressed, the Emergency Table Stop button lights up. Press the Resume button to exit
the stop mode. When a failure occurs the following message appears on the console:
"Possible failure of Emergency Table Stop button at magnet <location of the button>.
Press the Emergency Table Stop button fully. If this does not resolve the issue, call your Philips
service engineer."
** Check coils and positioning aids for damage to coverings and connectors.
End fragment title: 24566 SYS.Label.IFU.UserChecks
11.2.1 Weekly magnet check

Status: Released
NOTICE
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 7/15/2020 8:33:40 PM: Display Helium Level}Does not apply to
BlueSeal systems.

SYS.Label.IFU.HeliumLevelInspection Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24493
Philips

Routine user checks program Maintenance and Quality assurance
This magnet check must also be performed during holiday periods.

Measure the helium level in the magnet cryostat and note the measured values in the logbook.
End fragment title: 24493 SYS.Label.IFU.HeliumLevelInspection
Node title (original): HG - Compressor for helium refrigerator ID: 18014405603128587

must be running Status: Released
• Check if the sound of the compressor is still normal.
CAUTION
The compressor for the helium refrigerator must always be running.
Excessive helium boil-off occurs if this unit is switched off.
• Measure the helium level in the magnet cryostat and note the measured values in the log
book:
– Logon to the system.
– Click the Windows Start button on your screen or press the Windows key on your
keyboard.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
– Select MR User.
– Select Display Helium Level..
The Helium Level is displayed in a pop-up window.

End fragment title: HG - Compressor for helium refrigerator must be running
Node title (original): HG - Do not use |Enter| key during 20 s ID: 18014405603130123
display delay Status: Released
NOTICE
The helium level is displayed with a delay of 20 seconds. Do not use the Enter key during that
time.
End fragment title: HG - Do not use |Enter| key during 20 s display delay

SYS.Label.IFU.HeliumLevelMaintenance Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24494
Philips

NOTICE
Please contact your local Philips service if significant helium boil-off is observed.
MR systems that are equipped with a zero helium boil-off cooling system have no helium boil-
off under normal operating conditions.
End fragment title: 24494 SYS.Label.IFU.HeliumLevelMaintenance
11.2.2 Topping up liquid helium

Status: Released

Status: Released
NOTICE
Does not apply to BlueSeal systems.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): 24495 SYS.Label.IFU.HeliumLevelMinimum ID: 18014405319116555

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24495
Magnet coils must be immersed in liquid to ensure that they remain superconductive. The
minimum acceptable helium level for the magnet is 30%.
If the helium level is 30% or lower, contact your helium supply organization.
End fragment title: 24495 SYS.Label.IFU.HeliumLevelMinimum
11.2.3 Anti-virus updates

Status: Released
The MR system is equipped with anti-virus software which is designed to detect viruses on your
system and to deny access to infected files, before they can do any damage.
Anti-virus definitions should be updated on a regular basis, usually every day. The Anti-virus
definitions update mechanism automatically looks for updated virus definition files at a pre-
configured time (as set by service engineer or hospital administrator) and installs them, if
available.
Node title (original): HG - System operator must check daily if ID: 9007206348396939
anti-virus definitions are up to date Status: Released
Philips

NOTICE
It is the responsibility of the system operator to daily check if the anti-virus definitions are up
to date.
End fragment title: HG - System operator must check daily if anti-virus definitions are up to date
Check the anti-virus definitions date

• Right-click on the virus scan icon in the tray of the windows task bar and select ‘About...’.
• In the displayed window check the "DAT Created ON" date.
An update is neccessary if the date of the definitions is older than 7 days (compare with current
date).
Update the anti-virus definitions

• Right-click on the virus scan icon in the tray of the windows task bar and select ‘Update
Now ...’.
The anti-virus definitions are automatically updated.
• After the update has finished recheck the date of the definitions.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
11.2.4 Periodic Image Quality Test (PIQT)

Status: Released
Node title (original): 24531 SYS.Label.IFU.PIQT ID: 9007206092133899

Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24531a
NOTICE
It is advised to use the PIQT over any other quality assurance program.
PIQT offers an automated and consistent test procedure.
A regular (weekly) execution of predefined scans to monitor the system performance enables
early detection of any system deterioration.
PIQT is based on three scans made with the 200 mm head phantom. The scans and analyses are
performed automatically and the results are stored. The service engineer can (remotely) access
the results of the PIQT.
NOTICE
Apart from the automatic evaluation, it is recommended that the images are visually
inspected by the operator or a physicist.
Philips

NOTICE
Further options for evaluation and inspection are available in PIQT. For more information
please contact your Philips service representative.
End fragment title: 24531 SYS.Label.IFU.PIQT
The scans are performed with the following coils:

Node title (original): Jaguar PIQT coils ID: 40454178187
• dS NVS Head Base

• dS NVS Head Top
• dS NVS Spine
End fragment title: Jaguar PIQT coils
Node title (original): Achieva PIQT coils ID: 7047773067

Status: Released
Possible Coils
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

1.5 T systems 3.0 T systems
SENSE Head 8 coil SENSE Head 8 coil
Q-Head coil T/R Head coil

End fragment title: Achieva PIQT coils
Node title (original): Ingenia/CX/Amb/Elit PIQT coils ID: 36028804066442507

Status: Released
Possible Coils
1.5 T systems 3.0 T systems
dS Head dS Head
Q-Body Q-Body
End fragment title: Ingenia/CX/Amb/Elit PIQT coils
Node title (original): Elition/Ambition PIQT coils ID: 18014467462832139

Status: Released
• Q-Body
• dS Head
End fragment title: Elition/Ambition PIQT coils
Node title (original): Multiva PIQT coils ID: 18014405557249547

Status: Released
• HST Head coil

• Q-Head coil
End fragment title: Multiva PIQT coils
Performing PIQT scans

Philips

The PIQT test will take approximately 15 minutes. ExamCards are not supported in the
applications PIQT and SPT (System Performance Test).
1. Select 'SPT' from the System menu.
2. Click the ‘PIQT’ icon or select |File| followed by |Perform PIQT| on the main menu bar.
The PIQT windows opens.
3. Follow the instructions on the PIQT window:
position the phantom in the head section of the coil and move the coil to the isocenter.
4. Click |Proceed| to start the scans.
The PIQT procedure will run automatically making survey scans, making PIQT scans and
evaluating the results.
Remove the phantom when the scans are finished. The system is available for routine use. The
PIQT program will analyze the images in the background.
11.2.5 Quality Assurance (QA) Tool for (BOLD) Stability

Affix: not for Ingenia in China: comp MRS ID: 54043205963657611
In order to make sure that the very small BOLD (fMRI) signal is not superimposed by noise, all
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
noise contributions need to be minimized for optimum BOLD results.

The QA Tool provides means to measure stability based on an ACR method. It calculates all
Function Biomedical Informatics Research Network (FBIRN) metrics based on a predefined
protocol according to FBIRN guidelines:
Friedman L, and Glover GH. “Report on a multicenter fMRI quality assurance protocol” JMRI
23:827–839 (2006) .
NOTICE
It is advised to run the QA Tool on a regular base, preferably once a week.
Items needed for QA Tool Stability

The following items are needed:
Node title (original): Items needed Achieva ID: 9007209720888715
• Sphere A phantom
The Sphere A phantom is a 10 cm diameter sphere with a water-based solution. The second
choice is the FBIRN gel phantom which is a bigger (17 cm diameter) sphere.
The air bubble in the phantom needs to be as small as possible.
• SENSE Head coil 8ch
• Foam Pads
• Straps
Philips

• Sandbags
Fig. 499: Items needed for QA tool for Stability, Achieva system.
End fragment title: Items needed Achieva
Node title (original): Items needed for Ingenia ID: 27021608230371723

Items needed for QA tool for Stability.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

The Sphere A phantom is a 10 cm diameter sphere
with a water-based solution. The second choice is
the FBIRN gel phantom which is a bigger (17 cm
diameter) sphere.
The air bubble in the phantom needs to be as small
as possible.
• dS HeadSpine coil solution (Base coil and Head top
coil)
• Foam Pads
• Straps
• Sandbags
End fragment title: Items needed for Ingenia
Node title (original): Items needed for Multiva ID: 9007209720890763

The Sphere A phantom is a 10 cm diameter sphere with a water-based solution. The second
choice is the FBIRN gel phantom which is a bigger (17 cm diameter) sphere.
The air bubble in the phantom needs to be as small as possible.
• SENSE HST coil
• Foam Pads
• Straps
• Sandbags
Philips

Fig. 500: Items needed for QA tool for Stability, Multiva system.
End fragment title: Items needed for Multiva
Workflow QA Tool Stability

► Select SPT from the System menu.
The System Performance Tool window opens.
► Click + to expand the Batch files and + again to expand the FMRI folder.
► Right-click on the coil folder and select Run Batch.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 501: System Performance Tool window: right-mouse menu with Run Batch selected.
► Follow the instructions in the window:

• Set up the phantom in the Head coil, using foam pads to raise it close to the center of
the coil.
• Secure it with foam wedges or straps.
• Do not use a sandbag in the Head coil. A sandbag can be used on top of the coil to
ensure proper connection of the coil.
• Landmark to the center of the phantom and move the table to the scan plane.
Node title (original): Setup Achieva ID: 9007209721003403
Philips

Fig. 502: Setup Achieva.

End fragment title: Setup Achieva
Node title (original): Setup Ingenia ID: 27021608230486411

Setup
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: Setup Ingenia
Node title (original): Setup Multiva ID: 9007209721005451

Fig. 503: Set up Multiva.

End fragment title: Setup Multiva
► Start the acquisition: Click Proceed to start the scans.

The procedure will run automatically making all scans needed.
Philips

NOTICE
The scan starts after a waiting period to avoid fluid motion artifacts. Do not skip this waiting
time
Skipping the waiting time can result in automatic plan scan problems and can have negative
influence on the IQ results.
► Press Analyze to analyze the results and to display and evaluate the results.
► Remove the phantom when the scans are finished. The system is available for routine use.
The following results will be provided:
• Residual Noise graph
RMS Stability graph
• SFNR image
• Static spatial noise
• numeric results, e.g. Drift, Standard deviation, SNR summary value, SFNR summary value,
Noise spectrum peak
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Fig. 504: QA results of a poorly performing system where 1 - Control Area, 2 - Threshold mask overlaid to image with
ROIs as used for the calculation, 3 - Residual Noise and RMS Stability graphs, 4 - numeric results, 5 - SFNR image, 6 -
Static Spatial Noise image. The Static Spatial Noise image shows many ghosts which is an indication for a poorly
performing system.
NOTICE
No additional actions are needed when all parameters are within specifications.
If parameters are out of specification, repeat PIQT the next day to determine if this is
consistent.
If parameters are still out of specification request support from your service organization. No
additional actions are needed when all parameters are now within specifications.
Philips

11.2.6 ACR Accreditation

Affix: languageEnglish and language-neutral ID: 18014490815457931
Node title (original): 01 introduction ID: 92309159947

Status: Released
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 6/25/2019 11:42:03 AM: "language-neutral" is still available as
language aspect}
Accreditation by the American College of Radiology requires phantom data acquisition and
analysis, which can be a challenging and time-consuming process. The ACR test software has
been developed to provide setup guidance and to automatically perform the acquisition and
analysis.
The ACR test software performs the acquisition, position checking, and analysis for the ACR
weekly and triennial phantom testing. Weekly tests will typically be performed at the same
time each week by a MR technologist; the triennial tests will be performed once every three
years by a MR physicist or scientist.
Benefits of the ACR test software are that it
• Saves valuable system time by performing the analysis automatically.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Simplifies the acquisition by using acquisition parameters matching those required by the
ACR guidelines.
• Reduces test failures from incorrect positioning by providing setup instructions and
feedback if the ACR phantom is incorrectly positioned.
• Strengthens the QA program by reducing variability of results through a repeatable analysis
method.
• Provides center frequency (CF) and transmit gain (TG) values required for Weekly QC.
• Reports values needed for both Weekly QC and Triennial tests for records and accreditation
submission.
• Provides another tool to help Philips personnel on-site to troubleshoot ACR-related issues.
End fragment title: 01 introduction
Node title (original): 02 - overview available ACR weekly and ID: 92309161483
triennial tests Status: Released
Overview of available ACR Weekly and Triennial Tests

Weekly Tests Triennial Tests
Purpose Weekly Quality Control requirement Submission for re-accreditation
Frequency Weekly, at the same time each week Once every three years
Philips

Weekly Tests Triennial Tests
Who runs this test? MR technologist MR physicist or scientist
Tests that are run • Geometric Accuracy • Geometric Accuracy

• High-Contrast Spatial Resolution • High-Contrast Spatial Resolution
• Low-Contrast Detectability (LCD) • Low-Contrast Detectability (LCD)
• Transmit Gain (TG) • Slice Thickness Accuracy
• Table Position Accuracy (TPA) • Slice Position Accuracy
• Center Frequency (CF) • Image Intensity Uniformity (IIU)
• Percent Signal Ghosting (PSG)
End fragment title: 02 - overview available ACR weekly and triennial tests
Acquisition information
The table lists the scans that are performed as part of the weekly or triennial tests.
Scan type Weekly or Triennial
Sagittal Scout Weekly and Triennial

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Axial Scout Weekly and Triennial
Coil Survey Scan Weekly and Triennial
SENSE Reference Scan Weekly and Triennial
ACR Sagittal Locator Weekly and Triennial
ACR Axial T2 Dual Echo Triennial
ACR Axial T1 Weekly and Triennial
11.2.6.1 Performing the ACR test

Status: Released
Node title (original): 01 - before you begin ID: 92308751499

Status: Released
Before you begin

• Your system should always be up to date with its preventive maintenance.
Additionally, it is recommended to run a Periodic Image Quality Test (PIQT) prior to ACR
testing to ensure system performance is within the manufacturer’s specifications.
• Make time available for the ACR test: Approximately 20 to 30 minutes are needed to
complete the ACR tests.
When an ACR test is cancelled, it cannot be resumed, but it must be started from the
beginning.
Philips

Equipment needed
• dS HeadSpine coil (dS Base and dS Head top)
• NVC-ACR Phantom holder
• ACR Phantom
• Nonferrous level used to align the phantom
• Positioning pads- Small (3cm) grey foam wedge set
• ACR Log Sheet: this may be an online spreadsheet, or in paper form
• (Optional) USB storage drive: If you plan to email or store the test results in a location other
than the MR system, you can use a USB data drive to copy the test results.
End fragment title: 01 - before you begin
Node title (original): 02 - setting up the test ID: 92308753035

Status: Released
Setting up the ACR test

► To start the System Performance Tool (SPT), from the main menu bar select System ->
SPT....
⇨ The System Performance Tool opens in a new window.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► In the System Performance Tool window, click the BatchView (A) tab.
The tests that are available on the system are displayed, in a folder structure.
► To select the appropriate test, expand the ACR folder and then click TRIENNIAL or WEEKLY
(B).
► To run the test, right-click on the test and select Run Batch.
⇨ When you select the test to run, instructions for correct phantom placement are displayed
on the screen.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
⇨
End fragment title: 02 - setting up the test
Node title (original): 03 - setting up the phantom ID: 92308754571

Status: Released
Setting up the phantom

► Before you work with the phantom, carefully read chapter “Liquids in phantoms” on page
147.
► Check the phantom for air bubbles.
If you find air bubbles in the phantom, ACR tests cannot be run. Instead contact the
phantom manufacturer for phantom fluid replenishment.
Large air bubbles would appear as a void at the top of the axial image (red arrows):
► With the dS Base of the dS HeadSpine coil on the tabletop: remove the base padded liner
from the base.
► Place the NVC-ACR phantom holder into the dS Base coil.
Philips

► Position the ACR phantom in the NVC-ACR phantom holder.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

► Attach the NVC Head coil top portion to the NVC base.
► Slide the ACR Phantom to the correct position in the coil.
► Use the non-ferrous leveling tool to ensure the phantom is level.
► Insert the small grey foam wedges to secure the phantom in the head coil.
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
► Verify phantom rotation using the non-ferrous level.

► Position the light visor cross-hairs on the edge of white grid structure, then move setup to
isocenter.
End fragment title: 03 - setting up the phantom
Node title (original): 04 - Running ACR test ID: 92308761227

Status: Released
Running the ACR test

► In the Information dialog window, click Proceed.
⇨ The acquisition starts.
Philips

⇨ Phantom scans are evaluated:

• If the phantom is correctly positioned, the test runs until completion.
• If the phantom is not correctly positioned, an error message describes the problem and
recommends how to correct the positioning.
⇨ The current scan and remaining scan time are displayed on the screen. The status bar (A)
indicates the progress where
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

⇨
• light gray indicates the preparation phases.
• pale blue indicates the acquisition progress.
• darker blue indicates the reconstruction progress.
⇨ When the acquisition is completed, the following message displays:
Batch execution finished successfully.
► Click OK to proceed to data analysis.
► Upon completion of the acquisition, remove the phantom, positioning aids, and the coil
from the scanner and safely store them.
End fragment title: 04 - Running ACR test
Node title (original): 05 - stopping ACR test ID: 92309135627

Status: Released
Stopping the ACR test

You may need to stop the ACR test to perform an emergency examination.
► In the Batch Interpreter window, click Cancel.
Philips

► The message "Scan stopped by the operator. Press Proceed and close Batch Interpreter UI to
continue" appears. Click Proceed.
► Close the Batch Interpreter window.
► Remove the phantom, positioning aids, and the coil from the scanner and safely store them.
End fragment title: 05 - stopping ACR test
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
11.2.6.2 Analyzing the ACR data set

Status: Released
Node title (original): 06 - Running analysis ID: 92358299403

Status: Released
Running analysis
After the acquisition is complete, the data set automatically begins analysis and generates a
report.
End fragment title: 06 - Running analysis
Node title (original): 07 - Viewing results ID: 92369724171

Status: Released
Viewing analysis results

The results are displayed when the analysis has completed.
Examples of ACR results
Philips

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

End fragment title: 07 - Viewing results
Node title (original): 08 - Saving ID: 92369715979

Status: Released
Saving the results as PDF file (optional)

The report data is automatically saved and can be viewed at any time.
► To save the report, for both weekly and triennial, as a PDF file which can be printed, click in
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
the test report window.

► Press the ALT key on the keyboard.
The menu toolbar displays.
• Click File -> Print.
• Press CTRL+P.
► Select Printer: Microsoft print to pdf.
► Select the destination of the file.
To save to the USB drive, in the Devices and drives section, click the drive.
► Enter a file name and click Save.
End fragment title: 08 - Saving
Node title (original): 09 - Transferring to ACR test log ID: 92369717515

Status: Released
Transferring the results to the ACR Test Log
NOTICE
To view the ACR large Phantom Weekly QC Form, visit the ACR website
https://www.acraccreditation.org
To store the ACR test data in online files, follow the following workflow:
Philips

► Locate the log file or sheet.

► Copy the test result data to the log file.
► Save or store the log file as directed by your organization.
If test results do not meet ACR requirements

The ACR Weekly QC Log includes the acceptable range of test results. Acceptable test result
ranges for both the Triennial and Weekly tests can be found in the Phantom Test Guidance for
Use of the Large MRI Phantom for the MRI Accreditation Program document and the 2015 MRI
Quality Control Manual. Both guides are available on the ACR website.
If the test indicates the system fails to meet the ACR requirements, you should contact your
Philips Service Representative.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 09 - Transferring to ACR test log
11.2.6.3 Managing report data

Status: Released
After the ACR tests are analyzed, the results are displayed in the ACR Test Tool. Report data is
displayed using HTML, which includes text and screen shots of the phantom test images for the
most recent Weekly and Triennial test.
Datasets of ACR Test

When the test report dataset is saved, it is separated and stored in different locations:
Type of dataset File type Location of storage
Exam (source) images DICOM patient database
Analysis results xml
Screen shots of exam images pdf

(optionally)
Available previous exam results

You can view results from previous tests:
Philips

• Latest report: this includes

Analysis test data of the most recent Weekly or Triennial test.
• All reports: this includes
– Analysis test data from the most recent Weekly or Triennial test.
– Analysis test data from all the previous Weekly or Triennial tests.
Viewing previous exam results

► In the System Performance Tool window, click the ImageView tab (A).
► In the Patient name column, click the data set to be viewed.

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ACR datasets are labeled:

• ACR_triennial
• ACR_weekly
► From the Tools menu, select Generate Reports...
⇨ The SPT report selection window opens:
⇨
► In the Patient area, verify that the dataset to view is Weekly or Triennial (A).
► From the Section dropdown menu, select ACR (B).
► In the History list (C):
• Click Latest to view the report from the most recent test.
• Click All to view all reports from the tests.
► Click Ok (D).
Philips
A report is generated.

11.2.6.4 Error messages

Status: Released
If there are problems during scanning, an error message is displayed.

The table lists the error messages with possible resolutions.
Error message Possible resolution
“Tabletop needs to be moved in order to disengage posterior coil for scanning. Click Yes to move the tabletop
Move tabletop remotely to disengage the posterior coil? remotely.
Press Yes to move tabletop remotely.
Press No to move tabletop at magnet."
“Analysis failed for ... Use the ACR Phantom.

ERROR: Wrong phantom is detected.
Possible cause(s): Phantom other than ACR phantom was used.
Possible solution(s): Use the ACR phantom."
“Analysis failed for ... Reposition the ACR Phantom and

ERROR: The phantom is incorrectly rotated. verify with the non-ferrous level.
Possible cause(s): Phantom is not positioned correctly.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Possible solution(s): Please reposition the phantom following on-screen
instructions and run the test again."
“Batch terminated- Scan not performed; scan definition failed. Plug in the coil.
Press Proceed and close Batch Interpreter UI to continue."
“Scanner Error- Cannot determine optimum RF power” Advance the tabletop to the
isocenter.
“Batch Interpreter Error- Aborted” Close the RF door.

Possible cause: RF door Open during scanning.
“SPT Error- Spectrometer not available” Cycle power, restart the system.
If this doesn’t resolve the error,
call Philips Service.
11.2.6.5 Troubleshooting the ACR test results

Status: Released
The ACR test results may be inaccurate due to some common issues that can be easily
remedied.
Node title (original): 01-weekly and triennial tests ID: 92370053899
Status: Released
Philips

Troubleshooting
Issue Area Cause of issue Relevant for
Phantom positioning error Phantom setup Philips phantom holder was weekly and triennial tests
not used.
Phantom rotated Phantom setup Phantom was not leveled weekly and triennial tests
accurately.
Excessive vibration Phantom setup Small grey foam wedges weekly and triennial tests
were not used to stabilize
the phantom.
First slice much lower Phantom setup Phantom is not advanced weekly and triennial tests
intensity into coil until mechanical
stop.
Test failure High-Contrast Spatial Phantom placement is weekly and triennial tests
Resolution incorrect.
Test failure Low-Contrast Detectability Phantom placement is weekly and triennial tests
(LCD) incorrect.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Different number of spokes Low-Contrast Detectability Differences in user weekly and triennial tests
(LCD) perception led to selection
of a more discriminating
algorithm.
Use the number of spokes
counted manually on the
ACR sheet.
Bright artifacts on the edge Artifacts Spurious echo. Expected weekly and triennial tests
of the FOV in Spin Echo artifact with Spin Echo NSA
sequences =1.
Center frequency cannot Center Frequency System issue. Contact weekly test
be determined determination Philips Service.
Transmit Gain cannot be Transmit Gain Inaccurate positioning of weekly test

determined determination the light visor on the edge
of the grid portion of the
phantom.
Measurement failure Table Position Accuracy Air bubbles in phantom weekly test
Measurement failure Table Position Accuracy Difference in table weekly test

calibration. Contact Philips
Service.
Measurement failure Geometric Accuracy Air bubbles in phantom triennial test
Test failure Slice Thickness Accuracy Gradient or RF Chain issue. triennial test
Philips

Maintenance and Quality assurance Cleaning and Disinfection
Issue Area Cause of issue Relevant for
Test failure Slice Position Accuracy Phantom placement is triennial test

incorrect.
Test failure Image Intensity Uniformity Coil malfunction. Shim triennial test
(IIU) issue. Contact Philips
Service.
Test failure Percent Signal Ghosting Possible RF shielding issue. triennial test
(PSG) Ancillary euipment
interference. Contact
Philips Service.
End fragment title: 01-weekly and triennial tests
11.3 Cleaning and Disinfection

Affix: NEW (from Atlas onwards: 12/2017) ID: 54043264176523147
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

SYS.Label.IFU.CleaningDesinfection_v1 Status: Released
Affix: NEW version 12/2017 (update Cleaning chapter)
Cleaning and disinfection of your MRI system must comply with all applicable laws and
regulations which have the force of law within the jurisdiction(s) in which your system is
located.
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/30/2017 1:56:44 PM: removed sentence: Perform a routine
system cleaning before first use, and after maintenance. Moved to table of procedures,
frequency etc}
End fragment title: 68815 SYS.Label.IFU.CleaningDesinfection_v1
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/30/2017 1:49:09 PM: new and also still missing: }
Node title (original): Authorized personnel AND check safety ID: 9007267931813899
chapter! Status: Released
• Cleaning and disinfection may only be performed by appropriately trained personnel.

• Before cleaning and disinfecting the MRI system, system components and positioning aids,
it is essential that you read and familiarize yourself with all Warnings and Cautions given in
this Instructions for Use.
End fragment title: Authorized personnel AND check safety chapter!
Cleaning
Node title (original): 68816 SYS.Label.IFU.Cleaning ID: 9007267926243083
Affix: NEW 12/2017 (updated Cleaning chapter) Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 25475
Philips

Cleaning and Disinfection Maintenance and Quality assurance
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/31/2017 9:41:10 AM: split 25475 into 2 parts where part 1:
definition "what is cleaning?" moved to root; where part 2: warnings! moved to Safety, one
Workflow sentence removed completely, moved to workflow section!}
Cleaning is the physical removal of foreign material, e.g. dust, soil, organic material such as
blood, secretions, excretions and microorganisms. Cleaning generally removes rather than kills
microorganisms.
Cleaning is accomplished with water, detergents and mechanical action.
End fragment title: 68816 SYS.Label.IFU.Cleaning
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/30/2017 1:29:12 PM: old, slightly updated text:}Cleaning is an
essential prerequisite for effective disinfection.
Disinfection
Disinfection is the process of eliminating or reducing harmful microorganisms from inanimate
objects and surfaces.
Node title (original): Levels of disinfection ID: 9007267911670795
Status: Released
Levels of disinfection
The level of disinfection required for a device is dictated by the type of tissue with which it is in
contact during use. The table below shows which level of disinfection needs to be performed
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
depending on the classification of the device.

Classification Definition (type of tissue) Level of disinfection
Critical Device contacts otherwise sterile tissue (for example, Sterilization

intraoperative applications)
Semi-critical Device contacts mucous membranes (for example, High *

intracavity applications)
Noncritical Device contacts intact skin Intermediate or low *
* In some countries, disinfection is not differentiated in low, intermediate and high level.
The disinfection of the MRI system, components and positioning aids is classified as non-critical
and requires intermediate or low level disinfection.
Low level disinfectants kill most vegetative bacteria and some fungi as well as enveloped (lipid)
viruses (e.g., hepatitis B, C, hantavirus, and HIV). Low level disinfectants do not kill
mycobacteria or bacterial spores.
Intermediate level disinfectants kill vegetative bacteria, most viruses and most fungi but not
resistant bacterial spores.
End fragment title: Levels of disinfection
11.3.1 Cleaning agents and disinfectants

Status: Released
Philips


SYS.Label.IFU.Cleaning.PhilipsApprovedAgents_v1 Status: Released
Affix: NEW 12/2017 (updated Cleaning chapter)
Node title (original): 00 - intro ID: 70160930571

Status: Released
Only use the cleaning agents and disinfectants that are listed in this section.
Philips cannot be held liable for damage caused by the use of different products or
compositions.
End fragment title: 00 - intro
Node title (original): 01 - recommended for cleaning ID: 9007269415681547

Status: Released
{ Geenen, Hubert, 1/17/2020 12:59:20 PM: deleted "Use only mild household cleaning agents,
diluted in water. " for MR00224934 (detergents}
Recommended for cleaning

Use a soft damp cloth. Do not apply large amounts of water.
End fragment title: 01 - recommended for cleaning
Node title (original): 02 - recommended for disinfection ID: 70160942091

Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Recommended for disinfection
{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/31/2017 1:07:14 PM: changed order: caution first, removed
"Healthcare" twice from caution, removed generic sentence about "following disinfectants",
added "tested and recommended" to table}
Only the described disinfectants are tested and recommended by Philips.{ Heuvel, Martina van
den, 11/14/2017 5:19:05 PM: changed caution "Only the described infectants ..." to plain text,
moved text about "liable" to intro}
Tested and recommended disinfectant Disinfection level
Isopropanol 70% Intermediate
Ethanol 70% Intermediate
Chlorhexidine 0.5% in 70% ethanol Intermediate
1:200 Bleach solution (250 ppm chlorine) Low

(5 ml household bleach in 1 L water)
End fragment title: 02 - recommended for disinfection
End fragment title: 67548 SYS.Label.IFU.Cleaning.PhilipsApprovedAgents_v1
Guidelines for the use of cleaning agents and disinfectants

{ Heuvel, Martina van den, 11/14/2017 5:30:05 PM: moved from IFU fragment to "normal
text": HG - Observe safety instructions of cleaning agents, HG - Observe solution expiration
date, moved to NEWly combined caution: HG - Do not use flammable sprays_1, HG - Do not mix
different disinfecting solutions}
Philips
• Always adhere to the safety instructions of the cleaning agents.

• If a premixed solution is used, be sure to observe the solution expiration date.{ Heuvel,
Martina van den, 8/31/2017 1:07:14 PM: remove this statement? or extend with other
factors affecting the efficiency of disinfectant?}
Node title (original): 68820 SYS.Label.IFU.Cleaning.Restrictions ID: 9007267930758795
Affix: NEW 12/2017 updated Cleaning chapter) Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24644
NOTICE
Inappropriate cleaning agents or disinfectants may cause discoloration, damage or structural
weakening of the equipment.
• Check the constituents and concentration of cleaning agents and disinfectants before use.
• Never use aggressive detergents, organic solvents or abrasive cleaning agents.
• Never use iodine or colored disinfectants.
• Never use a bleach solution of more than 250 ppm.
• Never use bleach wipes. { Heuvel, Martina van den, 11/24/2017 11:25:30 AM: because
they have a far too high chlorine concentration of 5500 ppm}
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
• If you are not sure about the properties of a disinfectant agent, do not use it.
End fragment title: 68820 SYS.Label.IFU.Cleaning.Restrictions
• Never mix different cleaning and disinfecting solutions because hazardous gases may
develop.
Node title (original): 67549 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.Ignition ID: 9007269549528843
Desinfecting Spray Status: Released
WARNING
Ignition of disinfecting spray.
Risk of serious injury or death.
• Do not use flammable or potentially explosive disinfecting sprays.
End fragment title: 67549 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.Ignition Desinfecting Spray
Node title (original): factors affecting efficiency of disinfectant ID: 9007267931910155

solution Status: Released
Factors affecting the efficacy of a disinfectant solution

• Duration of exposure
• Age of the solution
Philips

• Concentration of the disinfectant

• Way of storage
• Resistance of the contaminant
• Organic matter on the item to be disinfected
End fragment title: factors affecting efficiency of disinfectant solution
11.3.2 General cleaning instructions

Status: Released
• Use soft cloths, disposable tissues and wipes.

• Only use commercially available MR Safe and MR Conditional equipment and tools.
Strictly follow the manufacturer's instructions.
• Never use cleaning equipment that contains ferromagnetic material.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Node title (original): 01-preventing residue ID: 9007267932745867
Status: Released
Preventing residue on MRI system

Use sheets or MR compatible examination table paper to cover the tabletop before positioning
a patient. Be aware that the use of sheets and paper without actual cleaning and disinfection
does not prevent the spread of infectious agents.
End fragment title: 01-preventing residue
Node title (original): 02 - protecting yourself and others ID: 9007267932747403

Status: Released
Protecting yourself and others

As an operator, wash and disinfect your hands (hand sanitizer) after each patient.
Node title (original): 68818 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PH.14, ID: 9007267926460555
HAZ-PS.22, HAZ-RF.29)_CleaningCrossinfection Status: Released
ISO/IEC: 24349 24295 24308

Philips

WARNING
Infectious residue
Risk of cross-infection
• Always clean and disinfect the bore, tabletop, mattresses, positioning aids, coils,
physiology sensors and cables after each examination of (injured or infectious) patients
where contamination may have occurred.
• Use proper personal protection and precautions when removing blood or residual
contrast medium.
End fragment title: 68818 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.(HAZ-PH.14, HAZ-PS.22, HAZ-RF.29)_CleaningCrossinfection

End fragment title: 02 - protecting yourself and others
Node title (original): 03 handling liquids ID: 18014467187489419

Status: Released
Handling liquids
203.1_v2 Status: Released
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
ISO/IEC: 71429
WARNING
Electrical conductive path due to excessive liquid
Risk of electric shock
• Never allow water or other liquids to enter the system, system components, coils, coil
contacts (of separable coils) and connectors.
• Verify that all parts of the system, coils and positioning aids are completely dry before
starting an examination.
If liquid has entered the system, contact your Philips service engineer.
End fragment title: 71429 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-PS.203.1_v2
See the table in section Components, procedures and frequency for cleaning frequencies.
End fragment title: 03 handling liquids
11.3.3 Components, procedures and frequency

Status: Released

SYS.Label.IFU.Cleaning.Frequency.UIM (non-VitalScreen) Status: Released
Philips

Node title (original): Intro all systems ID: 9007316256059403

Status: Released
The following table gives an overview of system components and cleaning and disinfection
procedures.
Three different procedures have been identified for cleaning and disinfection. These are:
1. Regular procedure: applicable for hard and soft closed-cell surfaces.
2. Other procedures: applicable for other surfaces and components.
3. Fabric and foam procedure: applicable for soft open-cell surfaces.
End fragment title: Intro all systems
Component of MR system Cleaning Disinfection Procedure Frequency
• Magnet covers / Gantry Yes Yes Regular Weekly *

• Ambient ring
• Patient support
• Trolley (FlexTrak)
• Magnet bore Yes Yes Regular After each patient **

• Tabletop
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• UIM panel Yes Yes Other Weekly *
Node title (original): All systems ID: 9007316255871243

Status: Released
Coils Cleaning Disinfection Procedure Frequency
• Rigid coils Yes Yes Regular After each patient **

• Soft and flexible coils
• Coil cables
• Coil connectors and sockets Yes No Other Weekly *
• Endo coil with disposable Yes Yes Other After each patient **
probe
Positioning Aids Cleaning Disinfection Procedure Frequency
• All positioning aids, except Yes Yes Regular After each patient **
for straps and foam wedges
• Straps Yes No Fabric and foam After each patient **

• Foam wedges
Philips

Physiology Equipment Cleaning Disinfection Procedure Frequency
• Leads and cables Yes Yes Regular After each patient **

• Respiratory belt
• Wireless-PPU and Wireless-
VCG battery module
• PPU and reusable clips Yes Yes Other After each patient **
Operator's console Cleaning Disinfection Procedure Frequency
• Monitor displays Yes No Other Weekly *

• Printer
• Keyboard Yes Yes Other Weekly *

• Operator-patient intercom
Examination room Cleaning Disinfection Procedure Frequency
Coil cabinet and coil caddy Yes Yes Regular Weekly *
Examination room floor Yes No Other Weekly *

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
* Or as required.
** Recommended.
End fragment title: All systems
End fragment title: 79504 SYS.Label.IFU.Cleaning.Frequency.UIM (non-VitalScreen)

SYS.Label.IFU.Cleaning.Frequency.UIMVitalScreen Status: Released
Node title (original): Intro ID: 18014507552876555

Status: Released
The following table gives an overview of system components and cleaning and disinfection
procedures.
Three different procedures have been identified for cleaning and disinfection. These are:
1. Regular procedure: applicable for hard and soft closed-cell surfaces.
2. Other procedures: applicable for other surfaces and components.
3. Fabric and foam procedure: applicable for soft open-cell surfaces.
End fragment title: Intro
Node title (original): Ambition/Elition/Ingenia EVO-LE ID: 18014507553120779

Status: Released
Philips

Component of MR system Cleaning Disinfection Procedure Frequency
• Magnet covers / Gantry Yes Yes Regular Weekly *

• Ambient ring
• Patient support
• Trolley (FlexTrak)
• Magnet bore Yes Yes Regular After each patient **

• Tabletop
• UIM panel Yes Yes Other Weekly *

• VitalScreen
End fragment title: Ambition/Elition/Ingenia EVO-LE
Node title (original): Cleaning frequency - All systems ID: 27021687583525387

Status: Released
Coils Cleaning Disinfection Procedure Frequency
• Rigid coils Yes Yes Regular After each patient **

• Soft and flexible coils
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Coil cables
• Coil connectors and sockets Yes No Other Weekly *
• Endo coil with disposable Yes Yes Other After each patient **
probe
Positioning Aids Cleaning Disinfection Procedure Frequency
• All positioning aids, except Yes Yes Regular After each patient **
for straps and foam wedges
• Straps Yes No Fabric and foam After each patient **

• Foam wedges
Physiology Equipment Cleaning Disinfection Procedure Frequency
• Leads and cables Yes Yes Regular After each patient **

• Respiratory belt
• Wireless-PPU and Wireless-
VCG battery module
• PPU and reusable clips Yes Yes Other After each patient **
Philips

Operator's console Cleaning Disinfection Procedure Frequency
• Monitor displays Yes No Other Weekly *

• Printer
• Keyboard Yes Yes Other Weekly *

• Operator-patient intercom
Examination room Cleaning Disinfection Procedure Frequency
Coil cabinet and coil caddy Yes Yes Regular Weekly *
Examination room floor Yes No Other Weekly *
* Or as required.
** Recommended.
End fragment title: Cleaning frequency - All systems
End fragment title: 85720 SYS.Label.IFU.Cleaning.Frequency.UIMVitalScreen
Full system cleaning

Clean all components of the MRI system before first use of the system and after maintenance.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
11.3.4 Cleaning and disinfecting: regular procedure

Status: Released
This cleaning procedure applies for:

Node title (original): Achieva Optimus Prodiva Multiva - without ID: 9007288763205899
mention of VitalScreen Status: Released
• All components of the MRI system *

• All coils, except for coil connectors and sockets, and the Endo coil with disposable probe
• All positioning aids, except for straps and foam wedges
• Leads, cables, respiratory belt of physiology equipment
• Coil cabinet and coil caddy
Status: Released
* Except VitalScreen.
End fragment title: Achieva Optimus Prodiva Multiva - without mention of VitalScreen
Node title (original): Ing/Amb/Elit - with mention of VitalScreen ID: 18014488018063627

Status: Released
• All components of the MRI system, except for the VitalScreen

• All coils, except for coil connectors and sockets, and the Endo coil with disposable probe
• All positioning aids, except for straps and foam wedges
Philips

• Leads, cables, respiratory belt of physiology equipment

• Coil cabinet and coil caddy
End fragment title: Ing/Amb/Elit - with mention of VitalScreen
Node title (original): 01 - hard inspection ID: 18014467187916683

Status: Released
Inspection
► Inspect coils and cables for damage such as cracks, splitting, sharp edges, or projections.
If damage is evident, discontinue use of the coils or cables and contact Philips Customer
Service.
► Inspect the surface of positioning aids like supports, wedges, mattresses and sandbags
regularly for breaches, tears or frays.
► In case of damaged material:
• Remove and replace breached, torn or frayed mattresses, supports, wedges, and
sandbags immediately.
The internal spongy structure cannot be cleaned and disinfected adequately.{ Heuvel,
Martina van den, 8/31/2017 2:35:10 PM: HG - Remove breached mattresses}
• Do not use patches to repair tears and holes.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Patches do not provide an impermeable surface. { Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/31/2017
2:35:10 PM: HG - Do not use patches}
► To easily detect biological material, inspect the surfaces using black light.
A black light provides ultraviolet light that is especially sensitive in detecting biological
material such as blood, prints and body fluid. This material lights up under black light
exposure.
If biological material remains after proper cleaning, it may indicate the surface is breached,
frayed or torn allowing fluids to enter the structure. { Heuvel, Martina van den, 8/31/2017
2:35:10 PM: HG - biological material remaining after cleaning}
End fragment title: 01 - hard inspection
Node title (original): 02 - hard cleaning ID: 18014467187918219

Status: Released
Cleaning: regular procedure

{ Geenen, Hubert, 1/17/2020 1:08:47 PM: Removed mild soap/detergent because of
MR00224934}
1. Take a soft damp cloth. Do not apply large amounts of water.
2. Only applicable for tabletop: Thoroughly remove any solid matter in the grooves of the
tabletop using a soft cloth or a tissue.
3. Use a swab or toothpick to remove dirt from hardware joints and parts difficult to reach.
4. Wipe hard surfaces with the soft cloth until all visible signs of surface contaminants are
removed.
5. Remove remaining particulate and cleaning residue with a cloth dampened with clean
water.
Philips

6. Towel dry with a soft cloth.

7. Dispose of any used cleaning materials in accordance with your facility's disposal protocols.
Node title (original): extra for Jaguar(Eagle) ID: 18014467163137163
Status: Released
When you need to completely clean or disinfect the tabletop, remove the fillers and the NVS
Spine and NVS Head Base coils. For information on how to disassemble the coils, see .
End fragment title: extra for Jaguar(Eagle)
End fragment title: 02 - hard cleaning
Node title (original): 03 - hard disinfecting ID: 18014467187919243

Status: Released
Disinfecting: regular procedure

1. Clean the surface according to the instructions above.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft cloth dampened in a recommended disinfectant.
3. When alcohols are used: air dry the surface.
4. When bleach solution is used:
• Allow at least 1 minute contact time for bleach solution.
• Always wipe surfaces with a cloth dampened with clean water to remove the bleach
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
solution.
• Air dry or dry with a clean cloth.
5. Dispose of any used disinfection materials in accordance with your facility's disposal
protocols.
End fragment title: 03 - hard disinfecting
11.3.5 Cleaning and disinfecting: other procedures

Status: Released
Keyboard and UIM

MR00224934}
1. Remove any solid matter around keys and buttons with a swab or toothpick.
2. Clean by wiping the keys with damp soft cloth or tissue and wipe dry.
3. Disinfect the surface by wiping the keys and the sides with a soft cloth or tissue dampened
in a recommended disinfectant.
4. When alcohols are used: air dry the surface.
5. When bleach solution is used: wipe the surface with a cloth dampened with clean water to
remove the bleach solution. Air dry or dry with a clean cloth.
Monitor displays
⊳ Before cleaning turn off the display and unplug the power if possible.
Philips

► Wipe with a soft cloth moistened with water. Alternatively use a window cleaner.
Printer
► Clean the printer according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Examination Room
► Clean the floor according to your facilities' cleaning protocol.
Node title (original): FlexConnect sockets and connectors ID: 27021668018924811
FlexConnect sockets and connectors

For proper functioning of dStream coils it is essential that the lenses of FlexConnect sockets and
coil connectors are clean.
Clean the lenses by using the special cleaning kit, which is provided with the system.
End fragment title: FlexConnect sockets and connectors
Node title (original): Digital connectors ID: 18014468764185355

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Digital connectors and coil connectors
For proper functioning of dS coils it is essential that the lenses of digital connectors and coil
connectors are clean.
Clean the lenses by using the special cleaning kit, which is provided with the system.
End fragment title: Digital connectors
11.3.5.1 Endo coil with disposable probe

Affix: Ingenia Achieva Optimus ID: 27021666415582987
Cleaning and disinfection

Node title (original): 68826 SYS.Label.IFU.Cleaning.HAZ-PegRF ID: 18014468838435083
4.2a_v1 Status: Released
Discard the probe in a hazard waste container. The probe (endo coil) is for single use only.
Clean and disinfect the interface device after each use with one of the following solutions:
• Distilled water.
• 10% bleach/90% distilled water solution
• Hydrogen peroxide
• Isopropyl alcohol
• Formula 409
Philips

• Lysol disinfectant
• Methylated spirits (90% ethanol, 9.5% methanol, 0.5% pyridine)
NOTICE
Inappropriate cleaning agents
Risk of material damage
• Never use solutions containing amines, strong alkalis, esters, iodine, aromatic or
chlorinated hydrocarbons, or ketones.
End fragment title: 68826 SYS.Label.IFU.Cleaning.HAZ-PegRF 4.2a_v1
Node title (original): HG - Do not sterilize the dS Endo coil ID: 18014468671953035
Status: Released
NOTICE
Do not sterilize any part of the coil.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Sterilizing may damage the equipment.
End fragment title: HG - Do not sterilize the dS Endo coil
11.3.5.2 PPU sensor and reusable clips

Status: Released
Node title (original): PPU cleaning and disinfection ID: 9007267906465803

Status: Released
Cleaning PPU sensor and reusable clips

To clean the sensor (cable) and the reusable clips complete the following steps:
► Disconnect the PPU sensor from the Wireless-PPU battery module.
► To remove dirt and dust, wipe the surface with a lint-free cloth, moistened with warm
water (40°C/104°F maximum) for 30 seconds to 1 minute to ensure proper cleaning.
To remove stains, scrub briskly with the moistened cloth.
► Inspect the PPU sensor and reusable clips for any cracks, holes, tears, cuts, etc. that could
affect operation and replace as necessary.
Disinfecting PPU sensor and reusable clips

1. Clean the surface according to the instructions above.
2. Only use the recommended liquid surface disinfectants:
Philips

– CaviWipes.
– Alcohol (70%).
– Antibacterial soap (10% Triclosan).
End fragment title: PPU cleaning and disinfection
Node title (original): HG - Do not autoclave (sterilize) parts ID: 9007269372524811

Status: Released
NOTICE
Do not sterilize any part of the PPU sensors and reusable clips.
Sterilizing may damage the equipment.
End fragment title: HG - Do not autoclave (sterilize) parts
11.3.6 Cleaning: fabric and foam procedure

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Status: Released

MR00224934}
Foam wedges and straps have an open structure surface and can not be disinfected.
1. Wash the straps.
Straps are also machine washable at 40°C.
1. Rinse with clean water.
2. Air dry the straps until they are completely dry.
Philips

Final disposal Product Disposal
12 Product Disposal
Status: NotReleased
12.1 Final disposal

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 84586 SYS.Label.IFU.Disposal_v1 ID: 27021660344584075

Status: NotReleased
Final disposal: the system is disposed of in such a way that it can no longer be used for its
intended purpose.
The User is responsible for proper disposal of the system.
Philips MRI systems are designed and manufactured to comply with relevant guidelines for
environmental protection. As long as the system is properly operated and maintained, it
presents no environmental risks. However, the system contains materials that could be harmful
to the environment if disposed of incorrectly.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Do not dispose of the MRI system, or any parts of the system, with industrial or domestic
waste. During disposal, special attention must be paid to:
• Cooling fluids
• Phantom fluids
• Batteries
• Helium
NOTICE
Lithium battery cells of type CR2032 used in the host computer contain perchlorate material,
special handling may apply.
See https://www.dtsc.ca.gov/perchlorate.
The system software stores sensitive personal information. Disposal of the MRI system is
therefore also subject to privacy related (local) legislation.
For advice and information regarding proper disposal of your MRI system, contact your Philips
Healthcare representative or go to https://www.philips.com/a-w/about/sustainability/
sustainable-planet/circular-economy/product-recycling-services.html.
Philips can assist in:
• Recovery of reusable parts.
Philips

Product Disposal Passing the product on to another user
• Recycling of useful materials by competent disposal companies.

• Effective and safe disposal of the MRI system.
End fragment title: 84586 SYS.Label.IFU.Disposal_v1
Node title (original): 84868 SYS.Label.IFU.WEEE_Turkey ID: 130037328523

Status: NotReleased
{ Geenen, Hubert, 9/23/2021 1:02:54 PM: For Translation in to Turkish, please use this part
"WEEE yönetmeliğine uygundur " as it is an official Text (and "The system" to it in Turkish)}
NOTICE
The system complies with the WEEE Regulations
End fragment title: 84868 SYS.Label.IFU.WEEE_Turkey
Node title (original): 65856 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-MA. ID: 18014483485317515

Affix: Ambition
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Magnet cryostat
WARNING
The magnet cryostat is a pressure vessel that can contain pressurized gasses when warmed
up.
Improper treatment may cause injury during disposal.
End fragment title: 65856 SYS.Label.IFU.Warning.HAZ-MA.63.1
12.2 Passing the product on to another user

Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 66497 SYS.Label.IFU.SecondLife ID: 9007261909833611

Status: Released
If this product passes to another user, it must be in its complete state, including all product
support documentation.
Make the new user aware of the support services that Philips provides for installing,
commissioning and maintaining the product.
Before passing on the product or taking it out of service, all patient data must be (backed up
elsewhere if necessary, and) unrecoverable on the product.
Philips

China RoHS declaration table Product Disposal
It must be remembered by all existing users that passing on medical electrical products to new
users may create serious technical, medical and legal risks (including, but not limited to
privacy). Such risks can arise even if the product is given away. Existing users are strongly
advised to seek advice from their local Philips representative before committing themselves to
passing on any product. Alternatively, contact the manufacturer.
Once the product has been passed on to a new user, a previous user may still receive important
safety-related information, such as bulletins and field change orders. In many jurisdictions,
there is a clear duty on the previous user to communicate such safety-related information to
new users. Previous users who are not able or prepared to do this should inform Philips about
the new user, so that Philips can provide the new user with safety-related information.
End fragment title: 66497 SYS.Label.IFU.SecondLife
12.3 China RoHS declaration table

Last Content Modificator: Harish, Darshan ID: 63050401214254603
Status: NotReleased
Node title (original): 84867 China RoHS table ID: 9007315671682315

Status: NotReleased
Name and content of hazardous substances in products

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12
Hazardous substances or elements
Name of the parts Pb Hg Cd Cr(VI) PBB PBDE
MR Systems X O X O O O
This table was developed according to the provisions of SJ/T 11364.

O: The content of such hazardous substance in all homogeneous materials of such component
is below the limit required by GB/T 26572.
X: The content of such hazardous substance in at least one homogeneous material of such
component is beyond the limit required by GB/T 26572.
End fragment title: 84867 China RoHS table
12.4 Toxic or hazardous substances and elements

Status: NotReleased
REACH Declaration
REACH requires Philips Healthcare (PH) to provide chemical content information for Substances
of Very High Concern (SVHC) if they are present above 0.1% of the article weight.
Components within electric and electronic equipment may contain phthalates above the
threshold Bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate (DEHP), CAS nr.: 117-81-7 .
Philips

Product Disposal Toxic or hazardous substances and elements
The SVHC list is updated on a regular basis. Therefore, refer to the following Philips REACH
website for the most up-to-date list of products containing SVHC above the threshold: http://
www.philips.com/about/sustainability/REACh.page.
3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Philips

www.philips.com/healthcare
Philips Medical Systems Nederland B.V.

Veenpluis 6
5684 PC Best
The Netherlands
0344
© 2021 Koninklijke Philips N.V.

All rights are reserved. Reproduction or transmission in whole or in part, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical or otherwise, is
prohibited without the prior written consent of the copyright owner.
Printed in The Netherlands

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12 - en-US
13 Maintenance table
Status: Released
UXW Further information
24259 on page 1280
24261 on page 145
24263 on page 131
24264 on page 131
24265 on page 392
24266 on page 390
24268 on page 98
24269 on page 132
24270 on page 1235
24271 on page 94
24272 on page 128
24278 on page 837
on page 847
24279 on page 837
on page 848
24280 on page 133
24287 on page 622
on page 717
24289 on page 259
on page 336
24290 on page 520
on page 686
24291 on page 114
on page 380
24292 on page 820
24294 on page 825
24296 on page 825
24297 on page 408
on page 415
24298 on page 128
24301 on page 124
Copies are uncontrolled

24303 on page 115
24306 on page 114
24309 on page 126
on page 562
24310 on page 127
on page 563
24311 on page 127
on page 562
24316 on page 586
24317 on page 124
on page 587
24319 on page 114
on page 586
24320 on page 118
24329 on page 127
on page 563
on page 566
24330 on page 111
24331 on page 115
on page 586
24332 on page 581
24333 on page 584
24334 on page 583
24335 on page 587
24336 on page 113
24337 on page 103
24339 on page 88
24340 on page 137
24341 on page 129
24342 on page 131
24343 on page 86
24344 on page 85
24351 on page 105
24352 on page 260
on page 336

24353 on page 258
on page 335
24355 on page 623
on page 626
on page 717
on page 721
24362 on page 105
24363 on page 103
24364 on page 259
on page 336
24365 on page 703
24366 on page 1280
24367 on page 997
24371 on page 83
24375 on page 843
24376 on page 99
24378 on page 117
24379 on page 118
24415 on page 117
24436 on page 100
24437 on page 129
24438 on page 129
24439 on page 1367
24442 on page 134
24443 on page 134
24444 on page 135
24445 on page 136
24446 on page 132
24450 on page 105
24451 on page 106
24453 on page 104
24454 on page 87
24455 on page 77
24456 on page 79
24463 on page 140

24464 on page 139
24465 on page 138
24476 on page 83
24480 on page 105
24481 on page 92
24482 on page 93
24486 on page 98
24487 on page 98
24488 on page 97
24489 on page 98
24490 on page 99
24491 on page 99
24492 on page 140
24493 on page 1468
24494 on page 1469
24495 on page 1470
24496 on page 141
24499 on page 140
24500 on page 88
24502 on page 28
24503 on page 77
24505 on page 89
24510 on page 101
24511 on page 101
24512 on page 101
24513 on page 101
24514 on page 95
24515 on page 102
24516 on page 102
24517 on page 78
24518 on page 100
24525 on page 105
24527 on page 90
24528 on page 87
24530 on page 147

24531 on page 1471
24532 on page 1467
24533 on page 1467
24537 on page 86
24538 on page 107
24545 on page 81
24546 on page 78
24547 on page 87
24548 on page 89
24551 on page 88
24555 on page 89
24560 on page 77
24561 on page 77
24562 on page 137
24566 on page 1468
24627 on page 17
24638 on page 19
24640 on page 35
24641 on page 259
on page 335
24649 on page 1427
24650 on page 33
24651 on page 24
on page 24
24655 on page 32
24658 on page 509
on page 515
24660 on page 124
24661 on page 125
24662 on page 132
24663 on page 30
24665 on page 21
24667 on page 1423
24669 on page 145
24670 on page 416

24671 on page 134
24672 on page 19
24674 on page 1203
24675 on page 30
24677 on page 146
24678 on page 1423
24711 on page 34
on page 34
25470 on page 33
27467 on page 157
36052 on page 157
43933 on page 810
54053 on page 30
54054 on page 31
55516 on page 1414
on page 1417
56301 on page 79
57870 on page 45
57871 on page 66
57872 on page 67
57873 on page 67
57874 on page 68
57875 on page 68
57876 on page 69
57877 on page 72
57899 on page 40
57900 on page 40
57901 on page 41
57902 on page 41
57978 on page 39
57985 on page 43
58117 on page 45
58118 on page 42
on page 47
on page 47

58119 on page 47
58120 on page 48
58121 on page 49
58122 on page 48
58125 on page 50
58130 on page 50
58132 on page 51
58143 on page 53
58428 on page 54
58448 on page 55
on page 56
on page 57
on page 58
58451 on page 59
58453 on page 60
58457 on page 54
58458 on page 62
on page 138
58459 on page 62
58509 on page 63
on page 63
on page 63
on page 63
on page 63
58512 on page 65
58531 on page 66
58534 on page 67
58536 on page 64
58632 on page 621
on page 716
59625 on page 69
59945 on page 40
60151 on page 622
on page 719
60152 on page 398

60153 on page 699
60349 on page 53
62879 on page 399
on page 512
64890 on page 27
64891 on page 27
64892 on page 27
64893 on page 27
65196 on page 513
on page 582
65490 on page 43
65856 on page 1508
66484 on page 15
66485 on page 22
66486 on page 30
66487 on page 18
66488 on page 18
66489 on page 28
66490 on page 256
66492 on page 257
66495 on page 1467
66497 on page 1508
66499 on page 1507
66500 on page 65
66628 on page 19
67333 on page 621
on page 716
67343 on page 81
67546 on page 108
67548 on page 1494
67549 on page 1495
67550 on page 146
67769 on page 512
67773 on page 396
on page 511

67774 on page 398
67856 on page 157
on page 1004
67889 on page 1425
on page 1428
68815 on page 1492
68816 on page 1492
68818 on page 1496
68820 on page 1495
68826 on page 1504
68830 on page 82
68831 on page 80
68832 on page 126
68837 on page 398
68889 on page 93
68890 on page 1430
68894 on page 123
68896 on page 123
69014 on page 257
69270 on page 86
69440 on page 94
69441 on page 42
69442 on page 199
69523 on page 32
71421 on page 25
on page 26
71426 on page 310
on page 312
71427 on page 655
71429 on page 1497
71801 on page 97
73254 on page 83
73750 on page 17
on page 28
75137 on page 1443

75139 on page 1442
75140 on page 1443
75141 on page 1441
75276 on page 96
75574 on page 1442
75625 on page 31
75662 on page 23
75663 on page 23
76971 on page 201
on page 201
on page 202
on page 202
on page 202
76973 on page 192
76974|99999 on page 39
77092 on page 23
77551 on page 29
77554 on page 24
77560 on page 1444
on page 1459
78951 on page 70
79504 on page 1497
on page 1499
81307 on page 399
81688 on page 102
81738 on page 15
82293 on page 26
on page 130
on page 1367
82418 on page 73
82423 on page 720
82604 on page 116
on page 158
82662 on page 682
82800 on page 20

83059 on page 52
84799 on page 1196
84868 on page 1508
85720 on page 1499
HAZ-IC.5.2 uMDU on page 1418
HAZ-PS.51 on page 586
HG on page 104
on page 104
on page 104
on page 106
on page 106
on page 109
on page 113
on page 115
on page 119
on page 119
on page 119
on page 130
on page 138
on page 139
on page 141
on page 146
on page 147
on page 210
on page 212
on page 212
on page 213
on page 213
on page 213
on page 214
on page 214
on page 260
on page 261
on page 337
on page 337

on page 390
on page 399
on page 400
on page 400
on page 400
on page 528
on page 542
on page 622
on page 624
on page 626
on page 636
on page 645
on page 649
on page 654
on page 657
on page 659
on page 662
on page 701
on page 708
on page 717
on page 719
on page 722
on page 768
on page 770
on page 774
on page 777
on page 820
on page 821
on page 824
on page 1280
on page 1413
on page 1421
on page 1422
on page 1423
on page 1424

on page 1424
on page 1424
on page 1469
on page 1469
on page 1470
HG Obsolete on page 1422
on page 1423
PopUp 25485 on page 159
PopUp46387 on page 164


IFU R11-All

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

IFU R11-All

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IFU R11-All

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

All

Network firewall configuration......................................................................................................... 38

Mobile telephones & similar products............................................................................................ 138

3 Your MRI System.................................................................................................................................. 203

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Patient Directory............................................................................................................................. 431

4 Preparing the Examination.................................................................................................................... 509

SENSE NeuroVascular coil 8 and 16................................................................................................. 540

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

Positioning with the dS Endo coil solution...................................................................................... 715

Checking Connectivity and Battery Level........................................................................................ 827

5 Performing the Examination................................................................................................................. 859

Starting and Running the Examination............................................................................................ 859

Discontinuing an Examination......................................................................................................... 860

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

6 Planning the Examination..................................................................................................................... 897

Copying Geometry Parameters from an Image to the Stack........................................................... 915

7 Reviewing Images................................................................................................................................. 925

Left Mouse Behavior: Scroll, Zoom, Pan, Window, ......................................................................... 928

Image Sorting in the Tile Layout...................................................................................................... 978

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

8 Finalizing the Examination.................................................................................................................. 1013

Opening an Imaging Series in the Print Tab................................................................................... 1163

Print Preview................................................................................................................................. 1163

9 Advanced Operation........................................................................................................................... 1211

Perfusion Imaging....................................................................................................................................... 1236

Black Blood Imaging....................................................................................................................... 1338

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

11 Maintenance and Quality assurance................................................................................................... 1467

Cleaning and disinfecting: other procedures................................................................................. 1503

12 Product Disposal................................................................................................................................. 1507

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

1.1 Publication Details

Node title (original): 66484 SYS.Label.IFU.Publication ID: 18014461089838091

Published by Philips Medical Systems Nederland B.V.

End fragment title: 66484 SYS.Label.IFU.Publication

1.2 About these Instructions for Use

Node title (original): 81738 SYS.Label.IFU.Tradenames ID: 27021714763751563

This document is applicable to the following systems:

Node title (original): _Elition - non china ID: 130464537483

Node title (original): MR5300 ID: 9007323671032331

Node title (original): MR7700 ID: 9007323671033867

Node title (original): Ambition Elition - non china ID: 130464539019

• Ingenia Ambition S / Ingenia Ambition X

Node title (original): Ambition - china ID: 9007323671036939

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

• Ingenia Elition S and X

Node title (original): Ingenia/s/evolution ID: 9007323671040011

Node title (original): Ingenia CX ID: 9007323671041547

• Achieva 3.0T with upgrade package SmartPath to Achieva dStream

Node title (original): Achieva ID: 9007323671055883

Node title (original): Ing, LE, EVO, CX,Ambit/Elit ID: 18014512002201867

Node title (original): 24627 ID: 36028803858990347

Node title (original): 73750 ID: 36028868855785611-1

Node title (original): 66487 ID: 9007261865507595

3000 077 77311/782 * 2021-12

End fragment title: 66487 SYS.Label.IFU.WarningCautionNotice